2. Sāmaññaphalasutta解释
530 段
戒蕴品新复注显示巴利原文
Sīlakkhandhavaggaabhinavaṭīkā
2. 沙门果经义注显示巴利原文
2. Sāmaññaphalasuttavaṇṇanā
王臣论义注显示巴利原文
Rājāmaccakathāvaṇṇanā
150 现在,为显示《沙门果经》的注释次第已经到达,故说“如是……乃至……经”等。其中,“逐句注释”即依次第而作的句释,也就是对每一句、每一词顺次作释。因为如前所说,即使是浅显的词,即使不加注释,也称作“逐句注释”。如此说来,也有读作“未注释句之注释”的,意思是先前未加注释之句的注释。由于此城依难解处、特殊处所、殊胜成就等因缘,主要以王、由诸王执取为义,故得此名,并非仅凭名称而已,因此说“因为那……”等。难道《大品·大典尊经》中所说的那位只是国师,并非国王吗?为何他以可称为王的方式被执取呢?实际上,虽然城由大典尊国师所执取,但此城也由名为离努的摩揭陀王所执取,依事理上的可能性而这样说,并非他因可以被称为王而被执取,因为他并不是国王。这说明,所谓由大典尊执取,其实是显示当时由离努王执取的情形。因为他是处理国王一切事务的国师,而世间也有这样的惯用语:“由为国王之事而忙碌者所作,即是由国王所作。”这是说:由于曼陀多王令大典尊菩萨为国师后,由离努王及其他诸王执取为都城,故称王舍城。有些人则说“大典尊”是一位有大威力的古代国王。由执取故:即作为都城而被执取。因为“被执取者”就是家,是诸王的家,或者……显示巴利原文
150. Idāni sāmaññaphalasuttassa saṃvaṇṇanākkamo anuppattoti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ…pe… sutta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha anupubbapadavaṇṇanāti anukkamena padavaṇṇanā, padaṃ padaṃ pati anukkamena vaṇṇanāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pubbe vuttañhi, uttānaṃ vā padamaññatra vaṇṇanāpi ‘‘anupubbapadavaṇṇanā’’ tveva vuccati. Evañca katvā ‘‘apubbapadavaṇṇanā’’tipi paṭhanti, pubbe avaṇṇitapadavaṇṇanāti attho. Duggajanapadaṭṭhānavisesasampadādiyogato padhānabhāvena rājūhi gahitaṭṭhena evaṃnāmakaṃ, na pana nāmamattenāti āha ‘‘tañhī’’tiādi. Nanu mahāvagge mahāgovindasutte āgato esa purohito eva, na rājā, kasmā so rājasaddavacanīyabhāvena gahitoti? Mahāgovindena purohitena pariggahitampi cetaṃ reṇunā nāma magadharājena pariggahitamevāti atthasambhavato evaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana so rājasaddavacanīyabhāvena gahito tassa rājābhāvato. Mahāgovindapariggahitabhāvakittanañhi tadā reṇuraññā pariggahitabhāvūpalakkhaṇaṃ. So hi tassa sabbakiccakārako purohito, idampi ca loke samudāciṇṇaṃ ‘‘rājakammapasutena katampi raññā kata’’nti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – mandhāturaññā ceva mahāgovindaṃ bodhisattaṃ purohitamāṇāpetvā reṇuraññā ca aññehi ca rājūhi pariggahitattā rājagahanti. Keci pana ‘‘mahāgovindo’’ti mahānubhāvo eko purātano rājāti vadanti. Pariggahitattāti rājadhānībhāvena pariggahitattā. Gayhatīti hi gahaṃ, rājūnaṃ, rājūhi vā gahanti rājagahaṃ. Nagarasaddāpekkhāya napuṃsakaniddeso.
这里还有其他方式:由建城之王所建造的一切房屋故,为王舍城;由鹫峰等五山所围绕故,如同被山王围绕的家,故为王舍城;因宫殿庄严而闪耀如王之家,故为王舍城;因善设守护,对欲加害而来的敌王们成为执取、捕捉之处,故为王舍城;由诸王见后善为建立,成为他们的家、住处,故为王舍城;因园林、怡人美景等而闪耀,因居住安乐等而由众生以我所执取、执受,故为王舍城——有如这些方式。其义即如前所说,仅是名称而已。然而,该地作为特殊之处,为高贵众生所受用,所以说“而那个……”等。其中,“于佛时、于转轮王时”是就多数而言,因为其他时候也偶尔存在;“成为城市”也仅是表征,因为并非总是有人居住。正如所说“其余时候为空旷”等。他们:指诸夜叉。游乐林:成为饮酒场所的游园。显示巴利原文
Aññepettha pakāreti nagaramāpanena raññā kāritasabbagehattā rājagahaṃ, gijjhakūṭādīhi pañcahi pabbatehi parikkhittattā pabbatarājehi parikkhittagehasadisantipi rājagahaṃ, sampannabhavanatāya rājamānaṃ gehantipi rājagahaṃ, susaṃvihitārakkhatāya anatthāvahitukāmena upagatānaṃ paṭirājūnaṃ gahaṃ gahaṇabhūtantipi rājagahaṃ, rājūhi disvā sammā patiṭṭhāpitattā tesaṃ gahaṃ gehabhūtantipi rājagahaṃ, ārāmarāmaṇeyyatādīhi rājati, nivāsasukhatādinā ca sattehi mamattavasena gayhati pariggayhatītipi rājagahanti edise pakāre. Nāmamattameva pubbe vuttanayenāti attho. So pana padeso visesaṭṭhānabhāvena uḷārasattaparibhogoti āha ‘‘taṃ paneta’’ntiādi. Tattha ‘‘buddhakāle, cakkavattikāle cā’’ti idaṃ yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ aññadāpi kadāci sambhavato, ‘‘nagaraṃ hotī’’ti ca idaṃ upalakkhaṇameva manussāvāsasseva asambhavato. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘sesakāle suññaṃ hotī’’tiādi. Tesanti yakkhānaṃ. Vasanavananti āpānabhūmibhūtaṃ upavanaṃ.
“无差别地”:即依住处的共通性,不依由其他词之关联而成立的差别确定。这是说:如“以巴帝摩卡防护而住”、“成就初禅而住”、“以慈俱行之心遍满一方而住”、“不作意一切相,成就无相心定而住”等,依由其他词之关联而成立的差别确定,依次表明威仪住等差别住之具足;但此处并非如此,此处是不依那样的差别确定,而表明某一种住之具足。显示巴利原文
Avisesenāti vihārabhāvasāmaññena, saddantarasannidhānasiddhaṃ visesaparāmasanamantarenāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharati, (a. ni. 5.101; pāci. 147; pari. 441) paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, (dha. sa. 160) mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharati, (dī. ni. 3.71, 308; ma. ni. 1.77, 459, 509; 2.309, 315; 3.230; vibha. 642) sabbanimittānaṃ amanasikārā animittaṃ cetosamādhiṃ upasampajja viharatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.459) saddantarasannidhānasiddhena visesaparāmasanena yathākkamaṃ iriyāpathavihārādivisesavihārasamaṅgīparidīpanaṃ , na evamidaṃ, idaṃ pana tathā visesaparāmasanamantarena aññataravihārasamaṅgīparidīpananti.
虽然依所说方式,此处是说明具备某一种住处,但这里正是说明具备称为威仪路的差别住处,故说“但在这里……”等。然而,为何即使没有由其他词之关联而成立的差别确定,这里也能说明具备差别住处呢?正因为没有其他表示差别的词来说明具备差别住处,因为若无差别语,欲表达差别者便须运用差别。再者,由于结合威仪来表示的意义在事理上成立,因此唯有那样的说明才可能。为何此义成立?因为天住等也是共通的。事实上,任何时候都不可能没有威仪住,若无此便不能维持身体。显示巴利原文
Satipi ca vuttanayena aññataravihārasamaṅgīparidīpane idha iriyāpathasaṅkhātavisesavihārasamaṅgīparidīpanameva sambhavatīti dasseti ‘‘idha panā’’tiādinā. Kasmā pana saddantarasannidhānasiddhassa visesaparāmasanassābhāvepi idha visesavihārasamaṅgīparidīpanaṃ sambhavatīti? Visesavihārasamaṅgīparidīpanassa saddantarasaṅkhātavisesavacanassa abhāvato eva. Visesavacane hi asati visesamicchatā viseso payojitabboti. Apica iriyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanassa atthato siddhattā tathādīpanameva sambhavatīti. Kasmā cāyamattho siddhoti? Dibbavihārādīnampi sādhāraṇato. Kadācipi hi iriyāpathavihārena vinā na bhavati tamantarena attabhāvapariharaṇābhāvatoti.
诸威仪的生起名为“威仪”,即身体的行为;因为它是该行为生起的途径,故称“威仪路”,即站立、坐下等。因为若无站立、坐下等状态,任何身体的行为都无法生起,所以它被称为该行为生起的方法。“住”:依此而活动、生存,或仅仅是活动、生存本身,称为“住处”;此住处即是如此,然而就意义而言,它只是以站立、坐下等方式生起的四种相续色法的相续流。在天界存在的即是“天”,因在那里频繁生起,故指存在于梵众天等天界;或者,在那里具有天界威力,或为成就彼而运作,故为“天”;又或因神通、志向等而有广大趣向,故为“天”。此住处即是天住处,或能带来天界状态的住处,称为“天住处”,即广大的禅那。在《导论》中,将四无色等至单独说为“不动住处”,但那是就如慈心禅等称为梵住一样,是针对它们修习的特殊状态而说。然而在注释书中,由于它们同样能带来天界状态,故也称为“天住处”。属于梵天的、或如梵天般以利益行持等方式生起的最胜住处,称为“梵住处”,即依慈心禅等生起的四梵住。圣者是最上的,又因不与其他共通的缘故,圣者的住处称为“圣住处”,即四显示巴利原文
Iriyanaṃ pavattanaṃ iriyā, kāyikakiriyā, tassā pavattanupāyabhāvato pathoti iriyāpatho, ṭhānanisajjādayo. Na hi ṭhānanisajjādiavatthāhi vinā kañci kāyikaṃ kiriyaṃ pavattetuṃ sakkā, tasmā so tāya pavattanupāyoti vuccati. Viharati pavattati etena, viharaṇamattaṃ vā tanti vihāro, so eva vihāro tathā, atthato panesa ṭhānanisajjādiākārappavatto catusantatirūpappabandhova. Divi bhavo dibbo, tattha bahulaṃ pavattiyā brahmapārisajjādidevaloke bhavoti attho, yo vā tattha dibbānubhāvo, tadatthāya saṃvattatīti dibbo, abhiññābhinīhārādivasena vā mahāgatikattā dibbo, sova vihāro, dibbabhāvāvaho vā vihāro dibbavihāro, mahaggatajjhānāni. Nettiyaṃ [netti. 86 (atthato samānaṃ)] pana catasso āruppasamāpattiyo āneñjavihārāti visuṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ pana mettājjhānādīnaṃ brahmavihāratā viya tāsaṃ bhāvanāvisesabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana dibbabhāvāvahasāmaññato tāpi ‘‘dibbavihārā’’ tveva vuttā. Brahmānaṃ, brahmabhūtā vā hitūpasaṃhārādivasena pavattiyā seṭṭhabhūtā vihārāti brahmavihārā, mettājjhānādivasena pavattā catasso appamaññāyo. Ariyā uttamā, anaññasādhāraṇattā vā ariyānaṃ vihārāti ariyavihārā, catassopi phalasamāpattiyo. Idha pana rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānaṃ, tabbasena pavattā appamaññāyo , catutthajjhānikaaggaphalasamāpatti ca bhagavato dibbabrahmaariyavihārā.
“说明具备某一住处”:由于它们并非同时生起,故说明具备一种或两种;这种表述是省略了状态词,或以状态为主的表述。世尊确实在贪嗔痴炽盛的世间,依自己的行持,为了调伏应度者,而具足安住于种种住处。例如,当众生在欲乐上邪行时,据说世尊便安住于天住处,为了让他们生起无贪善根,心想:“或许他们见到此行持后,能对此生起欢喜,从而离欲。”当众生为了主宰而行邪行时,世尊便安住于梵住处,为了让他们生起无嗔善根,心想:“或许他们见到此行持后,能对此生起欢喜,以无嗔止息嗔恚。”当出家众因法事而争论时,世尊便安住于圣住处,为了让他们生起无痴善根,心想:“或许他们见到此行持后,能对此生起欢喜,以无痴止息愚痴。”如此,世尊以这些天、梵、圣住处,带给众生种种利益安乐;又以威仪住处,以一种威仪断除对另一种威仪的障碍,使身体不致衰损而得以延续,故说“说明具备某一住处”。显示巴利原文
Aññataravihārasamaṅgīparidīpananti tāsamekato appavattattā ekena vā dvīhi vā samaṅgībhāvaparidīpanaṃ, bhāvalopenāyaṃ bhāvappadhānena vā niddeso. Bhagavā hi lobhadosamohussanne loke sakapaṭipattiyā veneyyānaṃ vinayanatthaṃ taṃ taṃ vihāre upasampajja viharati. Tathā hi yadā sattā kāmesu vippaṭipajjanti, tadā kira bhagavā dibbena vihārena viharati tesaṃ alobhakusalamūluppādanatthaṃ ‘‘appeva nāma imaṃ paṭipattiṃ disvā ettha rucimuppādetvā kāmesu virajjeyyu’’nti. Yadā pana issariyatthaṃ sattesu vippaṭipajjanti, tadā brahmavihārena viharati tesaṃ adosakusalamūluppādanatthaṃ ‘‘appeva nāma imaṃ paṭipattiṃ disvā ettha rucimuppādetvā adosena dosaṃ vūpasameyyu’’nti. Yadā pana pabbajitā dhammādhikaraṇaṃ vivadanti, tadā ariyavihārena viharati tesaṃ amohakusalamūluppādanatthaṃ ‘‘appeva nāma imaṃ paṭipattiṃ disvā ettha rucimuppādetvā amohena mohaṃ vūpasameyyu’’nti. Evañca katvā imehi dibbabrahmaariyavihārehi sattānaṃ vividhaṃ hitasukhaṃ harati, iriyāpathavihārena ca ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā aparipatantaṃ attabhāvaṃ haratīti vuttaṃ ‘‘aññataravihārasamaṅgīparidīpana’’nti.
“以此”等语,是显示如前所述解释的功德,意为“因此”,或是对所述意义的成立。“以此威仪住处而住”,这是关联。在“住”一词中,前缀“vi”表示截断义,并显示“持”是使其生起的意思,正如“即使站立”等所说,是以截断的方式进行说明。因此,便针对内在的诘问:“在此,谁以什么截断?如何持?”而说。“他确实”等,此关联也是合理的。虽然世尊能以单一威仪长久持续,但为了显示所执受的身体有其如此的自性,故说“一种威仪的障碍”等。“不衰损”是中性名词,表修习义,意为“使其不坠落”。然而,世尊无论住在何处,都为所应度者说法,并以种种等至度时,带给众生与自身种种安乐,因此“持种种”即是“住”,在此应如此理解其义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tenā’’tiādi yathāvuttasaṃvaṇṇanāya guṇadassanaṃ, tasmāti attho, yathāvuttatthasamatthanaṃ vā. Tena iriyāpathavihārena viharatīti sambandho. Tathā vadamāno pana viharatīti ettha vi-saddo vicchedanatthajotako, ‘‘haratī’’ti etassa ca neti pavattetīti atthoti ñāpeti ‘‘ṭhitopī’’tiādinā vicchedanayanākārena vuttattā. Evañhi sati tattha kassa kena vicchindanaṃ, kathaṃ kassa nayananti antolīnacodanaṃ sandhāyāha. ‘‘So hī’’tiādīti ayampi sambandho upapanno hoti. Yadipi bhagavā ekeneva iriyāpathena cirataraṃ kālaṃ pavattetuṃ sakkoti, tathāpi upādinnakassa nāma sarīrassa ayaṃ sabhāvoti dassetuṃ ‘‘ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhana’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Aparipatantanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, apatamānaṃ katvāti attho. Yasmā pana bhagavā yattha katthaci vasanto veneyyānaṃ dhammaṃ desento, nānāsamāpattīhi ca kālaṃ vītināmento vasati, sattānaṃ, attano ca vividhaṃ sukhaṃ harati, tasmā vividhaṃ haratīti viharatīti evampettha attho veditabbo.
为了指明行境村落,所以说“在王舍城”;为了指明适合佛陀居住之处,所以又说“在庵婆林”。为说明此意,而说“这是他的”等。“他的”指世尊。“它的”指名为王舍城的行境村落。由于依其邻近而使用“在王舍城”这一处格词,故也应以邻近来说明它,因此说“在王舍城附近的庵婆林”。“附近”即庵婆林的附近。“此”指“在王舍城”一词。“处格词”即依处之词。所谓“地”,即事物所依之处,为依处;该词本身,或在此依处使用的词和语尾变化,即为处格词;与之相连,即与第七格语尾相连的词,这是它的意思。这是说:虽然世尊确实住在庵婆林,但为了指示其附近的行境村落,依处格词也说“在王舍城”,如同“在恒河,牛行走;在井中,有嘎嘎族”一般。由此,若世尊住在王舍城,则不应说“在庵婆林”;若在庵婆林,则不应说“在王舍城”。因为不像“在华氏城的宫殿中居住”那样,此处没有依处与依处的关系,故不应有依处的双重表述,应知此诘难已被排除。“童子持”即“为童子所持”,依自义转起的语尾,或依语法规则,如“比萨草即是药”。“如所说”等,依《犍度》经文来成立其义。显示巴利原文
Gocaragāmanidassanatthaṃ ‘‘rājagahe’’ti vatvā buddhānamanurūpanivāsaṭṭhānadassanatthaṃ puna ‘‘ambavane’’ti vuttanti dassento ‘‘idamassā’’tiādimāha. Assāti bhagavato. Tassāti rājagahasaṅkhātassa gocaragāmassa. Yassa samīpavasena ‘‘rājagahe’’ti bhummavacanaṃ pavattati, sopi tassa samīpavasena vattabboti dasseti ‘‘rājagahasamīpe ambavane’’ti iminā. Samīpattheti ambavanassa samīpatthe. Etanti ‘‘rājagahe’’ti vacanaṃ. Bhummavacananti ādhāravacanaṃ. Bhavanti etthāti hi bhummaṃ, ādhāro, tadeva vacanaṃ tathā, bhumme pavattaṃ vā vacanaṃ vibhatti bhummavacanaṃ, tena yuttaṃ tathā, sattamīvibhattiyuttapadanti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kāmaṃ bhagavā ambavaneyeva viharati. Tassamīpattā pana gocaragāmadassanatthaṃ bhummavacanavasena ‘‘rājagahe’’tipi vuttaṃ yathā taṃ ‘‘gaṅgāyaṃ gāvo caranti, kūpe gaggakula’’nti cāti. Aneneva yadi bhagavā rājagahe viharati, atha na vattabbaṃ ‘‘ambavane’’ti. Yadi ca ambavane, evampi na vattabbaṃ ‘‘rājagahe’’ti. Na hi ‘‘pāṭaliputte pāsāde vasatī’’tiādīsu viya idha adhikaraṇādhikaraṇassa abhāvato adhikaraṇassa dvayaniddeso yutto siyāti codanā anavakāsā katāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kumārabhato eva komārabhacco sakatthavuttipaccayena, niruttinayena vā yathā ‘‘bhisaggameva bhesajja’’nti. ‘‘Yathāhā’’tiādinā khandhakapāḷivasena tadatthaṃ sādheti. Kasmā ca ambavanaṃ jīvakasambandhaṃ katvā vuttanti anuyogena mūlato paṭṭhāya tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘ayaṃ panā’’tiādimāha.
“为诸病所浸透”,指因风、胆汁等而诸病增盛。“令泻下后”,即从诸病的激扰中令其脱离之后。“湿婆罗所产的布匹”,指产于湿婆罗国的昂贵布匹。“一日二三次”,即于一日的二时或三时中,此为处格的属格用法,意为同一天内二次或三次。“如铜板之色”,即如同赤铜板的颜色。“连同衣与食”,即与衣服和饮食一起。“依彼而说”,以此显示:并非世尊仅仅住于芒果林,而是住于如此所建造的僧房精舍。然而,此精舍以彼事为缘,所以没有以另立事由的方式说出,这便显示了依彼而说的意义。因为在有共通性时,才有依彼而说的简择。显示巴利原文
Dosābhisannanti vātapittādivasena ussannadosaṃ. Virecetvāti dosappakopato vivecetvā. Siveyyakaṃ dussayuganti siviraṭṭhe jātaṃ mahagghaṃ dussayugaṃ. Divasassa dvattikkhattunti ekasseva divasassa dvivāre vā tivāre vā bhāge, bhummatthe vā etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ, ekasmiṃyeva divase dvivāraṃ vā tivāraṃ vāti attho. Tambapaṭṭavaṇṇenāti tambalohapaṭṭavaṇṇena. Sacīvarabhattenāti cīvarena, bhattena ca. ‘‘Taṃ sandhāyā’’ti iminā na bhagavā ambavanamatteyeva viharati, atha kho evaṃ kate vihāre. So pana tadadhikaraṇatāya visuṃ adhikaraṇabhāvena na vuttoti sandhāyabhāsitamatthaṃ dasseti. Sāmaññe hi sati sandhāyabhāsitaniddhāraṇaṃ.
“以半”是指十三的一半,即十二点五。以如是比丘百数而言。但这里的“半”只指百的一半。因为所用的“半”字表示其部分,而这一部分正好是五十,所以为了说明“比丘百数中不足五十的十三”的含义,便说“以半百”等。也就是只有半百,或百的一半而已。显示巴利原文
Aḍḍhena teḷasa aḍḍhateḷasa. Tādisehi bhikkhusatehi. Aḍḍho panettha satasseva. Yena hi payutto tabbhāgavācako aḍḍhasaddo, so ca kho paṇṇāsāva, tasmā paññāsāya ūnāni teḷasa bhikkhusatānīti atthaṃ viññāpetuṃ ‘‘aḍḍhasatenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aḍḍhameva sataṃ satassa vā aḍḍhaṃ tathā.
“照耀”是指以自己的权势荣华而辉耀美丽。“令喜乐”是指以布施等及四种摄事令人喜悦,或令人对自己生起爱着。这里的“ca”字表示分别。由于俗语使用复数形式,故说“诸摩揭陀人”,或者是以地方名称来指称当地居民。“王”指其父频婆娑罗王。“sasati”意为杀害,因此“敌人”即怨敌、仇敌,还未出生便已是敌,故称未生怨。通过“被相师所记说”这句话,显示他未生时敌对性尚不存在,但因被记说为敌,所以如此称呼。又因他未生时,王后便生起“愿饮王血”的胎欲,故也说未生时即是王的敌人。显示巴利原文
Rājatīti attano issariyasampattiyā dibbati sobhati ca. Rañjetīti dānādinā, sassamedhādinā ca catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi rameti, attani vā rāgaṃ karotīti attho. Ca-saddo cettha vikappanattho. Janapadavācino puthuvacanaparattā ‘‘magadhāna’’nti vuttaṃ, janappadāpadesena vā tabbāsikānaṃ gahitattā. Raññoti pitu bimbisārarañño. Sasati hiṃsatīti sattu, verī, ajātoyeva sattu ajātasattu. ‘‘Nemittakehi niddiṭṭho’’ti vacanena ca ajātassa tassa sattubhāvo na tāva hoti, sattubhāvassa pana tathā niddiṭṭhattā evaṃ voharīyatīti dasseti. Ajātasseva pana tassa ‘‘rañño lohitaṃ piveyya’’nti deviyā dohaḷassa pavattattā ajātoyevesa rañño sattūtipi vadanti.
“于彼”等语是揭示其含义并令成就。“胎欲”即渴望。“沉重”是指重大,或他人所不能办成之事。“不能”即无能为力。“不说”即不言语。“以语系缚”是用言语系缚后。“以金刀”是指用黄金制成的刀,意即纯金所造。因为用铁制者接触王身被认为不适宜。或者说“以金裹铁刀”,意思也相同。“令劈开手臂”是以刺血脉的方式劈开手臂。由于纯血对孕妇难以消化,所以与水混合后让她饮用。“将被杀”即将会被杀害,意思是未来将受伤害。以“相师之言或真或假”的意味,所以说“是男是女,不能辨别”。通过“自己”等语,更以其他缘由加以劝阻。王的状态即是王位,在王位附近运转的是副王位,即职位之阶次。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tasmi’’ntiādinā tadatthaṃ vivarati, samattheti ca. Dohaḷoti abhilāso. Bhāriyeti garuke, aññesaṃ asakkuṇeyye vā. Asakkontīti asakkuṇamānā. Akathentīti akathayamānā samānā. Nibandhitvāti vacasā bandhitvā. Suvaṇṇasatthakenāti suvaṇṇamayena satthakena, ghanasuvaṇṇakatenāti attho. Ayomayañhi rañño sarīraṃ upanetuṃ ayuttanti vadanti. Suvaṇṇaparikkhatena vā ayomayasatthenāti atthepi ayamevādhippāyo. Bāhuṃ phālāpetvāti lohitasirāvedhavasena bāhuṃ phālāpetvā. Kevalassa lohitassa gabbhiniyā dujjīrabhāvato udakena sambhinditvā pāyesi. Haññissatīti haññissate, āyatiṃ hanīyateti attho. Nemittakānaṃ vacanaṃ tathaṃ vā siyā, vitathaṃ vāti adhippāyena ‘‘puttoti vā dhītāti vā na paññāyatī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Attano’’tiādinā aññampi kāraṇaṃ dassetvā nivāresi. Rañño bhāvo rajjaṃ, rajjassa samīpe pavattatīti oparajjaṃ, ṭhānantaraṃ.
“大”即伟大。犹如在复合词中一般,在句中亦有将mahanta字替换为mahā的形式。“担纲”指身为大众的担纲者,即负重之最上者。“我卸下重担”意为我承担大众的重担,即我将促成大众的结集。以“此事不成……”等语,再次显示其思惟的方式。“以神通神变”即化为持蛇璎珞少年形貌的神通变化。“以此”指因短寿的缘故。“hi”仅为小品词;或“tena hi”表示催促义的小品词,故说“让少年……离去”。“我将成佛”——此处的iti,即是依此篇聚中所说的方式。“先前”等句亦是如此,即篇聚的巴利原文。显示巴利原文
Mahāti mahatī. Samāse viya hi vākyepi mahantasaddassa mahādeso. Dhurāti gaṇassa dhurabhūtā, dhorayhā jeṭṭhakāti attho. Dhuraṃ nīharāmīti gaṇadhuramāvahāmi, gaṇabandhiyaṃ nibbattessāmīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘So na sakkā’’tiādinā puna cintanākāraṃ dasseti. Iddhipāṭihāriyenāti ahimekhalikakumāravaṇṇavikubbaniddhinā. Tenāti appāyukabhāvena. Hīti nipātamattaṃ. Tena hīti vā uyyojanatthe nipāto. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kumāraṃ…pe… uyyojesī’’ti. Buddho bhavissāmīti ettha iti-saddo idamattho, iminā khandhake āgatanayenāti attho. Pubbe khotiādīhipi khandhakapāḷiyeva (cūḷava. 339).
“小刀”即匕首,亦称为“爪刀”。“白昼”即日间,白昼亦属一日之部分。这是处格作属格含义的用法,因在他处有“白昼之日”的说法。“日之白昼”的说法亦可,因为以a结尾的diva字亦存在。精通声论者亦承认diva为不变词,意指正午时分。因为这是日中的特殊时分,故称为日。“恐惧”等为同义词:因身体僵直而恐惧,因内心颤栗而不安,因疑虑“他们或许已知道,或许不知”而猜疑,因若被知道便会有大祸临头而惊怖。“如前所说的样貌”即提婆达多所描述的那副模样。“伤害”即损害、不利益,或相反的行为。“一切比丘”是就提婆达多的徒众而言。显示巴利原文
Potthaniyanti churikaṃ. Yaṃ ‘‘nakhara’’ntipi vuccati, divā divaseti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.150) divasassapi divā. Sāmyatthe hetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ ‘‘divā divasassā’’ti aññattha dassanato. Divassa divasetipi vaṭṭati akārantassapi divasaddassa vijjamānattā. Nepātikampi divāsaddamicchanti saddavidū, majjhanhikavelāyanti attho. Sā hi divasassa viseso divasoti. ‘‘Bhīto’’tiādi pariyāyo, kāyathambhanena vā bhīto. Hadayamaṃsacalanena ubbiggo. ‘‘Jāneyyuṃ vā, mā vā’’ti parisaṅkāya ussaṅkī. Ñāte sati attano āgacchamānabhayavasena utrasto. Vuttappakāranti devadattena vuttākāraṃ vippakāranti apakāraṃ anupakāraṃ, viparītakiccaṃ vā. Sabbe bhikkhūti devadattaparisaṃ sandhāyāha.
“夺取”,即通过移除的方式来劫掠。“以王国”,即依靠所征服的领土。所谓“王国”,指的是一位国王的号令所及之处,或者指国王的地位。显示巴利原文
Acchinditvāti apanayanavasena vilumpitvā. Rajjenāti vijitena. Ekassa rañño āṇāpavattiṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘rajja’’nti hi vuttaṃ, rājabhāvena vā.
“心之义”即欲求,“心愿”一词,系添加 ra 音、省略 ta 音而成;或说因心于种种所缘中流荡游走,犹如心之车乘,故称“心愿”;语源学者亦谓心本身即如车乘,故得名“心愿”。“我善于行事”,即谓我乃善于行事者。“轻蔑”,即藐视、不尊重。“根除”乃就剥夺生命而言,此为“修习”(bhāvanā)一词,属阳性名词。据传,以刀杀害王族,乃诸王所不惯行之事,故彼作“尊者,然而……”等言。所谓“热室”,即令人闷热之房舍,然其中唯有烟熏而无明火,故称“烟室”。“为施以热刑”,即仅为施行热烤之刑罚。因某物遮蔽而有高起之部分,故名“高起处”,此处指为使任何人抓握而遮蔽的高起部位。因此说“勿令高举之物进入”。另有一读作“置于前怀”的版本,如此则指中间部位,其义为将物置于前怀中而持之。“发髻”,即指顶髻,如“切断以妙香薰染之发髻”等语中所用的含义。故说“结发髻”。所谓“四种甜味”,据说乃以酥油、砂糖、蜂蜜、椰子油此四种甜味调制而成之特殊饮品,然此说与《大法受持经》原文不符。彼经中说:“酸奶、蜂蜜、酥油、糖蜜合并混合……”显示巴利原文
Manaso attho icchā manoratho ra-kārāgamaṃ, ta-kāralopañca katvā, cittassa vā nānārammaṇesu vibbhamakaraṇato manaso ratho iva manoratho, mano eva ratho viyāti vā manorathotipi neruttikā vadanti. Sukiccakārimhīti sukiccakārī amhi. Avamānanti avamaññanaṃ anādaraṃ. Mūlaghaccanti jīvitā voropanaṃ sandhāyāha, bhāvanapuṃsakametaṃ. Rājakulānaṃ kira satthena ghātanaṃ rājūnamanāciṇṇaṃ, tasmā so ‘‘nanu bhante’’tiādimāha. Tāpanagehaṃ nāma uṇhagahāpanagehaṃ, taṃ pana dhūmeneva acchinnā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dhūmaghara’’nti. Kammakaraṇatthāyāti tāpana kammakaraṇatthameva. Kenaci chāditattā ucco aṅgoti uccaṅgo, yassa kassaci gahaṇatthaṃ paṭicchanno unnataṅgoti idha adhippeto. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘uccaṅgaṃ katvā pavisituṃ mā dethā’’ti. ‘‘Ucchaṅge katvā’’tipi pāṭho, evaṃ sati majjhimaṅgova, ucchaṅge kiñci gahetabbaṃ katvāti attho. Moḷiyanti cūḷāyaṃ ‘‘chetvāna moḷiṃ varagandhavāsita’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.1; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.55; apa. aṭṭha. 1.avidūrenidānakathā; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 27.avidūrenidānakathā; jā. aṭṭha. 1.avidūrenidānakathā) viya. Tenāha ‘‘moḷiṃ bandhitvā’’ti. Catumadhurenāti sappisakkaramadhunāḷikerasnehasaṅkhātehi catūhi madhurehi abhisaṅkhatapānavisesenāti vadanti, taṃ mahādhammasamādānasuttapāḷiyā (ma. ni. 1.473) na sameti. Vuttañhi tattha ‘‘dadhi ca madhu ca sappi ca phāṇitañca ekajjhaṃ saṃsaṭṭha’’nti, (ma. ni. 1.485) tadaṭṭhakathāyañca vuttaṃ ‘‘dadhi ca madhu cāti suparisuddhaṃ dadhi ca sumadhuraṃ madhu ca. Ekajjhaṃ saṃsaṭṭhanti ekato katvā missitaṃ āluḷitaṃ. Tassa tanti tassa taṃ catumadhurabhesajjaṃ pivato’’ti ‘‘attupakkamena maraṇaṃ na yutta’’nti manasi katvā rājā tassā sarīraṃ lehitvā yāpeti. Na hi ariyā attānaṃ vinipātenti.
“以道果之乐”,谓具有道果之乐者,意即以与入流道果之乐相应的经行来维持生命。“我将夺去”,谓我将带走。“以已冷却者”,谓以已散去热气、无火焰的纯净炭火。“被某人劝说”,谓被某人正确告知,即被教诫。“为剃须”,谓为清理胡须。“随王意而行”,谓如王之心意而行,即如此而为。“先前”,谓前世。“在塔院”,谓在以香花等供奉的塔院中。“为安坐”,谓为比丘僧团安坐之用。“所铺设之上等草席”,谓应当铺设的上等席垫,如此席垫即称“草席”。“彼”,谓所说之两种业。然而彼所造之业,应知乃唯凭心之过失而成。如所说——显示巴利原文
Maggaphalasukhenāti maggaphalasukhavatā, sotāpattimaggaphalasukhūpasañhitena caṅkamena yāpetīti attho. Hāressāmīti apanessāmi. Vītaccitehīti vigataaccitehi jālavigatehi suddhaṅgārehi. Kenaci saññattoti kenaci sammā ñāpito, ovaditoti vuttaṃ hoti. Massukaraṇatthāyāti massuvisodhanatthāya. Manaṃ karothāti yathā rañño manaṃ hoti, tathā karotha. Pubbeti purimabhave. Cetiyaṅgaṇeti gandhapupphādīhi pūjanaṭṭhānabhūte cetiyassa bhūmitale. Nisajjanatthāyāti bhikkhusaṅghassa nisīdanatthāya. Paññattakaṭasārakanti paññapetabbauttamakilañjaṃ. Tathāvidho kilañjo hi ‘‘kaṭasārako’’ti vuccati. Tassāti yathāvuttassa kammadvayassa. Taṃ pana manopadosavaseneva tena katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathāha –
“诸法以心为前导,以心为主,由心所造”;
若以染污心,或说或作,
苦即随逐于彼,如车轮紧随挽牛之足。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā, manoseṭṭhā manomayā; Manasā ce paduṭṭhena, bhāsati vā karoti vā; Tato naṃ dukkhamanveti, cakkaṃva vahato pada’’nti. (dha. pa. 1; netti. 90);
“侍者”意为同伴。虽实无分别,但在世间名言中却似有分别般显现,故说“化为夜叉而生”。此处其实唯有一种生起的作用,却以分别的方式表述,故应依结生与流转分别配释:就结生而言称为“化为”,就流转而言称为“而生”;或为显示结生即是殊胜的流转生起,故用两个词合为一个表达。例如“化为”一词,依结生仅表示“生”,如“名为猕猴的天子化为而生”“名为迦多的……而生”“名为曼度加的……而生”等。又或为了表达两个词各自的实义,将“夜叉”等词作为主格自指,由前词限定后词,即指以侍者……乃至以夜叉的身分而生;又或此中“tvā”词缀表原因,意即以夜叉的身分为生起之因。然而,这位大王虽有大福德,由于他往昔屡屡投生于彼处,依长期串习的欲求,当知他即于彼处而生。显示巴利原文
Paricārakoti sahāyako. Abhedepi bhedamiva vohāro loke pākaṭoti vuttaṃ ‘‘yakkho hutvā nibbattī’’ti. Ekāyapi hi uppādakiriyāya idha bhedavohāro, paṭisandhivasena hutvā, pavattivasena nibbattīti vā paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ, paṭisandhivasena vā pavattanasaṅkhātaṃ sātisayanibbattanaṃ ñāpetuṃ ekāyeva kiriyā padadvayena vuttā. Tathāvacanañhi paṭisandhivasena nibbattaneyeva dissati ‘‘makkaṭako nāma devaputto hutvā nibbatti (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.5) kaṇṭako nāma…pe… nibbatti, (jā. aṭṭha. 1.avidūrenidānakathā) maṇḍūko nāma…pe… nibbattī’’tiādīsu viya. Dvinnaṃ vā padānaṃ bhāvatthamapekkhitvā ‘‘yakkho’’tiādīsu sāmiatthe paccattavacanaṃ kataṃ purimāya pacchimavisesanato, paricārakassa…pe… yakkhassa bhāvena nibbattīti attho, hetvatthe vā ettha tvā-saddo yakkhassa bhāvato pavattanahetūti. Assa pana rañño mahāpuññassapi samānassa tattha bahulaṃ nibbattapubbatāya ciraparicitanikanti vasena tattheva nibbatti veditabbā.
“即于当日”,是指就在大王逝世的那一天。“令震颤”,由于对儿子的深厚爱念,以及与之俱生的悲恸激荡,以此俱生之法遍满全身,令其震动。因此说“彻骨而立”。“父德”,是指父亲对自己慈爱的恩德,由此说了“于我生时”等语。“舍去!舍去!”则是依急速与忧愁而发出的。显示巴利原文
Taṃ divasamevāti rañño maraṇadivaseyeva. Khobhetvāti puttasnehassa balavabhāvato, taṃsahajātapīti vegassa ca savipphāratāya taṃ samuṭṭhānarūpadhammehi pharaṇavasena sakalasarīraṃ āloḷetvā. Tenāha ‘‘aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca aṭṭhāsī’’ti. Pituguṇanti pituno attani sinehaguṇaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mayi jātepī’’tiādi. Vissajjetha vissajjethāti turitavasena, sokavasena ca vuttaṃ.
此处“哀叹”,意为不舍弃。显示巴利原文
Anuṭṭhubhitvāti achaḍḍetvā.
“放出那罗祇利象”一句中的iti,是表示方式的词,以此回顾前文所说的“由派遣杀手等种种方式”等已述的方式;但有些地方并未见到此词。“五事”,是指在律藏中以“善哉,诸比丘,愿终生为阿兰若住者”等句(波罗夷 409;小品 343)所说的五种事。此处的“请求”,意为如同作出请求一般。由于他并非真心想修行而提出此请求,这一含义在律藏(波罗夷注释 2.410)中已经说明。“我将令其了知”与“思惟之后,造成僧团分裂”相连接。这是为了显示他未曾放下其责而说的,然而即使僧团尚未分裂,他也确实令他们了知了。“热血”是指因强烈悲伤而生起的热血。“大地狱”即指无间地狱。“广说的方法”,是指因阿阇世王皈依等事而应详细讲述的教说,此处仅举其纲要。为何未在此处作此广说呢?难道不应如同结集时的教说那样,即使在小品(小品 343)中已有,也应在此讲述吗?针对这一诘难,回答说:“因为已经存在,所以未全部说出。”意指因为在小品中已有,且此处已说了一些语句次第,因此并无任何矛盾。以“如是”等句,随顺脉络而作结语。显示巴利原文
Nāḷāgirihatthiṃ muñcāpetvāti ettha iti-saddo pakārattho, tena ‘‘abhimārakapurisapesenādippakārenā’’ti pubbe vuttappakārattayaṃ paccāmasati, katthaci pana so na diṭṭho. Pañca vatthūnīti ‘‘sādhu bhante bhikkhū yāvajīvaṃ āraññikā assū’’tiādinā (pārā. 409; cūḷava. 343) vinaye vuttāni pañca vatthūni. Yācitvāti ettha yācanaṃ viya katvāti attho. Na hi so paṭipajjitukāmo yācatīti ayamattho vinaye (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.410) vuttoyeva. Saññāpessāmīti cintetvā saṅghabhedaṃ katvāti sambandho. Idañca tassa anikkhittadhuratādassanavasena vuttaṃ, so pana akatepi saṅghabhede tehi saññāpetiyeva. Uṇhalohitanti balavasokasamuṭṭhitaṃ uṇhabhūtaṃ lohitaṃ. Mahānirayeti avīciniraye. Vitthārakathānayoti ajātasattupasādanādivasena vitthārato vattabbāya kathāya nayamattaṃ. Kasmā panettha sā na vuttā, nanu saṅgītikathā viya khandhake (cūḷava. 343) āgatāpi sā vattabbāti codanāya āha ‘‘āgatattā pana sabbaṃ na vutta’’nti, khandhake āgatattā, kiñcimattassa ca vacanakkamassa vuttattā na ettha koci virodhoti adhippāyo. ‘‘Eva’’ntiādi yathānusandhinā nigamanaṃ.
“拘萨罗王”指波斯匿王的父亲大拘萨罗王。为排除“莫非指毗提诃王的女儿韦提希”这一可能产生的理解而说“并非毗提诃王”。那么,依何义而说呢?答:“此是对智者的称谓”,意为智者的同义词,或智者的名称。然而,此词义依何种词源而得解释?故说“在此”等句。“知者”即了知者。以“明”即作为工具的智慧。“努力”一词,据复注所说,亦有“进行”之义。此处“韦提希”属河流等词类,故称“韦提希女”。显示巴利原文
Kosalaraññoti pasenadikosalassa pitu mahākosalarañño. Nanu videhassa rañño dhītā vedehīti attho sambhavatīti codanamapaneti ‘‘na videharañño’’ti iminā. Atha kenaṭṭhenāti āha ‘‘paṇḍitādhivacanameta’’nti, paṇḍitavevacanaṃ, paṇḍitanāmanti vā attho. Ayaṃ pana padattho kena nibbacanenāti vuttaṃ ‘‘tatrāya’’ntiādi. Vidantīti jānanti. Vedenāti karaṇabhūtena ñāṇena. ‘‘Īhatī’’ti etassa pavattatītipi attho ṭīkāyaṃ vutto. Vedehīti idha nadādigaṇoti āha ‘‘vedehiyā’’ti.
“正是那一天”即“在那一天”,而以第七格的说法成就了“tadahu”一词。“在此”即指在这一天。为表明带有前缀 upa 的 vas 一词特指“近住”,而非泛泛的“居住”,且“近住”即是“受持”,故说“以戒”等。此处,“以戒”是就教法中的圣布萨而言。“以不食”则指仅不进食的外道布萨。此处的 vā 字为表不定之义,由此也含摄了某些意恶行、恶戒等情形。正如牧牛者的布萨是依伴随贪欲的心而说,尼乾子的布萨是依妄语等而说。恰如《毗舍佉布萨经》中所言:“他以那伴随贪欲的心度过那一天”(增支部 3.71),以及“在应劝人于真实之时,他却在那时劝人于妄语”(增支部 3.71)等。显示巴利原文
Soyeva aho tadaho, sattamīvacanena pana ‘‘tadahū’’ti padasiddhi. Etthāti etasmiṃ divase. Upasaddena visiṭṭho vasasaddo upavasaneyeva, na vasanamatte, upavasanañca samādānamevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sīlenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha ca sīlenāti sāsane ariyuposathaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Anasanenāti abhuñjanamattasaṅkhātaṃ bāhiruposathaṃ. Vā-saddo cettha aniyamattho, tena ekaccaṃ manoduccaritaṃ, dussīlyādiñca saṅgaṇhāti. Tathā hi gopālakuposatho abhijjhāsahagatassa cittassa vasena vutto, nigaṇṭhuposatho mosavajjādivasena. Yathāha visākhuposathe ‘‘so tena abhijjhāsahagatena cetasā divasaṃ atināmetī’’ti, (a. ni. 3.71) ‘‘iti yasmiṃ samaye sacce samādapetabbā, musāvāde tasmiṃ samaye samādapetī’’ti (a. ni. 3.71) ca ādi.
如此显示了与所欲含义相应的词源解释后,现在为以提炼含义的方式显示与词源相应的所欲含义,而说“然而此”等句。在此,即于“布萨”一词中。将同一名称所涉多种不同含义进行提炼,称为“含义提炼”;或者,从同一名称所涉诸含义中,仅提炼所欲理解的含义,亦称为“含义提炼”。因为显示多种含义正是为了提炼出所欲理解的含义。难道不是以“诸词唯依含义而确立”等句,在下文中对含义提炼进行了诘问与澄清吗?此外,由于特殊词并非直接表示概念者,所以“布萨”一词即便涉及诵戒等特定领域,也仅是一般性的形式,那么为何又说它是诵戒等特定领域呢?确实如此,然而这一含义是不考虑该词的一般性,唯依各处可能存在的含义而说,一切处皆如此。以戒、见(以戒清净)而和合共住的众人在其中被安住、不被驱出,故为“布萨”,即诵戒。以受持或决意亲近之后,为圣住等目的而应住、应留住,故为“布萨”,即戒。以不食等亲近之后应住、应随住,故为“布萨”,即称为誓愿受持的斋戒。对于生于九种大种姓家的大象,不观待任何行为,唯依生于该家族这一点,以惯用义而称其为“布萨”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ adhippetatthānurūpaṃ nibbacanaṃ dassetvā idāni atthuddhāravasena nibbacanānurūpaṃ adhippetatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ayaṃ panā’’tiādimāha. Etthāti uposathasadde. Samānasaddavacanīyānaṃ anekappabhedānaṃ atthānamuddharaṇaṃ atthuddhāro samānasaddavacanīyesu vā atthesu adhippetasseva atthassa uddharaṇaṃ atthuddhārotipi vaṭṭati. Anekatthadassanañhi adhippetatthassa uddharaṇatthameva. Nanu ca ‘‘atthamattaṃ pati saddā abhinivisantī’’tiādinā atthuddhāre codanā, sodhanā ca heṭṭhā vuttāyeva. Apica visesasaddassa avācakabhāvato pātimokkhuddesādivisayopi uposathasaddo sāmaññarūpo eva, atha kasmā pātimokkhuddesādivisesavisayo vuttoti? Saccametaṃ, ayaṃ panattho tādisaṃ saddasāmaññamanādiyitvā tattha tattha sambhavatthadassanavaseneva vuttoti, evaṃ sabbattha. Sīladiṭṭhivasena (sīlasuddhivasena dī. ni. ṭī. 1.150) upetehi samaggehi vasīyati na uṭṭhīyatīti uposatho, pātimokkhuddeso. Samādānavasena, adhiṭṭhānavasena vā upecca ariyavāsādiatthāya vasitabbo āvasitabboti uposatho, sīlaṃ. Anasanādivasena upecca vasitabbo anuvasitabboti uposatho, vatasamādānasaṅkhāto upavāso. Navamahatthikulapariyāpanne hatthināge kiñci kiriyamanapekkhitvā taṃkulasambhūtatāmattaṃ pati ruḷhivaseneva uposathoti samaññā, tasmā tattha nāmapaññatti veditabbā. Arayo upagantvā useti dāhetīti uposatho, usasaddo dāhetipi saddavidū vadanti. Divase pana uposatha saddapavatti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttāyeva. ‘‘Suddhassa ve sadāphaggū’’tiādīsu suddhassāti sabbaso kilesamalābhāvena parisuddhassa. Veti nipātamattaṃ, byattanti vā attho. Sadāti niccakālampi. Phaggūti phagguṇīnakkhattameva yuttaṃ bhavati, niruttinayena cetassa siddhi. Yassa hi sundarikabhāradvājassa nāma brāhmaṇassa phagguṇamāse uttaraphagguṇīyuttadivase titthanhānaṃ karontassa saṃvaccharampi katapāpapavāhanaṃ hotīti laddhi. Tato taṃ vivecetuṃ idaṃ majjhimāgamāvare mūlapaṇṇāsake vatthasutte bhagavatā vuttaṃ. Suddhassuposatho sadāti yathāvuttakilesamalasuddhiyā parisuddhassa uposathaṅgāni, vatasamādānāni ca asamādiyatopi niccakālaṃ uposathavāso eva bhavatīti attho. ‘‘Na bhikkhave’’tiādīsu ‘‘abhikkhuko āvāso na gantabbo’’ti nīharitvā sambandho. Upavasitabbadivasoti upavasanakaraṇadivaso, adhikaraṇe vā tabbasaddo daṭṭhabbo. Evañhi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanibbacanena sameti. Antogadhāvadhāraṇena, aññatthāpohanena ca nivāraṇaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sesadvayanivāraṇattha’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pannarase’’ti padamārabbha divasavasena yathāvuttanibbacanaṃ katanti dassento ‘‘teneva vutta’’ntiādimāha. Pañcadasannaṃ tithīnaṃ pūraṇavasena ‘‘pannaraso’’ti hi divaso vutto.
若只说“它们存在于此处”,便可能有人质疑:“难道别处就不存在吗?”为遮止此疑,故说“据说那时”等语。由此显示,此处多次或特别地运用了派生词的范围。cātumāsī与cātumāsinī,只是因后缀不同而成的阴性同义词。说“成为终结”,正是着眼于圆满的状态,因为与之同时,四个月便已然圆满。“此处”指在经典中。以三种方式充满,故称为“满”;为显示此义,故说“以月圆满”等。其中,因那时迦提月圆满,故为月圆满。因为在从前一个满月日到后一个满月日之间,称为一个月。因雨季的时节圆满,故为时节圆满。因以迦提月为特征的年份圆满,故为年份圆满。从前一个迦提月到后一个迦提月,这期间称为一个迦提年,因此说“以年份圆满”。然而,依世俗人的见解,是以月份来称呼年份的。其定义也以太阳进入星座的沉重为依据。正如星相学典籍中所说:显示巴利原文
‘‘Tāni ettha santī’’ti ettakeyeva vutte nanvetāni aññatthāpi santīti codanā siyāti taṃ nivāretuṃ ‘‘tadā kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Anena bahuso, atisayato vā ettha taddhitavisayo payuttoti dasseti. Cātumāsī, cātumāsinīti ca paccayavisesena itthiliṅgeyeva pariyāyavacanaṃ. Pariyosānabhūtāti ca pūraṇabhāvameva sandhāya vadati tāya saheva catumāsaparipuṇṇabhāvato. Idhāti pāḷiyaṃ. Tīhi ākārehi pūretīti puṇṇāti atthaṃ dasseti ‘‘māsapuṇṇatāyā’’tiādinā. Tattha tadā kattikamāsassa puṇṇatāya māsapuṇṇatā. Purimapuṇṇamito hi paṭṭhāya yāva aparā puṇṇamī, tāva eko māsoti tattha vohāro. Vassānassa utuno puṇṇatāya utupuṇṇatā. Kattikamāsalakkhitassa saṃvaccharassa puṇṇatāya saṃvaccharapuṇṇatā. Purimakattikamāsato pabhuti yāva aparakattikamāso, tāva eko kattikasaṃvaccharoti evaṃ saṃvaccharapuṇṇatāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Lokikānaṃ matena pana māsavasena saṃvaccharasamaññā lakkhitā. Tathā ca lakkhaṇaṃ garusaṅkantivasena. Vuttañhi jotisatthe –
“与星宿一同升起,太阳奔其目标而去”;
此中疑问,当如是解:一年即如一月。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nakkhattena sahodaya-matthaṃ yāti sūramanti; Tassa saṅkaṃ tatra vattabbaṃ, vassaṃ māsakamenevā’’ti.
“日”由此而计量,故称为“mā”。因为藉由它的运行,日子被计量为“初一、初二、初三”等。此处,“满”是指这一夜因所有部分都圆满而满。月亮的十六分之一被称为“分”,此时月亮因具足全部十六分而显现圆满。而此处,“在那布萨日的第十五日”等是就日子而言,“白莲夜”等则是就那一夜的部分时段而言。显示巴利原文
Minīyati divaso etenāti mā. Tassa hi gatiyā divaso minitabbo ‘‘pāṭipado dutiyā, tatiyā’’tiādinā. Ettha puṇṇoti etissā rattiyā sabbakalāpāripūriyā puṇṇo. Candassa hi soḷasamo bhāgo ‘‘kalā’’ti vuccati, tadā ca cando sabbāsampi soḷasannaṃ kalānaṃ vasena paripuṇṇo hutvā dissati. Ettha ca ‘‘tadahuposathe pannarase’’ti padāni divasavasena vuttāni, ‘‘komudiyā’’tiādīni tadekadesarattivasena.
然而,国王为何由大臣们围绕着坐,而非独自一人呢?为了显示对此问难的余净法,注释者不只说出经文的词句含义,还说“如此这般”等。由此显示了余净法:“因为在那样的夜晚,当时正进行着如此令人愉悦的活动,所以他那样被围绕着坐”。“如同被清洗的方向部分”中,也应连接“如同”一词。“从银殿放射出的”指从银殿发出的,或由银殿的光芒闪耀而出的。“种种”一词也是修饰珍珠串等的形容词。云、烟、尘、罗睺,这四种是依经典所说的杂染。与王臣一起,即与出身王族的大臣们一起。或者,意思是与附属的国王们和大臣们一起。在金座上,即狮子座。因为经中说:“诸王有金座、狮子座,又有牦牛尾扇与拂尘”。为何而坐?这只是对坐这一动作的质疑。“这”指哭泣或唤醒。“以此”指以此因由。“星宿”指迦提星宿节。现在应好好宣告星宿节,故为“被宣告的”。以五色花、炒米和满瓶装饰的房屋之门,此城即为“五门”。幢是旗。幡是条幡,锡兰人如此说。据说那时以燃灯为始而举行星宿节。正如《狂人本生》等中也同样说到迦提月。因此说:“以点燃的灯串装饰一切方所,闪耀光芒。”显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana rājā amaccaparivuto nisinno, na ekakovāti codanāya sodhanālesaṃ dassetuṃ pāḷipadatthameva avatvā ‘‘evarūpāyā’’tiādīnipi vadati. Etehi cāyaṃ sodhanāleso dassito ‘‘evaṃ ruciyamānāya rattiyā tadā pavattattā tathā parivuto nisinno’’ti. Dhoviyamānadisābhāgāyāti etthāpi viyasaddo yojetabbo. Rajatavimānaniccharitehīti rajatavimānato nikkhantehi, rajatavimānappabhāya vā vipphuritehi. ‘‘Visaro’’ti idaṃ muttāvaḷiādīnampi visesanapadaṃ. Abbhaṃ dhūmo rajo rāhūti ime cattāro upakkilesā pāḷinayena (a. ni. 4.50; pāci. 447). Rājāmaccehīti rājakulasamudāgatehi amaccehi. Atha vā anuyuttakarājūhi ceva amaccehi cāti attho. Kañcanāsaneti sīhāsane. ‘‘Raññaṃ tu hemamāsanaṃ, sīhāsanamatho vāḷabījanitthī ca cāmara’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Kasmā nisinnoti nisīdanamatte codanā. Eta nti kandanaṃ, pabodhanaṃ vā. Itīti iminā hetunā. Nakkhatta nti kattikānakkhattachaṇaṃ. Sammā ghositabbaṃ etarahi nakkhattanti saṅghuṭṭhaṃ. Pañcavaṇṇakusumehi lājena, puṇṇaghaṭehi ca paṭimaṇḍitaṃ gharesu dvāraṃ yassa tadetaṃ nagaraṃ pañca…pe… dvāraṃ.Dhajo vaṭo. Paṭāko paṭṭoti sīhaḷiyā vadanti. Tadā kira padīpujjalanasīsena katanakkhattaṃ. Tathā hi ummādantijātakādīsupi (jā. 2.18.57) kattikamāse evameva vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘samujjalitadīpamālālaṅkatasabbadisābhāga’’nti. Vīthi nāma rathikā mahāmaggo. Racchā nāma anibbiddhā khuddakamaggo. Tattha tattha nisinnavasena samānabhāgena pāṭiyekkaṃ nakkhattakīḷaṃ anubhavamānena samabhikiṇṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ evaṃ vatvāpi tattheva iti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katanti attho.
“udāna”与“udāhāra”(说出),意义相同。“Māna”指所执取的慢,为作者。以丢弃为方式的倾泻。以流为方式的洪流。“喜语”指由喜生起之语,为业。“心”指心,为作者。“执取”指以不外泄的方式执取,即不能将心留住——这是意旨。因此说“成为多余”等。这是说:那种不顾听者、纯粹因殊胜之喜而自然、突然地从口中发出的话语,在此即被理解为“udāna”(感兴语)。显示巴利原文
Udānaṃ udāhāroti atthato ekaṃ. Mānanti mānapattaṃ kattubhūtaṃ. Chaḍḍanavasena avaseko. Sotavasena ogho. Pītivacananti pītisamuṭṭhānavacanaṃ kammabhūtaṃ. Hadayanti cittaṃ kattubhūtaṃ. Gahetunti bahi aniccharaṇavasena gaṇhituṃ, hadayantoyeva ṭhapetuṃ na sakkotīti adhippāyo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘adhikaṃ hutvā’’tiādi. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yaṃ vacanaṃ paṭiggāhaka nirapekkhaṃ kevalaṃ uḷārāya pītiyā vasena sarasato sahasāva mukhato niccharati, tadevidha ‘‘udāna’’nti adhippetanti.
“从过失中离去、离脱、远离”,故说“dosinā”,此处将ta音转为na音,正如说“战胜烦恼者、已战胜者为胜者(jino)”,同样说“远离过失的(dosāpagatā)”。经中虽云:“诸比丘,有四种日月之杂染,被这些杂染所染污的日月不照耀、不发光、不闪耀。哪四种?诸比丘,云……乃至……雾、烟、尘。诸比丘,罗睺是日月之杂染”,但为依注疏的方法显示第三种杂染的细分,故说“以五种杂染”。此义由“令人愉悦”等词而可知,故说“因此”等。anīya词亦常表使动义,如“能引导出离的法”所示,以“使愉悦”显示。以月光说夜晚的美丽:“已脱离所述过失的”等。此处,云等即是所说过失。此因亦应连属于“适于显示”处。以此因由及时节圆满,应见其可爱。在这样的夜晚,与之相应的日、月、季、年,这些日、月等的特征,成为观察的方便,故应被观察,即为“lakkhaṇiyā”,其本身即是“lakkhaññā”,由ya变为ṇa、ña音替换,如同说“莲花池善加建造”一样,说“日、月等”。显示巴利原文
Dosehi itā gatā apagatāti dosinā ta-kārassa na-kāraṃ katvā yathā ‘‘kilese jito vijitāvīti jino’’ti āha ‘‘dosāpagatā’’ti. Yadipi sutte vuttaṃ ‘‘cattārome bhikkhave candimasūriyānaṃ upakkilesā, yehi upakkilesehi upakkiliṭṭhā candimasūriyā na tapanti na bhāsanti na virocanti. Katame cattāro? Abbhā bhikkhave…pe… mahikā. Dhūmo rajo. Rāhu bhikkhave candimasūriyānaṃ upakkileso’’ti, (cūḷava. 447) tathāpi tatiyupakkilesassa pabhedadassana vasena aṭṭhakathānayena dassetuṃ ‘‘pañcahi upakkilesehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayamattho ca ramaṇīyādisaddayogato ñāyatīti āha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Anīya-saddopi bahulā katvatthābhidhāyako yathā ‘‘niyyānikā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. dukamātikā 96) dasseti ‘‘ramayatī’’ti iminā. Juṇhāvasena rattiyā surūpattamāha ‘‘vuttadosavimuttāyā’’tiādinā. Abbhādayo cettha vuttadosā. Ayañca hetu ‘‘dassituṃ yuttā’’ti etthāpi sambajjhitabbo. Tena kāraṇena, utusampattiyā ca pāsādikatā daṭṭhabbā. Īdisāya rattiyā yutto divaso māso utu saṃvaccharoti evaṃ divasamāsādīnaṃ lakkhaṇā sallakkhaṇupāyā bhavituṃ yuttā, tasmā lakkhitabbāti lakkhaṇiyā, sā eva lakkhaññā ya-vato ṇa-kārassa ña-kārādesavasena yathā ‘‘pokkharañño sumāpitā’’ti āha ‘‘divasamāsādīna’’ntiādi.
“愿亲近我们者之心得净信”这句经文中,“沙门或婆罗门”指的是胜义沙门与胜义婆罗门,并非仅凭出家相便称沙门,亦非仅凭出身便称婆罗门,故说“以已平息诸恶故”等。依词源学,“婆罗门”意为排除诸恶、将恶驱于外者。本应使用复数处却用了单数,或本应使用单数处却用了复数,这种语词变异称为“语词颠倒”。此处本应说“payirupāsata”,却说成“payirupāsato”,即显示了应使用复数却以单数形式出现的语词变异。因为,对于自身或应尊敬的对象,即使只有一人,使用复数表达也是约定俗成的。“Payirupāsato”一词,如同“payirudāhāsi”,是音变(字母次序颠倒)的表述。当“pari”音之后接“ya”音时,常有此音变。正如文法家所说:“pariyā等词中,ra等音与ya等音发生颠倒。”“Yaṃ”指沙门或婆罗门。“以此一切言说”指“这地方确实可爱”等言说。“光照之相业”指作为光照的相业,即显而易见的相状造作。“因大罪过故”指因大过失故。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yaṃ no payirupāsato cittaṃ pasīdeyyā’’ti vacanato samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vāti ettha paramatthasamaṇo, paramatthabrāhmaṇo ca adhippeto, na pana pabbajjāmattasamaṇo, na ca jātimattabrāhmaṇoti vuttaṃ ‘‘samitapāpatāyā’’tiādi. Bahati pāpe bahi karotīti brāhmaṇo niruttinayena. Bahuvacane vattabbe ekavacanaṃ, ekavacane vā vattabbe bahuvacanaṃ vacanabyattayo vacanavipallāsoti attho. Idha pana ‘‘payirupāsata’’nti vattabbe ‘‘payirupāsato’’ti vuttattā bahuvacane vattabbe ekavacanavasena vacanabyattayo dassito. Attani, garuṭṭhāniye ca hi ekasmimpi bahuvacanappayogo niruḷho. Payirupāsatoti ca vaṇṇavipariyāyaniddeso esa yathā ‘‘payirudāhāsī’’ti. Ayañhi bahulaṃ diṭṭhapayogo, yadidaṃ parisadde ya-kārapare vaṇṇavipariyāyo. Tathā hi akkharacintakā vadanti ‘‘pariyādīnaṃ rayādivaṇṇassa yarādīhi vipariyāyo’’ti. Yanti samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā. Iminā sabbenapi vacanenāti ‘‘ramaṇīyā vatā’’tiādivacanena. Obhāsanimittakammanti obhāsabhūtaṃ nimittakammaṃ , paribyattaṃ nimittakaraṇanti attho. Mahāparādhatāyāti mahādosatāya.
“那么”等是对此义的解释。“而提婆达多”中的“而”字是表示累加的接续词,由此引出此义:正如阿阇世王因杀害自己父亲——那位圣弟子、世尊的侍者——而犯下大罪,同样,对世尊造成极大损害的提婆达多,也因不以世尊为依怙而犯下大罪。“依其背后之影”仅是假名施设,意为以他(耆婆)的背部为依靠,以他为首要而依止。“为断除散乱”指为了断除接下来所说、因自己言论而生起的散乱,令其不生起。因此说“在那之中”等。“未学者”指在身、语调伏方面舍弃了学处者。“亲近俗家者”指亲近俗家的所谓导师。“因执取非真实精髓故”指由于失去了应执取的功德精髓。“无舍弃”指没有对其他事物的遣除。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tena hī’’tiādi tadatthavivaraṇaṃ. Devadatto cāti ettha ca-saddo samuccayavasena atthupanayane, tena yathā rājā ajātasattu attano pitu ariyasāvakassa satthu upaṭṭhākassa ghātanena mahāparādho, evaṃ bhagavato mahānatthakarassa devadattassa apassayabhāvenāpīti imamatthaṃ upaneti. Tassa piṭṭhichāyāyāti vohāramattaṃ, tassa jīvakassa piṭṭhiapassayena, taṃ pamukhaṃ katvā apassāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vikkhepapacchedanatthanti vakkhamānāya attano kathāya uppajjanakavikkhepassa pacchindanatthaṃ, anuppajjanatthanti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘tassaṃ hī’’tiādi. Asikkhitānanti kāyavacīsaṃyamane vigatasikkhānaṃ. Kulūpaketi kulamupagate satthāre. Gahitāsāratāyāti gahetabbaguṇasāravigatatāya. Nibbikkhepanti aññesamapanayanavirahitaṃ.
“吉祥”,指因具足依怙而美好。显示巴利原文
Bhaddanti avassayasampannatāya sundaraṃ.
151 151. 为了显示“此义依此经文的隐喻而了知,或将此义涵摄于内后,经文即如此宣说”,故说“因此说”等。他虽不是导师,却自称为导师,故称“自称导师者”;或者,就他虽不是觉者,却自称是觉者,且宣称“我独自是世间利益与法的教导者”这种自称阿阇梨的情形而说。“据说他”等,是以“据说”一词,仅依传闻——即古注释的传统——而说。此理在后文解释末伽梨的词源时也是如此。“令九十九成满”,即把九十九与自身合为一百而令圆满。如此出生者,便成为吉祥奴。所谓“以生身”,是指以从母胎出生时的样子,也就是如同众生出生时不穿衣服、不加覆盖那样,以赤裸的身体。“亲近”,即前往依附。他便以这城邑的形相,当作“这大概就是出家吧”这样出家,并执取它。“出家”,指他们追随他出家。显示巴利原文
151. Ayañcattho imāya pāḷicchāyāya adhigato, imamatthameva vā antogadhaṃ katvā pāḷiyamevaṃ vuttanti dasseti ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādinā. Asatthāpi samāno satthā paṭiññāto yenāti satthupaṭiññāto, tassa abuddhassāpi samānassa buddhapaṭiññātassa ‘‘ahameko loke atthadhammānusāsako’’ti ācariyapaṭiññātabhāvaṃ vā sandhāya evaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘So kirā’’tiādinā anussutimattaṃ pati porāṇaṭṭhakathānayova kirasaddena vutto. Esa nayo parato makkhalipadanibbacanepi . Ekūnadāsasataṃ pūrayamānoti ekenūnadāsasataṃ attanā saddhiṃ anūnadāsasataṃ katvā pūrayamāno. Evaṃ jāyamāno cesa maṅgaladāso jāto. Jātarūpenevāti mātukucchito vijātaveseneva, yathā vā sattā anivatthā apārutā jāyanti, tathā jātarūpeneva. Upasaṅkamantīti upagatā bhajantā honti. Tadeva pabbajjaṃ aggahesīti tadeva naggarūpaṃ ‘‘ayameva pabbajjā nāma siyā’’ti pabbajjaṃ katvā aggahesi. Pabbajiṃsūti taṃ pabbajitamanupabbajiṃsu.
“所谓出家众之集合”,以此表明:僧团仅是依出家众的集合性而得“僧团”之名,并非依能导向出离的正见与清净戒的共性而和合。“他有”,指作为那位自称导师者的随从眷属而有。“有僧团、有众”是同义词,仅由约定俗成而有区别,故说“那即是”等。“那即是”,指出家众的集合本身。然而有些人说:“依出家众而有僧团,依在家众而有众”,那只是他们自己的见解,因为“僧团”一词在世间已约定俗成用于指称团体。“裸行、牛行等”,只是他们自身构想出的行为。“知名”,指以拥有僧团等状态而著称。“少欲知足”在含义上是一体。为了彰显其中“于所得少欲”,故说“因少欲故,连衣服也不穿”。因为在他那里,并没有像佛教中那样以隐藏善德为特征的少欲。“名声”,指称扬赞誉之声。“依此能度轮回暴流”:因如此被认可而称为“教派”,即被认可为“善”,但并非被善士所认可,因此说“此”等以说明其义。因为它并未被善士所认可。“善士”与“善人”是两种含义。“未闻者”,指未听闻圣法的人,此词以属主格表示动作主体义。“我知道这些誓戒的受持,如此长夜已善行”:他知道许多夜晚,那些夜晚即是长时间,故说“久出家者”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pabbajitasamūhasaṅkhāto’’ti etena pabbajitasamūhatāmattena saṅgho, na niyyānikadiṭṭhivisuddhasīlasāmaññavasena saṃhatattāti dasseti. Assa atthīti assa satthupaṭiññātassa parivārabhāvena atthi. ‘‘Saṅghī gaṇī’’ti cedaṃ pariyāyavacanaṃ, saṅketamattato nānanti āha ‘‘svevā’’tiādi. Svevāti ca pabbajitasamūhasaṅkhāto eva. Keci pana ‘‘pabbajitasamūhavasena saṅghī, gahaṭṭhasamūhavasena gaṇī’’ti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ gaṇe eva loke saṅgha-saddassa niruḷhattā. Acelakavatacariyādi attanā parikappitamattaṃ ācāro.Paññāto pākaṭo saṅghīādibhāvena. Appiccho santuṭṭhoti atthato ekaṃ. Tattha labbhamānāppicchataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘appicchatāya vatthampi na nivāsetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hi tasmiṃ sāsanike viya santaguṇaniggūhaṇalakkhaṇā appicchatā labbhati. Yasoti kittisaddo. Taranti etena saṃsāroghanti evaṃ sammatatāya laddhi titthaṃ nāma ‘‘sādhū’’ti sammato, na ca sādhūhi sammatoti atthamāha ‘‘aya’’ntiādinā. Na hi tassa sādhūhi sammatatā labbhati. Sundaro sappurisoti dvidhā attho. Assutavatoti assutāriyadhammassa, kattutthe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. ‘‘Imāni me vatasamādānāni ettakaṃ kālaṃ suciṇṇānī’’ti bahū rattiyo jānāti. Tā panassa rattiyo cirakālabhūtāti katvā ‘‘ciraṃ pabbajitassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, antatthaaññapadatthasamāso cesa yathā ‘‘māsajāto’’ti. Atha tassa padadvayassa ko visesoti ce? Cirapabbajitaggahaṇenassa buddhisīlatā, rattaññūgahaṇena tattha sampajānatā dassitā, ayametassa visesoti. Kiṃ pana atthaṃ sandhāya so amacco āhāti vuttaṃ ‘‘acirapabbajitassā’’tiādi. Okappanīyāti saddahanīyā. Addhānanti dīghakālaṃ. Kittako pana soti āha ‘‘dve tayo rājaparivaṭṭe’’ti, dvinnaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ vā rājūnaṃ rajjānusāsanapaṭipāṭiyoti attho. ‘‘Addhagato’’ti vatvāpi puna kataṃ vayaggahaṇaṃ osānavayāpekkhaṃ padadvayassa atthavisesasambhavatoti dasseti ‘‘pacchimavaya’’nti iminā. Ubhayanti ‘‘addhagato, vayoanuppatto’’ti padadvayaṃ.
“迦阇罗”是一种特别的树,也称为“叶树”。“如同见到后不悦”,这是句法上的关联。他忆及往昔曾与父亲一同前往导师面前听闻教法,因而说出“禅那……欲”等语。所谓“为三相所冲击”,即被三相所触恼。此处说“以见”,仅为举例。因为他见到后与他交谈,随后听闻无作业论,故而不悦。所谓“功德之谈”,是指对不实功德的谈论,因此才说“更加不悦”。若他不悦,为何沉默?为澄清此诘难,才说“虽不悦……”等。显示巴利原文
Kājaro nāma eko rukkhaviseso, yo ‘‘paṇṇakarukkho’’tipi vuccati. Disvā viya anattamanoti sambandho. Pubbe pitarā saddhiṃ satthu santikaṃ gantvā desanāya sutapubbataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘jhānā…pe… kāmo’’ti. Tilakkhaṇabbhāhatanti tīhi lakkhaṇehi abhighaṭitaṃ. Dassanenāti nidassanamattaṃ. So hi disvā tena saddhiṃ allāpasallāpaṃ katvā , tato akiriyavādaṃ sutvā ca anattamano ahosi. Guṇakathāyāti abhūtaguṇakathāya. Tenāha ‘‘suṭṭhutaraṃ anattamano’’ti. Yadi anattamano, kasmā tuṇhī ahosīti codanaṃ visodheti ‘‘anattamano samānopī’’tiādinā.
152 所说的“牛舍”,是指名为如此的村庄。然而,若依“雨季时牛的安置处”之义,由于该处为众多其他牛所共用,其名称便显得格外贴切;尽管如此,仍有古人未曾听闻此说的一种观点。“勿损!”这是主人所说的话,因有如此之说,故以动词形式作为其名称。因为若想以名称来表述,动词形式也可成为名词,例如“阿若憍陈如”(即已了知者)。其余部分即“他以叶……”等语。显示巴利原文
152.Gosālāyāti evaṃnāmake gāmeti vuttaṃ. Vassānakāle gunnaṃ patiṭṭhitasālāyāti pana atthe tabbasena tassa nāmaṃ sātisayamupapannaṃ hoti bahulamanaññasādhāraṇattā, tathāpi so porāṇehi ananussutoti ekaccavādo nāma kato. ‘‘Mā khalīti sāmiko āhā’’ti iminā tathāvacanamupādāya tassa ākhyātapadena samaññāti dasseti. Saññāya hi vattumicchāya ākhyātapadampi nāmikaṃ bhavati yathā ‘‘aññāsikoṇḍañño’’ti (mahāva. 17). Sesanti ‘‘so paṇṇena vā’’tiādivacanaṃ.
153 如同奴仆等人中,“吉祥增”等仅是名字一样,“阿吉多”也只是他的一个名称。也可解释为“以发织成的毯子”。“更为低劣”,即更加下劣。应如《增支部·三集·末伽梨经》中所说“如所说……”等那样引用。“如织机所织”,意即如织机中所织成之物。以“冷时为冷……”等六种方式显示其更为低劣。显示巴利原文
153. Dāsādīsu sirivaḍḍhakādināmamiva ajitoti tassa nāmamattaṃ. Kesehi vāyito kambalo yassātipi yujjati. Paṭikiṭṭhataranti nihīnataraṃ. ‘‘Yathāhā’’tiādinā aṅguttarāgame tikanipāte makkhalisutta (a. ni. 3.138) māhari. Tantāvutānīti tante vītāni. ‘‘Sīte sīto’’tiādinā chahākārehi tassa paṭikiṭṭhataraṃ dasseti.
154 他对正见者生气、憎恶,故称“帕库达”。此处“即使大便后”中的“pi(即使)”一词,也包含了“即使吃饭后”、“即使被不净物弄脏后”等义。所谓“堆沙塔”,即依受持誓愿而堆沙成塔;意谓在那样的不可接近之处,又受持誓愿而前往。显示巴利原文
154. Pakujjhati sammādiṭṭhikesu byāpajjatīti pakudho. Vaccaṃ katvāpīti ettha pi-saddena bhojanaṃ bhuñjitvāpi kenaci asucinā makkhitvāpīti imamatthaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Vālikāthūpaṃ katvāti vatasamādānasīsena vālikāsañcayaṃ katvā, tathārūpe anupagamanīyaṭṭhāne puna vataṃ samādāya gacchatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
156 “结缚烦恼”即是“缠缚烦恼”的释义,意指在轮回中具有缠缚作用的、以田地、财产、子女、妻子等为对象的贪等烦恼。称“持如是说者”,是表明此名依其执见而得,并非依实义。只要他尚未被圣道断除,此烦恼便仍然存在。而此词的词义是:他执取“我没有结缚”,故称“尼乾陀”。即因此得名。显示巴利原文
156.‘‘Gaṇṭhanakileso’’ti etassa ‘‘palibundhanakileso’’ti atthavacanaṃ, saṃsāre paribundhanakicco khettavatthuputtadārādivisayo rāgādikilesoti attho. ‘‘Evaṃvāditāyā’’ti iminā laddhivasenassa nāmaṃ, na panatthatoti dasseti. Yāva hi so maggena samugghāṭito, tāva atthiyeva. Ayaṃ pana vacanattho – ‘‘natthi mayhaṃ gaṇṭho’’ti gaṇhātīti nigaṇṭhoti. Nāṭassāti evaṃnāmakassa.
童子医耆婆故事义注显示巴利原文
Komārabhaccajīvakakathāvaṇṇanā
157 针对全然沉默的状态,说“此龙……如同……”。善翅鸟即金翅鸟,或依梵语称为迦楼罗。据说“Ḍa与ḷa没有差别”。由于未能如愿而行,故说“我实不幸”。已寂止者,即依全面防护而达致寂止者。耆婆的沉默犹如对我意图的摧破,因此,通过询问其沉默并令其开口,我的意图应能实现——为显示国王在此处的这一意图,而说“然而在象中……”等。以“以何因”表明“kiṃ”是询问原因的虚词,显示“你为何沉默,是什么原因”之义。为从中提取可能的原因并显示意图,而说“这些……”等。其意图是:如同这些——即“你是否因这三种原因之一而沉默?”——如此询问。显示巴利原文
157. Sabbathā tuṇhībhūtabhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘esa nāga…pe… viyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Supaṇṇoti garuḷo, garuḍo vā sakkaṭamatena. ‘‘Ḍa-ḷāna’maviseso’’ti hi tattha vadanti. Yathādhippāyaṃ na vattatīti katvā ‘‘anattho vata me’’ti vuttaṃ. Upasantassāti sabbathā saññamena upasamaṃ gatassa. Jīvakassa tuṇhībhāvo mama adhippāyassa maddanasadiso, tasmā tadeva tuṇhībhāvaṃ pucchitvā kathāpanena mama adhippāyo sampādetabboti ayamettha rañño adhippāyoti dassento ‘‘hatthimhi kho panā’’tiādimāha. Kinti kāraṇapucchāyaṃ nipātoti dasseti ‘‘kena kāraṇenā’’ti iminā, yena tuvaṃ tuṇhī, kiṃ taṃ kāraṇanti vā atthaṃ dasseti. Tattha yathāsambhavaṃ kāraṇaṃ uddharitvā adhippāyaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imesa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā etesanti etesaṃ kulūpako atthi yathā, imesaṃ nu kho tiṇṇaṃ kāraṇānaṃ aññatarena kāraṇena tuṇhī bhavasīti pucchatīti adhippāyo.
令其说话,即想要让他说话。以五体投地——此处指以五肢面向而住,即将脚、膝、肘、手、头这五肢平齐放下,面向而住,先作礼拜。虽有人引律藏言:“优波离,下座比丘礼拜上座比丘足时,应内心现起此五法而礼足……”等,并以偏袒一肩、合掌、抚足、表现敬爱恭敬作为五体投地之礼,但此处并非此意,因为远距离礼拜时,所述五肢并不具足。而此处的礼拜,是躬身、合掌、双手合拢的结合。以五体投地礼拜,是为身致敬;“我之导师……”等语,则是语致敬;依此二者前后而行,即是心致敬。虽然如来的一切威仪皆不共世间、稀有奇妙,但诸如入胎、诞生、出家、成等正觉、转法轮、双神变、从天降下等事,于诸天世间中尤为显著,无能遮止,故此处特为举出。显示巴利原文
Kathāpetīti kathāpetukāmo hoti. Pañcapatiṭṭhitenāti ettha pañcahi aṅgehi abhimukhaṃ ṭhitenāti attho, pādajāṇu kappara hattha sīsasaṅkhātāni pañca aṅgāni samaṃ katvā onāmetvā abhimukhaṃ ṭhitena paṭhamaṃ vanditvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yampi vadanti ‘‘navakatarenupāli bhikkhunā vuḍḍhatarassa bhikkhuno pāde vandantena ime pañca dhamme ajjhattaṃ upaṭṭhāpetvā pādā vanditabbā’tiādikaṃ (pari. 469) vinayapāḷimāharitvā ekaṃsakaraṇaañjalipaggahaṇapādasambāhanapemagāravupaṭṭhāpanavasena pañcapatiṭṭhitavandanā’’ti, tametthānadhippetaṃ dūrato vandane yathāvuttapañcaṅgassa aparipuṇṇattā. Vandanā cettha paṇamanā añjalipaggahaṇakarapuṭasamāyogo. ‘‘Pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā’’ti ca kāyapaṇāmo vutto, ‘‘mama satthuno’’tiādinā pana vacīpaṇāmo, tadubhayapurecarānucaravasena manopaṇāmoti. Kāmaṃ sabbāpi tathāgatassa paṭipatti anaññasādhāraṇā acchariyabbhutarūpāva, tathāpi gabbhokkanti abhijāti abhinikkhamana abhisambodhi dhammacakkappavattana (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; paṭi. ma. 3.30) yamakapāṭihāriyadevorohanāni sadevake loke ativiya supākaṭāni, na sakkā kenaci paṭibāhitunti tāniyevettha uddhaṭāni.
如是成就、得达此种状态者,名为“如是成为者”(itthambhūta);对此的陈述,即是“如是成为者之陈述”(itthambhūtākhyāna),此义即为“如是成为者陈述之义”。或解:依如是之方式而成为、而生起,故名“如是成为者”,意为“如是之类”;对其陈述,即是“如是成为者之陈述”,此即“如是成为者陈述之义”;于此义中,用“业格”(upayogavacana),此即其含义。在“abbhuggato”(已超出、已升起)一词中,前缀“abhi”主要表“如是成为者陈述之义”,为不变介词(kammappavacanīya),因为它显示了超越而后升起的动作形态。因此,从语法运用上看,“taṃ kho pana bhagavantaṃ”(彼世尊)此一业格形式,虽本具“属格义”(sāmiattha),却因以次要方式表示“如是成为者陈述之义”,故说为“在如是成为者陈述的意义中”。正因如此,才释言“其义为:彼世尊的”。难道不是像“sādhu devadatto mātaram abhi”(提婆达多对母亲真好)……?显示巴利原文
Itthaṃ imaṃ pakāraṃ bhūto pattoti itthambhūto, tassa ākhyānaṃ itthambhūtākhyānaṃ, soyevattho itthambhūtākhyānattho. Atha vā itthaṃ evaṃpakāro bhūto jātoti itthambhūto, tādisoti ākhyānaṃ itthambhūtākhyānaṃ, tadevattho itthambhūtākhyānattho, tasmiṃ upayogavacananti attho. Abbhuggatoti ettha hi abhisaddo padhānavasena itthambhūtākhyānatthajotako kammappavacanīyo abhibhavitvā uggamanakiriyāpakārassa dīpanato, tena payogato ‘‘taṃ kho pana bhagavanta’’nti idaṃ upayogavacanaṃ sāmiatthe samānampi appadhānavasena itthambhūtākhyānatthadīpanato ‘‘itthambhūtākhyānatthe’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘tassa kho pana bhagavatoti attho’’ti. Nanu ca ‘‘sādhu devadatto mātaramabhī’’ti ettha viya ‘‘taṃ kho pana bhagavanta’’nti ettha abhisaddo appayutto, kathamettha taṃpayogato upayogavacanaṃ siyāti? Atthato payuttattā. Atthasaddapayogesu hi atthapayogoyeva padhānoti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā ‘‘sādhu devadatto mātaramabhī’’ti ettha abhisaddapayogato itthambhūtākhyāne upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ, evamidhāpi ‘‘taṃ kho pana bhagavantaṃ abhi evaṃ kalyāṇo kittisaddo uggato’’ti abhisaddapayogato itthambhūtākhyāne upayogavacanaṃ katanti. Yathā hi ‘‘sādhu devadatto mātaramabhī’’ti ettha ‘‘devadatto mātaramabhi mātuvisaye, mātuyā vā sādhū’’ti evaṃ adhikaraṇatthe, sāmiatthe vā bhummavacanassa, sāmivacanassa vā pasaṅge itthambhūtākhyānajotakena kammappavacanīyena abhisaddena payogato upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ, evamidhāpi sāmiatthe sāmivacanappasaṅge yathā ca tattha ‘‘devadatto mātuvisaye, mātu sambandhī vā sādhuttappakārappatto’’ti ayamattho viññāyati, evamidhāpi ‘‘bhagavato sambandhī kittisaddo abbhuggato abhibhavitvā uggamanappakārappatto’’ti ayamattho viññāyati. Tattha hi devadattaggahaṇaṃ viya idha kittisaddaggahaṇaṃ, ‘‘mātara’’nti vacanaṃ viya ‘‘bhagavanta’’nti vacanaṃ, sādhusaddo viya uggatasaddo veditabbo.
“Kalyāṇo”(善好)即“贤善的”。其善好性在于以善功德为所缘,故说为“具足善功德”,意即因以善功德为所缘而具足善功德。此中,“具足”即是以彼为所缘;因以善功德为所缘,故称为“依止于彼”,此即意旨。“Seṭṭho”(最胜)这一同义词,亦可依同理而解。所谓名声之最胜,正是以最胜功德为所缘,正如“bhagavā一词是最胜的,bhagavā一词是无上的”等语所显。由于功德以“阿拉汉、正自觉者”等宣说,且可被称扬,故说“名声”即是“称扬”。确实,功德因可被称扬而得名为“kitti”(名声),因可被听闻而得名为“sadda”(音声)。“sadda”一词是“kitti”的同义词,如“那些具足功德、勤修苦行的仙人,拥有洪亮音声”所示。依名声而生起的音声,称为“kittisaddo”(名声之音);为显示其别义,而说为“thutighoso”(赞叹之声)。此处,“kittisaddo”乃是“thuti”(赞叹)的同义词,即称扬、赞叹。依赞叹而发出的音声,即是“thutighoso”,意为赞叹之喧扬。“abhi”前缀表……显示巴利原文
Kalyāṇoti bhaddako. Kalyāṇabhāvo cassa kalyāṇaguṇavisayatāyāti āha ‘‘kalyāṇaguṇasamannāgato’’ti, kalyāṇehi guṇehi samannāgato tabbisayatāya yuttoti attho. Taṃ visayatā hettha samannāgamo, kalyāṇaguṇavisayatāya tannissitoti adhippāyo. Seṭṭhoti pariyāyavacanepi eseva nayo. Seṭṭhaguṇavisayatā eva hi kittisaddassa seṭṭhatā ‘‘bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, bhagavāti vacanamuttama’’ntiādīsu (visuddhi. 1.142; pārā. aṭṭha. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā; udā. aṭṭha. 1; itivu. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā; mahāni. aṭṭha. 49) viya. ‘‘Arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’tiādinā guṇānaṃ saṃkittanato, saddanīyato ca vaṇṇoyeva kittisaddo nāmāti āha ‘‘kittiyevā’’ti. Vaṇṇo eva hi kittetabbato kitti, saddanīyato saddoti ca vuccati. Kittipariyāyo hi saddasaddo yathā ‘‘uḷārasaddā isayo, guṇavanto tapassino’’ti. Kittivasena pavatto saddo kittisaddoti bhinnādhikaraṇataṃ dasseti ‘‘thutighoso’’ti iminā. Kittisaddo hettha thutipariyāyo kittanamabhitthavanaṃ kittīti. Thutivasena pavatto ghoso thutighoso, abhitthavudāhāroti attho. Abhisaddo abhibhavane, abhibhavanañcettha ajjhottharaṇamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘ajjhottharitvā’’ti, anaññasādhāraṇe guṇe ārabbha pavattattā abhibyāpetvāti attho. Kinti-saddo abbhuggatoti codanāya ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādimāhāti anusandhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kintī’’ti vuttaṃ.
词与词的连接即是词句关联。所谓“So bhagavā”(彼世尊),即指那位圆满了三十种波罗蜜、摧破一切烦恼、证悟无上正自觉者,他是诸天中最胜之天、诸帝释中最胜之帝释、诸梵天中最胜之梵天、世间之怙主;因具足吉祥等因由,在含摄天人的世间中,其“世尊”(bhagavā)的名号广为人知——他便是世尊。由于“ya”和“ta”这两个词恒常关联,而开头的“bhagavā”一词,是对导师名号的称扬。因此,具寿法将(Dhammasenāpati)说:“bhagavā这个名号,非母亲所取,非父亲所取”等。然其后的“bhagavā”一词,则是对功德的称扬。为了显示如同修行业处者将“itipi”一词分别用于“阿罗汉”等九个处所来随念佛陀功德,此处同样以宣说佛功德的方式来称扬,故说“itipi arahaṃ……乃至……itipi bhagavā”。如此,以“阿罗汉”等九个词,那些在含摄天人的世间中极为昭彰、众所周知的佛陀功德,便以种种方式被阐明,因为“itipi”这两个词表明了它。显示巴利原文
Padānaṃ sambajjhanaṃ padasambandho. So bhagavāti yo so samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbakilese bhañjitvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho devānamatidevo sakkānamatisakko brahmānamatibrahmā lokanātho bhāgyavantatādīhi kāraṇehi sadevake loke ‘‘bhagavā’’ti patthaṭakittisaddo, so bhagavā. Yaṃ taṃ-saddā hi niccasambandhā. ‘‘Bhagavā’’ti ca idamādipadaṃ satthu nāmakittanaṃ. Tenāha āyasmā dhammasenāpati ‘‘bhagavāti netaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kataṃ, na pitarā kata’’ntiādi (mahāni. 6; cūḷani. 2). Parato pana ‘‘bhagavā’’ti padaṃ guṇakittanaṃ. Yathā kammaṭṭhānikena‘‘araha’’ntiādīsu navasu ṭhānesu paccekaṃ itipisaddaṃ yojetvā buddhaguṇā anussarīyanti, evamidha buddhaguṇasaṃkittakenāpīti dassento ‘‘itipi arahaṃ…pe… itipi bhagavā’’ti āha. Evañhi sati‘‘araha’’ntiādīhi navahi padehi ye sadevake loke ativiya pākaṭā paññātā buddhaguṇā, te nānappakārato vibhāvitā honti ‘‘itipī’’ti padadvayena tesaṃ nānappakāratādīpanato. ‘‘Itipetaṃ bhūtaṃ, itipetaṃ taccha’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.6) viya hi iti-saddo idha āsannapaccakkhakaraṇattho, pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho, tena ca nesaṃ nānappakārabhāvo dīpito, tāni ca guṇasallakkhaṇakāraṇāni saddhāsampannānaṃ viññujātikānaṃ paccakkhāni honti, tasmā tāni saṃkittentena viññunā cittassa sammukhībhūtāneva katvā saṃkittetabbānīti dassento ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti āha. Evañhi nirūpetvā kittente yassa saṃkitteti, tassa bhagavati ativiya pasādo hoti.
“远离”者,指从烦恼极远地脱离。“敌”者,指烦恼之敌。“辐”者,指轮回之轮的辐条。“已摧毁”者,指已被破坏、粉碎。“资具等”者,指衣等资具以及殊胜供养。“无隐秘”者,指无眼等诸根的隐秘。所谓“无隐秘”,是超越词语本身,指全无隐秘的恶行。如此,所期望的意义也能获得。因此,应从《清净道论》及《清净道论注·胜义宝函》中取其广解。显示巴利原文
Ārakattāti kilesehi suvidūrattā. Arīnanti kilesārīnaṃ. Arānanti saṃsāracakkassa arānaṃ. Hatattāti viddhaṃsitattā. Paccayādīnanti cīvarādipaccayānañceva pūjā visesānañca. Rahābhāvāti cakkhurahādīnamabhāvato. Rahopāpakaraṇābhāvo hi padamanatikkamma rahābhāvoti vuttaṃ. Evampi hi yathādhippetamattho labbhatīti. Tatoti visuddhimaggato (visuddhi. 1.123). Yathā ca visuddhimaggato, evaṃ taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāya paramatthamañjūsāyaṃ (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.124) nesaṃ vitthāro gahetabbo.
由于耆婆迦多次近侍导师,听闻佛德而安住,又因已见真谛,对导师教法断除疑惑,并于说佛德时获得无畏,故而他能如此详尽地宣说,因此文中说“耆婆迦却”等。又以“此处且”等文句,说明其能力之义。所谓“力”即说法智,而“力量”则指十力智。“无畏惧”是中性词,意为无有顾虑。显示巴利原文
Yasmā jīvako bahuso satthu santike buddhaguṇe sutvā ṭhito, diṭṭhasaccatāya ca satthusāsane vigatakathaṃkatho, satthuguṇakathane ca vesārajjappatto, tasmā so evaṃ vitthārato eva āhāti vuttaṃ ‘‘jīvako panā’’tiādi. ‘‘Ettha cā’’tiādinā sāmatthiyatthamāha. Thāmo desanāñāṇameva, balaṃ pana dasabalañāṇaṃ. Vissatthanti bhāvanapuṃsakapadaṃ, anāsaṅkanti attho.
“五种”是指以微小等为起始的五种类别。由于已作功德,无间断地遍满。因为业障,国王的功德身已受损毁。为何他唯独命令耆婆迦准备出行?因此说“以此”等。显示巴利原文
Pañcavaṇṇāyāti khuddikādivasena pañcapakārāya. Nirantaraṃ phuṭaṃ ahosi katādhikārabhāvato. Kammantarāyavasena hissa rañño guṇasarīraṃ khatūpahataṃ hoti. Kasmā panesa jīvakameva gamanasajjāya āṇāpetīti āha ‘‘imāyā’’tiādi.
158 说了“最上”之后,为了显示此处不仅以最上性为原因,也以少声性为原因,便说“马、车、乘舆”等。关于象乘,只取不混杂的,母象也令其适宜。“随步”是指紧随而行,将前行象乘的足迹作为他们的足迹,这里的“步”字用于足迹之义。“已寂灭”指一切烦恼热恼已止息。“于诸寂灭者”中,由于少声,声音的扰动已止息。显示巴利原文
158. ‘‘Uttama’’nti vatvā na kevalaṃ uttamabhāvoyevettha kāraṇaṃ, atha kho appasaddatāpīti dassetuṃ ‘‘assayānarathayānānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Hatthiyānesu ca nibbisevanameva gaṇhanto hatthiniyopi kappāpesi. Padānupadanti padamanugataṃ padaṃ purato gacchantassa hatthiyānassa pade tesaṃ padaṃ katvā, padasaddo cettha padavaḷañje. Nibbutassāti sabbakilesadarathavūpasamassa . Nibbutehevāti appasaddatāya saddasaṅkhobhanavūpasameheva.
“Kareṇū”是母象的同义词。因为发出“kaṇa”声,故为kareṇu;或者如karova,无长牙者为kareṇu;也有读作“kareṇukā”,依词源学方法成就其词。乘骑的准备就是铺设象褥等物。“Opavayha”是指能承载国王的。也有读作“Opaguyha”,意为能保护、守护国王的。“据说如此”等是显示智者的特性。“谈论进行”是指因得到机会而进行法谈。阿阇梨法护长老说:“为了消除国王的疑虑,以近侍的身份让妇女坐在母象中。”而在注释中则说:“依止妇女,男子没有恐惧,我将快乐地由妇女围绕而行”,这其中已说明了原因。然而,阿阇梨或许这样说:也应有此原因。为了显示国王对他人难以接近,令他们穿着男子装束,手持武器。“hatthinikāsatāni”中,母象即hatthinikā。某处读作“五百母象”,这不合理;如同“约五百比丘”等例,这类词的后分应视为复合词。在聚集的大众中,任何一人也成为其余人未来道果的近因,因此说“这将为大众带来利益”。显示巴利原文
Kareṇūti hatthinipariyāyavacanaṃ. Kaṇati saddaṃ karotīti hi kareṇu, karova yassā, na dīgho dantoti vā kareṇu,‘‘kareṇukā’’tipi pāṭho, niruttinayena padasiddhi. Ārohanasajjanaṃ kuthādīnaṃ bandhanameva. Opavayhanti rājānamupavahituṃ samatthaṃ. ‘‘Opaguyha’’ntipi paṭhanti, rājānamupagūhituṃ gopituṃ samatthanti attho. ‘‘Evaṃ kirassā’’tiādi paṇḍitabhāvavibhāvanaṃ. Kathā vattatīti laddhokāsabhāvena dhammakathā pavattati. ‘‘Rañño āsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ āsannacārībhāvena hatthinīsu itthiyo nisajjāpitā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.158) ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘itthiyo nissāya purisānaṃ bhayaṃ nāma natthi, sukhaṃ itthiparivuto gamissāmī’’ti tattha kāraṇaṃ vuttameva. Imināpi kāraṇena bhavitabbanti pana ācariyena evaṃ vuttaṃ siyā. Rañño paresaṃ dūrupasaṅkamanabhāvadassanatthaṃ tā purisavesaṃ gāhāpetvā āvudhahatthā kāritā. Hatthinikāsatānīti ettha hatthiniyo eva hatthinikā. ‘‘Pañca hatthiniyā satānī’’tipi katthaci pāṭho, so ayuttova ‘‘pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehī’’tiādīsu (pārā. 1) viya īdisesu pacchimapadassa samāsasseva dassanato. Kassacidevāti sannipatite mahājane yassa kassaci eva, tadaññesampi āyatiṃ maggaphalānamupanissayoti āha ‘‘sā mahājanassa upakārāya bhavissatī’’ti.
“回报”,即告知。“近用言”,仅是世间的言说,因其未达所指之义究竟。故说:“你随自己的喜好去做吧。”依此说,其义方得究竟。“你思量”,即你自然知道。“那”,即去与来。若想去,便去;若不想去,便不去,在此唯依你自己的喜好。显示巴利原文
Paṭivedesīti ñāpesi. Upacāravacananti vohāravacanamattaṃ teneva adhippetatthassa apariyosānato . Tenāha ‘‘tadeva attano ruciyā karohī’’ti. Imināyeva hi tadatthapariyosānaṃ. Maññasīti pakatiyāva jānāsi. Tadevāti gamanāgamanameva. Yadi gantukāmo, gaccha, atha na gantukāmo, mā gaccha, attano ruciyevettha pamāṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.
159 “各别”,依连声而各自。“大”一词中,因在具格意义上用为主格,故说“以大”。大的状态即为“大性”。不仅依随鼻音尾的读法,也依随长ā尾的读法,故说“也有读作mahaccā”。如同应说“刹帝利”而说为“刹亚”,应说“以大者”而说为mahatyā,再附加上ca音,以连声成就mahaccā。本应以阳性表达,却以阴性表达,此为词性的颠倒,因为形容词多随所修饰词的词性等而变化。“三百由旬”,指各各周围三百由旬。“两大国的主权荣华”,指盎伽国与摩揭陀国的主权。以“彼”等语开显其义。“缠头巾”,即绑缚于头上的头巾。“挂剑”,即悬挂于肩上而佩带的剑。“宝柄矛”,即宝柄之钩。显示巴利原文
159. Pāṭiekkāyeva sandhivasena paccekā. ‘‘Mahañca’’nti pade karaṇatthe paccattavacananti āha ‘‘mahatā’’ti. Mahantassa bhāvo mahañcaṃ. Na kevalaṃ niggahītantavaseneva pāṭho, atha kho ākārantavasenāpīti āha ‘‘mahaccātipi pāḷī’’ti. Yathā ‘‘khattiyā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘khatyā’’ti, evaṃ ‘‘mahatiyā’’ti vattabbe mahatyā. Puna ca-kāraṃ katvā mahaccāti sandhivasena padasiddhi. Pulliṅgavasena vattabbe itthiliṅgavasena vipallāso liṅgavipariyāyo. Visesanañhi bhiyyo visesyaliṅgādigāhakaṃ. Tiyojanasatānanti paccekaṃ tiyojanasataparimaṇḍalānaṃ. Dvinnaṃ mahāraṭṭhānaṃ issariyasirīti aṅgamagadharaṭṭhānamādhipaccamāha. Tadatthaṃ vivarati ‘‘tassā’’tiādinā. Paṭimukkaveṭhanānīti ābandhasiroveṭhanāni. Āsattakhaggānīti aṃse olambanavasena sannaddhāsīni. Maṇidaṇḍatomareti maṇidaṇḍaṅkuse.
通过“aparāpī”等词句,说明了随扈的围绕。驼背与侏儒是以身形特征,基拉塔人、萨瓦拉人、安达卡人等是以种族,被指明为她们的侍从。“Vissāsikapurisā”一词,是就亲信侍从而说。“mahāmattā”,指那些因家族、财富与权势等而分量极大者,即具大威势的王臣。“如Vijjādharataruṇā”,指以咒术威力成就明咒神变的持明童子。“Raṭṭhiyaputtā”,即Bhoja之子。因猎人们在国土中侍奉,故称他们属于Raṭṭhiyā;又因他们熟悉各种武器,成为王的侍从,其子便依此得名。或者,Raṭṭhiyaputtā指中部国土的Bhojaka之子,即刹帝利种姓的Bhoja王。应知,如此处所说,bhoja一词是指bhojaka。Ussāpetvā,即向上举起。Jayasadda,指“愿大王胜利”等与胜利相关之声。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aparāpī’’tiādinā padasā parivārā vuttā. Khujjavāmanakā vesavasena, kirātasavaraandhakādayo jātivasena tāsaṃ paricārakiniyo dassitā. Vissāsikapurisāti vassavare sandhāyāha. Kulabhogaissariyādivasena mahatī mattā pamāṇametesanti mahāmattā, mahānubhāvā rājāmaccā. Vijjādharataruṇā viyāti mantānubhāvena vijjāmayiddhisampannā vijjādharakumārakā viya. Raṭṭhiyaputtāti bhojaputtā. Raṭṭhe paricarantīti hi luddakā raṭṭhiyā, tesaṃ nānāvudhaparicayatāya rājabhaṭabhūtā puttāti attho, antararaṭṭhabhojakānaṃ vā puttā raṭṭhiyaputtā, khattiyā bhojarājāno. ‘‘Anuyuttā bhavantu te’’tiādīsu viya hi ṭīkāyaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.159) vutto bhojasaddo bhojakavācakoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ussāpetvāti uddhaṃ pasāretvā. Jayasaddanti ‘‘jayatu mahārājā’’tiādijayapaṭibaddhaṃ saddaṃ. Dhanupantiparikkhepoti dhanupantiparivāro. Sabbattha taṃgāhakavasena veditabbo. Hatthighaṭāti hatthisamūhā. Paharamānāti phusamānā. Aññamaññasaṅghaṭṭanāti avicchedagamanena aññamaññasambandhā. Seṇiyoti gandhikaseṇīdussikaseṇīādayo ‘‘anapaloketvā rājānaṃ vā saṅghaṃ vā gaṇaṃ vā pūgaṃ vā seṇiṃ vā aññatra kappā vuṭṭhāpeyyā’’tiādīsu (pāci. 682) viya. ‘‘Aṭṭhārasa akkhobhiṇī seniyo’’ti katthaci likhanti, so anekesupi potthakesu na diṭṭho. Anekasaṅkhyā ca senā heṭṭhā gaṇitāti ayuttoyeva. Tadā sabbāvudhato sarova dūragāmīti katvā sarapatanātikkamappamāṇena rañño parisaṃ saṃvidahati. Kimatthanti āha ‘‘sace’’tiādi.
就“自身怖畏”之义而言,心之惊骇即是怖畏,如此说“他怖畏”。是在应怖畏的所缘上,当怖畏现起时,以“此是应怖畏”的应怖畏方式去审察,此智即是怖畏,如此说“以怖畏审察怖畏”。因此《清净道论》说:“然而,怖畏现起智是怖畏,还是不怖畏?它并不怖畏。它仅仅审察‘过去诸行已灭,现在诸行正在灭,未来诸行必将灭’。”依“怖畏所缘”之义,所缘即是怖畏,如此说“怖畏此”。依“怖畏之因”之义,惭愧即是怖畏,如此说“怖畏恶”。“Bhayanaka”意为怖畏相。“Tepi”即长寿诸天。法之开示,即是以十五种行相庄严五蕴的法之开示。“Yebhuyyena”是就除了漏尽者以外的诸天,依多数而言。因为漏尽者不会生起心的惊骇与怖畏。虽然在《狮子喻经注》中,亦依其作用而说心的惊骇与怖畏,但此处依据本论之理,唯取智之怖畏。悚惧,即与惭愧俱生的智。战栗,即全面的惊惧。以应怖畏之义故,为怖畏;以可怖畏之义故,为Bherava。怖畏与可怖畏,即应怖畏的境界。故说“来临”,其意为:“此可怖畏的境界必临此人”。显示巴利原文
Sayaṃ bhāyanaṭṭhena cittutrāso bhayaṃ yathā tathā bhāyatīti katvā. Bhāyitabbe eva vatthusmiṃ bhayato upaṭṭhite ‘‘bhāyitabbamida’’nti bhāyitabbākārena tīraṇato ñāṇaṃ bhayaṃ bhayato tīretīti katvā. Tenevāha visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.751) ‘‘bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇaṃ pana bhāyati, na bhāyatīti? Na bhāyati. Tañhi ‘atītā saṅkhārā niruddhā, paccuppannā nirujjhanti, anāgatā nirujjhissantī’ti tīraṇamattameva hotī’’ti. Bhāyanaṭṭhānaṭṭhena ārammaṇaṃ bhayaṃ bhāyati etasmāti katvā. Bhāyanahetuṭṭhena ottappaṃ bhayaṃ pāpato bhāyati etenāti katvā. Bhayānakanti bhāyanākāro. Tepīti dīghāyukā devāpi. Dhammadesananti pañcasu khandhesu pannarasalakkhaṇapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ dhammadesanaṃ. Yebhuyyenāti ṭhapetvā khīṇāsavadeve tadaññesaṃ vasena bāhullato. Khīṇāsavattā hi tesaṃ cittutrāsabhayampi na uppajjati. Kāmaṃ sīhopamasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.33) cittutrāsabhayampi tadatthabhāvena vuttaṃ, idha pana pakaraṇānurūpato ñāṇabhayameva gahitaṃ. Saṃveganti sahottappañāṇaṃ. Santāsanti sabbaso ubbijjanaṃ. Bhāyitabbaṭṭhena bhayameva bhīmabhāvena bheravanti bhayabheravaṃ, bhītabbavatthu. Tenāha ‘‘āgacchatī’’ti, etaṃ naraṃ taṃ bhayabheravaṃ āgacchati nūnāti attho.
“智者称赞畏怯者”——智者因见其于恶行生起怖畏与忌惮,而称赞这样的畏怯者。“因为在彼中,非为勇者”——在造作此恶行之中,对于勇猛、轻率、傲慢之人,智者们绝不称赞。因此说:“贤者因怖畏,故不行恶事。”此处,“怖畏”即因恶行而惊恐,义为以惭愧为因。显示巴利原文
Bhīruṃ pasaṃsantīti pāpato bhāyanato utrāsanato bhīruṃ pasaṃsanti paṇḍitā. Na hi tattha sūranti tasmiṃ pāpakaraṇe sūraṃ pagabbhadhaṃsinaṃ na hi pasaṃsanti. Tenāha ‘‘bhayā hi santo na karonti pāpa’’nti. Tattha bhayāti pāputrāsato, ottappahetūti attho.
“Chambhitassa”为“呆滞”之意,是以cha音取代了tha音。为阐明此义,故解释为“全身颤动”,其意谓因恐惧而引致全身战栗。“交战”,即为互相搏杀。显示巴利原文
Chambhitassāti thambhitassa, tha-kārassa cha-kārādeso. Tadatthamāha ‘‘sakalasarīracalana’’nti, bhayavasena sakalakāyapakampananti attho. Uyyodhanaṃ sampahāro.
“Eke”指的是住于北寺者。“Rājagahe”等句,是阐明他们的意趣。每座大城门内各设两重,共计六十四座小门。以“tadā”等句,于无因可寻处显示其缘由。显示巴利原文
Eketi uttaravihāravāsino. ‘‘Rājagahe’’tiādi tesamadhippāyavivaraṇaṃ. Ekekasmiṃ mahādvāre dve dve katvā catusaṭṭhi khuddakadvārāni. ‘‘Tadā’’tiādinā akāraṇabhāve hetuṃ dasseti.
此处为阐明自宗义理,故有“ayaṃ panā”等语。“Jīvako kirā”等,是显示疑虑之相。“Assa”,指阿阇世王。Ukkaṇṭhito,即不喜。意为:他思忖着想要举起伞盖,此处作如是连接。Bhāyitvā,即以怖畏为因。“Tassa”,指耆婆。Sammasadda与samāna同义,且因年龄相同,故说“vayassābhilāpo”(同龄之称)。与年龄相同者,即vayasso,如“一王金色”之说。语法家欲以sā取代samāna一词,故此为ālapana(称谓),是一种俗语的表达方式,如称“mārisā”(尊者)。如同“mārisā”本是对无苦者的称呼,但即便对于受苦的地狱众生亦如此称唤,例如“尊者,当铁钉与你的心相遇时”等处;同样地,无论朋友年龄同否皆可称“sammā”,因此其义唯是“朋友”的称呼。“Kacci na vañcesī”应与巴利原文结合理解。虽言“na palambhesi”,但此处仅是推测之意,故说“na vippalambheyyāsi”,意为莫要欺诳。Kathāya sallāpo为交谈,其语音。显示巴利原文
Idāni sakavādaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ayaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Jīvako kirā’’tiādi āsaṅkanākāradassanaṃ. Assāti ajātasatturañño. Ukkaṇṭhitoti anabhirato. Chattaṃ ussāpetukāmo maññeti sambandho . Bhāyitvāti bhāyanahetu. Tassāti jīvakassa. Sammasaddo samānattho, samānabhāvo ca vayenāti āha ‘‘vayassābhilāpo’’ti. Vayena samāno vayasso yathā ‘‘ekarājā harissavaṇṇo’’ti (jā. 1.2.17). Samānasaddassa hi sādesamicchanti saddavidū, tena abhilāpo ālapanaṃ tathā, ruḷhīniddeso esa, ‘‘mārisā’’ti ālapanamiva. Yathā hi mārisāti niddukkhatābhilāpo sadukkhepi nerayike vuccati ‘‘yadā kho te mārisa saṅkunā saṅku hadaye samāgaccheyyā’’tiādīsu, (ma. ni. 1.512) evaṃ yo koci sahāyo asamānavayopi ‘‘sammā’’ti vuccatīti, tasmā sahāyābhilāpo icceva attho. Kacci na vañcesīti pāḷiyā sambandho. ‘‘Na palambhesī’’ti vuttepi idha parikappatthova sambhavatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘na vippalambheyyāsī’’ti, na palobheyyāsīti attho. Kathāya sallāpo, so eva nigghoso tathā.
‘毁灭’,即因内心恼乱而遭困厄。针对‘天神不(守护)彼’等语,故说‘坚定地(作意)’。以‘急忙’一语,显示此乃因事态紧迫而叠语。在说完‘前进,大王’之后,为了说明其中缘由,故接着有‘他们’等语。在揭示连贯的义理时,便说明:‘大王,有所谓贼军’等。显示巴利原文
Vinasseyyāti cittavighātena vihaññeyya. ‘‘Na taṃ devā’’tiādivacanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘daḷhaṃ katvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Turitavasenidamāmeḍitanti dasseti ‘‘taramānovā’’ti iminā. ‘‘Abhikkama mahārājā’’ti vatvā tattha kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ete’’tiādi vuttanti sasambandhamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘mahārāja corabalaṃ nāmā’’tiādimāha.
沙门果问释义显示巴利原文
Sāmaññaphalapucchāvaṇṇanā
160 此门外门楼之处,名为象地。因此说“精舍”等语。世尊之威势,即佛陀之神力。犹如婆罗门种德前往世尊处、进入林中深处时,威光遍照王身。所谓“忆念己过,生大恐怖”,这是流汗的原因。然而,佛陀之神力实不能令人流汗,因为它是身心轻安之因。显示巴利原文
160. Ayaṃ bahidvārakoṭṭhakokāso nāgassa bhūmi nāma. Tenāha ‘‘vihārassā’’tiādi. Bhagavato tejoti buddhānubhāvo. Rañño sarīraṃ phari yathā taṃ soṇadaṇḍassa brāhmaṇassa bhagavato santikaṃ āgacchantassa antovanasaṇḍagatassa. ‘‘Attano aparādhaṃ saritvā mahābhayaṃ uppajjī’’ti idaṃ sedamuñcanassa kāraṇadassanaṃ. Na hi buddhānubhāvato sedamuñcanaṃ sambhavati kāyacittapassaddhihetubhāvato.
“一者”是指唯有北寺的住众。为显示那也不妥当,便说“依此”等语。“象师”指射手。“护财”即那罗耆梨象。那时,那头象从城中居民那里获得所供养的财物积累,因此被称为“护财”。不单是因为曾经见过,为显示世尊本就是众所周知,故说“世尊实为”等语。“以殊胜相好而遍布”是就三十二大人相而言。“以随好而庄严”指八十种随形好(详见于《胜者庄严疏》中吉祥生所赞叹之处)。“以六彩光明”即当时所放之光明。“以统御者之威仪”意指以自在之安详仪态。或许有人会质疑:在世尊面前以统御者的姿态问询,岂非无礼?为回应此问难,故说“此乃本性”等语,意指依其本性而问,所以并非无礼。虽然围绕而坐的比丘僧团先前也曾如此,但就实际而言,他是坐在他们面前,因此说“围绕”等语。显示巴利原文
Eketi uttaravihāravāsinoyeva. Tadayuttamevāti dasseti ‘‘iminā’’tiādinā. Abhimāreti dhanuggahe. Dhanapālanti nāḷāgiriṃ. So hi tadā nāgarehi pūjitadhanarāsino labbhanato ‘‘dhanapālo’’ti voharīyati. Na kevalaṃ diṭṭhapubbatoyeva, atha kho pakatiyāpi bhagavā saññātoti dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādimāha. Ākiṇṇavaralakkhaṇoti battiṃsa mahāpurisalakkhaṇe sandhāyāha. Anubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitoti asītānubyañjane (jinālaṅkāraṭīkāya vijātamaṅgalavaṇṇanāyaṃ vitthāro). Chabbaṇṇāhi rasmīhīti tadā vattamānā rasmiyo. Issariyalīḷāyāti issariyavilāsena. Nanu ca bhagavato santike issariyalīlāya pucchā agāravoyeva siyāti codanāya ‘‘pakati hesā’’tiādimāha, pakatiyā pucchanato na agāravoti adhippāyo. Parivāretvā nisinnena bhikkhusaṅghena pure katepi atthato tassa purato nisinno nāma. Tenāha ‘‘parivāretvā’’tiādi.
161 “Yena, tena”是处格用作具格的情况,用“yattha, tattha”来说明这一含义。因为“yena maṇḍalassa dvāraṃ, tenūpasaṅkamīti”这表述已经表明了到达的状态,所以此处只说“已往近”才是恰当的。在适当的一处地方,即明智之人所站立之处。那么,什么是这个适当的地方呢?就是远离了过远等六种坐处过失的地方,或是远离了后侧等八种坐处过失的地方。正如注疏师们所说——显示巴利原文
161.Yena, tenāti ca bhummatthe karaṇavacananti dasseti ‘‘yattha, tatthā’’ti iminā. Yena maṇḍalassa dvāraṃ, tenūpasaṅkamīti sampattabhāvassa vuttattā idha upagamanameva yuttanti āha ‘‘upagato’’ti. Anucchavike ekasmiṃ padeseti yattha viññujātikā aṭṭhaṃsu, tasmiṃ. Ko panesa anucchavikapadeso nāma? Atidūratādichanisajjadosavirahito padeso, napacchatādiaṭṭhanisajjadosavirahito vā. Yathāhu aṭṭhakathācariyā –
不在身后,不在面前,亦非过近或过远;
不在腋下,不在逆风处,亦非低洼或高耸之地;
遍离这些过失后,他们安住于适当之处。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na pacchato na purato, nāpi āsannadūrato; Na kacche no paṭivāte, na cāpi onatunnate; Ime dose vissajjetvā, ekamantaṃ ṭhitā ahū’’ti. (khu. pā. aṭṭha. evamiccādipāṭhavaṇṇanā; su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.261);
当时,为了显示比丘僧团的寂静状态无余遍满,而说“寂静、寂静”这一表示周遍的重复语,即“无论何处……唯有……”,意为“无论何处的比丘”。手的躁动不安,即是不加约束、不正知的举动。足的躁动不安也是如此。语助词“或”表示未说尽的选项,由此显示眼、耳等其他感官的躁动也不存在。然而其中,眼的躁动为一切之首且最难防护,故为了显明其也无有,而说“以一切庄严具严饰”等语。显示巴利原文
Tadā bhikkhusaṅghe tuṇhībhāvassa anavasesato byāpitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tuṇhībhūtaṃ tuṇhībhūta’’nti vicchāvacanaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘yato…pe… mevā’’ti, yato yato bhikkhutoti attho. Hatthena, hatthassa vā kukatabhāvo hatthakukkuccaṃ, asaññamo, asampajaññakiriyā ca. Tathā pādakukkuccanti etthāpi. Vā-saddo avuttavikappane, tena tadaññopi cakkhusotādiasaññamo natthīti vibhāvito. Tattha pana cakkhuasaṃyamo sabbapaṭhamo dunnivārito cāti tadabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍita’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
如同极清净的湖,即无浊水的湖。“由此……乃至……以此……我……乃至……成为”,这是句子的关联。由于意义的次第与音声的次第不同,所以说了“由……”等语。其中,由身寂静、语寂静所得的,意的寂静也由推论而得知,故说“亦由意之寂静”。“由戒寂静”,即是由戒律的制御。为了以世间常理证成所说之义,而说“实为难得……”等语。“得”即获得。显示巴利原文
Vippasannarahadamivāti anāvilodakasaramiva. Yenetarahi…pe… iminā me…pe… hotūti sambandho. Añño hi atthakkamo, añño saddakkamoti āha ‘‘yenā’’tiādi. Tattha kāyika-vācasikena upasamena laddhena mānasikopi upasamo anumānato laddho evāti katvā ‘‘mānasikena cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sīlūpasamenāti sīlasaññamena. Vuttamatthaṃ lokapakatiyā sādhento ‘‘dullabhañhī’’tiādimāha. Laddhāti labhitvā.
“Upasamaṃ”:即称为行仪成就的制御。以“如是”等语显示如此希求的原因。“彼”指祖父,或优陀婆陀。“虽……”等语是对其义的证成。“必将杀害”是就那时而言的,因此说“杀害了”。这是从现在的角度说的。“五重围绕”,即五位王臣的围绕。显示巴利原文
Upasamanti ācārasampattisaṅkhātaṃ saṃyamaṃ. ‘‘Eva’’ntiādinā tathā icchāya kāraṇaṃ dasseti . Soti ayyako, udayabhaddo vā. ‘‘Kiñcāpī’’tiādi tadattha-samatthanaṃ. Ghātessatiyevāti taṃkālāpekkhāya vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ghātesī’’ti. Idañhi sampatipekkhavacanaṃ. Pañcaparivaṭṭoti pañcarājaparivaṭṭo.
为何这样说呢?意思是国王并未就世尊说过任何话。“言说”一词,指如前所述感叹语的语言表达。“默然无声”是其同义词。“此……”等语句,是显示了知心意的相状。应知其关联为:了知“此……乃至……将不能”之后。“言语之后”,即感叹语之后。“以何”指在某处,或以某种方式。在“以何爱”等语句中,这个道理也同样适用。显示巴利原文
Kasmā evamāha, nanu bhagavantamuddissa rājā na kiñci vadatīti adhippāyo. Vacībhedeti yathāvuttaudānavacībhede. Tuṇhī niravoti pariyāyavacanametaṃ. ‘‘Aya’’ntiādi cittajānanākāradassanaṃ. Ayaṃ…pe… na sakkhissatīti ñatvāti sambandho. Vacanānantaranti udānavacanānantaraṃ. Yenāti yattha padese, yena vā sotapathena. Yena pemanti etthāpi yathārahamesa nayo.
对已犯过错者加以称呼,确实困难,因此说“口不能开”。或者应当这样理解:这也是针对“大王,您如所爱地前来”等语句所示,以及世尊当时以种种显明义趣的方式、具足各种理路而说的甜美言教而说的。佛陀即使只说一个意义,也随听众的智慧而施教。对此,注疏中说:“世尊没有未说出的句义,一切义都已说尽。”所谓“以五种方式”,是指在可爱与不可爱中保持平等性等五种原因。这在《大义释》中有说明——显示巴利原文
Katāparādhassa ālapanaṃ nāma dukkaranti sandhāya ‘‘mukhaṃ nappahotī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Āgamā kho tvaṃ mahārāja yathāpema’’nti vacananiddiṭṭhaṃ vā tadā tadatthadīpanākārena pavattaṃ nānānayavicittaṃ bhagavato madhuravacanampi sandhāya evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ekampi hi atthaṃ bhagavā yathā sotūnaṃ ñāṇaṃ pavattati, tathā deseti. Yaṃ sandhāya aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavatā abyākataṃ tantipadaṃ nāma natthi, sabbesaññeva atthopi bhāsito’’ti. Pañcahākārehīti iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu samabhāvādisaṅkhātehi pañcahi kāraṇehi. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāniddese (mahāni. 38, 162) –
如者以五种方式:在可爱与不可爱中,他是如者;已舍离,是如者;已超越,是如者;已解脱,是如者;依其教示,是如者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pañcahākārehi tādī iṭṭhāniṭṭhe tādī, cattāvīti tādī, tiṇṇāvīti tādī, muttāvīti tādī, taṃniddesā tādī.
何为阿罗汉于可喜与不可喜中行如是?阿罗汉于得亦如是,于不得亦如是;于称誉亦如是,于讥毁亦如是;于赞叹亦如是,于诃责亦如是;于乐亦如是,于苦亦如是。纵使有人以香涂其一臂,以刀削其一臂,于彼亦无贪染,于彼亦无嗔恚。他已断舍随顺与嗔恚,超越抬举与打压,完全越出随喜与违逆。如是,阿罗汉于可喜与不可喜中行如是。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ arahā iṭṭhāniṭṭhe tādī? Arahā lābhepi tādī, alābhepi, yasepi, ayasepi, pasaṃsāyapi, nindāyapi, sukhepi, dukkhepi tādī, ekaṃ ce bāhaṃ gandhena limpeyyuṃ, ekaṃ ce bāhaṃ vāsiyā taccheyyuṃ, amusmiṃ natthi rāgo, amusmiṃ natthi paṭighaṃ, anunayapaṭighavippahīno, ugghātinighātivītivatto, anurodhavirodhasamatikkanto, evaṃ arahā iṭṭhāniṭṭhe tādī.
何为阿罗汉以舍弃故行如是?于阿罗汉,……(中略)……慢、傲慢、骄、过慢、放逸、懈怠,一切烦恼、一切恶行、一切不安、一切热恼、一切烧灼、一切善的造作,悉皆已舍弃、已吐弃、已解脱、已断除、已舍遣。如是,阿罗汉以舍弃故行如是。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ arahā cattāvīti tādī? Arahato…pe… thambho, sārambho, māno, atimāno, mado, pamādo, sabbe kilesā, sabbe duccaritā, sabbe darathā, sabbe pariḷāhā , sabbe santāpā, sabbā kusalābhisaṅkhārā cattā vantā muttā pahīnā paṭinissaṭṭhā, evaṃ arahā cattāvīti tādī.
何为阿罗汉以超越故行如是?阿罗汉已越欲流,已越有流,已越见流,已越无明流;已越一切轮回之道,已渡出、已超脱、已度脱、已越过、已善越过、已超越。彼住于出离,行于修行,生死已尽,生死流转已尽,彼无后有。如是,阿罗汉以超越故行如是。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ arahā tiṇṇāvīti tādī? Arahā kāmoghaṃ tiṇṇo, bhavoghaṃ tiṇṇo, diṭṭhoghaṃ tiṇṇo, avijjoghaṃ tiṇṇo, sabbaṃ saṃsārapathaṃ tiṇṇo uttiṇṇo nittiṇṇo atikkanto samatikkanto vītivatto, so vuṭṭhavāso ciṇṇacaraṇo jātimaraṇasaṅkhayo, jātimaraṇasaṃsāro (mahāni. 38) natthi tassa punabbhavoti, evaṃ arahā tiṇṇāvīti tādī.
如何是阿拉汉以‘已解脱者’而成为如此者?阿拉汉的心从贪已解脱、已离脱、已善解脱;从嗔、从痴、从忿、从恨、从覆、从恼、从嫉、从悭、从诳、从谄、从慢、从傲慢、从骄、从过慢、从放逸、从懈怠、从一切烦恼、从一切恶行、从一切不安、从一切热恼、从一切烧灼、从一切不善行中,心亦解脱、离脱、善解脱。如是,阿拉汉以‘已解脱者’而成为如此者。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ arahā muttāvīti tādī? Arahato rāgā cittaṃ muttaṃ vimuttaṃ suvimuttaṃ, dosā, mohā, kodhā, upanāhā, makkhā, paḷāsā, issāya, macchariyā, māyāya, sāṭheyyā, thambhā, sārambhā, mānā, atimānā, madā, pamādā, sabbakilesehi, sabbaduccaritehi, sabbadarathehi, sabbapariḷāhehi, sabbasantāpehi, sabbākusalābhisaṅkhārehi cittaṃ muttaṃ vimuttaṃ suvimuttaṃ; evaṃ arahā muttāvīti tādī.
如何是阿拉汉以‘依彼所指者’而成为如此者?阿拉汉因有戒而成为‘具戒者’,依彼所指而如此;因有信而成为‘具信者’;因有精进而成为‘具精进者’;因有念而成为‘具念者’;因有定而成为‘具定者’;因有慧而成为‘具慧者’;因有明而成为‘三明者’;因有神通而成为‘六神通者’,依彼所指而如此。如是,阿拉汉以‘依彼所指者’而成为如此者。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ arahā taṃniddesā tādī? Arahā ‘sīle sati sīlavā’ti taṃniddesā tādī, ‘saddhāya sati saddho’ti, ‘vīriye sati vīriyavā’ti, ‘satiyā sati satimā’ti, ‘samādhimhi sati samāhito’ti, ‘paññāya sati paññavā’ti, ‘vijjāya sati tevijjo’ti, ‘abhiññāya sati chaḷabhiñño’ti taṃniddesā tādī, evaṃ arahā taṃniddesā tādī’’ti.
然而,世尊乃是一切如此者中最殊胜的如此者,因此说‘善安立’。世尊在《迦罗迦园经》中也这样说过:‘诸比丘,如是,如来于所见、所闻、所觉、所识诸法之中,正是如此者、如此者。而且,我宣告:除此如此者之外,别无其他更上或更胜的如此者。’或者,通过五种方式成就五种神通,于如此者相中善安立,这就是它的含义。此义也为尊者法将(舍利弗)在《无碍解道》中所说。显示巴利原文
Bhagavā pana sabbesampi tādīnamatisayo tādī. Tenāha ‘‘suppatiṭṭhito’’ti. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā kāḷakārāmasuttante ‘‘iti kho bhikkhave tathāgato diṭṭhasutamutaviññātabbesu dhammesu tādīyeva tādī, tamhā ca pana tādimhā añño tādī uttaritaro vā paṇītataro vā natthīti vadāmī’’ti (a. ni. 4.24). Atha vā pañcavidhāriyiddhisiddhehi pañcahākārehi tādilakkhaṇe suppatiṭṭhitoti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ āyasmatā dhammasenāpatinā paṭisambhidāmagge –
什么是圣神通?在此,比丘若欲:‘愿于可厌中住于不厌想’,便于此处住于不厌想;若欲:‘愿于不可厌中住于可厌想’,便于此处住于可厌想;若欲:‘愿于可厌与不可厌中住于不厌想’,便于此处住于不厌想;若欲:‘愿于不可厌与可厌中住于可厌想’,便于此处住于可厌想;若欲:‘愿于可厌与不可厌中,两者皆舍弃后,住于舍,具念、正知’,便于此处住于舍,具念、正知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamā ariyā iddhi? Idha bhikkhu sace ākaṅkhati ‘paṭikūle appaṭikūlasaññī vihareyya’nti, appaṭikūlasaññī tattha viharati, sace ākaṅkhati ‘appaṭikūle paṭikūlasaññī vihareyya’nti, paṭikūlasaññī tattha viharati, sace ākaṅkhati ‘paṭikūle ca appaṭikūle ca appaṭikūlasaññī vihareyya’nti, appaṭikūlasaññī tattha viharati, sace ākaṅkhati ‘appaṭikūle ca paṭikūle ca paṭikūlasaññī vihareyya’nti, paṭikūlasaññī tattha viharati, sace ākaṅkhati ‘paṭikūle ca appaṭikūle ca tadubhayaṃ abhinivajjetvā upekkhako vihareyyaṃ sato sampajāno’ti, upekkhako tattha viharati sato sampajāno’’ti (paṭi. ma. 3.17).
‘外’者,指教法之外的部类。显示巴利原文
Bahiddhāti sāsanato bahisamaye.
162 ‘此’者,是向比丘僧团礼敬的方式。为以世间共许的譬喻来阐明其义,故说‘国王’等语。‘机会’者,指应被请问之处。显示巴利原文
162.Esāti bhikkhusaṅghassa vandanākāro. Tamatthaṃ lokasiddhāya upamāya sādhetuṃ ‘‘rājāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Okāsanti pucchitabbaṭṭhānaṃ.
“于解答问题,我并无负担。”这是为了显示导师在一切处皆具无碍智行,于义理上已然成就。事实上,仅凭说出“若你希求”一语,此义便已成立。在“我将为你解答一切”中,道理亦然,因为只凭“你希求什么,就问什么”这句话,此义即已成就。这是一种不共的、一切知者的邀请。倘若不是以“当你希求时”来表述,那又如何说呢?故有“听闻”等语。应知:由于住于部分智,他们那样说;而诸佛则发出一切知者的邀请——这便是其中关联。显示巴利原文
Na me pañhavissajjane bhāro atthīti satthu sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāratāya atthato āpannāya dassanaṃ. ‘‘Yadi ākaṅkhasī’’ti vutteyeva hi esa attho āpanno hoti. Sabbaṃ te vissajjessāmīti etthāpi ayaṃ nayo. ‘‘Yaṃ ākaṅkhasi, taṃ pucchā’’ti vacaneneva hi ayamattho sijjhati. Asādhāraṇaṃ sabbaññupavāraṇanti sambandho. Yadi ‘‘yadākaṅkhasī’’ti na vadanti, atha kathaṃ vadantīti āha ‘‘sutvā’’tiādi. Padesañāṇeyeva ṭhitattā tathā vadantīti veditabbaṃ. Buddhā pana sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavārentīti sambandho.
“贤友,当你希求时,便请问吧”等经文语句,是为了说明这些语句是依于何人而说,因此才提到“夜叉、人王、天、沙门、婆罗门、游方者”。其中,“贤友,当你希求时,便请问吧”是对夜叉阿罗婆迦给予请问的机会;“大王,请提问吧”是对人王们;“婆娑婆,请提问吧”等是对诸天之帝释;“那么”等是对沙门们;“对巴婆利”等是对婆罗门们;“萨毗耶,请向我提问吧”等是对游方者们给予请问的机会——应当这样看待。“婆娑婆”是对诸天之帝释的称呼,此即《帝释问经》中的内容。所谓“你心所欲求”,即是以心来希求。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pucchāvuso yadākaṅkhasī’’tiādīni suttapadāni yesaṃ puggalānaṃ vasena āgatāni, taṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘yakkhanarindadevasamaṇabrāhmaṇaparibbājakāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha hi ‘‘pucchāvuso yadākaṅkhasī’’ti āḷavakassa yakkhassa okāsakaraṇaṃ, ‘‘puccha mahārājā’’ti narindānaṃ, ‘‘puccha vāsavā’’tiādi devānamindassa, ‘‘tena hī’’tiādi samaṇānaṃ, ‘‘bāvarissa cā’’tiādi brāhmaṇānaṃ, ‘‘puccha maṃ sabhiyā’’tiādi paribbājakānaṃ okāsakaraṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vāsavāti devānamindālapanaṃ. Tadetañhi sakkapañhasutte. Manasicchasīti manasā icchasi.
“已得机会者”——因为你们已被我给予了机会,因此,对于巴婆利、你阿逸多以及所有其余的人,不论有任何疑惑,只要随你们心中所希求的,那就那样请问吧。这是语句的关联。在此,对于巴婆利的疑惑,应运用心去请问;而对于你们所有人,无论是用心还是用其他方式,随你们所希求的,去请问吧。这是其中的意旨。因为巴婆利曾教导弟子们:“你们应当以心去请问自己的疑惑。”正如所说……显示巴利原文
Katāvakāsāti yasmā tumhe mayā katokāsā, tasmā bāvarissa ca tuyhaṃ ajitassa ca sabbesañca sesānaṃ yaṃ kiñci sabbaṃ saṃsayaṃ yathā manasā icchatha, tathā pucchavho pucchathāti yojanā. Ettha ca bāvarissa saṃsayaṃ manasā pucchavho, tumhākaṃ pana sabbesaṃ saṃsayaṃ manasā ca aññathā ca yathā icchatha, tathā pucchavhoti adhippāyo. Bāvarī hi ‘‘attano saṃsayaṃ manasāva pucchathā’’ti antevāsike āṇāpesi. Vuttañhi –
“若他将成为佛陀,成为无有遮障的见者;
对于心中所问的问题,他必将以言语作答。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Anāvaraṇadassāvī, yadi buddho bhavissati; Manasā pucchite pañhe, vācāya vissajessatī’’ti. (su. ni. 1011);
这是《到彼岸品》中所说。同样地,诸如“问我吧,萨毗耶”等语句也是如此。显示巴利原文
Tadetaṃ pārāyanavagge. Tathā ‘‘puccha maṃ sabhiyā’’tiādipi.
“佛地”指佛之阶位,即漏尽智与一切知智。“菩萨地”指菩萨之阶位,即波罗蜜资粮智;或者,“地”一词是状态的表述,意为佛之状态、菩萨之状态。因为在依一性之理转起的诸蕴中,所谓状态,正是依彼时彼相而安立。显示巴利原文
Buddhabhūminti buddhaṭṭhānaṃ, āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇañca. Bodhisattabhūmi nāma bodhisattaṭṭhānaṃ pāramīsambharaṇañāṇaṃ, bhūmisaddo vā avatthāvācako, buddhāvatthaṃ, bodhisattāvatthāyanti ca attho. Ekattanayena hi pavattesu khandhesu avatthāyeva taṃ tadākāranissitā.
世尊住于菩萨地一分智时,曾作一切知者之邀请,这即是彼之稀有之事——以上是句子的关联。如何呢?即说“憍陈如,诸问……”等。其中,“憍陈如”是以种姓称呼舍罗邦伽·摩罗邦提。“请解说”即请解释。“善相”指善美之本质。“法”指自古相续的传统法。“yanti”是对来行之动作的指称,或关联为:以何因缘而来,即请依彼解说。“增长”指戒与慧等已达增长,意为“尊贵”。“此负担”指称为断疑的负担,意思是:此负担已来,你必定要承担。显示巴利原文
Yo bhagavā bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ padesañāṇe ṭhito sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavāresi, tassa tadeva acchariyanti sambandho. Kathanti āha ‘‘koṇḍañña pañhānī’’tiādi. Tattha koṇḍaññāti gottavasena sarabhaṅgamālapanti. Viyākarohīti byākarohi. Sādhurūpāti sādhusabhāvā. Dhammoti sanantano paveṇīdhammo. Yanti āgamanakiriyāparāmasanaṃ, yena vā kāraṇena āgacchati, tena viyākarohīti sambandho. Vuddhanti sīlapaññādīhi vuddhippattaṃ, garunti attho. Esa bhāroti saṃsayupacchedanasaṅkhāto eso bhāro, āgato bhāro tayā avassaṃ vahitabboti adhippāyo.
我已给诸位机会,请发问。为何呢?因为我将亲自了知此世与他世后,为你们一一解说。所谓“亲自”,即自己本身,不依他人之教导。如此,在舍罗邦伽时,他曾作一切知者的邀请——这是句子的关联。显示巴利原文
Mayā katāvakāsā bhonto pucchantu. Kasmāti ce? Ahañhi taṃ taṃ vo byākarissaṃ ñatvā sayaṃ lokamimaṃ, parañcāti. Sayanti ca sayameva parūpadesena vinā. Evaṃ sarabhaṅgakāle sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavāresīti sambandho.
“诸问”指关于法施的种种提问。“终结者”指作究竟者。“由名为苏吉罗陀的婆罗门”即由这样名字的婆罗门所问。“被问”是指为了发问。“关于生”指结生,也有解作“关于诞生”的。应这样联系:当时正在玩沙的桑巴瓦王子,坐着便发出了邀请。显示巴利原文
Pañhānanti dhammayāgapañhānaṃ. Antakaranti niṭṭhānakaraṃ. Suciratenāti evaṃ nāmakena brāhmaṇena. Puṭṭhunti pucchituṃ. Jātiyāti paṭisandhiyā, ‘‘vijātiyā’’tipi vadanti. Paṃsuṃ kīḷanto sambhavakumāro nisinnova hutvā pavāresīti yojetabbaṃ.
“Tagghā”是表示决定义的不变词。“正如善巧者那样”意思是:如同于一切法善巧、了知一切法的佛陀所了知、所宣说那样,我也将如此为你们解说,这是它的含义。因为“了知”一词在这里有关联。如所说:“凡与某有关联者,纵使在远处也属于彼。”此处,“了知”即言说。正如阿阇梨所说:“以此了知此”,此义已表。“国王若做或不做那事”意为:那位派遣你到这里来发问的拘罗毗耶国王,对你所问的义理,或由你所问、由我所解说的义理,他或许照做,或许不做;然而,我将如法地为你们解说、开示——这是此句所要表明的意义。显示巴利原文
Tagghāti ekaṃsatthe nipāto. Yathāpi kusalo tathāti yathā sabbadhammakusalo sabbadhammavidū buddho jānāti katheti, tathā te ahamakkhissanti attho. Jānāti-saddo hi idha sambandhamupagacchati . Yathāha ‘‘yena yassa hi sambandho, dūraṭṭhampi ca tassa ta’’nti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā). Jānanā cettha kathanā. Yathā ‘‘iminā imaṃ jānātī’’ti vuttovāyamattho ācariyena. Rājā ca kho taṃ yadi kāhati vā,na vāti yo taṃ idha pucchituṃ pesesi, so korabyarājā taṃ tayā pucchitamatthaṃ, tayā vā puṭṭhena mayā akkhātamatthaṃ yadi karotu vā, na vā karotu, ahaṃ pana yathādhammaṃ te akkhissaṃ ācikkhissāmīti vuttaṃ hoti. Jātakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
“国王若做那事”意为:我将按照你们的国王所了知、所能了知的方式,来解说此问。此后,国王依照其所了知那样,或许会做,或许不做;无论是做者还是不做者,此事都归于他,而我则没有过失——这是所要表明的意思。显示巴利原文
‘‘Rājā ca kho tanti ahaṃ taṃ pañhaṃ yathā tumhākaṃ rājā jānāti jānituṃ sakkoti, tathā akkhissaṃ. Tato uttari rājā yathā jānāti, tathā yadi karissati vā, na vā karissati, karontassa vā akarontassa vā tassevetaṃ bhavissati, mayhaṃ pana doso natthīti dīpetī’’ti (jā. aṭṭha. 5.16.172) –
“Jānāti”一词,是作为两句共通的用法而说的。显示巴利原文
Jānāti-saddo vākyadvayasādhāraṇavasena vutto.
163 “技能”本身就是技能领域,因为“领域”一词有“成为彼”的用法。再者,由于是应学习之故,技能既是众生生活方式的因或所依,又是领域,因此称为“技能领域”。“Seyyathidaṃ”是一个不变词,或是不变词的组合。“那些是什么?”——此处为显其义,故说:“哪些是那些?”即使各别地说“这些是什么”,其义也相契合,一切处皆如此。这也是为所期待的宣说而说,因此其义为:“那些技能领域是什么?”因为在笼统地举出“种种技能领域”之后,上面再以补特伽罗安立的方式,只举出依各种技能而活命者。何以故?为避冗长故。否则,若先展示所乐说的诸技能领域,接着又须展示依各种技能而活命者,因为此处正是以他们为乐说。若如此,说法便成冗长。因此,为了避开彼冗长,便以依技能活命者来含摄种种技能领域而作如是说——为显此义,故说:“以‘骑象者’等,显示那些依各种技能而活命者。”为什么呢?即说:“因为此……”等。依技能而活命者,即是技能活命者。显示巴利原文
163.Sippameva sippāyatanaṃ āyatanasaddassa tabbhāvavuttittā. Apica sikkhitabbatāya sippañca taṃ sattānaṃ jīvitavuttiyā kāraṇabhāvato, nissayabhāvato vā āyatanañcāti sippāyatanaṃ. Seyyathidanti ekova nipāto, nipātasamudāyo vā. Tassa te katameti idha atthoti āha ‘‘katame pana te’’ti. Ime katametipi paccekamattho yujjati. Evaṃ sabbattha. Idañca vattabbāpekkhanavasena vuttaṃ, tasmā te sippāyatanikā katameti attho. ‘‘Puthusippāyatanānī’’ti hi sādhāraṇato sippāni uddisitvā upari taṃtaṃsippūpajīvinova niddiṭṭhā puggalādhiṭṭhānāya kathāya. Kasmāti ce? Papañcaṃ pariharitukāmattā. Aññathā hi yathādhippetāni tāva sippāyatanāni dassetvā puna taṃtaṃsippūpajīvinopi dassetabbā siyuṃ tesamevettha padhānato adhippetattā. Evañca sati kathāpapañco bhaveyya, tasmā taṃ papañcaṃ pariharituṃ sippūpajīvīhi taṃtaṃsippāyatanāni saṅgahetvā evamāhāti tamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘hatthārohātiādīhi ye taṃ taṃ sippaṃ nissāya jīvanti, te dassetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kasmāti āha ‘‘ayañhī’’tiādi. Sippaṃ upanissāya jīvantīti sippūpajīvino.
“骑象者”即乘象者,指已登上象的战士。让象登上者也是“骑象者”,指象师、象医、象足卫等。凡是人们通过某种方法而适合乘象,那些为象施设此方法的人全被包括在内,故说“所有……”等。其中,“象师”是训练象及骑象者的人。“象医”是象的医师。“象足卫”是象的护足者。装饰象、保护象者称为“象饰者”,他们也即“象足卫”;或者,通过正确调御而驯服象者也是“象足卫”。以“等”字,包括了象的草谷供给者等。“骑马者”在此处也依纯粹原因作者而有如前所述之义。被系于车者称为“车兵”。“车护者”即车的轴楔护卫者。持弓者称为“持弓者”,即射手;令持弓者称为“持弓者”,即弓术教练、弓师。显示巴利原文
Hatthimārohantīti hatthārohā, hatthāruḷhayodhā. Hatthiṃ ārohāpayantīti hatthārohā, hatthācariya hatthivejja hatthimeṇḍādayo. Yena hi payogena puriso hatthino ārohanayoggo hoti, taṃ hatthissa payogaṃ vidhāyantānaṃ sabbesampetesaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbepī’’tiādi. Tattha hatthācariyā nāma ye hatthino, hatthārohakānañca sikkhāpakā. Hatthivejjā nāma hatthibhisakkā. Hatthimeṇḍā nāma hatthīnaṃ pādarakkhakā. Hatthiṃ maṇḍayanti rakkhantīti hatthimaṇḍā, teyeva hatthimeṇḍā, hatthiṃ minenti sammā vidahanena hiṃsantīti vā hatthimeṇḍā.Ādi-saddena hatthīnaṃ yavapadāyakādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Assārohāti etthāpi suddhahetukattuvasena yathāvuttova attho. Rathe niyuttā rathikā. Ratharakkhā nāma rathassa āṇirakkhakā. Dhanuṃ gaṇhantīti dhanuggahā, issāsā, dhanuṃ gaṇhāpentīti dhanuggahā, dhanusippasikkhāpakā dhanvācariyā.
手持旗帜与幡幢,在战斗中不退转而前行者,称为持旗者(celakā),亦即执持胜利幢者,故说“那些在战斗中……”等。胜利幢(jayaddhaja),是为了胜利,或在胜利时所高举的旗帜。在前方(purato),即在军队的前面。将已以种种方式列阵的军士,依阵列调动而驱策移动者,称为调动者(calakā),故说“此处国王的……”等。犹如鹰隼之类的猛禽撕碎肉团,他们凭借勇猛,将敌方军队的聚合体这“一团”反复撕碎、飞扑出击,故称施团者(piṇḍadāyakā)。因此说“据说他们……”等。行勇猛业者,称为勇猛者(sāhasikā),他们即是大战士。犹如团块(piṇḍamiva),有人说如同棕榈果团,而阿阇梨(ācariyena)则说“如同肉团”。凡说“阿阇梨”之处,皆应理解为阿阇梨法护长老(ācariyadhammapālatthera)。在第二种解释中,于人群聚合体这“团”的拥挤中,犹如飞扑而出般行进者,称为施团者(piṇḍadāyakā);此处“daya”一词表行进义,或由“aya”词增插而成。显示巴利原文
Celena celapaṭākāya yuddhe akanti gacchantīti celakā, jayaddhajagāhakāti āha ‘‘ye yuddhe’’tiādi. Jayadhajanti jayanatthaṃ, jayakāle vā paggahitadhajaṃ. Puratoti senāya pubbe. Yathā tathā ṭhite senike byūhavicāraṇavasena tato tato calayanti uccālentīti calakāti vuttaṃ ‘‘idha rañño’’tiādi. Sakuṇagghiādayo viya maṃsapiṇḍaṃ parasenāsamūhasaṅkhātaṃ piṇḍaṃ sāhasikatāya chetvā chetvā dayanti uppatitvā uppatitvā niggacchantīti piṇḍadāyakā. Tenāha ‘‘te kirā’’tiādi. Sāhasaṃ karontīti sāhasikā, teyeva mahāyodhā. Piṇḍamivāti tālaphalapiṇḍamivāti vadanti, ‘‘maṃsapiṇḍamivā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.163) ācariyena vuttaṃ. Sabbattha ‘‘ācariyenā’’ti vutte ācariyadhammapālattherova gahetabbo. Dutiyavikappe piṇḍe janasamūhasaṅkhāte sammadde dayanti uppatantā viya gacchantīti piṇḍadāyakā, daya-saddo gatiyaṃ, aya-saddassa vā da-kārāgamena nipphatti.
“极其高昂者”(uggatuggatā),指到达战场后,以速度快疾、勇猛等而极为高昂振奋。所谓“那即是”(tadeva),即他人所说的那个头或武器。他们冲入(pakkhandanti),即以英雄气概而不退缩地进入敌军。由于具足力量、速度、威力、勇猛等成就,如同大龙象一般。因此说“在象等之中也……”等。“纯粹勇士”(ekantasūrā),即独行勇士,“anta”一词表其状态,意为以勇士之性独自奋战者。“具网者”(sajālikā),即披甲者。因为铠甲、胸甲、甲胄、护胸、网甲,在意义上实为同一物。“具皮者”(sacammikā),即如同网甲一般,以皮革作为身体防护而具皮者。皮衣(cammakañcuka),即皮革所制之衣。进入(pavisitvā),即入于其中,意为穿戴。箭矢防护之皮(saraparittāṇaṃ camma),即缝有皮革的布块,或皮革所制的盾牌。因强力爱着(balavasinehā),即对主人有极深切的爱念。家奴战士(gharadāsayodhā),即包括家生奴隶在内的战士;亦有……。显示巴利原文
Uggatuggatāti saṅgāmaṃ patvā javaparakkamādivasena ativiya uggatā. Tadevāti parehi vuttaṃ tameva sīsaṃ vā āvudhaṃ vā. Pakkhandantīti vīrasūrabhāvena asajjamānā parasenamanupavisanti. Thāmajavabalaparakkamādisampattiyā mahānāgasadisatā. Tenāha ‘‘hatthiādīsupī’’tiādi. Ekantasūrāti ekacarasūrā antasaddassa tabbhāvavuttito, sūrabhāvena ekākino hutvā yujjhanakāti attho. Sajālikāti savammikā. Sannāho kaṅkaṭo vammaṃ kavaco uracchado jālikāti hi atthato ekaṃ. Sacammikāti jālikā viya sarīraparittāṇena cammena sacammikā. Cammakañcukanti cammamayakañcukaṃ. Pavisitvāti tassa anto hutvā, paṭimuñcitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Saraparittāṇaṃ cammanti cammapaṭisibbitaṃ celakaṃ, cammamayaṃ vā phalakaṃ. Balavasinehāti sāmini atisayapemā. Gharadāsayodhāti antojātadāsapariyāpannā yodhā, ‘‘gharadāsikaputtā’’tipi pāṭho, antojātadāsīnaṃ puttāti attho.
“ālāra”称为大厨房,于其中任职者称为厨司(āḷārikā)。饼师(pūvikā),即制作糕饼者,他们专事制作种种糕饼并贩卖以维生。以修剪须发、整理指甲等事,为人们安排装饰仪容者,称为理发师(kappakā)。以香粉、涂香等方法去垢显色,为人沐浴、行沐浴之事者,称为沐浴师(nhāpikā)。以酥油等所成的算术典籍,因其中间无有间断而称为无间(acchiddaka),讽诵此典籍者,称为无间诵读师(acchiddakapāṭhakā)。以手表达心意,或以手计数,称为手印(hatthamuddā)。手指的屈伸称为印(muddā),以此表达心意或计数。此处“手”一词,应如“进食时,我不将整只手塞入口中”等句中那样,理解为手指这一部分;依此维生者,称为手印师(muddikā)。因此说“以手印……”等。显示巴利原文
Āḷāraṃ vuccati mahānasaṃ, tattha niyuttā āḷārikā.Pūvikāti pūvasampādakā, ye pūvameva nānappakārato sampādetvā vikkiṇantā jīvanti. Kesanakhasaṇṭhapanādivasena manussānaṃ alaṅkāravidhiṃ kappenti saṃvidahantīti kappakā. Cuṇṇavilepanādīhi malaharaṇavaṇṇasampādanavidhinā nhāpenti nahānaṃ karontīti nhāpikā. Navantādividhinā pavatto gaṇanagantho antarā chiddābhāvena acchiddakoti vuccati, tadeva paṭhentīti acchiddakapāṭhakā. Hatthena adhippāyaviññāpanaṃ, gaṇanaṃ vā hatthamuddā. Aṅgulisaṅkocanañhi muddāti vuccati, tena ca viññāpanaṃ, gaṇanaṃ vā hoti. Hatthasaddo cettha tadekadesesu aṅgulīsu daṭṭhabbo ‘‘na bhuñjamāno sabbaṃ hatthaṃ mukhe pakkhipissāmī’’tiādīsu (pāci. 618) viya, tamupanissāya jīvantīti muddikā. Tenāha ‘‘hatthamuddāyā’’tiādi.
铁匠,即锻造工;牙匠,即旋工;彩绘师,即壁画彩绘师。“等”字摄括织工、书写师、竹编师、砖瓦匠、木匠等。“于现法”,即于此自身相续中。以造作、成就的方式显示。“即现见的”,意为非关来世,应亲自得见、自身体验、自证自知。依止而活,即依靠而维生。安乐,即获得安乐。强壮有力之状态即是滋养,故说“滋养、具足力量”。“上方”指天界,“向上”亦然,因天界高于人间。如同顶端,即顶端,指果报。阿阇梨说:“业已造作,果报生起,故彼果报如同业之火舌。”又,天即最上,指果报;天即善妙之顶端,意为能产生色、声等十种自果。依词源学,suaggikā 即 sovaggikā,因与“dakkhiṇā”(施物)一词相应,故各处皆用阴性词形。显示巴利原文
Ayakāro kammārakārako. Dantakāro bhamakāro. Cittakāro lepacittakāro. Ādi-saddena koṭṭakalekhakavilīvakāraiṭṭhakakāradārukārādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Karaṇanipphādanavasena dassetvā. Sandiṭṭhikamevāti asamparāyikatāya sāmaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, sayamanubhavitabbaṃ attapaccakkhanti attho. Upajīvantīti upanissāya jīvanti. Sukhitanti sukhappattaṃ. Thāmabalūpetabhāvova pīṇananti āha ‘‘pīṇitaṃ thāmabalūpeta’’nti. Uparīti devaloke. Tathā uddhantipi. So hi manussalokato uparimo. Aggaṃ viyāti aggaṃ, phalaṃ. ‘‘Kammassa katattā phalassa nibbattanato taṃ kammassa aggisikhā viya hotī’’ti ācariyena vuttaṃ. Apica sagganti uttamaṃ, phalaṃ. Sagganti suṭṭhu aggaṃ, rūpasaddādidasavidhaṃ attano phalaṃ nipphādetuṃ arahatīti attho. Suaggikāva niruttinayena sovaggikā, dakkhiṇāsaddāpekkhāya ca sabbattha itthiliṅganiddeso. Sukhoti sukhūpāyo iṭṭho kanto. Aggeti uḷāre. Attanā paribhuñjitabbaṃ bāhiraṃ rūpaṃ, attano vaṇṇapokkharatā vaṇṇoti ayametesaṃ viseso. Dakkhanti vaḍḍhanti etāyāti dakkhiṇā, pariccāgamayaṃ puññanti āha ‘‘dakkhiṇaṃ dāna’’nti.
道即是沙门性,谓已寂灭诸恶的沙门之状态,故其异熟——圣果,称为沙门果。以“如……”等语句,依《大品·相应》的经文证成此义。国王不知此义,因不精通圣法。然而,他思惟:“那些出身奴仆、农夫等的出家者,从世间所得的礼敬等,是否名为现见的沙门果?”如此探究而询问富兰那等,未得满意,便向世尊询问此义。因此说“他针对奴仆农夫的譬喻而问”。显示巴利原文
Maggo sāmaññaṃ samitapāpasaṅkhātassa samaṇassa bhāvoti katvā, tassa vipākattā ariyaphalaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ.‘‘Yathāhā’’tiādinā mahāvaggasaṃyuttapāḷivasena tadatthaṃ sādheti. Taṃ esa rājā na jānāti ariyadhammassa akovidatāya. Yasmā panesa ‘‘dāsakassakādibhūtānaṃ pabbajitānaṃ lokato abhivādanādilābho sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ nāmā’’ti cintetvā ‘‘atthi nu kho koci samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā īdisamatthaṃ jānanto’’ti vīmaṃsanto pūraṇādike pucchitvā tesaṃ kathāya anadhigatavitto bhagavantampi etamatthaṃ pucchi. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dāsakassakopamaṃ sandhāya pucchatī’’ti.
“王臣”指从王族中产生的臣僚,也指附属的国王与大臣,这是其含义。“黑分”指就所问之义,涉及可得见的邪见、杂染之部分。“白分”指与此相反、在经中随后出现的清净之部分。“沙门喧哗”指沙门的骚动,即种种沙门言论彼此冲突。“沙门争论”即因那种冲突而如此指责种种言论:“持此说之沙门婆罗门有此过失,持彼说之他们有此过失。”因为世间是随顺权威者的,故以法性的开示来阐明其义。他以自己说法的善巧,为国王承担重任,而非以其他贬损他人等原因。显示巴利原文
Rājāmaccāti rājakulasamudāgatā amaccā, anuyuttakarājāno ceva amaccā cātipi attho. Kaṇhapakkhanti yathāpucchite atthe labbhamānadiṭṭhigatūpasaṃhitaṃ saṃkilesapakkhaṃ. Sukkapakkhanti tabbidhuraṃ upari suttāgataṃ vodānapakkhaṃ. Samaṇakolāhalanti samaṇakotūhalaṃ taṃ taṃ samaṇavādānaṃ aññamaññavirodhaṃ. Samaṇabhaṇḍananti teneva virodhena ‘‘evaṃvādīnaṃ tesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ ayaṃ doso, evaṃvādīnaṃ tesaṃ ayaṃ doso’’ti evaṃ taṃ taṃ vādassa paribhāsanaṃ. Issarānuvattako hi lokoti dhammatādassanena tadatthasamatthanaṃ. Attano desanākosallena rañño bhāraṃ karonto, na tadaññena paravambhanādikāraṇena.
164 如同“nu”字,“no”字也是疑问中的小品词,故说“你记得吗?”而此处的“ca”字,不仅与“你记得”一词相连,还与“被问”一词相连,表示合集之义。那么如何连接呢?这以“此即”等来消除疑问。“曾被问吗?”即先前曾提问者。“你记得那被问的状态吗?”即你记得那样被问的状态吗?“你不曾忘记吧?”即你确实未曾忘记。“不适的状态”即因那样说话而产生的不快乐状态。“似智者之语”意指如同生的与熟的,也就是智者的语言。在“经文词句、义理与文辞”中:即在称为经文的词句、其义理及所含的字母中;或者“文辞”一词是语句的同义词,如“字母、词句、文辞”等中所见。世尊的色身如其自性,故为“似世尊者”,意为如同世尊一般,是全然智者。显示巴利原文
164. Nu-saddo viya no-saddopi pucchāyaṃ nipātoti āha ‘‘abhijānāsi nū’’ti. Ayañcāti ettha ca-saddo na kevalaṃ abhijānāsipadeneva, atha kho ‘‘pucchitā’’ti padena cāti samuccayattho. Kathaṃ yojetabboti anuyogamapaneti ‘‘idañhī’’tiādinā. Pucchitā nūti pubbe pucchaṃ kattā nu. Naṃ puṭṭhabhāvanti tādisaṃ pucchitabhāvaṃ abhijānāsi nu. Na te sammuṭṭhanti tava na pamuṭṭhaṃ vatāti attho. Aphāsukabhāvoti tathā bhāsanena asukhabhāvo. Paṇḍitapatirūpakānanti (sāmaṃ viya attano sakkārānaṃ paṇḍitabhāsānaṃ) āmaṃ viya pakkānaṃ paṇḍitā bhāsānaṃ. (Dī. ni. ṭī. 1.163) pāḷipadaatthabyañjanesūti pāḷisaṅkhāte pade, tadatthe tappariyāpannakkhare ca, vākyapariyāyo vā byañjanasaddo ‘‘akkharaṃ padaṃ byañjana’’ntiādīsu (netti. 28) viya. Bhagavato rūpaṃ sabhāvo viya rūpamassāti bhagavantarūpo, bhagavā viya ekantapaṇḍitoti attho.
布勒纳迦叶论释义显示巴利原文
Pūraṇakassapavādavaṇṇanā
165 “一时”:此处“idanti”仅为小品词,意义就是“一个时候”。“sammodeti”即欢喜、喜悦,故“sammodanīya”为“应欢喜的”。因为“anīya”字通常表示“应作”之义,如“应出离的”;或者“sammodanīya”意为“产生欢喜的”,依派生词缀而解。“应忆念的”即“sāraṇīya”,或“适合忆念的”即“sāraṇiya”。为显示此义,说“能生欢喜、适合忆念的”;而“适合忆念的”即适合忆念之义。显示巴利原文
165.Ekamidāhanti ettha idanti nipātamattaṃ, ekaṃ samayamicceva attho. Sammodeti sammodanaṃ karotīti sammodanīyaṃ. Anīyasaddo hi bahulā katvatthābhidhāyako yathā ‘‘niyyānikā’’ti, (dha. sa. suttantadukamātikā 97) sammodanaṃ vā janetīti sammodaniyaṃ taddhitavasena. Saritabbanti sāraṇīyaṃ, saraṇassa anucchavikanti vā sāraṇiyaṃ, etamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sammodajanakaṃ saritabbayuttaka’’nti vuttaṃ, saritabbayuttakanti ca saraṇānucchavikanti attho.
166 “亲手”即亲自用手,以此显示直接的行为者;而“以命令”则显示促使的行为者;应舍弃的、固定的等在此也因亲手做而包含在内。“手等”指手、脚、耳、鼻等。“煮”即烧、焚烧、伤害,故说“以杖压迫者”。然而在名为《破迷障》的中部义注中,对“pacato”一词也说了第二义:“或威吓者”。但此处将威吓与辱骂包含在“以杖”中,故阿阇梨说:“即仅说以杖压迫者”。然而现今的书籍中多处可见“或威吓者”的文句。“忧”即忧之因,也可作“忧伤”解,因为因成就时,果也可成立。“由他人”即由执行自己命令的、作为业处的人。“颤动”:此处不能以他人的颤动而获得直接行为者的意义,而是依自己的颤动,故说“当他人颤动时,在颤动之时自己也颤动”,即由于自己造作伤害他人的行为,自身也颤动。“令杀害”一词显示了直接行为者与促使行为者,故以“正在杀者与令杀者”来显示。“于一切处”即于“取”等中。“以作因与令作因”即依自作、令他作。显示巴利原文
166.Sahatthāti sahattheneva, tena suddhakattāraṃ dasseti, āṇattiyāti pana hetukattāraṃ, nissaggiyathāvarādayopi idha sahattha karaṇeneva saṅgahitā. Hatthādīnīti hatthapādakaṇṇanāsādīni. Pacanaṃ dahanaṃ vibādhananti āha ‘‘daṇḍena uppīḷentassā’’ti. Papañcasūdaniyaṃ nāma majjhimāgamaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘pacato’’ti etassa ‘‘tajjentassa vā’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.97) dutiyopi attho vutto, idha pana tajjanaṃ, paribhāsanañca daṇḍena saṅgahetvā ‘‘daṇḍena uppīḷentassa icceva vutta’’nti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.166) ācariyena vuttaṃ, adhunā pana potthakesu ‘‘tajjentassa vā’’ti pāṭhopi bahuso dissati. Sokanti sokakāraṇaṃ, socanantipi yujjati kāraṇasampādanena phalassapi kattabbato. Parehīti attano vacanakarehi kammabhūtehi. Phandatoti ettha parassa phandanavasena suddhakattuttho na labbhati, atha kho attano phandanavasenevāti āha ‘‘paraṃ phandantaṃ phandanakāle sayampi phandato’’ti, attanā katena parassa vibādhanapayogena sayampi phandatoti attho. ‘‘Atipātāpayato’’ti padaṃ suddhakattari, hetukattari ca pavattatīti dasseti ‘‘hanantassāpi hanāpentassāpī’’ti iminā. Sabbatthāti ‘‘ādiyato’’tiādīsu. Karaṇakāraṇavasenāti sayaṃkāraparaṃkāravasena.
墙壁内外之间的缝隙称为“屋缝”。毫无剩余、一无所遗的夺取与掠夺,即是“全夺”,因此说“大掠夺”。专门针对一户进行的掠夺,称为“专盗一家者”。由此说“唯有一家”等。“立于路途中”:这里的“站立”是指专为劫夺而站立,这一含义从上下文中得以成立,所以用“来往者”等语来显示。“在四周一切道路上打杀,称为路劫”(长部复注1.166),这一意义也是阿阇梨所说。“我作”之想:这是指故意性的状态,以此表明:“故意造作的人尚且不被称为有所作,何况非故意者?”“恶不被作”:因为先前不存在的不能被产生,所以恶业本身即名为未作。因此说“无有恶”。显示巴利原文
Gharabhittiyā anto ca bahi ca sandhi gharasandhi. Kiñcipi asesetvā niravaseso lopo vilumpanaṃ nillopoti āha ‘‘mahāvilopa’’nti. Ekāgāre niyutto vilopo ekāgāriko. Tenāha ‘‘ekamevā’’tiādi. ‘‘Paripanthe tiṭṭhato’’ti ettha acchindanatthameva tiṭṭhatīti ayamattho pakaraṇato siddhoti dasseti ‘‘āgatāgatāna’’ntiādinā. ‘‘Parito sabbaso panthe hananaṃ paripantho’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.166) ayamatthopi ācariyena vutto. Karomīti saññāyāti sañcetanikabhāvamāha, tenetaṃ dasseti ‘‘sañcicca karotopi na karīyati nāma, pageva asañciccā’’ti. Pāpaṃ na karīyatīti pubbe asato uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā pāpaṃ akatameva nāma. Tenāha ‘‘natthi pāpa’’nti.
如果这样,那么众生为何还会造作恶业呢?富兰那为了消除别人加在自己主张上的过失,而开示此义,因此说“然而众生……”等语。“造作恶业”只不过是个名称而已,实际上根本没有恶业。据说他是这样认为的:这些众生所行的杀害等行为,并不触及自我,因为自我是恒常、无变异的;而身体是无知觉的,如同木石,即使破坏它,也毫无罪恶。轮缘称为“pariyanta”,因为它位于轮辋的末端。因此,论师说“以利刃为轮缘”。在第二种解释中,轮缘就是轮辋的末端,其轮缘如同剃刀,故称“剃刀轮缘”。此处以“剃刀”一词,取其刀锋之义,因为它被包含在内。经文中的“以轮”是指做成轮形的特殊武器。以造成碎肉相为因、为缘,故说“以此为因”;注释书中说:“对格词尾变为‘to’,在复合词中不省略。”舍利弗长老说:“在对格的语义中,具格词同样适用。”文法家也说:“表示原因义时,此为小品词组合。”显示巴利原文
Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ sattā pāpe pavattantīti attano vāde parehi āropitaṃ dosamapanetukāmo pūraṇo imamatthampi dassetīti āha ‘‘sattā panā’’tiādi. Saññāmattametaṃ ‘‘pāpaṃ karontī’’ti, pāpaṃ pana natthevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ kirassa hoti – imesaṃ sattānaṃ hiṃsādikiriyā attānaṃ na pāpuṇāti tassa niccatāya nibbikārattā, sarīraṃ pana acetanaṃ kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamaṃ, tasmiṃ vikopitepi na kiñci pāpanti. Pariyanto vuccati nemi pariyosāne ṭhitattā. Tena vuttaṃ ācariyena ‘‘nisitakhuramayaneminā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.166). Dutiyavikappe cakkapariyosānameva pariyanto, khurena sadiso pariyanto yassāti khurapariyanto. Khuraggahaṇena cettha khuradhārā gahitā tadavarodhato. Pāḷiyaṃ cakkenāti cakkākārakatena āvudhavisesena. Taṃ maṃsakhalakaraṇasaṅkhātaṃ nidānaṃ kāraṇaṃ yassāti tatonidānaṃ, ‘‘paccattavacanassa toādeso, samāse cassa lopābhāvo’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.21) aṭṭhakathāsu vutto. ‘‘Paccattatthe nissakkavacanampi yujjatī’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) ācariyasāriputtatthero. ‘‘Kāraṇatthe nipātasamudāyo’’tipi akkharacintakā.
以“恒河南岸是不适宜之地,北岸是适宜之地”的用意,而说“若向南方……”等语;为了表明这是通过方位来指称那里的居民,故说“在南岸……”等语。因为杀害与布施的行为正是取决于他们。“大祭祀”是指如同大毗阇耶王所举行的那样的盛大祭祀。“dama”一词兼有感官调伏与布萨戒的意思,因此说“以感官调伏、以布萨行”。然而,有些人将“以布萨行”作为“感官调伏”的定语,解释为“以布萨行所成就的感官调伏”,这是不正确的,因为“dama”一词兼表二义,而且这两种意义是分别表述的。实际上,现今某些典籍中可见有“vā”字或“ca”字。“以戒律约束”是指以其他的身语防护。“以真实语”是指不妄语。之所以将它单独列出,是因为世间视其为更为重大的功德。正如在诸恶法中妄语较重,在诸善法中不妄语也是如此。因此世尊在《如是语》中说:显示巴利原文
Gaṅgāya dakkhiṇadisā appatirūpadeso, uttaradisā pana patirūpadesoti adhippāyena ‘‘dakkhiṇañce’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tañca desadisāpadesena tannivāsino sandhāyāti dassetuṃ ‘‘dakkhiṇatīre’’tiādimāha. Hananadānakiriyā hi tadāyattā. Mahāyāganti mahāvijitarañño yaññasadisampi mahāyāgaṃ. Damasaddo indriyasaṃvarassa, uposathasīlassa ca vācakoti āha ‘‘indriyadamena uposathakammenā’’ti. Keci pana uposathakammenā’ti idaṃ indriyadamassa visesanaṃ, tasmā ‘uposathakammabhūtena indriyadamenā’ti’’ atthaṃ vadanti, tadayuttameva tadubhayatthavācakattā damasaddassa, atthadvayassa ca visesavuttito. Adhunā hi katthaci potthake vā-saddo, ca-saddopi dissati. Sīlasaṃyamenāti tadaññena kāyikavācasikasaṃvarena. Saccavacanenāti amosavajjena. Tassa visuṃ vacanaṃ loke garutarapuññasammatabhāvato. Yathā hi pāpadhammesu musāvādo garutaro, evaṃ puññadhammesu amosavajjo. Tenāha bhagavā itivuttake –
‘‘Ekadhammaṃ atītassa, musāvādissa jantuno; Vitiṇṇaparalokassa, natthi pāpaṃ akāriya’’nti. (itivu. 27);
“生起”是指:于造作者相续中,作为果报生起之缘而生起。如此,“无业、无业果”的无作论方得圆满。因为,若业果存在,业的不造作性又如何成立?“以一切方式”即依“造作者”等所说的一切方式。显示巴利原文
Pavattīti yo karoti, tassa santāne phaluppādapaccayabhāvena uppatti. Evañhi ‘‘natthi kammaṃ, natthi kammaphala’’nti akiriyavādassa paripuṇṇatā. Sati hi kammaphale kammānamakiriyabhāvo kathaṃ bhavissati. Sabbathāpīti ‘‘karoto’’tiādinā vuttena sabbappakārenapi.
“Labuja”指面包果。其意旨是:他仅否定善恶业的造作,而未回答国王所问的现见沙门果。因为这一限定正是为了排除对果报的否定。否定业的人,实质上果报也必定被否定。正如后文将说:“即使否定业……”等。显示巴利原文
Labujanti likucaṃ. Pāpapuññānaṃ kiriyameva paṭikkhipati, na raññā puṭṭhaṃ sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ byākarotīti adhippāyo. Idañhi avadhāraṇaṃ vipākapaṭikkhepanivattanatthaṃ. Yo hi kammaṃ paṭikkhipati, tena atthato vipākopi paṭikkhittoyeva nāma hoti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘kammaṃ paṭibāhantenāpī’’tiādi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.170-172).
“Vijita”指不被敌对国王征服、特别战胜而归属一位国王敕令所行之处。说“你们不要住在我的领土内”,是对出家者的斥逐,也就是名为“驱逐”的恼害,因此说“应加恼害”。对于所述之义,“如此”是确定、标记和领受;他否定此,故说“不取其要”。另一方面,以令彼义成为决定的方式,用心持守而覆藏;他否定此,故说“唯以要义……不确立”。“唯以要义”,即唯以最殊胜义;或因不虚妄、不被他人动摇的坚固义,而称为非肤浅的“要”,即唯依此要义。“出离”指从轮回中解脱。“胜义”指不颠倒之义,或作为最胜智所缘之义。而文句,是他如此领受并覆藏的,因为是世尊亲口所说。显示巴利原文
Paṭirājūhi anabhibhavanīyabhāvena visesato jitanti vijitaṃ, ekassa rañño āṇāpavattideso. ‘‘Mā mayhaṃ vijite vasathā’’ti apasādanā pabbajitassa pabbājanasaṅkhātā viheṭhanāyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘viheṭhetabba’’nti. Tena vuttassa atthassa ‘‘evameta’’nti upadhāraṇaṃ sallakkhaṇaṃ uggaṇhanaṃ, tadaminā paṭikkhipatīti āha ‘‘sārato aggaṇhanto’’ti. Tassa pana atthassa addhaniyabhāvāpādanavasena cittena sandhāraṇaṃ nikkujjanaṃ, tadaminā paṭikkhipatīti dasseti ‘‘sāravaseneva…pe… aṭṭhapento’’ti iminā. Sāravasenevāti uttamavaseneva, avitathattā vā parehi anuccālito thirabhūto attho apheggubhāvena sāroti vuccati, taṃvasenevāti attho. Nissaraṇanti vaṭṭato niyyānaṃ. Paramatthoti aviparītattho, uttamassa vā ñāṇassārammaṇabhūto attho. Byañjanaṃ pana tena uggahitañceva nikkujjitañca tathāyeva bhagavato santike bhāsitattā.
马卡离果萨喇论释义显示巴利原文
Makkhaligosālavādavaṇṇanā
168 “二者”:指遮遣因与缘之语。“唯实有”:以此否定自性上的实有,显示其原因唯有无知。杂染因缘:指导致杂染、垢秽之因。清净因缘:指从杂染转为清净、澄净的缘。自作:依表示“自己”的“e”词干而成立,如“如林中触枝”(小部·小诵13;相应部·因缘相应236);或依表示自己之义的地格,如“此即彼于戒中”(长部·大品1.194),“自作”一词即显示此“自己”之义。此即各各有情应自己造作之业,或由自己精进而成办之作。故说“以何”等。一切智:指正等正觉。彼:指由自己所作之业。第二词:指“无他作”一词。他作:指依他人助力而成办之努力。故说“何为他作”等。告诫教诫:指作为告诫的教诫,或先为告诫、后为教诫。这也是以“他作”一词为标示来显示其义:出世间法无他作之理,故说“除大士外”。此义只适用于世间法,如同我们的菩萨依靠阿罗逻水而获得五通及世间等至,这是针对最后生大士而说;独觉菩萨亦摄于此,因为他们也没有他作。人端严:指人中端严之相。如是:指依照所说方式,遮遣作业论及动作论。佛轮:指在佛教中,如“诸比丘,有黑业、黑异熟……”(增支部4.232)所说之理。显示巴利原文
168.Ubhayenāti hetupaccayapaṭisedhavacanena. ‘‘Vijjamānamevā’’ti iminā sabhāvato vijjamānasseva paṭikkhipane tassa aññāṇameva kāraṇanti dasseti. Saṃkilesapaccayanti saṃkilissanassa malīnassa kāraṇaṃ . Visuddhipaccayanti saṃkilesato visuddhiyā vodānassa paccayaṃ. Attakāreti paccattavacanassa e-kāravasena padasiddhi yathā ‘‘vanappagumbe yathā phusitagge’’ti, (khu. pā. 13; su. ni. 236) paccattatthe vā bhummavacanaṃ yathā ‘‘idampissa hoti sīlasmi’’nti (dī. ni. 1.194), tadevatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘attakāro’’ti iminā. So ca tena tena sattena attanā kātabbakammaṃ, attanā nipphādetabbapayogo vā. Tenāha ‘‘yenā’’tiādi. Sabbaññutanti sammāsambodhiṃ. Tanti attanā katakammaṃ. Dutiyapadenāti ‘‘natthi parakāre’’ti padena. Parakāro ca nāma parassa vāhasā ijjhanakapayogo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ parakāra’’ntiādi. Ovādānusāsaninti ovādabhūtamanusāsaniṃ, paṭhamaṃ vā ovādo, pacchā anusāsanī. ‘‘Parakāra’’nti padassa upalakkhaṇavasena atthadassanañcetaṃ, lokuttaradhamme parakārāvassayo natthīti āha ‘‘ṭhapetvā mahāsatta’’nti. Atthevesa lokiyadhamme yathā taṃ amhākaṃ bodhisattassa āḷārudake nissāya pañcābhiññālokiyasamāpattilābho, tañca pacchimabhavikamahāsattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, paccekabodhisattassapi ettheva saṅgaho tesampi tadabhāvato. Manussasobhagyatanti manussesu subhagabhāvaṃ. Evanti vuttappakārena kammavādassa, kiriyavādassa ca paṭikkhipanena. Jinacakketi ‘‘atthi bhikkhave kammaṃ kaṇhaṃ kaṇhavipāka’’ntiādi (a. ni. 4.232) nayappavatte kammānaṃ, kammaphalānañca atthitāparidīpane buddhasāsane. Paccanīkakathanaṃ pahāradānasadisanti ‘‘pahāraṃ deti nāmā’’ti.
由于如上所说有自作而无他作,因此一切众生并没有任何所谓各自“人的努力”。为了显示对“无他作”的否定,故说“以何”等。以“天神亦”等及“人端严”等,是按所述的方式而说。在说了“立于力”之后,为了说明此处精进即是力,便说“发勤精进”。他否定有情具有能带来现法成就、来世成就及涅槃成就的精进力;这只是举例,因为否定了清净之力,便是否定了杂染之力。如果精进等是“人的努力”的异名,为何他们又各各别执取?因此说“此以我等精进”等。“此以我等精进”:即此果是由我等的精进所转起。依否定“转起”之说而说:即依否定其他“转起”之说而说。其意思是:由精进、堪忍、策励的结合,为了否定那些主张“转起力”者的说法,例如“无力”一词,所有这些词都被此所涵盖。这是依所说的意思而言;但依词语的含义,力就是令动作增强;精进就是令成勇猛的状态;这同一样东西,由于坚固性及能承担人之重任,故为人的“堪忍”;由于不逾越其他范围而转起,故为人的“策励”,应当这样理解。显示巴利原文
Yathāvuttaattakāraparakārābhāvato eva sattānaṃ paccattapurisakāro nāma koci natthīti sandhāya ‘‘natthipurisakāre’’ti tassa paṭikkhipanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Devattampī’’tiādinā, ‘‘manussasobhagyata’’ntiādinā ca vuttappakārā. ‘‘Bale patiṭṭhitā’’ti vatvā vīriyamevidha balanti dassetuṃ ‘‘vīriyaṃ katvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sattānañhi diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyika nibbānasampattiāvahaṃ vīriyabalaṃ natthīti so paṭikkhipati, nidassanamattañcetaṃ vodāniyabalassa paṭikkhipanaṃ saṃkilesikassāpi balassa tena paṭikkhipanato. Yadi vīriyādīni purisakāravevacanāni, atha kasmā tesaṃ visuṃ gahaṇanti āha ‘‘idaṃ no vīriyenā’’tiādi. Idaṃ no vīriyenāti idaṃ phalaṃ amhākaṃ vīriyena pavattaṃ. Pavattavacanapaṭikkhepakaraṇavasenāti aññesaṃ pavattavohāravacanassa paṭikkhepakaraṇavasena . Vīriyathāmaparakkamasambandhanena pavattabalavādīnaṃ vādassa paṭikkhepakaraṇavasena ‘‘natthi bala’’nti padamiva sabbānipetāni tena ādīyantīti adhippāyo. Tañca vacanīyatthato vuttaṃ, vacanatthato pana tassā tassā kiriyāya ussannaṭṭhena balaṃ. Sūravīrabhāvāvahaṭṭhena vīriyaṃ. Tadeva daḷhabhāvato, porisadhuraṃ vahantena pavattetabbato ca purisathāmo. Paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanavasena pavattiyā purisaparakkamoti veditabbaṃ.
于色等法中,由有有情与无有情之别,故为有情。由出入息之转起,有命根故为命,虽义同此,然于二词中,依一根等分别命,特就有情之差别而说,故说『一根』等。有即已生,于有情与命之同义中,亦有于卵壳等中生起之义,唯此差别,故如是说,以『卵…乃至…说』显示之。处胎之胞为子宫。由活命故似持命,由增长故为命根。故说『稻等』。由等摄之词,摄入生长法之草木。他们于杂染与清净无自在力,故为无自在。如是为无力、无精进。故说『他们』等。决定即决定性,如不可断之线串不可碎之摩尼,由决定之转起,即由趣、生、结、脱之自在,此是决定之义。于彼彼处:于彼彼生中。六胜生类相连之往赴,和合即会合。虽无关联,然『关联』一词如有关联般表达自性义,故说『唯自性』,如刺之尖锐,木苹果等之圆形,鹿鸟之奇特色形,如是此一切世间,若无因缘,则如彼变异,此唯自性,此即其义。故说『以何』等。变异即成就种种差别。以何:以有情、命等。如应如何,即如是:此为结合。显示巴利原文
Rūpādīsu sattavisattatāya sattā. Assasanapassasanavasena pavattiyā pāṇanato pāṇāti iminā atthena samānepi padadvaye ekindriyādivasena pāṇe vibhajitvā sattato visesaṃ katvā esa vadatīti āha ‘‘ekindriyo’’tiādi. Bhavantīti bhūtāti sattapāṇapariyāyepi sati aṇḍakosādīsu sambhavanaṭṭhena tato visesāva, tena vuttāti dasseti ‘‘aṇḍa…pe… vadatī’’ti iminā. Vatthikoso gabbhāsayo. Jīvanato pāṇaṃ dhārento viya vaḍḍhanato jīvā. Tenāha ‘‘sāliyavā’’tiādi. Ādisaddena viruḷhadhammā tiṇarukkhā gahitā. Natthi etesaṃ saṃkilesavisuddhīsu vaso sāmatthiyanti avasā. Tathā abalā avīriyā. Tenāha ‘‘tesa’’ntiādi. Niyatāti niyamanā, achejjasuttāvutassa abhejjamaṇino viya niyatappavattitāya gatijātibandhāpavaggavasena niyāmoti attho. Tattha tatthāti tāsu tāsu jātīsu. Channaṃ abhijātīnaṃ sambandhībhūtānaṃ gamanaṃ samavāyena samāgamo. Sambandhīnirapekkhopi bhāvasaddo sambandhīsahito viya pakatiyatthavācakoti āha ‘‘sabhāvoyevā’’ti, yathā kaṇṭakassa tikkhatā, kapitthaphalādīnaṃ parimaṇḍalatā, migapakkhīnaṃ vicittākāratā ca, evaṃ sabbassāpi lokassa hetupaccayamantarena tathā tathā pariṇāmo akuttimo sabhāvoyevāti attho. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yenā’’tiādi. Pariṇamanaṃ nānappakāratāpatti. Yenāti sattapāṇādinā. Yathā bhavitabbaṃ, tathevāti sambandho.
六种出身将在后文详述。当说“感受乐与苦”时,末伽梨不知不苦不乐地之全部,故说“他显示没有其他不苦不乐地”。此“感受乐与苦”之语,是导师依工具格取义而说的见解。然而在典籍中,所见读法是“他显示没有其他乐苦地”,而非“不苦不乐地”。如此,当知“于六种出身中”之语是依处格取义,显示乐苦感受唯在六种出身中,非于他们之外,他们即是乐苦地,非其他,此义已说。此解更为合理,因为所破斥之义是以“地”而说。若以“感受乐与苦”之语显示所破斥者,则应显示“没有其他不苦不乐”,而非“不苦不乐地”,因为显示理由之语并无“地”义。而此语正显示他们地之无有,由此可知此读法及此义更为合理。显示巴利原文
Chaḷabhijātiyo parato vitthārīyissanti. ‘‘Sukhañca dukkhañca paṭisaṃvedentī’’ti vadanto makkhali adukkhamasukhabhūmiṃ sabbena sabbaṃ na jānātīti vuttaṃ ‘‘aññā adukkhamasukhabhūmi natthīti dassetī’’ti. Ayaṃ ‘‘sukhañca dukkhañca paṭisaṃvedentī’’ti vacanaṃ karaṇabhāvena gahetvā vuttā ācariyassa mati. Potthakesu pana ‘‘aññā sukhadukkhabhūmi natthīti dassetī’’ti ayameva pāṭho diṭṭho, na ‘‘adukkhamasukhabhūmī’’ti. Evaṃ sati ‘‘chasvevābhijātīsū’’ti vacanaṃ adhikaraṇabhāvena gahetvā chasu eva abhijātīsu sukhadukkhapaṭisaṃvedanaṃ, na tehi aññattha, tāyeva sukhadukkhabhūmi, na tadaññāti dassetīti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ayameva ca yuttataro paṭikkhepitabbassa atthassa bhūmivasena vuttattā. Yadi hi ‘‘sukhañca dukkhañca paṭisaṃvedentī’’ti vacanena paṭikkhepitabbassa dassanaṃ siyā, atha ‘‘aññā adukkhamasukhā natthī’’ti dasseyya, na ‘‘adukkhamasukhabhūmī’’ti dassanahetuvacanassa bhūmiatthābhāvato. Dasseti cetaṃ tāsaṃ bhūmiyā abhāvameva, tena viññāyati ayaṃ pāṭho, ayañcattho yuttataroti.
“首要出身者”指人类中依刹帝利、婆罗门等而划分的首要出身,以及畜生等中依狮、虎等而划分的首要出身,此处“首要”即最胜之义。因此说“最胜出身”。“六十百”即六千。“五种业”一词的义理说明为“五种业”。“此即同理”以此指示“唯以单纯思量而显示无益之见”这一义理。在这里,说“唯以思量”时,意在阐明:思量者由于没有以如实把握为依归的钩索法,如同无钩索一般,对任何自己构想出来的事物都执以为真,固执其中而生起邪见,因此智者不应在其见处进行审察。有些人指北方寺住者。“依五根”即依眼等五根。他们说:“眼、耳、鼻、舌、身这五根,外道安立为‘五种业’,而身、语、意三业则为‘三种业’。”业即是执见,其中身业和语业因为粗显,被执为圆满之业;意业因不粗显,被执为半业。如此连结。理应说“六十二行道”,却因不知本性语而说成“六十二行道”,故说“六十二行道”。然而语法家说:“六十二中省略了‘二’,是‘自’义”,这完全不合理,因为按照本性语的规则不能成立。如果依规则成立,那便应是本性语,如此则与诸师之见相违。而“八万四千”等,则是他处可见到的本性语用法。确实如此。显示巴利原文
Pamukhayonīnanti manussesu khattiyabrāhmaṇādivasena, tiracchānādīsu sīhabyagghādivasena padhānayonīnaṃ, padhānatā cettha uttamatā. Tenāha ‘‘uttamayonīna’’nti. Saṭṭhi satānīti cha sahassāni. ‘‘Pañca ca kammuno satānī’’ti padassa atthadassanaṃ ‘‘pañca kammasatāni cā’’ti. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā ‘‘kevalaṃ takkamattakena niratthakaṃ diṭṭhiṃ dīpetī’’ti imamevatthamatidisati. Ettha ca ‘‘takkamattakenā’’ti vadanto yasmā takkikā avassayabhūtatathatthaggahaṇaaṅkusanayamantarena niraṅkusatāya parikappanassa yaṃ kiñci attanā parikappitaṃ sārato maññamānā tatheva abhinivissa tattha ca diṭṭhigāhaṃ gaṇhanti, tasmā na tesaṃ diṭṭhivatthusmiṃ viññūhi vicāraṇā kātabbāti imamadhippāyaṃ vibhāveti. Kecīti uttaravihāravāsino. Pañcindriyavasenāti cakkhādipañcindriyavasena. Te hi ‘‘cakkhusotaghānajivhākāyasaṅkhātāni imāni pañcindriyāni ‘pañca kammānī’ti titthiyā paññapentī’’ti vadanti ‘‘kāyavacīmanokammāni ca ‘tīṇi kammānī’ti’’. Kammanti laddhīti tadubhayaṃ oḷārikattā paripuṇṇakammanti laddhi. Manokammaṃ anoḷārikattā upaḍḍhakammanti laddhīti yojanā. ‘‘Dvāsaṭṭhi paṭipadā’’ti vattabbe sabhāvaniruttiṃ ajānanto ‘‘dvaṭṭhipaṭipadā’’ti vadatīti āha ‘‘dvāsaṭṭhi paṭipadā’’ti. Saddaracakā pana ‘‘dvāsaṭṭhiyā salopo, attamā’’ti vadanti, tadayuttameva sabhāvaniruttiyā yogato asiddhattā . Yadi hi sā yogena siddhā assa, evaṃ sabhāvaniruttiyeva siyā, tathā ca sati ācariyānaṃ matena virujjhatīti vadanti. ‘‘Cullāsīti sahassānī’’tiādikā pana aññatra diṭṭhapayogā sabhāvaniruttiyeva. Dissati hi visuddhimaggādīsu –
八万四千劫,诸天得以存;
然他们亦无法久住,为二心所迷惑。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Cullāsīti sahassāni, kappā tiṭṭhanti ye marū; Na tveva tepi tiṭṭhanti, dvīhi cittehi samohitā’’ti. (visuddhi. 2.715; mahāni. 10, 39);
“于一劫中”,即指四个不可数劫中的任一不可数劫。于其中,唯依一个名为“住劫”的劫而说“六十二中间劫”。因为那位未闻教法者不知其余,这是由于外道所不能了知的境界,所以不知而如此说。这是它的义理。显示巴利原文
Ekasmiṃ kappeti catunnamasaṅkhyeyyakappānaṃ aññatarabhūte ekasmiṃ asaṅkhyeyyakappe. Tatthāpi ca vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyīsaññitaṃ ekameva sandhāya ‘‘dvaṭṭhantarakappā’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hi so assutasāsanadhammo itare jānāti bāhirakānamavisayattā, ajānanto evamāhāti attho.
杀羊者,即杀羊或以杀羊谋生的人。对杀鸟者等,亦同此理。“猎人”,指其余任何以捕捉四足动物为生的人,以及渔夫。在“猎鹿者”一词中,唯指鹿等兽类。令入牢狱者,即狱卒。残酷业行者,即暴恶业行者。他说,这一切人因专事黑业而为黑出身,亦即黑法由此出生、由此生起。比丘,即佛教中的比丘。“刺”,指欲贪。以联结之义投入他们。因为他们执着于“他们受用种种殊胜资具”这样的邪执,所以说“投入刺”,意思是他们与如同刺的欲贪相联结而受用。何以故?因为“他们受用种种殊胜资具”是他们的邪执,所以即使受用如法所得的资具,由于违背了邪命外道的宗义,便说他们在资具中投入刺而食,称为刺活命者,即与前述之刺共活命。这就是他们的圣典,意思是这段阐明末伽梨论说的文字,就是他们自己编纂的圣典,如此成立前述之义。另有一些外道出家者名为刺活命者,他说他们为蓝出身,这是义理。他们特别注重自苦行。如此,他们犹如行于刺中,故称刺活命者。因为蓝法由此出生,所以是蓝出身。其余也是如此。显示巴利原文
Urabbhe hananti, hantvā vā jīvitaṃ kappentīti orabbhikā. Esa nayo sākuṇikādīsupi. Luddāti vuttāvasesakā ye keci cātuppadajīvikā nesādā. Māgavikapadasmiñhi rohitādimigajātiyeva gahitā. Bandhanāgāre niyojentīti bandhanāgārikā. Kurūrakammantāti dāruṇakammantā. Ayaṃ sabbopi kaṇhakammapasutatāya kaṇhābhijātīti vadati kaṇhassa dhammassa abhijāti abbhuppatti yassāti katvā. Bhikkhūti buddhasāsane bhikkhū. Kaṇṭaketi chandarāge. Saññogavasena tesaṃ pakkhipanaṃ. Kaṇṭakasadisachandarāgena saññuttā bhuñjantīti hi adhippāyena ‘‘kaṇṭake pakkhipitvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kasmāti ce? Yasmā ‘‘te paṇītapaṇīte paccaye paṭisevantī’’ti tassa micchāgāho, tasmā ñāyaladdhepi paccaye bhuñjamānā ājīvakasamayassa vilomagāhitāya paccayesu kaṇṭake pakkhipitvā khādanti nāmāti vadati kaṇṭakavuttikāti kaṇṭakena yathāvuttena saha jīvikā. Ayañhissa pāḷiyevāti ayaṃ makkhalissa vādadīpanā attanā racitā pāḷiyevāti yathāvuttamatthaṃ samattheti. Kaṇṭakavuttikā eva nāma eke apare pabbajitā bāhirakā santi, te nīlābhijātīti vadatīti attho. Te hi savisesaṃ attakilamathānuyogamanuyuttā. Tathā hi te kaṇṭake vattantā viya bhavantīti kaṇṭakavuttikāti vuttā. Nīlassa dhammassa abhijāti yassāti nīlābhijāti. Evamitaresupi.
“我们没有结缚的结”,持此说的是外道出家者尼乾陀。只穿一件衣的,称为“一衣者”。为了依次显示他们关于清净的主张,即“从黑色变得清净的蓝色,然后又变成红色”等,所以说“据说这些……”等。“更白”,指由于结合了禁止进食、沐浴等戒行,比黑蓝色更为清净;红色也因那样的清净状态而应被述说。“白衣者”,指穿着白衣的人。“裸形弟子”,指成为邪命外道弟子的人。据说,他们依于邪命外道见解的心清净,比尼乾陀更白,也比穿黄衣者因为通过前述阶段而达到的清净状态更白。以“正是如此”等语句显示他们随心所欲而来。成为难陀等人弟子的出家者,即是邪命外道。同样,也有邪命外道女。据说,难陀等人将那样的邪命外道修行推向极致而安住,因此比尼乾陀、比邪命外道弟子出家人更白,被称为“极净白生类”。这就是他的见解。显示巴利原文
Amhākaṃ saññojanagaṇṭho natthīti vādino bāhirakapabbajitā nigaṇṭhā. Ekameva sāṭakaṃ paridahantā ekasāṭakā. Kaṇhato parisuddho nīlo, tato pana lohitotiādinā yathākkamaṃ tassa parisuddhaṃ vādaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ime kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Paṇḍaratarāti bhuñjananahānapaṭikkhepādivatasamāyogena parisuddhatarā kaṇhanīlamupādāya lohitassāpi parisuddhabhāvena vattabbato. Odātavasanāti odātavatthaparidahanā. Acelakasāvakāti ājīvakasāvakabhūtā. Te kira ājīvakaladdhiyā visuddhacittatāya nigaṇṭhehipi paṇḍaratarā haliddābhānampi purime upādāya parisuddhabhāvappattito. ‘‘Eva’’ntiādinā tassa chandāgamanaṃ dasseti. Nandādīnaṃ sāvakabhūtā pabbajitā ājīvakā. Tathā ājīvakiniyo. Nandādayo kira tathārūpaṃ ājīvakapaṭipattiṃ ukkaṃsaṃ pāpetvā ṭhitā, tasmā nigaṇṭhehi ājīvakasāvakehi pabbajitehi paṇḍaratarā vuttā paramasukkābhijātīti ayaṃ tassa laddhi.
“人地”是精勤的解说。这些地也为女人所渴望。“七日”是极相连属的说法,意指即使这么短的时间也还是愚钝、迷惑的。“从拥挤之处”是指母胎。他们追忆起来后,既哭泣又号叫。厌倦与游戏以“嬉戏”一词概括,故说为“游戏地”。脚的放置称为“放脚”。当能那样放置脚步时,那时便名为“验脚地”,这是它的含义。在知道风与来风的时候。而“比丘与落叶者”等也是那些外道自己圣典的文句。其中,“落叶者”指为乞食而游行者,或依他们的修行而行者。“胜者”指老朽者,因衰老而根器低劣,或依自己的修行战胜敌方而安住者。据说他如此之后,对任何人都不说法。因此说“什么也没说”。即使做出唇口等变化,也因忍辱而什么也不说,也有人这样说。“无所得”指如《大狮吼经》中所说“他不从罐口接受”等方法,以无所得为原因而结合,称为无所得者。正因如此,由于饥饿、虚弱所困,以卧倒为归宿的意义,称沙门为“落叶地”。显示巴利原文
Purisabhūmiyoti padhānaniddeso. Itthīnampi hetā bhūmiyo esa icchateva. Satta divaseti accantasaññogavacanaṃ, ettakampi mandā momūhāti. Sambādhaṭṭhānatoti mātukucchiṃ sandhāyāha. Rodanti ceva viravanti ca tamanussaritvā. Khedanaṃ, kīḷanañca khiḍḍāsaddeneva saṅgahetvā khiḍḍābhūmi vuttā. Padassa nikkhipanaṃ padanikkhipanaṃ. Yadā tathā padaṃ nikkhipituṃ samattho, tadā padavīmaṃsabhūmi nāmāti bhāvo. Vatāvatassa jānanakāle. Bhikkhu ca pannakotiādipi tesaṃ bāhirakānaṃ pāḷiyeva. Tattha pannakoti bhikkhāya vicaraṇako, tesaṃ vā paṭipattiyā paṭipannako. Jinoti jiṇṇo jarāvasena hīnadhātuko, attano vā paṭipattiyā paṭipakkhaṃ jinitvā ṭhito. So kira tathābhūto dhammampi kassaci na kathesi. Tenāha ‘‘na kiñci āhā’’ti. Oṭṭhavadanādivippakāre katepi khamanavasena na kiñci kathetītipi vadanti. Alābhinti ‘‘so na kumbhimukhā paṭiggaṇhātī’’tiādinā nayena mahāsīhanādasutte (dī. ni. 1.394; ma. ni. 1.155) vuttaalābhahetusamāyogena alābhiṃ. Tatoyeva jighacchādubbalaparetatāya sayanaparāyanaṭṭhena samaṇaṃ pannabhūmīti vadati.
“百种活命生计”指作为众生谋生方式的百种生计。即使在说“百种游行者”时,他也不知其本然的特征,而说成“百游行者”。其他处也是如此。因此说“百种游行者出家”。龙宫即龙界,如同说“摩醯沙迦界”。微尘等为尘。以“兽”一词摄取了山羊之类。以“鹿”一词摄取了鹿、牛、羚羊等鹿类。在“节”中,指关节,即节的意思。依四大王天、梵身天等以及它们的内部差别,有许多天。其中,四大王天的某些内部差别应依《大集会经》阐明。“然而他……”等显示,他因不知,即使有许多天也只说七种,表明了其有限。人也是无量的,依洲、国、族、姓、生计等分类。毕舍遮即食尸鬼,他们因其他饿鬼等而有种种大小,意思是类别更多。然而在外道时期,论师说:“六牙湖、曼陀基尼河以库瓦利亚、穆迦林达等名称被称呼。”显示巴利原文
Ājīvavuttisatānīti sattānamājīvabhūtāni jīvikāvuttisatāni. ‘‘Paribbājakasatānī’’ti vuccamānepi cesa sabhāvaliṅgamajānanto ‘‘paribbājakasate’’ti vadati. Evamaññesupi. Tenāha ‘‘paribbājakapabbajjāsatānī’’ti. Nāgabhavanaṃ nāgamaṇḍalaṃ yathā ‘‘mahiṃsakamaṇḍala’’nti. Paramāṇuādi rajo. Pasuggahaṇena eḷakajāti gahitā. Migaggahaṇena rurugavayādi migajāti. Gaṇṭhimhīti phaḷumhi, pabbeti attho. Cātumahārājikādibrahmakāyikādivasena, tesañca antarabhedavasena bahū devā. Tattha cātumahārājikānaṃ ekaccaantarabhedo mahāsamayasuttena (dī. ni. 2.331) dīpetabbo. ‘‘So panā’’tiādinā ajānanto panesa bahū devepi satta eva vadatīti tassa appamāṇataṃ dasseti. Manussāpi anantāti dīpadesakulavaṃsājīvādivibhāgavasena. Pisācā eva pesācā, te aparapetādivasena mahantamahantā, bahutarāti attho. Bāhirakasamaye pana ‘‘chaddantadahamandākiniyo kuvāḷiyamucalindanāmena voharitā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.168) ācariyena vuttaṃ.
“结”指节结。因为在节结中有“入”的音。“大悬崖”指大坡。依剩余的方法,有百小悬崖。在梦中也是如此。“大劫宾那”应从义理上理解为“大劫”。然而他因不知音声而这样说,故不值得审察。同样,“八十四百千”也是如此。他因不能正确说“八十四百千”而这样说。然而文法家们说:“八十四中,有音节省略,c变为cu,r变为lo,并有重复。”这么多大湖,指有如此数量的大湖,即说为七大湖。据说,这是传闻其主张的助词。智者……也不去,为什么?因为众生轮回的时间是确定的。显示巴利原文
Gaṇṭhikāti pabbagaṇṭhikā. Pabbagaṇṭhimhi hi pavuṭasaddo. Mahāpapātāti mahātaṭā. Pārisesanayena khuddakapapātasatāni. Evaṃ supinesupi. ‘‘Mahākappino’’ti idaṃ ‘‘mahākappāna’’nti atthato veditabbaṃ. Saddato panesa ajānanto evaṃ vadatīti na vicāraṇakkhamaṃ. Tathā ‘‘cullāsīti satasahassānī’’ti idampi. So hi ‘‘caturāsīti satasahassānī’’ti vattumasakkonto evaṃ vadati. Saddaracakā pana ‘‘caturāsītiyā tulopo, cassa cu, rassa lo, dvittañcā’’ti vadanti. Ettakā mahāsarāti etappamāṇavatā mahāsarato, sattamahāsaratoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kirāti tassa vādānussavane nipāto. Paṇḍitopi…pe… na gacchati, kasmā? Sattānaṃ saṃsaraṇakālassa niyatabhāvato.
“或以裸形戒,或以其他任何方式”所说,即用“正是那样的”来指摄。“以苦行”指以作苦行。此处亦有“正是那样的”之运用。那个……而清净的人,使未成熟的业成熟,这是其中的连结。“中间”指在八十四百千大劫之内。“触触”指达到又达到。所说的时限,即八十四百千大劫的时限。这是说:未成熟的、轮回之因的业,依戒等迅速达到清净,故说为“使成熟”。已成熟的业,因一再触及此时限而令成熟之机不至,故说为“令消灭、离去”。“以斗”指以量度的斗桶。依形状而得其义,故说“如量”。以“轮回不……”等显示,轮回不因智者与愚者而有所增减。增即上胜,减即下劣。显示巴利原文
‘‘Acelakavatena vā aññena vā yena kenacī’’ti vuttamatidisati ‘‘tādisenevā’’ti iminā. Tapokammenāti tapakaraṇena. Etthāpi ‘‘tādisenevā’’ti adhikāro. Yo…pe… visujjhati, so aparipakkaṃ kammaṃ paripāceti nāmāti yojanā. Antarāti caturāsītimahākappasatasahassānamabbhantare. Phussa phussāti patvā patvā. Vuttaparimāṇaṃ kālanti caturāsītimahākappasatasahassapamāṇaṃ kālaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – aparipakkaṃ saṃsaraṇanimittaṃ kammaṃ sīlādinā sīghaṃyeva visuddhappattiyā paripāceti nāma. Paripakkaṃ kammaṃ phussa phussa kālena paripakkabhāvānāpādanena byantiṃ vigamanaṃ karoti nāmāti. Doṇenāti pariminanadoṇatumbena. Rūpakavasenattho labbhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘mitaṃ viyā’’ti. Na hāpanavaḍḍhanaṃ paṇḍitabālavasenāti dasseti ‘‘na saṃsāro’’tiādinā. Vaḍḍhanaṃ ukkaṃso. Hāpanaṃ avakaṃso.
“绕在线团上”即绕在线卷上。“逃离”即离去,如同“来世”一词中的用法;然而将ra音转为la音而如此说,如同“被缠绕”一词中的用法。而此词依curādi动词类,其义为行走,故说“行去”。以此譬喻说明,众生之轮回是逐渐耗尽而非增长,因其形态有其定限;为阐明此义,故说“当线耗尽”等语。“就在那里”,即就在耗尽之处。显示巴利原文
Katasuttaguḷeti katasuttavaṭṭiyaṃ. Paletīti pareti yathā ‘‘abhisamparāyo’’ti, (mahāni. 69; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.4) ra-kārassa pana la-kāraṃ katvā evaṃ vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘palibuddho’’ti (cūḷani. 15; mi. pa. 3.6). So ca curādigaṇavasena gatiyanti vuttaṃ ‘‘gacchatī’’ti. Imāya upamāya cesa sattānaṃ saṃsāro anukkamena khīyateva, na vaḍḍhati paricchinnarūpattāti imamatthaṃ vibhāvetīti āha ‘‘sutte khīṇe’’tiādi. Tatthevāti khīyanaṭṭhāneyeva.
阿耆多翅舍钦婆罗论释义显示巴利原文
Ajitakesakambalavādavaṇṇanā
171 171.“施与”是以所施法为首而说的布施之思。以此门而显示果报,故说“所施无有果报”。因为施与主要指食物等物品,他如何会否定此呢?此理于“所供”、“所祭”中也是如此。普遍共通的大布施,为大牺牲。以宾客身份所应作的恭敬,为宾客恭敬。果报指利益果报与等流果报。异熟指同类果报。因为在具足四支的布施中,如获得地位等是利益,如对商佉婆罗门的布施中仅得救护是等流,称为结生的同类果报是异熟。而说此世间、他世间,是就由业所得者而言,意在否定果报而说。因为现见的世间,如何会被他否定呢?“一切众生即于其处断灭”以此说明原因:这些众生无论住于何种生、趣等中,即于其处断灭,以无因毁灭而灭尽,这是其义。“于他们”指于父母。他正是就果报无有而说,并非说父母无有,亦非说现在对他们所行的恭敬与不恭敬无有,因为他们在世间是现见的。为了显示这些众生的生起唯如泡沫,并非有死后还来之生,故说“无有化生众生”,并说“死后而受生的众生名为无有”。名为沙门者,应如实知而不对任何人说,应自制,否则便成虚诳。他人能为他人做什么呢?如此,自己的修行……显示巴利原文
171.Dinnanti deyyadhammasīsena dānacetanāyeva vuttā. Taṃmukhena ca phalanti dasseti ‘‘dinnassa phalābhāva’’nti iminā. Dinnañhi mukhyato annādivatthu, taṃ kathamesa paṭikkhipissati . Esa nayo yiṭṭhaṃ hutanti etthāpi. Sabbasādhāraṇaṃ mahādānaṃ mahāyāgo. Pāhunabhāvena kattabbasakkāro pāhunakasakkāro. Phalanti ānisaṃsaphalaṃ, nissandaphalañca. Vipākoti sadisaphalaṃ. Caturaṅgasamannāgate dāne ṭhānantarādipatti viya hi ānisaṃso, saṅkhabrāhmaṇassa dāne (jā. 1.10.39) tāṇalābhamattaṃ viya nissando, paṭisandhisaṅkhātaṃ sadisaphalaṃ vipāko. Ayaṃ loko, paralokoti ca kammunā laddhabbo vutto phalābhāvameva sandhāya paṭikkhipanato. Paccakkhadiṭṭho hi loko kathaṃ tena paṭikkhitto siyā. ‘‘Sabbe tattha tattheva ucchijjantī’’ti iminā kāraṇamāha, yattha yattha bhavayoniādīsu ṭhitā ime sattā, tattha tattheva ucchijjanti, nirudayavināsavasena vinassantīti attho. Tesūti mātāpitūsu. Phalābhāvavaseneva vadati, na mātāpitūnaṃ, nāpi tesu idāni kariyamānasakkārāsakkārānamabhāvavasena tesaṃ loke paccakkhattā. Pubbuḷassa viya imesaṃ sattānaṃ uppādo nāma kevalo, na cavitvā āgamanapubbako atthīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘natthi sattā opapātikā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘cavitvā upapajjanakā sattā nāma natthī’’ti. Samaṇena nāma yāthāvato jānantena kassaci akathetvā saññatena bhavitabbaṃ, aññathā ahopurisikā nāma siyā. Kiñhi paro parassa karissati, tathā ca attano sampādanassa kassaci avassayo eva na siyā tattha tattheva ucchijjanatoti imamatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ye imañca…pe… pavedentī’’ti āha. Ayaṃ aṭṭhakathāvasesako attho.
系属于四大者,即是四大所成。为显明义理,故说“四大所造”。正如由泥所生的器皿称为泥所造,同样,此由四大所生者,亦称为四大所造。内在地界,指属于众生相续的地界。外在地界,指外在的大地,以此地界即身而说。随行,意为追随。以两者,即以此二词。至于接近、趋近:从外在之地身,彼一分之地来至,成为内在状态,依众生之性而住立;而彼大地,如瓶等中的地,今复接近、趋近于彼同一外在之地身,即成为其集合体,全然与彼外在地身无别,成为一体,这是其义。于水等中,此理亦然:此处,如雨云从大海所取的水,以雨水之性复归大海;如从太阳光线所取的、名为因陀罗火的光明,复归太阳光线;如从大风蕴所出的大风,复归大风蕴,如此地接近、趋近。这是以假想而说邪见者的意趣。显示巴利原文
Catūsu mahābhūtesu niyutto cātumahābhūtiko, atthamattato pana dassetuṃ ‘‘catumahābhūtamayo’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā hi mattikāya nibbattaṃ bhājanaṃ mattikāmayaṃ, evamayampi catūhi mahābhūtehi nibbatto catumahābhūtamayoti vuccati. Ajjhattikapathavīdhātūti sattasantānagatā pathavīdhātu. Bāhirapathavīdhātunti bahiddhā mahāpathaviṃ, tena pathavīyeva kāyoti dasseti. Anugacchatīti anubandhati. Ubhayenāpīti padadvayenapi. Upeti upagacchatīti bāhirapathavikāyato tadekadesabhūtā pathavī āgantvā ajjhattikabhāvappatti hutvā sattabhāvena saṇṭhitā, sā ca mahāpathavī ghaṭādigatapathavī viya idāni tameva bāhiraṃ pathavikāyaṃ samudāyabhūtaṃ puna upeti upagacchati, sabbaso tena bāhirapathavikāyena nibbisesataṃ ekībhāvameva gacchatīti attho. Āpādīsupi eseva nayoti ettha pajjunnena mahāsamuddato gahitaāpo viya vassodakabhāvena punapi mahāsamuddaṃ, sūriyaraṃsito gahitaindaggisaṅkhātatejo viya punapi sūriyaraṃsiṃ, mahāvāyukkhandhato niggatamahāvāto viya punapi mahāvāyukkhandhaṃ upeti upagacchatīti parikappanāmattena diṭṭhigatikassa adhippāyo.
“意为第六根”:眼、耳、鼻、舌、身这些根中,意正是第六,这些即是根。他们说“跃入虚空”,即成为他们的境界。因为,在提及能取者时,所取之境也已被含摄。如何计数而有“床为第五”呢?故说“床即是……这是其义”。火葬场与坟场,其义为一。功德过失之句,即功德与过失的部分。或者,身体即是句,因为依各种作用而应被了知。“鸽鸟色”,即名为鸽之鸟的颜色。“鸽鸟翼色”是读法,其义为鸽鸟的翼色。“灰末为终”,即终于灰烬,故说“终于灰烬”。此处以“供物”一词,显示“施与、所供、所祭”所说的布施,一切皆被含摄,故说“宾客恭敬等差别之施与布施”;或者,这是特别的余说。“义”,即就意趣而言,因为从言辞未能通达其义。如此,于此类中。“愚者”,即迷执者、愚人,由他们而成为愚者。他们说了什么呢?故说“愚者施与”等。在圣典中,“世间有”之思惟者,他们为“有论者”;而“有”是不变词,他们之说为“有论说”,即彼有论说。显示巴利原文
Manacchaṭṭhāniindriyānīti manameva chaṭṭhaṃ yesaṃ cakkhusotaghānajivhākāyānaṃ, tāni indriyāni. Ākāsaṃ pakkhandanti tesaṃ visayabhāvāti vadanti. Visayīgahaṇena hi visayāpi gahitā eva honti. Kathaṃ gaṇitā mañcapañcamāti āha ‘‘mañco ceva…pe… attho’’ti. Āḷāhanaṃ susānanti atthato ekaṃ. Guṇāguṇapadānīti guṇadosakoṭṭhāsāni. Sarīrameva vā padāni taṃtaṃkiriyāya pajjitabbato. Pārāvatapakkhivaṇṇānīti pārāvatassa nāma pakkhino vaṇṇāni. ‘‘Pārāvatapakkhavaṇṇānī’’ti pāṭho, pārāvatasakuṇassa pattavaṇṇānīti attho. Bhasmantāti chārikāpariyantā. Tenāha ‘‘chārikāvasānamevā’’ti. Āhutisaddenettha ‘‘dinnaṃ yiṭṭhaṃ huta’’nti vuttappakāraṃ dānaṃ sabbampi gahitanti dasseti ‘‘pāhunakasakkārādibhedaṃ dinnadāna’’nti iminā, virūpekasesaniddeso vā esa. Atthoti adhippāyato attho saddato tassa anadhigamitattā. Evamīdisesu. Dabbanti muyhantīti dattū, bālapuggalā, tehi dattūhi. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘bālā dentī’’tiādi. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘loko atthī’’ti mati yesaṃ te atthikā, ‘‘atthī’’ti cedaṃ nepātikapadaṃ, tesaṃ vādo atthikavādo, taṃ atthikavādaṃ.
其中,是指在如前所述的三种邪见者中。否认业,因为持无作业论。否认果报,因为完全拒绝未来的再生。所谓果报,是指利益、等流、相似果三种果报。否认两者,因为完全否定因,果也就被否定了。所谓两者,即业与果报。因为他说“众生无因无缘而杂染,亦无因无缘而清净”,这显示了如同业一样,果报也没有杂染与清净的缘,因此他否认了这两者。果报被否认,是因为没有业就没有果报。业被否认,是因为没有果报,业就成了无意义。如是,是前述义理的指示。从意义上说,即从本质上,虽然它们在经文中以各自分别显示各各邪见的方式出现,但意义上是这两者的否认者。各自的三类邪见者,正是这两者的否认者。因为“两者否认者”这一复合词,其定语内含“因”义。无因论者等,是立论之词,因为已确定为彼之果。因此,由于否认果报而为虚无论者,由于否认业而为无作业论者,由于否认这两者而为无因论者,应知如此随所得而建立的因果关联。因为,以否认果报而为虚无论者、断灭论者,从意义上说,以否认业而为无作业论者,以否认两者而为无因论者。其余两者也依此理类推。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti tesu yathāvuttesu tīsu micchāvādīsu. Kammaṃ paṭibāhati akiriyavādibhāvato. Vipākaṃ paṭibāhati sabbena sabbaṃ āyatiṃ upapattiyā paṭikkhipanato. Vipākanti ca ānisaṃsanissandasadisaphalavasena tividhampi vipākaṃ. Ubhayaṃ paṭibāhati sabbaso hetupaṭisedhaneneva phalassāpi paṭisedhitattā. Ubhayanti ca kammaṃ vipākampi. So hi ‘‘ahetū appaccayā sattā saṃkilissanti, visujjhanti cā’’ti vadanto kammassa viya vipākassāpi saṃkilesavisuddhīnaṃ paccayattābhāvajotanato tadubhayaṃ paṭibāhati nāma. Vipāko paṭibāhito hoti asati kammasmiṃ vipākābhāvato. Kammaṃ paṭibāhitaṃ hoti asati vipāke kammassa niratthakatāpattito. Itīti vuttatthanidassanaṃ. Atthatoti sarūpato, visuṃ visuṃ taṃtaṃdiṭṭhidīpakabhāvena pāḷiyaṃ āgatāpi tadubhayapaṭibāhakāvāti attho. Paccekaṃ tividhadiṭṭhikā eva te ubhayapaṭibāhakattā. ‘‘Ubhayappaṭibāhakā’’ti hi hetuvacanaṃ hetugabbhattā tassa visesanassa. Ahetukavādā cevātiādi paṭiññāvacanaṃ tapphalabhāvena nicchitattā. Tasmā vipākapaṭibāhakattā natthikavādā, kammapaṭibāhakattā akiriyavādā, tadubhayapaṭibāhakattā ahetukavādāti yathālābhaṃ hetuphalatāsambandho veditabbo. Yo hi vipākapaṭibāhanena natthikadiṭṭhiko ucchedavādī, so atthato kammapaṭibāhanena akiriyadiṭṭhiko, ubhayapaṭibāhanena ahetukadiṭṭhiko ca hoti. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.
“或者那些……”等,是说明这些随见者入于决定性的判别。其中,“那些”指富兰那等。他们“诵习”,即随宜受持、读诵他们所作的那部显示邪见的典籍。他们“审察”,即思辨其义。“他们的……”等,是显示审察的方式。“对于作者……被断灭”:如此审察的他们,即是这样的关联。在那所缘中——即如所计度的业果不存在等、依“作者不造恶”等理趣而转起的、称为邪见的执著所缘中,邪念安住。所谓邪念安住,即是与见俱行的渴爱——称为邪念——安住。因为,对于依传闻而得的“作者不造恶”等义,以彼形相思维,如同有形象一般,本质地现起于心;由于长时熟习,达到“正是如此”的审察堪忍状态;又由于审察堪忍而如此如此地执取,一再如此修习、多作,被邪思维所引导,被邪精进所支持,即使非彼自性,也执取为“彼自性”。这种与邪见俱行的渴爱,由于忆念虚妄、颠倒,故称为邪念。在《增支部四集注》中也说了此义。正如邪思维等一样,并没有一个名为邪念的别别之法,这是以渴爱为首而摄取的四种不善蕴的增语;在《中部·渐损经》的注释中也如此说。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ye vā panā’’tiādinā tesamanudiṭṭhikānaṃ niyāmokkantivinicchayo vutto. Tattha tesanti pūraṇādīnaṃ. Sajjhāyantīti taṃ diṭṭhidīpakaṃ ganthaṃ yathā tathā tehi kataṃ uggahetvā paṭhanti. Vīmaṃsantīti tassa atthaṃ vicārenti. ‘‘Tesa’’ntiādi vīmaṃsanākāradassanaṃ. ‘‘Karoto…pe… ucchijjatī’’ti evaṃ vīmaṃsantānaṃ tesanti sambandho. Tasmiṃ ārammaṇeti yathāparikappite kammaphalābhāvādike ‘‘karoto na karīyati pāpa’’ntiādi nayappavattāya micchādassanasaṅkhātāya laddhiyā ārammaṇe. Micchāsati santiṭṭhatīti micchāsatisaṅkhātā laddhisahagatā taṇhā santiṭṭhati. ‘‘Karoto na karīyati pāpa’’ntiādivasena hi anussavūpaladdhe atthe tadākāraparivitakkanehi saviggahe viya sarūpato cittassa paccupaṭṭhite cirakālaparicayena ‘‘evameta’’nti nijjhānakkhamabhāvūpagamane, nijjhānakkhantiyā ca tathā tathā gahite punappunaṃ tatheva āsevantassa bahulīkarontassa micchāvitakkena samānīyamānā micchāvāyāmupatthambhitā ataṃsabhāvampi ‘‘taṃsabhāva’’nti gaṇhantī micchāladdhisahagatā taṇhā musā vitathaṃ saraṇato pavattanato micchāsatīti vuccati. Caturaṅguttaraṭīkāyampi (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.30) cesa attho vuttoyeva. Micchāsaṅkappādayo viya hi micchāsati nāma pāṭiyekko koci dhammo natthi, taṇhāsīsena gahitānaṃ catunnampi akusalakkhandhānametaṃ adhivacananti majjhimāgamaṭṭhakathāyampi sallekhasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.83) vuttaṃ.
心成为一境性,即由于各自获得寻等缘,在那所缘中安住,舍离多境而成为一境性,如同安止。这里以心为首,实指邪定。因为,它依殊胜的缘而获得修习力,在这样的处所,只是作似安止的作用,应知如同射箭穿发等技艺一般。速行心生起:即在那以彼形相、于前分速行转起多次之后,在作为究竟的最后速行中,七个速行心转起。“在第一速行心,是可治疗的,第二等也是如此”,这只是显示法的自性,并非显示在那一刹那,它们能被任何人治疗。因为,站在它们本身来说,第七速行心必然生起,不可逆转;又因为心刹那如此迅速地转变,依教诫教授,治疗是不可能的。因此说“即使对诸佛,也是不可治疗、不退转的”。如同阿利咤比丘、甘达迦沙弥等,像他们一样,是不可治疗、不退转的,已成为邪见者。这是所说。显示巴利原文
Cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hotīti yathāsakaṃ vitakkādipaccayalābhena tasmiṃ ārammaṇe avaṭṭhitatāya anekaggataṃ pahāya ekaggaṃ appitaṃ viya hoti, cittasīsena cettha micchāsamādhi eva vutto. So hi paccayavisesehi laddhabhāvanābalo īdise ṭhāne samādhānapatirūpakakiccakaroyeva hoti vālavijjhanādīsu viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Javanāni javantīti anekakkhattuṃ tenākārena pubbabhāgiyesu javanavāresu pavattesu sanniṭṭhānabhūte sabbapacchime javanavāre satta javanāni javanti. ‘‘Paṭhamajavane satekicchā honti, tathā dutiyādīsū’’ti idaṃ dhammasabhāvadassanameva, na pana tasmiṃ khaṇe tesaṃ tikicchā kenaci sakkā kātunti dassanaṃ tesveva ṭhatvā sattamajavanassa avassamuppajjamānassa nivattituṃ asakkuṇeyyattā, evaṃ lahuparivatte ca cittavāre ovādānusāsana vasena tikicchāya asambhavato. Tenāha ‘‘buddhānampi atekicchā anivattino’’ti . Ariṭṭhakaṇṭakasadisāti ariṭṭhabhikkhukaṇṭakasāmaṇerasadisā, te viya atekicchā anivattino micchādiṭṭhigatikāyeva jātāti vuttaṃ hoti.
其中,是指在三种邪见中。有人入于一种见,即若只对一种有执著,且修习转起,他便只入于一种见。有人入于两种,有人入于三种,即若对两种或三种有执著,且修习转起,他便入于两种或三种。然而,以此语,显示了先前所说“如是一切,从意义上说,都是两者的否认者”等,以两者否认者的角度所显示的、从意义上成立的一切见者,那是前分的。至于成为入于邪决定性的,则如同依各自缘集而成就的、所缘不同的殊胜证得不能合一一样,它们是相互混杂的,这是显示。“即使入于一种……”等,是阐明三种见的同等作用与同等果报。由于它们以障天等而有同等作用与同等果报,因此,这三者即使于一人中生起,也是混杂的;当一种给与果报时,另一种是它的随增给与者,应如此知。说了“已得障天之道等”之后,以“不能”等开显其义。障解脱道,即障碍作为涅槃之道的圣道。Pagevā,是拒绝义的介词,意思是:至于去称为解脱的涅槃,那还有什么可说呢?又,pagevā即pā eva,意思是:首先就不能去解脱,比去解脱更遥远。其他地方也随宜如此。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti tesu tīsu micchādassanesu. Koci ekaṃ dassanaṃ okkamatīti yassa ekasmiṃyeva abhiniveso, āsevanā ca pavattā, so ekameva dassanaṃ okkamati. Koci dve, koci tīṇipīti yassa dvīsu, tīsupi vā abhiniveso, āsevanā ca pavattā, so dve , tīṇipi okkamati, etena pana vacanena yā pubbe ‘‘iti sabbepete atthato ubhayappaṭibāhakā’’tiādinā ubhayappaṭibāhakatāmukhena dīpitā atthato siddhā sabbadiṭṭhikatā, sā pubbabhāgiyā. Yā pana micchattaniyāmokkantibhūtā, sā yathāsakaṃ paccayasamudāgamasiddhito bhinnārammaṇānaṃ viya visesādhigamānaṃ ekajjhaṃ anuppattiyā aññamaññaṃ abbokiṇṇā evāti dasseti. ‘‘Ekasmiṃ okkantepī’’tiādinā tissannampi diṭṭhīnaṃ samānasāmatthiyataṃ, samānaphalatañca vibhāveti. Saggāvaraṇādinā hetā samānasāmatthiyā ceva samānaphalā ca, tasmā tissopi cetā ekassa uppannāpi abbokiṇṇā eva, ekāya vipāke dinne itarā tassā anubalappadāyikāyoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Patto saggamaggāvaraṇañcevā’’tiādiṃ vatvā ‘‘abhabbo’’tiādinā tadevatthaṃ āvikaroti. Mokkhamaggāvaraṇanti nibbānapathabhūtassa ariyamaggassa nivāraṇaṃ. Pagevāti paṭikkhepatthe nipāto, mokkhasaṅkhātaṃ pana nibbānaṃ gantuṃ kā nāma kathāti attho. Apica pagevāti pā eva, paṭhamatarameva mokkhaṃ gantumabhabbo, mokkhagamanatopi dūrataramevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Evamaññatthāpi yathārahaṃ.
“此众生名为轮回之桩”这句话是不了义(neyyattha),而非了义(nītattha)。正如在名为《破迷广解》的《中部义注》中所说:“是否此人仅在一生便得决定,抑或在他生亦得决定?仅在一生得决定,但是由串习力故,于他生也会喜好那种种邪见。”(中部义注3.103)因为不善法称为软弱无力,不似善法那样强而有力,故于彼处说“仅在一生得决定”。否则,正性决定(sammattaniyāma)与邪性决定(micchattaniyāma)便会同样成为绝对,然而并非绝对。若如此,则“轮回之桩”的说明如何得以成立?因此说“由串习力”等。所以,如同《增支部·七集》中所说:“愚者即使沉没一次,也仍是沉没者”(增支部7.15,同义),轮回之桩的说明也是如此宣说的。因为当此人依于某种缘而进入种种见后,若再依于与之相反的缘,难道能说他不会从中抬起头来吗?因此,在彼处(中部义注3.102)和此处的义注中,都用了“通常”一词:“因为对于这样的人,通常没有从有(bhava)中出离的可能。”如此。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vaṭṭakhāṇu nāmesa satto’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ neyyatthameva, na nītatthaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ papañcasūdaniyaṃ nāma majjhimāgamaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘kiṃ panesa ekasmiṃyeva attabhāve niyato hoti, udāhu aññasmimpīti? Ekasmiṃyeva niyato, āsevanavasena pana bhavantarepi taṃ taṃ diṭṭhiṃ rocetiyevā’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.103). Akusalañhi nāmetaṃ abalaṃ dubbalaṃ, na kusalaṃ viya sabalaṃ mahābalaṃ, tasmā ‘‘ekasmiṃyeva attabhāve niyato’’ti tattha vuttaṃ. Aññathā sammattaniyāmo viya micchattaniyāmopi accantiko siyā, na ca accantiko. Yadevaṃ vaṭṭakhāṇujotanā kathaṃ yujjeyyāti āha ‘‘āsevanavasenā’’tiādi, tasmā yathā sattaṅguttarapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sakiṃ nimuggopi nimuggo eva bālo’’ti [a. ni. 7.15 (atthato samānaṃ)] vuttaṃ, evaṃ vaṭṭakhāṇujotanāpi vuttā. Yādise hi paccaye paṭicca ayaṃ taṃ taṃ dassanaṃ okkanto, puna kadāci tappaṭipakkhe paccaye paṭicca tato sīsukkhipanamassa na hotīti na vattabbaṃ. Tasmā tattha, (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.102) idha ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘evarūpassa hi yebhuyyena bhavato vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthī’’ti yebhuyyaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, iti āsevanavasena bhavantarepi taṃtaṃdiṭṭhiyā rocanato yebhuyyenassa bhavato vuṭṭhānaṃ natthīti katvā vaṭṭakhāṇuko nāmesa jāto, na pana micchattaniyāmassa accantikatāyāti nīharitvā ñātabbatthatāya neyyatthamidaṃ, na nītatthanti veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya abhidhammepi ‘‘arahā, ye ca puthujjanā maggaṃ na paṭilabhissanti, te rūpakkhandhañca na parijānanti, vedanākkhandhañca na parijānissantī’’tiādi (yama. 1.khandhayamaka 210) vuttaṃ. Pathavigopakoti yathāvuttakāraṇena pathavipālako. Tadatthaṃ samatthetuṃ ‘‘yebhuyyenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
如此,为了随顺邪见的极大过患而令闻者生起正念,他说了“因此”等语。其中,“因此”:因为如此,这(邪见)甚至成为轮回之桩的缘,已是无容置疑的,所以应当远离,这是句子的关联。“恶人”:即远离善法之人、不善之人。“毒蛇”:即毒液迅速来临的剧毒之物。“求福者”:即依现世、来世及胜义的利益,希望以自身功德而增长者。“明智者”:即以智慧眼观察种种义理者,与“坚定者”同义。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ micchādiṭṭhiyā paramasāvajjānusārena sotūnaṃ satimuppādento ‘‘tasmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tasmāti yasmā evaṃ saṃsārakhāṇubhāvassāpi paccayo apaṇṇakajāto, tasmā parivajjeyyāti sambandho. Akalyāṇajananti kalyāṇadhammavirahitajanaṃ asādhujanaṃ. Āsīvisanti āsumāgatahalāhalaṃ. Bhūtikāmoti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthānaṃ vasena attano guṇehi vuḍḍhikāmo. Vicakkhaṇoti paññācakkhunā vividhatthassa passako, dhīroti attho.
巴古达咖咤亚那论释义显示巴利原文
Pakudhakaccāyanavādavaṇṇanā
174 174.“akaṭā”在此处,因字母ṭa替代了字母ta,故说为“akatā”,意为:非由任何因——无论正因或非正因——所造作,即非被安排。同样,“akaṭavidhā”也是如此。这些(法)没有造作的种类、没有造作的方式,故为“akaṭavidhā”。通过这两个词,显示了它们在世间不由任何因缘而生起的状态。因此说“应如此做”等。即使以神通也未化作:即不被任何具神通、心得自在者、天神或自在天等的神通所化作。“不被化作”:即不被任何人所化作。虽然从字面上看是合理的,且义理与前相同,但为了显示在经典和义注中,未来法本身即不可执取的理由,而说“那既非经典”等。显示巴利原文
174. ‘‘Akaṭā’’ti ettha ta-kārassa ṭa-kārādesoti āha ‘‘akatā’’ti, samena, visamena vā kenacipi hetunā akatā, na vihitāti attho. Tathā akaṭavidhāti etthāpi. Natthi katavidho karaṇavidhi etesanti akaṭavidhā. Padadvayenāpi loke kenaci hetupaccayena nesaṃ anibbattabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ karohī’’tiādi. Iddhiyāpi na nimmitāti kassaci iddhimato cetovasippattassa puggalassa, devassa, issarādino ca iddhiyāpi na nimmitā. Animmāpitāti kassaci animmāpitā. Kāmaṃ saddato yuttaṃ, atthato ca purimena samānaṃ, tathāpi pāḷiyamaṭṭhakathāyañca anāgatameva agahetabbabhāve kāraṇanti dasseti ‘‘taṃ neva pāḷiya’’ntiādinā.
这只是《梵网经注》(长部义注1.30)中已说过的义理。此处仅作连接:所谓“不孕者”,即如不孕的畜生、不孕的多罗树等,不结果实,不产生任何事物,以此否定地界等能产生色等。因其执见认为,色、声等并不依存于地界等。如同山峰般安住,故为“峰住”,意思是:犹如山峰既不从任何事物所造,也不造作任何事物,这些众生之身也是如此。所谓“从种子生芽等”,那只是从已存在者中生出,而非从不存在者中生出;否则,一者可从另一者中得,这些众生之身也是如此,因此是“如柱屹立般安住”。“由于安住”:即因无变异而善安住。“不动摇”:即不产生变异。由于无有变异,这七种身如柱屹立般安住,且无动摇,即安住于自性。因此说“不转变”。“自性”:即本质。正因为是不变易之法,所以不互相伤害。因为,若有可令变异之性,则会有伤害性;同样,若有可令摄持之性,则会有摄持性。为了显示没有这些性质,经中说“不……”等。地即是身的一部分,故为“地身”,如说“海被看见”;或者,“身”一词有集合之义,故“地身”为地之集合,如说“象身”。由于七种身是显示巴利原文
Brahmajālasuttasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.30) vuttatthameva. Idamettha yojanāmattaṃ – vañjhāti hi vañjhapasuvañjhatālādayo viya aphalā kassaci ajanakā, tena pathavikāyādīnaṃ rūpādijanakabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati. Rūpasaddādayo hi pathavikāyādīhi appaṭibaddhavuttikāti tassa laddhi. Pabbatassa kūṭamiva ṭhitāti kūṭaṭṭhā, yathā pabbatakūṭaṃ kenaci anibbattitaṃ kassaci ca anibbattakaṃ, evametepi sattakāyāti adhippāyo. Yamidaṃ ‘‘bījato aṅkurādi jāyatī’’ti vuccati, taṃ vijjamānameva tato nikkhamati, na avijjamānaṃ, itarathā aññatopi aññassa upaladdhi siyā, evametepi sattakāyā, tasmā esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhitāti. Ṭhitattāti nibbikārabhāvena suppatiṭṭhitattā. Na calantīti na vikāramāpajjanti. Vikārābhāvato hi tesaṃ sattannaṃ kāyānaṃ esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhitatā, aniñjanañca attano pakatiyā avaṭṭhānameva. Tenāha ‘‘na vipariṇamantī’’ti. Pakatinti sabhāvaṃ . Avipariṇāmadhammattā eva na aññamaññaṃ upahananti. Sati hi vikāramāpādetabbabhāve upaghātakatā siyā, tathā anuggahetabbabhāve sati anuggāhakatāpīti tadabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘nāla’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Pathavīyeva kāyekadesattā pathavikāyo yathā ‘‘samuddo diṭṭho’’ti, pathavisamūho vā kāyasaddassa samūhavācakattā yathā ‘‘hatthikāyo’’ti. Jīvasattamānaṃ kāyānaṃ niccatāya nibbikārabhāvato na hantabbatā, na ghātetabbatā ca, tasmā neva koci hantā, ghātetā vā atthīti dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sattannaṃ tveva kāyāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Yadi koci hantā natthi, kathaṃ tesaṃ satthappahāroti tattha codanāyāha ‘‘yathā’’tiādi. Tattha sattannaṃ tvevāti sattannameva. Itisaddo hettha nipātamattaṃ. Pahatanti paharitaṃ. Ekatodhārādikaṃ satthaṃ. Antareneva pavisati, na tesu. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kevalaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ imaṃ jīvitā voropemī’’ti tesaṃ tathā saññāmattameva, hananaghātanādi pana paramatthato nattheva kāyānaṃ avikopanīyabhāvatoti.
尼干陀纳德子论释义显示巴利原文
Nigaṇṭhanāṭaputtavādavaṇṇanā
177 “四个时分的部分”即四时分,四时分即是“四时分”。此处“时分”一词的意义是“部分”,如“夜晚的第一时分”。而在此处,它是指“以防护为特征的部分”,因此说“以四部分防护而防护”。或者,“时分”一词的意义是“自制”,即“控制、抑制”称为“时分”。正如在“已调御者”等词中,即使没有前缀,也像有前缀一样表示“抑制”的意义,而那是通过四种方式,因此说“以四部分防护”。因为“方式”与“部分”在意义上是一回事。“已遮止一切水”是指,对于此人,一切水都被遮止,如同“已供奉火者”。因此说“已遮止一切用水”。此处以“水”这个词表示水的受用,如同“夜晚已停止”。对于此人,一切冷水及其受用都被禁止,故如此说。“那”指冷水。“具备一切遮止”是说明了防护的特征。“抖落一切水”是恶行消除的特征。“遍触一切水”是业尽的特征。为了显示这个意义,说了“以一切……”等。因为“具备一切恶的遮止”是指,以一切种类的防护特征,即遮止恶,而具足。“已抖落恶”是指,以一切消除的特征,即遮止恶,而抖落了恶。“已遍触”是指,通过显示巴利原文
177. Cattāro yāmā bhāgā catuyāmaṃ, catuyāmaṃ eva cātuyāmaṃ. Bhāgattho hi idha yāma-saddo yathā ‘‘rattiyā paṭhamo yāmo’’ti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.368). So panettha bhāgo saṃvaralakkhitoti āha ‘‘catukoṭṭhāsena saṃvarena saṃvuto’’ti, saṃyamattho vā yāmasaddo yamanaṃ saññamanaṃ yāmoti katvā. ‘‘Yatatto’’tiādīsu viya hi anupasaggopi saupasaggo viya saññamatthavācako, so pana catūhi ākārehīti āha ‘‘catukoṭṭhāsena saṃvarenā’’ti. Ākāro koṭṭhāsoti hi atthato ekaṃ. Vārito sabbavāri yassāyaṃ sabbavārivārito yathā ‘‘agyāhito’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘vāritasabbaudako’’ti. Vārisaddena cettha vāriparibhogo vutto yathā ‘‘rattūparato’’ti. Paṭikkhitto sabbasītodako tapparibhogo yassāti tathā. Tanti sītodakaṃ. Sabbavāriyuttoti saṃvaralakkhaṇamattaṃ kathitaṃ. Sabbavāridhutoti pāpanijjaralakkhaṇaṃ. Sabbavāriphuṭoti kammakkhayalakkhaṇanti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sabbenā’’tiādimāha, sabbena pāpavāraṇena yuttoti hi sabbappakārena saṃvaralakkhaṇena pāpavāraṇena samannāgato. Dhutapāpoti sabbena nijjaralakkhaṇena pāpavāraṇena vidhutapāpo. Phuṭṭhoti aṭṭhannampi kammānaṃ khepanena mokkhappattiyā kammakkhayalakkhaṇena sabbena pāpavāraṇena phuṭṭho, taṃ patvā ṭhitoti attho. ‘‘Dveyeva gatiyo bhavanti, anaññā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.258; 2.34; 3.199, 200; ma. ni. 2.384, 398) viya gamusaddo niṭṭhānatthoti vuttaṃ ‘‘koṭippattacitto’’ti, mokkhādhigamena uttamamariyādappattacittoti attho. Kāyādīsu indriyesu saṃyametabbassa abhāvato saṃyatacitto. Atīte hettha ta-saddo. Saṃyametabbassa avasesassa abhāvato suppatiṭṭhitacitto. Kiñci sāsanānulomanti pāpavāraṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Asuddhaladdhitāyāti ‘‘atthi jīvo, so ca siyā nicco, siyā anicco’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.177). Evamādimalīnaladdhitāya. Sabbāti kammapakativibhāgādivisayāpi sabbā nijjhānakkhantiyo. Diṭṭhiyevāti micchādiṭṭhiyo eva jātā.
散泽耶·贝拉塔子之说的解释显示巴利原文
Sañcayabelaṭṭhaputtavādavaṇṇanā
179-181 179-181。对于阿摩罗无记说的解释,与《梵网经》中无记说之解释所采用的方法相同。何以故?因其具有无记回答的性质,且该处无记说的出现方式正是如此。显示巴利原文
179-181.Amarāvikkhepevuttanayo evāti brahmajāle amarāvikkhepavādavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.61) vuttanayo eva. Kasmā? Vikkhepabyākaraṇabhāvato, tatheva ca tattha vikkhepavādassa āgatattā.
第一种现见沙门果的解释显示巴利原文
Paṭhamasandiṭṭhikasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā
182 “压榨后”即是用榨油机压榨后,借此说明国王的用心。因为说话者的一切义理确定,都依于用心。而注释师们既了知当时的用心,又与传承而来的义理不相违,因此不应仅因各处有言说之机,便认为义理只如所说出那般;应理解为,那是依于他们想要表达的意思。正是如此,后于各处又以提取义理等方式进行了义理阐明。显示巴利原文
182.Pīḷetvāti telayantena uppīḷetvā, iminā rañño ābhogamāha. Vadato hi ābhogavasena sabbattha atthanicchayo. Aṭṭhakathācariyā ca tadābhogaññū, paramparābhatatthassāvirodhino ca, tasmā sabbattha yathā tathā vacanokāsaladdhabhāvamattena attho na vutto, atha kho tesaṃ vattumicchitavasenāti gahetabbaṃ, evañca katvā tattha tattha atthuddhārādivasena atthavivecanā katāti.
183 “如你所喜”的意思是:现在我所问的义理,如在你心中所喜,即为你心中所喜。此处,这是一个表示行为对象的动词形式。或者也可以理解为:现在我所问的义理,使得作为接受者的你感到喜欢。“生于家中女奴之腹”即是“内生者”。“以财买来”即是“财买者”。“被敌俘获”即是“被强制带来者”。“自己以某种原因成为奴仆状态”即是“自为奴仆者”,因为“sāmaṃ”就是“自己”,“dāsabyaṃ”就是“奴仆状态”。有些奴仆即使懒惰、不做事,也不被称为“作工者”,但他并非如此,因此为了区别,说了“不懒惰”等。“从远方”即是从远方而来。“首先”是指,在前往较近的地方之前,更早、更先。“起立”是指,出于恭敬而起立站着,或者意为“对面起立”。“之后”是指,在主人躺下之后。“未从卧处起来”是指,在夜间破晓时分,尚未从卧处起来。“从凌晨时分”是指,从已过夜晚的凌晨时分。“直到主人夜间入睡”是指,在未来夜晚的初夜时分,直到入睡。在已过夜晚的凌晨与未来初夜之间,做完一切事务后才躺下,这是所说之意。“有什么事要做”是指,显示巴利原文
183.Yathā te rucceyyāti idāni mayā pucchiyamāno attho yathā tava citte rucceyya, tayā citte ruccethāti attho. Kammatthe hetaṃ kiriyāpadaṃ. Mayā vā dāni pucchiyamānamatthaṃ tava sampadānabhūtassa roceyyātipi vaṭṭati. Gharadāsiyā kucchismiṃ jāto antojāto. Dhanena kīto dhanakkīto. Bandhaggāhagahito karamarānīto. Sāmameva yena kenaci hetunā dāsabhāvamupagato sāmaṃdāsabyopagato. Sāmanti hi sayameva. Dāsabyanti dāsabhāvaṃ. Koci dāsopi samāno alaso kammaṃ akaronto ‘‘kammakāro’’ti na vuccati, so pana na tathābhūtoti visesanametanti āha ‘‘analaso’’tiādi. Dūratoti dūradesato āgataṃ. Paṭhamamevāti attano āsannataraṭṭhānupasaṅkamanato pageva puretarameva. Uṭṭhahatīti gāravavasena uṭṭhahitvā tiṭṭhati, paccuṭṭhātīti vā attho. Pacchāti sāmikassa nipajjāya pacchā. Sayanato avuṭṭhiteti rattiyā vibhāyanavelāya seyyato avuṭṭhite. Paccūsakālatoti atītarattiyā paccūsakālato . Yāva sāmino rattiṃ niddokkamananti aparāya bhāviniyā rattiyā padosavelāyaṃ yāva niddokkamanaṃ. Yā atītarattiyā paccūsavelā, bhāviniyā ca padosavelā, etthantare sabbakiccaṃ katvā pacchā nipatatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiṃ kāramevāti kiṃ karaṇīyameva kinti pucchāya kātabbato, pucchitvā kātabbaveyyāvaccanti attho. Paṭissaveneva samīpacāritā vuttāti āha ‘‘paṭisuṇanto vicaratī’’ti. Paṭikuddhaṃ mukhaṃ oloketuṃ na visahatītipi dasseti ‘‘tuṭṭhapahaṭṭha’’nti iminā.
“如天神”:即具足眷属、自在等,犹如精进天神,因此“maññe”(犹如)一词在此表示譬喻之义,正如“我想大善见王的后宫,犹如天神的庄严”(长部2.245)所示。“So vatassāhanti”一句,应断句为“so vata assaṃ ahaṃ”,意即:我若能如那位国王一般就好了。何以故?若我修诸福德——由此作出“so vata ahaṃ”等释义。“Vata”一词属于譬喻,故说“evarūpo”(如是)。“Puññānī”(诸福德):指更为殊胜的福德,因为此处是指往昔修福而得此殊胜出家的缘故。在异读“So vatassāyan”中,也作:如彼国王,此我亦当如是。为何?由“若修诸福德”之义生起,故说“这是它的意义”。在关联最上人时,虽然“ahaṃ”(我)字未直接连用,但通过“ayaṃ”(此)字代用,也就如同已连用一般。有人将初读的意义解释为:“我必当如是,若修诸福德”。若是如此,在第二读中便不应说“这是它的意义”,因为此处是以“ayaṃ”字代用“ahaṃ”字,而“so”(彼)是指待代用的另一事物。显示巴利原文
Devo viyāti ādhipaccaparivārādisamannāgato padhānadevo viya, tena maññe-saddo idha upamatthoti ñāpeti yathā ‘‘akkhāhataṃ maññe aṭṭhāsi rañño mahāsudassanassa antepuraṃ upasobhayamāna’’nti (dī. ni. 2.245). So vatassāhanti ettha so vata assaṃ ahanti padacchedo, so rājā viya ahampi bhaveyyaṃ. Kenāti ce? Yadi puññāni kareyyaṃ, tenāti atthoti āha ‘‘so vata aha’’ntiādi. Vatasaddo upamāyaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘evarūpo’’ti. Puññānīti uḷārataraṃ puññaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ aññadā katapuññato uḷārāya pabbajjāya adhippetattā. ‘‘So vatassāya’’ntipi pāṭhe so rājā viya ayaṃ ahampi assaṃ. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Yadi puññāni kareyya’’nti atthasambhavato ‘‘ayamevattho’’ti vuttaṃ. Assanti hi uttamapurisayoge ahaṃ-saddo appayuttopi ayaṃ-saddena parāmasanato payutto viya hoti. So ahaṃ evarūpo assaṃ vata, yadi puññāni kareyyanti paṭhamapāṭhassa atthamicchanti keci. Evaṃ sati dutiyapāṭhe ‘‘ayamevattho’’ti avattabbo siyā tattha ayaṃ-saddena ahaṃ-saddassa parāmasanato, ‘‘so’’ti ca parāmasitabbassa aññassa sambhavato. Yanti dānaṃ. Satabhāgampīti satabhūtaṃ bhāgampi, raññā dinnadānaṃ satadhā katvā tattha ekabhāgampīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yāvajīvaṃ na sakkhissāmi dātunti yāvajīvaṃ dānatthāya ussāhaṃ karontopi satabhāgamattampi dātuṃ na sakkhissāmi, tasmā pabbajissāmīti pabbajjāyaṃ ussāhaṃ katvāti attho. ‘‘Yaṃnūnā’’ti nipāto parivitakkanattheti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ cintanabhāva’’nti.
“以身防护”者,是指对于应依身加以防护的对象,即那通过身门转起的恶法,以防护的方式将其关闭。然而,此处的含义应依“策励”之义来理解,因为它应当与“应当住”一词相连接,故(义注)说:“关闭了不善的入门”。此处应有“成为”一词作为余词。“不善的入门”,即作为身业的诸不善法进入之门,也就是名为身表之门。“于其余二词亦然”,即对于“以语防护,以意防护”这两个词也应如此理解。“以饮食、衣被为最极”,是指在寻求饮食、衣被时,因行头陀苦行而以此为满足;或指安住于最上等阶位者,只以饮食、衣被为最极的限量,不再寻求、期盼任何其他资生之具,因此被称为“以饮食、衣被为最极者”,此状态即为“以饮食、衣被为最极”,这也就是显示巴利原文
Kāyena pihitoti kāyena saṃvaritabbassa kāyadvārena pavattanakassa pāpadhammassa saṃvaraṇavasena pidahito. Ussukkavacanavasena panattho vihareyya-padena sambajjhitabbattāti āha ‘‘akusalapavesanadvāraṃ thaketvā’’ti. Hutvāti hi seso. Akusalapavesanadvāranti ca kāyakammabhūtānamakusalānaṃ pavesanabhūtaṃ kāyaviññattisaṅkhātaṃ dvāraṃ. Sesapadadvayepīti ‘‘vācāya saṃvuto, manasā saṃvuto’’ti padadvayepi. Ghāsacchādanena paramatāyāti ghāsacchādanapariyesane sallekhavasena paramatāya, ukkaṭṭhabhāve vā saṇṭhito ghāsacchādanamattameva paramaṃ pamāṇaṃ koṭi etassa , na tato paraṃ kiñci āmisajātaṃ pariyesati, paccāsisati cāti ghāsacchādanaparamo, tassa bhāvo ghāsacchādanaparamatātipi aṭṭhakathāmuttako nayo. Ghasitabbo asitabboti ghāso, āhāro, ābhuso chādeti paridahati etenāti acchādanaṃ, nivāsanaṃ, apica ghasanaṃ ghāso, ābhuso chādīyate acchādanantipi yujjati. Etadatthampīti ghāsacchādanatthāyāpi. Anesananti ekavīsatividhampi ananurūpamesanaṃ.
“乐身远离者”,即安住于远离群体喧闹之处的人,其关联为“(与之)相应的身远离”。“乐出离者”,即乐于禅定者。“达最极清净者”,即由那乐于禅定,而证得最胜、最卓越的清净——心清净者。“无取者”,即究竟脱离烦恼取而远离行取者。“无行”即是涅槃,证得彼故,名“至无行者”,即阿罗汉,此处所指即是他们。“作如是语”,以此显示(此说)出自《大义释》。此处,第一种远离应当与其余两种远离一同解说,因为若其余两者成就,它也就成就;若它不成就,其余两者也不能平等成就。第二种(远离)也是如此。第三种则必须与其余的(远离)一同解说,因为没有其余成就,它便不能成就,应当如是了知。“舍离群体喧闹”等句,即是对其含义的分别。于此中,于众显示巴利原文
Vivekaṭṭhakāyānanti gaṇasaṅgaṇikato pavivitte ṭhitakāyānaṃ, sambandhībhūtānaṃ kāyavivekoti sambandho. Nekkhammābhiratānanti jhānābhiratānaṃ. Paramavodānappattānanti tāya eva jhānābhiratiyā paramaṃ uttamaṃ vodānaṃ cittavisuddhiṃ pattānaṃ. Nirupadhīnanti kilesūpadhiabhisaṅkhārūpadhīhi accantavigatānaṃ. Visaṅkhāraṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ, tadadhigamanetā visaṅkhāragatā, arahanto, tesaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ vutte’’ti iminā mahāniddese (mahāni. 7, 9) āgatabhāvaṃ dasseti. Ettha ca paṭhamo viveko itarehi dvīhi vivekehi sahāpi vattabbo itaresu siddhesu tassāpi sijjhanato, vinā ca tasmiṃ siddhepi itare samasijjhanato. Tathā dutiyopi. Tatiyo pana itarehi saheva vattabbo. Na vinā itaresu siddhesuyeva tassa sijjhanatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ pahāyā’’tiādi tadadhippāyavibhāvanaṃ. Tattha gaṇe janasamāgame sannipatanaṃ gaṇasaṅgaṇikā, taṃ pahāya. Kāyena eko viharati vicarati puggalavasena asahāyattā. Citte kilesānaṃ sannipatanaṃ cittakilesasaṅgaṇikā, taṃ pahāya. Eko viharati kilesavasena asahāyattā. Maggassa ekacittakkhaṇikattā, gotrabhuādīnañca ārammaṇakaraṇamattattā na tesaṃ vasena sātisayā nibbutisukhasamphusanā, phalasamāpattinirodhasamāpattivasena pana sātisayāti āha ‘‘phalasamāpattiṃ vā nirodhasamāpattiṃ vā’’ti. Phalapariyosāno hi nirodho. Pavisitvāti samāpajjanavasena antokatvā. Nibbānaṃ patvāti ettha ussukkavacanametaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇena, cittacetasikānaṃ nirodhena ca nibbutipajjanassa adhippetattā. Codanattheti jānāpetuṃ ussāhakaraṇatthe.
184 184.‘Abhiharitvāti’(迎已),即以面向而引去。‘Nanti’,即如是出家而住者。‘Abhihāroti’(迎请),即依邀请之迎请。‘Cīvarādīhi payojanaṃ sādhessāmī’ti(我将以衣等成办资用),以此残词作连结。如是‘yenattho, taṃ vadeyyāthā’ti(有何需,当说)。‘Cīvarādivekallanti’(衣等缺乏),即衣等由朽坏故之缺乏状态。‘Tadubhayampīti’(此二者亦),即彼二迎请。‘Sappāyanti’(适宜),即依击退一切疾病故,带来资助。‘Bhāvino anatthassa ajananavasena paripālanaṃ rakkhāgutti’(由不生修习者之不利益故,守护名为rakkhāgutti)。‘Paccuppannassa pana anatthassa nisedhavasena paripālanaṃ āvaraṇagutti’(由遮止现在之不利益故,守护名为āvaraṇagutti)。‘Kimatthiyaṃ dhammikanti visesananti āha sā panesātiādi’(为何加‘如法’之限定?故说‘彼乃……’等)。‘Vihārasīmāyāti’(住处界),即近界,或利养界。显示巴利原文
184.Abhiharitvāti abhimukhabhāvena netvā. Nanti tathā pabbajjāya viharantaṃ. Abhihāroti nimantanavasena abhiharaṇaṃ. ‘‘Cīvarādīhi payojanaṃ sādhessāmī’’ti vacanasesena yojanā. Tathā ‘‘yenattho, taṃ vadeyyāthā’’ti. Cīvarādivekallanti cīvarādīnaṃ lūkhatāya vikalabhāvaṃ. Tadubhayampīti tadeva abhihāradvayampi. Sappāyanti sabbagelaññāpaharaṇavasena upakārāvahaṃ. Bhāvino anatthassa ajananavasena paripālanaṃ rakkhāgutti. Paccuppannassa pana anatthassa nisedhavasena paripālanaṃ āvaraṇagutti. Kimatthiyaṃ ‘‘dhammika’nti visesananti āha ‘‘sā panesā’’tiādi. Vihārasīmāyāti upacārasīmāya, lābhasīmāya vā.
185 ‘Kevalo’与‘yadi-evaṃ’两个词,只是就前文所述的意义而言,如说‘若你是奴仆’等。‘Evaṃ sante’(如此存在),即如此可得之时。依于第二而建立第一,因此当说‘第一’时,也显示了另一者的存在。正以此为由,为显示国王也这样说,故说‘说第一时’等。‘Tenevāti’(故即),即由‘第一’一词也显示了另一者的存在等。显示巴利原文
185. Kevalo yadi-evaṃ-saddo pubbe vuttatthāpekkhakoti vuttaṃ ‘‘yadi tava dāso’’tiādi. Evaṃ santeti evaṃ labbhamāne sati. Dutiyaṃ upādāya paṭhamabhāvo, tasmā ‘‘paṭhama’’nti bhaṇanto aññassāpi atthitaṃ dīpeti. Tadeva ca kāraṇaṃ katvā rājāpi evamāhāti dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭhamanti bhaṇanto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tenevāti paṭhamasaddena aññassāpi atthitādīpaneneva.
第二现法沙门果释义显示巴利原文
Dutiyasandiṭṭhikasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā
186 ‘Kasatīti’(耕),即犁地、耕作。‘Gahapatikoti’(小家主),此处‘ka’一词表示‘小’,如说‘ekagehamatte jeṭṭhako’(仅为一家的长者)。这是说:gahassa pati(家之主)为gahapati(家主),khuddako gahapati(小家主)为gahapatiko,因为他只是单一家的长者;此‘小’义唯依家之范围而说,故言‘唯一家’。由此便否定了是多家的长者,而gahaṃ与gehaṃ含义实同。‘Karasaddo balimhīti vuttaṃ balisaṅkhātanti’(‘kara’一词说为‘税’,即称为税)。‘Karotīti’(作),即产生、成就。‘Vaḍḍhetīti’(增长),即由一再生起而作大积集。显示巴利原文
186.Kasatīti vilekhati kasiṃ karoti. Gahapatikoti ettha ka-saddo appatthoti vuttaṃ ‘‘ekagehamatte jeṭṭhako’’ti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – gahassa pati gahapati, khuddako gahapati gahapatiko ekasmiññeva gehamatte jeṭṭhakattāti, khuddakabhāvo panassa gehavasenevāti katvā ‘‘ekagehamatte’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena hi anekakulajeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati, gahaṃ, gehanti ca atthato samānameva. Karasaddo balimhīti vuttaṃ ‘‘balisaṅkhāta’’nti. Karotīti abhinipphādeti sampādeti. Vaḍḍhetīti uparūpari uppādanena mahantaṃ sannicayaṃ karoti.
为何两者都说了呢?即‘正如’等。是为了表明:即使舍弃微少的财物而出家也难做到,何况巨大的财物。因为这是说法者的惯例,即通过某种方式令听者了知其他义理。而即使舍弃微少的财物而出家也难做到这一点,应依《中部·中分五十经》中的《鹑喻经》来说明。该经中详述说:‘优陀夷,譬如有人贫穷、无所有、无依怙,他有一间破旧漏雨、乌鸦栖息、不堪入目的陋屋,一张破旧不堪、不堪入目的坏床。’如果连舍弃微少财物而出家也难做到,为何在奴仆的情形中也不说执取财物呢?即‘然而在奴仆的情形中’等。自己也无自主权,即自己也不能自主。正如奴仆的财物因属于他人所有而实非财物,亲属也是如此,因此应知在奴仆的情形中也不说执取亲属圈。亲属圈,即辗转相续、从各方面围绕者,也就是亲属。因此说‘亲属即是亲属圈’。显示巴利原文
Kasmā tadubhayampi vuttanti āha ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi. Appampi pahāya pabbajituṃ dukkaranti dassanañca pageva mahantanti viññāpanatthaṃ. Esā hi kathikānaṃ pakati, yadidaṃ yena kenaci pakārena atthantaraviññāpananti. Appampi pahāya pabbajituṃ dukkarabhāvo pana majjhimanikāye majjhimapaṇṇāsake laṭukikopamasuttena (ma. ni. 2.148 ādayo) dīpetabbo. Vuttañhi tattha ‘‘seyyathāpi udāyi puriso daliddo assako anāḷhiyo, tassa’ssa ekaṃ agārakaṃ oluggaviluggaṃ kākātidāyiṃ naparamarūpaṃ, ekā khaṭopikā oluggaviluggā naparamarūpā’’ti vitthāro. Yadi appampi bhogaṃ pahāya pabbajituṃ dukkaraṃ, kasmā dāsavārepi bhogaggahaṇaṃ na katanti āha ‘‘dāsavāre panā’’tiādi. Attanopi anissaroti attānampi sayamanissaro. Yathā ca dāsassa bhogāpi abhogāyeva parāyattabhāvato, evaṃ ñātayopīti dāsavāre ñātiparivaṭṭaggahaṇampi na katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Parivaṭṭati paramparabhāvena samantato āvaṭṭatīti parivaṭṭo, ñātiyeva. Tenāha ‘‘ñātiyeva ñātiparivaṭṭo’’ti.
更殊胜沙门果的解说显示巴利原文
Paṇītatarasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā
189 其义为:正如在奴仆的场合说了“正是如此”,而在农夫场合却未这样说,若有人追问为何不说,即指此意。若说“正是如此”,则是在问:能否像施设第一、第二沙门果那样施设?以这些喻,即如前所说的奴仆喻与农夫喻相似的譬喻,足以阐明沙门果,因为佛陀具无碍辩才,能说种种法门。在此阐明中,因能说无量法门,故无边际;或因听闻时无厌足,愈听愈想听,故欲听闻之欲无边际,这是它的含义。虽然如此,即“说法虽有层层递进、种种法门之丰富”,这是阿阇梨所说;即使无边际,也依然适用。以推论智思考后,更上的殊胜,便是搁置彼而问更上的殊胜沙门果。为何?即“在听闻时”等。以此显示此义:诸词虽有多义,但依语言运用意图的次第,各别显示其含义。显示巴利原文
189.Tanti yathā dāsavāre ‘‘evamevā’’ti vuttaṃ, na tathā idha kassakavāre, tadavacanaṃ kasmāti anuyuñjeyya ceti attho. Evamevāti vuccamāneti yathā paṭhamadutiyāni sāmaññaphalāni paññattāni, tathāyeva paññapetuṃ sakkā nu khoti vutte. Evarūpāhīti yathāvuttadāsakassakūpamāsadisāhi upamāhi. Sāmaññaphalaṃ dīpetuṃ pahoti anantapaṭibhānatāya vicittanayadesanabhāvato. Tatthāti evaṃ dīpane. Pariyantaṃ nāma natthi anantanayadesanabhāvato, savane vā asantosanena bhiyyo bhiyyo sotukāmatājananato sotukāmatāya pariyantaṃ nāma natthīti attho. Tathāpīti ‘‘desanāya uttaruttarādhikanānānayavicittabhāve satipī’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.189) ācariyena vuttaṃ, satipi evaṃ apariyantabhāvetipi yujjati. Anumānañāṇena cintetvā. Upari visesanti taṃ ṭhapetvā tadupari visesameva sāmaññaphalaṃ pucchanto. Kasmāti āha ‘‘savane’’tiādi. Etena imamatthaṃ dīpeti – anekatthā samānāpi saddā vatticchānupubbikāyeva taṃtadatthadīpakāti.
“善哉,善哉”(sādhukaṃ, sādhu)是同一义,因为是将“sādhu”一词加上“ka”音强化而说。正因如此,解说“sādhuka”词义时,以举义的方式引用了“sādhu”一词。由此遮止了“应解说‘sādhuka’一词的义举,而非‘sādhu’一词”的责难。请求,即当面乞求,意为希求。接受,即纳受。赞扬,即依现有功德而欢喜、满足,意为令振奋。显示巴利原文
Sādhukaṃ sādhūti ekatthametaṃ sādhusaddasseva ka-kārena vaḍḍhetvā vuttattā. Teneva hi sādhukasaddassatthaṃ vadantena sādhusaddo atthuddhāravasena udāhaṭo. Tena ca nanu sādhukasaddasseva atthuddhāro vattabbo, na sādhusaddassāti codanā nisedhitā. Āyācaneti abhimukhaṃ yācane, abhipatthanāyanti attho. Sampaṭicchaneti paṭiggahaṇe. Sampahaṃsaneti saṃvijjamānaguṇavasena haṃsane tosane, udaggatākaraṇeti attho.
“善哉,乐法者”这一偈出自《狂醉本生经》(Jā. 2.18.101)。此处注释的判定传统为:好乐善行法,故名乐法者,意为乐于法者。如此之人,即使舍弃生命,也不做不应做之事。具慧者,即有慧、具足智。于友不欺者,即对友无恶意。“不害、不恼”,此为阿阇梨所说。亦有读作“adrubbho”者,是将“da”音变为“dra”音。显示巴利原文
Sādhu dhammarucīti gāthā ummādantījātake (jā. 2.18.101). Tatthāyamaṭṭhakathāvinicchayapaveṇī – sucaritadhamme rocetīti dhammaruci, dhammaratoti attho. Tādiso hi jīvitaṃ jahantopi akattabbaṃ na karoti. Paññāṇavāti paññavā ñāṇasampanno. Mittānamaddubbhoti mittānaṃ adussanabhāvo. ‘‘Adūsako anupaghātako’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.189) ācariyena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Adrubbho’’tipi pāṭho da-kārassa dra-kāraṃ katvā.
“坚固业”指持续之行;“命令”指敕令。此处即是在《沙门果》中也是如此。因为以“sādhuka”一词说“善听,善作意”,既显明了听闻与作意的持续行,也显明了对其的敕令。而敕令因与派遣同属一类,故摄于请求之中,未在释义时单独列出。对有资格受令者,是敕令;对无资格者,是请求,此为差别。即使在“美好”的意义中,也是如此。现在,为了显示依“sādhuka”一词的三种义所阐明的差别,或为了阐明此三种义在此处的适合性,而说“以坚固业义故”等。善持取,即作善持取而持取。美好,是抽象中性词。善妙,即殊胜,与“法”字相连。或者“美好、善妙”是听闻与领受的同义词。显示巴利原文
Daḷhīkammeti sātaccakiriyāyaṃ. Āṇattiyanti āṇāpane. Idhāpīti sāmaññaphalepi. Assāti sādhukasaddassa. ‘‘Suṇohi sādhukaṃ manasi karohī’’ti hi sādhukasaddena savanamanasikārānaṃ sātaccakiriyāpi tadāṇāpanampi jotitaṃ hoti. Āyācaneneva ca uyyojanasāmaññato āṇatti saṅgahitāti na sā visuṃ atthuddhāre vuttā. Āṇārahassa hi āṇatti , tadanarahassa āyācananti viseso. Sundarepīti sundaratthepi. Idāni yathāvuttena sādhukasaddassa atthattayena pakāsitaṃ visesaṃ dassetuṃ, tassa vā atthattayassa idha yogyataṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘daḷhīkammatthena hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Suggahitaṃ gaṇhantoti suggahitaṃ katvā gaṇhanto. Sundaranti bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ. Bhaddakanti pasatthaṃ, ‘‘dhamma’’nti iminā sambandho. Sundaraṃ bhaddakanti vā savanānuggahaṇe pariyāyavacanaṃ.
“作意”在此并非指以所缘呈现为相之作意,而是指安住于心之特相,即依令入路、令速行之作意的前行心。为说明此,而说“转向,专注”。“心无散乱”,即依前述二种作意的前行心相续,以安住于一所缘而不掉举之心。“谛听”,即听闻,或如同以金匣珍藏无价宝,将难得之法宝安置于心,因此说“置于心”。如此逐词连接显示二词之义后,现在以对治的方式显示,故说“复次”等。其中,防护耳根散乱,是通过令心专注于听闻而遮止其他行为,由此显示“倾耳”之义;防护意根散乱,是以作意令持续行而遮止其他思虑;防护执取文句颠倒,是因特别说“善”字;防护执取义理颠倒,道理亦然。显示巴利原文
Manasi karohīti ettha na ārammaṇapaṭipādanalakkhaṇo manasikāro, atha kho vīthipaṭipādanajavanapaṭipādanamanasikārapubbake citte ṭhapanalakkhaṇoti dassento ‘‘āvajja, samannāharā’’ti āha. Avikkhittacittoti yathāvuttamanasikāradvayapubbakāya cittapaṭipāṭiyā ekārammaṇe ṭhapanavasena anuddhatacitto hutvā. Nisāmehīti suṇāhi, anaggharatanamiva vā suvaṇṇamañjusāya dullabhadhammaratanaṃ citte paṭisāmehītipi attho . Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘citte karohī’’ti. Evaṃ padadvayassa paccekaṃ yojanāvasena atthaṃ dassetvā idāni paṭiyogīvasena dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sotindriyavikkhepavāraṇaṃ savane niyojanavasena kiriyantarapaṭisedhanato, tena sotaṃ odahāti atthaṃ dasseti. Manindriyavikkhepavāraṇaṃ manasikārena daḷhīkammaniyojanena aññacintāpaṭisedhanato. Byañjanavipallāsaggāhavāraṇaṃ ‘‘sādhuka’’nti visesetvā vuttattā. Atthavipallāsaggāhavāraṇepi esa nayo.
“于受持、审察等”中,以“等”字包含衡量、裁决等,以及于见的善通达。能表达、显明所欲之义,或依之自显者,称为“文”,即自性词句;与文俱者,称为“有文”,即具足文句之义。俱起性如“具足、聚合、存在”等有多种,但此处唯是具足性,因为其他意义不相应,故应知虽然释词为“与文俱”,阿阇梨亦说“文句具足”之义。又如“非善、不善,善之对治”等,应被忆持、应被亲近、应被随念之义,即四遍净戒等。与义俱者,称为“有义”,依前所说之理,即具足义之义。“sādhuka”一词虽同一,但依运用方式等,应于两处相应配合。如何配合?即“因为……”等。所谓法,即经;所谓说法,即依彼以意安立的经的说法;所谓义,即经之义;所谓通达,即对经及经义如实觉了。又因这些法、说法、义、通达,如同大海对于劣慧者,难以涉入、难得立足,故为甚深。因此说“因为……作意”。此处,因通达难成,故法与义难涉入;因说法智难成,故说法难涉入;因不能令生起,及于彼境生智难成,故通达难涉入。此中应说者,已于因缘解说中说过。显示巴利原文
Dhāraṇūpaparikkhādīsūti ettha ādi-saddena tulanatīraṇādike, diṭṭhiyā suppaṭivedhe ca saṅgaṇhāti. Yathādhippetamatthaṃ byañjeti pakāseti, sayametenāti vā byañjanaṃ, sabhāvanirutti, saha byañjanenāti sabyañjano, byañjanasampannoti attho. Sahappavatti hi ‘‘sampannatā samavāyatā vijjamānatā’’tiādinā anekavidhā, idha pana sampannatāyeva tadaññassa asambhavato, tasmā ‘‘saha byañjanenā’’ti nibbacanaṃ katvāpi ‘‘byañjanasampanno’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.189) attho ācariyena vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ, yathā taṃ ‘‘na kusalā akusalā, kusalapaṭipakkhā’’ti (dha. sa. 1) araṇīyato upagantabbato anudhātabbato attho, catupārisuddhisīlādi, saha atthenāti sāttho, vuttanayena atthasampannoti attho. Sādhukapadaṃ ekameva samānaṃ āvuttinayādivasena ubhayattha yojetabbaṃ. Kathanti āha ‘‘yasmā’’tiādi. Dhammo nāma tanti. Desanā nāma tassā manasā vavatthāpitāya tantiyā desanā. Attho nāma tantiyā attho. Paṭivedho nāma tantiyā, tantiatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodho. Yasmā cete dhammadesanātthapaṭivedhā sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo mandabuddhīhi dukkhogāhā, alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmā…pe… manasi karohī’’ti. Ettha ca paṭivedhassa dukkarabhāvato dhammatthānaṃ dukkhogāhatā, desanāñāṇassa dukkarabhāvato desanāya, uppādetumasakkuṇeyyatāya, tabbisayañāṇuppattiyā ca dukkarabhāvato paṭivedhassa dukkhogāhatā veditabbā. Yamettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ nidānavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttameva.
“Suṇāhi sādhukaṃ”意为“你应善作意”,这样说时,不仅依义理次第有此联结,依音声次第亦因两处都有关联而显示。“Sakkā mahārājā”在此处,也随顺“在现法中,有其他可见的沙门果……乃至……更殊胜”一句,故说为“如此所承诺的沙门果开示”。以广说来宣说,即是以“我将开示”等略说坚固其义。此处 hi 字被省略而显示。这是说:略说名为 uddisana,广说名为 niddisana,即明晰的解说。由此而成立此义,故在《有偈品》相应的《婆耆舍经》中,以偈颂成立如上所说之义,而说“因此”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Suṇāhi sādhuka’’nti ‘‘sādhukaṃ manasi karohī’’ti vadanto na kevalaṃ atthakkamato eva ayaṃ yojanā, atha kho saddakkamatopi ubhayattha sambandhattāti dasseti. ‘‘Sakkā mahārājā’’ti idhāpi ‘‘aññampi diṭṭheva dhamme sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ…pe… paṇītatarañcā’’ti idamanuvattatīti āha ‘‘evaṃ paṭiññātaṃ sāmaññaphaladesana’’nti. Vitthārato bhāsananti atthameva daḷhaṃ karoti ‘‘desessāmīti saṃkhittadīpana’’ntiādinā. Hi-saddo cettha luttaniddiṭṭho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – desanaṃ nāma uddisanaṃ. Bhāsanaṃ nāma niddisanaṃ paribyattakathanaṃ. Tenāyamattho sambhavatīti yathāvuttamatthaṃ sagāthāvaggasaṃyutte vaṅgīsasutte (saṃ. ni. 1.214) gāthāpadena sādhetuṃ ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“如鹩哥之声”意为如同鹩哥的鸣声,即鹩哥的鸣叫甜美、悦耳、可爱。这是对“辩才”的修饰,因为即使词性相异,修饰语亦可出现,如“功德是量”。“辩才”一词,乃因其依种种方式显现、被看见而称为音声。“Udīrayī”意为发出、说,或被称为,此语含有业的意义,是动词。以此显示:具足无碍解的长老婆耆舍尊者,欲赞叹法将尊者,显示略说与广说的差别时,用了“简略地、广地”作为修饰,由此了知此义。显示巴利原文
Sāḷikāyiva nigghosoti sāḷikāya nigghoso viya, yathā sāḷikāya ālāpo madhuro kaṇṇasukho pemanīyo, evanti attho. Paṭibhānanti cetassa visesanaṃ liṅgabhedassapi visesanassa dissanato yathā ‘‘guṇo pamāṇa’’nti. Paṭibhānanti ca saddo vuccati paṭibhāti taṃtadākārena dissatīti katvā. Udīrayīti uccārayi, vuccati vā, kammagabbhañcetaṃ kiriyāpadaṃ. Iminā cetaṃ dīpeti – āyasmantaṃ dhammasenāpatiṃ thometukāmena desanābhāsanānaṃ visesaṃ dassentena pabhinnapaṭisambhidena āyasmatā vaṅgīsattherena ‘‘saṅkhittena, vitthārenā’’ti ca visesanaṃ kataṃ, tenāyamattho viññāyatīti.
“如此说”即指说“我将说”之时。因为听闻“世尊不仅将略说,而且将广说”这句话后,便生起踊跃,即产生踊跃、欢喜、满意,这是阿阇梨的意图。再者,“那么,大王,请听,善作意,我将说”这整个激励与承诺的方式,都是产生踊跃的原因,因为由这一切而生起踊跃。因此,“如此说”指说“请听,善作意,我将说”之时,应理解为由这三句中的每一句都生起了踊跃。“Paccassosi”意为随闻,即在世尊话语的当下随即听闻,或者先以“尊者,可能吗”等问后,再以“是的,尊者”而听闻。而此随闻在义理上即是接受,故说“接受,纳受”。正因如此,不说“这是义理”,而说“这是所说”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vutteti ‘‘bhāsissāmī’’ti vutte. ‘‘Na kira bhagavā saṅkhepeneva desessati, atha kho vitthārenapi bhāsissatī’’ti hi taṃ padaṃ sutvāva ussāhajāto sañjātussāho, haṭṭhatuṭṭhoti attho. Ayamācariyassa adhippāyo. Apica ‘‘tena hi mahārāja suṇohi sādhukaṃ manasi karohi, bhāsissāmī’’ti vuttaṃ sabbampi uyyojanapaṭiññākaraṇappakāraṃ ussāhajananakāraṇaṃ sabbeneva ussāhasambhavato, tasmā evaṃ vutteti ‘‘suṇohi, sādhukaṃ manasi karohi, bhāsissāmī’’ti vutte sabbeheva tīhipi padehi ussāhajātoti attho daṭṭhabbo. Paccassosīti pati assosi bhagavato vacanasamanantarameva pacchā assosi, ‘‘sakkā pana bhante’’tiādinā vā pucchitvā puna ‘‘evaṃ bhante’’ti assosīti attho. Taṃ pana patissavanaṃ atthato sampaṭicchanamevāti āha ‘‘sampaṭicchi, paṭiggahesī’’ti. Teneva hi ‘‘iti attho’’ti avatvā ‘‘iti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti vuttaṃ.
190 在显示了“那时世尊对他说了此”一句的文脉关联之后,分解“说了此”一词而显示其义,便说“现在”等。“Idha”一词,以此指示所说之处,即如来出生之处的世间,故说“这是处所指示词”。处的指示即处所指示,于此。若一切处都可是处所指示,则此义不应说出,因不说亦可得;为回应这一责难,才说“此”等。取共通性的 idha 词而说“此”,并非如语言所应分别的那样,因为将说“此处仅为填字而已”。依世间而说,因与“世间”一词有同一所依的关系;而“此世间”指生处,其中也意指此一輪圍。依教法而说,因有“沙门”一词的邻近。此乃四增支圣典,其中第一沙门是须陀洹,第二沙门是斯陀含。即于彼处所说:显示巴利原文
190. ‘‘Athassa bhagavā etadavocā’’ti vacanasambandhamattaṃ dassetvā ‘‘etaṃ avocā’’ti padaṃ vibhajitvā atthaṃ dassento ‘‘idānī’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Idhā’’ti iminā vuccamānaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ tathāgatassa uppattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ lokamevādhippetanti dasseti ‘‘desopadese nipāto’’ti iminā. Desassa upadisanaṃ desopadeso, tasmiṃ. Yadi sabbattha desopadese, athāyamattho na vattabbo avuttepi labbhamānattāti codanāyāha ‘‘svāya’’ntiādi. Sāmaññabhūtaṃ idhasaddaṃ gaṇhitvā ‘‘svāya’’nti vuttaṃ, na tu yathāvisesitabbaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘katthaci padapūraṇamattamevā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.190). Lokaṃ upādāya vuccati lokasaddena samānādhikaraṇabhāvato. Idha loketi ca jātikkhettaṃ, tatthāpi ayaṃ cakkavāḷo adhippeto. Sāsanamupādāya vuccati ‘‘samaṇo’’ti saddantarasannidhānato. Ayañhi catukaṅguttarapāḷi. Tattha paṭhamo samaṇoti sotāpanno. Dutiyo samaṇoti sakadāgāmī. Vuttañhetaṃ tattheva –
“诸比丘,何谓第一沙门?于此,有比丘断除三结,成须陀洹。”以及“诸比丘,何谓第二沙门?于此,有比丘断除三结,贪、嗔、痴转薄,成斯陀含。”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamo ca bhikkhave paṭhamo samaṇo? Idha bhikkhave bhikkhu tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā sotāpanno hotī’’ti, (a. ni. 4.241) ‘‘katamo ca bhikkhave dutiyo samaṇo? Idha bhikkhave bhikkhu tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttā sakadāgāmī hotī’’ti (a. ni. 4.241) ca ādi.
“Okāsa”(处所)一词,是依某一地点而说,因其与“站立者”一词相邻之故。显示巴利原文
Okāsanti kañci padesamupādāya vuccati ‘‘tiṭṭhamānassā’’ti saddantarasannidhānato.
“Idheva tiṭṭhamānassa”意指就在此因陀娑罗窟中安住者,他以天神之身而存在,即具有天神之身,或说成为天神而存在。“Me”在此是不恭敬用法的属格;后一个“me”则为作格义。此段出自《帝释问经》。显示巴利原文
Idheva tiṭṭhamānassāti imissaṃyeva indasālaguhāyaṃ patiṭṭhamānassa, devabhūtassa me satoti devabhāvena, devo hutvā vā bhūtassa samānassa. Meti anādarayoge sāmivacanaṃ. Puna meti kattutthe. Idañhi sakkapañhato udāhaṭaṃ.
这只是补足音节而已,因为既不能作为处所指示词,也不能了知其他义理。前面已依如来出生之处而说为“世间”。前文在激励与许诺的语境中使用了称呼,故此处再以“大王”称呼。“阿拉汉”等词在此被详细解释,这便是联结。因为义理上的详细解释正是通过音声来进行的,所以两处都采用了音声。然而,由于“以其他八种理由,世尊是如来”等,在《优陀那》注等中,如来一词以其他方式得到广释;而“阿拉汉”等词在《清净道论》复注中,阿阇梨也以其他方式作了广释。因此,依他们所说道理,也应了知他们的意义。因为如来含摄于众生类中,所以这里说“意指众生世间”。接着,为显示他在何类众生、何处出生,便说“在众生世间出生时”等。既非天界,也非梵天界——此处所应说的内容,将在后文出现。显示巴利原文
Padapūraṇamattameva okāsāpadisanassāpi asambhavena atthantarassa abodhanato. Pubbe vuttaṃ tathāgatassa uppattiṭṭhānabhūtameva sandhāya ‘‘loka’’nti vuttaṃ. Purimaṃ uyyojanapaṭiññākaraṇavisaye ālapananti puna ‘‘mahārājā’’ti ālapati. ‘‘Araha’’nti ādayo saddā vitthāritāti yojanā. Atthato hi vitthāraṇaṃ saddamukheneva hotīti ubhayattha saddaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Yasmā pana ‘‘aparehipi aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgato’’tiādinā (udā. aṭṭha. 18; itivu. aṭṭha. 38) tathāgata-saddo udānaṭṭhakathādīsu, ‘‘araha’’nti ādayo ca visuddhimaggaṭīkāyaṃ (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.130) aparehipi pakārehi vitthāritā ācariyena, tasmā tesu vuttanayenapi tesamattho veditabbo. Tathāgatassa sattanikāyantogadhatāya ‘‘idha pana sattaloko adhippeto’’ti vatvā tatthāyaṃ yasmiṃ sattanikāye, yasmiñca okāse uppajjati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sattaloke uppajjamānopi cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na devaloke, na brahmaloketi ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āgamissati.
“Tassāparenāti”意为那个城镇的另一侧,也就是其外部。“Tato”指从那棵大婆罗树。“Orato majjheti”指内部,即中央地区。“Evaṃ paricchinneti”表示如同以五相标结成的界,依前述五种相标而划定。“Aḍḍhateyyayojanasateti”即二百五十由旬。这个中央地区形如鼓,既非正圆,也非正方;在直线距离上,有些地方是八十由旬,有些地方是一百由旬,但若依曲折的边界测量,其周边总长则为九百由旬,因此说“九百由旬”。“Asītimahātherāti”是就多数而言,并非精确数目,因为输那波罗门洲的富楼那长老也属于大弟子之列。输那波罗门洲的国土是边地。正如《中部义注》和《相应部义注》中所说:“在接受旃檀曼达拉玛拉时,世尊并不在那里令黎明生起。”“Sārappattāti”指以家族、财富、权势等,以及以戒的实质等而成为具实质者。“Brāhmaṇagahapatikāti”指如梵寿、优楼频螺迦叶等婆罗门,以及给孤独等居士。显示巴利原文
Tassāparenāti tassa nigamassa aparena, tato bahīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatoti mahāsālato. Orato majjheti abbhantaraṃ majjhimapadeso. Evaṃ paricchinneti pañcanimittabaddhā sīmā viya pañcahi yathāvuttanimittehi paricchinne. Aḍḍhateyyayojanasateti paṇṇāsayojanehi ūnatiyojanasate. Ayañhi majjhimajanapado mudiṅgasaṇṭhāno, na samaparivaṭṭo, na ca samacaturasso, ujukena katthaci asītiyojano hoti, katthaci yojanasatiko, tathāpi cesa kuṭilaparicchedena miniyamāno pariyanta parikkhepato navayojanasatiko hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘navayojanasate’’ti. Asītimahātherāti yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ sunāparantakassa puṇṇattherassāpi mahāsāvakesu pariyāpannattā. Sunāparantajanapado hi paccantavisayo. Tathā hi ‘‘candanamaṇḍalamāḷapaṭiggahaṇe bhagavā na tattha aruṇaṃ uṭṭhapetī’’ti majjhimāgama- (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 4.397) saṃyuttāgamaṭṭhakathāsu (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.4.88-89) vuttaṃ. Sārappattāti kulabhogissariyādivasena, sīlasārādivasena ca sārabhūtā. Brāhmaṇagahapatikātibrahmāyupokkharasātiādibrāhmaṇā ceva anāthapiṇḍikādigahapatikā ca.
“Tatthāti”:在中部地区,或即“生起”一词中。“Sujātāyāti”:耶舍长老的母亲,名为善生,最初皈依者。这四种分类中,第一种是为了显示最接近成佛的修行。因为安住于最接近的修行者,由于“生起”的决定性,也可说为“生起”,更何况安住于最上修行之人。第二种是为了显示,从促成成佛的出家开始,那只是接近的修行。第三种是为了显示,从成佛之法的圆满开始,朝向成佛的修行。因为大士们从最后一生受生开始,并没有名为“积累菩提资粮”之事,他们只是等待成佛的时机而安住于彼。第四种是为了显示,自开始修习成佛之法时起,于菩提的决定性。因为从获得菩提的决定性开始,智者便可以说“佛陀生起”,这是由于生起的决定性。然而,如同“诸河奔流”是依于流动作用的无间断而用现在时,同样,依于朝向“生起”的修行作用无有间断,在四种分类中都称为“生起”,这也是依于作用后续的现在时表达。在语法论典中,说明了四种现在时的特征:显示巴利原文
Tatthāti majjhimapadese, tasmiṃyeva ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti vacane vā. Sujātāyāti evaṃnāmikāya paṭhamaṃ saraṇagamanikāya yasattheramātuyā. Catūsu panetesu vikappesu paṭhamo buddhabhāvāya āsannatarapaṭipattidassanavasena vutto. Āsannatarāya hi paṭipattiyā ṭhitopi ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti vuccati uppādassa ekantikattā, pageva paṭipattiyā matthake ṭhito. Dutiyo buddhabhāvāvahapabbajjato paṭṭhāya āsannamattapaṭipattidassanavasena, tatiyo buddhakaradhammapāripūrito paṭṭhāya buddhabhāvāya paṭipattidassanavasena. Na hi mahāsattānaṃ antimabhavūpapattito paṭṭhāya bodhisambhārasambharaṇaṃ nāma atthi buddhatthāya kālamāgamayamāneneva tattha patiṭṭhanato. Catuttho buddhabhāvakaradhammasamārambhato paṭṭhāya bodhiyā niyatabhāvadassanena. Bodhiyā hi niyatabhāvappattito pabhuti ‘‘buddho uppajjatī’’ti viññūhi vattuṃ sakkā uppādassa ekantikattā. Yathā pana ‘‘sandanti nadiyo’’ti sandanakiriyāya avicchedamupādāya vattamānappayogo , evaṃ uppādatthāya paṭipajjanakiriyāya avicchedamupādāya catūsupi vikappesu ‘‘uppajjati nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ, pavattāparatavattamānavacanañcetaṃ. Catubbidhañhi vattamānalakkhaṇaṃ saddasatthe pakāsitaṃ –
恒常现行、邻近、作用后续,以及作用后续,是为现在时的四种。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Niccapavatti samīpo, pavattuparato tathā; Pavattāparato ceva, vattamāno catubbidho’’ti.
然而,诸佛并不像声闻弟子那样次第生起神变智等,而是与阿拉汉道同时,一切知智等全部功德聚即已具足;正因他们一切所作已办,所以在阿拉汉果的刹那而说为“已生起”,这是《增支部义注》中所说的。若未一切所作已办,则不能仅凭那样就说“已生起”。所谓“最初生起之义”:在四种分类中,最先所说的“如来于善生……名为生起”,即指如来的已生起性、存在性。正是对此而说“生起”,因其意指安住于最接近成佛的修行者。因为此义才是主要可称为“生起”的。因此说“如来……义”。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana buddhānaṃ sāvakānaṃ viya na paṭipāṭiyā iddhividhañāṇādīni uppajjanti, saheva pana arahattamaggena sakalopi sabbaññutaññāṇādiguṇarāsi āgato nāma hoti, tasmā tesaṃ nipphattasabbakiccattā arahattaphalakkhaṇe uppanno nāmāti ekaṅguttaravaṇṇanāyaṃ (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.170) vuttaṃ. Asati hi nipphattasabbakiccatte na tāvatā ‘‘uppanno’’ti vattumarahati. Sabbapaṭhamaṃ uppannabhāvanti catūsu vikappesu sabbapaṭhamaṃ ‘‘tathāgato sujātāya…pe… uppajjati nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ tathāgatassa uppannatāsaṅkhātaṃ atthibhāvaṃ. Tadeva sandhāya uppajjatīti vuttaṃ buddhabhāvāya āsannatarapaṭipattiyaṃ ṭhitasseva adhippetattā. Ayameva hi attho mukhyato uppajjatīti vattabbo. Tenāha ‘‘tathāgato…pe… attho’’ti.
在此,若只说“已生起”,有人可能依过去时来理解其义,为遮止此义,故说“是已生起”。正如“已生起之法”等用法,此处的“已生起”一词是现在时的。然而,难道不是已生起、即阿拉汉果具足者的如来成就了示现与说法等吗?既然如此,为何又以阿拉汉道为终点的、正在生起的如来为意许?因为从食蜜乳粥直至阿拉汉道之间,他并未成就那些作用。不应如此看待,因为执取了安住于最接近成佛的修行者——即正在生起者,也就同时执取了作为阿拉汉果具足者的已生起者。因为执取因时,也就执取了果,果不离因。因此,成就示现与说法等的阿拉汉果具足者如来也应被执取,应知此“生起”之语是需要这样理解的。正如在《增支部义注》中,以正在生起、生起、已生起三时辨析义理时所说:“从于燃灯佛足下获得授记以来,直至阿那含果,名为正在生起;在阿拉汉道的刹那,名为生起;在阿拉汉果的刹那,名为已生起。”这是此处的阿阇梨法护长老的见解。然而,在《增支部义注》中,解释“诸比丘,有一人正在生起、生起于世间”的经文时又说:“在此经中,也是针对阿拉汉果的刹那而说‘生起’”,并说“已生起”。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ‘‘uppanno’’ti vutte atītakālavasena koci atthaṃ gaṇheyyāti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘uppanno hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Uppannā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. tikamātikā 17) viya hi idha uppannasaddo paccuppannakāliko. Nanu ca arahattaphalasamaṅgīsaṅkhāto uppannoyeva tathāgato pavedanadesanādīni sādheti, atha kasmā yathāvutto arahattamaggapariyosāno uppajjamānoyeva tathāgato adhippeto. Na hi so pavedanadesanādīni sādheti madhupāyāsabhojanato yāva arahattamaggo, tāva tesaṃ kiccānamasādhanatoti? Na hevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, buddhabhāvāya āsannatarapaṭipattiyaṃ ṭhitassa uppajjamānassa gahaṇeneva arahattaphalasamaṅgīsaṅkhātassa uppannassāpi gahitattā. Kāraṇaggahaṇeneva hi phalampi gahitaṃ tadavinābhāvittā. Iti pavedanadesanādisādhakassa arahattaphalasamaṅginopi tathāgatassa gahetabbattā neyyatthamidaṃ ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti vacanaṃ daṭṭhabbanti. Tathā hi aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāyaṃ (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.170) uppajjamāno, uppajjati, uppannoti tīhi kālehi atthavibhajane ‘‘dīpaṅkarapādamūle laddhabyākaraṇato yāva anāgāmiphalā uppajjamāno nāma, arahattamaggakkhaṇe pana uppajjati nāma, arahattaphalakkhaṇe uppanno nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayamettha ācariyadhammapālattherassa mati. Yasmā pana ekaṅguttaraṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘ekapuggalo bhikkhave loke uppajjamāno uppajjatī’’ti (a. ni. 1.170) suttapadavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘imasmimpi sutte arahattaphalakkhaṇaṃyeva sandhāya uppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘uppanno hotīti ayañhettha attho’’ti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.170) āgataṃ, tasmā idhāpi arahattaphalakkhaṇameva sandhāya uppajjatīti vuttanti dasseti ‘‘sabbapaṭhamaṃ uppannabhāvaṃ sandhāyā’’ti iminā. Tenāha ‘‘uppanno hotīti ayañhettha attho’’ti. Sabbapaṭhamaṃ uppannabhāvanti ca sabbaveneyyānaṃ paṭhamataraṃ arahattaphalavasena uppannabhāvanti attho. ‘‘Uppanno hotī’’ti ca iminā arahattaphalakkhaṇavasena atītakālaṃ dassetīti. Ayameva ca nayo aṅguttaraṭīkākārena ācariyasāriputtattherena adhippetoti.
“世尊”者:那位以“阿拉汉”等被称扬功德的如来,即是世尊。现在,以“此”字指示当说之义,因其能指称所言之义。这是说:并非仅就眼前的大众而说“此世间”,而是就“包括天界”等下面将说的、无余遍取的世间而说。“与诸天一起,故为包括天”,这是依词句所作的字源解释;而按词序则说“包括天”等,这些是依其功德而了知外在意义的复合词。在此,以部分分解而了知整体,便是复合词之义;因为通过对世间部分的分解,即可随宜获得世间的整体。在与表示集合的“俱”字结合时,正是这一复合词得到理解。“与诸天”者,指与五类欲界天,或与无色界天。“与梵天”者,指与色界、无色界梵天,或仅与色界梵天,如“多作者”等词那样成就其义。“所生”者,指依各自的业与烦恼而如此出生者。显示巴利原文
So bhagavāti yo so tathāgato ‘‘araha’’ntiādinā pakittitaguṇo, so bhagavā. Idāni vattabbaṃ imasaddena nidasseti vuccamānatthassa parāmasanato. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – nayidaṃ mahājanassa sammukhamattaṃ sandhāya ‘‘imaṃ loka’’nti vuttaṃ, atha kho ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādinā vakkhamānaṃ anavasesapariyādānaṃ sandhāyāti. ‘‘Saha devehi sadevaka’’ntiādinā yathāvākyaṃ padanibbacanaṃ vuttaṃ, yathāpadaṃ pana ‘‘sadevako’’tiādinā vattabbaṃ, ime ca tagguṇasaṃviññāṇabāhiratthasamāsā. Ettha hi avayavena viggaho, samudāyo samāsattho hoti lokāvayavena kataviggahena lokasamudāyassa yathārahaṃ labbhamānattā. Samavāyajotakasahasaddayoge hi ayameva samāso viññāyati. Devehīti ca pañcakāmāvacaradevehi, arūpāvacaradevehi vā. Brahmunāti rūpāvacarārūpāvacarabrahmunā, rūpāvacarabrahmunā eva vā, bahukattukādīnamiva nesaṃ siddhi. Pajātattāti yathāsakaṃ kammakilesehi pakārena nibbattakattā.
如此,从词义层面解明意义之后,为从应说之义层面显示,便宣说了“于此”等语句。依剩余之理,取五欲界天,因为其余诸天已由其他词句分别摄取。依邻近之理,取第六欲界天。因为魔生于彼处,且为彼处之居民。又因此魔如同叛逆王子,因安住于彼处而声名昭著,故即使有其他如他化自在天王等存在,也以更为显著者简别特说,此理于《中部义注》中已作阐明。而在此,以摄取“魔”,亦摄取了与彼相关之诸天,这便含摄了空间世间与有情世间。如此,他化自在天的有情世间方得以无余地遍取。摄取梵众天等梵天,亦是依邻近之理。所说取敌对者、怨敌之沙门婆罗门,即敌对者即是怨敌,他们即是沙门婆罗门,作如是取,故说为取外道沙门婆罗门,而这仅是举例,因为以此亦摄取了非敌对、非怨敌的他们。而取“已寂灭恶、已除遣恶之沙门婆罗门”,应知是摄取了教内沙门婆罗门。诚然,依“包括天”等简别语之力,“世间”一词亦被理解为有情领域,因为它们在集合义上拥有同喻之境;但为显示在“有毛、有翼”等情形中,依存在义,此复合词亦可用于非同喻之境,故有不定之嫌,为以无不定之方式令解其义,便取用了“生类”一词,进而宣说“以生类之言取有情世间”,这并非因为“世间”一词不能遍取有情世间。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vacanatthato atthaṃ dassetvā vacanīyatthato dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pañcakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ pārisesañāyena itaresaṃ padantarehi visuṃ gahitattā. Chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ paccāsattiñāyena. Tattha hi māro jāto, tannivāsī ca. Yasmā cesa dāmarikarājaputto viya tattha vasitattā pākaṭo, tasmā santesupi aññesu vasavattimahārājādīsu pākaṭatarena teneva visesetvā vuttoti, ayañca nayo majjhimāgamaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.290) pakāsitova. Māraggahaṇena cettha taṃsambandhino devāpi gahitā okāsalokena saddhiṃ sattalokassa gahaṇato. Evañhi vasavattisattalokassa anavasesapariyādānaṃ hoti. Brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇampi paccāsattiñāyena. Paccatthikapaccāmittasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇanti paccatthikā eva paccāmittā, teyeva samaṇabrāhmaṇā, tesaṃ gahaṇaṃ tathā, tena bāhirakasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇaṃ vuttaṃ, nidassanamattañcetaṃ apaccatthikapaccāmittānampi tesaṃ iminā gahaṇato. Samitapāpabāhitapāpasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇanti pana sāsanikasamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Kāmaṃ ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādivisesanānaṃ vaseneva sattavisayopi lokasaddo viññāyati samavāyatthavasena tulyayogavisayattā tesaṃ, ‘‘salomako sapakkhako’’tiādīsu pana vijjamānatthavasena atulyayogavisayepi ayaṃ samāso labbhatīti byabhicāradassanato abyabhicārenatthañāpakaṃ pajāgahaṇanti āha ‘‘pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇa’’nti, na pana lokasaddena sattalokassa aggahitattā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tīhi padehi okāsalokena saddhiṃ sattaloko’’ti. Sadevakādivacanena upapattidevānaṃ, sassamaṇabrāhmaṇīvacanena visuddhidevānañca gahitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sadeva…pe… manussaggahaṇa’’nti. Tattha sammutidevā rājāno . Avasesamanussaggahaṇanti sammutidevehi, samaṇabrāhmaṇehi ca avasiṭṭhamanussānaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Etthāti etesu padesu. Tīhi padehīti sadevakasamārakasabrahmakapadehi. Dvīhīti sassamaṇabrāhmaṇīsadevamanussapadehi. Samāsapadatthesu sattalokassapi vuttanayena gahitattā ‘‘okāsalokena saddhiṃ sattaloko’’ti vuttaṃ.
以“另一理趣”等语句,又开示了另一应说之义。无色界的有情,安住于自身的绝不动摇之住,亦堪得“因‘闪耀’而得名为‘天’”这一词源解释,因此说“以取‘包括天’,摄取了无色界世间”。正是因此,世尊在《梵网经》等经典中说“与生于空无边处天之天众共住”等语,意为无色界所涵盖的空间世间与有情世间皆被摄取。同样,六欲界天世间、有色梵天世间于此亦被摄取。因为六欲界天世间特别随顺魔的势力而转,所以说“以取‘包括魔’,摄取了六欲界天世间”。因为彼处正是彼魔如叛逆者般施展其力用流转之处。有色梵天世间被摄取,是依剩余之理,由于无色梵天世间已被分别摄取。“依四众”,即于刹帝利、婆罗门、居士、沙门,以及四大王天、三十三天、魔、梵天等八众之中,仅依于刹帝利等四众,因为其余众已由“包括天”等语摄取。既然如此,如何于此依四众而摄取了人世间呢?是以“包括沙门、婆罗门”此语,摄取了沙门众与婆罗门众;以“包括天人”此语,摄取了刹帝利众与居士众。而以“生类”一语,即是指此四众。因为此处“生类”之义,便是四众所摄之生类。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aparo nayo’’tiādinā aparampi vacanīyatthamāha. Arūpinopi sattā attano āneñjavihārena viharanto ‘‘dibbantīti devā’’ti idaṃ nibbacanaṃ laddhumarahantīti āha ‘‘sadevakaggahaṇena arūpāvacaraloko gahito’’ti. Tenevāha bhagavā brahmajālādīsu ‘‘ākāsānañcāyatanūpagānaṃ devānaṃ sahabyata’’ntiādi, (a. ni. 3.197) arūpāvacarabhūto okāsaloko, sattaloko ca gahitoti attho. Evaṃ chakāmāvacaradevaloko, rūpī brahmalokoti etthāpi. Chakāmāvacaradevalokassa savisesaṃ māravase pavattanato vuttaṃ ‘‘samārakaggahaṇena chakāmāvacaradevaloko’’ti. So hi tassa dāmarikassa viya vasapavattanokāso. Rūpī brahmaloko gahito pārisesañāyena arūpībrahmalokassa visuṃ gahitattā. Catuparisavasenāti khattiyabrāhmaṇagahapatisamaṇacātumahārājikatāvatiṃsamārabrahmasaṅkhātāsu aṭṭhasu parisāsu khattiyādicatuparisavaseneva tadaññāsaṃ sadevakādiggahaṇena gahitattā. Kathaṃ panettha catuparisavasena manussaloko gahitoti? ‘‘Sassamaṇabrāhmaṇi’’nti iminā samaṇaparisā, brāhmaṇaparisā ca gahitā, ‘‘sadevamanussa’’nti iminā khattiyaparisā, gahapatiparisā cāti. ‘‘Paja’’nti iminā pana imāyeva catasso parisā vuttā. Catuparisasaṅkhātaṃ pajanti hi idha attho.
为说明应作另一种理解,便说“或与共许天一起的人世间”。那么,是如何被摄取的呢?以“包括沙门婆罗门”此语,摄取了沙门与婆罗门;以“包括天人”此语,摄取了称为共许天的刹帝利,以及称为居士、首陀罗的其余人等。而除此之外,更无其他人类有情,因此以“生类”一语,即指这些依四种方式安住的人类有情。因为此处“生类”之义,即是依四种家族分类的众生。如此,在两种分别中,以取“生类”,已依四众等摄取了人;今为总摄其余有情方才开示,故说“或一切其余有情世间”。在此处,亦应与依四众所摄取之人世间一起,摄取一切其余有情世间;或是与共许天一起,摄取一切其余有情世间。所谓“一切其余有情世间”,便是如龙、金翅鸟等。这是说:与四众在一起的一切其余诸如龙、金翅鸟、地狱等有情世间;或者,与四种家族分类之人在一起的一切其余诸如龙、金翅鸟、地狱等有情世间,皆被摄取。显示巴利原文
Aññathā gahetabbamāha ‘‘sammutidevehi vā saha manussaloko’’ti. Kathaṃ pana gahitoti? ‘‘Sassamaṇabrāhmaṇi’’nti iminā samaṇabrāhmaṇā gahitā, ‘‘sadevamanussa’’nti iminā sammutidevasaṅkhātā khattiyā, gahapatisuddasaṅkhātā ca avasesamanussāti. Ito pana aññesaṃ manussasattānamabhāvato ‘‘paja’’nti iminā eteyeva catūhi pakārehi ṭhitā manussasattā vuttā. Catukulappabhedaṃ pajanti hi idha attho. Evaṃ vikappadvayepi pajāgahaṇena catuparisādivasena manussānaññeva gahitattā idāni avasesasattepi saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘avasesasabbasattaloko vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Etthāpi catuparisavasena gahitena manussalokena saha avasesasabbasattaloko gahito, sammutidevehi vā saha avasesasabbasattalokoti yojetabbaṃ. Nāgagaruḷādivasena ca avasesasabbasattaloko. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – catuparisasahito avasesasuddanāgasupaṇṇanerayikādisattaloko, catukulappabhedamanussasahito vā avasesanāgasupaṇṇanerayikādisattaloko gahitoti.
至此,已分门别类地把握世间并显示了功德;如今为了以种种差别、不分类别地把握世间而显示功德,故说“再者,于此……”等。其中,“以最胜的界定”即从最殊胜的趣向作界定,也就是依对此的了知而说。依第一种方式,在五趣当中,天趣所摄的众生由于具足五欲功德、长寿等差别而最为殊胜。依第二种方式,无色界有情因已远远断除烦恼之苦、具足寂静止息、微妙、安住不动、寿量极长等差别而极为最胜。然而,诸位阿阇梨是就第二种方式而说。如上所述,为了显示:虽仅由第一句,便已从主要方面成立了佛陀亲证一切世间的事实,而其余语句则是基于这一特殊理由而说,因此说“所以,那些……”等。“所以”是与第一句之后(的语句)相连。若只说“六欲天自在者”,恐有人会怀疑帝释等也对其拥有统治权,为了断除此疑,故说“他化自在”,由此显示:通过那种强制性的行为使(他人)随顺自己的意志,才是他的统治权。因为在第六天中,除他化自在天王外,其余并非主宰,唯有他才是主宰。因此,世尊在《增支部》经典《八集·施功德经》中说:“诸比丘,在那里,他化自在天……”显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā bhāgaso lokaṃ gahetvā yojanaṃ dassetvā idāni tena tena visesena abhāgaso lokaṃ gahetvā yojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicetthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ukkaṭṭhaparicchedatoti ukkaṃsagatiparicchedato, tabbijānanenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Paṭhamanayena hi pañcasu gatīsu devagatipariyāpannāva pañcakāmaguṇasamaṅgitāya, dīghāyukatāyāti evamādīhi visesehi seṭṭhā. Dutiyanayena pana arūpino dūrasamugghāṭitakilesadukkhatāya, santapaṇītaāneñjavihārasamaṅgitāya, ativiya dīghāyukatāyāti evamādīhi visesehi ativiya ukkaṭṭhā. Ācariyehi pana dutiyanayameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evaṃ paṭhamapadeneva padhānanayena sabbalokassa sacchikatabhāve siddhepi iminā kāraṇavisesena sesapadāni vuttānīti dasseti ‘‘tato yesa’’ntiādinā. Tatoti paṭhamapadato paraṃ āhāti sambandho. ‘‘Chakāmāvacarissaro’’ tiyeva vutte sakkādīnampi tassa ādhipaccaṃ siyāti āsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ ‘‘vasavattī’’ti vuttaṃ, tena sāhasikakaraṇena vasavattāpanameva tassādhipaccanti dasseti. So hi chaṭṭhadevalokepi anissaro tattha vasavattidevarājasseva issarattā. Tenāha bhagavā aṅguttarāgamavare aṭṭhanipāte dānānisaṃsasutte ‘‘tatra bhikkhave vasavattī devaputto dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthuṃ atirekaṃ karitvā…pe… paranimmitavasavattī deve dasahi ṭhānehi adhigaṇhātī’’ti (a. ni. 8.36) vitthāro. Majjhimāgamaṭṭhakathāyampi vuttaṃ ‘‘tatra hi vasavattirājā rajjaṃ kāreti, māro pana ekasmiṃ padese attano parisāya issariyaṃ pavattento rajjapaccante dāmarikarājaputto viya vasatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.60) ‘‘brahmā mahānubhāvo’’tiādi dasasahassiyaṃ mahābrahmuno vasena vadati. ‘‘Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato’’ti hi heṭṭhā vuttameva. ‘‘Ekaṅguliyā’’tiādi ekadesena mahānubhāvatādassanaṃ. Anuttaranti seṭṭhaṃ navalokuttaraṃ. Puthūti bahukā, visuṃ bhūtā vā. Ukkaṭṭhaṭṭhānānanti ukkaṃsagatikānaṃ. Bhāvānukkamoti bhāvavasena paresamajjhāsayānurūpaṃ ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādipadānaṃ anukkamo, bhāvavasena anusandhikkamo vā bhāvānukkamo, atthānañceva padānañca anusandhānapaṭipāṭīti attho, ayameva vā pāṭho tathāyeva samantapāsādikāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā 1) diṭṭhattā, ācariyasāriputtattherena (sārattha. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā) ca vaṇṇitattā. ‘‘Vibhāvanānukkamo’’tipi pāṭho dissati, so pana tesu adiṭṭhattā na sundaro.
现在,为了显示古代诸师的注解方法,故说“然而,古代诸师说……”等。其中,由于用另一语句已把握了无余的众生世间,因此“一切处的剩余世间”即指无余的遍取。由此而说“往生三有的众生”,意思是:往生名为三界的三有众生。“以三种方式”即与天、魔罗、梵天共俱等三种方式。“于三处”即于“与天……”等三处。“纳入”即据义理而包含。为了表明:正是那些往生三有的众生,被纳入“与沙门婆罗门”、“与天人”这两句之中,故说“复次”。如是以种种方式,即以与天等共俱,及与沙门婆罗门等共俱的种种方式。在说了“往生三有的众生”之后,又说“正是三界”,这是在显示:众生世间与器世间一并被把握了。正是三界被遍取——与“然而,古代诸师说”相连。显示巴利原文
Idāni porāṇakānaṃ saṃvaṇṇanānayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘porāṇā panāhū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha aññapadena niravasesasattalokassa gahitattā sabbattha avasesalokanti anavasesapariyādānaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tibhavūpage satte’’ti, tedhātukasaṅkhāte tayo bhave upagatasatteti attho. Tīhākārehīti devamārabrahmasahitatāsaṅkhātehi tīhi ākārehi. Tīsu padesūti ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādīsu tīsu padesu. Pakkhipitvāti atthavasena saṅgahetvā. Teyeva tibhavūpage satte ‘‘sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ, sadevamanussa’’nti padadvaye pakkhipatīti ñāpetuṃ ‘‘punā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena tenākārenāti sadevakattādinā, sassamaṇabrāhmaṇībhāvādinā ca tena tena pakārena. ‘‘Tibhavūpage satte’’ti vatvā ‘‘tedhātukamevā’’ti vadantā okāsalokena saddhiṃ sattaloko gahitoti dassenti. Tedhātukameva pariyādinnanti porāṇā panāhūti yojanā.
“亲自”即自己。通过排除其他途径,或通过具决定性的包含,而说其遮止,即“成为不可被引导者”,意思是:成为不可被他人令知者。“证知”一词:如“如理作意”(《中部》1.23等)中的表述一样,此处省略了ya-kāra,即“证知已”。“殊胜”一语,不仅显示纯粹的修饰,而且借助修饰的途径也兼示了工具,这以“以殊胜之智”这句话来显示。“遮止比量等”:此处,“等”字包含了譬喻量、义准量、声量、内住、结合、分离、伴随等,它们仅凭微小之由而告知,故归为一类量。因为,诸佛世尊于一切处皆具无碍智行,故对一切法皆为现量亲证。“使觉悟”即令知晓,此是依字面说义。“令开显”即依意图说义。如此,于一切处皆应这样辨析。显示巴利原文
Sāmanti attanā. Aññatthāpohanena, antogadhāvadhāraṇena vā tappaṭisedhanamāha ‘‘aparaneyyo hutvā’’ti, aparehi anabhijānāpetabbo hutvāti attho. Abhiññāti ya-kāralopaniddeso yathā ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso’’ti (ma. ni. 1.23, 422; 2.24; 3.75; saṃ. ni. 4.120; a. ni. 6.58; mahāni. 206) vuttaṃ ‘‘abhiññāyā’’ti. Abhisaddena na visesanamattaṃ jotitaṃ, atha kho visesanamukhena karaṇampīti dasseti ‘‘adhikena ñāṇenā’’ti iminā. Anumānādipaṭikkhepoti ettha ādisaddena upamānaatthāpattisaddantarasannidhānasampayogavippayogasahacaraṇādinā kāraṇalesamattena pavedanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti ekappamāṇattā. Sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāratāya hi sabbadhammapaccakkhā buddhā bhagavanto. Bodheti viññāpetīti saddato atthavacanaṃ. Pakāsetīti adhippāyato. Evaṃ sabbattha vivecitabbo.
“无上的远离之乐”,指果等至之乐。“舍弃后”一句,因取用了pi字,是考虑到世尊的说法有时也会在果等至的间隙中进行而说的。因为世尊在说法时,当大众喝彩,或如所闻地省察法义的那个刹那,也以先前的决意限定时间而入果等至,并在如所限定的时间从等至出定后,从先前停住之处继续说法——此义在注释书中有说。“说少分或多分”,是依利根顿悟者而说少分,或依广慧分别者及可引导者而说多分。为说明“如何说”,故说“于初亦”等。法的善好,在于能引导出离;而能引导出离,又全因无有过失,故说“唯作无过失”。“说法”,指教理之法。因为以教诫、命令等方式善加安立、令觉悟的教导,即称为教理之法。虽然从胜义上说,并无脱离支分的所谓“集合体”,但在那些支分上以集合体的形式观察时,便有偈颂等名称,为了将其显示为仿佛与这些支分有别,并赋予集合体的世俗称谓,故说“说法有初中后”。“教诫”,指行道之法。因为依所应教诫的人所具有的应被教诫性,如随其所犯等而作教诫,依彼分断除等而作调伏,故行道之法被称为“教诫”。教诫有初中后,这是句子的连接。显示巴利原文
Anuttaraṃ vivekasukhanti phalasamāpattisukhaṃ. Hitvāpīti pi-saddaggahaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiyā antarā ṭhitikāpi kadāci bhagavato desanā hotīti katvā kataṃ. Bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento yasmiṃ khaṇe parisā sādhukāraṃ vā deti, yathāsutaṃ vā dhammaṃ paccavekkhati, taṃ khaṇampi pubbābhogena paricchinditvā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, yathāparicchedañca samāpattito vuṭṭhāya pubbe ṭhitaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya dhammaṃ desetīti aṭṭhakathāsu (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.387) vuttovāyamattho. Appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā desentoti ugghaṭitaññussa vasena appaṃ vā vipañcitaññussa, neyyassa ca vasena bahuṃ vā desento. Kathaṃ desetīti āha ‘‘ādimhipī’’tiādi. Dhammassa kalyāṇatā niyyānikatāya, niyyānikatā ca sabbaso anavajjabhāvenevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘anavajjameva katvā’’ti. Desanāyāti pariyattidhammassa desakāyattena hi āṇādividhinā atisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanāti pariyattidhammo vuccati. Kiñcāpi avayavavinimutto samudāyo nāma paramatthato koci natthi, yesu pana avayavesu samudāyarūpena avekkhitesu gāthādisamaññā, taṃ tato bhinnaṃ viya katvā saṃsāmivohāramāropetvā dassento ‘‘atthi desanāya ādimajjhapariyosāna’’nti āha. Sāsanassāti paṭipattidhammassa. Sāsitabbapuggalagatena hi yathāparādhādinā sāsitabbabhāvena anusāsanaṃ, tadaṅgavinayādivasena vinayananti katvā paṭipattidhammo ‘‘sāsana’’nti vuccati. Atthi sāsanassa ādimajjhapariyosānanti sambandho. Catuppadikāyapīti ettha pi-saddo sambhāvane, tena evaṃ appakatarāyapi ādimajjhapariyosānesu kalyāṇatā, pageva bahutarāyāti sambhāveti. Padañcettha gāthāya catutthaṃso, yaṃ ‘‘pādo’’tipi vuccati, eteneva tipādikachapādikāsupi yathāsambhavaṃ vibhāgaṃ dasseti. Evaṃ suttāvayave kalyāṇattayaṃ dassetvā sakalepi sutte dassetuṃ ‘‘ekānusandhikassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nātibahuvibhāgaṃ yathānusandhinā ekānusandhikaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekānusandhikassā’’ti āha. Itarasmiṃ pana teneva dhammavibhāgena ādimajjhapariyosānā labbhantīti ‘‘anekānusandhikassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nidānanti ānandattherena ṭhapitaṃ kāladesadesakaparisādiapadisanalakkhaṇaṃ nidānaganthaṃ. Idamavocāti nigamanaṃ upalakkhaṇameva ‘‘iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vutta’’nti nigamanassapi gahetabbato. Saṅgītikārakehi ṭhapitānipi hi nidānanigamanāni satthu desanāya anuvidhānato tadantogadhānevāti veditabbaṃ. Ante anusandhīti sabbapacchimo anusandhi.
以“戒、定、慧”等语,显明此处教诫的行道法性质。而在律藏注释中,因说为“教法”故——显示巴利原文
‘‘Sīlasamādhivipassanā’’tiādinā sāsanassa idha paṭipattidhammataṃ vibhāveti. Vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘sāsanadhammo’’ti vuttattā –
‘‘Sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ, kusalassa upasampadā; Sacittapariyodapanaṃ, etaṃ buddhāna sāsana’’nti. (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183; netti. 30, 50, 116, 124);
如上所说,阐释导师教诫的教理之法,即依戒等义而被说为三种善的开显。但此处唯指行道,故将说“此处意指说法的初、中、后”。戒、定、慧被称为初,是因为它们是教诫成就——殊胜人法的根本。“诸善法”指无过失法。“见”指观,此处因其不相离,也包含了定。这是《大品相应·跋希亚经》的句子。虽然经中因圣道远离二边而说为中道,但依中道性的共通,正行的加行与成就的中道性也能成立,故说“诸比丘,有如来所现等觉的中道——如是所说的圣道名为中”,意谓:由戒定慧所摄的加行,与由果涅槃所摄的成就,皆居于中,因此圣道名为中。依有余涅槃界,果称为后;依无余涅槃界,则涅槃为后。因为教诫的究竟即是涅槃界,道的成就依于果,而证得涅槃后更无所作,故如此说。今为以圣教证成此二者皆是教诫的究竟,而说“为此义此”等。以此果为义者,即“为此义”。“婆罗门”是世尊对宾伽罗科奢婆罗门的称呼。这是中部根本五十经《小树心譬喻经》的句子。以此果为心髓者,即“此为心髓”,有连音变化。同样,“此为究竟”。“入于涅槃”指以涅槃为归宿。“具寿毗舍佉”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttassa satthusāsanassa pakāsako pariyattidhammo eva sīlādiatthavasena kalyāṇattayavibhāvane vutto. Idha pana paṭipattiyeva. Tena vakkhati ‘‘idha desanāya ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ adhippeta’’nti. Sīlasamādhivipassanā ādi nāma sāsanasampattibhūtānaṃ uttarimanussadhammānaṃ mūlabhāvato. Kusalānaṃ dhammānanti anavajjadhammānaṃ. Diṭṭhīti vipassanā, avinābhāvato panettha samādhiggahaṇaṃ. Mahāvaggasaṃyutte bāhiyasuttapadamidaṃ (saṃ. ni. 5.381). Kāmaṃ sutte ariyamaggassa antadvayavigamena tesaṃ majjhimapaṭipadābhāvo vutto, majjhimabhāvasāmaññato pana sammāpaṭipattiyā ārambhanipphattīnaṃ majjhimabhāvassāpi sādhakabhāve yuttanti āha ‘‘atthi bhikkhave, majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhāti evaṃ vutto ariyamaggo majjhaṃ nāmā’’ti, sīlasamādhivipassanāsaṅkhātānaṃ ārambhānaṃ, phalanibbānasaṅkhātānañca nipphattīnaṃ vemajjhabhāvato ariyamaggo majjhaṃ nāmāti adhippāyo. Saupādisesanibbānadhātuvasena phalaṃ pariyosānaṃ nāma, anupādisesanibbānadhātuvasena pana nibbānaṃ. Sāsanapariyosānā hi nibbānadhātu. Maggassa nipphatti phalavasena, nibbānasacchikiriyāya ca hoti tato paraṃ kattabbābhāvatoti vā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Idāni tesaṃ dvinnampi sāsanassa pariyosānataṃ āgamena sādhetuṃ ‘‘etadatthaṃ ida’’ntiādimāha. Etadeva phalaṃ attho yassāti etadatthaṃ. Brāhmaṇāti piṅgalakocchabrāhmaṇaṃ bhagavā ālapati. Idañhi majjhimāgame mūlapaṇṇāsake cūḷasāropamasutta (ma. ni. 1.312 ādayo) padaṃ. Etadeva phalaṃ sāraṃ yassāti etaṃsāraṃ niggahitāgamena. Tathā etaṃpariyosānaṃ. Nibbānogadhanti nibbānantogadhaṃ. Āvuso visākhāti dhammadinnāya theriyā visākhagahapatimālapanaṃ. Idañhi cūḷavedallasutte (ma. ni. 1.460 ādayo) ‘‘sātthaṃ sabyañjana’’ntiādisaddantarasannidhānato ‘‘idha desanāya ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ adhippeta’’nti vuttaṃ.
如是,依文句相续的方式显示了三种善的区分,又依其义而显示,故说“世尊”等。因为即使就义理而言,他也以“hi”(确实)一词成立了所欲说之义。如此,依成立之相和义理,显示了三种善的区分。为显示此义,即:在彼彼义理中,依一定规则构成的文句,由偈颂、经典所决了的教法,在此即是“说法”,而其特就的义利即是戒等,故说“初为戒”等。这是特就的说法。若就通说而言,举“戒”即含摄了具足戒;同样,举“道”即含摄了具足道。如此,依三种义理,无遗地包摄了教法之义而确立;否则,三种善的区分就不能成为一切所共有的。在此,由于教法以戒为根本,故由“戒”说为“初善”;因为教法的成就居于中间,故由“道”说为“中善”;因为证得涅槃后更无所作,故由“涅槃”说为“后善”。故说“以显示戒等”。因为在此依义利说了说法的初善等性。“因此”等,是依如上所说,显示对听者的教诫。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saddapabandhavasena desanāya kalyāṇattayavibhāgaṃ dassetvā tadatthavasenapi dassento ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādimāha. Atthatopi hi tassādhippetabhāvaṃ hi-saddena samattheti. Tathā samatthanamukhena ca atthavasena kalyāṇattayavibhāgaṃ dassetīti. Atthato panetaṃ dassento yo tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe katavidhi saddapabandho gāthāsuttavasena vavatthito pariyattidhammoyeva idha desanāti vutto, tassa cattho visesato sīlādi evāti āha ‘‘ādimhi sīla’’ntiādi. Visesakathanañhetaṃ. Sāmaññato pana sīlaggahaṇena sasambhārasīlaṃ gahitaṃ, tathā maggaggahaṇena sasambhāramaggoti atthattayavasena anavasesato pariyattiatthaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati. Itarathā hi kalyāṇattayavibhāgo asabbasādhāraṇo siyā. Ettha ca sīlamūlakattā sāsanassa sīlena ādikalyāṇatā vuttā, sāsanasampattiyā vemajjhabhāvato maggena majjhekalyāṇatā. Nibbānādhigamato uttari karaṇīyābhāvato nibbānena pariyosānakalyāṇatā. Tenāti sīlādidassanena. Atthavasena hi idha desanāya ādikalyāṇādibhāvo vutto. ‘‘Tasmā’’tiādi yathāvuttānusārena sotūnamanusāsanīdassanaṃ.
“此”即依如上所说的方式。“说法者之住立”指说法者依说法而得安立、安住。显示巴利原文
Esāti yathāvuttākārena kathanā. Kathikasaṇṭhitīti dhammakathikassa saṇṭhānaṃ kathanavasena samavaṭṭhānaṃ.
“解说”意为义理的阐明,或是赞说。他不能教导有真舍利益之法,因为其说法缺少出离之义。因而说:从四念处等教导出离之义。“具一音节等”指在松弛、紧缩等十种音节差别中,仅以一种或两种方式组合的音节,如同达罗毗荼语。“一切不触唇音”指由于不张开嘴,无须触唇而发,一切皆为不触唇的解脱音,如基拉塔语。“一切释放音”指一切皆应释放,故一切皆为释放音,如萨瓦拉语。“一切鼻化音”指由于一切皆随顺,一切皆带随点(鼻化)音,如波斯等地的弥罗卡语。如是,“如达罗毗荼、基拉塔、萨瓦拉、弥罗卡等语”,应如此一一对应。而“弥罗卡”即指波斯等地。所有这一切,皆仅因音节的部分而生起,故为不圆满的音节,因此说“由于音节不圆满,故名为无音节”。显示巴利原文
Vaṇṇanā atthavivaraṇā, pasaṃsanā vā. Na so sātthaṃ deseti niyyānatthavirahato tassā desanāya. Tasmāti catusatipaṭṭhānādiniyyānatthadesanato. Ekabyañjanādiyuttāti sithiladhanitādibhedesu dasasu byañjanesu ekappakāreneva, dvippakāreneva vā byañjanena yuttā damiḷabhāsā viya. Sabbaniroṭṭhabyañjanāti vivaṭakaraṇatāya oṭṭhe aphusāpetvā uccāretabbato sabbathā oṭṭhaphusanarahitavimuttabyañjanā kirātabhāsā viya. Sabbavissaṭṭhabyañjanāti sabbasseva vissajjanīyayuttatāya sabbathā vissaggabyañjanā savarabhāsā viya. Sabbaniggahitabyañjanāti sabbasseva sānusāratāya sabbathā bindusahitabyañjanā pārasikādimilakkhubhāsā viya. Evaṃ ‘‘damiḷakirātasavaramilakkhūnaṃ bhāsā viyā’’ti idaṃ paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Milakkhūti ca pārasikādayo. Sabbāpesā byañjanekadesavaseneva pavattiyā aparipuṇṇabyañjanāti vuttaṃ ‘‘byañjanapāripūriyā abhāvato abyañjanā nāmā’’ti.
将发音部位与造作松弛后而发的字母,在五组辅音中,第一与第三为松弛音。将不作松弛而发的字母,于这些组中,第二与第四为紧缩音。需以二倍时长发出的为长音,需以一倍时长发出的为短音。显示巴利原文
Ṭhānakaraṇāni sithilāni katvā uccāretabbamakkharaṃ pañcasu vaggesu paṭhamatatiyaṃ sithilaṃ. Tāni asithilāni katvā uccāretabbamakkharaṃ tesveva dutiyacatutthaṃ dhanitaṃ. Dvimattakālamakkharaṃ dīghaṃ. Ekamattakālaṃ rassaṃ.
即此一刹那量,乃眨眼者所说;
弹指之量,亦为诸师所宣。
显示巴利原文 Pamāṇaṃ ekamattassa, nimīsumīsato’ bravuṃ; Aṅguliphoṭakālassa, pamāṇenāpi abravuṃ.
以结合为尾者,为长音、重音;以不结合为尾者,为短音、轻音。克制发音部位与方式,闭口而应发音者,为鼻音。与余词结合而应发音者,为连声。如是,不结合而发音者,为定音。释放发音部位与方式,开口而应发音者,为解脱音。在“十种”等当中,即依舒缓等差别,名为“音节智所生字心”的十种音节差别,此即是义。一切字母皆从心生,所欲之义由音节而显了,故称“音节”;或由作为音节智之能作因故,亦得说为“音节的十种差别”。显示巴利原文
Saññogaparaṃ, dīghañca garukaṃ. Asaṃyogaparaṃ rassaṃ lahukaṃ. Ṭhānakaraṇāni niggahetvā avivaṭena mukhena uccāretabbaṃ niggahitaṃ. Parapadena sambajjhitvā uccāretabbaṃ sambandhaṃ. Tathā asambajjhitabbaṃ vavatthitaṃ. Ṭhānakaraṇāni vissaṭṭhāni katvā vivaṭena mukhena uccāretabbaṃ vimuttaṃ.Dasadhātiādīsu evaṃ sithilādivasena byañjanabuddhisaṅkhātassa akkharuppādakacittassa dasahi pakārehi byañjanānaṃ pabhedoti attho. Sabbāni hi akkharāni cittasamuṭṭhānāni, yathādhippetatthassa ca byañjanato pakāsanato byañjanānīti, byañjanabuddhiyā vā karaṇabhūtāya byañjanānaṃ dasadhā pabhedotipi yujjati.
“不损”即不污损、不破坏、不失去,以此义故说“使词句圆满”。世尊为了使人了知此义,即使只宣说一偈、一句,也以词句圆满的说法而宣说,此即其意。因此,“故”字意谓由词句圆满的说法而说。“完全”一词在此意为无余。并非“混杂”等义,所以是“全体”的同义语。“圆满”即完全充满。就义理而言,此即遮止减与增,故为“无减无增”的同义语。其中,所教导之义,因能成办,应知为“无减”;而与此义无关者,因其不能成办,故为“无增”。或者,应当带来的清净义未说,故为“无减”;应当断除的杂染义已说,故为“无增”。“全体”即具足一切部分。“圆满”即完全充满,所以说“即使缺少一部分,也没有不满”。说法不清净,是因为被渴爱所染污。被世间渴爱所触及,故为“世间欲”;于衣等资具,心不染着,故为“不著世间欲”。“以利益之扩散”即以利益的散布与摄受,作为殊胜之因。柔软之心是修慈之因。以“拔出之自性安立”,即依从一切杂染、从轮回之苦中拔出的相状而安立,也就是以悲悯之意而宣说。显示巴利原文
Amakkhetvāti amilecchetvā avināsetvā, ahāpetvāti attho. Tadatthamāha ‘‘paripuṇṇabyañjanameva katvā’’ti, yamatthaṃ bhagavā ñāpetuṃ ekagāthaṃ, ekavākyampi deseti, tamatthaṃ parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanāya eva desanāya desetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tasmāti paripuṇṇabyañjanadhammadesanato . Kevalasaddo idha anavasesavācako. Na avomissatādivācakoti āha ‘‘sakalādhivacana’’nti. Paripuṇṇanti sabbaso puṇṇaṃ. Taṃ panatthato ūnādhikanisedhananti vuttaṃ ‘‘anūnādhikavacana’’nti. Tattha yadatthaṃ desito, tassa sādhakattā anūnatā veditabbā, tabbidhurassa pana asādhakattā anadhikatā. Upanetabbassa vā vodānatthassa avuttassa abhāvato anūnatā, apanetabbassa saṃkilesatthassa vuttassa abhāvato anadhikatā. Sakalanti sabbabhāgavantaṃ. Paripuṇṇanti sabbaso puṇṇameva. Tenāha ‘‘ekadesenāpi aparipuṇṇā natthī’’ti. Aparisuddhā desanā hoti taṇhāya saṃkiliṭṭhattā. Lokehi taṇhāya āmasitabbato lokāmisā, cīvarādayo paccayā, tesu agadhitacittatāya lokāmisanirapekkho. Hitapharaṇenāti hitato pharaṇena hitūpasaṃhārena visesanabhūtena. Mettābhāvanāya karaṇabhūtāya muduhadayo. Ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhitenāti sakalasaṃkilesato, vaṭṭadukkhato ca uddharaṇākārasaṇṭhitena, kāruññādhippāyenāti vuttaṃ hoti.
依“从今以后我将布施,并且如此布施”这样受持的义理,布施即是誓愿(vata)。因由智者所施设,故以最胜义而称为梵;又因是诸梵天或最胜者所行,故布施即名梵行。因已抑制悭吝与贪等而圆满修习,故布施即是善行。Iddhī指天神通。Jutī指光辉,或威力。Balavīriyūpapattī指具足大力量与大精进。Nāgā是维度罗贤者对婆楼那龙王的称呼。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ito paṭṭhāya dassāmi, evañca dassāmī’’ti samādātabbaṭṭhena dānaṃ vataṃ. Paṇḍitapaññattatāya seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmaṃ, brahmānaṃ vā seṭṭhānaṃ cariyanti dānameva brahmacariyaṃ. Macchariyalobhādiniggahaṇena samāciṇṇattā dānameva suciṇṇaṃ. Iddhīti deviddhi. Jutīti pabhā, ānubhāvo vā. Balavīriyūpapattīti mahatā balena, vīriyena ca samannāgamo. Nāgāti varuṇanāgarājānaṃ vidhurapaṇḍitassa ālapanaṃ.
Dānapatī意谓布施之主。Opānabhūtaṃ意谓如同饮水处一般。显示巴利原文
Dānapatīti dānasāmino. Opānabhūtanti udakatitthamiva bhūtaṃ.
Dhīrā:意为“贤者”,此指毗度罗贤者。显示巴利原文
Dhīrāti so vidhurapaṇḍitamālapati.
Madhussavo:意为流出甘美之味。Puññaṃ:指福行,这是以因来称呼果的说法。Brahmacariyaṃ:由“brahmaṃ”或“brahmānaṃ”(梵天或诸梵天)与“cariyaṃ”(行)组成,意为服事梵天或诸梵天、最尊贵的梵行或最胜的梵行。其余诸词,亦依此理理解。显示巴利原文
Madhussavoti madhurasasandanaṃ. Puññanti puññaphalaṃ, kāraṇavohārena vuttaṃ. Brahmaṃ, brahmānaṃ vā cariyanti brahmacariyaṃ, veyyāvaccaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi.
Tittiriyaṃ:此指由鹧鸪鸟王所说。显示巴利原文
Tittiriyanti tittirasakuṇarājena bhāsitaṃ.
Aññatra tāhīti:意为“除他人妇之外”。Amhaṃ:意为“我们的”。显示巴利原文
Aññatra tāhīti paradārabhūtāhi vajjetvā. Amhanti amhākaṃ.
Tapassī、lūkho、jegucchī、pavivitto——由修习四种难行的缘故,而具足四支。Sudaṃ仅是填充词。《中部·根本五十篇》中有《身毛竖立经》,亦称为《大狮子吼经》。显示巴利原文
Tapassī , lūkho, jegucchī, pavivittoti catubbidhassa dukkarassa katattā caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ. Sudanti nipātamattaṃ. Lomahaṃsanasuttaṃ majjhimāgame mūlapaṇṇāsake, ‘‘mahāsīhanādasutta’’ntipi (ma. ni. 1.146) taṃ vadanti.
Iddhaṃ:意为繁荣。Phītaṃ:意为兴旺。Vitthārikaṃ:意为广布。Bāhujaññaṃ:意为由众多人因出离性而了知。Puthubhūtaṃ:意为众多。Yāva devamanussehi——在《寂静经注释》中,依意旨而说“从天道乃至人间,善为开显”,其义即“诸天与人”。Tasmā——由于此处以包含三学的全部教法而称为“梵行”,故为显示与“梵行”一词同位格的所有词语之义,而说“他宣说法”等。因为“如此宣说者”这一句,显示了“梵行”一词与“法”等词同义;在说了“宣说法”之后,又说“开显梵行”,是为了从本质上阐明其含义。显示巴利原文
Iddhanti samiddhaṃ. Phītanti phullitaṃ. Vitthārikanti vitthārabhūtaṃ. Bāhujaññanti bahūhi janehi niyyānikabhāvena ñātaṃ. Puthubhūtanti bahubhūtaṃ. Yāva devamanussehīti ettha devalokato yāva manussalokā supakāsitanti adhippāyavasena pāsādikasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.170) vuttaṃ, yāva devā ca manussā cāti attho. Tasmāti yasmā sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sakalasāsanaṃ idha ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti adhippetaṃ, tasmā. ‘‘Brahmacariya’’nti iminā samānādhikaraṇāni sabbapadāni yojetvā atthaṃ dassento ‘‘so dhammaṃ desetī’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Evaṃ desento cā’’ti hi iminā brahmacariyasaddena dhammasaddādīnaṃ samānatthataṃ dasseti, ‘‘dhammaṃ desetī’’ti vatvāpi ‘‘brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetī’’ti vacanaṃ sarūpato atthappakāsanatthanti ca vibhāveti.
191 “具足如上所述的成就”,即如前所说的初善等种种功德成就。唯有远离慢心之人,才能在教法中如法行道,慢心者则不然,故说“因已摧破慢心”。“因增盛”,即由于繁多而普遍。以财物、容貌等为所依的骄慢容易断除,因为其所缘境不稳固;而以家族、学识等为所依的骄慢则不然,因为其所缘境稳固。因此,即便是出家的刹帝利、婆罗门种姓者,依凭出身与学识生起慢心也难以断除,故说“大多……生起慢心”。“因卑劣出身”,即因颠倒的出身,意为低劣的出身。大多具足亲依止缘者乃是善出身者,而非恶出身者,故如此说。“不能安住”,即不能精勤地安住于戒,不能极清净地守护戒。因为戒即是教法中的安住;或者“安住”指通过证悟真理而安住于出世间的安住,那才是严格意义上的教法中的安住。显示巴利原文
191.Vuttappakārasampadanti yathāvuttaādikalyāṇatādippabhedaguṇasampadaṃ. Dūrasamussāritamānasseva sāsane sammāpaṭipatti sambhavati, na mānajātikassāti vuttaṃ ‘‘nihatamānattā’’ti. Ussannattāti bahulabhāvato. Bhogarūpādivatthukā madā suppaheyyā honti nimittassa anavaṭṭhānato, na tathā kulavijjādimadā nimittassa samavaṭṭhānato. Tasmā khattiyabrāhmaṇakulīnānaṃ pabbajitānampi jātivijjaṃ nissāya mānajappanaṃ duppajahanti āha ‘‘yebhuyyena…pe… mānaṃ karontī’’ti. Vijātitāyāti viparītajātitāya, hīnajātitāyāti attho. Yebhuyyena upanissayasampannā sujātikā eva, na dujjātikāti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkontīti sīle patiṭṭhahituṃ na ussahanti, suvisuddhaṃ katvā sīlaṃ rakkhituṃ na sakkontīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sīlameva hi sāsane patiṭṭhā, patiṭṭhātunti vā saccapaṭivedhena lokuttarāya patiṭṭhāya patiṭṭhātuṃ. Sā hi nippariyāyato sāsane patiṭṭhā nāma.
如此以遮遣方式解释义理后,再以随顺方式说“然而居士子等”。“Kacchehi sedaṃ muñcantehi”是表示状态特征的具格短语,意为“腋下流汗”;同样,“piṭṭhiyā loṇaṃ pupphamānāya”意为“背上汗渍如盐花绽放”,或“以这些方式为特征”。“Bhūmiṃ kasitvā”意为耕田之后,即依田地维生。“Tādisassa”指对于具有如此出身与亲依止缘者。“Dubbalaṃ mānaṃ”指微弱的慢,“Balavaṃ dappaṃ”指强烈的傲。“Kammaṃ”指准备工作。以“Itarehi”等句来阐明“因增盛”这一理由句。“iti”之后,以“因已摧破慢心”等显示应如此把握之义;或者iti一词表示举例,意为“如此,依如上所述之理”。其余类似处亦同此理。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ byatirekato atthaṃ vatvā anvayatopi vadati ‘‘gahapatidārakā panā’’tiādinā. Kacchehisedaṃ muñcantehīti itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ. Tathā piṭṭhiyā loṇaṃ pupphamānāyāti, sedaṃ muñcantakacchā loṇaṃ pupphamānapiṭṭhikā hutvā, tehi vā pakārehi lakkhitāti attho. Bhūmiṃ kasitvāti bhūmiyā kassanato, khettūpajīvanatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tādisassāti jātimantūpanissayassa. Dubbalaṃ mānaṃ. Balavaṃ dappaṃ. Kammanti parikammaṃ. ‘‘Itarehī’’tiādinā ‘‘ussannattā’’ti hetupadaṃ vivarati. ‘‘Itī’’ti vatvā tadaparāmasitabbaṃ dasseti ‘‘nihatamānattā’’tiādinā, itisaddo vā nidassane, evaṃ yathāvuttanayenāti attho. Esa nayo īdisesu.
“Paccājāto”一词中,前缀paccā仅作前缀之义,故说“patijāto”。所谓“清净”,因显示彻底断除贪等烦恼,以无随烦恼性而于一切方面清净。由于是法的生起之因,或由于以法统领包括天人在内的世间,故为“法主”。所谓“信”,指依凡夫之信而信受。因为对于智者而言,先把握法的成就而后成就信,是由于在四种人之中,存在以法为准则、因法而净信的人。他获得这样的信:“如此善说之法者,彼世尊确实是正自觉者。”即使相隔一百由旬之处也是如此。“Jāyampatikā”即妻子与丈夫。虽然一说“jāyampatikā”,依家主与主妇即理解为仅指两人,但对于有多位妻子的男子,则无需赘言。为了显示即使仅与一人共住也是逼仄的,故说“两人”。贪等为“kiñcana”(障碍),田地等为“palibodhana”(系缚),与这两者共存,故为“有障碍有系缚者”,其义即如此。贪即是尘,以贪为首的嗔、痴也是尘。正如所说:“贪是尘,而非微尘”等(《大义释》209;《小义释》74)。来处与生起之处也是同一意义,两种解释义理相同。显示巴利原文
Paccājātoti ettha ākāro upasaggamattanti āha ‘‘patijāto’’ti. Parisuddhanti rāgādīnaṃ accantameva pahānadīpanato nirupakkilesatāya sabbathā suddhaṃ. Dhammassa sāmī taduppādakaṭṭhena, dhammena vā sadevakassa lokassa sāmīti dhammassāmī. Saddhanti pothujjanikasaddhāvasena saddahanaṃ. Viññūjātikānañhi dhammasampattigahaṇapubbikā saddhāsiddhi catūsu puggalesu dhammappamāṇadhammappasannapuggalabhāvato. ‘‘Yo evaṃ svākkhātadhammo, sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā’’ti saddhaṃ paṭilabhati. Yojanasatantarepi vā padese. Jāyampatikāti jānipatikā. Kāmaṃ ‘‘jāyampatikā’’ti vutteyeva gharasāmikagharasāminīvasena dvinnameva gahaṇaṃ viññāyati, yassa pana purisassa anekā pajāpatiyo, tassa vattabbameva natthi. Ekāyapi tāva saṃvāso sambādhoyevāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘dve’’ti vuttaṃ. Rāgādinā kiñcanaṃ, khettavatthādinā palibodhanaṃ, tadubhayena saha vattatīti sakiñcanapalibodhano, soyevattho tathā. Rāgo eva rajo, tadādikā dosamoharajā. Vuttañhi ‘‘rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccatī’’tiādi (mahāni. 209; cūḷani. 74) āgamanapathatāpi uṭṭhānaṭṭhānatā evāti dvepi saṃvaṇṇanā ekatthā, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Alagganaṭṭhenāti asajjanaṭṭhena appaṭibandhasabhāvena. Rūpakavasena, taddhitavasena vā abbhokāsoti dassetuṃ viya-saddaggahaṇaṃ. Evaṃ akusalakusalappavattīnaṃ ṭhānāṭhānabhāvena gharāvāsapabbajjānaṃ sambādhabbhokāsataṃ dassetvā idāni kusalappavattiyā eva aṭṭhānaṭṭhānabhāvena tesaṃ tabbhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Rajānaṃ sannipātaṭṭhānaṃ viyāti sambandho.
未作逐词拆解,仅略摄义理而作解释,这就是“略说”。“即使一日”,指仅仅一日。“使其无缺”,指乃至不犯微细的恶作,令其毫无瑕疵。“临终心”,即死心。以烦恼垢,即渴爱等杂染之垢。“无染”,即不被染污。以极清净之义、无垢之性,犹如刻画磨净的螺贝,故称“saṅkhalikhita”(如刻画之螺)。为显明此义,而说“如刻画之螺贝”。“如洗净之螺贝般明净”,正是对此义的开显。又,如同“agyāhito”的构词方式,“likhitaṃ saṅkhaṃ”即“saṅkhalikhitaṃ”,因其相似,此处也显示“saṅkhalikhitaṃ”,且此为中性名词。此处的“ajjhāvasatā”,因与不变化词“adhi”结合,“agāra”为处格用作受格,故说“在屋内”。关联句为:“我何不出家?若能出家,实为善哉。”为显示“以树皮染色的即是袈裟衣”,而说“因浸染树皮汁液”。“为何取用这些?”答:“因为适合行梵行者。”“acchādetvā”仅是习惯语,意为“穿着”,且是依下衣与上衣而穿着。显示巴利原文
Visuṃ visuṃ paduddhāramakatvā samāsato atthavaṇṇanā saṅkhepakathā. Ekampi divasanti ekadivasamattampi. Akhaṇḍaṃ katvāti dukkaṭamattassāpi anāpajjanena achiddaṃ katvā. Carimakacittanti cuticittaṃ. Kilesamalenāti taṇhāsaṃkilesādimalena. Amalīnanti asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ. Pariyodātaṭṭhena nimmalabhāvena saṅkhaṃ viya likhitaṃ dhotanti saṅkhalikhitaṃ. Atthamattaṃ pana dassetuṃ ‘‘likhitasaṅkhasadisa’’nti vuttaṃ. Dhotasaṅkhasappaṭibhāganti tadatthasseva vivaraṇaṃ. Apica likhitaṃ saṅkhaṃ saṅkhalikhitaṃ yathā ‘‘agyāhito’’ti, tassadisattā pana idaṃ saṅkhalikhitantipi dasseti, bhāvanapuṃsakañcetaṃ. Ajjhāvasatāti ettha adhi-saddena kammappavacanīyena yogato ‘‘agāra’’nti etaṃ bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘agāramajjhe’’ti. Yaṃ nūna yadi pana pabbajeyyaṃ, sādhu vatāti sambandho. Kasāyena rattāni kāsāyānīti dasseti ‘‘kasāyarasapītatāyā’’ti iminā. Kasmā cetāni gahitānīti āha ‘‘brahmacariyaṃ carantānaṃ anucchavikānī’’ti. Acchādetvāti vohāravacanamattaṃ, paridahitvāti attho, tañca kho nivāsanapārupanavasena. Agāravāso agāraṃ uttarapadalopena, tassa hitaṃ vuḍḍhiāvahaṃ kasivāṇijjādikammaṃ. Taṃ anagāriyanti tasmiṃ anagāriye.
192 “Sahassato”指从一千迦诃波那。财富蕴即财富之堆。以系缚之义,即“儿子、孙子、曾孙”等,依爱著而划定界限、结缚之义,以此显示“parivaṭṭa”一词有系缚之义。又或,依祖父、父亲、儿子等辗转相续之义,也可解释为“parivaṭṭo”。“因‘这些是我们的’而被认知,故为‘ñātayo’(亲属)。”显示巴利原文
192.Sahassatoti kahāpaṇasahassato. Bhogakkhandho bhogarāsi. Ābandhanaṭṭhenāti ‘‘putto nattā panattā’’tiādinā pemavasena paricchedaṃ katvā bandhanaṭṭhena, etena ābandhanattho parivaṭṭa-saddoti dasseti. Atha vā pitāmahapituputtādivasena parivattanaṭṭhena parivaṭṭotipi yujjati. ‘‘Amhākamete’’ti ñāyantīti ñātayo.
193 以巴帝摩卡律仪防护身、语之门,即以此律仪而成为具足者,故说“具足巴帝摩卡律仪”。“行处”与“行境”的详细解说,应取自《分别论注》等(《分别论注》503)。而“行处行境具足”等,正是显示此巴帝摩卡律仪防护状态的缘。因与微细相似,故称微细者为“aṇu”,因此说“于诸微细罪”。“微细”指无意违犯的微小罪,以及突然生起的不善心。见怖畏者,即习惯于见怖畏。“正”,即不颠倒,或善妙,其状态即是以恭敬、尽形寿不违犯的方式。当说“于诸学处”时,其组成部分“受持学处而学”之义已可理解,故未说业处,而说“彼彼学处”,其义为:彼彼学处之分,或学之证得方便,或学之所依。显示巴利原文
193. Pātimokkhasaṃvarena pihitakāyavacīdvāro samāno tena saṃvarena upeto nāmāti katvā ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarena samannāgato’’ti vuttaṃ. Ācāragocarānaṃ vitthāro vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathādīsu (vibha. aṭṭha. 503) gahetabbo. ‘‘Ācāragocarasampanno’’tiādi ca tasseva pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutabhāvassa paccayadassanaṃ. Aṇusadisatāya appamattakaṃ ‘‘aṇū’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘appamattakesū’’ti. Asañcicca āpannaanukhuddakāpattivasena, sahasā uppannaakusalacittuppādavasena ca appamattakatā. Bhayadassīti bhayadassanasīlo. Sammāti aviparītaṃ, sundaraṃ vā, tabbhāvo ca sakkaccaṃ yāvajīvaṃ avītikkamavasena. ‘‘Sikkhāpadesū’’ti vutteyeva tadavayavabhūtaṃ ‘‘sikkhāpadaṃ samādāya sikkhatī’’ti atthassa gamyamānattā kammapadaṃ na vuttanti āha ‘‘taṃ taṃ sikkhāpada’’nti, taṃ taṃ sikkhākoṭṭhāsaṃ, sikkhāya vā adhigamupāyaṃ, tassā vā nissayanti attho.
“此处”指在此“以巴帝摩卡律仪防护”等语句中。仅凭“行处行境具足”一语,便已包含了善的身业与语业,故说“虽已包含了善的身业与语业”。然而,仅凭“行处行境”一词,本不能完全涵盖善的身业与语业,由此便显出重复之嫌的些许痕迹。为了显示其生起之门,即为了以业为名,指明称为身表与语表的生起之门,以此澄清前述讥嫌。意谓:虽然意义已经成立,但再次生起说明,或是为了确定,或是为了显示别义;而在此处,正是为了显示别义,所以说是为了显示生起之门。所谓“善”,即因彻底断除邪命而无有任何过失。如何以此显示其生起之门呢?答:“然而因为……”等。其意旨为:由于具足在身门与语门中生起的、无有过失的身业与语业,故名为“活命清净”。因为这两者正是以活命为因的活命遍净戒。显示巴利原文
Etthāti etasmiṃ ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’tiādivacane. Ācāragocaraggahaṇenevāti ‘‘ācāragocarasampanno’’ti vacaneneva. Tenāha ‘‘kusale kāyakammavacīkamme gahitepī’’ti. Na hi ācāragocarasaddamattena kusalakāyavacīkammaggahaṇaṃ sambhavati, iminā punaruttitāya codanālesaṃ dasseti. Tassāti ājīvapārisuddhisīlassa. Uppattidvāradassanatthanti uppattiyā kāyavacīviññattisaṅkhātassa dvārassa kammāpadesena dassanatthaṃ, etena yathāvuttacodanāya sodhanaṃ dasseti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – siddhepi sati punārambho niyamāya vā hoti, atthantarabodhanāya vā, idha pana atthantaraṃ bodheti, tasmā uppattidvāradassanatthaṃ vuttanti. Kusalenāti ca sabbaso anesanapahānato anavajjena. Kathaṃ tena uppattidvāradassananti āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Kāyavacīdvāresu uppannena anavajjena kāyakammavacīkammena samannāgatattā parisuddhājīvoti adhippāyo. Tadubhayameva hi ājīvahetukaṃ ājīvapārisuddhisīlaṃ.
如今为了与另一部经文相互印证,他说:“或者依《蒙迪卡子经》而这样说。”此处的“或者”一词,是用来抉择与经文印证这一不同义理。《蒙迪卡子经》是中部经典殊胜之中分五十篇中的一部,也有人称之为《沙门蒙迪卡子经》。在那部经中,世尊称呼一位名为五支的木匠为“thapati”,因为“thapati”是木匠的同义词。其论述是这样的:在《蒙迪卡子经》的教示中,先指出“thapati,什么是善戒?即善的身业、善的语业”,开示戒为善的身业与语业,然后说“thapati,我也说正命的清净属于戒”,如是展开;而在《沙门果经》的教示中,则先指出“具足善的身业、语业”,开示戒为善的身业与语业,然后说“正命清净”,如是展开。这两者的意趣同归一处,确实相契相应,如同恒河水与耶牟那河水合流一般。因此,世尊的教法光辉也具备这样的形式。“我说属于戒”的意思是:我说此为戒;或者,在作为基础的戒中,它被包含、摄属于内,又或者在作为简别总体的戒中,我说它是其中的一种戒。显示巴利原文
Idāni suttantarena saṃsandituṃ ‘‘muṇḍikaputtasuttantavasena vā evaṃ vutta’’nti āha. Vā-saddo cettha suttantarasaṃsandanāsaṅkhātaatthantaravikappanattho. Muṇḍikaputtasuttantaṃ nāma majjhimāgamavare majjhimapaṇṇāsake, yaṃ ‘‘samaṇamuṇḍikaputtasutta’’ntipi vadanti. Tattha thapatīti pañcakaṅgaṃ nāma vaḍḍhakiṃ bhagavā ālapati. Thapati-saddo hi vaḍḍhakipariyāyo. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmā ‘‘katame ca thapati kusalā sīlā? Kusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ kusalaṃ vacīkamma’’nti sīlassa kusalakāyakammavacīkammabhāvaṃ dassetvā ‘‘ājīvapārisuddhampi kho ahaṃ thapati sīlasmiṃ vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.265) evaṃ pavattāya muṇḍikaputtasuttadesanāya ‘‘kāyakammavacīkammena samannāgato kusalenā’’ti sīlassa kusalakāyakammavacīkammabhāvaṃ dassetvā ‘‘parisuddhājīvo’’ti evaṃ pavattā ayaṃ sāmaññaphalasuttadesanā ekasaṅgahā aññadatthu saṃsandati sameti yathā taṃ gaṅgodakena yamunodakaṃ, tasmā īdisīpi bhagavato desanāvibhūti atthevāti . Sīlasmiṃ vadāmīti sīlanti vadāmi, sīlasmiṃ vā ādhārabhūte antogadhaṃ pariyāpannaṃ, niddhāraṇasamudāyabhūte vā ekaṃ sīlanti vadāmi.
“三种”是指从小戒、中戒、大戒而说的三种。“以意处为第六”这一句,否定了只取前五处而以身业为首的说法。在下文将要解释的七个处所中。“三种”是指在四者之中,各自依据所得、所能、所宜的情形而区分出的三类。显示巴利原文
Tividhenāti cūḷasīlamajjhimasīlamahāsīlato tividhena. ‘‘Manacchaṭṭhesū’’ti iminā kāyapañcamānameva gahaṇaṃ nivatteti. Upari niddese vakkhamānesu sattasu ṭhānesu. Tividhenāti catūsu paccekaṃ yathālābhayathābalayathāsāruppatāvasena tibbidhena.
小戒、中戒、大戒的解释显示巴利原文
Cūḷamajjhimamahāsīlavaṇṇanā
194-211 “如此”是指以“他这样出家后,安住于防护别解脱律仪”等方式解说。“于戒中”的“中”字是表示简别处的依格,因需从中简别出一种,故说“一种戒”。再者,这也显示了依格表示处所,因为总体是部分的依处,犹如说“树上的树枝”。通过“此”字,以表示动作对象的方式,显示了依格词与主格词的同位关系,因为依格词可用于表示动作对象的意义,如同说“于丛林中,于雨滴的尖端”。而通过“或者,此依格是用于主格的意义”这句话,则表明了主格义。这正是主格的意义。在《梵网经》中:即在《梵网经》的注释中,或《梵网经》的文句中。意思是依据注释所说的方法。在“此是他的于戒中”这句话里,由于在大戒结束时没有被简别的事物,所以唯有主格的意义才合理,因此说“意思是:这是他的戒”,并由此可知,在经典原文中没有使用“api”这个词。显示巴利原文
194-211.Evanti ‘‘so evaṃ pabbajito samāno pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharatī’’tiādinā nayena. ‘‘Sīlasmi’’nti idaṃ niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ tato ekassa niddhāraṇīyattāti āha ‘‘ekaṃ sīla’’nti. Apica iminā ādhāre bhummaṃ dasseti samudāyassa avayavādhiṭṭhānattā yathā ‘‘rukkhe sākhā’’ti. ‘‘Ida’’nti padena katvatthavasena samānādhikaraṇaṃ bhummavacanassa katvatthe pavattanato yathā ‘‘vanappagumbe yatha phusitagge’’ti (khu. pā. 6.13; su. ni. 236) dasseti ‘‘paccattavacanatthe vā etaṃ bhumma’’nti iminā. Ayamevatthoti paccattavacanattho eva. Brahmajāleti brahmajālasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ, (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7) brahmajālasuttapade vā. Saṃvaṇṇanāvasena vuttanayenāti attho. ‘‘Idamassa hoti sīlasmi’’nti ettha mahāsīlapariyosānena niddhāriyamānassa abhāvato paccattavacanatthoyeva sambhavatīti āha ‘‘idaṃ assa sīlaṃ hotīti attho’’ti, tatoyeva ca pāḷiyaṃ apiggahaṇamakatanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
212 自谴、他谴、刑罚等怖畏,是以不防护为根源的怖畏。导师说:“‘由戒的不防护’,意思是由于不防护戒,即无戒防护之义。”然而,对于“即此从戒防护”这句话,依其义释“即此怖畏可能从戒防护产生”,以及“不因戒防护而见怖畏”这一义的合理性,唯有“从戒防护——即以戒防护为因”的意义方能成立。因为确实可见“即此怖畏可能从戒防护产生”这样的读法。在说出“从防护”这一原因后,依据所证得的道理,也说明了“因为没有以不防护为根源的怖畏”这一原因。“依法施行的”即如法成就;“以刹帝利灌顶”即能带来刹帝利身份的灌顶;“于头顶灌水”即唯在头顶灌顶。在此,“依法施行的”一句,显示了具足古来所行仪轨的条件;“以刹帝利灌顶”一句,显示了能带来刹帝利身份的条件;“于头顶灌水”一句,显示了唯在头顶灌顶的条件。如此,具足三项条件的刹帝利灌顶被宣说出来。由此,受灌顶的诸王得以成就王威。然而,此义如何得知?依古传典籍的方法。因为在《起世因缘经》的注释中,阐明大选举灌顶时说道:“他们以三个螺贝为他(大选举王)显示巴利原文
212. Attānuvādaparānuvādadaṇḍabhayādīni asaṃvaramūlakāni bhayāni. ‘‘Sīlassāsaṃvaratoti sīlassa asaṃvaraṇato, sīlasaṃvarābhāvatoti attho’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.280) ācariyena vuttaṃ, ‘‘yadidaṃ sīlasaṃvarato’’ti pana padassa ‘‘yaṃ idaṃ bhayaṃ sīlasaṃvarato bhaveyyā’’ti atthavacanato, ‘‘sīlasaṃvarahetu bhayaṃ na samanupassatī’’ti ca atthassa upapattito sīlasaṃvarato sīlasaṃvarahetūti atthoyeva sambhavati. ‘‘Yaṃ idaṃ bhayaṃ sīlasaṃvarato bhaveyyā’’ti hi pāṭhopi dissati. ‘‘Saṃvarato’’ti hetuṃ vatvā tadadhigamitaatthavasena ‘‘asaṃvaramūlakassa bhayassa abhāvā’’tipi hetuṃ vadati. Yathāvidhānavihitenāti yathāvidhānaṃ sampāditena. Khattiyābhisekenāti khattiyabhāvāvahena abhisekena. Muddhani avasittoti matthakeyeva abhisitto. Ettha ca ‘‘yathāvidhānavihitenā’’ti iminā porāṇakāciṇṇavidhānasamaṅgitāsaṅkhātaṃ ekaṃ aṅgaṃ dasseti, ‘‘khattiyābhisekenā’’ti iminā khattiyabhāvāvahatāsaṅkhātaṃ, ‘‘muddhani avasitto’’ti iminā muddhaniyeva abhisiñcitabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ. Iti tivaṅgasamannāgato khattiyābhiseko vutto hoti. Yena abhisittarājūnaṃ rājānubhāvo samijjhati. Kena panāyamattho viññāyatīti? Porāṇakasatthāgatanayena. Vuttañhi aggaññasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ mahāsammatābhisekavibhāvanāya ‘‘te panassa khettasāmino tīhi saṅkhehi abhisekampi akaṃsū’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.131) majjhimāgamaṭṭhakathāyañca mahāsīhanādasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘muddhāvasittenāti tīhi saṅkhehi khattiyābhisekena muddhani abhisittenā’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.160) sīhaḷaṭṭhakathāyampi cūḷasīhanādasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘paṭhamaṃ tāva abhisekaṃ gaṇhantānaṃ rājūnaṃ suvaṇṇamayādīni tīṇi saṅkhāni ca gaṅgodakañca khattiyakaññañca laddhuṃ vaṭṭatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
此是依如来教法对灌顶仪轨所作的判定:为行灌顶吉祥,先于已装饰布置妥帖的华盖之内,在稳固安立的优昙婆罗枝华盖中央的优昙婆罗吉祥座上,令应受灌顶、出身纯正的刹帝利坐下。首先,由佩戴吉祥饰物、出身高贵的刹帝利少女,双手恭敬捧持盛满恒河水的右旋金制海螺,举至其头顶上方,以此为其头顶浇灌灌顶之水,并这样说道:“大王,所有刹帝利众为护自身,以此灌顶使您成为受灌顶的大王。您应安住于王法,以法、以平等治理王国。对这些刹帝利众,您应怀有犹如对儿子般的慈爱与悲悯,具足饶益与平等的慈心,并以守护、屏障与护持来护佑他们。”随后,由国师,以符合国师地位的装饰打扮整齐,双手恭敬捧持盛满恒河水的银制海螺,举至其头顶上方,为其头顶浇灌灌顶之水,并这样说道:“大王,所有婆罗门众为护自身,以此灌顶使您成为受灌顶的大王。您应安住于王法,以法、以平等治理王国。对这些婆罗门众,您应怀有犹如对儿子般的慈爱与悲悯,具足饶益与平等的慈心,并以守护、屏障与护持来护佑他们。”然后,再由长者,以长者地位的庄严饰品装饰显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana tatthāgatanayena abhisekavidhānavinicchayo – abhisekamaṅgalatthañhi alaṅkatapaṭiyattassa maṇḍapassa antokatassa udumbarasākhamaṇḍapassa majjhe suppatiṭṭhite udumbarabhaddapīṭhamhi abhisekārahaṃ abhijaccaṃ khattiyaṃ nisīdāpetvā paṭhamaṃ tāva maṅgalābharaṇabhūsitā jātisampannā khattiyakaññā gaṅgodakapuṇṇaṃ suvaṇṇamayasāmuddikadakkhiṇāvaṭṭasaṅkhaṃ ubhohi hatthehi sakkaccaṃ gahetvā sīsopari ussāpetvā tena tassa muddhani abhisekodakaṃ abhisiñcati, evañca vadeti ‘‘deva taṃ sabbepi khattiyagaṇā attānamārakkhatthaṃ iminā abhisekena abhisekikaṃ mahārājaṃ karonti, tvaṃ rājadhammesu ṭhito dhammena samena rajjaṃ kārehi, etesu khattiyagaṇesu tvaṃ puttasinehānukampāya sahitacitto, hitasamamettacitto ca bhava, rakkhāvaraṇaguttiyā tesaṃ rakkhito ca bhavāhī’’ti. Tato puna purohitopi porohiccaṭhānānurūpālaṅkārehi alaṅkatapaṭiyatto gaṅgodakapuṇṇaṃ rajatamayaṃ saṅkhaṃ ubhohi hatthehi sakkaccaṃ gahetvā tassa sīsopari ussāpetvā tena tassa muddhani abhisekodakaṃ abhisiñcati, evañca vadeti ‘‘deva taṃ sabbepi brāhmaṇagaṇā attānamārakkhatthaṃ iminā abhisekena abhisekikaṃ mahārājaṃ karonti, tvaṃ rājadhammesu ṭhito dhammena samena rajjaṃ kārehi, etesu brāhmaṇagaṇesu tvaṃ puttasinehānukampāya sahitacitto, hitasamamettacitto ca bhava, rakkhāvaraṇaguttiyā tesaṃ rakkhito ca bhavāhī’’ti. Tato puna seṭṭhipi seṭṭhiṭṭhānabhūsanabhūsito gaṅgodakapuṇṇaṃ ratanamayaṃ saṅkhaṃ ubhohi hatthehi sakkaccaṃ gahetvā tassa sīsopari ussāpetvā tena tassa muddhani abhisekodakaṃ abhisiñcati, evañca vadeti ‘‘deva taṃ sabbepi gahapatigaṇā attānamārakkhatthaṃ iminā abhisekena abhisekikaṃ mahārājaṃ karonti, tvaṃ rājadhammesu ṭhito dhammena samena rajjaṃ kārehi, etesu gahapatigaṇesu tvaṃ puttasinehānukampāya sahitacitto, hitasamamettacitto ca bhava, rakkhāvaraṇaguttiyā tesaṃ rakkhito ca bhavāhī’’ti. Te pana tassa evaṃ vadantā ‘‘sace tvaṃ amhākaṃ vacanānurūpaṃ rajjaṃ karissasi, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce karissasi, tava muddhā sattadhā phalatū’’ti evaṃ rañño abhisapanti viyāti daṭṭhabbanti. Vaḍḍhakīsūkarajātakādīhi cāyamattho vibhāvetabbo, abhisekopakaraṇānipi samantapāsādikādīsu (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.tatiyasaṅgītikathā) gahetabbānīti.
因为已摧破怨敌,所以不见怨敌——这是句子的关联。由于善性故无过失,因此说“善法以戒为基”等。这里的意思是:以善戒为基,生起无悔、喜悦、喜、轻安等法;以无悔等为因,生起的心乐受,他感受此受;以心乐受为因而生起的殊胜色法,触身之时,便生起身乐受。显示巴利原文
Yasmā nihatapaccāmitto, tasmā na samanupassatīti sambandho. Anavajjatā kusalabhāvenāti āha ‘‘kusalaṃ sīlapadaṭṭhānehī’’tiādi. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kusalasīlapadaṭṭhānā avippaṭisārapāmojjapītipassaddhidhammā, avippaṭisārādinimittañca uppannaṃ cetasikasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, cetasikasukhasamuṭṭhānehi ca paṇītarūpehi phuṭṭhasarīrassa uppannaṃ kāyikasukhanti.
根律仪论释显示巴利原文
Indriyasaṃvarakathāvaṇṇanā
213 由于共相有待于别相方能显了,此处所意指的别相亦未被其舍弃,故说“眼一词有时用于佛眼”等。因为别相词正是通过排除其他别相来阐明所意指的别相义,而所意指的别相是存在的,并非不存在。其余词句也是同样的道理。佛眼:即不与其他人共通的、唯佛陀所有的眼,也就是知根性、知随眠之智及知根胜劣之智。遍眼:以遍一切处、一切方式见故,称为眼,即一切知智。如彼譬喻:即如山顶之譬喻与法所成之殿堂——这是句子的关联。善慧遍眼者,汝当观察众生——这是其义。三道慧:即下三分道慧。在《六处品》注释中说:“法眼者,即下三道与三果”,而此处则是以道摄果而显示。法眼:即对于四谛法之眼。慧眼:即慧本身以见义而成为眼,也就是宿住随念智与漏尽智。天眼:即第二明。此处:即“以眼见色”这一句中。此:即眼一词。“以净色眼之称谓”:以此说明此处眼一词直接指眼净色,而间接地,依所依处之称谓,也可用于眼识,如说“诸床发出高声”。此处也是以带有附带说明的方式而说到其余,所以“其余词句亦”中的“亦”字,含义是“不取相”等词句也是同样的道理。种种染污、恼害为杂染,也就是烦恼本身即是杂染;离彼者即为无杂染,离彼性即不混杂,不混杂性即由显示巴利原文
213. Sāmaññassa visesāpekkhatāya idhādhippetopi viseso tena apariccatto eva hotīti āha ‘‘cakkhusaddo katthaci buddhacakkhumhi vattatī’’tiādi. Vijjamānameva hi abhidheyyabhāvena visesatthaṃ visesantaranivattanena visesasaddo vibhāveti, na avijjamānaṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ buddhānameva cakkhu dassananti buddhacakkhu, āsayānusayañāṇaṃ, indriyaparopariyattañāṇañca. Samantato sabbaso dassanaṭṭhena cakkhūti samantacakkhu, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Tathūpamanti pabbatamuddhūpamaṃ, dhammamayaṃ pāsādanti sambandho. Sumedha samantacakkhu tvaṃ janatamavekkhassūti attho. Ariyamaggattayapaññāti heṭṭhimāriyamaggattayapaññā. ‘‘Dhammacakkhu nāma heṭṭhimā tayo maggā, tīṇi ca phalānī’’ti saḷāyatanavaggaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.4.418) vuttaṃ, idha pana maggeheva phalāni saṅgahetvā dasseti. Catusaccasaṅkhāte dhamme cakkhūti hi dhammacakkhu. Paññāyeva dassanaṭṭhena cakkhūti paññācakkhu, pubbenivāsāsavakkhayañāṇaṃ. Dibbacakkhumhīti dutiyavijjāya. Idhāti ‘‘cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā’’ti imasmiṃ pāṭhe. Ayanti cakkhusaddo. ‘‘Pasādacakkhuvohārenā’’ti iminā idha cakkhusaddo cakkhupasādeyeva nippariyāyato vattati, pariyāyato pana nissayavohārena nissitassa vattabbato cakkhuviññāṇepi yathā ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’ti dasseti. Idhāpi sasambhārakathā avasiṭṭhāti katvā sesapadesupīti pi-saddaggahaṇaṃ, ‘‘na nimittaggāhī’’tiādipadesupīti attho. Vividhaṃ asanaṃ khedanaṃ byāseko, kileso eva byāseko, tena virahito tathā, virahitatā ca asammissatā, asammissabhāvo ca sampayogābhāvato parisuddhatāti āha ‘‘asammissaṃ parisuddha’’nti, kilesadukkhena avomissaṃ, tato ca suvisuddhanti attho. Sati ca suvisuddhe indriyasaṃvare nīvaraṇesu padhānabhūtapāpadhammavigamena adhicittānuyogo hatthagato eva hoti, tasmā adhicittasukhameva ‘‘abyāsekasukha’’nti vuccatīti dasseti ‘‘adhicittasukha’’nti iminā.
正念正知论释显示巴利原文
Satisampajaññakathāvaṇṇanā
214 以一切方式,或以殊胜、特别的方式而了知者,为正知;其状态即为正知,如此生起之智,对它的分别即是正知分别,在正知分别中。“行”——以此表示“前进”为“已前进”的状态名词。同样,“返回”为“已返回”,故说“回转”。在此,行走有回转后再行与不回转而行两种,而返回仅是回转本身,这二者是相互依存的动作而已。如何得以辨别?故说“于行时”等。前进:以迈步之势将身体向前移动。返回:从彼处再回转。后退:以退离之势使身体转向。座:即凳子等座位。面向先前部分:即面向床沿等先前部分。移动:匍匐而行。至后部分处:即移至床沿等后部分处。反向移动:反向匍匐而行。“此理亦然”:以此显示躺卧时的向前移动与反向移动。在站、坐、卧中,凡非以行走之势而身体向前移动,此为前进;向后移动则为返回,这是其相状。显示巴利原文
214. Samantato pakārehi, pakaṭṭhaṃ vā savisesaṃ jānātīti sampajāno, tassa bhāvo sampajaññaṃ, tathāpavattañāṇaṃ, tassa vibhajanaṃ sampajaññabhājanīyaṃ, tasmiṃ sampajaññabhājanīyamhi.‘‘Gamana’’nti iminā abhikkamanaṃ abhikkantanti bhāvasādhanamāha. Tathā paṭikkamanaṃ paṭikkantanti vuttaṃ ‘‘nivattana’’nti. Gamanañcettha nivattetvā, anivattetvā ca gamanaṃ, nivattanaṃ pana nivattimattameva, aññamaññamupādānakiriyāmattañcetaṃ dvayaṃ. Kathaṃ labbhatīti āha ‘‘gamane’’tiādi. Abhiharantoti gamanavasena kāyaṃ upanento. Paṭinivattentoti tato puna nivattento. Apanāmentoti apakkamanavasena pariṇāmento. Āsanassāti pīṭhakādiāsanassa. Purimaaṅgābhimukhoti aṭanikādipurimāvayavābhimukho. Saṃsarantoti saṃsappanto. Pacchimaaṅgapadesanti aṭanikādipacchimāyavappadesaṃ. Paccāsaṃsarantoti paṭiāsappanto. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā nipannasseva abhimukhaṃ saṃsappanapaṭiāsappanāni dasseti. Ṭhānanisajjāsayanesu hi yo gamanavidhuro kāyassa purato abhihāro, so abhikkamo. Pacchato apahāro paṭikkamoti lakkhaṇaṃ.
“正知”即是正知;凭藉正知而具有履行应行之事的习性,故称为“正知而行者”,因而说“以正知行一切事者”。或者,“正知而行者”即是以正知为行者,由此显示具备正知的习性便是正知而行者。“因为他……”等是对第二种解释的论证。而“正知”一词,意谓正知本身(正知的同义词)。正如阿阇梨阿难长老所说:“周遍地、正确地、平等地了知即是正知,那本身就是正知”(《分别论注》2.523)。这是与注释书不同的另一种方法——如同在超越等情况下生起不痴迷,正知的行为、作用即是正知行,具有此者即是正知而行者。显示巴利原文
Sampajānanaṃ sampajānaṃ, tena attanā kattabbakiccassa karaṇasīlo sampajānakārīti āha ‘‘sampajaññena sabbakiccakārī’’ti. ‘‘Sampajaññameva vā kārī’’ti iminā sampajānassa karaṇasīlo sampajānakārīti dasseti. ‘‘So hī’’tiādi dutiyavikappassa samatthanaṃ. ‘‘Sampajañña’’nti ca iminā sampajāna-saddassa sampajaññapariyāyatā vuttā. Tathā hi ācariyānandattherena vuttaṃ ‘‘samantato, sammā, samaṃ vā pajānanaṃ sampajānaṃ, tadeva sampajañña’’nti (vibha. mūlaṭī. 2.523) ayaṃ aṭṭhakathāto aparo nayo – yathā atikkantādīsu asammohaṃ uppādeti, tathā sampajānassa kāro karaṇaṃ sampajānakāro, so etassa atthīti sampajānakārīti.
伴随法上增长的意义而行,故称“有义”,即指超越等。对有义的正知,是“有义正知”。对适合、与自己相宜的正知,是“适合正知”。在前进等时,于乞食行境及其他处所转起时,对未舍离业处这一行境的正知,是“行境正知”。因为以总说或各别的方式,“行境”一词亦适用于这两种意义。在超越等时,不痴迷本身即是正知,是“不痴迷正知”。“唯随顺心”,即唯依于心、随顺心的支配而行,这是它的含义。把握,即是衡量、决断之后——审虑之义。见僧众,即包含了为布萨、自恣等目的而前往。以“等”字包含了遍作准备等。为了展开略说的意义,而说“或塔庙……”等。证得阿罗汉果,这是最为透彻的说明,因为修习止观也是比丘的增长。在那里,即在不净所缘上。有些人,指无畏山寺住者。从财利因缘,即从衣服等因缘。为何如此?故说“依止它……”等。显示巴利原文
Dhammato vaḍḍhisaṅkhātena atthena saha vattatīti sātthakaṃ, abhikkantādi, sātthakassa sampajānanaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ. Sappāyassa attano patirūpassa sampajānanaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Abhikkamādīsu bhikkhācāragocare, aññattha ca pavattesu avijahitakammaṭṭhānasaṅkhāte gocare sampajānanaṃ gocarasampajaññaṃ. Sāmaññaniddesena, hi ekasesanayena vā gocarasaddo tadatthadvayepi pavattati. Atikkamādīsu asammuyhanasaṅkhātaṃ asammohameva sampajaññaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ. Cittavasenevāti cittassa vaseneva, cittavasamanugatenevāti attho. Pariggahetvāti tulayitvā tīretvā, paṭisaṅkhāyāti attho. Saṅghadassaneneva uposathapavāraṇādiatthāya gamanaṃ saṅgahitaṃ. Ādisaddena kasiṇaparikammādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Saṅkhepato vuttaṃ tadatthameva vivarituṃ ‘‘cetiyaṃ vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Arahattaṃ pāpuṇātīti ukkaṭṭhaniddeso esa. Samathavipassanuppādanampi hi bhikkhuno vaḍḍhiyeva. Tatthāti asubhārammaṇe. Kecīti abhayagirivāsino. Āmisatoti cīvarādiāmisapaccayato. Kasmāti āha ‘‘taṃ nissāyā’’tiādi.
在那以有义正知而把握的意义中。然而,因为只有法上的增长才名为“义”,所以对于“有义”所意指的前往,可能有人会笼统地认为那一切也都是适合的,为了消除这种疑虑,而开始“且说见塔庙……”等。“大供养”,即盛大的供养,指众多人的供养等。如同彩绘造像一般,即如同以彩绘工艺制作的像,或如同以机关装置作出种种奇妙动作的像。在那里,即在那些集会中。他的,即比丘的。不平等观察,即依世俗的无知舍,对对象作不如理作意。关于此,说“以眼见色后,愚痴凡夫的舍生起……”等(《中部》3.308)。因与女人接触而有身触犯。因象等拥挤而有生命危险。因见不相应色等而有梵行障碍。正如“在十、十二由旬范围内,集会聚集……”等所说的那样。有大集会随从,即有时为闻法等目的,男女混杂的随从,这是就此而说。显示巴利原文
Tasminti sātthakasampajaññavasena pariggahitaatthe. Yasmā pana dhammato vaḍḍhiyeva attho nāma, tasmā yaṃ ‘‘sātthaka’’nti adhippetaṃ gamanaṃ, taṃ sabbampi sappāyamevāti siyā avisesena kassaci āsaṅkāti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘cetiyadassanaṃ tāvā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Mahāpūjāyāti mahatiyā pūjāya, bahūnaṃ pūjādivaseti vuttaṃ hoti. Cittakammarūpakānī viyāti cittakammakatapaṭimāyo viya, yantapayogena vā nānappakāravicittakiriyā paṭimāyo viya. Tatrāti tāsu parisāsu. Assāti bhikkhuno. Asamapekkhanaṃ nāma gehassitaaññāṇupekkhāvasena ārammaṇassa ayoniso gahaṇaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā uppajjati upekkhā bālassa mūḷhassa puthujjanassā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 3.308) mātugāmasamphassavasena kāyasaṃsaggāpatti. Hatthiādisammaddena jīvitantarāyo. Visabhāgarūpadassanādinā brahmacariyantarāyo. ‘‘Dasadvādasayojanantare parisā sannipatantī’’tiādinā vuttappakāreneva. Mahāparisaparivārānanti kadāci dhammassavanādiatthāya itthipurisasammissaparivāre sandhāya vuttaṃ.
为了说明其义,即说明不净见的“有义性”之义。自出家之日起,以应回答的方式随顺比丘们的言谈,是惯常的;因此,以不回答的方式而不随顺的言谈,对他而言便是第二种,故说“两种话未曾说过”。所谓“两种话”,即随顺的话与不随顺的话。其中,只有随顺的话曾说过,第二种则未曾说过。因此,由于易受教,他未曾给予不随顺的回答,这就是其义。显示巴利原文
Tadatthadīpanatthanti asubhadassanassa sātthakabhāvasaṅkhātassa atthassa dīpanatthaṃ. Pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya paṭivacanadānavasena bhikkhūnaṃ anuvattanakathā āciṇṇā, tasmā paṭivacanassa adānavasena ananuvattanakathā tassa dutiyā nāma hotīti āha ‘‘dve kathā nāma na kathitapubbā’’ti. Dve kathāti hi vacanakaraṇākaraṇakathā. Tattha vacanakaraṇakathāyeva kathitapubbā, dutiyā na kathitapubbā. Tasmā subbacattā paṭivacanamadāsīti attho.
“如是”,以此(指前述内容)。他回顾了“然而,如果塔庙有大供养……”等前面所说的所有情形,而不只是“男子对女人不净……”等。已把握的有义与适合——他由此成为已把握有义与适合者,这显示了他次第地把握正知。所修习的业处是所说瑜伽行现起之处,故为业处;它本身就是修行的境界,故为行境,因此说“称为业处的行境”。学习之后,即为了令取相生起,通过成就学习善巧而进行了学习。在乞食行境中,即于称为乞食的行境中,以此显示“行境”一词适用于业处与乞食二者。显示巴利原文
Evanti iminā. ‘‘Sace pana cetiyassa mahāpūjāyā’’tiādikaṃ sabbampi vuttappakāraṃ paccāmasati, na ‘‘purisassa mātugāmāsubha’’ntiādikameva. Pariggahitaṃ sātthakaṃ, sappāyañca yena so pariggahitasātthakasappāyo, tassa, tena yathānupubbikaṃ sampajaññapariggahaṇaṃ dasseti. Vuccamānayogakammassa pavattiṭṭhānatāya bhāvanāya ārammaṇaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ, tadeva bhāvanāya visayabhāvato gocaranti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ gocara’’nti. Uggahetvāti yathā uggahanimittaṃ uppajjati, evaṃ uggahakosallassa sampādanavasena uggahaṇaṃ katvā. Bhikkhācāragocareti bhikkhācārasaṅkhāte gocare, anena kammaṭṭhāne, bhikkhācāre ca gocarasaddoti dasseti.
“在此”,指于教法中。“持去”,即令业处相续转起而引导,乃至乞食归来都致力于此,这是它的含义。“不持回”,指从受用饮食后直至前往日间住处,不将业处带回。“在那里”,指在那四种比丘之中。“以障碍”,即以诸盖。“何况”,指清晨(即最初之时)。“身体工作”,指洗脸等身体护理。“两三次结跏趺坐”,指两三次的跏趺坐姿。此处,“结跏趺坐”即两腿交结的坐姿。“暖气”,指两三次的取暖。“致力于业处后”,指致力于当日根本的业处之后。“唯以业处为首”,即是唯以业处为门面,未曾舍离业处,这是所说义。以此显示,如“即使倒下而无知觉……”等(《长部注》1.214;《中部注》1.209;《相应部注》3.5.168;《分别论注》523)将予说明的业处,或者如所持守的那样未曾舍离。显示巴利原文
Idhāti sāsane. Haratīti kammaṭṭhānaṃ pavattanavasena neti, yāva piṇḍapātapaṭikkamā anuyuñjatīti attho. Na paccāharatīti āhārūpayogato yāva divāṭhānupasaṅkamanā kammaṭṭhānaṃ na paṭineti. Tatthāti tesu catūsu bhikkhūsu. Āvaraṇīyehīti nīvaraṇehi. Pagevāti pātoyeva . Sarīraparikammanti mukhadhovanādisarīrapaṭijagganaṃ. Dve tayo pallaṅketi dve tayo nisajjāvāre. Ūrubaddhāsanañhettha pallaṅko. Usumanti dve tīṇi uṇhāpanāni sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitvāti tadahe mūlabhūtaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitvā. Kammaṭṭhānasīsenevāti kammaṭṭhānamukheneva, kammaṭṭhānamavijahanto evāti vuttaṃ hoti, tena ‘‘patopi acetano’’tiādinā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.214; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.209; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.168; vibha. aṭṭha. 523) vakkhamānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ, yathāparihariyamānaṃ vā avijahitvāti dasseti.
“Gantvā”意为到达后。若是佛随念业处,其本身即是表达恭敬的行为。若是其他业处,为显示如同未作恭敬行为一般,故说“如果”等语。以非其境之故,将其搁置。以“若是大塔”这段话,显示业处行者对根本业处的作意远离戏论。然而,依其他方式,无论如何都应礼敬。“Tatheva”即指三次。由于认为舍利塔比受用塔更为重要,故依先时的动线而说“礼敬塔后”。正如注释书中所说:“若树枝妨碍塔,应除去”,此为阿阇梨之见;但依“即使先到达菩提场”之说,若从塔院前往托钵途中遇到菩提场,亦应礼敬,故说“礼敬塔后”是按路径顺序的先时动作之说,而非按重要性的顺序。如此,则先到达菩提场者,应礼敬菩提树后再礼敬塔;仅遇到其中之一者,即礼敬彼;两者皆未遇到者,则不礼敬——此义甚易明了。此乃显示在托钵途中,于所遇之处应作的途中仪轨,而非固定仪轨。因彼先前已作固定仪轨。故说“清晨先作塔院与菩提场之义务后”等。通过“如对佛陀世尊亲前一般,示现恭敬”此语,显示仅由忆念佛陀功德,即于菩提树等受用塔处,亦得成就恭敬。所谓“已收摄之处”,乃依与显示巴利原文
Gantvāti pāpuṇitvā. Buddhānussatikammaṭṭhānaṃ ce, tadeva nipaccakārasādhanaṃ. Aññañce, anipaccakārakaraṇamiva hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘sace’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atabbisayena taṃ ṭhapetvā.‘‘Mahantaṃ cetiyaṃ ce’’tiādinā kammaṭṭhānikassa mūlakammaṭṭhānamanasikārassa papañcābhāvadassanaṃ. Aññena pana tathāpi aññathāpi vanditabbameva. Tathevāti tikkhattumeva. Paribhogacetiyato sārīrikacetiyaṃ garutaranti katvā ‘‘cetiyaṃ vanditvā’’ti pubbakālakiriyāvasena vuttaṃ. Yathāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘cetiyaṃ bādhayamānā bodhisākhā haritabbā’’ti, (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 4.128; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.275; vibha. aṭṭha. 809) ayaṃ ācariyassa mati, ‘‘bodhiyaṅgaṇaṃ pattenāpī’’ti pana vacanato yadi cetiyaṅgaṇato gate bhikkhācāramagge bodhiyaṅgaṇaṃ bhaveyya, sāpi vanditabbāti maggānukkameneva ‘‘cetiyaṃ vanditvā’’ti pubbakālakiriyāvacanaṃ, na tu garukātabbatānukkamena. Evañhi sati bodhiyaṅgaṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ pattenāpi bodhiṃ vanditvā cetiyaṃ vanditabbaṃ, ekameva pattenāpi tadeva vanditabbaṃ, tadubhayampi appattena na vanditabbanti ayamattho suviññāto hoti. Bhikkhācāragatamaggena hi pattaṭṭhāne kattabbaantarāvattadassanametaṃ, na pana dhuvavattadassanaṃ. Pubbe hesa katavattoyeva. Tenāha ‘‘pageva cetiyaṅgaṇabodhiyaṅgaṇavattaṃ katvā’’tiādi. Buddhaguṇānussaraṇavaseneva bodhiādiparibhogacetiyepi nipaccakaraṇaṃ upapannanti dasseti ‘‘buddhassa bhagavato sammukhā viya nipaccakāraṃ dassetvā’’ti iminā. Paṭisāmitaṭṭhānanti sopānamūlabhāvasāmaññena vuttaṃ, buddhārammaṇapītivisayabhūtacetiyaṅgaṇabodhiyaṅgaṇato bāhiraṭṭhānaṃ patvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“在村落附近”意指在村的近处范围。关联:那时他们或问问题,或欲听闻佛法。“为摄受众人”意指思惟“若我不说法,谁将为这些人说法?”,以法护念,为摄受大众故。为支持注释书阿阇梨之说,而说“盖无有脱离业处之法谈”。因此,“因此”的关联是:因为注释书阿阇梨说“法谈是必须作的”,或因为无有脱离业处之法谈,故在说法之后。然而,阿阇梨阿难陀长老将“因此”与“他们说必须说”关联。所谓“即以业处为首”,意指不舍离自己所持的业处,而说与之相应的法谈;第二句亦同此理。在“作随喜后”中,亦适用“即以业处为首”的规则。“在那里”即指从村落出来之处。显示巴利原文
Gāmasamīpeti gāmūpacāre. Tāva pañhaṃ vā pucchanti, dhammaṃ vā sotukāmā hontīti sambandho. Janasaṅgahatthanti ‘‘mayi akathente etesaṃ ko kathessatī’’ti dhammānuggahena mahājanassa saṅgahaṇatthaṃ. Aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ vacanaṃ samatthetuṃ ‘‘dhammakathā hi kammaṭṭhānavinimuttā nāma natthī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā ‘‘dhammakathā nāma kātabbāyevā’’ti aṭṭhakathācariyā vadanti, yasmā vā dhammakathā kammaṭṭhānavinimuttā nāma natthi, tasmā dhammakathaṃ kathetvāti sambandho. Ācariyānandattherena (vibha. mūlaṭī. 523) pana ‘‘tasmā’’ti etassa ‘‘kathetabbāyevāti vadantī’’ti etena sambandho vutto. Kammaṭṭhānasīsenevāti attanā parihariyamānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ avijahanavasena, tadanuguṇaṃyeva dhammakathaṃ kathetvāti attho, dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Anumodanaṃ katvāti etthāpi ‘‘kammaṭṭhānasīsenevā’’ti adhikāro. Tatthāti gāmato nikkhamanaṭṭhāneyeva.
通过“古昔比丘”等语,以显示古昔所行,令所述之义坚固。所谓“仅以相遇为限”,即不作“熟识、未熟识”等分别,唯以相遇之边际,仅以相逢而论。“以威力”指以护念之力。“于怖畏”指敌国入侵等怖畏。“于饥馑”指于饥荒时。显示巴利原文
‘‘Porāṇakabhikkhū’’tiādinā porāṇakāciṇṇadassanena yathāvuttamatthaṃ daḷhaṃ karoti. Sampattaparicchedenevāti ‘‘paricito aparicito’’tiādivibhāgaṃ akatvā sampattakoṭiyā eva, samāgamamattenevāti attho. Ānubhāvenāti anuggahabalena. Bhayeti paracakkādibhaye. Chātaketi dubbhikkhe.
“于后夜亦以坐禅与经行度过”等语,即如上所述的方式。“对于正在作者”意为“对于正在做者”,此为不尊重格。所谓“业生火”,是指消化之火。燃烧,即产生热量。由此,它执取所执受,汗液便流出。由饥饿与疲劳令身体困乏,无法得定,因此业处不能进入心路。非所执受,指饭等食物;所执受,指胃膜。如果腹中无饭等食物,业生火便生起,执取胃膜,令人说出“我饿了,给我食物”;在进食时,它便放开胃膜而执取食物,尔后众生得一心,因此注释书中说“业生火如影护鬼”。在“他清晨”的文句中,含有“因此”的余义。“牛群”,指诸牛或牛群,义为牛从栏中外出觅食的时分。依与此相反的理则,则放开所执受而执取非所执受。“于食间”,指食事之间,也就是尚未进食之时,因此说“以业处为首而受用食物”。“于其余处”,指未取用粥之处。“从此”,指从进食之时。“Poṅkhānupoṅkhaṃ”一语,是显示业处无间断地现前,意为次第相续;正如射箭时箭箭相衔,毫无间隔,此业处现前也是如此。通过“如这些”一语,显示如此作意业处的利益。“座”,指坐处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pacchimayāmepi nisajjācaṅkamehi vītināmetvā’’tiādinā vuttappakāraṃ. Karontassāti karamānasseva, anādare cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Kammajatejoti gahaṇiṃ sandhāyāha. Pajjalatīti uṇhabhāvaṃ janeti. Tatoyeva upādinnakaṃ gaṇhāti, sedā muccanti. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ vīthiṃ nārohati khudāparissamena kilantakāyassa samādhānābhāvato. Anupādinnaṃ odanādivatthu. Upādinnaṃ udarapaṭalaṃ. Antokucchiyañhi odanādivatthusmiṃ asati kammajatejo uṭṭhahitvā udarapaṭalaṃ gaṇhāti, ‘‘chātosmi, āhāraṃ me dethā’’ti vadāpeti, bhuttakāle udarapaṭalaṃ muñcitvā vatthuṃ gaṇhāti, atha satto ekaggo hoti, yato ‘‘chāyārakkhaso viya kammajatejo’’ti aṭṭhakathāsu vutto. So pagevāti ettha ‘‘tasmā’’ti seso. Gorūpānanti gunnaṃ, gosamūhānaṃ vā, vajato gocaratthāya nikkhamanavelāyamevāti attho. Vuttaviparītanayena upādinnakaṃ muñcitvā anupādinnakaṃ gaṇhāti. Antarābhatteti bhattassa antare, yāva bhattaṃ na bhuñjati, tāvāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānasīsena āhārañca paribhuñjitvā’’ti. Avasesaṭṭhāneti yāguyā aggahitaṭṭhāne. Tatoti bhuñjanato. Poṅkhānupoṅkhanti kammaṭṭhānānupaṭṭhānassa anavacchedadassanametaṃ, uttaruttarinti attho, yathā poṅkhānupoṅkhaṃ pavattāya sarapaṭipāṭiyā anavacchedo, evametassāpi kammaṭṭhānupaṭṭhānassāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Edisā cā’’tiādinā tathā kammaṭṭhānamanasikārassāpi sātthakabhāvaṃ dasseti. Āsananti nisajjāsanaṃ.
“舍弃责任者”,是指对于修习不专精勤修、未激发精进的人。由于未能圆满履行诸义务,从而破坏了一切义务。具足五种心荒芜与缠缚的心,即是与五类心荒芜及缠缚相应的心。正如《中部·心荒芜经》中所说:显示巴利原文
Nikkhittadhuroti bhāvanānuyoge anukkhittadhuro anāraddhavīriyo. Vattapaṭipattiyā aparipūraṇena sabbavattāni bhinditvā. Pañcavidhacetokhīlavinibandhacittoti pañcavidhena cetokhīlena, vinibandhena ca sampayuttacitto. Vuttañhi majjhimāgame cetokhīlasutte –
“哪五种心荒芜尚未断除呢?诸比丘,在此法中,有比丘于导师有疑,于法有疑,于僧有疑,于学处有疑,于同梵行者心生忿怒。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamassa pañca cetokhīlā appahīnā honti? Idha bhikkhave bhikkhu satthari kaṅkhati, dhamme kaṅkhati, saṅghe kaṅkhati, sikkhāya kaṅkhati, sabrahmacārīsu kupito hotī’’ti, (ma. ni. 1.185)
他心中哪五种心缚尚未断除?在此,诸比丘,比丘于诸欲未离贪,于身未离贪,于色未离贪,随其所欲饱食之后,便耽著于卧乐、倚乐、睡眠乐而住,并心系某一众天而修梵行。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamassa pañca cetaso vinibandhā asamucchinnā honti? Idha bhikkhave bhikkhu kāme avītarāgo hoti, kāye avītarāgo hoti, rūpe avītarāgo hoti, yāvadatthaṃ udarāvadehakaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṃ passasukhaṃ middhasukhaṃ anuyutto viharati, aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṃ caratī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.186). Ca –
详细说明。然而,阿阇梨(长部义注1.215)仅抽取了五心缚中修习心性的一部分予以显示。心的残桩之性即是心桩(cetokhīla);束缚住心之后,犹如将其攥在拳中一般的执持状态,即是心缚(cetaso vinibandho)。在此,第一种(心缚)由疑之过失而生,第二种由贪而生,这便是它们的差别。“行”即游历、经历。因无业处之故,为空虚。显示巴利原文
Vitthāro . Ācariyena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.215) pana pañcavidhacetovinibandhacittabhāvoyeva padekadesamulliṅgetvā dassito. Cittassa kacavarakhāṇukabhāvo hi cetokhīlo, cittaṃ bandhitvā muṭṭhiyaṃ viya katvā gaṇhanabhāvo cetaso vinibandho. Paṭhamo cettha vicikicchādosavasena, dutiyo lobhavasenāti ayametesaṃ viseso. Caritvāti vicaritvā. Kammaṭṭhānavirahavasena tuccho.
乞食而去,以及归来,皆是与修习相应而行,因此称为“往还”,即此种行仪,依于此而言。“爱己”是指希求自己的利益与安乐,意思是“有法欲”。因为法即是利益,而安乐也是以法为缘。或者,在智者看来,法无异于自己,且属于自身的一部分,所以法被称为“我”,因爱乐此法,故为“爱己”。而现在也可读作“欲求利益”,以利益作为同义词,其意为:欲求与法相应的利益,或者欲求法成为利益。“负债者”指被债务所压迫的人。其余成对之词也是如此。“于此”即在此教法之中。显示巴利原文
Bhāvanāsahitameva bhikkhāya gataṃ, paccāgatañca yassāti gatapaccāgatikaṃ, tadeva vattaṃ, tassa vasena. Attakāmāti attano hitasukhamicchantā, dhammacchandavantoti attho. Dhammo hi hitaṃ, sukhañca tannimittakanti. Atha vā viññūnaṃ attato nibbisesattā, attabhāvapariyāpannattā ca dhammo attā nāma, taṃ kāmenti icchantīti attakāmā. Adhunā pana atthakāmāti hitavācakena atthasaddena pāṭho dissati, dhammasaññuttaṃ hitamicchantā, hitabhūtaṃ vā dhammamicchantāti tassattho. Iṇaṭṭāti iṇena pīḷitā. Tathā sesapadadvayepi. Etthāti sāsane.
“乌萨跋”即二十杖,“伽乌塔”即八十乌萨跋。“以彼想”,即以此石想,由业处之作意而了知“已至此地”而行,这是意趣所在。“漏”指烦恼。以离业处之心举足者,因不欲住于彼处而立;后足则因不欲越过前足处而立。“流”指已生起烦恼的比丘。“此”指后足。“如此”指他人的了知。“即于彼处”,即在立足之处。这便是道理:于立足处所说的“此比丘”等之理,于坐时也同此理。后来者也因断食的怖畏而策励如理作意,这也应视为属于他人了知所摄。“唯于初足”,即唯于最初以离业处之心举足之处。“去”即是行。如“住于廊下的大富沙天长老”等,即是就此所说。这是为了消除“此比丘以前是否曾这样行”的疑惑。显示巴利原文
Usabhaṃ nāma vīsati yaṭṭhiyo, gāvutaṃ nāma asīti usabhā. Tāya saññāyāti tādisāya pāsāṇasaññāya, kammaṭṭhānamanasikārena ‘‘ettakaṃ ṭhānamāgatā’’ti jānantā gacchantīti adhippāyo. Nanti kilesaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānavippayuttacittena pāduddhāraṇamakatthukāmato tiṭṭhati, pacchāgato pana ṭhitimanatikkamitukāmato. Soti uppannakileso bhikkhu. Ayanti pacchāgato . Etanti parassa jānanaṃ. Tatthevāti patiṭṭhitaṭṭhāneyeva. Soyeva nayoti ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādikā yo patiṭṭhāne vutto, so eva nisajjāyapi nayo. Pacchato āgacchantānaṃ chinnabhattabhāvabhayenāpi yonisomanasikāraṃ paribrūhetīti idampi parassa jānaneneva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Purimapādeyevāti paṭhamaṃ kammaṭṭhānavippayuttacittena uddharitapādavaḷañjeyeva. Etīti gacchati. ‘‘Ālindakavāsī mahāphussadevatthero viyā’’tiādinā aṭṭhāneyevetaṃ kathitaṃ. ‘‘Kvāyaṃ evaṃ paṭipannapubbo’’ti āsaṅkaṃ nivatteti.
“踩踏(maddantā)”即在作谷处踩踏稻穗等。“他的(assa)”即长老的,此词通观两者。“于证阿罗汉当日之经行道端(assa arahattappattadivase caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ)”等。因欲得证而散乱,系缚后唯自认方才宣告。显示巴利原文
Maddantāti dhaññakaraṇaṭṭhāne sālisīsādīni maddantā. Assāti therassa, ubhayāpekkhavacanametaṃ. Assa arahattappattadivase caṅkamanakoṭiyanti ca . Adhigamappicchatāya vikkhepaṃ katvā, nibandhitvā ca paṭijānitvāyeva ārocesi.
“首先(paṭhamaṃ tāva)”乃为文辞庄严之方便语。“大精进(mahāpadhāna)”即世尊之难行行,世间依怙为我等利益所行六年难行行,“我当随力供养”即此义。因为行道供养实是更受赞叹之师供养,非如物资供养。“唯立与经行(ṭhānacaṅkamameva)”乃依应受持之威仪而说,非拒绝于食时等必坐。因为由“如此(eva)”之词,遮遣余处之坐与卧。于“离(业处心)举足时退回”意指唯将俱业处心举足之足再放置。说“至村落附近”后,以“母牛乎”等释其义。膝间(kacchakantarato)即大腿间,于大腿说为阴囊。水掬(udakagaṇḍūsaṃ)即作水掏器。三日之满月即第三日,意即问“是黑月第十五日,或白月第五日、第八日”等之日。因不告白不可作故而告白。如是一说:“诸比丘!我许一切皆取半月算”等(大品156)。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamaṃ tāvāti padasobhanatthaṃ pariyāyavacanaṃ. Mahāpadhānanti bhagavato dukkaracariyaṃ, amhākaṃ atthāya lokanāthena chabbassāni kataṃ dukkaracariyaṃ ‘‘evāhaṃ yathābalaṃ pūjessāmī’’ti attho. Paṭipattipūjāyeva hi pasatthatarā satthupūjā, na tathā āmisapūjā. Ṭhānacaṅkamamevāti adhiṭṭhātabbairiyāpathavasena vuttaṃ, na bhojanakālādīsu avassaṃ kattabbanisajjāya paṭikkhepavasena. Evasaddena hi itarāya nisajjāya, sayanassa ca nivattanaṃ karoti. Vippayuttena uddhaṭe paṭinivattentoti sampayuttena uddharitapādeyeva puna ṭhapanaṃ sandhāyāha. ‘‘Gāmasamīpaṃ gantvā’’ti vatvā tadatthaṃ vivarati ‘‘gāvī nū’’tiādinā. Kacchakantaratoti upakacchantarato, upakacche laggitakamaṇḍalutoti vuttaṃ hoti. Udakagaṇḍūsanti udakāvagaṇḍakārakaṃ. Katinaṃ tithīnaṃ pūraṇī katimī, ‘‘pañcamī nu kho pakkhassa, aṭṭhamī’’tiādinā divasaṃ vā pucchitoti attho. Anārocanassa akattabbattā āroceti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave sabbeheva pakkhagaṇanaṃ uggahetu’’ntiādi (mahāva. 156).
如“吞水后告白”所说之理。“于彼处”即村门之处。“吐水”即吐水之处。“于他们”即于众人之中。“具眼”因具足智眼故。“如是”即善加清理塔院等处。“清净自恣”即以漏尽之体而作自恣。显示巴利原文
‘‘Udakaṃ gilitvā ārocetī’’ti vuttanayena.Tatthāti gāmadvāre. Niṭṭhubhananti udakaniṭṭhubhanaṭṭhānaṃ. Tesūti manussesu. Ñāṇacakkhusampannattā cakkhumā.Īdisoti susammaṭṭhacetiyaṅgaṇādiko. Visuddhipavāraṇanti khīṇāsavabhāvena pavāraṇaṃ.
进入街道后,不应东张西望,而应先辨明街道,故说“辨明街道后”。为显示“以庄严的行进与返回”等(律藏·波罗夷 432)所说的行走威仪,而说“于此”等。“因为事实上,并没有所谓快速行走的托钵头陀支”,以此表明快速行走如同受欲行为一般,是不恰当的。水车即运水之车,当它行至不平坦处时,便只能完全静止不动。随顺即随顺于施食。关于“于食起厌恶想”等中当说之事,将在后面说明。如同车轴的涂油、伤口的敷药、食子肉这三种譬喻,是属于那样的受用方式。具足八支,即由“仅为存续此身、维持此身”等(中部·1.23; 2.24, 387; 相应部·4.120; 增支部·6.58; 5.9; 分别论·518; 大义释·206)所说的八支而成就。“不为嬉戏”等则是为了显示遮止。食后疲劳,即因食物而生的疲劳。食前等是依白昼而说;初夜等是依夜晚而说。显示巴利原文
Vīthiṃ otaritvā ito cito ca anoloketvā paṭhamameva vīthiyo sallakkhetabbāti āha ‘‘vīthiyo sallakkhetvā’’ti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘pāsādikena abhikkantena paṭikkantenā’’tiādi (pārā. 432). Taṃ gamanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha cā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Na hi javena piṇḍapātiyadhutaṅgaṃ nāma kiñci atthī’’ti iminā javena gamane loluppacāritā viya asāruppataṃ dasseti. Udakasakaṭanti udakasārasakaṭaṃ. Tañhi visamabhūmibhāgappattaṃ niccalameva kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Tadanurūpanti bhikkhādānānurūpaṃ. ‘‘Āhāre paṭikūlasaññaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āgamissati. Rathassa akkhānaṃ telena abbhañjanaṃ, vaṇassa lepanaṃ, puttamaṃsassa khādanañca tidhā upamā yassa āharaṇassāti tathā. Aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatanti ‘‘yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā, yāpanāyā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.23; 2.24, 387; saṃ. ni. 4.120; a. ni. 6.58; 5.9; vibha. 518; mahāni. 206) vuttehi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgataṃ katvā. ‘‘Neva davāyā’’tiādi pana paṭikkhepamattadassanaṃ. Bhattakilamathanti bhattavasena uppannakilamathaṃ. Purebhattādi divāvasena vuttaṃ. Purimayāmādi rattivasena.
为显明在往返中运用业处的含义,故说“称为带去与带回”。“如果具备亲依止”这一句,在“成为天子”等所有情形中都应结合理解。其中,缘觉菩提的亲依止成就,是二阿僧祇又十万劫的相应福德与智慧资粮的积累;声闻菩提中,上首弟子的亲依止成就为一阿僧祇又十万劫,大弟子的(长老偈注·2. 旺吉萨长老偈注释广说)仅为十万劫,其余者则是在过去生中,依离系亲依止之力,无有时间限定地生起决择分善法。“譬如”等,是显示在那些各自地位中被置于第一的诸位长老的亲眼见证。其中,长老跋希耶·达鲁吉利耶,因在跋希耶地区出生与成长而被称为跋希耶,因穿着木片衣而被称为达鲁吉利耶,乃是具此名称的长老。这位尊者——显示巴利原文
Gatapaccāgatesu kammaṭṭhānassa haraṇaṃ vattanti atthaṃ dassento ‘‘haraṇapaccāharaṇasaṅkhāta’’nti āha. ‘‘Yadi upanissayasampanno hotī’’ti idaṃ ‘‘devaputto hutvā’’tiādīsupi sabbattha sambajjhitabbaṃ. Tattha paccekabodhiyā upanissayasampadā kappānaṃ dve asaṅkhyeyyāni, satasahassañca tajjā puññañāṇasambhārasambharaṇaṃ, sāvakabodhiyā aggasāvakānaṃ ekamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ, kappasatasahassañca, mahāsāvakānaṃ (theragā. aṭṭha. 2.vaṅgīsattheragāthāvaṇṇanā vitthāro) kappasatasahassameva, itaresaṃ pana atītāsu jātīsu vivaṭṭupanissayavasena kālaniyamamantarena nibbattitaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyakusalaṃ. ‘‘Seyyathāpī’’tiādinā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhānantare etadaggaṭṭhapitānaṃ therānaṃ sakkhidassanaṃ. Tattha thero bāhiyo dārucīriyoti bāhiyavisaye sañjātasaṃvaḍḍhatāya bāhiyo, dārucīrapariharaṇato dārucīriyoti ca samaññito thero. So hāyasmā –
因此,跋希耶,你应当这样学:‘于所见,唯是所见;于所闻、所觉、所知,唯是所知。’跋希耶,你应当这样学。跋希耶,当你于所见唯是所见,于所闻、所觉、所知唯是所知时,你便不依于彼。当你不在彼处时,跋希耶,你便不在此世、不在彼世、不在两者之间——这就是苦的尽头。(自说经·10)显示巴利原文
‘‘Tasmā tiha te bāhiya evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ ‘diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ bhavissati, sute, mute, viññāte viññātamattaṃ bhavissatī’ti, evañhi te bāhiya sikkhitabbaṃ. Yato kho te bāhiya diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ bhavissati, sute, mute, viññāte viññātamattaṃ bhavissati, tato tvaṃ bāhiya na tena. Yato tvaṃ bāhiya na tena, tato bāhiya na tattha. Yato tvaṃ bāhiya na tattha, tato tvaṃ bāhiya nevidha na huraṃ na ubhayamantarena, esevanto dukkhassā’ti’’ (udā. 10).
仅以此份量的说法,他便证得阿拉汉。同样,显示舍利弗长老等大智慧等的经文句,也应详细说明。尤其是《增支部》中“第一品”的经文句(增支部·1.188),达到顶点,即达到终极、达到究竟,于一切方面圆满。显示巴利原文
Ettakāya desanāya arahattaṃ sacchākāsi. Evaṃ sāriputtattherādīnampi mahāpaññatādidīpanāni suttapadāni vitthārato vattabbāni. Visesato pana aṅguttarāgame etadaggasuttapadāni (a. ni. 1.188) sikhāpattanti koṭippattaṃ niṭṭhānappattaṃ sabbathā paripuṇṇato.
“Tanti”即不迷惑。“Evanti”应理解为现在所说的方式。通过“自我在前进”显示依邪见执取,通过“我在前进”显示依慢执取,而由于没有渴爱,此两者则不会生起,故也依于渴爱执取——以此三种妄想,显示愚痴凡夫在前进中的迷惑。说了“如此不迷惑者”之后,为了显示通过界分别而成就的那种不迷惑,而说“我前进”等。心生风界,即由那前进之心所生的风界,或与彼心俱生的风界。表色即身表。正在产生时生起,因为它是彼的变化状态。“Itīti”,因此,由于生起。依心行风界之扩散,即依由行作所成、心生风界的动摇行相所假立的身表。“Tassāti”,指骨聚。“Abhikkamatoti”,指正在前进者。“Omattāti”,低劣的、卑下的程度。依风界与火界,其余二界。显示巴利原文
Tanti asammuyhanaṃ. Evanti idāni vuccamānākārena veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Attā abhikkamatī’’ti iminā diṭṭhigāhavasena, ‘‘ahaṃ abhikkamāmī’’ti iminā mānagāhavasena, tadubhayassa pana vinā taṇhāya appavattanato taṇhāgāhavasenāti tīhipi maññanāhi andhabālaputhujjanassa abhikkame sammuyhanaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Tathā asammuyhanto’’ti vatvā tadeva asammuyhanaṃ yena ghanavinibbhogena hoti, taṃ dassento ‘‘abhikkamāmī’’tiādimāha. Cittasamuṭṭhānavāyodhātūti teneva abhikkamanacittena samuṭṭhānā, taṃcittasamuṭṭhānikā vā vāyodhātu. Viññattinti kāyaviññattiṃ. Janayamānā uppajjati tassā vikārabhāvato. Itīti tasmā uppajjanato. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravasenāti kiriyamayacittasamuṭṭhānavāyodhātuyā vicalanākārasaṅkhātakāyaviññattivasena. Tassāti aṭṭhisaṅghāṭassa. Abhikkamatoti abhikkamantassa. Omattāti avamattā lāmakappamāṇā. Vāyodhātutejodhātuvasena itarā dve dhātuyo.
这里的意思是:在此,随顺于风界的火界是“提起”的缘。火界有提起的趋向,因此在提起时,它便成为风界的随顺者。由此,这两界在此处因能力而强盛,其余诸界则因无此情形而弱劣。又,随顺于火界的风界是“移前”与“侧移”的缘。风界具有作用的趋向,在移前与侧移中有殊胜的运作,因此在那里,它成为火界的随顺者。由此,这两界在此处因能力而强盛,其余诸界则因无此情形而弱劣——这是以“同样地在移前与侧移中”一句来显示。虽然这里也有随顺者与被随顺者的差别,但仅是就火界与风界的体性而说“同样地”。因为在第一种方式中,火界是随顺者,风界是被随顺者;在第二种方式中,风界是随顺者,火界是被随顺者。其中,从踏足处将脚提起,名为“提起”;越过立足处向前移动,名为“移前”。为了避开树桩等,或为了避开已安立之脚的碰撞而向侧方移动,名为“侧移”;或者,在脚安立之前的移动为“移前”,安立之后的移动为“侧移”,这是它们的差别。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmā cettha vāyodhātuyā anugatā tejodhātu uddharaṇassa paccayo. Uddharaṇagatikā hi tejodhātu, tena tassā uddharaṇe vāyodhātuyā anugatabhāvo hoti, tasmā imāsaṃ dvinnamettha sāmatthiyato adhimattatā, tathā abhāvato pana itarāsaṃ omattatāti. Yasmā pana tejodhātuyā anugatā vāyodhātu atiharaṇavītiharaṇānaṃ paccayo. Kiriyagatikāya hi vāyodhātuyā atiharaṇavītiharaṇesu sātisayo byāpāro, tena tassā tattha tejodhātuyā anugatabhāvo hoti, tasmā imāsaṃ dvinnamettha sāmatthiyato adhimattatā, itarāsañca tadabhāvato omattatāti dasseti ‘‘tathā atiharaṇavītiharaṇesū’’ti iminā. Satipi cettha anugamakānugantabbatāvisese tejodhātuvāyodhātubhāvamattaṃ sandhāya tathāsaddaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Paṭhame hi naye tejodhātuyā anugamakatā, vāyodhātuyā anugantabbatā, dutiye pana vāyodhātuyā anugamakatā, tejodhātuyā anugantabbatāti. Tattha akkantaṭṭhānato pādassa ukkhipanaṃ uddharaṇaṃ, ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ atikkamitvā purato haraṇaṃ atiharaṇaṃ. Khāṇuādipariharaṇatthaṃ, patiṭṭhitapādaghaṭṭanāpariharaṇatthaṃ vā passena haraṇaṃ vītiharaṇaṃ, yāva patiṭṭhitapādo, tāva haraṇaṃ atiharaṇaṃ, tato paraṃ haraṇaṃ vītiharaṇanti vā ayametesaṃ viseso.
因为随顺于地界的水界是“放下”的缘。水界体性较重,因此在放下时,它便成为地界的随顺者。由此,这两界在此处因能力而强盛,其余诸界则因无此情形而弱劣。为了显示此义而说“在放下……强盛”。又,随顺于水界的地界是“安立”与“止息”的缘。于安立时,它有殊胜的作用;因此,水界成为它的随顺者。同样,在撞击动作中,依于地界,止息得以成就,所以在止息中水界也成为它的随顺者。因此说“同样地在安立与止息中”。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pathavīdhātuyā anugatā āpodhātu vossajjane paccayo. Garutarasabhāvā hi āpodhātu, tena tassā vossajjane pathavīdhātuyā anugatabhāvo hoti, tasmā tāsaṃ dvinnamettha sāmatthiyato adhimattatā, itarāsañca tadabhāvato omattatāti dassento āha ‘‘vossajjane…pe… balavatiyo’’ti. Yasmā pana āpodhātuyā anugatā pathavīdhātu sannikkhepanassa paccayo. Patiṭṭhābhāve viya patiṭṭhāpanepi tassā sātisayakiccattā āpodhātuyā tassā anugatabhāvo hoti, tathā ghaṭṭanakiriyāya pathavīdhātuyā vasena sannirujjhanassa sijjhanato tassā sannirujjhanepi āpodhātuyā anugatabhāvo hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘tathā sannikkhepanasannirujjhanesū’’ti.
虽然这里也有随顺者与被随顺者的差别,但仅是就地界与水界的体性而说“同样地”。因为在第一种方式中,地界是随顺者,水界是被随顺者;在第二种方式中,水界是随顺者,地界是被随顺者。在此,“放下”是指脚弯曲而放下;此后在地上等处安立,名为“安立”;安立后通过踩压而使移动止息,名为“止息”。显示巴利原文
Anugamakānugantabbatāvisesepi sati pathavīdhātuāpodhātubhāvamattaṃ sandhāya tathāsaddaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Paṭhame hi naye pathavīdhātuyā anugamakatā, āpodhātuyā anugantabbatā, dutiye pana āpodhātuyā anugamakatā, pathavīdhātuyā anugantabbatāti. Vossajjanañcettha pādassa onāmanavasena vossaggo, tato paraṃ bhūmiādīsu patiṭṭhāpanaṃ sannikkhepanaṃ, patiṭṭhāpetvā nimmaddanavasena gamanassa sannirodho sannirujjhanaṃ.
“于此”是指在那跨越中,或于所说的六种部分中——提起、移前、侧移、放下、安立、止息。“在提起时”指在提起的刹那。色法与非色法,是以提起方式现起的色法,以及令其生起的非色法。它们不到达移前,因为仅住于刹那。于一切处,此理亦然。“即于彼彼处”意为在提起等所发生的每一处。因为诸法并无他处的转移,由快速变易之故。“节节”指分节分节。“关节关节”指结结。“部分部分”指部分部分。当知这一切是依同类相续,就提起等部分而说的。因为即使色法的生灭刹那,也比奔跑的天子们头上脚下迎面而来的绑刀刀刃相合更快。如同芝麻被碾碎时以“啪嗒啪嗒”声而显其破碎,为显示诸行法的生起也是如此,故说“啪嗒啪嗒地”,意思是虽不发出啪嗒声,却如同发出一样。因为芝麻破碎之相为啪嗒声,诸行破碎之相为生起,已生者必定破碎。“在那里”指在前进中。“谁一个在前进”即根本没有前进。“或者谁有一个前进”即不可能有。为何?因为就胜义而言……界的沉睡,是这个意思。这是为了破除愚痴凡夫对自己前进与返回的迷惑而说。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti tasmiṃ atikkamane, tesu vā yathāvuttesu uddharaṇātiharaṇavītiharaṇavossajjanasannikkhepanasannirujjhanasaṅkhātesu chasu koṭṭhāsesu. Uddharaṇeti uddharaṇakkhaṇe. Rūpārūpadhammāti uddharaṇākārena pavattā rūpadhammā, taṃsamuṭṭhāpakā ca arūpadhammā. Atiharaṇaṃ na pāpuṇanti khaṇamattāvaṭṭhānato. Sabbattha esa nayo. Tattha tatthevāti yattha yattha uddharaṇādike uppannā, tattha tattheva. Na hi dhammānaṃ desantarasaṅkamanaṃ atthi lahuparivattanato. Pabbaṃ pabbanti paricchedaṃ paricchedaṃ. Sandhi sandhīti gaṇṭhi gaṇṭhi. Odhi odhīti bhāgaṃ bhāgaṃ. Sabbañcetaṃ uddharaṇādikoṭṭhāse sandhāya sabhāgasantativasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Itaro eva hi rūpadhammānampi pavattikkhaṇo gamanayogagamanassādānaṃ devaputtānaṃ heṭṭhupariyena paṭimukhaṃ dhāvantānaṃ sirasi, pāde ca bandhakhuradhārāsamāgamatopi sīghataro, yathā tilānaṃ bhijjayamānānaṃ paṭapaṭāyanena bhedo lakkhīyati, evaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ uppādenāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭapaṭāyantā’’ti vuttaṃ, uppādavasena paṭapaṭa-saddaṃ akarontāpi karontā viyāti attho. Tilabhedalakkhaṇaṃ paṭapaṭāyanaṃ viya hi saṅkhatabhedalakkhaṇaṃ uppādo uppannānamekantato bhinnattā. Tatthāti abhikkamane. Ko eko abhikkamati nābhikkamatiyeva. Kassa vā ekassa abhikkamanaṃ siyā, na siyā eva. Kasmā? Paramatthato hi…pe… dhātūnaṃ sayanaṃ, tasmāti attho. Andhabālaputhujjanasammūḷhassa attano abhikkamananivattanañhetaṃ vacanaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘ko eko…pe… abhikkamana’’nti codanāya ‘‘paramatthato hī’’tiādinā sodhanā vuttā.
“在每一部分中”:即如前所述的六种部分中,由于行走等未被舍弃。它与“与色一同生起,一同灭去”这一偈颂文句相连。其中,在第一句的关联中,“与色”是指与任何同时生起的色。而在第二句的关联中,“与色”则是指:从彼灭尽之心以上,于第十七心的生起刹那所生起的、与彼灭尽之心一同灭尽的、具有十七心刹那寿命的色;否则,色法与非色法便会具有相等的寿命。如果它们的寿命相等,便会与“色是粗重、变易、迟钝灭尽”等(《分别论注·杂论》)的注释文句,以及与“诸比丘,我不见其他任何一法如此迅速转变,如同此心”(《增支部》1.38)等经文相违。因为心与心所的本质是缘取所缘,尽其所能地辨别作为自己所缘缘之义理而生起,所以它们在成就其本质之后即刻灭尽;而色法无所缘,是应被了知的,它们应被了知本质的成就,是由十六个心完成的,因此色法被认为具有超过一个心刹那的十七心刹那的寿命。由于迅速转变的识之殊胜,仅以触为缘,故三蕴迅速转变;由于仅以境触为缘,故识迅速转变;由于以迟钝的四大为缘,故色粗重转变。如是种种,如实了知。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ koṭṭhāseti yathāvutte chabbidhepi koṭṭhāse gamanādikassa apaccāmaṭṭhattā. ‘‘Saddhiṃ rūpena uppajjate, nirujjhatī’’ti ca silokapadena saha sambandho. Tattha paṭhamapadasambandhe rūpenāti yena kenaci sahuppajjanakena rūpena. Dutiyapadasambandhe pana ‘‘rūpenā’’ti idaṃ yaṃ tato nirujjhamānacittato upari sattarasamacittassa uppādakkhaṇe uppannaṃ, tadeva tassa nirujjhamānacittassa nirodhena saddhiṃ nirujjhanakaṃ sattarasacittakkhaṇāyukaṃ rūpaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, aññathā rūpārūpadhammā samānāyukā siyuṃ. Yadi ca siyuṃ, atha ‘‘rūpaṃ garupariṇāmaṃ dandhanirodha’’ntiādi (vibha. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathā) aṭṭhakathāvacanehi, ‘‘nāhaṃ bhikkhave aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ, yathayidaṃ citta’’nti (a. ni. 1.38) evamādipāḷivacanehi ca virodho siyā. Cittacetasikā hi sārammaṇasabhāvā yathābalaṃ attano ārammaṇapaccayabhūtamatthaṃ vibhāvento eva uppajjanti, tasmā tesaṃ taṃsabhāvanipphattianantaraṃ nirodho, rūpadhammā pana anārammaṇā pakāsetabbā, evaṃ tesaṃ pakāsetabbabhāvanipphatti soḷasahi cittehi hoti, tasmā ekacittakkhaṇātītena saha sattarasacittakkhaṇāyukatā rūpadhammānamicchitāti. Lahuparivattanaviññāṇavisesassa saṅgatimattapaccayatāya tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ, visayasaṅgatimattatāya ca viññāṇassa lahuparivattitā, dandhamahābhūtapaccayatāya rūpassa garuparivattitā. Yathābhūtaṃ nānādhātuñāṇaṃ kho pana tathāgatasseva, tena ca purejātapaccayo rūpadhammova vutto, pacchājātapaccayo ca tathevāti rūpārūpadhammānaṃ samānakkhaṇatā na yujjateva, tasmā vuttanayenevettha attho veditabboti ācariyena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.214) vuttaṃ , tadetaṃ cittānuparivattiyā viññattiyā ekanirodhabhāvassa suviññeyyattā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tato saviññattikena puretaraṃ sattarasamacittassa uppādakkhaṇe uppannena rūpena saddhiṃ aññaṃ cittaṃ nirujjhatīti attho veditabbo. Aññaṃ cittaṃ nirujjhati, aññaṃ uppajjate cittanti yojetabbaṃ. Añño hi saddakkamo, añño atthakkamoti. Yañhi purimuppannaṃ cittaṃ, taṃ nirujjhantaṃ aññassa pacchā uppajjamānassa anantarādipaccayabhāveneva nirujjhati, tathā laddhapaccayameva aññampi uppajjate cittaṃ, avatthāvisesato cettha aññathā. Yadi evaṃ tesamubhinnaṃ antaro labbheyyāti codanaṃ ‘‘no’’ti apanetumāha ‘‘avīci manusambandho’’ti, yathā vīci antaro na labbhati, tadevedanti avisesaṃ vidū maññanti, evaṃ anu anu sambandho cittasantāno, rūpasantāno ca nadīsotova nadiyaṃ udakappavāho viya vattatīti attho. Avīcīti hi nirantaratāvasena bhāvanapuṃsakavacanaṃ.
“向前看”称为“前视”。即:当行走、站立、坐下或躺卧时,面朝哪个方向,便向彼方观看,这就是所说的意思。又因这样的看称为“前视”,故随顺该方向的观看便称为“旁视”,亦即“向余方观看”,意为在与面向方向相应的左右两侧作种种观看。至于向下、向上、向后看,已归入“下视、上视、后视”。以适当的方式——即符合沙门仪轨的方式,若以不适当的方式摄持其余观看,便得成立。例如,扫地、清洁地面等时可有下视;取用高处物品等时可有上视;回避从后方而来的危险等时可有后视。故说“或以此”等,以此表明这只是举例而已。显示巴利原文
Abhimukhaṃ lokitaṃ ālokitanti āha ‘‘puratopekkhana’’nti. Yaṃdisābhimukho gacchati, tiṭṭhati, nisīdati, sayati vā, tadabhimukhaṃ pekkhananti vuttaṃ hoti. Yasmā ca tādisamālokitaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā tadanugatadisālokanaṃ vilokitanti āha ‘‘anudisāpekkhana’’nti, abhimukhadisānurūpagatesu vāmadakkhiṇapassesu vividhā pekkhananti vuttaṃ hoti. Heṭṭhāuparipacchāpekkhanañhi ‘‘olokitaullokitāpalokitānī’’ti gahitāni. Sāruppavasenāti samaṇapatirūpavasena, imināva asāruppavasena itaresamaggahaṇanti sijjhati. Sammajjanaparibhaṇḍādikaraṇe olokitassa, ullokaharaṇādīsu ullokitassa, pacchato āgacchantaparissayaparivajjanādīsu apalokitassa ca siyā sambhavoti āha ‘‘iminā vā’’tiādi, etena upalakkhaṇamattañcetanti dasseti.
“身证者”,即以身作证、现见而行者,意为成就者。因为这位尊者于修观时,生起勇猛精进与强力的惭与愧,心想:“我正是由于在诸根上未加防护,才在教法中遭遇了不喜乐等过患,我当善加调伏它。”又因他在此方面已作加行之故,于根律仪达到了最上圆满。正因如此,导师将他置于第一之位:“诸比丘,我声闻比丘中,于诸根防护门者,以难陀为第一。”(《增支部》1.230)此处“难陀的”是表示行为主体的属格。“如是”即依此观察。显示巴利原文
Kāyasakkhinti kāyena sacchikataṃ paccakkhakārinaṃ, sādhakanti attho. So hi āyasmā vipassanākāle ‘‘yamevāhaṃ indriyesu aguttadvārataṃ nissāya sāsane anabhiratiādivippakāraṃ patto, tameva suṭṭhu niggahessāmī’’ti ussāhajāto balavahirottappo, tattha ca katādhikārattā indriyasaṃvare ukkaṃsapāramippatto, teneva naṃ satthā ‘‘etadaggaṃ bhikkhave mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ indriyesu guttadvārānaṃ, yadidaṃ nando’’ti (a. ni. 1.230) etadagge ṭhapesi. Nandassāti kattutthe sāmivacanaṃ. Itīti iminā ālokanena.
此处的“有义性”与“适宜性”,应就前视与旁视来理解——这是补足连接词后所建立的句法关系。“因此”,即在不舍离业处的情况下作前视与旁视。“由于在此(前视与旁视)中有行境正知”,意即在行前视与旁视时具备行境正知。“依自己业处而行”,即唯依蕴等业处而作观看,不应寻求其他方法——这是意旨所在。“以业处为首”:即以将述的业处为门面。然而,所谓前视等,实唯是法尘的转起差别,故为显示如实了知彼为不痴正知,而说“于内”等。“前视者”,即正在前视者;“旁视者”亦然。“表色”,即身表。如是,因从此生起。“依心所造作风界之扩散”,即依由唯作心生起的风界之动摇行相——此即所谓身表。“眼睑”,即眼皮。“向下沉”,即如沉没般向下走;“向上越”,即如跨越般向上走。“以机关”,就好比用系于眼睑上的绳索牵动而旋转的轮子。由此,眼睑得以如此沉没与上越。对意门速行根本因的遍知,名为“根本遍知”。“外来者、客来者”,即仅于彼刹那转起之暂时性,亦即外来性与暂时性,依这些而说。显示巴利原文
Sātthakatāca sappāyatā ca veditabbā ālokitavilokitassāti ajjhāharitvā sambandho. Tasmāti kammaṭṭhānāvijahanasseva ālokitavilokite. Gocarasampajaññabhāvato etthāti ālokitavilokite. Attano kammaṭṭhānavasenevāti khandhādikammaṭṭhānavaseneva ālokanavilokanaṃ kātabbaṃ, na añño upāyo gavesitabboti adhippāyo. Kammaṭṭhānasīsenevāti vakkhamānakammaṭṭhānamukheneva. Yasmā pana ālokitādi nāma dhammamattasseva pavattiviseso, tasmā tassa yāthāvato jānanaṃ asammohasampajaññanti dassetuṃ ‘‘abbhantare’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āloketāti ālokento. Tathā viloketā. Viññattinti kāyaviññattiṃ. Itīti tasmā uppajjanato. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravasenāti kiriyamayacittasamuṭṭhānāya vāyodhātuyā vicalanākārasaṅkhātakāyaviññattivasena. Akkhidalanti akkhipaṭalaṃ. Adho sīdatīti osīdantaṃ viya heṭṭhā gacchati. Uddhaṃ laṅghetīti laṅghentaṃ viya upari gacchati. Yantakenāti akkhidalesu yojitarajjuyo gahetvā paribbhamanakacakkena. Tatoti tathā akkhidalānamosīdanullaṅghanato. Manodvārikajavanassa mūlakāraṇaparijānanaṃ mūlapariññā. Āgantukassa abbhāgatassa, tāvakālikassa ca taṅkhaṇamattapavattakassa bhāvo āgantukatāvakālikabhāvo, tesaṃ vasena.
“其中”,即指那些偈颂所示的七种心中。“正在完成支分之作用”:即在成就作为精勤支分的功用,犹如身体一般。因为,有分由于与结生相似而成为精勤之支,而精勤则被称为“身体”;或者,由于成为无间断转起之因,故正在完成因的作用,这是其含义。“使其转向”:这是就有分的一般性而说的;然而,就转起行相的差别而言,此有分依过去等而有三种,其中的“转向”仅是就有分的中断而言。“从其灭尽”:即从它的灭去,这是就无间缘而说的因的表述。“于第一速行……乃至……于第七速行”:这是就五门路中,没有“这是女人,这是男人”这样的染着、嗔恚、愚痴而说的。因为在五门路中,由于转向与确定之前已转起的如理作意,以不如理转向和确定的方式转起,对于可意的女人形象等,只生起与贪俱行的速行;对于不可意的,只生起与嗔俱行的速行,并非一向的染着、嗔恚等。只有在意门中,才有一向的染着、嗔恚等。然而,那个意门的染着、嗔显示巴利原文
Tatthāti tesu gāthāya dassitesu sattasu cittesu. Aṅgakiccaṃ sādhayamānanti padhānabhūtaaṅgakiccaṃ nipphādentaṃ, sarīraṃ hutvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhavaṅgañhi paṭisandhisadisattā padhānamaṅgaṃ, padhānañca ‘‘sarīra’’nti vuccati, avicchedappavattihetubhāvena vā kāraṇakiccaṃ sādhayamānanti attho. Taṃ āvaṭṭetvāti bhavaṅgasāmaññavasena vuttaṃ, pavattākāravisesavasena pana atītādinā tibbidhaṃ, tattha ca bhavaṅgupacchedasseva āvaṭṭanaṃ. Tannirodhāti tassa nirujjhanato, anantarapaccayavasena hetuvacanaṃ. ‘‘Paṭhamajavanepi…pe… sattamajavanepī’’ti idaṃ pañcadvārikavīthiyaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ itthī, ayaṃ puriso’’ti rajjanadussanamuyhanānamabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tattha hi āvajjanavoṭṭhabbanānaṃ puretaraṃ pavattāyonisomanasikāravasena ayoniso āvajjanavoṭṭhabbanākārena pavattanato iṭṭhe itthirūpādimhi lobhasahagatamattaṃ javanaṃ uppajjati, aniṭṭhe ca dosasahagatamattaṃ, na panekantarajjanadussanādi, manodvāre eva ekantarajjanadussanādi hoti, tassa pana manodvārikassa rajjanadussanādino pañcadvārikajavanaṃ mūlaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ vā sabbampi bhavaṅgādi, evaṃ manodvārikajavanassa mūlakāraṇavasena mūlapariññā vuttā, āgantukatāvakālikatā pana pañcadvārika javanasseva apubbabhāvavasena, ittaratāvasena ca. Yuddhamaṇḍaleti saṅgāmappadese. Heṭṭhupariyavasenāti heṭṭhā ca upari ca parivattamānavasena, aparāparaṃ bhavaṅguppattivasenāti attho. Tathā bhavaṅguppādavasena hi tesaṃ bhijjitvā patanaṃ, iminā pana heṭṭhimassa, uparimassa ca bhavaṅgassa aparāparuppattivasena pañcadvārikajavanato visadisassa manodvārikajavanassa uppādaṃ dasseti tassa vaseneva rajjanādipavattanato. Tenevāha ‘‘rajjanādivasena ālokitavilokitaṃ hotī’’ti.
所缘(āpāthaṃ):即行境的状态。以成就各自作用的方式(sakakiccanipphādanavasena):即以成就转向等作用的方式。它(taṃ):指速行。在眼门中,由于色所缘现前,转向等法得以转起,这是基于转起的因由而说“如家”,并非基于依止的因由。如客来之人(āgantukapuriso viya):即如不期而至之人。客人有两种:宾客与不期而至者。其中,已建立熟识者称为“宾客”,未建立熟识者称为“不期而至者”,此处正指后者。因此说“如同在他人家中”等。对于它(tassā):即对于速行而言,染着、嗔恚、愚痴是不合适的,这是其中的关联。于已坐者中(āsinesu):即在已就座的人中。令其随顺(āṇākaraṇaṃ):即令其顺从自己。显示巴利原文
Āpāthanti gocarabhāvaṃ. Sakakiccanipphādanavasenāti āvajjanādikiccanipphādanavasena. Tanti javanaṃ. Cakkhudvāre rūpassa āpāthagamanena āvajjanādīnaṃ pavattanato pavattikāraṇavaseneva ‘‘gehabhūte’’ti vuttaṃ, na nissayavasena. Āgantukapuriso viyāti abbhāgatapuriso viya. Duvidhā hi āgantukā atithiabbhāgatavasena. Tattha kataparicayo ‘‘atithī’’ti vuccati, akataparicayo ‘‘abbhāgato’’ti, ayamevidhādhippeto. Tenāha ‘‘yathā paragehe’’tiādi . Tassāti javanassa rajjanadussanamuyhanaṃ ayuttanti sambandho. Āsinesūti nisinnesu. Āṇākaraṇanti attano vasakaraṇaṃ.
与俱生法(saddhiṃ sampayuttadhammehi):即与触等相应法一同。它们就在各自成就作用之处(tattha tattheva sakakiccanipphādanaṭṭhāne)坏灭。因此(iti):即由于从转向至确定为止的诸心坏灭。短暂者(ittarāni):即非长久住立者。在此(tattha):即于此言说中,这是譬喻的含义。以生灭为其时间分齐,故称为暂时者(tāvakālikāni),其状态,即依此而言。显示巴利原文
Saddhiṃ sampayuttadhammehi phassādīhi. Tattha tattheva sakakiccanipphādanaṭṭhāne bhijjanti. Itīti tasmā āvajjanādivoṭṭhabbanapariyosānānaṃ bhijjanato. Ittarānīti aciraṭṭhitikāni. Tatthāti tasmiṃ vacane ayaṃ upamāti attho. Udayabbayaparicchinno tāva tattako kālo etesanti tāvakālikāni, tassa bhāvo, taṃvasena.
此(etaṃ):指不痴正知。于此中(ettha):即在此如所说的法集之中。见(dassanaṃ):即眼识,正是依于眼识,看与见得以了知,由此也包含了转向等法。显示巴利原文
Etanti asammohasampajaññaṃ. Etthāti etasmiṃ yathāvuttadhammasamudāye. Dassanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, tassa vaseneva ālokanavilokanapaññāyanato āvajjanādīnamaggahaṇaṃ.
“于和合中”(samavāye):即于聚集之中。“其中”(tattha):即当以五蕴来观察时,看与见得以被了知。此处的处格是表相之义,即据此表相,谁是某一看者,而非仅仅在看;谁是某一见者,而非仅仅在见,这是其义。显示巴利原文
Samavāyeti sāmaggiyaṃ. Tatthāti pañcakkhandhavasena ālokanavilokana paññāyamāne. Nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummaṃ, tabbinimuttako ko ekoāloketi na tveva āloketi. Ko ca eko viloketi natveva viloketīti attho.
“如是”等,是依处与界而显示。眼与色,如其所应,是见的依止缘与所缘缘;同样,转向为无间等缘;光明为亲依止缘——如此,依经教的方法,以间接的方式阐明了见的缘性。俱生缘也是见的缘,但这仅是举例,因为还可有相互缘、相应缘、有缘、不离缘等缘,现在亦可看到“俱生等缘”的文句。“如是”等是结语。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tathā’’tiādi āyatanavasena, dhātuvasena ca dassanaṃ. Cakkhurūpāni yathārahaṃ dassanassa nissayārammaṇapaccayo, tathā āvajjanā anantarādipaccayo, āloko upanissayapaccayoti dassanassa suttantanayena pariyāyato paccayatā vuttā. Sahajātapaccayopi dassanasseva, nidassanamattañcetaṃ aññamaññasampayuttaatthiavigatādipaccayānampi labbhanato, ‘‘sahajātādipaccayā’’tipi adhunā pāṭho dissati. ‘‘Eva’’ntiādi nigamanaṃ.
现在,为了说明如经文中所述的屈伸正知,而说“于屈时,于伸时”等。其中,“诸节”(pabbānaṃ):即成为节的部分。正是由于它的屈伸,才有一切手足的屈伸;或者,它们有节,故称为诸节,正如称“有信者”,即具有节者,这是其含义。“唯随心转”(cittavaseneva):即唯独随心的喜好,或唯独依心的能力。无论生起何种心,想要屈或伸于有益或无益之事,都不应随顺那样的心而作屈伸,这是所说之义。“其中”(tattha):即在屈伸之时,应了知对有益与无益的把握,这是其关联。“于刹那刹那”(khaṇe khaṇe):这是就如此安住的刹那,表达其遍满之欲的言说。“受”(vedanā):即因僵硬等而感受的苦。“受生起”等,显示了次第的效用。同样,“那些受生起”等也是如此。因为,前前是后后的因的表述。“适时”(kāle):即适合屈或伸的时机。“增长”(phātiṃ):即增长。禅那等则是其殊胜。显示巴利原文
Idāni yathāpāṭhaṃ samiñjanapasāraṇesu sampajānaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘samiñjite pasārite’’tiādimāha. Tattha pabbānanti pabbabhūtānaṃ. Taṃsamiñjanapasāraṇeneva hi sabbesaṃ hatthapādānaṃ samiñjanapasāraṇaṃ hoti, pabbametesanti vā pabbā yathā ‘‘saddho’’ti, pabbavantānanti attho. Cittavasenevāti cittaruciyā eva, cittasāmatthiyā vā. Yaṃ yaṃ cittaṃ uppajjati sātthepi anatthepi samiñjituṃ, pasārituṃ vā, taṃtaṃcittānugateneva samiñjanapasāraṇamakatvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatthāti samiñjanapasāraṇesu atthānatthapariggaṇhanaṃ veditabbanti sambandho. Khaṇe khaṇeti tathā ṭhitakkhaṇassa byāpanicchāvacanaṃ. Vedanāti santhambhanādīhi rujjanā. ‘‘Vedanā uppajjatī’’tiādinā paramparapayojanaṃ dasseti. Tathā ‘‘tā vedanānuppajjantī’’tiādināpi. Purimaṃ purimañhi pacchimassa pacchimassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Kāleti samiñjituṃ, pasārituṃ vā yuttakāle. Phātinti vuddhiṃ. Jhānādi pana viseso.
所谓“此中理趣”,即是在未把握适宜与不适宜时,以事例显示的理趣。正是通过显示不把握的过患,也彰显了把握的功德,因此,应知此处是它的例证。“大塔广场”:即由杜陀伽摩尼王所建造、名为金鬘的大塔之广场。因为曾这样说:显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ nayoti sappāyāsappāyaapariggaṇhane vatthusandassanasaṃṅkhāto nayo. Tadapariggahaṇe ādīnavadassaneneva pariggahaṇepi ānisaṃso vibhāvitoti tesamidha udāharaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Mahācetiyaṅgaṇeti duṭṭhagāmaṇiraññā katassa hemamālīnāmakassa mahācetiyassa aṅgaṇe. Vuttañhi –
“令灯明净的长老,是我祖父的国王;
据说,你的孙子——杜陀伽摩尼王,将会如此。”
这位具大福德者,将在未来建造那座令人悦意、饰有金环的大塔。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dīpappasādako thero, rājino ayyakassa me; Evaṃ kirāha nattā te, duṭṭhagāmaṇi bhūpati. Mahāpuñño mahāthūpaṃ, soṇṇamāliṃ manoramaṃ;
此地已言之——因为此处风动力依附于火动力以升起。升起运动即火动力,因此,升起时风动力依附于火动力,故此处二者在功能上是彼此主次不同,其中一者强,另一者弱。又因为风动力附属火动力而有超越与否的差别。因为火动力依附于风动力而有越界和不越界现象。行为运动的风动力在越界与不越界的层面上为广泛作业,因此风动力因其覆盖而附属于火动力,所以此处二者在功能上亦有主次差异,一者强、一者无。此意通过‘正如在越界与不越界中’之处表明。此处精巧区分风动力依附火动力与火动力依附风动力的特殊性。首先为作用中,火动力依附于风动力;其次反过来,风动力依附于火动力。这里以踢脚向上起步为例,体现升起、越界、越界之作用。独特原因是脚的肌肉动作,越界意指跨越原位向前牵拉,越界意指用眼睛施行回避,脚前方接触导致越界,之后迁越即为非越界,这些是它们的特征。显示巴利原文
Vīsaṃ hatthasataṃ uccaṃ, kāressati anāgate’’ti.
此处所说“地面区域”即指广场,如“广场处有水井”等语(《本生》1.1.2)所说,因此其义为“作为近行处、被妥善整饬的地面区域”。正是由于这个原因,他成了在家者——因发生身体接触而生起厌离,从而退堕还俗。“燃烧”即进入了烧灼、焚烧的状态。即便在大塔广场,也搭了衣棚并在彼处诵习经文,因此说“在衣棚的支架处”,意指为覆盖衣棚而制作的支架。所谓“摩尼蛇”,据阿难陀长老论师与法护长老论师所说,是存在于锡兰岛的一种蛇。之所以不称“某些人”、“其他人”或“另一些人”,而只说“他们说”,是为了表明应将其作为定论来把握,因为不应以其他方式把握的内容便不会被宣说,所以不应将青蛇等理解为此处的“摩尼蛇”。显示巴利原文
Bhūmippadeso cettha aṅgaṇaṃ ‘‘udaṅgaṇe tattha papaṃ avindu’’ntiādisu (jā. 1.1.2) viya, tasmā upacārabhūte susaṅkhate bhūmippadeseti attho. Teneva kāraṇena gihī jātoti kāyasaṃsaggasamāpajjanahetunā ukkaṇṭhito hutvā hīnāyāvatto. Jhāyīti jhāyanaṃ ḍayhanamāpajji. Mahācetiyaṅgaṇepi cīvarakuṭiṃ katvā tattha sajjhāyaṃ gaṇhantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘cīvarakuṭidaṇḍake’’ti, cīvarakuṭiyā cīvarachadanatthāya katadaṇḍaketi attho. ‘‘Maṇisappo nāma sīhaḷadīpe vijjamānā ekā sappajātīti vadantī’’ti ācariyānandattherena, (vibha. mūlaṭī. 242) ācariyadhammapālattherena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.214) ca vuttaṃ. ‘‘Keci, apare, aññe’’ti vā avatvā ‘‘vadanti’’cceva vacanañca sārato gahetabbatāviññāpanatthaṃ aññathā gahetabbassa avacanato, tasmā na nīlasappādi idha ‘‘maṇisappo’’ti veditabbo.
“以摩诃长老的故事”指那位名为摩诃长老的故事。“由弟子们”指在坐在那里的众多弟子中,由一位弟子(提问),因此说“弟子们询问了他”。“业处”指如“内有所谓‘我’”等文句中,将予说明的那种界业处,因为从论典中也能了知义理。对于在那里安坐并询问的人,为作统摄,再次用复数表达“你们”。所谓“具如此性质者”:“如此性质”省略鼻音后成为“如此”,意即具有业处作意的性质。此处同样,通过“也”字,包含了前面所说的观察、环视方面的审视。此理亦适用于后文。显示巴利原文
Mahātheravatthunāti evaṃnāmakassa therassa vatthunā. Antevāsikehīti tattha nisinnesu bahūsu antevāsikesu ekena antevāsikena. Tenāha ‘‘taṃ antevāsikā pucchiṃsū’’ti. Kammaṭṭhānanti ‘‘abbhantare attā nāmā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.214) vakkhamānappakāraṃ dhātukammaṭṭhānaṃ. Pakaraṇatopi hi attho viññāyatīti. Tattha ṭhitānaṃ pucchantānaṃ saṅgahaṇavasena ‘‘tumhehī’’ti puna puthuvacanakaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ rūpaṃ sabhāvo yassāti evarūpo niggahitalopavasena tena , kammaṭṭhānamanasikārasabhāvenāti attho. Evametthāpīti api-saddena heṭṭhā vuttaṃ ālokitavilokitapakkhamapekkhanaṃ karoti. Ayaṃ nayo uparipi.
“以牵线的方式”指以连接在机关上的线的牵引方式。“木机关的”指用木头制作的机关形象。所谓“机关”,即执行种种动作,或以手脚等做出种种形态而行,如舞者等所用的傀儡形象;木制的机关也是如此,这仅是举例。同样地,由于用布匹、衣物装饰,故称“布偶”;因有五肢如同活物,故称“五肢偶”。“手足嬉戏”指手脚的摇动,或用手脚做出嬉戏的动作。显示巴利原文
Suttākaḍḍhanavasenāti yante yojitasuttānaṃ āviñchanavasena. Dāruyantassāti dārunā katayantarūpassa. Taṃ taṃ kiriyaṃ yāti pāpuṇāti, hatthapādādīhi vā taṃ taṃ ākāraṃ kurumānaṃ yāti gacchatīti yantaṃ, naṭakādipañcālikārūpaṃ, dārunā kataṃ yantaṃ tathā, nidassanamattañcetaṃ. Tathā hi naṃ potthena vatthena alaṅkariyattā potthalikā, pañca aṅgāni yassā sajīvassevāti pañcālikāti ca voharanti. Hatthapādalaḷananti hatthapādānaṃ kampanaṃ, hatthapādehi vā līḷākaraṇaṃ.
在“持僧伽帝衣、钵、衣”中,因僧伽帝衣与其它衣的持用方式相同,故合并一处说明,以减轻文本的繁重;下衣以穿着的方式,其余以披覆的方式,各随其宜。其中,即在持僧伽帝衣和持钵时。“如前所述的种类”指经中以观察方式所说的分类。显示巴利原文
Saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇeti ettha saṅghāṭicīvarānaṃ samānadhāraṇatāya ekatodassanaṃ ganthagarutāpanayanatthaṃ, antaravāsakassa nivāsanavasena, sesānaṃ pārupanavasenāti yathārahamattho. Tatthāti saṅghāṭicīvaradhāraṇapattadhāraṇesu. Vuttappakāroti paccavekkhaṇavidhinā sutte vuttappabhedo.
“热性体质者”指怕热、身体多热恼的人。“寒性体质者”指身体多寒冷的人。“厚的”指紧密的。“双层的”仅是举例。因为经中说:“对于已起毛的布料,僧伽梨衣为四层,上衣为双层,下衣为双层,粪扫衣则随宜而用。”所谓“相反的”,指与这两类体质相反,因此对这三种人都不适宜。原因何在?即所谓“通过给予门闩等”。取出后用于粘合的布片称为门闩。通过“等”字,包含了缝纫等工艺。“同样”一词是承接之义,表示同样不适宜。在蚕丝产地由小虫所生的布料称为蚕丝。由某种树皮纤维制成的白色布料称为细布。通过“等”字,包含了丝绸、毛毯等随顺的如法衣。为什么?因此说“因为那样的……”。对于林居者,这会构成梵行障碍,此处指部分的梵行障碍。又因为它是盗贼等所共用的,所以这样说。以无余的方式,即完全不适宜,这是关联所在。由此显示,如前所述的适宜并非绝对,因为借助那样的条件,对某些人有时也可能成为适宜。但这两者则是绝对不适宜,对任何人、任何时候都不存在适宜的情况。所谓“邪命”,即依此而活命,指以非法的方式寻求资具,由暗示、做作等所发起。显示巴利原文
Uṇhapakatikassāti uṇhālukassa pariḷāhabahulakāyassa. Sītālukassāti sītabahulakāyassa. Ghananti appitaṃ. Dupaṭṭanti nidassanamattaṃ. ‘‘Utuddhaṭānaṃ dussānaṃ catugguṇaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ, diguṇaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ, diguṇaṃ antaravāsakaṃ, paṃsukūle yāvadattha’’nti (mahāva. 348) hi vuttaṃ. Viparītanti tadubhayato viparītaṃ, tesaṃ tiṇṇampi asappāyaṃ. Kasmāti āha ‘‘aggaḷādidānenā’’tiādi. Uddharitvā allīyāpanakhaṇḍaṃ aggaḷaṃ. Ādisaddena tunnakammādīni saṅgaṇhāti. Tathā-saddo anukaḍḍhanattho, asappāyamevāti. Paṭṭuṇṇadese pāṇakehi sañjātavatthaṃ paṭṭuṇṇaṃ. Vākavisesamayaṃ setavaṇṇaṃ dukūlaṃ. Ādisaddena koseyyakambalādikaṃ sānulomaṃ kappiyacīvaraṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Kasmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘tādisañhī’’tiādi. Araññe ekakassa nivāsantarāyakaranti brahmacariyantarāyekadesamāha. Corādisādhāraṇato ca tathā vuttaṃ. Nippariyāyena taṃ asappāyanti sambandho. Aneneva yathāvuttamasappāyaṃ anekantaṃ tathārūpapaccayena kassaci kadāci sappāyasambhavato. Idaṃ pana dvayaṃ ekantameva asappāyaṃ kassaci kadācipi sappāyābhāvatoti dasseti. Micchā ājīvanti etenāti micchājīvo, anesanavasena paccayapariyesanapayogo. Nimittakammādīhi pavatto micchājīvo tathā, etena ekavīsatividhaṃ anesanapayogamāha. Vuttañhi suttanipātaṭṭhakathāyaṃ khuddakapāṭhaṭṭhakathāyañca mettasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ –
凡在此教法中出家,却不善自策励,戒行有缺,依二十一种邪命而活。即:施竹、施钵、施花、施果、施齿木、施漱口水、施沐浴、施香粉、施泥、谄媚、豆汤行、奉承、跑腿传信、行医、作信使、遣使往来、以食换食、施赠、占相地、占星、占身相。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yo imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajitvā attānaṃ na sammā payojeti, khaṇḍasīlo hoti , ekavīsatividhaṃ anesanaṃ nissāya jīvikaṃ kappeti. Seyyathidaṃ? Veḷudānaṃ, pattadānaṃ, puppha, phala, dantakaṭṭha, mukhodaka, sināna, cuṇṇa, mattikādānaṃ, cāṭukamyataṃ, muggasūpyataṃ, pāribhaṭutaṃ, jaṅghapesanikaṃ, vejjakammaṃ, dūtakammaṃ, pahiṇagamanaṃ, piṇḍapaṭipiṇḍaṃ, dānānuppadānaṃ, vatthuvijjaṃ, nakkhattavijjaṃ, aṅgavijja’’nti.
然而,阿毗达摩复注师阿难陀长老则这样说:显示巴利原文
Abhidhammaṭīkākārena pana ācariyānandattherena evaṃ vuttaṃ –
所谓的二十一种邪命是:行医、作信使、作遣使、切开脓疮、涂敷疮药、施上泻药、施下泻药、煎鼻油、煎疮油、施竹、施钵、施花、施果、施沐浴、施齿木、施漱口水、施香粉、施泥、作谄媚、豆汤行、奉承。跑腿传信是第二十二种,因与作信使相似,故总说为二十一种。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ekavīsati anesanā nāma vejjakammaṃ karoti, dūtakammaṃ karoti, pahiṇakammaṃ karoti, gaṇḍaṃ phāleti, arumakkhanaṃ deti, uddhaṃvirecanaṃ deti, adhovirecanaṃ deti, natthutelaṃ pacati, vaṇatelaṃ pacati, veḷudānaṃ deti, patta, puppha, phala, sināna, dantakaṭṭha, mukhodaka, cuṇṇa, mattikādānaṃ deti, cāṭukammaṃ karoti, muggasūpiyaṃ, pāribhaṭuṃ, jaṅghapesanikaṃ dvāvīsatimaṃ dūtakammena sadisaṃ, tasmā ekavīsatī’’ti (dha. sa. mūlaṭī. 150-51).
此处,复注之说依《梵网经》等经的方法而作,注释之说则依《小事分别》等阿毗达摩的方法而作,因此此处有些地方不一致。他们说应审察后取受。又,以“相业等”一语,说明了相、光明、谈论。而“邪命”是指如前所述的营生方式。因此,相业与邪命,以及依彼力而生起的不适、由毁戒而带来的不利,是此中义。即使在相违释复合词中,有时也会见到阳性词的用法,如“心生起”。过于喜爱时,贪等生起;过于不喜爱时,嗔等生起,故说“不善法增长”。“彼”指那两者。以不舍弃业处的缘故,即依于将述的业处而不舍离。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhakathāvacanañcettha brahmajālādisuttantanayena vuttaṃ, ṭīkāvacanaṃ pana khuddakavatthuvibhaṅgādiabhidhammanayena, ato cettha kesañci visamatāti vadanti, vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ. Apica ‘‘nimittakammādī’’ti iminā nimittobhāsaparikathāyo vuttā. ‘‘Micchājīvo’’ti pana yathāvuttapayogo, tasmā nimittakammañca micchājīvo ca, tabbasena uppannaṃ asappāyaṃ sīlavināsanena anatthāvahattāti attho. Samāhāradvandepi hi katthaci pulliṅgapayogo dissati yathā ‘‘cittuppādo’’ti. Atiruciye rāgādayo, atiaruciye ca dosādayoti āha ‘‘akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhantī’’ti. Tanti tadubhayaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavasenāti vakkhamānakammaṭṭhānassa avijahanavasena.
以“内在名为我”等略示无迷惑正知后,又以“其中,衣亦是无心的”等,如同衣一样,通过阐明“身亦是无心的”来彰显身的无我性,从而阐明其义,并开示了“是故,不得好衣”等所说的随得满足之因,应如此看待。其关联应这样说明:为显示无迷惑正知,而说“内在”等;为以无我性的阐明而显了其义,而说“其中,衣”等;现在,为了开示作为无我性阐明之目的的、名为随得满足的所得功德,而说“是故,不得好”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Abbhantare attā nāmā’’tiādinā saṅkhepato asammohasampajaññaṃ dassetvā ‘‘tattha cīvarampi acetana’’ntiādinā cīvarassa viya ‘‘kāyopi acetano’’ti kāyassa attasuññatāvibhāvanena tamatthaṃ paridīpento ‘‘tasmā neva sundaraṃ cīvaraṃ labhitvā’’tiādinā vuttassa itarītarasantosassa kāraṇaṃ vibhāvetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evañhi sambandho vattabbo – asammohasampajaññaṃ dassento ‘‘abbhantare’’tiādimāha. Attasuññatāvibhāvanena pana tadatthaṃ paridīpituṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘tattha cīvara’’ntiādi. Idāni attasuññatāvibhāvanassa payojanabhūtaṃ itarītarasantosasaṅkhātaṃ laddhaguṇaṃ pakāsento āha ‘‘tasmā neva sundara’’ntiādīti.
“内在”(abbhantare)指自身相续。“于彼”(tattha)指在衣的穿着中,或就穿着者与所穿之衣而言。“身亦”(kāyopi)指仅是假名施设之身。“是故”(tasmā)当补充,意为“因为是无心的”。“我”(ahaṃ)指作为业处的身。“界”(dhātuyo)指称为衣的外在诸界。“界之聚集”(dhātusamūhaṃ)指称为身的内在界之聚集。其关联为:如同覆盖陶器之形时,诸界覆盖界之聚集。“Pusanaṃ”意为浇油滋润,或“pūraṇaṃ”意为陶器,指涂、挖等作业,由此所作即陶器,那形相亦复如是;此处意指由挖等业所生的木、泥等形相。“是故”指因为是无心的,或因是无我的。显示巴利原文
Tattha abbhantareti attano santāne. Tatthāti tasmiṃ cīvarapārupane. Tesu vā pārupakattapārupitabbacīvaresu. Kāyopīti attapaññattimatto kāyopi. ‘‘Tasmā’’ti ajjhāharitabbaṃ, acetanattāti attho. Ahanti kammabhūto kāyo. Dhātuyoti cīvarasaṅkhāto bāhirā dhātuyo. Dhātusamūhanti kāyasaṅkhātaṃ ajjhattikaṃ dhātusamūhaṃ. Potthakarūpapaṭicchādane dhātuyo dhātusamūhaṃ paṭicchādenti viyāti sambandho. Pusanaṃ snehasecanaṃ, pūraṇaṃ vā potthaṃ, lepanakhananakiriyā, tena katanti potthakaṃ, tameva rūpaṃ tathā, khananakammanibbattaṃ dārumattikādirūpamidhādhippetaṃ. Tasmāti acetanattā, attasuññabhāvato vā.
诸龙之住处为蚁冢,即龙蚁冢。作为令心作意之处的树为塔庙树。因为对于某些人恭敬、某些人不恭敬的身体,适合作为譬喻,故此处说他们。“以他们”指以花鬘、香、粪、尿等。已说:由于无我性,不应以称为身之我,如对龙蚁冢、塔庙树等一般,生起喜悦或不悦。显示巴利原文
Nāgānaṃ nivāso vammiko nāgavammiko. Cittīkaraṇaṭṭhānabhūto rukkho cetiyarukkho. Kehici sakkatassāpi kehici asakkatassa kāyassa upamānabhāvena yogyattā tesamidha kathanaṃ. Tehīti mālāgandhagūthamuttādīhi. Attasuññatāya nāgavammikacetiyarukkhādīhi viya kāyasaṅkhātena attanā somanassaṃ vā domanassaṃ vā na kātabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
应以“我将获得,或不能获得”的省察为前提,以“我将获得”的见益而取。如此,则成为有义正知,故说“不仓促而取”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Labhissāmi vā, no vā’’ti paccavekkhaṇapubbakena ‘‘labhissāmī’’ti atthasampassaneneva gahetabbaṃ. Evañhi sātthakasampajaññaṃ bhavatīti āha ‘‘sahasāva aggahetvā’’tiādi.
“重钵”即过重的钵。或者,四枚或五枚铆钉称为“四五铆钉”,如“两钵”(波逸提232)、“六五语”(波逸提61),因为在此语境中,作为非关键的“或”字与“及”字意义相通,主要意指被四枚或五枚铆钉打孔的钵难以洗净,此义是依如理省察而把握。“被四五铆钉打孔者”,即被四枚或五枚铆钉打孔,如同“未被火烧”一样;或者,被四枚或五枚铆钉所打孔,亦表难以洗净的状态之因,此为表因的处格。虽然在“不足五缀戒”(波罗夷612)中也说被五铆钉打孔的钵仍可使用,但因难以洗净而造成障碍,在此应视为不适宜。“难洗钵”,指即使未被铆钉打孔,本身便难以洗净的钵。“正是在洗它时”等语,是说明这两者均不适宜的原因。“然而,宝色钵是令人贪求的”,以此说明:虽依律的教法它是如法的,但依经的教法,由于会导致障碍,故不适宜。因为在律注中只禁止了煮的动作,如“将钵放在火上烤煮,摩擦后说‘我将使其变成宝色’,这是不合适的”(波罗夷注·1·非文决)。因为他们如此说:“然而,若获得他人已制成宝色的钵,则可使用”(《满足希求》2)。显示巴利原文
Garupattoti atibhārabhūto patto. Cattāro vā pañca vā gaṇṭhikā catupañcagaṇṭhikā yathā ‘‘dvattipattā (pāci. 232), chappañcavācā’’ti (pāci. 61) aññapadabhūtassa hi vā-saddasseva attho idha padhāno catugaṇṭhikāhato vā pañcagaṇṭhikāhato vā patto dubbisodhanīyoti vikappanavasena atthassa gayhamānattā. Āhatā catupañcagaṇṭhikā yassāti catupañcagaṇṭhikāhato yathā ‘‘agyāhito’’ti, catupañcagaṇṭhikāhi vā āhato tathā, dubbisodhanīyabhāvassa hetugabbhavacanañcetaṃ. Kāmañcaūnapañcabandhanasikkhāpade (pārā. 612) pañcagaṇṭhikāhatopi patto paribhuñjitabbabhāvena vutto, dubbisodhanīyatāmattena pana palibodhakaraṇato idha asappāyoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Duddhotapattoti agaṇṭhikāhatampi pakatiyāva dubbisodhanīyapattaṃ sandhāyāha. ‘‘Taṃ dhovantassevā’’tiādi tadubhayassāpi asappāyabhāve kāraṇaṃ. ‘‘Maṇivaṇṇapatto pana lobhanīyo’’ti iminā kiñcāpi so vinayapariyāyena kappiyo, suttantapariyāyena pana antarāyakaraṇato asappāyoti dasseti. ‘‘Pattaṃ bhamaṃ āropetvā majjitvā pacanti ‘maṇivaṇṇaṃ karissāmā’ti, na vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.pāḷimuttakavinicchayo) hi vinayaṭṭhakathāsu pacanakiriyāmattameva paṭikkhittaṃ. Tathā hi vadanti ‘‘maṇivaṇṇaṃ pana pattaṃ aññena kataṃ labhitvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. 2.85) ‘‘tādisañhi araññe ekakassa nivāsantarāyakara’’ntiādinā cīvare vuttanayena ‘‘nimittakammādivasena laddho pana ekantaakappiyo sīlavināsanena anatthāvahattā’’tiādinā amhehi vuttanayopi yathārahaṃ netabbo. Sevamānassāti hetvanto gadhavacanaṃ abhivaḍḍhanaparihāyanassa.
“在内”等,是略说。“于此”等,是依内空的阐明而作广说。“铁匠铺”,即铁匠执取铁的特殊方式。“取火色钵”,即取被火烧过而呈火色的钵。如此说,是为了表明:对于能引生贪等热恼的钵,这样的譬喻是恰当的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Abbhantare’’tiādi saṅkhepo. ‘‘Tatthā’’tiādi attasuññatāvibhāvanena vitthāro. Saṇḍāsenāti kammārānaṃ ayogahaṇavisesena. Aggivaṇṇapattaggahaṇeti agginā jhāpitattā aggivaṇṇabhūtapattassa gahaṇe. Rāgādipariḷāhajanakapattassa īdisameva upamānaṃ yuttanti evaṃ vuttaṃ.
“然而”等语,显示在执持僧伽梨衣和钵时,某一方面的无痴正知。“断手足的无依之人”,这是其关联。所谓“青蝇”,即产卵蝇。因为在牛等伤口处由青蝇所生的卵,成为不幸与灾祸之因,故称为“蛆”。“无依堂”,即无依者的住处。“有悲悯者”,意为充满悲悯的人。“仅覆伤口的破布”,指仅为了遮盖伤口、大小如伤口的碎布片。“某些人的”,即在众多无依者中的某些人。“粗硬的”,即坚硬的。“于此”,是到达那种状态或特征,此处是处格。为何这样说?即“仅以遮覆伤口”等。在“以破布、以钵壳”这一语义结合中,若是业格或作格,则为第三格。然而,“仅以遮覆伤口”和“仅以作医药”是限定语,并非从装饰、受用等方式而有意义。常被行苦等所逼迫之身所使用的钵与衣,恰好有此譬喻,应当如此理解这段话。由于细密观察者及最上正知者的行持习惯,又因前代的正知行者是最上者,故称为最上正知行者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Apicā’’tiādinā saṅghāṭicīvarapattadhāraṇesu ekato asammohasampajaññaṃ dasseti. Chinnahatthapāde anāthamanusseti sambandho. Nīlamakkhikā nāma āsāṭikakārikā. Gavādīnañhi vaṇesu nīlamakkhikāhi katā anayabyasanahetubhūtā aṇḍakā āsāṭikā nāma vuccati. Anāthasālāyanti anāthānaṃ nivāsasālāyaṃ. Dayālukāti karuṇābahulā. Vaṇamattacoḷakānīti vaṇappamāṇena paṭicchādanatthāya chinnacoḷakhaṇḍakāni. Kesañcīti bahūsu kesañci anāthamanussānaṃ. Thūlānīti thaddhāni. Tatthāti tasmiṃ pāpuṇane, bhāvalakkhaṇe, nimitte vā etaṃ bhummaṃ. Kasmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘vaṇapaṭicchādanamattenevā’’tiādi. Coḷakena, kapālenāti ca atthayoge kammatthe tatiyā, karaṇatthe vā. Vaṇapaṭicchādanamatteneva bhesajjakaraṇamattenevāti pana visesanaṃ, na pana maṇḍanānubhavanādippakārena atthoti. Saṅkhāradukkhatādīhi niccāturassa kāyassa paribhogabhūtānaṃ pattacīvarānaṃ edisameva upamānamupapannanti tathā vacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sukhumattasallakkhaṇena uttamassa sampajānassa karaṇasīlattā, purimehi ca sampajānakārīhi uttamattā uttamasampajānakārī.
由于“不吃”等动作与特定的业用相连,仅凭“吃”等词本身即可了知与特定业用相应的特定动作,故说“‘吃’即指在团食中”等。所谓“有八种义”,即指八种用途。显示巴利原文
Asanādikiriyāya kammavisesayogato asitādipadeheva kammavisesasahito kiriyāviseso viññāyatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘asiteti piṇḍapātabhojane’’tiādi. Aṭṭhavidhopi atthoti aṭṭhappakāropi payojanaviseso.
其中,所谓团食等的“义”,依大西瓦长老的学说,即是经中“为维持此身”等(相应部4.120;增支部6.58、8.9;法集论1355;大义释206)所开示的八种用途。大西瓦长老(法集论注1.1355)说:“下四支是遮止,上八支则作为用途而结合。”其意谓:“仅为维持此身”为一支,“为存活”为一支,“为止息伤害”为一支,“为防护梵行”为一支,“如是我将遣除旧受”为一支,“不令新受生起”为一支,“我将存续”为一支,“与无过失”为一支,而“安乐住”仅是食之果报,应以此八支作为用途而结合。另外,“不为嬉戏”为一支,“不为骄慢”为一支,“不为装饰”为一支,“不为庄严”为一支,“仅为维持此身、为存活”为一支,“为止息伤害、为防护梵行”为一支,“如是我将遣除旧受,不令新受生起”为一支,“我将存续、与无过失”为一支,而“安乐住”仅是食之果报,此所说八支才是此处所指。何以故?若无用途,且此处仅以“义”字指他们故。难道不是依“不为嬉戏等道理”所说,由界定之语,即可了知此处所指为后一种道理吗?不是,因为以“不”显示巴利原文
Tattha piṇḍapātabhojanādīsu attho nāma iminā mahāsivattheravādavasena ‘‘imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 4.120; a. ni. 6.58; 8.9; dha. sa. 1355; mahāni. 206) sutte vuttaṃ aṭṭhavidhampi payojanaṃ dasseti. Mahāsivatthero (dha. sa. 1.1355) hi ‘‘heṭṭhā cattāri aṅgāni paṭikkhepo nāma, upari pana aṭṭhaṅgāni payojanavasena samodhānetabbānī’’ti vadati. Tattha ‘‘yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā’’ti ekamaṅgaṃ, ‘‘yāpanāyā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘vihiṃsūparatiyā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘brahmacariyānuggahāyā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘iti purāṇañca vedanaṃ paṭihaṅkhāmī’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘navañca vedanaṃ na uppādessāmī’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘yātrā ca me bhavissatī’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘anavajjatā cā’’ti ekaṃ, phāsuvihāro pana bhojanānisaṃsamattanti evaṃ aṭṭha aṅgāni payojanavasena samodhānetabbāni. Aññathā pana ‘‘neva davāyā’’ti ekamaṅgaṃ, ‘‘na madāyā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘na maṇḍanāyā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘na vibhūsanāyā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā yāpanāyā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘vihiṃsūparatiyā brahmacariyānuggahāyā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘iti purāṇañca vedanaṃ paṭihaṅkhāmi, navañca vedanaṃ na uppādessāmī’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘yātrā ca me bhavissatī’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘anavajjatā ca phāsuvihāro cā’’ti pana bhojanānisaṃsamattanti vuttāni aṭṭhaṅgāni idhānadhippetāni. Kasmāti ce? Payojanānameva abhāvato, tesameva ca idha atthasaddena vuttattā. Nanu ca ‘‘nevadavāyātiādinā nayena vutto’’ti mariyādavacanena dutiyanayasseva idhādhippetabhāvo viññāyatīti? Na, ‘‘neva davāyā’’tiādinā paṭikkhepaṅgadassanamukhena paccavekkhaṇapāḷiyā desitattā, yathādesitatantikkamasseva mariyādabhāvena dassanato. Pāṭhakkameneva hi ‘‘neva davāyātiādinā nayenā’’ti vuttaṃ, na atthakkamena, tena pana ‘‘imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyātiādinā nayenā’’ti vattabbanti.
就“分三次施与、分两次受取”而言,称为“接受”。为取用食物等而伸手,为进食等而作团食,如此次第,进食等作用唯依风界而显现。在“唯依风界之膨胀”一句中,“唯”字显示所应遮除者,如说“无有任何……”等。所谓“钥匙”即闭锁之物,亦称为“闩”。所谓“以机械”,即指依轮转之机械。凡在开、关、举、置等中运作,即依此而作,故为机械。粉碎是杵的作用;纳入而安立是臼的作用;以搅动、翻搅的方式转动是手的作用。“如是”,即如此。“在那里”,指在手的作用成就中,或表状态,或表原因,为处格。清唾即澄清的唾液,浊唾即浑浊的唾液。以名为“舌”的手,以搅动、翻搅的方式,于此于彼转动,是舌手的转动。匙与杓,在有些地方是同义词,因曾说:“男性词kaṭacchu,女性词dabbī”。但在此处,用以纳取食物等而持取者,当知为匙;用以舀出那些者,当知为杓。草敷,即作为安立处的稻草等敷设,这仅是举例。持者,即以安立处的状态而受持者。如同持地之水依于持彼之风,已受用的食物唯依风界而住于胃中,以此句“唯依风界而住”显示。确实,风界将已受用的食物显示巴利原文
Tidhā dente dvidhā gāhaṃ sandhāya ‘‘paṭiggahaṇaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ, bhojanādigahaṇatthāya hatthaotāraṇaṃ bhuñjanādiatthāya ālopakaraṇantiādinā anukkamena bhuñjanādipayogo vāyodhātuvaseneva vibhāvito. Vāyodhātuvipphārenevāti ettha eva-saddena nivattetabbaṃ dasseti ‘‘na kocī’’tiādinā. Kuñcikā nāma avāpuraṇaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘tāḷo’’tipi vadanti. Yantakenāti cakkayantakena. Yatati ugghāṭananigghāṭanaukkhipananikkhipanādīsu vāyamati etenāti hi yantakaṃ. Sañcuṇṇakaraṇaṃ musalakiccaṃ. Antokatvā patiṭṭhāpanaṃ udukkhalakiccaṃ. Āloḷitaviloḷitavasena parivattanaṃ hatthakiccaṃ. Itīti evaṃ. Tatthāti hatthakiccasādhane, bhāvalakkhaṇe, nimitte vā bhummaṃ. Tanukakheḷoti pasannakheḷo. Bahalakheḷoti āvilakheḷo. Jivhāsaṅkhātena hatthena āloḷitaviloḷitavasena ito cito ca parivattakaṃ jivhāhatthaparivattakaṃ. Kaṭacchu, dabbīti katthaci pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Pume kaṭacchu dabbitthī’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Idha pana yena bhojanādīni antokatvā gaṇhāti, so kaṭacchu, yāya pana tesamuddharaṇādīni karoti, sā dabbīti veditabbaṃ. Palālasanthāranti patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ palālādisanthāraṃ. Nidassanamattañhetaṃ. Dhārentoti patiṭṭhānabhāvena sampaṭicchanto. Pathavīsandhārakajalassa taṃsandhārakavāyunā viya paribhuttāhārassa vāyodhātunāva āmāsaye avaṭṭhānanti dasseti ‘‘vāyodhātuvaseneva tiṭṭhatī’’ti iminā. Tathā paribhuttañhi āhāraṃ vāyodhātu heṭṭhā ca tiriyañca ghanaṃ parivaṭumaṃ katvā yāva pakkā sannirujjhanavasena āmāsaye patiṭṭhitaṃ karotīti. Uddhanaṃ nāma yattha ukkhaliyādīni patiṭṭhāpetvā pacanti, yā ‘‘cullī’’tipi vuccati. Rassadaṇḍo daṇḍako. Patodo yaṭṭhi. Itīti vuttappakāramatidisati. Vuttappakārasseva hi dhātuvasena vibhāvanā. Tattha atiharatīti yāva mukhā abhiharati. Vītiharatīti tato kucchiyaṃ vimissaṃ karonto haratī’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.214) ācariyadhammapālatthero, ācariyānandatthero pana ‘‘tato yāva kucchi, tāva haratī’’ti (vibha. mūlaṭī. 523) āha. Tadubhayampi atthato ekameva ubhayatthāpi kucchisambandhamattaṃ haraṇasseva adhippetattā.
再者,“运至”是令食物越过口门而运入。“运过”是运入腹中并送至其内部各处。“持”是令安住于胃中。“转动”是作前后往复的转动。“粉碎”是如同以杵研磨一般将其粉碎。“令干”是作干燥处理,而非令其过分干燥。“排出”是从腹中导出体外。这些也是地界的作用,其义理如前所述。然而,那些关于执持、转动、粉碎、令干的作用,唯有与地界相结合的風界才能成办,并非单凭风界自身,因此那些也被视为地界的作用。“润滑”即是滋润。而“护持湿润性”,是指令其不因风界等而变得极度干燥,以不过度湿润的方式护持湿润的状态。“通道”是指食物进入、转动、排出等的通道。“识界”指意识界,因为此处以了别寻思、吞咽等作用为所欲求。于处处,即在于各别各别的寻思、吞咽等作用中。成为彼彼了别之缘、能成就彼彼者,即是正方便。凡依彼方便而成就寻思等,彼亦因不离彼之故,即成就其对应所缘境的了别。依彼、缘彼,即是此义。“转向”即依寻思的方式,及依感知吞咽、熟未熟等方式,而转向、了别那些寻思、吞咽、熟未熟等状态。当知因了别的作用以转向为先导,故此处亦摄入了了别。或者,正方便即是正行道。依彼、缘彼。“于内无有任何名为‘我’的食者”等,如此转向、作意、了别,即是此义。因为一显示巴利原文
Apica atiharatīti mukhadvāraṃ atikkāmento harati. Vītiharatīti kucchigataṃ passato harati. Dhāretīti āmāsaye patiṭṭhitaṃ karoti . Parivattetīti aparāparaṃ parivattanaṃ karoti. Sañcuṇṇetīti musalena viya sañcuṇṇanaṃ karoti. Visosetīti visosanaṃ nātisukkhaṃ karoti. Nīharatīti kucchito bahi niddhāreti. Pathavīdhātukiccesupi yathāvuttoyeva attho. Tāni pana āhārassa dhāraṇaparivattanasañcuṇṇanavisosanāni pathavīsahitā eva vāyodhātu kātuṃ sakkoti, na kevalā, tasmā tāni pathavīdhātuyāpi kiccabhāvena vuttāni. Sinehetīti temeti. Allattañca anupāletīti yathā vāyodhātuādīhi ativiya sosanaṃ na hoti, tathā allabhāvañca nātiallatākaraṇavasena anupāleti. Añjasoti āhārassa pavisanaparivattananikkhamanādīnaṃ maggo. Viññāṇadhātūti manoviññāṇadhātu pariyesanajjhoharaṇādivijānanassa adhippetattā. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ pariyesanajjhoharaṇādikicce. Taṃtaṃvijānanassa paccayabhūto taṃnipphādakoyeva payogo sammāpayogo nāma. Yena hi payogena pariyesanādi nipphajjati,. So tabbisayavijānanampi nipphādeti nāma tadavinābhāvato. Tamanvāya āgammāti attho. Ābhujatīti pariyesanavasena, ajjhāharaṇajiṇṇājiṇṇatādipaṭisaṃvedanavasena ca tāni pariyesanajjhoharaṇajiṇṇājiṇṇatādīni āvajjeti vijānāti. Āvajjanapubbakattā vijānanassa vijānanampettha gahitanti veditabbaṃ. Atha vā sammāpayogo nāma sammāpaṭipatti. Tamanvāya āgamma. ‘‘Abbhantare attā nāma koci bhuñjanako natthī’’tiādinā ābhujati samannāharati, vijānātīti attho. Ābhogapubbako hi sabbo viññāṇabyāpāroti ‘‘ābhujati’’cceva vuttaṃ.
从行而言:即依托于钵行,指向行境村落而行。归来亦因其具有行之性质,故也被此所摄。从寻而言:即于行境村落中为乞食而游走。因其具有寻求之性质,返回斋堂等处的近前,也被此所摄。从受用而言:即以齿杵粉碎后,在舌间翻转的刹那,便已失去色、香、味、触等殊胜品质,变得如同犬盆中的犬只呕吐物般极为可厌的食物,而加以受用。从住处而言:如此受用的食物,成为胆汁、痰、脓、血的住处,成为极为可厌之因,故从胃上方的胆汁等四种住处而言。所谓“住处”,即此诸种虽共存运转,但由业力所决定,依各自的界限而不相混杂,于此安住、于此运转,故为住处,也就是指安住于胃上方的胆汁等四种住处。此中“ā”前缀含有界限之义。从藏而言:即从胃而言。所谓“藏”,即如所食的食物积聚、安住于此,因此胃被称为“藏”。从未熟而言:即由名为消化火的业生之火,对已食食物进行消化,而处于未熟的状态。从熟而言:即由前述的业生火而得以成熟。从果而言:即从成就而言,或从正确消化与不正确消化的已食食物,依次产生发毛等如臭尸般的组成,以及肿疖等病患的成就,即从其作用而言。因为曾说“此是其果”。从泄出而言:即从眼、耳等多门,在此处或彼处泄出。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Gamanatoti bhikkhācāravasena gocaragāmaṃ uddissa gamanato. Paccāgamanampi gamanasabhāvattā imināva saṅgahitaṃ. Pariyesanatoti gocaragāme bhikkhāya āhiṇḍanato. Pariyesanasabhāvattā imināva paṭikkamanasālādiupasaṅkamanampi saṅgahitaṃ. Paribhogatoti dantamusalehi sañcuṇṇetvā jivhāya samparivattanakkhaṇeyeva antarahitavaṇṇagandhasaṅkhāravisesaṃ suvānadoṇiyaṃ suvānavamathu viya paramajegucchaṃ āhāraṃ paribhuñjanato. Āsayatoti evaṃ paribhuttassa āhārassa pittasemhapubbalohitāsayabhāvūpagamanena paramajigucchanahetubhūtato āmāsayassa upari patiṭṭhānakapittādicatubbidhāsayato. Āsayati ekajjhaṃ pavattamānopi kammabalavavatthito hutvā mariyādavasena aññamaññaṃ asaṅkarato tiṭṭhati pavattati etthāti hi āsayo, āmāsayassa upari patiṭṭhānako pittādi catubbidhāsayo. Mariyādattho hi ayamākāro. Nidhānatoti āmāsayato. Nidheti yathābhutto āhāro nicito hutvā tiṭṭhati etthāti hi āmāsayo ‘‘nidhāna’’nti vuccati. Aparipakkatoti bhuttāhāraparipācanena gahaṇīsaṅkhātena kammajatejasā aparipākato. Paripakkatoti yathāvuttakammajatejasāva paripākato. Phalatoti nipphattito, sammāparipaccamānassa, asammāparipaccamānassa ca bhuttāhārassa yathākkamaṃ kesādikuṇapadadduādirogābhinipphattisaṅkhātapayojanatoti vā attho. ‘‘Idamassa phala’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Nissandanatoti akkhikaṇṇādīsu anekadvāresu ito cito ca vissandanato. Vuttañhi –
食物、饮料、嚼食,以及殊胜的饮食;
从一门进入,从九门流出。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Annaṃ pānaṃ khādanīyaṃ, bhojanañca mahārahaṃ; Ekadvārena pavisitvā, navadvārehi sandatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.303);
“涂抹”是指在九处孔窍——如手、唇等肢体——于受用时及受用后,依适当方式被完全涂抹。应结合余下经文,于一切处观察食物的厌离相。而此处“从行走”等次第,是依每一种作用的完成次第而安立。然而,涂抹虽在受用等时可得,但因其排泄物而特别令人厌恶,故被置于最后,应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Sammakkhanatoti hatthaoṭṭhādiaṅgesu navasu dvāresu paribhogakāle, paribhuttakāle ca yathārahaṃ sabbaso makkhanato. Sabbattha āhāre paṭikkūlatā paccavekkhitabbāti saha pāṭhasesena yojanā. Taṃtaṃkiriyānipphattipaṭipāṭivasena cāyaṃ ‘‘gamanato’’tiādikā anupubbī ṭhapitā. Sammakkhanaṃ pana paribhogādīsu labbhamānampi nissandavasena visesato paṭikkūlanti sabbapacchā ṭhapitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“到达时”是指于适当之时,即依前述方式由火界成熟而到达粪便、尿的状态之时。由强忍便意所生的遍烧,令汗液从全身流出。正因如此,眼睛旋转,心也无法专一。其他如绞痛、瘘管等疾病也会生起。这一切如汗液流出等。显示巴利原文
Pattakāleti yuttakāle, yathāvuttena vā tejena paripaccanato uccārapassāvabhāvaṃ pattakāle. Vegasandhāraṇena uppannapariḷāhattā sakalasarīrato sedā muccanti. Tatoyeva akkhīni paribbhamanti, cittañca ekaggaṃ na hoti. Aññe ca sūlabhagandarādayo rogā uppajjanti. Sabbaṃ tanti sedamuccanādikaṃ.
“于不当之处”:指被人或非人占据的田地、天祠等不适宜的地方。因于彼处造作,被触怒的人或非人甚至可能令其丧命。而“罪”是指比丘、比丘尼依各自情况所犯的恶作、波逸提等。“于适当之处”则指与此相反的地方。所有这些都是罪等。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhāneti manussāmanussapariggahite khettadevāyatanādike ayuttaṭṭhāne. Tādise hi karontaṃ kuddhā manussā, amanussā vā jīvitakkhayampi pāpenti. Āpattīti pana bhikkhubhikkhunīnaṃ yathārahaṃ dukkaṭapācittiyā. Patirūpe ṭhāneti vuttaviparīte ṭhāne. Sabbaṃ tanti āpattiādikaṃ.
为破除“有自我存在,并因对该自我的欲求而排出”的愚者之想,故说“非因欲求”。意思是并非出于自己的意愿或努力,唯由风界的膨胀而排出。“已积聚的”是指由集合而住立的。“被风势所遍迫的”是指被风界的力量从各方面逼迫,这也是排出的原因之说。在说了“已积聚的粪尿”之后,又说“然而此粪尿”,是为了显示在相违释复合词中也有使用阳性的可能。因为它的确定特征就是单一性。由于是无关心地被排出的,所以既不是为自己的利益而存在,也不属于自己;因为不以布施的方式施舍给任何人,且是可厌恶的,所以也不属于他人,这是其义。“是身体的排泄物”是指从身体流出,仅仅是排出而已。有身体时它就有,没有时就没有,所以也说它只是身体的副产品。那是不合理的,因为与譬喻不一致。在那里,说“仅仅是维护而已”,其意思是仅仅是清除而已。如同竹筒等盛水容器,那只是被倒掉的水。显示巴利原文
Nikkhamāpetā attā nāma atthi, tassa kāmatāya nikkhamananti bālamaññanaṃ nivattetuṃ ‘‘akāmatāyā’’ti vuttaṃ, attano anicchāya apayogena vāyodhātuvipphāreneva nikkhamatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sannicitāti samuccayena ṭhitā. Vāyuvegasamuppīḷitāti vāyodhātuyā vegena samantato avapīḷitā, nikkhamanassa cetaṃ hetuvacanaṃ. ‘‘Sannicitā uccārapassāvā’’ti vatvā ‘‘so panāyaṃ uccārapassāvo’’ti puna vacanaṃ samāhāradvandepi pulliṅgapayogassa sambhavatādassanatthaṃ. Ekattameva hi tassa niyatalakkhaṇanti. Attanā nirapekkhaṃ nissaṭṭhattā neva attano atthāya santakaṃ vā hoti, kassacipi dīyanavasena anissajjitattā, jigucchanīyattā ca na parassapīti attho. Sarīranissandovāti sarīrato vissandanameva nikkhamanamattaṃ. Sarīre sati so hoti, nāsatīti sarīrassa ānisaṃsamattantipi vadanti. Tadayuttameva nidassanena visamabhāvato. Tattha hi ‘‘paṭijagganamattamevā’’ti vuttaṃ, paṭisodhanamattaṃ evāti cassa attho. Veḷunāḷiādiudakabhājanaṃ udakatumbo. Tanti chaḍḍitaudakaṃ.
“在‘已去’中,即是在行走中”——先前以“前进、返回”的摄持,已说明了在行走中身体向前、向后的延伸,因此这里只取了“行走”本身。这是阿难长老所说的,而某些人持有的论说则是法护长老所作。为什么呢?因为在行走中发生的身体向前、向后的延伸,与行走是不相离的,它已被限定于跨步行走的动作所包含,且与《分别论注》等相违。在那里,确实说明了行走在两方面既总括又有区别——显示巴利原文
‘‘Gateti gamane’’ti pubbe abhikkamapaṭikkamagahaṇena gamanepi purato, pacchato ca kāyassa atiharaṇaṃ vuttanti idha gamanameva gahita’’nti (vibha. mūlaṭī. 525) ācariyānandattherena vuttaṃ, taṃ kecivādo nāma ācariyadhammapālattherena kataṃ. Kasmāti ce? Gamane pavattassa purato, pacchato ca kāyātiharaṇassa tadavinābhāvato padavītihāraniyamitāya gamanakiriyāya eva saṅgahitattā, vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathādīhi (abhi. aṭṭha. 2.523) ca virodhanato. Vuttañhi tattha gamanassa ubhayattha samavarodhattaṃ, bhedattañca –
在此,一种威仪于两处被述及。其中‘前进、返回’是依据前往乞食村落及返回时的长途行走而说;‘已去、站立、坐下’则是依据在寺院中碎步抬足的威仪而说,应当如此了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettha ca eko iriyāpatho dvīsu ṭhānesu āgato. So heṭṭhā ‘abhikkante paṭikkante’ti ettha bhikkhācāragāmaṃ gacchato ca āgacchato ca addhānagamanavasena kathito. ‘Gate ṭhite nisinne’ti ettha vihāre cuṇṇikapāduddhārairiyāpathavasena kathitoti veditabbo’’ti.
为了显示在‘已去’等之中,仅是依状态的不同而有作用的差别,并非意义的差别,而说了‘或正在行走’等。因此说‘所以’等。在那里,于经中——即长部与中部所收的《念处经》中,‘长途威仪’指长时间持续、历时久远的威仪,因‘长途’一词含有长时间之义,如‘它是耐久的、能长久住立的’等句所示;或者指长途行走中所发生、长路行程的威仪,因‘长途’是长路的同义词,如‘长途旅行之时’等句所示。‘中等’指依乞食等而发生、时间不太长或路程不太远的威仪。‘碎威仪’指在寺院或其他地方,依各处转动等而发生的微细威仪,因微细而成为粉碎的状态,世间人甚至把微细之物也称为‘粉碎’。‘小碎威仪’是另一种读法,意思是成为微细后,依前述方式而成为粉碎的威仪。‘所以’,正是由于如此依状态的不同而仅说明了威仪的区分。‘在那些之中’指在‘已去、站立’等之中。‘依所述方式’指依‘前进’等中所述的方式。显示巴利原文
‘‘Gate’’tiādīsu avatthābhedena kiriyābhedoyeva, na pana atthabhedoti dassetuṃ ‘‘gacchanto vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi . Tattha sutteti dīghanikāye, majjhimanikāye ca saṅgīte satipaṭṭhānasutte (dī. ni. 2.372; ma. ni. 1.105) addhānairiyāpathāti cirapavattakā dīghakālikā iriyāpathā addhānasaddassa cirakālavacanato ‘‘addhaniyaṃ assa ciraṭṭhitika’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.184; 3.177; pārā. 21) viya, addhānagamanapavattakā vā dīghamaggikā iriyāpathā. Addhānasaddo hi dīghamaggapariyāyo ‘‘addhānagamanasamayo’’tiādīsu (pāci. 213, 217) viya. Majjhimāti bhikkhācārādivasena pavattā nāticirakālikā, nātidīghamaggikā vā iriyāpathā. Cuṇṇiyairiyāpathāti vihāre, aññattha vā ito cito ca parivattanādivasena pavattā appamattakabhāvena cuṇṇavicuṇṇiyabhūtā iriyāpathā. Appamattakampi hi ‘‘cuṇṇavicuṇṇa’’nti loke vadanti. ‘‘Khuddakacuṇṇikairiyāpathā’’tipi pāṭho, khuddakā hutvā vuttanayena cuṇṇikā iriyāpathāti attho. Tasmāti evaṃ avatthābhedena iriyāpathabhedamattassa kathanato. Tesupīti ‘‘gate ṭhite’’tiādīsupi. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘abhikkante’’tiādīsu vuttanayena.
‘在后部分’指行走威仪之后的部分。‘站立’指具足站立的威仪。‘就在这里’指就在经行处。如此,于一切处随宜适用。显示巴利原文
Aparabhāgeti gamanairiyāpathato aparabhāge. Ṭhitoti ṭhitairiyāpathasampanno. Etthevāti caṅkamaneyeva. Evaṃ sabbattha yathārahaṃ.
不似行走、站立、坐下的情形,对于坐具与卧处,说其次第并不恰当,因为大多没有那样的次第,因此唯说‘起立’。显示巴利原文
Gamanaṭhānanisajjānaṃ viya nisīdanasayanassa kamavacanamayuttaṃ yebhuyyena tathā kamābhāvatoti ‘‘uṭṭhāya’’ micceva vuttaṃ.
再者,由于此处安立了‘醒觉’一词,仅将出离有分而出眠称为‘卧’,并非仅仅指伸展背部,故说‘唯作性转起’等。正如《昼卧学处》(《分别》77)中,伸展背部亦以卧的威仪路为同一特相,应知此处同样包含在内。‘所作’即唯作,指身等作用;能产生他们作用者,即‘唯作性’——因为转示后缀有多重含义。又或者,转向二种作用称为‘唯作’,由此所造作、产生的,即是‘唯作性’。因为通过转向,有分断绝时路心即生起。由于一再生起,以种种方式转起、流转,故称‘转起’。然而,有些地方有‘诸心’的读法,须知此与《阿毗达摩注》(《分别注》523)及其复注相违,故非古传读法。如是,唯作性转起即是速行,或一切六门路心。因此,《阿毗达摩复注》(《分别根本复注》525)说:‘由于身等是唯作性,且由转向唯作所等起,故速行或一切六门转起,称为唯作性转起。’‘不转起’应理解为:出眠时的不生起,即称为‘睡眠’。须知此为不了义说,否则,倘若以先行、后随方式生起的六门心,以及一切离门心的转起,都可称为‘睡眠’;如此,则出眠时……显示巴利原文
Jāgaritasaddasannidhānato cettha bhavaṅgotaraṇavasena niddokkamanameva sayanaṃ, na pana piṭṭhipasāraṇamattanti dasseti ‘‘kiriyāmayapavattāna’’ntiādinā. Divāseyyasikkhāpade (pārā. 77) viya piṭṭhipasāraṇassāpi sayanairiyāpathabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā etthāvarodhanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Karaṇaṃ kiriyā, kāyādikiccaṃ, taṃ nibbattentīti kiriyāmayāni taddhitasaddānamanekatthavuttito. Atha vā āvajjanadvayakiccaṃ kiriyā, tāya pakatāni, nibbattāni vā kiriyāmayāni. Āvajjanavasena hi bhavaṅgupacchede sati vīthicittāni uppajjantīti. Aparāparuppattiyā nānappakārato vattanti parivattantīti pavattāni. Katthaci pana ‘‘cittāna’’nti pāṭho, so abhidhammaṭṭhakathādīhi, (vibha. aṭṭha. 523) taṭṭīkāhi ca viruddhattā na porāṇapāṭhoti veditabbo. Kiriyāmayāni eva pavattāni tathā, javanaṃ, sabbampi vā chadvārikavīthicittaṃ. Tenāha abhidhammaṭīkāyaṃ (vibha. mūlaṭī. 525) ‘‘kāyādikiriyāmayattā , āvajjanakiriyāsamuṭṭhitattā ca javanaṃ, sabbampi vā chadvārappavattaṃ kiriyāmayapavattaṃ nāmā’’ti. Appavattanti niddokkamanakāle anuppajjanaṃ suttaṃ nāmāti attho gahetabbo. Neyyatthavacanañhi idaṃ, itarathā chadvārikacittānaṃ purecarānucaravasena uppajjantānaṃ sabbesampi dvāravimuttacittānaṃ pavattaṃ suttaṃ nāma siyā, evañca katvā niddokkamanakālato aññasmiṃ kāle uppajjantānaṃ dvāravimuttacittānampi pavattaṃ jāgarite saṅgayhatīti veditabbaṃ.
由于声音是依于作为心之加行因的唇等,在各自的位置上产生的,故说‘依于唇’等。虽然声音依于位置而生,但意旨是:唯依唇之开合等加行而生,并非离彼加行而生。然而,有些人说:‘“依于唇”等是声音生起处的显示’,这完全不合理,因为并非如此说。因为以‘依于唇’等与具伴随义的业格,不可能表示处所。‘随顺彼’即随顺彼声音。由于与观察言说相违,在沉默的方面,未说‘后来观察“已说”’,由此可知:‘即沉默而观察,此是义’。显示巴利原文
Cittassa payogakāraṇabhūte oṭṭhādike paṭicca yathāsakaṃ ṭhāne saddo jāyatīti āha ‘‘oṭṭhe ca paṭiccā’’tiādi. Kiñcāpi saddo yathāṭhānaṃ jāyati, oṭṭhālanādinā pana payogeneva jāyati, na vinā tena payogenāti adhippāyo. Keci pana vadanti ‘‘oṭṭhe cātiādi sadduppattiṭṭhānanidassana’’nti, tadayuttameva tathā avacanato. Na hi ‘‘oṭṭhe ca paṭiccā’’tiādinā sasamuccayena kammavacanena ṭhānavacanaṃ sambhavatīti. Tadanurūpanti tassa saddassa anurūpaṃ. Bhāsanassa paṭisañcikkhanavirodhato tuṇhībhāvapakkhe ‘‘aparabhāge bhāsito iti paṭisañcikkhatī’’ti na vuttaṃ, tena ca viññāyati ‘‘tuṇhībhūtova paṭisañcikkhatīti attho’’ti.
假若言说与沉默的自性确有差别,那么这种区分才可能合理;实则不然,因此便以反问的方式提出:‘因为在所造色的转起中……’等等。所谓所造色的声处,其转起正是如此:声处转起即是‘言说’,不转起即是‘沉默’。这便是此处所说之义。显示巴利原文
Bhāsanatuṇhībhāvānaṃ sabhāvato bhede sati ayaṃ vibhāgo yutto siyā, nāsatīti anuyogenāha ‘‘upādārūpapavattiyañhī’’tiādi. Upādārūpassa saddāyatanassa pavatti tathā, saddāyatanassa pavattanaṃ bhāsanaṃ, appavattanaṃ tuṇhīti vuttaṃ hoti.
然而,由于大西瓦长老的宗义主张:在每一紧接而来的威仪中,通过观察转起的色法与名法皆于彼处即灭,以此确立正知而行。因此,应知这是依《大念处经》中所说的‘不痴正知’毗婆舍那门来理解,而非依四种正知的分类。是故,此义唯于彼处被承许,于此处则不承许;为了显示这一点,而说‘此则’等语。‘不痴为重任’——即其言说以不痴为首要,故称‘不痴重任’,此言也正是为了含摄其主张唯在《大念处经》中才被承认的原因。然而,在此教法中,为了现见沙门果的殊胜,一切四种正知皆可成就;故为了显示此义于此亦得承许,而说‘然于此’等语。‘依所说的方法’即依于前行等处所开示的方法。‘难道不是’——这是为了澄清一个质疑:既然总说为‘具念正知者’,为何在此详释中唯独依正知而作广释?于是说‘正知而行者’等,其意为:应依与念相应的正知来解了义理,故而作此广释。又以‘唯与念相应’一语,显示正如正知在作用上被取为首要,念也同样被取为首要,并非仅仅显示二者俱在而已。因为,决无离念而能转起的智慧。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana mahāsivattheravāde anantare anantare iriyāpathe pavattarūpārūpadhammānaṃ tattha tattheva nirodhadassanavasena sampajānakāritā gahitā, tasmā taṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhānasutte (dī. ni. 2.376; ma. ni. 1.109) āgataasammohasampajaññavipassanāvāravasena veditabbaṃ, na catubbidhasampajaññavibhāgavasena, ato tattheva tamadhippetaṃ, na idhāti dassento ‘‘tayida’’ntiādimāha. Asammohasaṅkhātaṃ dhuraṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ yassa vacanassāti asammohadhuraṃ, mahāsatipaṭṭhānasutteyeva tassa vacanassa adhippetabhāvassa hetugabbhamidaṃ vacanaṃ. Yasmā panettha sabbampi catubbidhaṃ sampajaññaṃ labbhati yāvadeva sāmaññaphalavisesadassanapadhānattā imissā desanāya, tasmā taṃ idha adhippetanti dassetuṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vuttanayenevāti abhikkantādīsu vuttanayeneva. Nanu ‘‘satisampajaññena samannāgato’’ti etassa uddesassāyaṃ niddeso, atha kasmā sampajaññavaseneva vitthāro katoti codanaṃ sodhento ‘‘sampajānakārīti cā’’tiādimāha, satisampayuttasseva sampajānassa vasena atthassa viditabbattā evaṃ vitthāro katoti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Satisampayuttassevā’’ti ca iminā yathā sampajaññassa kiccato padhānatā gahitā, evaṃ satiyāpīti atthaṃ dasseti, na panetaṃ satiyā sampajaññena saha bhāvamattadassanaṃ. Na hi kadāci satirahitā ñāṇappavatti atthīti.
或许有人问难:‘此广释不是唯依正知而作的吗?若如此,为何还要依与念相应的正知来解了义理?’为澄清这一质疑,而说:‘因为“具念正知者”这一句的广释正是此’。这是说:既然是对总说‘具念正知者’的义理而作广释,那么在详释中,正如在总说中一样,这二者也是以同等的分量而被取用的。由此也显示了念与正知的同等分量性——通过宣述总说义理的广释,此义便得成立。现在,为以《分别论》的方法证成此义,又说:‘然于《分别论》中’等。这也显示了,正如正知一样,念在这里也同样被取为首要。其中,‘这些句’便是指‘于前行时、后退时,为正知而行者’等总说的句子;‘已分别’则是说,未作念与正知的相应,于一切处各别地加以分别。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca sampajaññavasenevāyaṃ vitthāro, atha kasmā satisampayuttassa sampajaññassa vasena attho veditabboti codanampi sodheti ‘‘satisampajaññena samannāgatoti etassa hi padassa ayaṃ vitthāro’’ti iminā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘satisampajaññena samannāgato’’ti evaṃ ekato uddiṭṭhassa atthassa vitthārattā uddese viya niddesepi tadubhayaṃ samadhurabhāveneva gahitanti. Imināpi hi satiyā sampajaññena samadhurataṃyeva vibhāveti ekato uddiṭṭhassa atthassa vitthārabhāvadassanena tadatthassa siddhattā. Idāni vibhaṅganayenāpi tadatthaṃ samatthetuṃ ‘‘vibhaṅgappakaraṇe panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Imināpi hi sampajaññassa viya satiyāpettha padhānataṃyeva vibhāveti. Tattha etāni padānīti ‘‘abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hotī’’tiādīni uddesapadāni. Vibhattānevāti satiyā sampajaññena sampayogamakatvā sabbaṭṭhānesu visuṃ visuṃ vibhattāniyeva.
然而,中部诵者与阿毗达摩论师(《分别论注》523)则这样说:一位比丘在行走时,若心思他事、寻思他事而行走,是一类;另一类则不舍业处而行走。同样,一位比丘在站立时,若心思他事、寻思他事而站立,是一类;另一类则不舍业处而站立。一位比丘在坐时,若心思他事、寻思他事而坐,是一类;另一类则不舍业处而坐。一位比丘在躺卧时,若心思他事、寻思他事而躺卧,是一类;另一类则不舍业处而躺卧。然而,仅凭这些,行处正知并不明显,所以以经行为说明。因为,那位比丘进入经行道后,站在经行道的一端,这样观照:‘在东端生起的名色法,未达西端便在此灭去;在西端生起的,未达东端便在此灭去;在经行道中间生起的,未达两端便在此灭去;在经行中生起的名色法,未达站立处便在此灭去;在站立处生起的,未达坐处便在此灭去;在坐处生起的,未达躺卧处便在此灭去。’如此观照时,就在观照之际,令心转入有分;起身时,即取业处而起。这位比丘即称为于行走等中行正知者。显示巴利原文
Majjhimabhāṇakā, pana ābhidhammikā (vibha. aṭṭha. 523) ca evaṃ vadanti – eko bhikkhu gacchanto aññaṃ cintento aññaṃ vitakkento gacchati, eko kammaṭṭhānaṃ avissajjetvāva gacchati. Tathā eko tiṭṭhanto aññaṃ cintento aññaṃ vitakkento tiṭṭhati, eko kammaṭṭhānaṃ avissajjetvāva tiṭṭhati. Eko nisīdanto aññaṃ cintento aññaṃ vitakkento nisīdati, eko kammaṭṭhānaṃ avissajjetvāva nisīdati. Eko sayanto aññaṃ cintento aññaṃ vitakkento sayati, eko kammaṭṭhānaṃ avissajjetvāva sayati. Ettakena pana gocarasampajaññaṃ na pākaṭaṃ hotīti caṅkamanena dīpenti. Yo hi bhikkhu caṅkamaṃ otaritvā caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ ṭhito pariggaṇhāti ‘‘pācīnacaṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ pavattā rūpārūpadhammā pacchimacaṅkamanakoṭiṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā, pacchimacaṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ pavattāpi pācīnacaṅkamanakoṭiṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā, caṅkamanavemajjhe pavattā ubho koṭiyo appatvā ettheva niruddhā, caṅkamane pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ṭhānaṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā, ṭhāne pavattā nisajjaṃ, nisajjāya pavattā sayanaṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā’’ti evaṃ pariggaṇhanto pariggaṇhantoyeva bhavaṅgaṃ otāreti, uṭṭhahanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvāva uṭṭhahati. Ayaṃ bhikkhu gatādīsu sampajānakārī nāma hoti.
然而,在睡眠中业处不明显,业处不明显是不应做的。因此,那位比丘应尽其所能地经行、站立、坐下之后,躺卧时这样观照:‘身体无识,床无识;身体不知“我卧于床上”,床亦不知“身体卧于我上”。无识的身体卧于无识的床上。’如此观照时,就在观照之际,令心转入有分;醒来时,即取业处而醒。这位比丘即称为于睡眠中行正知者。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pana sutte kammaṭṭhānaṃ avibhūtaṃ hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ avibhūtaṃ na kātabbaṃ, tasmā yo bhikkhu yāva sakkoti, tāva caṅkamitvā ṭhatvā nisīditvā sayamāno evaṃ pariggahetvā sayati ‘‘kāyo acetano, mañco acetano, kāyo na jānāti ‘ahaṃ mañce sayito’ti, mañcopi na jānāti ‘mayi kāyo sayito’ti. Acetano kāyo acetane mañce sayito’’ti. Evaṃ pariggaṇhanto pariggaṇhantoyeva cittaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ otāreti, pabujjhanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvāva pabujjhati, ayaṃ sutte sampajānakārī nāma hoti.
比丘如此观照:‘由于达成身等作用而与之相融,及由转向作用等起故,速行生起;或者,一切于六门转起的唯作作用转起,当此存在时,便名为醒觉。’这位比丘即称为于醒觉中行正知者。再者,若将昼夜分为六分,于五分中保持觉醒,亦称为于醒觉中行正知者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kāyādikiriyānipphattanena tammayattā, āvajjanakiriyāsamuṭṭhitattā ca javanaṃ, sabbampi vā chadvārappavattaṃ kiriyāmayapavattaṃ nāma, tasmiṃ sati jāgaritaṃ nāma hotī’’ti pariggaṇhanto bhikkhu jāgarite sampajānakārī nāma. Apica rattindivaṃ cha koṭṭhāse katvā pañca koṭṭhāse jaggantopi jāgarite sampajānakārī nāma hoti.
以解脱处为纲而说法者,以及舍弃三十二种畜生论、依止十论事而说适宜之论者,也称为言语中具正知而行者。显示巴利原文
Vimuttāyatanasīsena dhammaṃ desentopi, bāttiṃsa tiracchānakathā pahāya dasakathāvatthunissitaṃ sappāyakathaṃ kathentopi bhāsite sampajānakārī nāma.
于三十八种所缘中,令心适悦之作意而转起者,以及入第二禅者,也称为于沉默中行正知者。因为第二禅无有语行,故特名为沉默。此理趣亦是前一种理趣的简别,故也应在此处引用。实际上,此理趣在《阿毗达摩注》等中,以‘然此中复有另一理趣’为开端,已如前所述作了阐明。‘大王,如是’等,是所说义的结语,为显示与彼处解说相应的含义,故说‘如是’等。‘与念相应之正知’即是与解说相应的含义而说。其中的抉择已如前说。‘如是’即是以所述方式,于前进、返回等七处,各以四种方式之义。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu cittaruciyaṃ manasikāraṃ pavattentopi dutiyajjhānaṃ samāpannopi tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī nāma. Dutiyañhi jhānaṃ vacīsaṅkhāravirahato visesato tuṇhībhāvo nāmāti. Ayampi nayo purimanayato visesanayattā idhāpi āharitvā vattabbo. Tathā hesa abhidhammaṭṭhakathādīsu (vibha. aṭṭha. 523) ‘‘ayaṃ panettha aparopi nayo’’ti ārabhitvā yathāvuttanayo vibhāvitoti. ‘‘Evaṃ kho mahārājā’’tiādi yathāniddiṭṭhassa atthassa nigamanaṃ, tasmā tattha niddesānurūpaṃ atthaṃ dassento ‘‘eva’’ntiādimāha. Satisampayuttassa sampajaññassāti hi niddesānurūpaṃ atthavacanaṃ. Tattha vinicchayo vuttoyeva. Evanti iminā vuttappakārena abhikkantapaṭikkantādīsu sattasu ṭhānesu paccekaṃ catubbidhena pakārenāti attho.
知足论解说显示巴利原文
Santosakathāvaṇṇanā
215 215. 因见义便能知词,故不依词而仅示其义,为显示‘因知足存在于自身,故比丘被称为知足者’之义,而说‘具足随所得资具之知足’。因为‘知足而不贪婪’即是词源解释。再者,当依词源解释而说其义时,若因某种知足存在于自身而名为知足者,但彼知足尚不明显,为使其明显,便说‘具足随所得资具之知足’这一纯义,即是对衣等任何如法资具,以知足而具足之义。因为‘itara’一词是不定之语,说两次时,与‘任何’一词同义。故说‘于任何如法资具中’。或者,‘itara’被说为劣,因异于胜;同样,胜亦因异于劣。因为‘异性’依相互观待而成立,故应知此义为:以劣或胜之衣等如法资具,以知足而具足。彼以此而知足,或知足即是知足本身,即是以如是方式转起的无贪,或以无贪为增上的四蕴。所得即是利得,依随自所得而知足为随得知足。力是身力,依随自身力而知足为随力知足。适宜是适当、合宜、比丘的相应性,依随自适宜而知足为随适宜知足。显示巴利原文
215. Atthadassanena padassapi viññāyamānattā padamanapekkhitvā santosassa attani atthitāya bhikkhu santuṭṭhoti pavuccatīti atthamattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘itarītarapaccayasantosena samannāgato’’ti vuttaṃ. Santussati na luddho bhavatīti hi padanibbacanaṃ. Apica padanibbacanavasena atthe vutte yassa santosassa attani atthibhāvato santuṭṭho nāma, so apākaṭoti taṃ pākaṭakaraṇatthaṃ ‘‘itarītarapaccayasantosena samannāgato’’ti atthamattamāha, cīvarādike yattha katthaci kappiyapaccaye santosena samaṅgībhūtoti attho. Itara-saddo hi aniyamavacano dvikkhattuṃ vuccamāno yaṃ kiñci-saddena samānattho hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yattha katthaci kappiyapaccaye’’ti. Atha vā itaraṃ vuccati hīnaṃ paṇītato aññattā, tathā paṇītampi hīnato aññattā. Aññamaññāpekkhāsiddhā hi itaratā, tasmā hīnena vā paṇītena vā cīvarādikappiyapaccayena santosena samaṅgībhūtoti attho daṭṭhabbo. Santussati tena, santussanamattanti vā santoso, tathā pavatto alobho, alobhapadhānā vā cattāro khandhā. Labhanaṃ lābho, attano lābhassa anurūpaṃ santoso yathālābhasantoso. Balanti kāyabalaṃ, attano balassa anurūpaṃ santoso yathābalasantoso.Sāruppanti sappāyaṃ patirūpaṃ bhikkhuno anucchavikatā, attano sāruppassa anurūpaṃ santoso yathāsāruppasantoso.
另一种方法——‘得到’故为‘得’;任何所得即随所得,指随缘所得的任何资具。以随所得而满足,即是‘随所得满足’。‘随力’指随顺自身力量而行,即与自身力量相称的资具;此处的‘随’字表示具备方便的相称行为,正如‘增上心’中的‘增上’一词表示具备方便的增上行为。以随力而满足,即是‘随力满足’。‘适宜’指相称、合适,或能令善美生起,故为‘适宜’;任何适宜即随适宜,指适合比丘的资具;以随适宜而满足,即是‘随适宜满足’。随上述分类而作的注释,名为‘分类注释’。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – labbhateti lābho, yo yo lābho yathālābhaṃ, itarītarapaccayo, yathālābhena santoso yathālābhasantoso. Balassa anurūpaṃ pavattatīti yathābalaṃ, attano balānucchavikapaccayo, yathā-saddo cettha sasādhanaṃ anurūpakiriyaṃ vadati, yathā taṃ ‘‘adhicitta’’nti ettha adhi-saddo sasādhanaṃ adhikaraṇakiriyanti. Yathābalena santoso yathābalasantoso. Sāruppati patirūpaṃ bhavati, sobhanaṃ vā āropetīti sāruppaṃ, yaṃ yaṃ sāruppaṃ yathāsāruppaṃ, bhikkhuno sappāyapaccayo, yathāsāruppena santoso yathāsāruppasantoso. Yathāvuttaṃ pabhedamanugatā vaṇṇanā pabhedavaṇṇanā.
‘于此’指在教法中。‘不希求其他’表示无未得之希求的状态;即使得到也不执取,表示无已得之希求。应知:第一句已说无未得之希求时,对于随所得之外不希求,也可能以少欲的状态出现,因此为了避免与少欲混淆,为了显示满足本身的自相,第二句说了无已得之希求。以下也是如此。‘本性虚弱’指即使无疾病等,本性也虚弱。‘同分’指具有同等戒等分者,或与戒等功德分共住者,即由具惭耻、善行的比丘。‘将其交换’指因本性虚弱等,粗重之衣不带来舒适且导致身体疲劳,故以利益为目的而交换,并非出于贪婪等。若以贪婪等方式交换后使用轻衣,则与满足相违;但由于他没有那种情况,以如上所述的利益为目的交换后使用轻衣,也不违背满足,故说‘即使以轻衣度日,也是满足者’。以利益为目的交换后使用轻衣尚且不违满足,何况不那样交换而使用呢?此处用‘亦’字正是为了显示这一被尊崇的意义。在衣的解说中,‘钵、衣等中的任何一种’这句话,是为了显示按字面理解的其余资具的满足,被包含在衣的满足中。‘这位尊者摩罗迦是上座’等中,上座的称呼虽仅依施设而存在。显示巴利原文
Idhāti sāsane. Aññaṃ na patthetīti appattapatthanabhāvamāha, labhantopi na gaṇhātīti pattapatthanābhāvaṃ. Paṭhamena appattapatthanābhāveyeva vutte yathāladdhato aññassa apatthanā nāma appicchatāyapi siyā pavattiākāroti appicchatāpasaṅgabhāvato tatopi nivattameva santosassa sarūpaṃ dassetuṃ dutiyena pattapatthanābhāvo vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evamuparipi. Pakatidubbaloti ābādhādivirahepi sabhāvadubbalo. Samāno sīlādibhāgo yassāti sabhāgo, saha vā sīlādīhi guṇabhāgehi vattatīti sabhāgo, lajjīpesalo bhikkhu, tena. Taṃ parivattetvāti pakatidubbalādīnaṃ garucīvaraṃ na phāsubhāvāvahaṃ, sarīrakhedāvahañca hotīti payojanavasena parivattanaṃ vuttaṃ, na atricchatādivasena. Atricchatādippakārena hi parivattetvā lahukacīvaraparibhogo santosavirodhī hoti, tassa pana tadabhāvato yathāvuttappayojanavasena parivattetvā lahukacīvaraparibhogopi na santosavirodhīti āha ‘‘lahukena yāpentopi santuṭṭhova hotī’’ti. Payojanavasena parivattetvā lahukacīvaraparibhogopi na tāva santosavirodhī, pageva tathā aparivattetvā paribhogeti sambhāvitassa atthassa dassanatthañhettha api-saddaggahaṇaṃ. Cīvaraniddesepi ‘‘pattacīvarādīnaṃ aññatara’’nti vacanaṃ yathārutaṃ gahitāvasesapaccayasantosassa cīvarasantose samavarodhitādassanatthaṃ. ‘‘Therako ayamāyasmā mallako’’tiādīsu theravohārassa paññattimattepi pavattito dasavassato pabhuti ciravassapabbajitesveva idha pavattiñāpanatthaṃ ‘‘therānaṃ cirapabbajitāna’’nti vuttaṃ, therānanti vā saṅghattheraṃ vadati. Cirapabbajitānanti pana tadavasese vuḍḍhabhikkhū. Saṅkārakūṭāditoti kacavararāsiādito. Anantakānīti nantakāni pilotikāni. ‘‘A-kāro cettha nipātamatta’’nti (vi. va. aṭṭha. 1165) vimānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Tathā cāhu ‘‘nantakaṃ kappaṭo jiṇṇavasanaṃ tu paṭaccara’’nti natthi dasāsaṅkhāto anto koṭi yesanti hi nantakāni, na-saddassa tu anādese anantakānītipi yujjati. Saṅketakovidānaṃ pana ācariyānaṃ tathā avuttattā vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Sanantakānī’’tipi pāṭho, nantakena saha saṃsibbitāni paṃsukūlāni cīvarānīti attho. Saṅghāṭinti tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataraṃ cīvaraṃ. Tīṇipi hi cīvarāni saṅghaṭitattā ‘‘saṅghāṭī’’ti vuccanti. Mahagghaṃ cīvaraṃ, bahūni vā cīvarāni labhitvā tāni vissajjetvā tadaññassa gahaṇampi mahicchatādinaye aṭṭhatvā yathāsāruppanaye eva ṭhitattā na santosavirodhīti āha ‘‘tesaṃ…pe… dhārentopi santuṭṭhova hotī’’ti. Yathāsāruppanayena yathāladdhaṃ vissajjetvā tadaññagahaṇampi na tāva santosavirodhī, pageva anaññagahaṇena yathāladdhasseva yathāsāruppaṃ paribhogeti sambhāvitassa atthassa dassanatthañhettha api-saddaggahaṇaṃ, evaṃ sesapaccayesupi yathābalayathāsāruppaniddesesu api-saddaggahaṇe adhippāyo veditabbo.
‘违逆本性’指本质上就不适合。为了显示以修习沙门法为名寻求适当资具及受用,尤其更为合理这一深层含义,故不说‘即使度日’,而说‘即使修习沙门法’。‘杂粮’指将米、绿豆等各种谷物和豆类混合制成的食物。显示巴利原文
Pakativiruddhanti sabhāveneva asappāyaṃ. Samaṇadhammakaraṇasīsena sappāyapaccayapariyesanaṃ, paribhuñjanañca visesato yuttataranti atthantaraṃ viññāpetuṃ ‘‘yāpentopī’’ti avatvā ‘‘samaṇadhammaṃ karontopī’’ti vuttaṃ. Missakāhāranti taṇḍulamuggādīhi nānāvidhapubbaṇṇāparaṇṇehi missetvā kataṃ āhāraṃ.
为了说明在住所方面还有另一种随宜知足,故说“因为那位……”等。因为在第一种情况中,是以放弃所获得的来说明随宜知足;在第二种情况中,则是以不接受所获得的来说明随宜知足,这是二者的差别。此处的“hi”字表示提出另一方面的说明。但在《中部注》中见到的是“pi”字。在说了“上等住所是放逸之处”之后,为了显示其特征,便说“在那里坐着……”等。“被睡眠所征服”是指因昏沉睡眠的生起,心与心所处于病态,从而被称作有分相续的睡眠所征服,即正在睡眠的意思。“醒来时”指以那样的所缘而醒来时,由于醒来的原因,欲寻便会生起。有些地方也见到“从醒来”的读法。“这也是”是相对于第一种情况而说的。显示巴利原文
Aññampi senāsane yathāsāruppasantosaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yo hī’’tiādi. Paṭhame hi naye yathāladdhassa vissajjanena, dutiye pana yathāpattassa asampaṭicchanena yathāsāruppasantoso vuttoti ayametesaṃ viseso. Hi-saddo cettha pakkhantarajotako. Majjhimāgamaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana pi-saddo dissati. ‘‘Uttamasenāsanaṃ nāma pamādaṭṭhāna’’nti vatvā tabbhāvameva dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha nisinnassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Niddābhibhūtassāti thinamiddokkamanena cittacetasikagelaññabhāvato bhavaṅgasantatisaṅkhātāya niddāya abhibhūtassa, niddāyantassāti attho. Paṭibujjhatoti tathārūpena ārammaṇantarena paṭibujjhantassa paṭibujjhanahetu kāmavitakkā pātubhavantīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Paṭibujjhanato’’tipi hi katthaci pāṭho dissati. Ayampīti paṭhamanayaṃ upādāya vuttaṃ.
“由他们带来的”:指由那些上座等带来的,或补充“由他们中任何一位所拥有的”来连接。“牛尿诃子”:指用牛尿浸泡过的,或因腐烂而被丢弃的诃子;如今书中有“牛尿诃子”的读法,但那不是古本读法,因为与其注释相违。“四甜”:指《中部·大法受持经》中所说的酪、蜜、酥油、糖浆这四种甜食;将四甜置于一个容器中,说:“尊者,您想要哪一种,便取哪一种吧。”“如果他有……”等,显示这两者能平息疾病。“为佛等所称赞”:指“依腐烂的牛尿药而出家”等,为正自觉者等所赞叹。由于致力于具备少欲的殊胜知足,以最上、达到极点的知足而知足,故称为“最上知足者”。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ ābhatenāti tehi therādīhi ābhatena, tesaṃ vā yena kenaci santakenāti ajjhāharitvā sambandho. Muttaharītakanti gomuttaparibhāvitaṃ, pūtibhāvena vā mocitaṃ chaḍḍitaṃ harītakaṃ, idāni pana potthakesu ‘‘gomuttaharītaka’’nti pāṭho, so na porāṇapāṭho tabbaṇṇanāya (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.215) viruddhattā. Catumadhuranti majjhimāgamavare mahādhammasamādānasutte (ma. ni. 1.484 ādayo) vuttaṃ dadhimadhusappiphāṇitasaṅkhātaṃ catumadhuraṃ, ekasmiñca bhājane catumadhuraṃ ṭhapetvā tesu yadicchasi, taṃ gaṇhāhi bhanteti attho. ‘‘Sacassā’’tiādinā tadubhayassa rogavūpasamanabhāvaṃ dasseti. Buddhādīhi vaṇṇitanti ‘‘pūtimuttabhesajjaṃ nissāya pabbajjā’’tiādinā (mahāva. 73, 128) sammāsambuddhādīhi pasatthaṃ. Appicchatāvisiṭṭhāya santuṭṭhiyā niyojanato paramena ukkaṃsagatena santosena santussatīti paramasantuṭṭho.
虽然依知足的分类,比上述更广的,在衣服上有二十种知足,在钵食上有十五种,在坐卧处上有十五种,在医药资具上有二十种,但此处仅略说十二种知足。至于更广的分类,则应取自《增支部·大圣种经注》。因此说“但以此……”等。如此,在“大王,于此比丘是知足者”这一句中,先以依补特伽罗施设的“知足”一词说明了知足的分类;现在为了说明与教法相应的、以此知足而知的比丘所适宜的资具分类,以及这些资具的护身护腹性质,而说“以护身的衣服、以护腹的钵食……”等,这就是此处的关联。虽然依巴利圣典,仅依次以护身的衣服和护腹的钵食来说明知足,但应知,在注释中如此认定:若没有其余四种资具而行脚是不适当的,且在一切资具中皆应获得护身护腹的性质。所谓“截齿木的小刀”,只是举例,因为其他用途也可借此完成,因此下文将说“在制作床椅的横木、支脚、衣帐杆时……”等。而古注中也说:“这句话并未见于任何巴利圣典中。”显示巴利原文
Kāmañca santosappabhedā yathāvuttatopi adhikatarā cīvare vīsati santosā, piṇḍapāte pannarasa, senāsane ca pannarasa, gilānapaccaye vīsatīti, idha pana saṅkhepena dvādasavidhoyeva santoso vutto. Tadadhikatarappabhedo pana caturaṅguttare mahāariyavaṃsasuttaṭṭhakathāya (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.28) gahetabbo. Tenāha ‘‘iminā panā’’tiādi. Evaṃ ‘‘idha mahārāja bhikkhu santuṭṭho hotī’’ti ettha puggalādhiṭṭhānaniddiṭṭhena santuṭṭhapadeneva santosappabhedaṃ dassetvā idāni ‘‘kāyaparihārikena cīvarena kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātenā’’tiādi desanānurūpaṃ tena santosena santuṭṭhassa anucchavikaṃ paccayappabhedaṃ, tassa ca kāyakucchiparihāriyabhāvaṃ vibhāvento evamāhāti ayamettha sambandho. Kāmañcassa cīvarapiṇḍapāteheva yathākkamaṃ kāyakucchiparihāriyehi santuṭṭhatā pāḷiyaṃ vuttā, tathāpi sesaparikkhāracatukkena ca vinā vicaraṇamayuttaṃ, sabbattha ca kāyakucchiparihāriyatā laddhabbāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ayaṃ vinicchayo vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dantakaṭṭhacchedanavāsīti lakkhaṇamattaṃ tadaññakiccassāpi tāya sādhetabbattā, tena vakkhati ‘‘mañcapīṭhānaṃ aṅgapādacīvarakuṭidaṇḍakasajjanakāle cā’’tiādi. Vuttampi cetaṃ porāṇaṭṭhakathāsu ‘‘na hetaṃ katthacipi pāḷiyamāgata’’nti.
“绑带”即腰带。“以滤水器”指滤水器,或取“与彼俱”之义。“已入”:若业处修习所摄之轭已相应于彼,或彼轭已与之相应,此人为“已入轭者”,即彼。显示巴利原文
Bandhananti kāyabandhanaṃ. Parissāvanena parissāvanañca, tena sahāti vā attho. Yutto kammaṭṭhānabhāvanāsaṅkhāto yogo yassa, tasmiṃ vā yogo yuttoti yuttayogo, tassa.
“护身”:它们护持、滋养身体,或者这些资具以护持身体、仅作滋养为目的,故称“护身”(将ka音变为ya音)。此处的“滋养”是指增长或维持;同样,“护腹”也当如此理解。以从外部对身体有助益而称为护身性,以通过吞咽而对维持身体有助益而称为护腹性,这是二者的差别。因此说“先说三衣……”等。“护持”是“滋养”的同义词。“iti”是举例的助词,表示“依所说的方法而成为护身”,或为说明理由:“因滋养而成为护身”。下文亦然。“以衣角”即以衣的边缘。显示巴利原文
Kāyaṃ pariharanti posenti, kāyassa vā parihāro posanamattaṃ payojanametehīti kāyaparihāriyā ka-kārassa ya-kāraṃ katvā. Posanañcettha vaḍḍhanaṃ, bharaṇaṃ vā, tathā kucchiparihāriyāpi veditabbā. Bahiddhāva kāyassa upakārakabhāvena kāyaparihāriyatā, ajjhoharaṇavasena sarīraṭṭhitiyā upakārakabhāvena kucchiparihāriyatāti ayametesaṃ viseso. Tenāha ‘‘ticīvaraṃ tāvā’’tiādi. ‘‘Pariharatī’’ti etassa posetīti atthavacanaṃ. Itīti nidassane nipāto, evaṃ vuttanayena kāyaparihāriyaṃ hotīti kāraṇajotane vā, tasmā posanato kāyaparihāriyaṃ hotīti. Evamuparipi. Cīvarakaṇṇenāti cīvarapariyantena.
“小屋四周涂抹时”:即遍涂小屋四围,令其平整之时。显示巴利原文
Kuṭiparibhaṇḍakaraṇakāleti kuṭiyā samantato vilimpanena sammaṭṭhakaraṇakāle.
“横木”指安置于床椅脚上方的一种特殊主体构件,在那里制作板条拼接的靠背等,亦称为“aṭanī”。显示巴利原文
Aṅgaṃ nāma mañcapīṭhānaṃ pādūpari ṭhapito padhānasambhāraviseso. Yattha padarasañcinanapiṭṭhiapassayanādīni karonti, yo ‘‘aṭanī’’tipi vuccati.
“蜜树花”即名为madhuka者,或以蜂蜜制成的糕点。“仅资具量”即资具的量度。“进入卧处时”是就敷具与钥匙在那时被使用而说。因此说“彼处立的敷具”。将其作为自己的所有物,通过敷具的决意而决意后,即依该坐卧处而安立者,称作“彼处立者”。然而,依分派之说,其中某一者有第九种,此处亦依所说次第而有第九种属性,但它们并非具有如此固定的性质。何以故?因为它们并未被如此持守。此理亦适用于第十种等。“油筒”即储存油后携带的竹筒等。当有人问难:“在显示知足者时,应只显示八资具的知足者”时,为了显示那些资具也随宜具有知足的品质,而说“于这些中……”等。这些资具拥有名为资具的大重担,故称“大重担者”,这是现今的读法;但阿阇梨法护长老见到“mahāgajā”的读法,因而说“因难养之性,如大象,故为大象”,意谓他们不会因这些资具而被视为“大欲、不知足、难养、生活奢华”。为了澄清“如果其他资具也是知足、少欲等性质,为何此教说也依这些而欲说”的责难,而说“然而世尊……”等。为了消除“如何知道此教说是依八资具者而欲说”的问难,而显示巴利原文
Madhuddumapupphaṃ madhukaṃ nāma, makkhikāmadhūhi katapūvaṃ vā. Parikkhāramattā parikkhārapamāṇaṃ. Seyyaṃ pavisantassāti paccattharaṇakuñcikānaṃ tādise kāle paribhuttabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tatraṭṭhakaṃ paccattharaṇa’’nti. Attano santakabhāvena paccattharaṇādhiṭṭhānena adhiṭṭhahitvā tattheva senāsane tiṭṭhanakañhi ‘‘tatraṭṭhaka’’nti vuccati. Vikappanavacanato pana tesamaññatarassa navamatā, yathāvuttapaṭipāṭiyā cettha navamabhāvo, na tu tesaṃ tathāpatiniyatabhāvena. Kasmāti ce? Tathāyeva tesamadhāraṇato. Esa nayo dasamādīsupi. Telaṃ paṭisāmetvā haritā veḷunāḷiādikā telanāḷi. Nanu santuṭṭhapuggaladassane santuṭṭhova aṭṭhaparikkhāriko dassetabboti anuyoge yathārahaṃ tesampi santuṭṭhabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘etesu cā’’tiādimāha. Mahanto parikkhārasaṅkhāto bhāro etesanti mahābhārā, ayaṃ adhunā pāṭho, ācariyadhammapālattherena pana ‘‘mahāgajā’’ti pāṭhassa diṭṭhattā ‘‘dupposabhāvena mahāgajā viyāti mahāgajā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.215) vuttaṃ, na te ettakehi parikkhārehi ‘‘mahicchā, asantuṭṭhā, dubbharā, bāhullavuttino’’ti ca vattabbāti adhippāyo. Yadi itarepi santuṭṭhā appicchatādisabhāvā, kimetesampi vasena ayaṃ desanā icchitāti codanaṃ sodhetuṃ ‘‘bhagavā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhaparikkhārikassa vasena imissā desanāya icchitabhāvo kathaṃ viññāyatīti anuyogampi apaneti ‘‘so hī’’tiādinā, tasseva tathā pakkantabhāvena ‘‘kāyaparihārikena cīvarenā’’tiādi pāḷiyā yogyato tassa vasena icchitabhāvo viññāyatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vacanīyassa hetubhāvadassanena hi vācakassāpi hetubhāvo dassitoti . Evañca katvā ‘‘iti imassā’’tiādi laddhaguṇavacanampi upapannaṃ hoti. Sallahukā vutti jīvikā yassāti sallahukavutti, tassa bhāvo sallahukavuttitā, taṃ. Kāyapārihāriyenāti bhāvappadhānaniddeso, bhāvalopaniddeso vāti dasseti ‘‘kāyaṃ pariharaṇamattakenā’’ti iminā, kāyaposanappamāṇenāti attho. Tathā kucchiparihāriyenāti etthāpi. Vuttanayena cettha dvidhā vacanattho, ṭīkāyaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.215) pana paṭhamassa vacanatthassa heṭṭhā vuttattā dutiyova idha vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mamāyanataṇhāya āsaṅgo. Pariggahataṇhāya bandho. Jiyāmuttoti dhanujiyāya mutto. Yūthāti hatthigaṇato. Tidhā pabhinnamado madahatthī. Vanapabbhāranti vane pabbhāraṃ.
以乐住于四方而成为乐住之处,或以“遍满一方”等(长部3.308;中部1.77, 459, 509;2.309)方式成为修习梵住遍满之处的四方,故为“四方者”(catuddiso),此即“四方者”,或四方即“四方者”,依前述方式,故称“彼为四方者”(cātuddiso),犹如“具信者”(saddho)。在任何一方中,对任何有情或行法不以怖畏相抵触,或不被他们所抵触,故为“无嗔害”(appaṭigho)。“自满足”(santussamāno):即以自己所有而满足,或以寂静而满足,或以同等满足。“随分随分”(itarītarena):即随任何因缘,或随优劣之缘。“舍弃”(paricca)意指身心转向,或克服、制伏;险难(parissayā)指狮子、老虎等外在险难,以及欲贪等内在身心灾患,此中“cetaṃ”是依受用义的主格词。“堪忍”(sahitā)即堪忍顺从,及如理堪忍精进等法,有执取之义。由于无僵硬成办之怖畏,故为“不震惧”(achambhī)。“应独行”(eko care):即能无伴而独自行走。显示巴利原文
Catūsu disāsu sukhavihāritāya sukhavihāraṭṭhānabhūtā, ‘‘ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 3.308; ma. ni. 1.77, 459, 509; 2.309) vā nayena brahmavihārabhāvanāpharaṇaṭṭhānabhūtā catasso disā etassāti catuddiso, so eva cātuddiso, catasso vā disā catuddisaṃ, vuttanayena tamassāti cātuddiso yathā ‘‘saddho’’ti. Tāsveva disāsu katthacipi satte vā saṅkhāre vā bhayena na paṭihanati, sayaṃ vā tehi na paṭihaññateti appaṭigho. Santussamānoti sakena, santena vā, samameva vā tussanako. Itarītarenāti yena kenaci paccayena, uccāvacena vā. Paricca sayanti pavattanti kāyacittāni, tāni vā parisayanti abhibhavantīti parissayā, sīhabyagghādayo bāhirā, kāmacchandādayo ca ajjhattikā kāyacittupaddavā, upayogatthe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Sahitāti adhivāsanakhantiyā, vīriyādidhammehi ca yathārahaṃ khantā, gahantā cāti attho. Thaddhabhāvakarabhayābhāvena achambhī. Eko careti asahāyo ekākī hutvā carituṃ viharituṃ sakkuṇeyya. Samatthane hi eyya-saddo yathā ‘‘ko imaṃ vijaṭaye jaṭa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.23) khaggavisāṇakappatāya ekavihārīti dasseti ‘‘khaggavisāṇakappo’’ti iminā. Saṇṭhānena khaggasadisaṃ ekameva matthake uṭṭhitaṃ visāṇaṃ yassāti khaggo; khaggasaddena taṃsadisavisāṇassa gahitattā, mahiṃsappamāṇo migaviseso, yo loke ‘‘palāsādo, gaṇṭhako’’ti ca vuccati, tassa visāṇena ekībhāvena sadisoti attho. Apica ekavihāritāya khaggavisāṇakappoti dassetumpi evaṃ vuttaṃ. Vitthāro panassā attho khaggavisāṇasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ, (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.42) cūḷaniddese (cūḷani. 128) ca vuttanayena veditabbo.
“被如是赞叹者”(evaṃ vaṇṇitaṃ)即在《犀角经》中,世尊以如是开示所阐发或所称赞之义。如犀牛之角相似,故为“如犀角”(khaggassa visāṇena kappaṃ sadiso tathā)。此处kappa一词,如“实以与师相应之威仪共诸弟子论”等(《中部》1.260)中,用于“相应”义。其状态为“如犀角性”(khaggavisāṇakappatā),成就此者,即为此句义之关联。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vaṇṇitanti khaggavisāṇasutte bhagavatā tathā desanāya vivaritaṃ, thomitaṃ vā. Khaggassa nāma migassa visāṇena kappo sadiso tathā. Kappa-saddo hettha ‘‘satthukappena vata bho kira sāvakena saddhiṃ mantayamānā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.260) viya paṭibhāge vattati, tassa bhāvo khaggavisāṇakappatā, taṃ so āpajjatīti sambandho.
鸟或因风吹等而断翅,或尚未生翅,然此处是指有能力飞翔的有翅者。为显示此特别之义,圣典中说“有翅之鸟”(pakkhī sakuṇo),而非如“行于虚空、空中”等(《无碍解道》3.11)那样仅作随俗之说,故说“具翅之鸟”(pakkhayutto sakuṇo)。“飞起”(uppatati)即向上飞去,投入之义。“摇落”(vidhunantā)即抖落,或摇动。“为今日”(ajjatanāya)即为今天之故,此处“为明日”(svātanāya)亦同此理。唯以己钵为担者,故为“随担”(sapattabhāro)。无“我欲”之贪,故为“无恋著”(nissaṅgo)。无执取之贪,故为“无希求”(nirapekkho)。“欲何处”(yena kāmaṃ)即何处有自己之意欲,即往彼处。或此为“修习属阳”(bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ)。即“随何欲而转起”故为“随何欲”(yena kāmo),即“随欲”(yathākāmaṃ)之义。显示巴利原文
Vātābhighātādīhi siyā sakuṇo chinnapakkho, asañjātapakkho vā, idha pana ḍetuṃ samattho sapakkhikova adhippetoti visesadassanatthaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘pakkhī sakuṇo’’ti vuttaṃ, na tu ‘‘ākāse antalikkhe caṅkamatī’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 3.11) viya pariyāyamattadassanatthanti āha ‘‘pakkhayutto sakuṇo’’ti. Uppatatīti uddhaṃ patati gacchati, pakkhandatīti attho. Vidhunantāti vibhindantā, vicālentā vā. Ajjatanāyāti ajjabhāvatthāya. Tathā svātanāyāti etthāpi. Attano pattaṃ eva bhāro yassāti sapattabhāro. Mamāyanataṇhābhāvena nissaṅgo. Pariggahataṇhābhāvena nirapekkho. Yena kāmanti yattha attano ruci, tattha. Bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ vā etaṃ. Yena yathā pavatto kāmoti hi yenakāmo, taṃ, yathākāmanti attho.
舍离五盖之说的注释显示巴利原文
Nīvaraṇappahānakathāvaṇṇanā
216 216. 将此前所说的义理四门再次归纳而说,目的何在?以此意趣,引出随法而作解说:“彼……乃至……显示什么”等。“因缘成就”(paccayasampatti)即资粮圆满。“此四”(ime cattāro)即前所说的林住者四资粮:戒律仪、根律仪、正知、知足。“不成就”(na ijjhati)即不成功、无果。不仅是不成就,更招过失,故以“或由畜生等”等显示。“招致非难”(vattabbataṃ āpajjati),即招致应受如是责备的言论:“某比丘住于林中,犹如畜生,犹如野人,唯是居住而已,并无任何符合林住的正修行。”由见此义相违,故不应将“saddhiṃ”(与)一词视为古传。或即招致与林中畜生、野人等异类者共住之非难,因其邪行而应共住。如“诸比丘,不应有心住林中,若住者,犯恶作”等(《波罗夷》223)中,“应住”(vatthabba)一词是“应居住”之转说。《分别论注》中亦如是说:“如是林住者之林住,如黑猕猴、刺猬、覆鹿等之林住。”(《分别论注》526)“居住者”(adhivatthā)即住。显示巴利原文
216. Pubbe vuttasseva atthacatukkassa puna sampiṇḍetvā kathanaṃ kimatthanti adhippāyena anuyogaṃ uddharitvā sodheti ‘‘so…pe… kiṃ dassetī’’tiādinā. Paccayasampattinti sambhārapāripūriṃ. Ime cattāroti sīlasaṃvaro indriyasaṃvaro sampajaññaṃ santosoti pubbe vuttā cattāro āraññikassa sambhārā. Na ijjhatīti na sampajjati na saphalo bhavati. Na kevalaṃ anijjhanamattaṃ, atha kho ayampi dosoti dasseti ‘‘tiracchānagatehi vā’’tiādinā. Vattabbataṃ āpajjatīti ‘‘asukassa bhikkhuno araññe tiracchānagatānaṃ viya, vanacarakānaṃ viya ca nivāsanamattameva, na pana araññavāsānucchavikā kāci sammāpaṭipatti atthī’’ti apavādavasena vacanīyabhāvamāpajjati, imassatthassa pana dassanena virujjhanato saddhiṃ-saddo na porāṇoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā āraññakehi tiracchānagatehi, vanacaravisabhāgajanehi vā saddhiṃ vippaṭipattivasena vasanīyabhāvaṃ āpajjati. ‘‘Na bhikkhave paṇidhāya araññe vatthabbaṃ, yo vaseyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 223) viya hi vatthabba-saddo vasitabbapariyāyo. Tathā hi vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyampi vuttaṃ ‘‘evarūpassa hi araññavāso kāḷamakkaṭaacchataracchadīpimigānaṃ aṭavivāsasadiso hotī’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 526) adhivatthāti adhivasantā. Paṭhamaṃ bheravasaddaṃ sāventi. Tāvatā apalāyantassa hatthehipi sīsaṃ paharitvā palāpanākāraṃ karontīti ācariyasāriputtattherena kathitaṃ. Evaṃ byatirekato paccayasampattiyā dassitabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā idāni anvayatopi pakāsetuṃ ‘‘yassa panete’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kathaṃ ijjhatīti āha ‘‘so hī’’tiādi. Kāḷako tilakoti vaṇṇavikārāpanarogavasena aññattha pariyāyavacanaṃ. Vuttañhi –
名为‘难名’的毒,是呕吐的吐物;
愿燃烧成极热,痣即为黑痣。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dunnāmakañca arisaṃ, chaddiko vamathūrito; Davathu paritāpotha, tilako tilakāḷako’’ti.
因生如胡麻之形,所以称为‘痣’;因生而变黑,所以称为‘黑痣’。然而在此处,违越施设的粗罪,如同黑痣,故为‘黑痣’;违越邪行的微细罪,如同痣,故为‘痣’,这是它们的差别。‘彼’即是以此方式生起的喜。由于它以离去之相现前,故依尽与衰的含义而作‘随观’。以灭尽义,‘尽’即是‘离去’;或以变易而离去之义,也称为‘衰’。‘圣地’即出世间地。‘如是’一词,是指由于退失圣地,或由于诸天的称赞,随处听闻诸天的话语而名声传布;应知下文所说的‘名声传布’,也是依诸天宣告的意思。显示巴利原文
Tilasaṇṭhānaṃ viya jāyatīti hi tilako, kāḷo hutvā jāyatīti kāḷako. Idha pana paṇṇattivītikkamasaṅkhātaṃ thullavajjaṃ kāḷakasadisattā kāḷakaṃ, micchāvītikkamasaṅkhātaṃ aṇumattavajjaṃ tilakasadisattā tilakanti ayaṃ viseso. Tanti tathā uppāditaṃ pītiṃ. Vigatabhāvena upaṭṭhānato khayavayavasena sammasanaṃ. Khīyanaṭṭhena hi khayova vigato, viparīto vā hutvā ayanaṭṭhena vayotipi vuccati. Ariyabhūmi nāma lokuttarabhūmi. Itīti ariyabhūmiokkamanato, devatānaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanato vā, tattha tattha devatānaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā tassa yaso patthaṭoti vuttaṃ hoti, evañca katvā heṭṭhā vuttaṃ ayasapattharaṇampi devatānamārocanavasenāti gahetabbaṃ.
“远离”一词,就“远离人群”而言,意指“空”。为说明此“空”因无人声嘈杂而应知为禅那之刺(障碍),故说“少声、少喧闹,此为它的含义”。因为正是通过把握“人群”一词,这里才获得了“人所知”之义。即如《分别论》所说:“那少喧闹的,就是那人少的”(《分别论》533)。其中,“少声”指无自然之声,“少喧闹”指无城镇喧闹等声音。在此情况下,文句似尚有剩余,而意义已无余,注释书中如是说过。然而在《中部义释注疏》中,法护长老这样说:“由于视‘少声’为‘少’的同义词,所以称‘文句可能还有剩余’;因此他说‘因为那不是……’等。但在此处,‘少声’亦可理解为‘无’,正如在‘我觉知少病……’等处(《中部》1.225)那样。”他将此义与《分别论》的巴利文(《分别论》528)相合,而说“就是这个……”等。“就是这个”的意思是:正是我所注释的“无声性”。“即使在附近”的意思是:即使在村庄等的附近,这样的也称为远离,更不必说在远处了。“不混杂”,即不拥挤、不逼仄。凡有住所,其周围显示巴利原文
Vivitta-saddo janaviveketi āha ‘‘suñña’’nti. Taṃ pana janasaddanigghosābhāvena veditabbaṃ saddakaṇṭakattā jhānassāti dassetuṃ ‘‘appasaddaṃ appanigghosanti attho’’ti vuttaṃ. Janakaggahaṇeneva hi idha jaññaṃ gahitaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ vibhaṅge ‘‘yadeva taṃ appanigghosaṃ, tadeva taṃ vijanavāta’’nti (vibha. 533). Appasaddanti ca pakatisaddābhāvamāha. Appanigghosanti nagaranigghosādisaddābhāvaṃ. Īdisesu hi byañjanaṃ sāvasesaṃ viya, attho pana niravasesoti aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. Majjhimāgamaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.364) pana ācariyadhammapālatthero evamāha ‘‘appasaddassa parittapariyāyaṃ manasi katvā vuttaṃ ‘byañjanaṃ sāvasesaṃ siyā’ti. Tenāha ‘na hi tassā’tiādi. Appasaddo panettha abhāvatthotipi sakkā viññātuṃ ‘appābādhatañca sañjānāmī’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.225) viyā’’ti. Tamatthaṃ vibhaṅgapāḷiyā (vibha. 528) saṃsandanto ‘‘etadevā’’tiādimāha. Etadevāti ca mayā saṃvaṇṇiyamānaṃ nissaddataṃ evāti attho. Santikepīti gāmādīnaṃ samīpepi edisaṃ vivittaṃ nāma, pageva dūreti attho. Anākiṇṇanti asaṅkiṇṇaṃ asambādhaṃ. Yassa senāsanassa samantā gāvutampi aḍḍhayojanampi pabbatagahanaṃ vanagahanaṃ nadīgahanaṃ hoti, na koci avelāya upasaṅkamituṃ sakkoti, idaṃ santikepi anākiṇṇaṃ nāma. Setīti sayati. Āsatīti nisīdati. ‘‘Etthā’’ti iminā sena-saddassa, āsana-saddassa ca adhikaraṇatthabhāvaṃ dasseti, ca-saddena ca tadubhayapadassa catthasamāsabhāvaṃ. ‘‘Tenāhā’’tiādinā vibhaṅgapāḷimeva āharati.
现在,为通过显示住所的分类来阐明同一含义,而说“再者……”等。因为这是在《分别论》巴利文中,以举例方式依自性所示住所的分类。其中,vihāra(精舍)指由围墙围绕的整个住处。aḍḍhayoga(半顶屋)是长殿,也有人说为“金翅鸟形的殿”。pāsāda(殿堂)是四方形殿堂。hammiya(平顶屋)是平顶的殿堂。aṭṭa(塔楼)是为了防御敌王等而建造的四层或五层的特殊住所。māḷa(圆厅)是由单顶覆盖、多角的特殊住所。另一种解释:vihāra(精舍)是长面殿堂。aḍḍhayoga(半顶屋)是单侧屋顶的房子,据说其一侧墙壁较高,另一侧较低,因此为单顶。pāsāda(殿堂)是长方形殿堂。hammiya(平顶屋)是平顶、带有月光庭院的。guhā(窟)纯粹是山洞。leṇa(岩洞)是有门闩的岩阴。其余如前所述。“maṇḍapa(凉亭)是指枝叶凉亭”(《长部注疏》1.216),法护长老及《增支部复注》的作者舍利弗长老这样说。显示巴利原文
Idāni tassāyevatthaṃ senāsanappabhedadassanavasena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ nidassananayena sarūpato dassitasenāsanasseva hi ayaṃ vibhāgo. Tattha vihāro pākāraparicchinno sakalo āvāso. Aḍḍhayogo dīghapāsādo, ‘‘garuḷasaṇṭhānapāsādo’’tipi vadanti. Pāsādo caturassapāsādo. Hammiyaṃ muṇḍacchadanapāsādo. Aṭṭo paṭirājūnaṃ paṭibāhanayoggo catupañcabhūmako patissayaviseso. Māḷo ekakūṭasaṅgahito anekakoṇavanto patissayaviseso. Aparo nayo – vihāro dīghamukhapāsādo. Aḍḍhayogo ekapassachadanakagehaṃ. Tassa kira ekapasse bhitti uccatarā hoti, itarapasse nīcā, tena taṃ ekachadanakaṃ hoti. Pāsādo āyatacaturassapāsādo. Hammiyaṃ muṇḍacchadanakaṃ candikaṅgaṇayuttaṃ. Guhā kevalā pabbataguhā. Leṇaṃ dvārabandhaṃ pabbhāraṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. ‘‘Maṇḍapoti sākhāmaṇḍapo’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.216) evaṃ ācariyadhammapālattherena, aṅguttaraṭīkākārena ca ācariyasāriputtattherena vuttaṃ.
然而在《分别论注释》中则是这样说的:vihāra(精舍)指周围有行道,并在内部显示了夜间住处和日间住处之后所建造的住所。aḍḍhayoga(半顶屋)是金翅鸟弯形屋。pāsāda(殿堂)是取两个屋脊而建的长殿堂。aṭṭa(塔楼)是为了防御敌王等而用砖砌就、墙壁厚实的四层或五层特殊住所。māḷa(圆厅)是与食堂类似的圆形厅。但在《律藏注释》中说:“由单顶覆盖的四方形殿堂”。leṇa(岩洞)是挖掘山岩,或在岩阴不足之处立墙后所建的住所。guhā(窟)指地裂,或那些日夜可点灯之处,说是山洞或地窟。显示巴利原文
Vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 527) pana vihāroti samantā parihārapathaṃ, antoyeva ca rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānāni dassetvā katasenāsanaṃ. Aḍḍhayogoti supaṇṇavaṅkagehaṃ. Pāsādoti dve kaṇṇikāni gahetvā kato dīghapāsādo. Aṭṭoti paṭirājādipaṭibāhanatthaṃ iṭṭhakāhi kato bahalabhittiko catupañcabhūmako patissayaviseso. Māḷoti bhojanasālāsadiso maṇḍalamāḷo. Vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ekakūṭasaṅgahito caturassapāsādo’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.482-487) vuttaṃ. Leṇanti pabbataṃ khaṇitvā vā pabbhārassa appahonakaṭṭhāne kuṭṭaṃ uṭṭhāpetvā vā katasenāsanaṃ. Guhāti bhūmidari vā yattha rattindivaṃ dīpaṃ laddhuṃ vaṭṭati, pabbataguhā vā bhūmiguhā vāti vuttaṃ.
作为住处、属于住所的卧坐具,因应居住之义与居住处之义,称为“精舍卧坐具”。床有马萨罗迦等四种。座具亦然。褥垫有羊毛褥等五种。枕头取头大小。此处,头大小指宽为四指加一搩手,长为床宽。马萨罗迦等由于是床和座具,褥垫和枕头由于与床座相关,故为“床座卧坐具”。因为卧坐具即床座本身及其相关物,由总称或省略,而称为“床座卧坐具”,舍利弗长老也这样说。然法护长老说:“‘床座卧坐具’是指床座,及与床座相关的卧坐具。”所谓“唧米利迦”(地毯),是为了保护石灰地面的颜色,以布片等缝制而成。所谓“皮革块”,是狮子皮、虎皮、豹皮、鬣狗皮等任何一种。因为在注释书中,未见到在受用卧坐具时被禁止的皮。“草敷”指任何草类的敷设。“叶敷”亦然。“唧米利迦”等因应铺于地上,故为“敷具卧坐具”。或者,“凡比丘们退居之处”,即除了这些床等之外,凡比丘们集会之处,一切皆称为卧坐具。如此说时,其余如树下……显示巴利原文
Taṃ āvasathabhūtaṃ patissayasenāsanaṃ viharitabbaṭṭhena, vihāraṭṭhānaṭṭhena ca vihārasenāsanaṃ nāma. Masārakādicatubbidho mañco. Tathā pīṭhaṃ. Uṇṇabhisiādipañcavidhā bhisi. Sīsappamāṇaṃ bimbohanaṃ. Vitthārato vidatthicaturaṅgulatā, dīghato mañcavitthārappamāṇatā cettha sīsappamāṇaṃ. Masārakādīni mañcapīṭhabhāvato, bhisiupadhānañca mañcapīṭhasambandhato mañcapīṭhasenāsanaṃ. Mañcapīṭhabhūtañhi senāsanaṃ, mañcapīṭhasambandhañca sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesena vā ‘‘mañcapīṭhasenāsana’’nti vuccati. Ācariyasāriputtattheropi evameva vadati. Ācariyadhammapālattherena pana ‘‘mañcapīṭhasenāsananti mañcapīṭhañceva mañcapīṭhasambandhasenāsanañcā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.216) vuttaṃ. Cimilikā nāma sudhāparikammakatāya bhūmiyā vaṇṇānurakkhaṇatthaṃ paṭakhaṇḍādīhi sibbetvā katā. Cammakhaṇḍo nāma sīhabyagghadīpitaracchacammādīsupi yaṃ kiñci cammaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāsu (pāci. aṭṭha. 112; vi. saṅga. aṭṭha. 82) hi senāsanaparibhoge paṭikkhittacammaṃ na dissati. Tiṇasanthāroti yesaṃ kesañci tiṇānaṃ santhāro. Eseva nayo paṇṇasanthārepi. Cimilikādi bhūmiyaṃ santharitabbatāya santhatasenāsanaṃ. Yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamantīti ṭhapetvā vā etāni mañcādīni yattha bhikkhū sannipatanti, sabbametaṃ senāsanaṃ nāmāti evaṃ vuttaṃ avasesaṃ rukkhamūlādipaṭikkamitabbaṭṭhānaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇābhāvato kevalaṃ sayanassa, nissajjāya ca okāsabhūtattā okāsasenāsanaṃ. Senāsanaggahaṇenāti ‘‘vivittaṃ senāsana’’nti iminā senāsanasaddena vivittasenāsanassa vā ādānena, vacanena vā gahitameva sāmaññajotanāya visese avaṭṭhānato, visesatthinā ca visesassa payujjitabbato.
有人问:“为何又说‘阿兰若’等?”于是以“但在这里,对此……”等作答。其意趣是:即使在已如此摄受的住所中,为了显示适合前述比丘的住所,才又这样说。“依比丘尼而说”这句,是就律藏中所说而言,并非指阿毗达摩。因为在律藏中,于“离众学处”(《波逸提》691)中,已禁止比丘尼行阿兰若头陀支,故对她们而言,这也称为阿兰若,但并非指最后那种五百弓的阿兰若住所;而且对她们而言,这也构成离众罪,但并非仅指五百弓等的阿兰若。正如那里所说:显示巴利原文
Yadevaṃ kasmā ‘‘arañña’’ntiādi puna vuttanti anuyogena ‘‘idha panassā’’tiādimāha. Evaṃ gahitesupi senāsanesu yathāvuttassa bhikkhuno anucchavikameva senāsanaṃ dassetukāmattā puna evaṃ vuttanti adhippāyo. ‘‘Bhikkhunīnaṃ vasena āgata’’nti idaṃ vinaye āgatameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, na abhidhamme. Vinaye hi gaṇamhāohīyanasikkhāpade (pāci. 691) bhikkhunīnaṃ āraññakadhutaṅgassa paṭikkhittattā idampi ca tāsaṃ araññaṃ nāma, na pana pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchimaṃ araññameva senāsanaṃ, idampi ca tāsaṃ gaṇamhāohīyanāpattikaraṃ, na tu pañcadhanusatikādimeva araññaṃ. Vuttañhi tattha –
“若有比丘尼离众而住,即于无村的阿兰若中,离开另一比丘尼的见处或闻处,则犯偷兰遮;若已离开,则犯桑喀地谢沙。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Ekā vā gaṇamhā ohīyeyyāti agāmake araññe dutiyikāya bhikkhuniyā dassanūpacāraṃ vā savanūpacāraṃ vā vijahantiyā āpatti thullaccayassa, vijahite āpatti saṅghādisesassā’’ti.
因为在律藏注疏(《波逸提》义注692)中,义理也是如此说的。然而在阿毗达摩中,则说:“‘阿兰若’者,即出至界外之后,所有这一切皆为阿兰若。”(《分别论》529)因为律藏与经藏两者,名为‘方便说’,而阿毗达摩则是‘非方便说’,所以为了以非方便的方式显示:凡不包含在村落区域内的,即为阿兰若,才那样宣说。其义为:出至界外之后,所存在的一切处所皆名为阿兰若。而“阿兰若者……乃至……最后的”这句,则是依经藏的方式,在《阿兰若学处》(《波罗夷》652)中针对阿兰若比丘而说,合于此比丘,因此在《清净道论·头陀支解说》(《清净道论》1.19)中所说的其相状是恰当的。故其意趣是:应依彼处所说的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Vinayaṭṭhakathāsupi (pāci. aṭṭha. 692) hi tathāva attho vuttoti. Abhidhamme pana ‘‘araññanti nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti (vibha. 529) āgataṃ. Vinayasuttantā hi ubhopi pariyāyadesanā nāma, abhidhammo pana nippariyāyadesanā, tasmā yaṃ na gāmapadesantogadhaṃ, taṃ araññanti nippariyāyena dassetuṃ tathā vuttaṃ. Indakhīlā bahi nikkhamitvā yaṃ ṭhānaṃ pavattaṃ , sabbametaṃ araññaṃ nāmāti cettha attho. Āraññakaṃ nāma…pe… pacchimanti idaṃ pana suttantanayena āraññakasikkhāpade (pārā. 652) āraññikaṃ bhikkhuṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ imassa bhikkhuno anurūpaṃ, tasmā visuddhimagge dhutaṅganiddese (visuddhi. 1.19) yaṃ tassa lakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ yuttameva, ato tattha vuttanayena gahetabbanti adhippāyo.
“密荫”即清凉之荫,因此说“因为在那里……”等。“树下”即树的附近,因为曾这样说:“凡在正午时分,周围皆有树荫覆盖,无风处树叶落下,至此范围即为树下。”“山”指纯石、纯土、石土混合三种类型的山,并非仅指岩石所成;而“石”一词,因无差别地作为山的同义词,故如此说。以“因为在那里……”等,显示那两者的适合性。“于诸方显现时”,即于十方以面向的方式被看见时。这是说,以那样的原因,也可能有心的专一。有些人说,这是为了显示被从一切方吹来的风所扇动的状态之因。“何谓水?”因能除渴,故称为水。“‘凡称为河曲或河湾者,即为山涧’——阿难陀长老(在《分别论》根本复注530中)以此显示:即使在非山岳之处,险峻的河曲处也称为山涧。”由此可知,河曲、河湾等词,是险峻河曲处的能诠。所谓险峻河曲处,即河水流出后又折返而形成的险峻之处。而说“即使在非山岳之处”,是为了显示:在注释书中,最初只是以举例的方式说“山岳之处”,但如所说的河曲处,其实也是山涧。显示巴利原文
Sandacchāyanti sītacchāyaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tattha hī’’tiādi. Rukkhamūlanti rukkhasamīpaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yāvatā majjhanhike kāle samantā chāyā pharati, nivāte paṇṇāni nipatanti, ettāvatā rukkhamūla’’nti. Pabbatanti suddhapāsāṇasuddhapaṃsuubhayamissakavasena tividhopi pabbato adhippeto, na silāmayo eva. Sela-saddo pana avisesato pabbatapariyāyoti katvā evaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tattha hī’’tiādinā tadubhayassa anurūpataṃ dasseti. Disāsu khāyamānāsūti dasasu disāsu abhimukhībhāvena dissamānāsu. Tathārūpenapi kāraṇena siyā cittassa ekaggatāti etaṃ vuttaṃ, sabbadisāhi āgatena vātena bījiyamānabhāvahetudassanatthanti keci. Kaṃ vuccati udakaṃ pipāsavinodanassa kārakattā. ‘‘Yaṃ nadītumbantipi nadīkuñjantipi vadanti, taṃ kandaranti apabbatapadesepi vidugganadīnivattanapadesaṃ kandaranti dassetī’’ti (vibha. mūlaṭī. 530) ācariyānandatthero, teneva viññāyati ‘‘nadītumbanadīkuñjasaddā nadīnivattanapadesavācakā’’ti. Nadīnivattanapadeso ca nāma nadiyā nikkhamanaudakena puna nivattitvā gato viduggapadeso. ‘‘Apabbatapadesepī’’ti vadanto pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ nidassanamattena paṭhamaṃ pabbatapadesanti vuttaṃ, yathāvutto pana nadīpadesopi kandaro evāti dasseti.
以“因为在那里……”等,也只是举例说明其适合性。“竖立起来”,即堆成一堆。诸师长说:“在两座山相近而立时,会有类似内室等的空隙;而仅在一座山中,则类似隧道。”因为仅在一座山中,由于上方有遮盖,才有类似隧道的内部洞穴;在两座山之间则不然,因为没有遮盖。所以“类似隧道”应与“仅在一座山中”相连;而“大空隙”则两者皆可。所谓“类似隧道”,阿阇梨曾说为“类似地穴”(《长部》复注1.216)。因为“地穴”是地屋的别名,如“抓住她后,将其投入地穴中嚎叫的母夜叉”等语中所用。“非人行处”,即依通常往来而言人们不应行走之处。因为这里是以耕作、播种等来遮止通常的往来,因此说“在那里不耕不种”。而以“等”字,则包含了《分别论》(531)中的其余分别论文:“‘林野’者,此是住所的安立处之别名;‘林野’者,此是恐怖处之别名;‘林野’者,此是令人毛发竖立处之别名;‘林野’者,此是边际处之别名;‘林野’者,此是非人行之住所的别名。”所谓“野”,即山的平坦地,也称为“山脊”,因其相似,故指无人往来的森林,因此应视为相似之处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha hī’’tiādināpi nidassanamatteneva tassānurūpabhāvamāha. Ussāpetvāti puñjaṃ katvā. ‘‘Dvinnaṃ pabbatānampi āsannatare ṭhitānaṃ ovarakādisadisaṃ vivaraṃ hoti, ekasmiṃyeva pana pabbate umaṅgasadisa’’nti vadanti ācariyā. Ekasmiṃyeva hi umaṅgasadisaṃ antoleṇaṃ hoti upari paṭicchannattā, na dvīsu tathā appaṭicchannattā, tasmā ‘‘umaṅgasadisa’’nti idaṃ ‘‘ekasmiṃ yevā’’ti iminā sambandhanīyaṃ. ‘‘Mahāvivara’’nti idaṃ pana ubhayehipi. Umaṅgasadisanti ca ‘‘suduṅgāsadisa’’nti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.216) ācariyena vuttaṃ. Suduṅgāti hi bhūmigharassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, ‘‘taṃ gahetvā suduṅgāya ravantaṃ yakkhinī khipī’’tiādīsu viya. Manussānaṃ anupacāraṭṭhānanti pakatisañcāravasena manussehi na sañcaritabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Kassanavappanādivasena hi pakatisañcārapaṭikkhepo idhādhippeto. Tenāha ‘‘yatthana kasanti na vapantī’’ti. Ādisaddena pana ‘‘vanapatthanti vanasaṇṭhānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacanaṃ, vanapatthanti bhīsanakānametaṃ, vanapatthanti salomahaṃsānametaṃ, vanapatthanti pariyantānametaṃ, vanapatthanti na manussūpacārānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacana’’nti (vibha. 531) imaṃ vibhaṅgapāḷisesaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Patthoti hi pabbatassa samānabhūmi, yo ‘‘sānū’’tipi vuccati, tassadisattā pana manussānamasañcaraṇabhūtaṃ vanaṃ, tasmā patthasadisaṃ vanaṃ vanapatthoti visesanaparanipāto daṭṭhabbo. Sabbesaṃ sabbāsu disāsu abhimukho okāso abbhokāsoti āha ‘‘acchanna’’nti, kenaci chadanena antamaso rukkhasākhāyapi na chāditanti attho. Daṇḍakānaṃ upari cīvaraṃ chādetvā katā cīvarakuṭi. Nikkaḍḍhitvāti nīharitvā. Antopabbhāraleṇasadiso palālarāsiyeva adhippeto, itarathā tiṇapaṇṇasanthārasaṅgopi siyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘pabbhāraleṇasadise ālaye’’ti, pabbhārasadise, leṇasadise vāti attho. Gacchagumbādīnampīti pi-saddena purimanayaṃ sampiṇḍeti.
“团食”(piṇḍapāta)是“乞求团食”省略后词而来;从乞食返回者称为“团食返回者”,故说“从乞求团食返回”。关于“跏趺坐”:此处前缀“pari-”意为“周围”,因此“周围盘结的坐具”即是跏趺坐,将r音转为l音并重叠,如“palibuddho”一词;所谓周围性,是指将左、右大腿平放后,两脚互相连结,因此说“周围结缚大腿而坐”。此处的跏趺坐是指以结缚大腿的方式而坐,并非指用带来的猛兽皮所做。而“弯折后”,是指为了以跏趺坐的方式而坐,将两脚弯折、蜷曲;这实际上就是那样结缚两脚的动作,因此说“结缚后”。关于“端正身体”:此处“身体”一词指上半身,因为下半身的不端正安立已由坐下的表述所表明,所以是说“将上半身端正安立”。这上半身的端正安立,具体表现为“十八”等,意指将十八节脊椎骨的顶端与顶端相接而安立。显示巴利原文
Piṇḍapātassa pariyesanaṃ piṇḍapāto uttarapadalopena, tato paṭikkanto piṇḍapātapaṭikkantoti āha ‘‘piṇḍapātapariyesanato paṭikkanto’’ti. Pallaṅkanti ettha pari-saddo ‘‘samantato’’ti etasmiṃ atthe, tasmā parisamantato aṅkanaṃ āsanaṃ pallaṅko ra-kārassa la-kāraṃ, dvibhāvañca katvā yathā ‘‘palibuddho’’ti, (mi. pa. 6.3.6) samantabhāvo ca vāmoruṃ, dakkhiṇoruñca samaṃ ṭhapetvā ubhinnaṃ pādānaṃ aññamaññasambandhanakaraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘samantato ūrubaddhāsana’’nti. Ūrūnaṃ bandhanavasena nisajjāva idha pallaṅko, na āharimehi vāḷehi katoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ābhujitvāti ca yathā pallaṅkavasena nisajjā hoti, tathā ubho pāde ābhugge samiñjite katvā, taṃ pana ubhinnaṃ pādānaṃ tathābandhatākaraṇamevāti āha ‘‘bandhitvā’’ti. Ujuṃ kāyanti ettha kāya-saddo uparimakāyavisayo heṭṭhimakāyassa anujukaṃ ṭhapanassa nisajjāvacaneneva viññāpitattāti vuttaṃ ‘‘uparimaṃ sarīraṃ ujuṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti. Taṃ pana uparimakāyassa ujukaṃ ṭhapanaṃ sarūpato dasseti ‘‘aṭṭhārasā’’tiādinā, aṭṭhārasannaṃ piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhikānaṃ koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭipādanameva tathā ṭhapananti adhippāyo.
现在,为了显示如此安立的功用,而说“因为这样……”等。其中,“这样”是指当如此安立时,或以此安立的因由。“不俯”指不弯曲。“而他的……”等则是显示辗转的功用。“而”指如此不弯曲时。“受”指背痛等感受。“不散失”指不离去、不越出路轨。由此,业处因前后阶段的殊胜而达到增长、增广、广大。此处前缀“pari-”与“abhi-”同义,意为“面向”,因此说“面向业处”,即遮止外部的种种所缘后,唯以业处为前导的意思。以“或置于口附近”显示“pari-”的邻近义,即如同在口附近一样,系念于心而安置的意思。为了以《分别论》证成“pari-”的邻近义,故说“因此……”等。“于鼻端”指于鼻孔尖端。“口相”指上唇的中央部位,鼻息在此处受到撞击。显示巴利原文
Idāni tathā ṭhapanassa payojanaṃ dassento ‘‘evañhī’’tiādimāha. Tattha evanti tathā ṭhapane sati, iminā vā tathāṭhapanahetunā. Na paṇamantīti na onamanti. ‘‘Athassā’’tiādi pana paramparapayojanadassanaṃ. Athāti evaṃ anonamane. Vedanāti piṭṭhigilānādivedanā. Na paripatatīti na vigacchati vīthiṃ na vilaṅgheti. Tato eva pubbenāparaṃ visesappattiyā kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuddhiṃ phātiṃ vepullaṃ upagacchati. Parisaddo cettha abhisaddapariyāyo abhimukhatthoti vuttaṃ ‘‘kammaṭṭhānābhimukha’’nti, bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇato nivāretvā kammaṭṭhānaṃyeva purakkhatvāti attho. Parisaddassa samīpatthataṃ dasseti ‘‘mukhasamīpe vā katvā’’ti iminā, mukhassa samīpe viya citte nibaddhaṃ upaṭṭhāpanavasena katvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Parisaddassa samīpatthataṃ vibhaṅgapāḷiyā (vibha. 537) sādhetuṃ ‘‘tenevā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nāsikaggeti nāsapuṭagge. Mukhanimittaṃ nāma uttaroṭṭhassa vemajjhappadeso, yattha nāsikavāto paṭihaññati.
在此,如同“亲近空闲的坐卧处”等显示了适合修习的坐卧处,同样,“坐下”显示了不昏沉、不掉举的威仪,“结跏趺坐”显示了坐姿的稳固,“于面前安置念”显示了执取所缘的方法。“pari-”词头是执取义,如同“引导者”等中的用法。“mukha”词是出离义,如同“空解脱门”等中的用法。因为从对立面出离即是出离。不忘失的状态是安置义。“在那里”指在《无碍解道》中。“已执取、已出离”指以一切方式已执取、不忘失故为已执取,以已舍弃不忘失的对立面故为出离,如此作念后,安置了最上的念住。这是阿阇梨法护长老与阿阇梨舍利弗长老的见解。或者,“以于身等善安立故为已执取,且由此即具出离性,或以与身等执取智相应故为已执取,且由此即作出离的安置”,这是阿阇梨阿难陀长老的见解。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca yathā ‘‘vivittaṃ senāsanaṃ bhajatī’’tiādinā (vibha. 508) bhāvanānurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ dassitaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘nisīdatī’’ti iminā alīnānuddhaccapakkhiko santo iriyāpatho dassito, ‘‘pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā’’ti iminā nisajjāya daḷhabhāvo, ‘‘parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti iminā ārammaṇapariggahaṇūpāyoti. Pari-saddo pariggahaṭṭho ‘‘pariṇāyikā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 16) viya. Mukha-saddo niyyānaṭṭho ‘‘suññatavimokkhamukha’’ntiādīsu viya. Paṭipakkhato nikkhamanameva hi niyyānaṃ. Asammosanabhāvo upaṭṭhānaṭṭho. Tatrāti paṭisambhidānaye. Pariggahitaniyyānanti sabbathā gahitāsammosatāya pariggahitaṃ, pariccattasammosapaṭipakkhatāya ca niyyānaṃ satiṃ katvā, paramaṃ satinepakkaṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayaṃ ācariyadhammapālattherassa, ācariyasāriputtattherassa ca mati. Atha vā ‘‘kāyādīsu suṭṭhupavattiyā pariggahitaṃ, tato eva ca niyyānabhāvayuttaṃ, kāyādipariggahaṇañāṇasampayuttatāya vā pariggahitaṃ, tatoyeva ca niyyānabhūtaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ katvāti attho’’ti ayaṃ ācariyānandattherassa (vibha. mūlaṭī. 537) mati.
217 “贪求”是指以此而贪染、渴望、希求,即贪欲,是欲贪盖。“以被破坏之义”,即“以被碎裂之义”,指刹那刹那裂解之义,这是阿阇梨法护长老与《增支部复注》的作者阿阇梨舍利弗长老所说。经中也可见:“比丘们,所谓‘世间’,即是破坏。破坏什么呢?比丘们,眼坏,色坏,眼识坏”等。然而,在《阿毗达摩义注》及此处,现今写本中写作“以被破坏与被粉碎之义”。其中,仅是举出“被粉碎”作为同义词来辨明“被破坏”之义。因为“lucca”一词也有“观察”等义,如用于“观看”等,但此处取其“碎裂、破裂”之义。在《Vaṃsatthapakāsinī》中则说:“以刹那坏灭故,具被破坏的自性;以死坏灭故,具被粉碎的自性,故名为世间。”有些人则解释为“以碎裂与生起之义”。由于这与直接表明的词义相违,且“lucca”一词并无“不生起”之义,此说实不合理。再者,阿阇梨们也可能仅举出“以被破坏与被粉碎之义”这一文句而作如此释义,后因辗转传承、书写疏失,故于各处未见,应如此理解。所谓“不被破坏、不被粉碎”,即便被执取,也并非如此,那才是世间。显示巴利原文
217. Abhijjhāyati gijjhati abhikaṅkhati etāyāti abhijjhā, kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ. Luccanaṭṭhenāti bhijjanaṭṭhena, khaṇe khaṇe bhijjanaṭṭhenāti atthoti ācariyadhammapālattherena, (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.217) aṅguttaraṭīkākārena ca ācariyasāriputtattherena vuttaṃ. Suttesu ca dissati ‘‘luccatīti kho bhikkhu lokoti vuccati. Kiñca luccati? Cakkhu kho bhikkhu luccati, rūpā luccanti, cakkhuviññāṇaṃ luccatī’’tiādi. (Saṃ. ni. 4.82) abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 7-13) pana idha ca adhunā potthake ‘‘luccanapaluccanaṭṭhenā’’ti likhitaṃ. Tattha luccanameva paluccanapariyāyena visesetvā vuttaṃ. Lucasaddo hi apekkhanādiatthopi bhavati ‘‘oloketī’’tiādīsu, bhijjanapabhijjanaṭṭhenāti attho. Vaṃsatthapakāsiniyaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘khaṇabhaṅgavasena luccanasabhāvato, cutibhaṅgavasena ca paluccanasabhāvato loko nāmā’’ti (vaṃsatthapakāsiniyaṃ nāma mahāvaṃsaṭīkāyaṃ paṭhamaparicchede pañcamagāthā vaṇṇanāyaṃ) keci pana ‘‘bhijjanauppajjanaṭṭhenā’’ti atthaṃ vadanti. Āhaccabhāsitavacanatthena virujjhanato, lucasaddassa ca anuppādavācakattā ayuttamevetaṃ. Apica ācariyehipi ‘‘luccanapaluccanaṭṭhenā’’ti pāṭhameva ulliṅgetvā tathā attho vutto siyā, pacchā pana paramparābhatavasena pamādalekhattā tattha tattha na diṭṭhoti daṭṭhabbaṃ, na luccati na paluccatīti yo gahitopi tathā na hoti, sveva loko, aniccānupassanāya vā luccati bhijjati vinassatīti gahetabbova lokoti taṃgahaṇarahitānaṃ lokuttarānaṃ natthi lokatā, dukkhasaccaṃ vā lokoti vuttaṃ ‘‘pañcupādānakkhandhā loko’’ti. Evaṃ tattha tattha vacanatopi yathāvutto kesañci attho na yuttoti.
因此,这是就五取蕴本身为世间而言的。就镇伏而论:这里的镇伏,只是通过彼分断而不令其生起、不令其现行,并非依镇伏断而善加断除了对立面。因为说“已断”,只是就其相似于那样断除而说的。何以故?因未证得禅那。然而,为了显示通过前分修习而如此断除故,此心名为离贪欲,而非如眼识那般自性无贪,故说“非如眼识”。“如彼”中的“彼”字,只是小品词,或者指彼心。如今令其释放,未来不再执取,即名为清净。而且,为了显示:如此心通过前分修习而得清净故,离贪欲;同样地,离嗔恚、离昏沉睡眠、离掉举、离疑亦应知,故说“于‘舍断嗔恚过失’等中,也是此义”。腐粥等,是指隔夜的大麦粥等。前本性,指清净洁白的自性,以此显示发生变异之义。以发生变异,即通过舍弃先前本性的变异。以“两者”等,说明了同义复合词的情况。因为“那时心的不适业性”等(《法集论》1162;《分别论》546)在阿毗达摩中描述了昏沉,“那时身的不适业性”等描述了睡眠,故说“昏沉是心之病,睡眠是心所之病”。虽然昏沉与睡眠彼此不分离,但如同心与心所的轻快性等,它们也是依次对各自显示巴利原文
Tasmāti pañcupādānakkhandhānameva lokabhāvato. Vikkhambhanavasenāti ettha vikkhambhanaṃ tadaṅgappahānavaseneva anuppādanaṃ appavattanaṃ, na pana vikkhambhanappahānavasena paṭipakkhānaṃ suṭṭhupahīnaṃ. ‘‘Pahīnattā’’ti hi tathāpahīnasadisataṃ eva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kasmāti ce? Jhānassa anadhigatattā. Evaṃ pana pubbabhāgabhāvanāya tathā pahānatoyevetaṃ cittaṃ vigatābhijjhaṃ nāma, na tu cakkhuviññāṇamiva sabhāvato abhijjhāvirahitattāti dassetuṃ ‘‘na cakkhuviññāṇasadisenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā tanti ettha tanti nipātamattaṃ, taṃ cittaṃ vā. Adhunā muñcanassa, anāgate ca puna anādānassa karaṇaṃ parisodhanaṃ nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathā ca imassa cittassa pubbabhāgabhāvanāya parisodhitattā vigatābhijjhatā, evaṃ abyāpannatā, vigatathinamiddhatā, anuddhatatā, nibbicikicchatā ca veditabbāti nidassento ‘‘byāpādapadosaṃ pahāyātiādīsupi eseva nayo’’ti āha. Pūtikummāsādayoti ābhidosikayavakummāsādayo. Purimapakatinti parisuddhapaṇḍarasabhāvaṃ, iminā vikāramāpajjatīti atthaṃ dasseti. Vikārāpattiyāti purimapakativijahanasaṅkhātena vikāramāpajjanena. ‘‘Ubhaya’’ntiādinā tulyatthasamāsabhāvamāha. ‘‘Yā tasmiṃ samaye cittassa akallatā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1162; vibha. 546) thinassa, ‘‘yā tasmiṃ samaye kāyassa akallatā’’tiādinā ca middhassa abhidhamme niddiṭṭhattā ‘‘thinaṃ cittagelaññaṃ, middhaṃ cetasikagelañña’’nti vuttaṃ. Satipi hi thinamiddhassa aññamaññaṃ avippayoge cittakāyalahutādīnaṃ viya cittacetasikānaṃ yathākkamaṃ taṃtaṃvisesassa yā tesaṃ akallatādīnaṃ visesapaccayatā, ayametesaṃ sabhāvoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Diṭṭhāloko nāma passito rattiṃ candālokadīpālokaukkālokādi, divā ca sūriyālokādi. Rattimpi divāpi tassa sañjānanasamatthā saññā ālokasaññā, tassā ca vigatanīvaraṇāya parisuddhāya atthitā idha adhippetā. Atisayatthavisiṭṭhassa hi atthiatthassa avabodhako ayamīkāroti dassento ‘‘rattimpī’’tiādimāha, vigatathinamiddhabhāvassa kāraṇattā cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Suttesu pākaṭovāyamattho.
“能忆念故,为具念;能正知故,为正知”——如此显示这是人物的解说,故说“具足念与智”。虽然另有精进、定等其他法存在,为何只说此两者?或为何不在离贪欲等处说此两者,而单单在此处说?为了排除这样的质问,故说“此两者”等,意为:以人物为依止而解说的念与正知,即指此两者。“超越而住”——说明了“彼”字有过去义,而通过前分修习而断除,即是超越。“这是怎样、这是怎样”而转起,故为“如何”;有此疑者为“有如何者”;非有如何者为“无如何者”,即离疑——这是词义。但为了显示其义理,说“不如此转起‘这是怎样、这是怎样’,故为无如何者”。“于善法”应与“无如何者”相连,故说“不疑惑、不犹豫之义”。由于词义、特相、分类等不同,这里的“等”字应包含缘、断、能断者等的聚集,因为它们也应按分类而说。显示巴利原文
Saratīti sato, sampajānātīti sampajānoti evaṃ puggalaniddesoti dasseti ‘‘satiyā ca ñāṇena ca samannāgato’’ti iminā. Santesupi aññesu vīriyasamādhiādīsu kasmā idameva ubhayaṃ vuttaṃ, vigatābhijjhādīsu vā idaṃ ubhayaṃ avatvā kasmā idheva vuttanti anuyogamapanetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ ubhaya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ, puggalādhiṭṭhānena niddiṭṭhasatisampajaññasaṅkhātaṃ idaṃ ubhayanti attho. Atikkamitvā ṭhitoti ta-saddassa atītatthataṃ āha, pubbabhāgabhāvanāya pajahanameva ca atikkamanaṃ. ‘‘Kathaṃ idaṃ kathaṃ ida’’nti pavattatīti kathaṃkathā, vicikicchā, sā etassa atthīti kathaṃkathī, na kathaṃkathī akathaṃkathī, nibbicikicchoti vacanattho, atthamattaṃ pana dassetuṃ ‘‘kathaṃ idaṃ kathaṃ ida’nti evaṃ nappavattatīti akathaṃkathī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kusalesu dhammesū’’ti idaṃ ‘‘akathaṃkathī’’ti iminā sambajjhitabbanti āha ‘‘na vicikicchati, na kaṅkhatīti attho’’ti. Vacanatthalakkhaṇādibhedatoti ettha ādisaddena paccayapahānapahāyakādīnampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tepi hi pabhedato vattabbāti.
218 以利息取用的财物称为债务,故说“以利息取用财物”。已离去、已灭尽者,即是“离尽”;具有此性质者即是“离尽者”。因此说“已离边际”,意思是:应令其达到无剩余应还债务的边际。“他们”指以利息取用的债务财物。所谓边际,即此后仍须偿还的债务余额。无债务者称为“无债”,其状态即是“无债务”。这本身便是因,故称“无债务因”,即无债务之因、无债务的缘由。又或者,无债务本身就是因、是缘由,故为“无债务因”,与“喜悦、欢喜”等相连。“我已从债务的障碍中解脱”,由此获得强烈的喜悦;“我还有剩余的生活资具”,由此获得欢喜。显示巴利原文
218. Vaḍḍhiyā gahitaṃ dhanaṃ iṇaṃ nāmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘vaḍḍhiyā dhanaṃ gahetvā’’ti. Vigato anto byanto, so yassāti byantī. Tenāha ‘‘vigatanta’’nti, virahitadātabbaiṇapariyantaṃ kareyyāti cetassa attho. Tesanti vaḍḍhiyā gahitānaṃ iṇadhanānaṃ. Pariyanto nāma taduttari dātabbaiṇaseso. Natthi iṇamassāti aṇaṇo. Tassa bhāvo āṇaṇyaṃ. Tameva nidānaṃ āṇaṇyanidānaṃ, āṇaṇyahetu āṇaṇyakāraṇāti attho. Āṇaṇyameva hi nidānaṃ kāraṇamassāti vā āṇaṇyanidānaṃ, ‘‘pāmojjaṃ somanassa’’nti imehi sambandho. ‘‘Iṇapalibodhato muttomhī’’ti balavapāmojjaṃ labhati. ‘‘Jīvikānimittampi me avasiṭṭhaṃ atthī’’ti somanassaṃ adhigacchati.
219 不相应的受,即苦受。因为它在善异熟的相续中成为违逆,所以与乐受不相应,并且它正是乐受生起的障碍。“如以锯”,即如同被锯子切割。四威仪,即四种威仪。因为病人无法胜任站立与行走,对于坐等也是如此。“恼害”即折磨。由风等变异所导致的不正常状态,就称为“病”。因此说“被彼所生的苦苦所苦”,意思是:被病所生的苦受之苦所苦恼,即充满痛苦。然而,由于苦受本身具有病的性质,在最初生起时便生恼害,故称为“病”;因此,被名为病的根本疾病所病,又被随后相续生起的苦的随行疾病所苦——应取此义。如此,以苦受而表达的“苦”一词,与“病”一词具有被限定的关系,便变得明显了——这是阿阇梨法护长老在《长部注疏》1.219中所说的道理。过度、量、标准,即是“过度”,意为强烈;过度地患病,因界耗尽而身体衰损,称为“过度病者”。被过度疾病所侵袭,即被过度疾病所折磨。“不会喜欢”,即不会欢喜;这是业处的句子,因为“彼之食物”中的“彼”显示了作者。“量”字没有意义,所以说“力量之量就是力量”,或者少许的力量称为力量之量。“彼两者”,即喜悦与欢喜。“我从病中解脱”,应得到喜悦;“我有体力”,应得到欢喜——这是经文。显示巴利原文
219.Visabhāgavedanā nāma dukkhavedanā. Sā hi kusalavipākasantānassa virodhibhāvato sukhavedanāya visabhāgā, tassā uppattiyā karaṇabhūtāya. Kakacenevāti kakacena iva. Catuiriyāpathanti catubbidhampi iriyāpathaṃ. Byādhito hi yathā ṭhānagamanesu asamattho, evaṃ nisajjādīsupi. Ābādhetīti pīḷeti. Vātādīnaṃ vikārabhūtā visamāvatthāyeva ‘‘ābādho’’ti vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘taṃsamuṭṭhānena dukkhena dukkhito’’ti, ābādhasamuṭṭhānena dukkhavedanāsaṅkhātena dukkhena dukkhito dukkhasamannāgatoti attho. Dukkhavedanāya pana ābādhabhāvena ādimhi bādhatīti ābādhoti katvā ābādhasaṅkhātena mūlabyādhinā ābādhiko, aparāparaṃ sañjātadukkhasaṅkhātena anubandhabyādhinā dukkhitoti attho gahetabbo. Evañhi sati dukkhavedanāvasena vuttassa dukkhitapadassa ābādhikapadena visesitabbatā pākaṭā hotīti ayamettha ācariyadhammapālattherena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.219) vuttanayo. Adhikaṃ mattaṃ pamāṇaṃ adhimattaṃ, bāḷhaṃ, adhimattaṃ gilāno dhātusaṅkhayena parikkhīṇasarīroti adhimattagilāno. Adhimattabyādhiparetatāyāti adhimattabyādhipīḷitatāya. Na rucceyyāti na ruccetha, kammatthapadañcetaṃ ‘‘bhattañcassā’’ti ettha ‘‘assā’’ti kattudassanato. Mattāsaddo anatthakoti vuttaṃ ‘‘balamattāti balamevā’’ti, appamattakaṃ vā balaṃ balamattā. Tadubhayanti pāmojjaṃ, somanassañca. Labhetha pāmojjaṃ ‘‘rogato muttomhī’’ti. Adhigaccheyya somanassaṃ ‘‘atthi me kāyabala’’nti pāḷiyā attho.
220 所谓“迦迦尼迦量”,注释者们解说为“一古恩迦的量”。在《律疏》中则说为“一又半米的量”。此外,“迦那”一词在米糠中……显示巴利原文
220.Kākaṇikamattaṃ nāma ‘‘ekaguñjamatta’’nti vadanti. ‘‘Diyaḍḍhavīhimatta’’nti vinayaṭīkāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Apica kaṇa-saddo kuṇḍake –
无糠无壳、清净芬芳的米粒之果;
如“在臼中煮熟后,他们便食用那食物”(《长部·尼柯耶》3.281)等中所说。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Akaṇaṃ athusaṃ suddhaṃ, sugandhaṃ taṇḍulapphalaṃ; Tuṇḍikīre pacitvāna, tato bhuñjanti bhojana’’nti. (dī. ni. 3.281) ādīsu viya;
因为《阿毗达摩藏·杂品·四色品》第454颂中说:“糠屑当是碎米末。”而少量的糠屑称为“kākaṇa”,如同说“kālavaṇa”。因此,以kākaṇa为量的,称为kākaṇika;kākaṇika本身即kākaṇikamatta,其义应解为:仅如少量碎米末之量。这样便与《本生经注·隧道本生注》中所说“所谓王赐,虽仅kākaṇikamatta之量亦不适宜,他给的是价值半摩沙迦的肉”之语不相违。“Vayo”即灭尽、破坏;对于作意“我已从束缚中解脱”者,此二者(喜悦与欢喜)便生起。因此说“应得欣悦,应获欢喜”。至于未尽的言句,说“其余依已说之法”等。“依已说之法”即依第一、第二句中所说之法。“于一切句”指第三等三个部分,因为每一个譬喻的方面被称为“句”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kaṇo tu kuṇḍako bhave’’ti (abhidhāne bhakaṇḍe catubbaṇṇavagge 454 gāthā) hi vuttaṃ. Appako pana kaṇo kākaṇoti vuccati yathā ‘‘kālavaṇa’’nti, tasmā kākaṇova pamāṇamassāti kākaṇikaṃ, kākaṇikameva kākaṇikamattaṃ, khuddakakuṇḍakappamāṇamevāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Evañhi sati ‘‘rājadāyo nāma kākaṇikamattaṃ na vaṭṭati, aḍḍhamāsagghanikaṃ maṃsaṃ detī’’ti (jā. aṭṭha. 6.umaṅgajātakavaṇṇanāya) vuttena umaṅgajātakavacanena ca aviruddhaṃ hoti. Vayoti khayo bhaṅgo, tassa ‘‘bandhanā muttomhī’’ti āvajjayato tadubhayaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘labhetha pāmojjaṃ, adhigaccheyya somanassa’’nti. Vacanāvasesaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sesaṃ vuttanayenevā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vuttanayenevāti ca paṭhamadutiyapadesu vuttanayeneva. Sabbapadesūti tatiyādīsu tīsu koṭṭhāsesu. Ekeko hi upamāpakkho ‘‘pada’’nti vutto.
221-222 “Adhīno”指属于、不自主。因此说“不能随自己意愿做任何事”。另一者也是如此。“想去哪里,却不能随意去”——为了显示这种带有余词的句法关系,而说“yena”等。“Kāmaṃ”此为中性词,或由“kāmena”(以欲愿)通过插入随韵而成为“kāmaṃgamo”(随意而行)。在“dāsabyā”中,为了显示“bya”声的性相之义,而说“dāsabhāvā”(奴役状态)。因不属他人,如同自己的手臂,于己事中可被寻求、可被差遣,故为“bhujisso”(自由人),即自主——此为词源解释。《根本五十经疏》中说:“‘Bhujo’名为随己意乐之使用,此中应被寻求者,故为bhujisso,即无主人者。”然而,仅示其义则说“属于自己的”,即自己属于自己,而非属于他人。因无水,能令人越过无水之难,故为“kantāro”(荒野);“addhāna”一词是长途的同义词,故说“无水之长路”。显示巴利原文
221-222.Adhīnoti āyatto, na seribhāvayutto. Tenāha ‘‘attano ruciyā kiñci kātuṃ na labhatī’’ti. Evamitarasmimpi. Yena gantukāmo, tena kāmaṃ gamo na hotīti sapāṭhasesayojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kāmanti cetaṃ bhāvanapuṃsakavacanaṃ, kāmena vā icchāya gamo kāmaṃgamo niggahītāgamena. Dāsabyāti ettha bya-saddassa bhāvatthataṃ dasseti ‘‘dāsabhāvā’’ti iminā. Aparādhīnatāya attano bhujo viya sakicce esitabbo pesitabboti bhujisso, sayaṃvasīti nibbacanaṃ. ‘‘Bhujo nāma attano yathāsukhaṃ viniyogo, so isso icchitabbo etthāti bhujisso, assāmiko’’ti mūlapaṇṇāsakaṭīkāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Atthamattaṃ pana dassento ‘‘attano santako’’ti āha, attāva attano santako, na parassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Anudakatāya kaṃ pānīyaṃ tārenti etthāti kantāro, addhānasaddo ca dīghapariyāyoti vuttaṃ ‘‘nirudakaṃ dīghamagga’’nti.
223 “其余的”指嗔恚等。“在那里”指于所见之中。“此”即现在所说的相似性,由此债务等成为譬喻,欲贪等成为所喻,应知这便是它们之间譬喻与所喻的关联——相似性。“被他们”指被那些债主们。“任何抗拒”指因无力还债,故不能拒绝任何粗恶语等。何故如此?因为“是忍受之因”。意思是:因债务而不得不忍受。凡对某物以欲贪而染著者:即任何人对于作为欲贪所依的人,以欲贪而染著。他以与渴爱俱行之心执取彼所依:即以成为渴爱的欲贪,执取那作为欲贪所依的人,谓“此是我的”。“俱行”一词在此处仅表其体性,如“此渴爱是再有、与喜贪俱行”(《长部》等)中所说。由此,指由那作为欲贪所依的人。何故如此?因为“是忍受之因”。意思是:因是欲贪的忍受之因。此处所说的“忍受”,是指与忍受相似、以贪为主的恶不善心生起,并非如《长部》《法句经》等中所说“忍辱是最高苦行、忍受”,那是以无嗔为主的苦行体性之心生起。“被家主们”即被作为家主的翁姑夫主们。句法关系是:妇女们的欲贪,恰如忍受之因。显示巴利原文
223.Sesānīti byāpādādīni. Tatrāti dassane. Ayanti idāni vuccamānā sadisatā, yena iṇādīnaṃ upamābhāvo, kāmacchandādīnañca upameyyabhāvo hoti, so nesaṃ upamopameyyasambandho sadisatāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tehīti parehi iṇasāmikehi. Kiñci paṭibāhitunti pharusavacanādikaṃ kiñcipi paṭisedhetuṃ na sakkoti iṇaṃ dātumasakkuṇattā. Kasmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘titikkhākāraṇa’’ntiādi, iṇassa titikkhākāraṇattāti attho. Yo yamhi kāmacchandena rajjatīti yo puggalo yamhi kāmacchandassa vatthubhūte puggale kāmacchandena rajjati. Taṇhāsahagatena taṃ vatthuṃ gaṇhātīti taṇhābhūtena kāmacchandena taṃ kāmacchandassa vatthubhūtaṃ puggalaṃ ‘‘mameta’’nti gaṇhāti. Sahagatasaddo hettha tabbhāvamatto ‘‘yāyaṃ taṇhā ponobhavikā nandīrāgasahagatā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.400; ma. ni. 1.133, 480; 3.373; saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 15; paṭi. ma. 2.30) viya. Tenāti kāmacchandassa vatthubhūtena puggalena. Kasmāti āha ‘‘titikkhākāraṇa’’ntiādi, kāmacchandassa titikkhākāraṇattāti attho. Titikkhāsadiso cettha rāgapadhāno akusalacittuppādo ‘‘titikkhā’’ti vutto, na tu ‘‘khantī paramaṃ tapo titikkhā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.91; dha. pa. 184) viya tapabhūto adosapadhāno cittuppādo. Gharasāmikehīti gharassa sāmikabhūtehi sassusasurasāmikehi. Itthīnaṃ kāmacchando titikkhākāraṇaṃ hoti viyāti sambandho.
“然而,犹如”等,说明了其余疾病等的相似性。其中,因胆汁过患增盛而患胆汁病者。由于胆汁增盛,一切蜜、糖等对他来说都成为不甜,故说“他只会吐出‘苦的、苦的’”。“你们加害”是《疏》(《长部疏》1.223)中所引的文句,据名词动词化而释义为“你们作加害”,但现所见文句为“被你们加害”。“迷乱”即到处徘徊,或退堕于下劣。他无法尝到、体验、了知、获得蜜糖等味——此即句法关系。“教味”即教法的滋味,或教法本身就是味。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathā panā’’tiādinā sesānaṃ rogādisadisatā vuttā. Tattha pittadosakopanavasena pittarogāturo. Tassa pittakopanato sabbampi madhusakkarādikaṃ amadhurabhāvena sampajjatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘tittakaṃ tittakanti uggiratiyevā’’ti. Tumhe upaddavethāti ṭīkāyaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.223) uddhaṭapāṭho, ‘‘upaddavaṃ karothā’’ti nāmadhātuvasena attho, idāni pana ‘‘tumhehi upaddutā’’ti pāṭho dissati. Vibbhamatīti ito cito ca āhiṇḍati, hīnāya vā āvattati. Madhusakkarādīnaṃ rasaṃ na vindati nānubhavati na jānāti na labhati ca viyāti sambandho. Sāsanarasanti sāsanassa rasaṃ, sāsanameva vā rasaṃ.
星宿节即星宿庆典。因此说:“啊!舞蹈,啊!歌唱”。“解脱”意为从束缚中得到解脱。“听法”指应听闻的法。显示巴利原文
Nakkhattachaṇaṃ nakkhattaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aho naccaṃ, aho gīta’’nti. Muttoti bandhanato pamutto. Dhammassavanassāti sotabbadhammassa.
应迅速执行之事即是“紧急”(accāyika)。因为“ati”一词有快速之义,如同“杀生”(pāṇātipāta)等词中所表达的那样(《中部》《分别论》)。“于律中不知已作者”是指不熟悉律之次第的人。所谓“知已作、究竟与判决者,是为知已作者,非知已作者则不如此”,因为他不能如实了知适宜与不适宜。因此说“于某事上”等等。“即使是适宜的肉”如猪肉等。“由于不适宜肉之想”即是由于视其为熊肉等之想。显示巴利原文
Sīghaṃ pavattetabbakiccaṃ accāyikaṃ. Sīghattho hi atisaddo ‘‘pāṇātipāto’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.193; vibha. 968) viya. Vinaye apakataññunāti vinayakkame akusalena. Pakataṃ niṭṭhānaṃ vinicchayaṃ jānātīti pakataññū, na pakataññū tathā. So hi kappiyākappiyaṃ yāthāvato na jānāti. Tenāha ‘‘kismiñcidevā’’tiādi. Kappiyamaṃsepīti sūkaramaṃsādikepi. Akappiyamaṃsasaññāyāti acchamaṃsādisaññāya.
“以枝杖之声”即指以树枝、木杖发出的声音。所谓“极度疑惧而周遍疑惧”,是说既非无疑惧,又于方方面面都疑惧,这便是极度疑惧的意思。显示这种状态的是“他走”等语句。因为他只是稍微走一点;在行走时,由于那种极度疑惧、周遍疑惧的状态,他又会在各处停下。在如此荒野中行走时,“谁知会发生什么”,他也会折返。因此,与他已走过的路程相比,未走的路反而更多。正因如此,他艰难困苦地到达安稳之地,或者不能到达。“艰难”与“困苦”是同义词,身体的痛苦称为“艰难”,心理的痛苦称为“困苦”。“安稳之地”是指成为安稳的土地,因为“anta”一词有“成为那样”之义;或者“安稳”即恐惧的灭尽,那安稳本身就是界限、范围,这样的土地即是“安稳之地”,意指无有怖畏的区域。在八种处所中,即在《分别论》所说的八种处所中:“在那里,什么是疑?对导师怀疑、疑惑;对法;对僧;对学处;对前际;对后际;对前后际;对此缘性、缘已生起的诸法怀疑、疑惑。”“决意后”即确定后,或相信后。“以信而执取”是说对于可信的对象,以“这就是”的方式相信而执取,不能如是信受的意思。显示巴利原文
Daṇḍakasaddenāpīti sākhādaṇḍakasaddenapi. Ussaṅkitaparisaṅkitoti avasaṅkito ceva samantato saṅkito ca, ativiya saṅkitoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tadākāradassanaṃ ‘‘gacchatipī’’tiādi. So hi thokaṃ gacchatipi. Gacchanto pana tāya ussaṅkitaparisaṅkitatāya tattha tattha tiṭṭhatipi. Īdise kantāre gate ‘‘ko jānāti, kiṃ bhavissatī’’ti nivattatipi, tasmā ca gataṭṭhānato agataṭṭhānameva bahutaraṃ hoti, tato eva ca so kicchena kasirena khemantabhūmiṃ pāpuṇāti vā, na vā pāpuṇāti. Kicchena kasirenāti pariyāyavacanaṃ, kāyikadukkhena khedanaṃ vā kicchaṃ, cetasikadukkhena pīḷanaṃ kasiraṃ. Khemantabhūminti khemabhūtaṃ bhūmiṃ antasaddassa tabbhāvattā, bhayassa khīyanaṃ vā khemo, sova anto paricchedo yassā tathā, sā eva bhūmīti khemantabhūmi, taṃ nibbhayappadesanti attho. Aṭṭhasu ṭhānesūti ‘‘tattha katamā vicikicchā? Satthari kaṅkhati vicikicchati. Dhamme. Saṅghe. Sikkhāya. Pubbante. Aparante. Pubbantāparante. Idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu kaṅkhati vicikicchatī’’ti (vibha. 915) vibhaṅge vuttesu aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu. Adhimuccitvāti vinicchinitvā, saddahitvā vā. Saddhāya gaṇhitunti saddheyyavatthuṃ ‘‘idameva’’nti saddahanavasena gaṇhituṃ, saddahituṃ na sakkotīti attho. Itīti tasmā vuttanayena asakkuṇanato antarāyaṃ karotīti sambandho. ‘‘Atthi nu kho, natthi nu kho’’ti araññaṃ paviṭṭhassa ādimhi eva sappanaṃ saṃsayo āsappanaṃ. Tato paraṃ samantato, uparūpari vā sappanaṃ parisappanaṃ. Ubhayenapi tattheva saṃsayavasena paribbhamanaṃ dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘apariyogāhana’’nti, ‘‘evamida’’nti samantato anogāhananti attho. Chambhitattanti araññasaññāya uppannaṃ chambhitabhāvaṃ hadayamaṃsacalanaṃ, utrāsanti vuttaṃ hoti. Upameyyapakkhepi yathārahamesamattho.
224 在此,相似性应依未断除方面的所说方式而了知:因为从欲贪等与债务等相似开始,它们的断除便与无债务等相似。以下仅是词义不明之处:“繁荣的”即富裕;“与先前记在叶上的利息一起存在”故为“带息的”。“叶”指借债时作为标记而写的叶片,又或指以乞债方式所写的通知叶。“无染着”即因无财富关联而不沾染,“无执着”亦然,二者实为同义词;或说“无染着”即依所说方式,以无沾染为特质的“无执着”义。“六法”即执取不净相、修习不净观、守护根门、饮食知量、善友、适当言论,这六种法。“修习”即增长,或令于自身中生起。由于在《大念处经》中以令未生不生、已生断除等分别方式详细载于圣典中,故说“将在《大念处经》中解说”。而“在《大念处经》中”指的是结集于此《长阿含》中的,并非《中阿含》,因为那是不同的部类。即使来自不同部类,其义理也多为诸师在其他地方所说。此理也适用于嗔恚等断除的部分。“于他人的事物”即作为所缘的他人事物。因无我所执,故不系着;因无执取,故不束缚。即使看见天界的色,烦恼也不现行,更不显示巴利原文
224.Tatrāyaṃ sadisatāti ettha pana appahīnapakkhe vuttanayānusārena sadisatā veditabbā . Yadaggena hi kāmacchandādayo iṇādisadisā, tadaggena ca tesaṃ pahānaṃ āṇaṇyādisadisatāti. Idaṃ pana anuttānapadatthamattaṃ – samiddhatanti aḍḍhataṃ. Pubbe paṇṇamāropitāya vaḍḍhiyā saha vattatīti savaḍḍhikaṃ. Paṇṇanti iṇadānaggahaṇe sallakkhaṇavasena likhitapaṇṇaṃ. Puna paṇṇanti iṇayācanavasena sāsanalikhitapaṇṇaṃ. Nillepatāyāti dhanasambandhābhāvena avilimpanatāya. Tathā alaggatāya. Pariyāyavacanañhetaṃ dvayaṃ. Atha vā nillepatāyāti vuttanayena avilimpanabhāvena visesanabhūtena alaggatāyāti attho. Cha dhammeti asubhanimittassa uggaho, asubhabhāvanānuyogo, indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti ime cha dhamme. Bhāvetvāti brūhetvā, attani vā uppādetvā. Anuppannaanuppādanauppannappahānādivibhāvanavasena mahāsatipaṭṭhānasutte savisesaṃ pāḷiyā āgatattā ‘‘mahāsatipaṭṭhāne vaṇṇayissāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Mahāsatipaṭṭhāne’’ti ca imasmiṃ dīghāgame (dī. ni. 2.372 ādayo) saṅgītamāha, na majjhimāgame nikāyantarattā. Nikāyantarāgatopi hi attho ācariyehi aññattha yebhuyyena vuttoti vadanti. Esa nayo byāpādādippahānabhāgepi. Paravatthumhīti ārammaṇabhūte parasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ. Mamāyanābhāvena neva saṅgo. Pariggahābhāvena na baddho. Dibbānipi rūpāni passato kileso na samudācarati, pageva mānusiyānīti sambhāvane api-saddo.
作无利益者,即对自己及他人作不利之事。“六法”即执取慈相、修习慈心观、业自作性、多作思择、善友、适当言论,这六种法。“就在那里”指即在《大念处经》中。针对行持戒而制定的学处,称为“行持制定”;“等”字则包含了禁止制定的学处。显示巴利原文
Anatthakaroti attano, parassa ca ahitakaro. Cha dhammeti mettānimittassa uggaho, mettābhāvanānuyogo, kammassakatā, paṭisaṅkhānabahulatā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti ime cha dhamme. Tatthevāti mahāsatipaṭṭhāneyeva. Cārittasīlameva uddissa paññattasikkhāpadaṃ ‘‘ācārapaṇṇattī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ādi-saddena vārittapaṇṇattisikkhāpadaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“被使进入”即被使令进入。因为被关入牢狱而未能享受节日的人,称为“在节日被关入牢狱的人”;或者在节日当天,为了使他不能享受节日而被如此处置的人,这样称呼也是可以的。“在另一个”指在那之后,或在另一个节日。“机会”即作业的理由或作业的时刻。“作大无利益”即以剥夺现世等利益的方式,作大无利益之事。“六法”即对过量饮食的取相、变换威仪、作意光明想、露地住、善友、适当言论,这六种法。“法之节日”即由如前所说的应闻之法所构成的庆典。因为能令善人生起喜悦,所以法也以类似庆典的意义而被称为“节日”。显示巴利原文
Pavesitoti pavesāpito. Bandhanāgāraṃ pavesāpitattā aladdhanakkhattānubhavano puriso hi ‘‘nakkhattadivase bandhanāgāraṃ pavesito puriso’’ti vutto, nakkhattadivase eva vā tadananubhavanatthaṃ tathā kato puriso evaṃ vuttotipi vaṭṭati. Aparasminti tato pacchime, aññasmiṃ vā nakkhattadivase. Okāsanti kammakāraṇākāraṇaṃ, kammakāraṇakkhaṇaṃ vā. Mahānatthakaranti diṭṭhadhammikādiatthahāpanamukhena mahato anatthassa kārakaṃ. Cha dhammeti atibhojane nimittaggāho, iriyāpathasamparivattanatā, ālokasaññāmanasikāro, abbhokāsavāso, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti ime cha dhamme, dhammanakkhattassāti yathāvuttasotabbadhammasaṅkhātassa mahassa. Sādhūnaṃ ratijananato hi dhammopi chaṇasadisaṭṭhena ‘‘nakkhatta’’nti vutto.
掉悔是重大不利的制造者:从导致大过患的意义上说,称为“大不利之制造者”。六法即多闻、善问、通达毗奈耶、亲近长老、善友、适宜之论——此为六法。以力,或以自力强行所欲之事,即“强迫”。出离行:即从诸盖中出离之行,唯是近行定,而非初禅,因为此乃以近行修为主。显示巴利原文
Uddhaccakukkucce mahānatthakaranti parāyattatāpādanena vuttanayena mahato anatthassa kārakaṃ. Cha dhammeti bahussutatā, paripucchakatā, vinaye pakataññutā, vuḍḍhasevitā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti ime cha dhamme. Balassa, balena vā attanā icchitassa karaṇaṃ balakkāro, tena. Nekkhammapaṭipadanti nīvaraṇato nikkhamanapaṭipadaṃ upacārabhāvanameva, na paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ. Ayañhi upacārabhāvanādhikāro.
“有力”:以具足摧伏怨敌之心的力量故为有力;又由‘vantu’(食)字有极喜、希求之义,令觉了故,亦为“有力”。“臂力”:即手中之财宝精华。“善武装”:即已备弓等武器,意为披挂五种武器。“有随从”:因为有勇健战士等随从之故。“彼”:即如上所说之人。由于有力、善武装、有随从之故,盗贼遥见即逃。“行不利者”:如前所说,由于对正修行产生障碍,故称为行不利者。六法即多闻、善问、通达毗奈耶、胜解多、善友、适宜之论——此为六法。如同多闻等能断除掉悔一样,对于此处的疑,也是如此,因此这里也取多闻等三法;而善友与适宜之论能断除五盖,故应理解为它们随顺于各别盖的修习。“如草者”:譬如由于怖畏而不计草。“越度恶行险道”:为了越度作为恶行方便的疑,故越度称为恶行的险道。盖障中的疑,以不随顺正行、随顺邪行之相滋长邪行;因此,未断疑即是恶行之方便,断疑即是断除恶方便。显示巴利原文
Balavāti paccatthikavidhamanasamatthena balena balavā vantu-saddassa abhisayatthavisiṭṭhassa atthiyatthassa bodhanato. Hatthasāranti hatthagatadhanasāraṃ. Sajjāvudhoti sajjitadhanvādiāvudho, sannaddhapañcāvudhoti attho. Sūravīrasevakajanavasena saparivāro. Tanti yathāvuttaṃ purisaṃ. Balavantatāya, sajjāvudhatāya, saparivāratāya ca corā dūratova disvā palāyeyyuṃ. Anatthakārikāti sammāpaṭipattiyā vibandhakaraṇato vuttanayena ahitakārikā. Cha dhammeti bahussutatā, paripucchakatā , vinaye pakataññutā, adhimokkhabahulatā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti ime cha dhamme. Yathā bāhusaccādīni uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānāya saṃvattanti, evaṃ vicikicchāyapīti idhāpi bahussutatādayo tayopi dhammā gahitā, kalyāṇamittatā, pana sappāyakathā ca pañcannampi pahānāya saṃvattanti, tasmā tāsu tassa tassa nīvaraṇassa anucchavikasevanatā daṭṭhabbā. Tiṇaṃ viyāti tiṇaṃ bhayavasena na gaṇeti viya. Duccaritakantāraṃ nittharitvāti duccaritacaraṇūpāyabhūtāya vicikicchāya nittharaṇavasena duccaritasaṅkhātaṃ kantāraṃ nittharitvā. Vicikicchā hi sammāpaṭipattiyā appaṭipajjananimittatāmukhena micchāpaṭipattimeva paribrūhetīti tassā appahānaṃ duccaritacaraṇūpāyo, pahānañca duccaritavidhūnanūpāyoti.
225 “tuṭṭhākāro”(喜之造作者):以此显示名为喜悦的微弱喜。因其微弱之故,于任何生喜之处,仅表现为喜的造作。“tuṭṭhassā”(已喜者):此即“已悦”之义;其义在复注中说为“依进入位所得之喜故为已喜”,因此以“喜悦”一词取进入位的喜。“喜生令全身震颤”:此义是说“由自遍满性及自所生极净色的生起,令全身震颤的满相喜生起”,因此以“喜”一词取满相喜;然而在此处应寻求其因。而在其他地方,则以微弱与强劲的共通义说明二词之义:任何微弱的喜即是喜悦,强劲的喜即是喜;或在五种喜中,依微、强渐次不生的顺序,前前者为喜悦,后后者为喜,也有这样的说法,此即随顺此处之义。“tuṭṭhassā”:依名为喜悦的微弱喜而成为已喜。Ta-词表过去义,否则会有因果不相关的过失,且已说具有因果关联故。“令全身震颤”:以此显示此处名为喜的强劲喜。由自遍满性及自所生极净色的生起,令全身震动而生。在此,引发全身喜的激荡与喜的遍满,即为震动。显示巴利原文
225.‘‘Tuṭṭhākāro’’ti iminā pāmojjaṃ nāma taruṇapītiṃ dasseti. Sā hi taruṇatāya kathañcipi tuṭṭhāvatthā tuṭṭhākāramattaṃ. ‘‘Tuṭṭhassā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘pamuditassā’’ti etassa atthavacanaṃ, tassattho ‘‘okkantikabhāvappattāya pītiyā vasena tuṭṭhassā’’ti ṭīkāyaṃ vutto, evaṃ sati pāmojjapadena okkantikā pītiyeva gahitā siyā. ‘‘Sakalasarīraṃ khobhayamānā pīti jāyatī’’ti etassā cattho ‘‘attano savipphārikatāya, attasamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpuppattiyā ca sakalasarīraṃ khobhayamānā pharaṇalakkhaṇā pīti jāyatī’’ti vutto, evañca sati pītipadena pharaṇā pītiyeva gahitā siyā, kāraṇaṃ panettha gavesitabbaṃ. Idha, pana aññattha ca taruṇabalavatāmattasāmaññena padadvayassa atthadīpanato yā kāci taruṇā pīti pāmojjaṃ, balavatī pīti, pañcavidhāya vā pītiyā yathākkamaṃ taruṇabalavatāsambhavato purimā purimā pāmojjaṃ, pacchimā pacchimā pītītipi vadanti, ayamettha tadanucchaviko attho. Tuṭṭhassāti pāmojjasaṅkhātāya taruṇapītiyā vasena tuṭṭhassa. Ta-saddo hi atītattho, itarathā hetuphalasambandhābhāvāpattito, hetuphalasambandhabhāvassa ca vuttattā. ‘‘Sakalasarīraṃ khobhayamānā’’ti iminā pīti nāma ettha balavapītīti dasseti. Sā hi attano savipphārikatāya, attasamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpuppattiyā ca sakalasarīraṃ saṅkhobhayamānā jāyati. Sakalasarīre pītivegassa pītivipphārassa uppādanañcettha saṅkhobhanaṃ.
“与喜俱”者:由省略后词而成为“喜”。那么它是什么?即“心”,此心与喜俱,故为复合词。也可解作“与喜相应之心者”,即指此。为显示其义理的界限,故说“与喜相应心之补特伽罗”。“身”者:此处意指一切名聚,并非如“身轻性”等处唯指受等三蕴,亦非如“身处”等指色身,而是以“名身”表之。这里以二轻安而说为轻安,轻安即远离烦恼的热恼,故说“离热恼”,意为已断除掉悔等烦恼的热恼。由如前所述的前分修习,既感受心乐,又由此所生起的极清净色触遍满之身,亦感受身乐,故说“感受身及心之乐”。因此所谓“由离欲乐”:由这样说“受乐”,是从杂染及诸盖中脱离而出,属初禅之一分,如理以离欲之名,即指近行乐与安止乐。这里的定亦依此二者,故说“依近行及依安止”。显示巴利原文
Pītisahitaṃ pīti uttarapadalopena. Kiṃ pana taṃ? Mano, pīti mano etassāti samāso. Pītiyā sampayuttaṃ mano yassātipi vaṭṭati, tassa. Atthamattaṃ pana dassetuṃ ‘‘pītisampayuttacittassa puggalassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kāyoti idha sabbopi arūpakalāpo adhippeto, na pana kāyalahutādīsu viya vedanādikkhandhattayameva, na ca kāyāyatanādīsu viya rūpakāyampīti dasseti ‘‘nāmakāyo’’ti iminā. Passaddhidvayavaseneva hettha passambhanamadhippetaṃ, passambhanaṃ pana vigatakilesadarathatāti āha ‘‘vigatadaratho hotī’’ti, pahīnauddhaccādikilesadarathoti attho. Vuttappakārāya pubbabhāgabhāvanāya vasena cetasikasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedentoyeva taṃsamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpaphuṭasarīratāya kāyikampi sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedetīti vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyikampi cetasikampi sukhaṃ vedayatī’’ti. Iminā nekkhammasukhenāti ‘‘sukhaṃ vedetī’’ti evaṃ vuttena saṃkilesanīvaraṇapakkhato nikkhantattā, paṭhamajjhānapakkhikattā ca yathārahaṃ nekkhammasaṅkhātena upacārasukhena appanāsukhena ca. Samādhānampettha tadubhayenevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘upacāravasenāpi appanāvasenāpī’’ti.
然而,此处要旨如下:从断除欲贪开始,直至身轻安者的乐受,如前所述,这里也只是在说前分修习,而非安止。正如法护长老在《长部注》中就断除欲贪所说:“以镇伏为义——此处镇伏即令其不生起、不现行,并非指以对治法彻底断除,而因未证得禅那,故说‘已断’是因其与断除相似而言。”至于身轻安者的乐受,也是依上述前分修习,在体验心所生乐的同时,由生起殊胜色法遍满之身,亦体验身乐。再者,何必多说?在注释书中多处所说的“修习六法”,正是在说前分修习。而在“乐者心入定”中,乐不仅是近行修习之因,也是安止之因;且因“他远离诸欲”等将述及的安止,与之前的前分定及安止定有因果关联,故前分定与安止定皆被述及。或者,如同前分乐,安止乐也是安止定之因,法护长老便以此因性而取安止乐。有些人未能善察此义,未能如实把握出离之义,致使在经文和注释书里都造成了混乱。显示巴利原文
Ettha panāyamadhippāyo – kāmacchandappahānato paṭṭhāya yāva passaddhakāyassa sukhapaṭisaṃvedanā, tāva yathā pubbe, tathā idhāpi pubbabhāgabhāvanāyeva vuttā, na appanā. Tathā hi kāmacchandappahāne ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ ‘‘vikkhambhanavasenāti ettha vikkhambhanaṃ anuppādanaṃ appavattanaṃ, na paṭipakkhānaṃ suppahīnatā, pahīnattāti ca pahīnasadisataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ jhānassa anadhigatattā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.261). Passaddhakāyassa sukhapaṭisaṃvedanāya ca vuttappakārāya pubbabhāgabhāvanāya vasena cetasikasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedentoyeva taṃsamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpaphuṭasarīratāya kāyikampi sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedetīti. Apica kā nāma kathā aññehi vattabbā aṭṭhakathāyameva ‘‘cha dhamme bhāvetvā’’ti tattha tattha pubbabhāgabhāvanāya vuttattā. Sukhino cittasamādhāne pana sukhassa upacārabhāvanāya viya appanāyapi kāraṇattā, ‘‘so vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādinā ca vakkhamānāya appanāya hetuphalavasena sambajjhanato pubbabhāgasamādhi , appanāsamādhi ca vutto, pubbabhāgasukhamiva vā appanāsukhampi appanāsamādhissa kāraṇamevāti tampi appanāsukhaṃ appanāsamādhino kāraṇabhāvena ācariyadhammapālattherena gahitanti imamatthamasallakkhentā nekkhammapadatthaṃ yathātathaṃ aggahetvā pāḷiyaṃ, aṭṭhakathāyampi saṃkiṇṇākulaṃ keci karontīti.
初禅论释显示巴利原文
Paṭhamajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
226 226. 若有人问难:“既然‘乐者心入定’这句话本身已可说明心以近行和安止的方式入定,那么‘他远离诸欲’等开示又有何用?”对此回答说:“应知‘他远离……’等是为显示(差别)而说。”其中,“已入定”一词与“为显示而说”相关联,应知意旨是:因已入定,故为作这样的显示而说。“为显示更上的殊胜”是指:为显示从近行定、初禅等定更上应证的初禅、二禅等殊胜。因为证得近行定,才能证得初禅等殊胜,离此则不能;而证得二禅等时,亦需有喜悦生起等因的次第,如同证得二道等时,行道智见清净的次第一样。“以安止定”指以初禅等安止定。“彼定”指以“乐者心入定”这一共通方式所说的具有安止相的定,为显示彼定的分类,即二禅等的区分,以及初神通等的区分。“业生身”指由四种相续色聚合而成的四大所造身。此身在胎藏中被造作,故从“造作”之义及从花(母血)与生起(父精)所生,称为“业生”。因为“业”是母血(称为花)与父精(称为生起)的名称,由此所生的胎生、卵生、湿生之身即是。虽然化生等有因缘者也可能证得上述之定,但因其占多数且显著,故唯说此身。显示巴利原文
226. Yadevaṃ ‘‘sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti eteneva upacāravasenapi appanāvasenapi cittassa samādhānaṃ kathitaṃ siyā, evaṃ sante ‘‘so vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādikā desanā kimatthiyāti codanāya ‘‘so vivicceva…pe… vuttanti veditabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘samāhite’’ti padadvayaṃ ‘‘dassanatthaṃ vutta’’nti imehi sambandhitvā samāhitattā tathā dassanatthaṃ vuttanti adhippāyo veditabbo. Uparivisesadassanatthanti upacārasamādhito, paṭhamajjhānādisamādhito ca upari pattabbassa paṭhamadutiyajjhānādivisesassa dassanatthaṃ. Upacārasamādhisamadhigameneva hi paṭhamajjhānādiviseso samadhigantuṃ sakkā, na pana tena vinā, dutiyajjhānādisamadhigamepi pāmojjuppādādikāraṇaparamparā icchitabbā, dutiyamaggādisamadhigame paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Appanāsamādhināti paṭhamajjhānādiappanāsamādhinā. Tassa samādhinoti yo appanālakkhaṇo samādhi ‘‘sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti sabbasādhāraṇavasena vutto, tassa samādhino. Pabhedadassanatthanti dutiyajjhānādivibhāgassa ceva paṭhamābhiññādivibhāgassa ca pabhedadassanatthaṃ. Karajakāyanti catusantatirūpasamudāyabhūtaṃ cātumahābhūtikakāyaṃ. So hi gabbhāsaye karīyatīti katvā karasaṅkhātato pupphasambhavato jātattā karajoti vuccati. Karoti hi mātu soṇitasaṅkhātapupphassa, pitu sukkasaṅkhātasambhavassa ca nāmaṃ, tato jāto pana aṇḍajajalābujavasena gabbhaseyyakakāyova. Kāmaṃ opapātikādīnampi hetusampannānaṃ yathāvuttasamādhisamadhigamo sambhavati, tathāpi yebhuyyattā, pākaṭattā ca sveva kāyo vuttoti. Karoti putte nibbattetīti karo, sukkasoṇitaṃ, karena jāto karajotipi vadanti.
难道名身不也同样因远离所生的喜乐而获得饶益吗?为何此处只取前述的色身呢?因为由词句关联而得以了知。由“灌注”等词句的关联,世尊在此唯说色身,盖因唯有色身才适合灌注等动作。“灌注”即作灌注,此处依分别说与总聚支分说,仅是施设之因的动作。此灌注是以禅那所生喜乐令业生身湿润,并普遍去除粗涩,故说“浸湿、润滑”,即令其成为湿润、滋润的状态。从义理上说,灌注应理解为以所述喜乐所生的殊胜色法遍满全身,因此说“令喜乐遍行于一切处”。正是由于彼所生色法的遍满,才有喜乐遍行于一切处。“遍注”等亦同此理。“囊”指皮袋。“遍满”是单纯的动作词,故说“周遍接触”,意即此身被远离所生喜乐周遍接触。此处唯有接触动作,而无遍满动作,因为比丘仅是单纯的动作主体。“一切”指彼具有一切,如“具德者”,即具一切者。依“于支分与有支的关系中,在有支上使用属格”的文法规则,此“一切”一词与“任何”支分相关联,故属有支范畴。为了显示以皮肉等部分为支分的有支之体,而说“具一切部分之身”。“任何”一词释义为“乃至……之处”。在执受相续流转之处,无有任何不被触及。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca nāmakāyopi vivekajena pītisukhena tathā laddhūpakārova siyā, atha kasmā yathāvutto rūpakāyova idha gahitoti? Saddantarābhisambandhena adhigatattā. ‘‘Abhisandetī’’tiādisaddantarābhisambandhato hi rūpakāyo eva idha bhagavatā vuttoti adhigamīyati tasseva abhisandanādikiriyāyogyattāti. Abhisandetīti abhisandanaṃ karoti, so imameva kāyaṃ vivekajena pītisukhenāti hi bhedavasena, samudāyāvayavavasena ca parikappanāmattasiddhā hetukiriyā ettha labbhati, abhisandanaṃ panetaṃ jhānamayena pītisukhena karajakāyassa tintabhāvāpādanaṃ, sabbatthakameva ca lūkhabhāvassāpanayananti āha ‘‘temeti snehetī’’ti, avassutabhāvaṃ, allabhāvañca karotīti attho. Atthato pana abhisandanaṃ nāma yathāvuttapītisukhasamuṭṭhānehi paṇītarūpehi kāyassa parippharaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘sabbattha pavattapīti sukhaṃ karotī’’ti. Taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpapharaṇavaseneva hi sabbattha pavattapītisukhatā. Parisandetītiādīsupi eseva nayo. Bhastaṃ nāma cammapasibbakaṃ. Parippharatīti suddhakiriyāpadaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘samantato phusatī’’ti, so imameva kāyaṃ vivekajena pītisukhena samantato phuṭṭho bhavatīti attho. Phusanakiriyāyevettha upapannā, na byāpanakiriyā bhikkhusseva suddhakattubhāvato. Sabbaṃ etassa atthīti sabbavā yathā ‘‘guṇavā’’ti, tassa sabbavato, ‘‘avayavāvayavīsambandhe avayavini sāmivacana’’nti saddalakkhaṇena panetassa ‘‘kiñcī’’ti avayavena sambajjhanato avayavīvisayoyevesa sabbasaddoti mantvā chavimaṃsādikoṭṭhāsasaṅkhātena avayavena avayavībhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sabbakoṭṭhāsavato kāyassā’’ti. ‘‘Kiñcī’’ti etassa ‘‘upā…pe… ṭhāna’’nti atthavacanaṃ. Upādinnakasantatipavattiṭṭhāneti kammajarūpasantatiyā pavattiṭṭhāne aphuṭaṃ nāma na hotīti sambandho. Chavimaṃsalohitānugatanti chavimaṃsalohitādikammajarūpamanugataṃ. Yattha yattha kammajarūpaṃ, tattha tattha cittajarūpassāpi byāpanato tena tassa kāyassa phuṭabhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘aphuṭaṃ nāma na hotī’’ti vuttaṃ.
227 “Cheka”意为善巧,而这种善巧应通过“将沐浴粉撒入铜盘”等语句中词语间的关联,并由上下文,从制作沐浴粉、其用途及捏合成团的能力等方面来理解,故说“有能力”等。而“kaṃsa”一词,在“用大铜钵”等处指黄金,在“犹如受损的铜器”等处指合金,在“名为Upakaṃsa的国王是Mahākaṃsa之子”等处仅指概念名称;但在此处,则指任何金属,故说“以任何金属所制的器皿”。难道这仅是一个譬喻?为何要特别选取铜盘呢?为排除此问,故说“陶器”等。“正在捏合者”是指正在揉搓并做成团块的人,此时(陶器)会破裂,而非能承受捏合;此处的属格表示轻视。因为在一个动作发生的当下,另一个动作也发生,这就是轻视的含义。以“洒了又洒”来表明“paripphosakaṃ paripphosakaṃ”是中性名词。此处的“phusa”词根意为洒水,如在风雨时说“天正下着毛毛雨”,因此其含义是:从各处将水洒在沐浴粉上,使其遍及,洒了又洒。即便没有前缀,词根也能依上下文表达所通达之义,如同有前缀一般;显示巴利原文
227.Chekoti kusalo, taṃ pana kosallaṃ ‘‘kaṃsathāle nhāniyacuṇṇāni ākiritvā’’tiādisaddantarasannidhānato, pakaraṇato ca nhāniyacuṇṇānaṃ karaṇe, payojane, piṇḍane ca samatthatāvasena veditabbanti dasseti ‘‘paṭibalo’’tiādinā. Kaṃsasaddo pana ‘‘mahatiyā kaṃsapātiyā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.61) suvaṇṇe āgato, ‘‘kaṃso upahato yathā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 134) kittimalohe, ‘‘upakaṃso nāma rājā mahākaṃsassa atrajo’’tiādīsu [jā. aṭṭha. 4.10.164 (atthato samānaṃ)] paṇṇattimatte. Idha pana yattha katthaci loheti āha ‘‘yena kenaci lohena katabhājane’’ti. Nanu upamākaraṇamattamevidaṃ, atha kasmā kaṃsathālakassa savisesassa gahaṇaṃ katanti anuyogaṃ pariharati ‘‘mattikābhājana’’ntiādinā. ‘‘Sandentassā’’ti parimaddetvā piṇḍaṃ karontasseva bhijjati, na pana sandanakkhamaṃ hoti, anādaralakkhaṇe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Kiriyantarassa pavattanakkhaṇeyeva kiriyantarassa pavattanañhi anādaralakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Paripphosakaṃ paripphosaka’’nti idaṃ bhāvanapuṃsakanti dasseti ‘‘siñcitvā siñcitvā’’ti iminā. Phusasaddo cettha parisiñcane yathā taṃ vātavuṭṭhisamaye ‘‘devo ca thokaṃ thokaṃ phusāyatī’’ti, (pāci. 362) tasmā tato tato nhāniyacuṇṇato upari udakena byāpanakaraṇavasena parisiñcitvā parisiñcitvāti attho. Anupasaggopi hi saddo saupasaggo viya pakaraṇādhigatassa atthassa dīpako, ‘‘siñcitvā siñcitvā’’ti pana vacanaṃ ‘‘paripphosakaṃ paripphosaka’’nti etassa ‘‘sandeyyā’’ti ettha visesanabhāvaviññāpanatthaṃ. Evamīdisesu. ‘‘Sandeyyā’’ti ettha sanda-saddo piṇḍakaraṇeti vuttaṃ ‘‘piṇḍaṃ kareyyā’’ti. Anugatāti anupavisanavasena gatā upagatā. Pariggahitāti parito gahitā samantato phuṭṭhā.
内部与外部之处,与之共存者,称为“有内有外”,即沐浴粉团。也有“samantarabāhirā”的异读,其中的“ma”是为了连音而插入的增音。正由上述遍取之因,沐浴粉团内外皆为水汽所触,故说“确实处处都被水汽所触”。“sabbatthakaṃ”意为存在于一切处,亦是中性名词,意思是确实在一切处都被接触。以“内外皆触”一句,说明了沐浴粉团完全被水浸湿的状态;而以“又不滴落”一句,则说明了它虽湿润却坚实硬挺的状态。因此说“不会一滴一滴地”等,意即不会一滴一滴地滴水,也不会滴流而下。另有异读作“binduṃ udakaṃ”,其意为称为水滴的水珠。因为“bindu”一词,如在“悬挂的云滴”等中那样,是指水流的部分。正因如此不滴落,所以即使用手,用两根或三根手指也能拿取,或者也能做成团块。因为如果它是滴水的,那么当水分离去而变干变硬后,便不能那样拿取或做成了,这是所说之义。“做成团块”意为通过搓圆的方式,能将其做成丸状。显示巴利原文
Antaro ca bāhiro ca padeso, tehi saha pavattatīti santarabāhirā, nhāniyapiṇḍi, ‘‘samantarabāhirā’’tipi pāṭho, ma-kāro padasandhivasena āgamo. Yathāvuttena pariggahitatākāraṇeneva santarabāhiro nhāniyapiṇḍi phuṭā udakasnehenāti āha ‘‘sabbatthakameva udakasinehena phuṭā’’ti. Sabbattha pavattanaṃ sabbatthakaṃ, bhāvanapuṃsakañcetaṃ, sabbapadese hutvā eva phuṭāti attho. ‘‘Santarabāhirā phuṭā’’ti ca iminā nhāniyapiṇḍiyā sabbaso udakena temitabhāvamāha, ‘‘na ca paggharaṇī’’ti pana iminā tintāyapi tāya ghanathaddhabhāvaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘na ca binduṃ bindu’’ntiādi. Udakassa phusitaṃ phusitaṃ, na ca paggharaṇī sūdanīti attho, ‘‘binduṃ udakaṃ’’ tipi katthaci pāṭho, udakasaṅkhātaṃ bindunti tassattho. Bindusaddo hi ‘‘byālambambudharabindū’’tiādīsu viya dhārāvayave. Evaṃ pana apaggharaṇato hatthenapi dvīhipi tīhipi aṅgulehi gahetuṃ, ovaṭṭikāya vā kātuṃ sakkā. Yadi hi sā paggharaṇī assa, evaṃ sati snehavigamanena sukkhattā thaddhā hutvā tathā gahetuṃ, kātuṃ vā na sakkāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ovaṭṭikāyāti parivaṭṭulavasena, guḷikāvasena sā piṇḍi kātuṃ sakkāti attho.
第二禅阐述之注释显示巴利原文
Dutiyajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
229 “涌出”(ubbhida),指从各处水脉中涌出、向上冒出。具足此种水者,称为“有涌出水者”(ubbhidodako),当其中的da转为ta时,则成为“ubbhitodako”。为说明此义,而说“有涌出水者”,其意如同在河岸所掘的井一般,是涌出的水。涌出的水,在有些地方是自下方涌出后,形成涌起的水流向外流去;由于形成涌起的水流,无人能使其止于内部而不向外。但在此处,如同沙岸上的水池,水仅在内部涌出并安住其中,并不形成涌起的水流向外流去——因为此处意指不被搅动、平静安住的水。为说明此义,而说“非下方”等。其中,“下方”指水池下方的大水脉,如同随血运行的血脉一般,随水运行的地界部分被称为“水脉”。“上升之水”指形成水流涌起的水。“只在内部”是指仅在水池内部的平坦处。“涌出之水”指涌出后即停住不动的水。“来路”指从外部朝向水池的来路。“kālena kālaṃ”是一种习惯用语,如同“eko ekāya”等,故说“时时”。“anvaddhamāsaṃ”中的前缀“anu”表示遍及之义,意思是雨季的每半个月。显示巴利原文
229. Tāhi tāhi udakasirāhi ubbhijjati uddhaṃ nikkhamatīti ubbhidaṃ, tādisaṃ udakaṃ yassāti ubbhidodako, da-kārassa pana ta-kāre kate ubbhitodako, imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ubbhinnaudako’’ti vuttaṃ, nadītīre khatakūpako viya ubbhijjanakaudakoti attho. Ubbhijjanakampi udakaṃ katthaci heṭṭhā ubbhijjitvā dhārāvasena uṭṭhahitvā bahi gacchati, na taṃ koci antoyeva patiṭṭhitaṃ kātuṃ sakkoti dhārāvasena uṭṭhahanato, idha pana vālikātaṭe viya udakarahadassa antoyeva ubbhijjitvā tattheva tiṭṭhati, na dhārāvasena uṭṭhahitvā bahi gacchatīti viññāyati akhobhakassa sannisinnasseva udakassa adhippetattāti imamatthaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘na heṭṭhā’’tiādi. Heṭṭhāti udakarahadassa heṭṭhā mahāudakasirā, lohitānugatā lohitasirā viya udakānugato pathavipadeso ‘‘udakasirā’’ti vuccati. Uggacchanakaudakoti dhārāvasena uṭṭhahanakaudako. Antoyevāti udakarahadassa anto samatalapadese eva. Ubbhijjanakaudakoti ubbhijjitvā tattheva tiṭṭhanakaudako. Āgamanamaggoti bāhirato udakarahadābhimukhaṃ āgamanamaggo. Kālena kālanti ruḷhīpadaṃ ‘‘eko ekāyā’’tiādi (pārā. 443, 444, 452) viyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘kāle kāle’’ti. Anvaddhamāsanti ettha anusaddo byāpane. Vassānassa addhamāsaṃ addhamāsanti attho. Evaṃ anudasāhanti etthāpi. Vuṭṭhinti vassanaṃ. Anuppavaccheyyāti na upavaccheyya. Vassasaddato cassa siddhīti dasseti ‘‘na vasseyyā’’ti iminā.
“清凉的水流”(sītā vāridhārā)是阴性词,而用中性词“sītaṃ dhāraṃ”来解释其义,是为了表明“dhārā”一词具有两种性别。“清凉”意为因无搅动而凉爽,或因无旧叶、草、木等杂物混杂而洁白清净。因为“洁白”与“清凉”是同义词。为何在此处只选取了有涌出水的水池,而不取其他呢?为了排除这个追问,而说“因为从下方上升的水……”等。上升后一再破裂,即涌起后一再以散射水流的方式涌出,或消散。“搅动”即摇荡。“降雨”即下雨。“因水流落下而起的水泡”指因水流落下以及由此生起的水泡,即所谓的浮沫。如此依次说明了三种水池不应被选取后,指出只有涌出水的水池才应被选取,故说“正是平静安住的”等。其中,“正是平静安住的”意为正确地、或均匀地安住,因不被搅动而完全不动,极为清净,这是其意旨。“犹如神通所化”意为如同具神通者以神通如此变化出来一般。“在此处”指在那个譬喻与所喻的表述中。“其余”指“abhisandetī”等后续内容。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sītā vāridhārā’’ti itthiliṅgapadassa ‘‘sītaṃ dhāra’’nti napuṃsakaliṅgena atthavacanaṃ dhārasaddassa dviliṅgikabhāvaviññāpanatthaṃ. Sītanti khobhanābhāvena sītalaṃ, purāṇapaṇṇatiṇakaṭṭhādisaṃkiṇṇābhāvena vā setaṃ parisuddhaṃ. Setaṃ sītanti hi pariyāyo. Kasmā panettha ubbhidodakoyeva rahado gahito, na itareti anuyogamapaneti ‘‘heṭṭhā uggacchanaudakañhī’’tiādinā. Uggantvā uggantvā bhijjantanti uṭṭhahitvā uṭṭhahitvā dhārākiraṇavasena ubbhijjantaṃ, vinassantaṃ vā. Khobhetīti āloḷeti. Vuṭṭhīti vassanaṃ. Dhārānipātapubbuḷakehīti udakadhārānipātehi ca tatoyeva uṭṭhitaudakapubbuḷakasaṅkhātehi pheṇapaṭalehi ca. Evaṃ yathākkamaṃ tiṇṇampi rahadānamagahetabbataṃ vatvā ubbhidodakasseva gahetabbataṃ vadati ‘‘sannisinnamevā’’tiādinā. Tattha sannisinnamevāti sammā, samaṃ vā nisinnameva, aparikkhobhatāya niccalameva, suppasannamevāti adhippāyo. Iddhinimmitamivāti iddhimatā iddhiyā tathā nimmitaṃ iva. Tatthāti tasmiṃ upamopameyyavacane. Sesanti ‘‘abhisandetī’’tiādikaṃ.
“星中瞬间星辰”之意。故说“啊,舞蹈,啊,歌唱”。“解脱”是脱离束缚。听法便是应当听取的法门。显示巴利原文
Tatiyajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
231 231.“Uppalinī”等是灌木丛和树林的异名。但此处因有“直到顶端,直到根部”等语句,应理解为“有些”等词指的是青莲丛等,故唯指树林。因此,“uppalāni即青莲丛。此处即在青莲林中”等义应如此了知。实则以部分施设整体之名。因为一丛青莲等即称为青莲等,而四五丛则称为青莲林等。然在《精义灯》中,水池也被说为有青莲等性。“此处”指此三词,或指此青莲、红莲、白莲三种义。“白、红、蓝”中唯说青莲,义为白青莲、红青莲、蓝青莲。任何青莲皆称青莲,因青莲一词作为通名适用于他们一切。百瓣者,此处“百”字为众多之异名,如“百价、百光太阳”等,非指百数。如是,多瓣者亦得包摄于莲花性中。“瓣”指花瓣。依色分别,白者为莲花,红者为白莲,此为教内通称,而世间则说“红为莲花,白为白莲”。有云:“白莲为白、红,拘那花为拘那色迦”。因红色如拘那犬之吠声,且为他们所食,故莲花亦名“拘那陀”、“拘那色迦”。如云:“莲花如拘那陀,芬芳”。此处词义为:饮吸水者,或漂浮于水者,为青莲。于泥中行去,或以种种方式生长,为莲花。其色白,或因广大而可破碎、可截断者,为白莲,由ma变为pa等。通达声韵者以muḍi或muḍari词为截断义,此处依声论得词之成就。为示“直到顶端,直到根部”为水所遍满等义,圣典中说“从水长出者”,故义为“非从水长出”,而非“于水中随宜而行”,故说“从水……而行”。此处当观青莲等如由业所生之身,水如第三禅乐。显示巴利原文
231.‘‘Uppalinī’’tiādi gacchassapi vanassapi adhivacanaṃ. Idha pana ‘‘yāva aggā, yāva ca mūlā’’ti vacanayogena ‘‘appekaccānī’’tiādinā uppalagacchādīnameva gahetabbatāya vanamevādhippetaṃ, tasmā ‘‘uppalānīti uppalagacchāni. Etthāti uppalavane’’tiādinā attho veditabbo. Avayavena hi samudāyassa nibbacanaṃ kataṃ. Ekañhi uppalagacchādi uppalādiyeva, catupañcamattampi pana uppalādivananti voharīyati, sāratthadīpaniyaṃ pana jalāsayopi uppaliniādibhāvena vutto. Ettha cāti etasmiṃ padattaye, etesu vā tīsu uppalapadumapuṇḍarīkasaṅkhātesu atthesu. ‘‘Setarattanīlesū’’ti uppalameva vuttaṃ, setuppalarattuppalanīluppalesūti attho. Yaṃ kiñci uppalaṃ uppalameva uppalasaddassa sāmaññanāmavasena tesu sabbesupi pavattanato. Satapattanti ettha satasaddo bahupariyāyo ‘‘satagghī sataraṃsi sūriyo’’tiādīsu viya anekasaṅkhyābhāvato. Evañca katvā anekapattassāpi padumabhāve saṅgaho siddho hoti. Pattanti ca pupphadalamadhippetaṃ. Vaṇṇaniyamena setaṃ padumaṃ,rattaṃpuṇḍarīkanti sāsanavohāro, loke pana ‘‘rattaṃ padumaṃ, setaṃ puṇḍarīka’’nti vadanti. Vuttañhi ‘‘puṇḍarīkaṃ sitaṃ rattaṃ, kokanadaṃ kokāsako’’ti. Rattavaṇṇatāya hi kokanāmakānaṃ sunakhānaṃ nādayato saddāpayato, tehi ca asitabbato ‘‘kokanadaṃ, kokāsako’’ti ca padumaṃ vuccati. Yathāha ‘‘padmaṃ yathā kokanadaṃ sugandha’’nti. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho udakaṃ pāti, udake vā plavatīti uppalaṃ. Paṅke davati gacchati, pakārena vā davati viruhatīti padumaṃ. Paṇḍaraṃ vaṇṇamassa, mahantatāya vā muḍitabbaṃkhaṇḍetabbanti puṇḍarīkaṃ ma-kārassa pa-kārādivasena. Muḍisaddañhi muḍarisaddaṃ vā khaṇḍanatthamicchanti saddavidū, saddasatthato cettha padasiddhi. Yāva aggā, yāva ca mūlā udakena abhisandanādibhāvadassanatthaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘udakānuggatānī’’ti vacanaṃ, tasmā udakato na uggatānicceva attho, na tu udake anurūpagatānīti āha ‘‘udakā…pe… gatānī’’ti. Idha pana uppalādīni viya karajakāyo, udakaṃ viya tatiyajjhānasukhaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
『Daṇḍakasaddenāpi』意为『如同兵杖之声』。『Ussaṅkitaparisaṅkito』指的是『困惑不安』,其中包含『avasaṅkito』即消沉困惑,以及『saṅkito』即普遍困惑,且『ativīya saṅkito』指过度困惑。所示字形如『gacchatipī』等,是断句标示。此处所说之『thokaṃ gacchatipi』,意思是虽匆忙行进,但因困惑不定,往往停顿不前。如人行进荒野时,心中疑问『谁知道将会怎样呢?』于是原来的地方与未到之地反复交替,期间时常因困难或艰苦身心痛苦,才能到达安全之地。『kicchena kasirena』是换言之,指身体之苦痛或心中之烦恼。所谓『khemantabhūmi』即安全稳固之地,此地因其能够消除恐惧而称之。注解中提及『aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu』即八处各种困惑,例如师长是否存在惧怕,佛法、僧团、戒律在前后是否确实,及因缘而生之法是否可疑等(见律部915页)。『Adhimuccitvā』,指经过分析或传闻已定的事;『saddhāya gaṇhitunti』形容此处不能仅凭信受而确证,不能依赖此而断言。此谓由『asakkuṇanato antarāyaṃ』即因无力而生障碍,故生起疑惑纠缠。又说『atthi nu kho, natthi nu kho』为修道者入林初时的如梦幻般疑惑,之后逐渐全方位生起上下反复的疑难纠结,并轮回于其中。此状况称为『apariyogāhana』即无所成就,意即从各处生起无止尽的疑惑。『Chambhitattanti』即由禅林生活中生起心震颤与血肉震动之感,此动摇心体,尤以犹如月食之相而被比喻。末句用譬喻说明此情形极其相似,如兔子相似的危险状况。显示巴利原文
Catutthajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
233 然而,因为第四禅心被称为“以心”,且此心因远离贪等随烦恼垢而成为无随烦恼、无垢,故说“以无随烦恼义为清净”。又因唯有清净者由殊胜缘而有转起上的殊胜,成为遍净,犹如纯金经由研磨而有光辉,故说“以光辉义为遍净”。如同闪电般光芒四射,称为光辉,如说“光音天”。“以白衣”:此处“以白衣”是功德之语,故说“以白衣……此”。为了说明温热遍满,即说明温热的遍满。为何?答:“以垢衣”等。“温热遍满不成”,是指不如白衣那样有殊胜的温热遍满,唯少许而已,此即意旨。故说“彼刹那……强盛”。“以彼刹那洗净清净者”,由此显示此处“白”字只是清净义,如“在家白衣著者”等,并非指白色,因为任何在彼刹那洗净清净者即可有温热遍满。显示巴利原文
233. Yasmā pana catutthajjhānacittameva ‘‘cetasā’’ti vuttaṃ, tañca rāgādiupakkilesamalāpagamato nirupakkilesaṃ nimmalaṃ, tasmā upakkilesavigamanameva parisuddhabhāvoti āha ‘‘nirupakkilesaṭṭhena parisuddha’’nti. Yasmā ca parisuddhasseva paccayavisesena pavattiviseso pariyodātatā suddhantasuvaṇṇassa nighaṃsanena pabhassaratā viya, tasmā pabhassaratāyeva pariyodātatāti āha ‘‘pabhassaraṭṭhena pariyodāta’’nti. Vijju viya pabhāya ito cito ca niccharaṇaṃ pabhassaraṃ yathā ‘‘ābhassarā’’ti. Odātena vatthenāti ettha ‘‘odātenā’’ti guṇavacanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘odātena…pe… ida’’nti vuttaṃ. Utupharaṇatthanti uṇhassa utuno pharaṇadassanatthaṃ. Kasmāti āha ‘‘kiliṭṭhavatthenā’’tiādi. Utupharaṇaṃ na hotīti odātavatthena viya savisesaṃ utupharaṇaṃ na hoti, appakamattameva hotīti adhippāyo . Tenāha ‘‘taṅkhaṇa…pe… balavaṃ hotī’’ti. ‘‘Taṅkhaṇadhotaparisuddhenā’’ti ca etena odātasaddo ettha parisuddhavacano eva ‘‘gihī odātavatthavasano’’tiādīsu viya , na setavacano yena kenaci taṅkhaṇadhotaparisuddheneva utupharaṇasambhavatoti dasseti.
巴利圣典中不是说“他全身没有任何一处不被白衣所触”吗?这是说身体被白衣遍覆,而非说衣服被时节遍覆。那么为何在此处宣说时节遍覆呢?针对这一追问,他说:“因为在此……”等。由于业生身如同衣服,而时节遍覆如同第四禅乐,因此应当这样理解其义。而且,以此说明:因为白衣不可能遍覆全身,且喻体不相符顺,所以取“身”一词时,应理解为依止于身的衣服;取“衣”一词时,应理解为以衣为缘的时节遍覆。因为这一譬喻是依不了义而说的。诸佛世尊的教法确实具足种种善巧。瑜伽行者的业生身应被视为如同衣服,它要被与时节遍覆相似的第四禅乐所遍满;而第四禅乐就如同时节遍覆,因为它如同衣服般遍满业生身。正如一个人的身体是第四禅乐的所依,而第四禅乐则是处于时节遍覆地位之乐的依处。因此他说:“所以……”等。这其实是对前述说法的功德显示。而且在此处,应知巴利圣典中以“遍净心”的“心”一词,世尊宣说了第四禅乐,因此注释中说“第四禅乐”、“以第四禅乐”。难道所谓的第四禅乐没有乐受的特相吗?确实如此,但在此处,由于它是寂静的本质,所以……显示巴利原文
Nanu ca pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa odātena vatthena aphuṭaṃ assā’’ti kāyassa odātavatthapharaṇaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana vatthassa utupharaṇaṃ, atha kasmā utupharaṇaṃ idha vuttanti anuyogenāha ‘‘imissāya hī’’tiādi. Yasmā vatthaṃ viya karajakāyo, utupharaṇaṃ viya catutthajjhānasukhaṃ, tasmā evamattho veditabboti vuttaṃ hoti, etena ca odātena vatthena sabbāvato kāyassa pharaṇāsambhavato, upameyyena ca ayuttattā kāyaggahaṇena tannissitavatthaṃ gahetabbaṃ, vatthaggahaṇena ca tappaccayaṃ utupharaṇanti dasseti. Neyyatthato hi ayaṃ upamā vuttā. Vicitradesanā hi buddhā bhagavantoti. Yogino hi karajakāyo vatthaṃ viya daṭṭhabbo utupharaṇasadisena catutthajjhānasukhena pharitabbattā, utupharaṇaṃ viya catutthajjhānasukhaṃ vatthassa viya tena karajakāyassa pharaṇato, purisassa sarīraṃ viya catutthajjhānaṃ utupharaṇaṭṭhāniyassa sukhassa nissayabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Idañhi yathāvuttavacanassa guṇadassanaṃ. Ettha ca pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘parisuddhena cetasā’’ti cetogahaṇena catutthajjhānasukhaṃ bhagavatā vuttanti ñāpetuṃ ‘‘catutthajjhānasukhaṃ, catutthajjhānasukhenā’’ti ca vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nanu ca catutthajjhānasukhaṃ nāma sātalakkhaṇaṃ natthīti? Saccaṃ, santasabhāvattā panettha upekkhāyeva ‘‘sukha’’nti adhippetā. Tena vuttaṃ sammohavinodaniyaṃ ‘‘upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 232; visuddhi. 2.644; mahāni. aṭṭha. 27; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.105).
至此:从说明初禅证得开始,直到说明第四禅证得为止,依说法的次第而言。获得即是“得”,拥有此得者即是“得者”——色界禅那的得者,称为色界禅那得者,如同说“得衣、食、住、药资具者”;或者,有获得之习性者为“得者”。有获得什么的习性?色界禅那,这样解释也合理。其余二者也是如此。不应理解为“不是无色界禅那得者”,应当这样连接。为何?他说:“因为不……”等,意思是:对于八等至,在向上证得神通时,它们是不可分离的。以十四种行相:即《清净道论》中所说的“依遍相顺、依遍相反、依遍相顺反、依禅那顺、依禅那反、依禅那顺反、依禅那跳越、依遍相跳越、依禅那遍相跳越、依支转换、依所缘转换、依支与所缘转换、依支确定、依所缘确定”,以此十四种行相。即使在禅那中已具备转向等五种自在,但为了显示在引发神通时,这十四种自在是绝对必要的,故说“以十四种行相修习自在者”。应知,这是为了说明:如果未在无色等至中修习自在,仅凭在色等至中修习自在,等至便不能成功,因此它们对于神通的证得是不可分离的。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatāti paṭhamajjhānādhigamaparidīpanato paṭṭhāya yāva catutthajjhānādhigamaparidīpanā, tāvatā vacanakkamena. Labhanaṃ lābho, so etassāti lābhī, rūpajjhānānaṃ lābhī rūpajjhānalābhī yathā ‘‘lābhī cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārāna’’nti, (saṃ. ni. 2.70; udā. 38) labhanasīlo vā lābhī. Kiṃ labhanasīlo? Rūpajjhānānītipi yujjati. Evamitarasmimpi. Na arūpajjhānalābhīti na veditabboti yojetabbaṃ. Kasmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘na hī’’tiādi, aṭṭhannampi samāpattīnaṃ upari abhiññādhigame avinābhāvatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Cuddasahākārehīti ‘‘kasiṇānulomato, kasiṇapaṭilomato kasiṇānulomapaṭilomato, jhānānulomato, jhānapaṭilomato, jhānānulomapaṭilomato, jhānukkantikato, kasiṇukkantikato, jhānakasiṇukkantikato, aṅgasaṅkantito, ārammaṇasaṅkantito , aṅgārammaṇasaṅkantito aṅgavavatthānato, ārammaṇavavatthānato’’ti (visuddhi. 2.365) visuddhimagge vuttehi imehi cuddasahākārehi. Satipi jhānesu āvajjanādipañcavidhavasībhāve ayameva cuddasavidho vasībhāvo abhiññā nibbattane ekantena icchitabboti dassentena ‘‘cuddasahākārehi ciṇṇavasībhāva’’nti vuttaṃ, iminā ca arūpasamāpattīsu ciṇṇavasībhāvaṃ vinā rūpasamāpattīsu eva ciṇṇavasībhāvena samāpatti na ijjhatīti tāsaṃ abhiññādhigame avinābhāvaṃ dassetīti veditabbaṃ.
难道不应依圣典原文本身而作决断吗?他通过“然而在圣典中……”等来消除这一责难,意思是:由于圣典原文尚有剩余部分,故应将其提取出来而作此决断。若是如此,则无色界禅那也应被纳入圣典原文中,为何世尊不取那些,而留下尚有剩余部分的原文呢?因为一切神通特别以色界第四禅为足处。尽管那些无色界禅那与神通确有不可分离的关系,但这些神通特别以色界第四禅为足处,因此为了显示它们以此禅那为足处,世尊便安住于彼处而作教说,并非因为无色界禅那在此处不适用。因此他说:“应引出无色界禅那而说。”显示巴利原文
Nanu yathāpāṭhameva vinicchayo vattabboti codanaṃ sodheti ‘‘pāḷiyaṃ panā’’tiādinā, sāvasesapāṭhabhāvato nīharitvā esa vinicchayo vattabboti vuttaṃ hoti. Yajjevaṃ arūpajjhānānipi pāḷiyaṃ gahetabbāni, atha kasmā tāni aggahetvā sāvasesapāṭho bhagavatā katoti? Sabbābhiññānaṃ visesato rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānapādakattā. Satipi hi tāsaṃ tathā avinābhāve visesato panetā rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānapādakā, tasmā tāsaṃ tappādakabhāvaviññāpanatthaṃ tattheva ṭhatvā desanā katā, na pana arūpāvacarajjhānānaṃ idha ananupayogato. Tenāha ‘‘arūpajjhānāni āharitvā kathetabbānī’’ti.
毗婆舍那智论释显示巴利原文
Vipassanāñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
234 既然说了“复次,大王,比丘……”(圣典中无此词),为何又再说“他”一词?为显示什么?针对这一责难,他说:“他……显示……”,意思是:为了显示在依文释义和依不了义所说的八等至中,具有修习自在之殊胜的比丘,故如此说。“其余”,即就“他”一词的词义而言,在“如是得定”等中其余应说的、含有意图的意义内容。能知所知者为“智”,令彼成为现量而见者为“见”。智本身就是见,而非眼等,故为“智见”,也就是五种智。然而,此“智见”一词在教法中,对某些智的殊胜处是惯用的。为了以举义的方式显示这一切,他说:“智见者,也称为道智……”等。“为了智见的清净”,即为了智见的清净目的。“乐住”,即圣住、乐住。“世尊也”,不仅是告知诸天,而且那时世尊也生起了智见,这是其义。“死已七日的他”,即死已七日者。“迦罗摩”,是依姓氏而说。“心解脱”,即阿罗汉果等至。因为毗婆舍那智对于称为所知的三地诸行,以无常等而了知,并从坏随观开始,现量地观见它们,所以依上述含义称为智见。他通过“然而在此处……”等来显示这一点。显示巴利原文
234. ‘‘Puna caparaṃ mahārāja (pāḷiyaṃ natthi) bhikkhū’’ti vatvāpi kimatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so’’ti padaṃ puna vuttanti codanāyāha ‘‘so…pe… dassetī’’ti, yathārutavasena, neyyatthavasena ca vuttāsu aṭṭhasu samāpattīsu ciṇṇavasitāvisiṭṭhaṃ bhikkhuṃ dassetuṃ evaṃ vuttanti adhippāyo. Sesanti ‘‘so’’ti padatthato sesaṃ ‘‘evaṃ samāhite’’tiādīsu vattabbaṃ sādhippāyamatthajātaṃ. Ñeyyaṃ jānātīti ñāṇaṃ, tadeva paccakkhaṃ katvā passatīti dassanaṃ, ñāṇameva dassanaṃ na cakkhādikanti ñāṇadassanaṃ, pañcavidhampi ñāṇaṃ, tayidaṃ pana ñāṇadassanapadaṃ sāsane yesu ñāṇavisesesu niruḷhaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ atthuddhāravasena dassento ‘‘ñāṇadassananti maggañāṇampi vuccatī’’tiādimāha. Ñāṇadassanavisuddhatthanti ñāṇadassanassa visuddhipayojanāya. Phāsuvihāroti ariyavihārabhūto sukhavihāro. Bhagavatopīti na kevalaṃ devatārocanameva, atha kho tadā bhagavatopi ñāṇadassanaṃ udapādīti attho. Sattāhaṃ kālaṅkatassa assāti sattāhakālaṅkato. ‘‘Kālāmo’’ti gottavasena vuttaṃ. Cetovimutti [vimutti (aṭṭhakathāyaṃ)] nāma arahattaphalasamāpatti. Yasmā vipassanāñāṇaṃ ñeyyasaṅkhāte tebhūmakasaṅkhāre aniccādito jānāti, bhaṅgānupassanato ca paṭṭhāya paccakkhato te passati, tasmā yathāvuttaṭṭhena ñāṇadassanaṃ nāma jātanti dasseti ‘‘idha panā’’tiādinā.
“引导”一词,就字面义来说,是将心从其他应作之事中引出,导向毗婆舍那,即引导之义;但就意旨而言,为说明此义,故说“毗婆舍那智”等。因为正是此导向毗婆舍那的状态,成为其趋向等的原因,而当依所说方式在具足八支的心中,依毗婆舍那次第生起时,应视为只是将心推向毗婆舍那。所谓“趋向彼”,即趋向于彼毗婆舍那。其余二词是其同义词,意为倾于彼、斜于彼、倾向于彼、低下于彼,如《梵网经》中所说。以饭和豆羹令其增长、壮大,或令其增长、壮大,依此义而说“以饭”等。“无常、涂抹、揉捏、破坏、离散法”中,此处“法”字应分别与“无常法”等结合。其中,“无常法”指因易坏而具有不恒常的自性。“为去除恶臭”指为去除身体的恶臭。“应涂抹法”指具有应被涂抹的自性,即因此腐臭之身有恶臭,故具有以香水等涂擦敷抹的性质。因为通过涂抹,可去除腐臭之身中因汗、风、胆汁、痰等而有的沉重与恶臭。大按摩如力士等以增长臂力等为目的,小按摩则适于去除肢节之病,故说“以小按摩”,意为轻柔的按摩。“应揉捏法”指具有应被揉捏的自性。显示巴利原文
Abhinīharatīti vipassanābhimukhaṃ cittaṃ tadaññakaraṇīyato nīharitvā haratīti ayaṃ saddato attho, adhippāyato pana taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vipassanāñāṇassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tadabhimukhabhāvoyeva hissa tanninnatādikaraṇaṃ, taṃ pana vuttanayena aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgate tasmiṃ citte vipassanākkamena jāte vipassanābhimukhaṃ cittapesanamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tanninnanti tassaṃ vipassanāyaṃ ninnaṃ. Itaradvayaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Tassaṃ poṇaṃ vaṅkaṃ pabbhāraṃ nīcanti attho. Brahmajāle vuttoyeva. Odanakummāsehi upacīyati vaḍḍhāpīyati, upacayati vā vaḍḍhatīti atthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘odanenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammoti ettha ‘‘aniccadhammo’’tiādinā dhammasaddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Tattha aniccadhammoti pabhaṅgutāya addhuvasabhāvo. Duggandhavighātatthāyāti sarīre duggandhassa vigamāya. Ucchādanadhammoti ucchādetabbatāsabhāvo, imassa pūtikāyassa duggandhabhāvato gandhodakādīhi ubbaṭṭanavilimpanajātikoti attho. Ucchādanena hi pūtikāye sedavātapittasemhādīhi garubhāvaduggandhānamapagamo hoti. Mahāsambāhanaṃ mallādīnaṃ bāhuvaḍḍhanādiatthaṃva hoti, aṅgapaccaṅgābādhavinodanatthaṃ pana khuddakasambāhanameva yuttanti āha ‘‘khuddakasambāhanenā’’ti, mandasambāhanenāti attho. Parimaddanadhammoti parimadditabbatāsabhāvo.
以上是就不限定时间而说其义,现在则就限定时间而说:‘在幼小之时’等。此处‘或’字,由于依义显现即可了知是分别另一义,故未加使用,或者说是被省略而显示。‘在幼小之时’指刚出生后不久。令其躺卧之后,以拉伸、按压等方式,而有应被揉捏的性质——应当这样连接。‘适度’是中性词,表示修习,由此显示合量或轻柔的拉伸、按压等。这里的‘拉伸’即牵引,‘按压’即按摩,‘等’字则包含了弯曲、抬起等。即使这样养护——即以涂抹等方式妥善养育,也还是会破坏,也就是依无常等而灭坏;也还会离散,也就是这样破坏后不能成就任何目的,成为散乱。如此,通过九句随宜地显示了于身观集灭的法性;为阐明此义,而说‘其中’等。其中,‘以六句’是指:‘有色、四大所造、父母所生、饭豆羹所增长、应涂抹法、应揉捏法’这六句。中间的‘四大所造、父母所生、饭豆羹所增长’三句,说的是身的集起,因为它们能显明这一意义,这还算是合理的;然而‘有色、应涂抹法、应揉捏法’这三句,怎能同样说为身的集起呢?因为它们似乎并不显明这层意义?实际上也是合理的,因为这些也显明这层意义。因为‘有色’一词,显明‘具有色’的意义,此色以作为自身之缘的时节与食物为相。此处的‘ī’后缀即用于‘具有彼’之义,特指因缘的和合。‘应涂抹法、应揉捏法’此二句。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ aniyamitakālavasena atthaṃ vatvā idāni niyamitakālavasena atthaṃ vadati ‘‘daharakāle’’tiādinā. Vā-saddo cettha atthadassanavaseneva atthantaravikappanassa viññāyamānattā na payutto, luttaniddiṭṭho vā. Daharakāleti aciravijātakāle. Sayāpetvā añchanapīḷanādivasena parimaddanadhammoti sambandho. Mitanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, tena yathāpamāṇaṃ, mandaṃ vā añchanapīḷanādīni dasseti. Añchanañcettha ākaḍḍhanaṃ. Pīḷanaṃ sambāhanaṃ. Ādisaddena samiñjanauggamanādīni saṅgaṇhāti. Evaṃ pariharitopīti ucchādanādinā sukhedhitopi. Bhijjati cevāti aniccatādivasena nassati ca. Vikirati cāti evaṃ bhindanto ca kiñci payojanaṃ asādhento vippakiṇṇova hoti. Evaṃ navahi padehi yathārahaṃ kāye samudayavayadhammānupassitā dassitāti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘tatthā’’tiādimāha. Tattha chahi padehīti ‘‘rūpī, cātumahābhūtiko, mātāpettikasambhavo, odanakummāsūpacayo, ucchādanadhammo, parimaddanadhammo’’ti imehi chahi padehi. Yuttaṃ tāva hotu majjhe tīhipi padehi kāyassa samudayakathanaṃ tesaṃ tadatthadīpanato, ‘‘rūpī, ucchādanadhammo, parimaddanadhammo’’ti pana tīhi tpadehi kathaṃ tassa tathākathanaṃ yuttaṃ siyā tesaṃ tadatthassa adīpanatoti? Yuttameva tesampi tadatthassa dīpitattā. ‘‘Rūpī’’ti hi idaṃ attano paccayabhūtena utuāhāralakkhaṇena rūpena rūpavāti atthassa dīpakaṃ. Paccayasaṅgamavisiṭṭhe hi tadassatthiatthe ayamīkāro. ‘‘Ucchādanadhammo, parimaddanadhammo’’ti ca idaṃ padadvayaṃ tathāvidharūpuppādanena saṇṭhānasampādanatthassa dīpakanti. Dvīhīti ‘‘bhedanadhammo, viddhaṃsanadhammo’’ti dvīhi padehi. Nissitañca kāyapariyāpanne hadayavatthumhi nissitattā vipassanācittassa. Tadā pavattañhi vipassanācittameva ‘‘idañca me viññāṇa’’nti āsannapaccakkhavasena vuttaṃ. Paṭibaddhañca kāyena vinā appavattanato, kāyasaññitānañca rūpadhammānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇato.
235 “善照耀”即净妙,具光辉之宝珠,为显示以此光辉成就而宝珠为胜妙之义,故说“净妙即美丽”。宝珠之极净种类唯源于清净矿藏,故说“有种类指源于清净矿藏”。意为源于极净之宝矿。宝珠之种类差别,如kuruvinda种类等,实以矿藏之极净为根本。然此处所意指之琉璃宝珠,其清净矿藏在于viḷūra山及viḷūra村附近。因此宝珠大多源于彼处。如是,因源于名为viḷūra之山及村附近,故称为“琉璃”,即使在天界存在者,亦因颜色相似而得此同名,犹如依人间所得之名而天界诸天得名。然其颜色或如孔雀颈色,或如乌鸦翅色,或如润泽竹叶色,此乃阿阇梨法护长老于《胜义灯》中所说。而于《律疏》中则说“如生竹色”。如是,其亦有“竹色”之名。又说“如猫眼环色”,故彼于此地以“猫眼宝”而著称。然应视为,因是转轮王所受用之最胜妙宝,故于圣典中唯说此宝。如所说:“复次,阿难,大善见王之宝珠宝出现,彼为琉璃宝珠,净妙、有种类、八角……”等。为显示唯以去除石砾等瑕疵而成就琢磨,故说“已去除石砾”。显示巴利原文
235. Suṭṭhu obhāsatīti subho, pabhāsampanno maṇi, tāya eva pabhāsampattiyā maṇino bhadratāti atthamattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘subhoti sundaro’’ti vuttaṃ. Parisuddhākarasamuṭṭhānameva maṇino suvisuddhajātitāti āha ‘‘jātimāti parisuddhākarasamuṭṭhito’’ti. Suvisuddharatanākarato samuṭṭhitoti attho. Ākaraparivisuddhimūlako eva hi maṇino kuruvindajātiādijātivisesoti. Idhādhippetassa pana veḷuriyamaṇino viḷūra (vi. va. aṭṭha. 34 ādayo vākyakkhkhndhesu passitabbaṃ) pabbatassa, viḷūra gāmassa ca avidūre parisuddhākaro. Yebhuyyena hi so tato samuṭṭhito. Tathā hesa viḷūranāmakassa pabbatassa, gāmassa ca avidūre samuṭṭhitattā veḷuriyoti paññāyittha, devaloke pavattassapi ca taṃsadisavaṇṇanibhatāya tadeva nāmaṃ jātaṃ yathā taṃ manussaloke laddhanāmavasena devaloke devatānaṃ, so pana mayūragīvāvaṇṇo vā hoti vāyasapattavaṇṇo vā siniddhaveṇupattavaṇṇo vāti ācariyadhammapālattherena paramatthadīpaniyaṃ (vi. va. aṭṭha. 34) vuttaṃ. Vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāsu (vi. vi. ṭī. 1.281) pana ‘‘allaveḷuvaṇṇo’’ti vadanti. Tathā hissa ‘‘vaṃsavaṇṇo’’tipi nāmaṃ jātaṃ. ‘‘Mañjārakkhimaṇḍalavaṇṇo’’ti ca vutto, tatoyeva so idha padese mañjāramaṇīti pākaṭo hoti. Cakkavattiparibhogārahapaṇītataramaṇibhāvato pana tasseva pāḷiyaṃ vacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘puna caparaṃ ānanda rañño mahāsudassanassa maṇiratanaṃ pāturahosi, so ahosi maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṃso’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.248). Pāsāṇasakkharādidosanīharaṇavaseneva parikammanipphattīti dasseti ‘‘apanītapāsāṇasakkharo’’ti iminā.
“清澈”指皮肤本身细腻而清澈,非指聚合体,故说“清澈即皮肤薄”。由此而特别明净,为显示此义而说“极明净”。受用宝珠之形相成就即一切形相具足。故说“清洗、穿孔等”。“清洗”即于石等中洗净;“穿孔”即为去除黑点等及为以线贯穿而应穿孔。以“等”字包含加热、令柔和等。“色泽成就”指所穿之线的色泽成就。为何如此说?谓“如是”等,意为如是所穿者方为明显。显示巴利原文
Chaviyā eva saṇhabhāvena acchatā, na saṅghātassāti āha ‘‘acchoti tanucchavī’’ti. Tato ceva visesena pasannoti dassetuṃ ‘‘suṭṭhu pasanno’’ti vuttaṃ. Paribhogamaṇiratanākārasampatti sabbākārasampannatā . Tenāha ‘‘dhovanavedhanādīhī’’tiādi. Pāsāṇādīsu dhotatā dhovanaṃ, kāḷakādiapaharaṇatthāya ceva suttena āvunatthāya ca vijjhitabbatā vedhanaṃ. Ādisaddena tāpasaṇhakaraṇādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Vaṇṇasampattinti āvunitasuttassa vaṇṇasampattiṃ. Kasmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘tādisa’’ntiādi, tādisasseva āvutassa pākaṭabhāvatoti vuttaṃ hoti.
应如观察摩尼珠般察观所造之身;识如覆线般安住于内。如同有眼之人,证得观智的比丘能正确见到它。正如那人见到摩尼珠现起的时刻,便是比丘之身现起的时刻,因为其所依变得明显。又如线未现起的时刻,即是那些法未现起的时刻,因为其所依变得明显。这是在此处譬喻成就中阐明理趣。有些地方读作“如同覆线,观智”,但依据“此即是识”之说,“识”的读法更善,或者应是“观识”。引出观智,即将心导向观智。显示巴利原文
Maṇi viya karajakāyo paccavekkhitabbato. Āvutasuttaṃ viya viññāṇaṃ anupavisitvā ṭhitattā. Cakkhumā puriso viya vipassanālābhī bhikkhu sammadeva tassa dassanato, tassa purisassa maṇino āvibhūtakālo viya tassa bhikkhuno kāyassa āvibhūtakālo tannissayassa pākaṭabhāvato. Suttassāvibhūtakālo viya tesaṃ dhammānamāvibhūtakālo tannissitassa pākaṭabhāvatoti ayamettha upamāsampādane kāraṇavibhāvanā, ‘‘āvutasuttaṃ viya vipassanāñāṇa’’nti katthaci pāṭho, ‘‘idañca viññāṇa’’nti vacanato pana ‘‘viññāṇa’’nti pāṭhova sundarataro, ‘‘vipassanāviññāṇa’’nti vā bhavitabbaṃ. Vipassanāñāṇaṃ abhinīharitvāti vipassanāñāṇābhimukhaṃ cittaṃ nīharitvā.
其中:指在琉璃摩尼珠中。“以彼为所缘”,即是以名为身的色法为所缘。“触等第五”等三个词,是此句的定语;由于依义理而转变了词性、格与数,故也作为最后词的定语。应知,由“触等第五”的摄受,以及由一切心、心所的摄受,所摄之法皆含摄于观心生起之中。如此,由于它们以观识为归宿,如同覆线,与前面所说的“观识”之语并不相违。为何只取观识呢?因为“我的此识依于此、系著于此”这句话正是指此。因为以“这是我的身”等,以观智观照之后,作意“彼与观智相应的识即依于此、系著于此”,以所依、所缘等方式作意时,此处只可能取此识,而非其他。因此说“或唯是观识的显现之时”。此处应知,依《法集论》等所述方法,由于明显故,取触等第五;由于无余遍取故,取一切心、心所;由于依文说示故,取观识为要。然而,这些是对省察智显现,还是对个人显现呢?唯对省察智显现,但由于对彼省察智显现,对个人亦得名为显现,故说“比丘的显现之时”。显示巴利原文
Tatrāti veḷuriyamaṇimhi. Tadārammaṇānanti kāyasaññitarūpadhammārammaṇānaṃ. ‘‘Phassapañcamakāna’’ntiādipadattayassetaṃ visesanaṃ atthavasā liṅgavibhattivacanavipariṇāmoti katvā pacchimapadassāpi visesanabhāvato. Phassapañcamakaggahaṇena, sabbacittacetasikaggahaṇena ca gahitadhammā vipassanācittuppādapariyāpannā evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evañhi tesaṃ vipassanāviññāṇagatikattā āvutasuttaṃ viya ‘‘vipassanāviññāṇa’’nti heṭṭhā vuttavacanaṃ avirodhitaṃ hoti. Kasmā pana vipassanāviññāṇasseva gahaṇanti? ‘‘Idañca me viññāṇaṃ ettha sitaṃ ettha paṭibaddha’’nti iminā tasseva vacanato. ‘‘Ayaṃ kho me kāyo’’tiādinā hi vipassanāñāṇena vipassitvā ‘‘tadeva vipassanāñāṇasampayuttaṃ viññāṇaṃ ettha sitaṃ ettha paṭibaddha’’nti nissayavisayādivasena manasi karoti, tasmā tasseva idha gahaṇaṃ sambhavati, nāññassāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘vipassanāviññāṇasseva vā āvibhūtakālo’’ti. Dhammasaṅgahādīsu (dha. sa. 2 ādayo) desitanayena pākaṭabhāvato cettha phassapañcamakānaṃ gahaṇaṃ, niravasesapariggahaṇato sabbacittacetasikānaṃ, yathārutaṃ desitavasena padhānabhāvato vipassanāviññāṇassāti veditabbaṃ. Kiṃ panete paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa āvibhavanti, udāhu puggalassāti? Paccavekkhaṇañāṇasseva, tassa pana āvibhūtattā puggalassāpi āvibhūtā nāma honti, tasmā ‘‘bhikkhuno āvibhūtakālo’’ti vuttanti.
然而,由于此观智紧接道智之后,世间神通理应于其后宣说,而第六神通理应于其前宣说。那么,为何却在一切神通之前宣说呢?为揭出此诘难之端绪并予以化解,遂说“此观智”等语。以“此紧接道智之后”一句,揭示了如上所述的诘难端绪。其中,“紧接道智之后”是就作为臻于顶点的观智——种姓智而说。因为唯独此种姓智紧接阿拉汉道,或紧接一切道果之后;但以其为主要故,依此语句即可遍摄一切观智,因为此处是对它作无差别宣说。又,此中“道”字唯取阿拉汉道,因为唯独它包含于神通中,且因与神通相关而有诘难生起。在世间神通之前宣说的观智,由于与他们不相紧接而无有助益;而在称为漏尽智的出世间神通之前宣说,则由于紧接彼而有助益。因此,此观智理应在世间神通之后、第六神通之前宣说。然而,为何世尊不在有助益之处如是宣说,却在无助益之处宣说呢?此诘难得以生起。“虽如此”等是显示化解之语。其中,“虽如此”意为:即使依智之次第,因紧接道智而有助益,虽则如此。显示巴利原文
Yasmā panidaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ maggañāṇānantaraṃ hoti, tasmā lokiyābhiññānaṃ parato, chaṭṭhabhiññāya ca purato vattabbaṃ, atha kasmā sabbābhiññānaṃ puratova vuttanti codanālesaṃ dassetvā pariharanto ‘‘idañca vipassanāñāṇa’’ntiādimāha. ‘‘Idañca maggañāṇānantara’’nti hi iminā yathāvuttaṃ codanālesaṃ dasseti. Tattha ‘‘maggañāṇānantara’’nti sikhāppattavipassanābhūtaṃ gotrabhuñāṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tadeva hi arahattamaggassa, sabbesaṃ vā maggaphalānamanantaraṃ hoti, padhānato pana tabbacaneneva sabbassapi vipassanāñāṇassa gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ avisesato tassa idha vuttattā. Maggasaddena ca arahattamaggasseva gahaṇaṃ tassevābhiññāpariyāpannattā, abhiññāsambandhena ca codanāsambhavato. Lokiyābhiññānaṃ purato vuttaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ tāsaṃ nānantaratāya anupakāraṃ, āsavakkhayañāṇasaṅkhātāya pana lokuttarābhiññāya purato vuttaṃ tassā anantaratāya upakāraṃ, tasmā idaṃ lokiyābhiññānaṃ parato, chaṭṭhābhiññāya ca purato vattabbaṃ. Kasmā pana upakāraṭṭhāne tathā avatvā anupakāraṭṭhāneva bhagavatā vuttanti hi codanā sambhavati. ‘‘Evaṃ santepī’’tiādi parihāradassanaṃ. Tattha evaṃ santepīti yadipi ñāṇānupubbiyā maggañāṇassa anantaratāya upakāraṃ hoti, evaṃ satipīti attho.
于神通品中:即依六神通而说的教示品中。此中,观智并无别立一品:当五世间神通已说时,正如《阿含经》等所出,第六神通也必然应当宣说,因为以神通相状故被包含其中;而观智既非世间神通,亦非第六神通,故不应插入二者之间而说。如此,此观智于那些神通中无有位置,是故于彼处无缘宣说,即依此意趣,在色界第四禅之后开示观智。复以“又因为”等语句阐明其他理趣。其中,“又”字表合集义,由此,不仅在此处显示观智唯以此为由,而且另有理由,作如此合集之义,是阿阇梨所说。然而,通达声韵者说,于此处,“又”字有“或”字之义,即简择之义,这也合理,因为它是为了显示其他义理。如同指示道路时,树枝可作标记;又如于黑暗中,灯能照明,前缀与小品词正是为了阐明存在的义理。于此有偈:显示巴利原文
Abhiññāvāreti chaḷabhiññāvasena vutte desanāvāre. Etassa antarā vāro natthīti pañcasu lokiyābhiññāsu kathitāsu ākaṅkheyyasuttādīsu (ma. ni. 1.65) viya chaṭṭhābhiññāpi avassaṃ kathetabbā abhiññālakkhaṇabhāvena tappariyāpannato, na ca vipassanāñāṇaṃ lokiyābhiññānaṃ, chaṭṭhābhiññāya ca antarā pavesetvā kathetabbaṃ anabhiññālakkhaṇabhāvena tadapariyāpannato. Iti etassa vipassanāñāṇassa tāsamabhiññānaṃ antarā vāro natthi, tasmā tattha avasarābhāvato idheva rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānānantaraṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ kathitanti adhippāyo. ‘‘Yasmā cā’’tiādinā atthantaramāha. Tattha ca-saddo samuccayattho, tena na kevalaṃ vipassanāñāṇassa idha dassane tadeva kāraṇaṃ, atha kho idampīti imamatthaṃ samuccinātīti ācariyena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.235) vuttaṃ. Saddavidū pana īdise ṭhāne ca-saddo vā-saddattho, so ca vikappatthoti vadanti, tampi yuttameva atthantaradassane payuttattā. Attanā payujjitabbassa hi vijjamānatthasseva jotakā upasagganipātā yathā magganidassane sākhābhaṅgā, yathā ca adissamānā jotane padīpāti evamīdisesu. Hoti cettha –
若见“又”字用以显示其他义理,
于合集与简择中,明辨者当如此把握。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Atthantaradassanamhi , ca saddo yadi dissati; Samuccaye vikappe so, gahetabbo vibhāvinā’’ti.
“未遍知者”是含有因由意义的胎藏句;“已遍知者”同此。关于“以天眼见恐怖之色”,也应解释为“以神变智变现出恐怖之色后,以肉眼而见”。因为即使是已证俱分解脱的阿拉汉,若对事处未曾遍知,也会生起怖畏惊惧,譬如乌迦瓦西大长老。此是诸阿阇黎所说。同样,关于“以天耳界闻恐怖之声”,也应解释为“以神变智变现出恐怖之声后,以肉耳而闻”。因为即使是俱分解脱的阿拉汉,若对事处未曾遍知,也会生起怖畏惊惧,譬如乌迦瓦西大长老。这位长老曾变现出一头伴有孔雀鸣叫的纯白大象,见闻之后便生起了怖畏与惊惧——此为诸注疏中所说。若是以无常等完成了遍知的人,则对天耳等乃至任何事物都不会生起怖畏惊惧,这便是此间的关联。名为“遣除怖畏之因”,即由观智完成遍知,或是藉由彼、依于彼而成就,这便是它的意义。“即于此处”,指的是第四禅那的当处。“然而”等等,是显示依据读法而更显适切之理的说明。由随观智辗转生起的喜悦,经由轻安等辗转到达的乐,即是观智之乐。“各别证知”,指的是不与禅那等共通的、各各别别地现见于沙门果。是故世尊于《法句经》中说:显示巴利原文
Akatasammasanassāti hetugabbhapadaṃ. Tathā katasammasanassāti ca. ‘‘Dibbena cakkhunā bheravampi rūpaṃ passatoti ettha iddhividhañāṇena bheravaṃ rūpaṃ nimminitvā maṃsacakkhunā passatotipi vattabbaṃ. Evampi hi abhiññālābhino apariññātavatthukassa bhayaṃ santāso uppajjati uccavālikavāsimahānāgattherassa viyā’’ti ācariyena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.235) vuttaṃ. Yathā cettha, evaṃ dibbāya sotadhātuyā bheravaṃ saddaṃ suṇatoti etthāpi iddhividhañāṇena bheravaṃ saddaṃ nimminitvā maṃsasotena suṇatopīti vattabbameva. Evampi hi abhiññālābhino apariññātavatthukassa bhayaṃ santāso uppajjati uccavālikavāsimahānāgattherassa viya. Thero hi koñcanādasahitaṃ sabbasetaṃ hatthināgaṃ māpetvā disvā, sutvā ca sañjātabhayasantāsoti aṭṭhakathāsu (vibha. aṭṭha. 2.882; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.81; visuddhi. 2.733) vutto. Aniccādivasena katasammasanassa dibbāya…pe… bhayaṃ santāso na uppajjatīti sambandho. Bhayavinodanahetu nāma vipassanāñāṇena katasammasanatā, tassa, tena vā sampādanatthanti attho. Idhevāti catutthajjhānānantarameva. ‘‘Apicā’’tiādinā yathāpāṭhaṃ yuttataranayaṃ dasseti. Vipassanāya pavattaṃ pāmojjapītipassaddhiparamparāgatasukhaṃ vipassanāsukhaṃ. Pāṭiyekkanti jhānābhiññādīhi asammissaṃ visuṃ bhūtaṃ sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā dhammapade –
无论他于何处随观诸蕴之生灭,
他便获得喜与悦,这对于了知者即是不死。”(《法句经》第374偈)等。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānata’’ntiādi. (dha. pa. 374);
此处亦说:“大王,这亦是现见的沙门果……乃至……更为殊胜”,因此,与经典相合,他们认为这一理路更为恰当。“或从最初”即指在胜解之初。显示巴利原文
Idhāpi vuttaṃ ‘‘idampi kho mahārāja sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ…pe… paṇītatarañcā’’ti, tasmā pāḷiyā saṃsandanato imameva nayaṃ yuttataranti vadanti. Āditovāti abhiññānamādimhiyeva.
意所成神足智之解释显示巴利原文
Manomayiddhiñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
236-7 关于“意所成”,此处“maya”一词出现在“不为他所施设的变异”、“词的补足”、“出生”等众多含义中。而这里为显示“出生”之义,故说“由意所生”。阿阇梨说此义为“由胜解意所生”。但在《清净道论》中则说“由意决意所化,故为意所成”,由于是由胜解意与决意意两者所生,因此两者皆是适宜的。所谓“肢”,是指手、足等末端的聚合;“支”则指于这些聚合中的指节等部分。“诸根无缺”一句中,无缺即是圆满,并非不殊胜;而圆满的状态亦仅依眼、耳等的形态而已。为了显示“在所化之色中并无净色”,故说“依形态而诸根无缺”;依此,亦当知连其命根等也不存在。“依形态”即是仅类似莲瓣等之形态而已,并非依能撞击色的真实净色等诸根。“具足一切肢与支,诸根无缺”即是此义,为解释此义故说“具神通者”等。“耳不穿孔”指的是依贵族习俗,为佩戴耳环而不穿孔之耳,此处仅是示例。是故他说“于一切相貌”,其义为于颜色、形态、部分差别等一切相貌。“因此”即指“具神通者”。显示巴利原文
236-7.Manomayanti ettha pana mayasaddo aparapaññattivikārapadapūraṇanibbattiādīsu anekesvatthesu āgato. Idha pana nibbattiattheti dassetuṃ ‘‘manena nibbattita’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Abhiññāmanena nibbattita’’nti atthoti ācariyenāti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.236, 237) vuttaṃ. Visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.397) pana ‘‘adhiṭṭhānamanena nimmitattā manomaya’’nti āgataṃ, abhiññāmanena, adhiṭṭhānamanena cāti ubhayathāpi nibbattattā ubhayampetaṃ yuttameva . Aṅgaṃ nāma hatthapādāditaṃtaṃsamudāyaṃ, paccaṅgaṃ nāma kapparajaṇṇuādi tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samudāye avayavaṃ. ‘‘Ahīnindriya’’nti ettha paripuṇṇatāyeva ahīnatā, na tu appaṇītatā, paripuṇṇabhāvo ca cakkhusotādīnaṃ saṇṭhānavaseneva. Nimmitarūpe hi pasādo nāma natthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘saṇṭhānavasena avikalindriya’’nti vuttaṃ, imināva tassa jīvitindriyādīnampi abhāvo vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Saṇṭhānavasenāti ca kamaladalādisadisasaṇṭhānamattavasena, na rūpābhighātārahabhūtappasādādiindriyavasena. ‘‘Sabbaṅgapaccaṅgiṃ ahīnindriya’’nti vuttamevatthaṃ samatthento ‘‘iddhimatā’’tiādimāha. Aviddhakaṇṇoti kulacārittavasena kaṇṇālaṅkārapiḷandhanatthaṃ avijjhitakaṇṇo, nidassanamattametaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbākārehī’’ti, vaṇṇasaṇṭhānāvayavavisesādisabbākārehīti attho. Tenāti iddhimatā.
此义在巴利原文中亦有阐明,故说:“‘如从文阇草中抽取苇芯’等譬喻……已说”。然而,有些地方可见到“‘如从文阇草中抽取苇芯’等仅是譬喻。凡为显示相似性而说者”这样的文句。其中,以“仅是譬喻”遮止了其他意义的显示,而以“凡……”等则成立其譬喻性。以不限定所指的“凡”字,回指“如从文阇草中抽取苇芯”等说法本身。“为显示相似性”,即为了显示形状、颜色、肢节特征等方面的相似性。如何是相似性?即答:“实如文阇草相似……”等。文阇草是一种特别的草,人们用它制作刷子等物。由“应抽出”之说,显示是指内在的苇芯,故说“内有苇芯”。苇芯即是嫩芽。但在《清净道论大复注》中则说为“茎秆”。圆筒状的鞘,即圆形的、非剑形的鞘。展开的,即条状的。应被做成容器、应被分配的,称为容器,即箱箧。应被做成容器、应被厌恶的,称为容器,即蜕皮。此处也是指蜕皮,故说“容器,此亦……”等。藤编容器名为箱箧。为何以蛇蜕命名,而非以藤编箱箧命名?为澄清此问难,说“因为蛇蜕……”等,意谓那蛇蜕与蛇相似,故以此命名。但在《清净道论大复注》中则说:“容器,即箱显示巴利原文
Ayamevattho pāḷiyampi vibhāvitoti āha ‘‘muñjamhā īsikantiādiupamāttayampi hi…pe… vutta’’nti. Katthaci pana ‘‘muñjamhā īsikantiādi upamāmattaṃ. Yampi hi sadisabhāvadassanatthameva vutta’’nti pāṭho dissati. Tattha ‘‘upamāmatta’’nti iminā atthantaradassanaṃ nivatteti, ‘‘yampi hī’’tiādinā pana tassa upamābhāvaṃ samattheti. Niyatānapekkhena ca yaṃ-saddena ‘‘muñjamhā īsika’’ntiādivacanameva paccāmasati. Sadisabhāvadassanatthamevāti saṇṭhānatopi vaṇṇatopi avayavavisesatopi sadisabhāvadassanatthaṃyeva. Kathaṃ sadisabhāvoti vuttaṃ ‘‘muñjasadisā eva hī’’tiādi. Muñjaṃ nāma tiṇaviseso, yena kocchādīni karonti. ‘‘Pavāheyyā’’ti vacanato anto ṭhitā eva īsikā adhippetāti dasseti ‘‘anto īsikā hotī’’ti iminā. Īsikāti ca kaḷīro. Visuddhimaggaṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘kaṇḍa’’nti (visuddhi. ṭī. 2.399) vuttaṃ. Vaṭṭāya kosiyāti parivaṭṭulāya asikosiyā. Patthaṭāyāti paṭṭikāya. Karaḍitabbo bhājetabboti karaṇḍo, peḷā. Karaḍitabbo jigucchitabboti karaṇḍo, nimmokaṃ. Idhāpi nimmokamevāti āha ‘‘karaṇḍāti idampī’’tiādi. Vilīvakaraṇḍo nāma peḷā. Kasmā ahikañcukasseva nāmaṃ, na vilīvakaraṇḍakassāti codanaṃ sodheti ‘‘ahikañcuko hī’’tiādinā, sveva ahinā sadiso, tasmā tasseva nāmanti vuttaṃ hoti. Visuddhimaggaṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘karaṇḍāyāti peḷāya, nimmokatoti ca vadantī’’ti (visuddhi. ṭī. 2.399) vuttaṃ. Tattha peḷāgahaṇaṃ ahinā asadisatāya vicāretabbaṃ.
若如此,则“大王,譬如有人从容器中取出蛇”这一人从容器取蛇的譬喻,便会与义理相违。因为实际上他不能用手从那里取出蛇,故以追问的方式说“在那里……”等。虽然“取出”是不确定的说法,但由于用手取出是显而易见的,便仿佛显示了那种情形。因此说“显示如同用手取出”。而“因为此……”等,则是显示以心取出的原因。据说,蛇在五种情况下不超越同类:在投生时、死亡时、排泄蜕皮时、与同类交配时、去除旧皮时,故说“住于同类中”。意思是,它住于蛇类之中而舍弃,并非以龙之威力变成其他种类之形。这是针对有大神通的龙而说的。如同啃食身体:如同自己啃食自己的皮、自己的身体。厌恶旧皮:厌恶因老旧而有些地方脱落、有些地方悬垂的旧皮。以四因:即如前所说的“住于同类、依止、力量、厌恶”这四种原因。从那里:从蜕皮中。以其他:以不同于自身的方式。以心:以那人的心,而非以手。譬如有人见到蛇后,心想“啊,但愿我能将此蛇从蜕皮中取出”,以心将蛇从容器中取出,他这样想:“这是蛇,这是容器,蛇是蛇,容器是容器,蛇只是从容器中被取出”,同样地…显示巴利原文
Yajjevaṃ ‘‘seyyathāpi pana mahārāja puriso ahiṃ karaṇḍā uddhareyyā’’ti purisassa karaṇḍato ahiuddharaṇūpamāya ayamattho virujjheyya. Na hi so hatthena tato uddharituṃ sakkāti anuyogenāha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. ‘‘Uddhareyyā’’ti hi aniyamavacanepi hatthena uddharaṇasseva pākaṭattā taṃdassanamiva jātaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘hatthena uddharamāno viya dassito’’ti. ‘‘Ayañhī’’tiādi cittena uddharaṇassa hetudassanaṃ. Ahino nāma pañcasu ṭhānesu sajātiṃ nātivattanti upapattiyaṃ, cutiyaṃ, vissaṭṭhaniddokkamane, samānajātiyā methunapaṭisevane, jiṇṇatacāpanayaneti vuttaṃ ‘‘sajātiyaṃ ṭhito’’ti. Uragajātiyameva ṭhito pajahati, na nāgiddhiyā aññajātirūpoti attho. Idañhi mahiddhike nāge sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sarīraṃ khādayamānaṃ viyāti attanoyeva tacaṃ attano sarīraṃ khādayamānaṃ viya. Purāṇatacaṃ jigucchantoti jiṇṇatāya katthaci muttaṃ katthaci olambitaṃ jiṇṇatacaṃ jigucchanto. Catūhīti ‘‘sajātiyaṃ ṭhito, nissāya, thāmena, jigucchanto’’ti yathāvuttehi catūhi kāraṇehi. Tatoti kañcukato. Aññenāti attato aññena. Cittenāti purisassa citteneva, na hatthena. Seyyathāpi nāma puriso ahiṃ passitvā ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ imaṃ ahiṃ kañcukato uddhareyya’’nti ahiṃ karaṇḍā cittena uddhareyya, tassa evamassa ‘‘ayaṃ ahi, ayaṃ karaṇḍo, añño ahi, añño karaṇḍo, karaṇḍā tveva ahi ubbhato’’ti, evameva…pe… so imamhā kāyā aññaṃ kāyaṃ abhinimmināti…pe… ahīnindriyanti ayamettha adhippāyo.
神变智等论释显示巴利原文
Iddhividhañāṇādikathāvaṇṇanā
239 应知,神变智犹如经过善加处理的粘土等,作为陶器等种种变化之所依,因为它是变化作用的所依。显示巴利原文
239. Bhājanādivikatikiriyānissayabhūtā suparikammakatamattikādayo viya vikubbanakiriyānissayabhāvato iddhividhañāṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
241 如同前面在断除盖障的章节中,不取旷野,而只取长途道路,是为了显示安稳之道。然而,为何只显示安稳之道,而不显示旷野之道?难道这不只是显示譬喻而已吗?为避除这一问难,说“因为……”等。而“实无怖畏……”等,则是显示只取安稳之道的理由。为了遮挡风、热等,在头上做成布巾。应知,如此令各处言辞圆满,是为了令譬喻圆满以成就所喻之义,为了令所欲表达的所喻之义易于理解,也为了以具足因、喻、能分、所分等的言辞令智者心生欢喜。如此,于一切处皆然。他安适而无难地确定:即无困难、不费力地觉察和决断。显示巴利原文
241. Pubbe nīvaraṇappahānavāre viya kantāraggahaṇaṃ akatvā kevalaṃ addhānamaggaggahaṇaṃ khemamaggadassanatthaṃ. Kasmā pana khemamaggasseva dassanaṃ, na kantāramaggassa, nanu upamādassanamattametanti codanaṃ pariharanto ‘‘yasmā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Appaṭibhayañhī’’tiādi pana khemamaggasseva gahaṇakāraṇadassanaṃ. Vātātapādinivāraṇatthaṃ sīse sāṭakaṃ katvā. Tathā tathā pana paripuṇṇavacanaṃ upamāsampattiyā upameyyasampādanatthaṃ, adhippetassa ca upameyyatthassa suviññāpanatthaṃ, hetudāharaṇabhedyabhedakādisampannavacanena ca viññūjātikānaṃ cittārādhanatthanti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ sabbattha. Sukhaṃ vavatthapetīti akicchaṃ akasirena sallakkheti, paricchindati ca.
243 由于迟钝的襁褓婴儿也可称为“年幼者”,为作区分而说“年轻”,由此显示“年幼者”须由“年轻”来限定,故注释为“青春年少”。同样,有些年轻者不喜装饰、不事庄严,故以“具庄严性”等加以限定,以表明“年轻”须由这些词来限定,而注释为“具备青春”。在巴利圣典中,这三个词是按限定与被限定的次第来表述的,注释亦依此作解;否则,若仅用一个词便能通达所诠,就只需附带说明即可。为了解释“以庄严为本性”而说“一天之中”等。“黑点”是过患的同义词,为了表示过患即黑痣等,遂说“黑痣”等。黑芥子大小的斑点称为黑痣,或是黑色、杂色的,也称“芥子粒”。芝麻大小的斑点称为芝麻痣。所谓“弯曲”,指不正常、变形的肢体。青春痘等是损容的痘疹,亦名“粗硬之疹”。“面相”指面容的光泽。存在于面部的过患称为面过患。这些仅表示特征。显示巴利原文
243. Mando uttānaseyyakadārakopi ‘‘daharo’’ti vuccatīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘yuvā’’ti vuttanti mantvā yuvasaddena visesitabbameva daharasaddassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘taruṇo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā yuvāpi koci anicchanako, anicchanato ca amaṇḍanajātikoti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘maṇḍanajātiko’’tiādi vuttanti mantvā maṇḍanajātikādisaddena visesitabbameva yuvasaddassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yobbannena samannāgato’’ti vuttaṃ. Pāḷiyañhi yathākkamaṃ padattayassa visesitabbavisesakabhāvena vacanato tathā saṃvaṇṇanā katā, itarathā ekakenāpi padena adhippetatthādhigamikā saparivārā saṃvaṇṇanāva kātabbā siyāti. ‘‘Maṇḍanapakatiko’’ti vuttameva vivarituṃ ‘‘divasassā’’tiādimāha. Kaṇikasaddo dosapariyāyo, doso ca nāma kāḷatilakādīti dasseti ‘‘kāḷatilakā’’tiādinā. Kāḷatilappamāṇā bindavo kāḷatilakāni, kāḷā vā kammāsā, ye ‘‘sāsapabījikā’’tipi vuccanti. Tilappamāṇā bindavo tilakāni. Vaṅgaṃ nāma viyaṅgaṃ vipariṇāmitamaṅgaṃ. Yobbannapīḷakādayo mukhadūsipīḷakā, ye ‘‘kharapīḷakā’’ tipi vuccanti. Mukhanimittanti mukhacchāyaṃ. Mukhe gato doso mukhadoso. Lakkhaṇavacanamattametaṃ mukhe adosassapi pākaṭabhāvassa adhippetattā, yathā vā mukhe doso, evaṃ mukhe adosopi mukhadosoti saralopena vutto sāmaññaniddesatopi anekatthassa viññātabbattā, pisaddalopena vā ayamattho veditabbo. Avuttopi hi attho sampiṇḍanavasena vutto viya viññāyati, mukhadoso ca mukhaadoso ca mukhadosoti ekadesasarūpekasesanayenapettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Evañhi atthassa paripuṇṇatāya ‘‘paresaṃ soḷasavidhaṃ cittaṃ pākaṭaṃ hotī’’ti vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
对于应说之余义,由譬喻等而了知;
或由省略“亦”等字,或以存一摄余之法。
于不相同的词,有三种方式;于相同的词,有四种方式。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Vattabbassāvasiṭṭhassa, gāho nidassanādinā; Apisaddādilopena, ekasesanayena vā. Asamāne sadde tidhā, catudhā ca samānake; Sāmaññaniddesatopi, veditabbo vibhāvinā’’ti.
“有贪心”等,即巴利圣典中所说的十六种心。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sarāgaṃ vā citta’’ntiādinā pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ soḷasavidhaṃ cittaṃ.
245 “以宿住智为喻”,是指以宿住智所作的比喻,或指在宿住智中所施设的比喻。为了澄清“为何圣典中只以三个村庄作为喻体”的质疑,才有“那一天”等语的解说。那一天所做的事情,即使对普通凡夫而言,也大多是明显的。因此,世尊只选取那一天所能抵达的三个村庄,而不取更远的村庄,这便是其用意。尽管圣典中并未出现“那一天”一词,但应知注释中提及“那一天”,是考虑到以三个村庄为喻,意在于指那一天所为之事。同时,通过选取那一天所到达的三个村庄,也显示:对于其他通过大誓愿而获得宿住智的人而言,他们在三有中所作的事也大多是明显的。因为举三个村庄这一譬喻,同样蕴含着这层意义。“在三有中所作的事”,指的是过去生中,以及现世和过去已作之事。显示巴利原文
245.Pubbenivāsañāṇūpamāyanti pubbenivāsañāṇassa, pubbenivāsañāṇe vā dassitāya upamāya. Kasmā pana pāḷiyaṃ gāmattayameva upamāne gahitanti codanaṃ sodhetuṃ ‘‘taṃ divasa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ divasaṃ katakiriyā nāma pākatikasattassāpi yebhuyyena pākaṭā hoti. Tasmā taṃ divasaṃ gantuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṃ gāmattayameva bhagavatā gahitaṃ, na taduttarīti adhippāyo . Kiñcāpi pāḷiyaṃ taṃdivasaggahaṇaṃ natthi, gāmattayaggahaṇena pana tadaheva katakiriyā adhippetāti mantvā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ taṃdivasaggahaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Taṃdivasagatagāmattayaggahaṇeneva ca mahābhinīhārehi aññesampi pubbenivāsañāṇalābhīnaṃ tīsupi bhavesu katakiriyā yebhuyyena pākaṭā hotīti dīpitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Etadatthampi hi gāmattayaggahaṇanti. Tīsu bhavesu katakiriyāyāti abhisamparāyesu pubbe diṭṭhadhamme pana idāni, pubbe ca katakiccassa.
247 巴利圣典中“从一条车道穿行到另一条车道”,意指从此一车道穿行至彼一车道,由此显示了来回穿行,故说“来回穿行”,即为了各种事务而到处行走。这也正是“车道”与“街道”二词同义的含义。“在十字路口”,即街道的交叉处。比丘的业生身应视为如同宫殿,因为安住其中者得以见到所应见。由于有了肉眼,天眼才能生起,正如所说:“肉眼生起,是天眼的道路”(《如是语》61)。这位证得天眼而安住的比丘,应视为如同有眼的人,因为他能见到所应见。如同进入房屋又从中出来,结生便是如此进入母胎,出生便是如此从母胎出来,因为母胎如同房屋。正如所说:“你称母亲为小屋,称妻子为巢穴”(《相应部》1.19)。另有一种注释书之外的解释方法:如同进入房屋,受生便是这样进入自体;如同从房屋出来,死没便是这样离开自体,因为自体如同房屋。如说:“造屋者,你已被看见,你将不再建造房屋”(《法句经》154)。显示巴利原文
247. Pāḷiyaṃ rathikāya vīthiṃ sañcaranteti aññāya rathikāya aññaṃ rathiṃ sañcaranteti attho, tena aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇaṃ dassitanti āha ‘‘aparāparaṃ sañcarante’’ti, taṃtaṃkiccavasena ito cito ca sañcaranteti vuttaṃ hoti, ayamevattho rathivīthisaddānamekatthattā. Siṅghāṭakamhīti vīthicatukke. Pāsādo viya bhikkhussa karajakāyo daṭṭhabbo tattha patiṭṭhitassa daṭṭhabbadassanasiddhito. Maṃsacakkhumato hi dibbacakkhusamadhigamo. Yathāha ‘‘maṃsacakkhussa uppādo, maggo dibbassa cakkhuno’’ti (itivu. 61). Cakkhumā puriso viya ayameva dibbacakkhuṃ patvā ṭhito bhikkhu daṭṭhabbassa dassanato. Gehaṃ pavisanto, tato nikkhamanto viya ca mātukucchiṃ paṭisandhivasena pavisanto, tato ca vijātivasena nikkhamanto mātukucchiyā gehasadisattā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘mātaraṃ kuṭikaṃ brūsi, bhariyaṃ brūsi kulāvaka’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.19). Ayaṃ aṭṭhakathāmuttako nayo – gehaṃ pavisanto viya attabhāvaṃ upapajjanavasena okkamanto, gehā nikkhamanto viya ca attabhāvato cavanavasena apakkamanto attabhāvassa gehasadisattā. Vuttañhi ‘‘gahakāraka diṭṭhosi, puna gehaṃ na kāhasī’’ti (dha. pa. 154).
“一再流转的众生”,是指在轮回中反复流转的众生。“在露地处”,即处于露天场所。“在中央”,即位于城市中央的十字路口。“各处”,即于各生存地的某一部分。“已投生的众生”,即正在产生的众生。因为这句话指的是在各生存地中已经出生、已经成长的众生,而“一再流转的众生”一句,则指的是那些同样没有固定时限的普通众生。如此,依次以流转者和安住者作为人的譬喻,对他们来说才得以成立。而在“于三有中投生众生的显现时”这一句中,应知是总括上述所有种类的众生,不加任何限定。显示巴利原文
Aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇakasattāti punappunaṃ saṃsāre paribbhamanakasattā. Abbhokāsaṭṭhāneti ajjhokāsadesabhūte. Majjheti nagarassa majjhabhūte siṅghāṭake. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ bhavekadese. Nibbattasattāti uppajjamānakasattā. Iminā hi tasmiṃ tasmiṃ bhave jātasaṃvaddhe satte vadati, ‘‘aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇakasattā’’ti pana etena tathā aniyamitakālike sādhāraṇasatte. Evañhi tesaṃ yathākkamaṃ sañcaraṇakasannisinnakajanopamatā upapannā hotīti. Tīsu bhavesu nibbattasattānaṃ āvibhūtakāloti ettha pana vuttappakārānaṃ sabbesampi sattānaṃ aniyamato gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
这难道不是关于天眼通的论题吗?那为何以“于三有中”也将四蕴有包含在内?因为天眼并非以无色法为所缘。为了避开这一质难,论师说“而此……”等。其中,“此”指“于三有中投生的众生”这句话,这是此处阿阇梨的意见。如此,注释书阿阇梨们便在注释书中避开了上述质难。然而,此处我们的见解是:这难道不是关于天眼通的论题吗?那为何以“以清净、超胜于人的天眼,见众生死亡、结生……”等不加区别地也将生于四蕴有的众生包含在内?因为天眼并非以无色法为所缘。为了避开这一质难,论师说“而此……”等。其中,“此”指“见众生死亡、结生……”等语句。如此,注释书阿阇梨们便在圣典本身中避开了上述质难。因为从他在圣典中避开质难之时起,在注释书中也就没有对该质难的意义解释。所谓“仅为说法之便利”,纯粹是为了说法之便利而不加区别地说,并非因为生于四蕴有的众生是天眼显现的范围。因为,如果以“除无色有”或“于二有中”来说“见众生从欲界有、色界有死亡”,或说“于欲界有、色界有结生”,这样的说法由于随宜地分别能分、所分等,便不易理解;而不加区别地这显示巴利原文
Nanu cāyaṃ dibbacakkhukathā, atha kasmā ‘‘tīsu bhavesū’’ti catuvokārabhavassāpi saṅgaho kato. Na hi so arūpadhammārammaṇoti anuyogaṃ pariharanto ‘‘idañcā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘idanti tīsu bhavesu nibbattasattānanti idaṃ vacana’’nti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.247) ayamettha ācariyassa mati, evaṃ sati aṭṭhakathācariyehi aṭṭhakathāyameva yathāvutto anuyogo pariharitoti. Ayaṃ panettha amhākaṃ khanti – nanu cāyaṃ dibbacakkhukathā, atha kasmā ‘‘dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne’’tiādinā avisesato catuvokārabhavūpagassāpi saṅgaho kato. Na hi so arūpadhammārammaṇoti anuyogaṃ pariharanto ‘‘idañcā’’tiādimāha. Tattha idanti ‘‘satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne’’tiādivacanaṃ. Evañhi sati aṭṭhakathācariyehi pāḷiyameva yathāvutto anuyogo pariharitoti. Yadaggena so pāḷiyaṃ pariharito, tadaggena aṭṭhakathāyampi tassā atthavaṇṇanābhāvato. Desanāsukhatthamevāti kevalaṃ desanāsukhatthaṃ eva avisesena vuttaṃ, na pana catuvokārabhavūpagānaṃ dibbacakkhussa āvibhāvasabbhāvato. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā arūpabhava’’nti vā ‘‘dvīsu bhavesū’’ti vā satte passati kāmāvacarabhavato, rūpāvacarabhavato ca cavamāneti vā kāmāvacarabhave, rūpāvacarabhave ca upapajjamāneti vā vuccamānā hi desanā yathārahaṃ bhedyabhedakādivibhāvanena sukhāsukhāvabodhā ca na hoti, avisesena pana evameva vuccamānā sukhāsukhāvabodhā ca. Desetuṃ, avabodhetuñca sukaratāpayojanañhi ‘‘desanāsukhattha’’nti vuttaṃ. Kasmāti āha ‘‘āruppe…pe… natthī’’ti, dibbacakkhugocarabhūtānaṃ rūpadhammānamabhāvatoti vuttaṃ hoti.
漏尽智论释显示巴利原文
Āsavakkhayañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
248 248. 此处应知,作为毗婆舍那基础的第四禅心,并非如同世间神通那样以神通为基础。所谓“作为毗婆舍那基础”,即作为毗婆舍那的近因。而毗婆舍那,依观行者个人的差别,有三种:大菩提萨埵的毗婆舍那、辟支菩提萨埵的毗婆舍那、声闻的毗婆舍那。其中,大菩提萨埵与辟支菩提萨埵的毗婆舍那,与思所成智相关,是自然智;而声闻的毗婆舍那,则与闻所成智相关,依他人教导而生。此毗婆舍那,在《清净道论》中以多种方式阐明,如“从除了非想非非想处之外的其余色界、无色界禅那的某一种出定后……”等,以及依无色门而说的四界差别中,由各各界摄持门中的某一种门而有多种方式。然而,大菩提萨埵的毗婆舍那智,以二十四万亿种门类而分别,依多种方式,摄持作为一切知智所依的圣道智之基础的前分智之核心,趋于圆满,极为甚深、微细、更微细,不与其余共通的毗婆舍那智相等,这在注释书中被称为“大金刚智”。依其转起之分别,以二十四万亿种分类为基础而入定时,被称为世尊每日受用的二十四万亿种等至。此佛陀的毗婆舍那行相,在《最上义悦意》——《清净道论》注释中,阿显示巴利原文
248.Idha vipassanāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ veditabbaṃ, na lokiyābhiññāsu viya abhiññāpādakaṃ. Vipassanāpādakanti ca vipassanāya padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ, vipassanā ca nāmesā tividhā vipassakapuggalabhedena mahābodhisattānaṃ vipassanā, paccekabodhisattānaṃ vipassanā, sāvakānaṃ vipassanā cāti. Tattha mahābodhisattānaṃ, paccekabodhisattānañca vipassanā cintāmayañāṇasambandhikā sayambhuñāṇabhūtā, sāvakānaṃ pana sutamayañāṇasambandhikā paropadesasambhūtā. Sā ‘‘ṭhapetvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ avasesarūpārūpajjhānānaṃ aññatarato vuṭṭhāyā’’tiādinā anekadhā, arūpamukhavasena catudhātuvavatthāne vuttānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ dhātupariggahamukhānañca aññataramukhavasena anekadhā ca visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.664) nānānayato vibhāvitā, mahābodhisattānaṃ pana catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassamukhena pabhedagamanato nānānayaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇasannissayassa ariyamaggañāṇassa adhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ pubbabhāgañāṇagabbhaṃ gaṇhāpentaṃ paripākaṃ gacchantaṃ paramagambhīraṃ saṇhasukhumataraṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ hoti , yaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu ‘‘mahāvajirañāṇa’’nti vuccati, yassa ca pavattivibhāgena catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassappabhedassa pādakabhāvena samāpajjiyamānā catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhyā devasikaṃ satthu vaḷañjanasamāpattiyo vuccanti. Svāyaṃ buddhānaṃ vipassanācāro paramatthamañjusāyaṃ visuddhimaggavaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.144) uddesato ācariyena dassito, tato so atthikehi gahetabbo. Idha pana sāvakānaṃ vipassanāva adhippetā.
“为漏尽智”这一句,是与行为目的相关的为格,表示目的。因此,即使没有目的性的词根,也应以目的本身来理解其义,故说“为了产生尽智”。于此类语句皆然。涅槃与阿罗汉道,以胜说而言,此处称为“尽”;于此“尽”的智,即是“尽智”;产生此尽智,即是目的;为彼目的之义。所谓“尽”,即断除、根绝恶法,此是道。然而,彼恶法之尽,若无漏尽则不可能,故以“于尽之智”一句中的“尽”字,即指漏尽,以此“诸漏之尽”一句显示。所谓“于无生之智”,即于诸漏无生之阿罗汉果之智。诸漏于此灭尽,故为“尽”,此是果。因已寂灭诸恶,故为“沙门”;而寂灭诸恶,依严格义唯在阿罗汉果,故说“于‘由漏尽而为沙门’一句中,此是果”。而“由尽”即“因已灭尽”之义。诸漏于此灭尽,故为“尽”,此是涅槃。然而,由于以复合词的形式将“漏尽”作双体而说,故在解释“诸漏之尽”一词的语义时,取用了“漏尽”一词。显示巴利原文
‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyā’’ti idaṃ kiriyāpayojanabhūte tadatthe sampadānavacanaṃ, tasmā asatipi payojanavācake payojanavaseneva attho veditabboti āha ‘‘khayañāṇanibbattanatthāyā’’ti. Evamīdisesu. Nibbānaṃ, arahattamaggo ca ukkaṭṭhaniddesena idha khayo nāma, tattha ñāṇaṃ khayañāṇaṃ, tassa nibbattanasaṅkhāto attho payojanaṃ, tadatthāyāti attho. Khepeti pāpadhamme samucchindatīti khayo, maggo. So pana pāpakkhayo āsavakkhayena vinā natthi, tasmā ‘‘khaye ñāṇa’’nti (dha. sa. suttantadukamātikā 148) ettha khayaggahaṇena āsavakkhayova vuttoti dasseti ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayo’’ti iminā. Anuppāde ñāṇanti āsavānamanuppādabhūte ariyaphale ñāṇaṃ. Khīyiṃsu āsavā etthāti khayo, phalaṃ. Samitapāpatāya samaṇo, samitapāpatā ca nippariyāyato arahattaphalenevāti āha ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayā samaṇo hotīti ettha phala’’nti. Khayāti ca khīṇattāti attho. Khīyanti āsavā etthāti khayo, nibbānaṃ. ‘‘Āsavakkhayā’’ti pana samāsavasena dvibhāvaṃ katvā vuttattā ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayo’’ti padassa atthuddhāre āsavakkhayapadaggahaṇaṃ.
“Paravajjānupassissā”等偈颂出自《法句经》。其中,“ujjhānasaññino”意为具有指责之想者。“Arā”意为遥远,正如在“Arā siṅghāmi vārija”等语句中,此不变词确实表示遥远之义。也有读作“Ārā”的。应知“ārā”与“arā”一样,是表示遥远义的不变词,因为正是该词在音声论中被引为例证。虽然《法句经注》中说“称为阿罗汉道的‘ārā’,即是已远去”,但此处,由于增长诸漏而令诸行增长者,从无为法(涅槃)来看是极为遥远的,因此在“ārā so āsavakkhayā”(他远离漏尽)中,“漏尽”一词也可能是无为法的同义词,故注释者说为“涅槃”。“Khayaṃ”即khayo(尽),意为诸漏的刹那灭尽。其余的是其同义词。“Bhaṅgo āsavānaṃ khayoti vuttoti yojanā”(“破坏”即说为诸漏之尽,应如此连接)。但在此处,由于不相离的关系,涅槃与道也都显示巴利原文
‘‘Paravajjānupassissā’’tiādigāthā dhammapade (dha. pa. 253). Tattha ujjhānasaññinoti garahasaññino. Arāti dūrā. ‘‘Arā siṅghāmi vārija’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.234; jā. 1.6.116) viya hi dūratthoyaṃ nipāto. ‘‘Ārā’’tipi pāṭho. Arāsaddo viya ārāsaddopi dūratthe eko nipātoti veditabbo. Tadeva hi padaṃ saddasatthe udāhaṭaṃ. Kāmañca dhammapadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘arahattamaggasaṅkhātā ārā dūraṃ gatova hotī’’ti (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.253) vuttaṃ, tathāpi āsavavaḍḍhiyā saṅkhāre vaḍḍhento visaṅkhārato suvidūradūro, tasmā ‘‘ārā so āsavakkhayā’’ti ettha āsavakkhayapadaṃ visaṅkhārādhivacanampi sambhavatīti āha ‘‘nibbāna’’nti. Khayanaṃ khayo, āsavānaṃ khaṇanirodho. Sesaṃ tassa pariyāyavacanaṃ. Bhaṅgo āsavānaṃ khayoti vuttoti yojanā. Idha pana nibbānampi maggopi avinābhāvato. Na hi nibbānamanārabbha maggeneva āsavānaṃ khayo hotīti.
“Tanninna”(倾向彼)意为倾向彼漏尽智,其余的是其同义词。为了显示“在经文中,‘此是苦’是通过对苦圣谛加以限定、无余,且当时那位比丘以现量证得的方式而把握的”,故说了“ettaka”(这么多)等语。其中,“此是苦”显示其通过限定而把握;“无过于此”显示其通过无余而把握。因此说“一切苦谛”等。为了显示“以通达自味、自相的方式而了知,即名为如实地了知”,故用“以通达自味、自相”来说明。“味”即自性,应被品尝、应被了知;自己的味即是“自味”,那本身就是“相”;以不痴迷而通达它,便是其含义。所谓以不痴迷而通达,即当那智生起后,在确定苦谛的自性等时没有痴迷,那智的生起本身就是如此。因此说“如实地了知”。以“能生起”一词,显示“苦从此集起,故为苦集”的词源解释。“彼两者”指苦与苦集。“到达某处”即指到达那作为道之所缘缘而成为原因的涅槃。因为“处”被称为原因,由于“果依存于此而住立”。“到达彼两者”是像说“到达那具有彼两者的人”一样,不说“彼两者之到达”而说。因为实际上是通过作所缘而到达涅槃。显示巴利原文
Tanninnanti tasmiṃ āsavānaṃ khayañāṇe ninnaṃ. Sesaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ idaṃ dukkhanti dukkhassa ariyasaccassa paricchinditvā, anavasesetvā ca tadā tassa bhikkhuno paccakkhato gahitabhāvadassananti dassetuṃ ‘‘ettaka’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha hi ettakaṃ dukkhanti tassa paricchijja gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Na ito bhiyyoti anavasesetvā gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbampi dukkhasacca’’ntiādi. Sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhavasena pajānanameva yathābhūtaṃ pajānanaṃ nāmāti dasseti ‘‘sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhenā’’ti iminā. Rasoti sabhāvo rasitabbo jānitabboti katvā, attano raso saraso, so eva lakkhaṇaṃ, tassa asammohato paṭivijjhanenāti attho. Asammohato paṭivijjhanañca nāma yathā tasmiṃ ñāṇe pavatte pacchā dukkhasaccassa sarūpādiparicchede sammoho na hoti, tathā tassa pavattiyeva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti. ‘‘Nibbattika’’nti iminā ‘‘dukkhaṃ samudeti etasmāti dukkhasamudayo’’ti nibbacanaṃ dasseti. Tadubhayanti dukkhaṃ, dukkhasamudayo ca. Yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvāti yaṃ nibbānaṃ maggassa ārammaṇapaccayaṭṭhena kāraṇabhūtaṃ āgamma. Ṭhānanti hi kāraṇaṃ vuccati tiṭṭhati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattatāyāti katvā. Tadubhayaṃ patvāti ca tadubhayavato puggalassa tadubhayassa patti viya vuttā. Puggalasseva hi ārammaṇakaraṇavasena nibbānappatti, na tadubhayassa. Apica patvāti pāpuṇanahetu, puggalassa ārammaṇakaraṇavasena samāpajjanatoti attho. Asamānakattuke viya hi samānakattukepi tvāpaccayassa hetvatthe pavatti saddasatthesu pākaṭā. Appavattīti appavattinimittaṃ ‘‘na pavattati tadubhayametenā’’ti katvā, appavattiṭṭhānaṃ vā ‘‘na pavattati tadubhayametthā’’ti katvā, anena ca ‘‘dukkhaṃ nirujjhati ettha, etenāti vā dukkhanirodho’’ti nibbacanaṃ dasseti, dukkhasamudayassa pana gahaṇaṃ taṃnibbattakassa nirujjhanato tassāpi nirujjhanadassanatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nibbānapadeyeva ta-saddo nivattatīti ayaṃ-saddo puna vutto. Sabbanāmikañhi padaṃ vuttassa vā liṅgassa gāhakaṃ, vuccamānassa vā. Tassāti dukkhanirodhassa. Sampāpakanti sacchikaraṇavasena sammadeva pāpakaṃ, etena ca ‘‘dukkhanirodhaṃ gamayati, gacchati vā etāyāti dukkhanirodhagāminī, sāyeva paṭipadā dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadā’’ti nibbacanaṃ dasseti.
“以烦恼之力”:即依称为漏的烦恼之力。为了以漏的同义语来显示那(义),他再次说,因此这里没有重复过失,这是意旨。因为同义语教示的不存在,确实是佛陀独有的法,这是前面已说的义理。难道不是漏只有苦谛的同义语,而没有其余谛的同义语吗?那么,为什么在依自性显示了诸谛之后,又以烦恼之力依同义语再次显示而这样说呢?确实如此,然而由于其余诸谛与彼(漏)相关联,因此也能获得彼(漏)之集等的同义语,应知是因此而这样说。因为作为苦谛同义语的漏,与漏之集等是相关联的,所以也可结合为显示诸谛。而且,这里由于是以“为了漏尽智”为开端,所以只取漏,而不取其余烦恼,因为其余烦恼并非如此被开端,应如此看待。同样地,以“心从欲漏也解脱”等(长部1.248;中部1.433;3.19),正是以漏解脱为首而说了一切烦恼的解脱。以“他如实了知‘这是苦’”等,这里所说的是世间观与出世间道混合的道,因为世间观与出世间道是混合的,所以说“他说了与观一起达到顶点的道”。以“了知者、见者”,由于四谛的了知即能成就四种作用,所以说了三遍知、证悟、修习的现观,而断的现观则依其余,以“解脱”而说,因此说“显示了道刹那”。因为四种作用正是由四谛的了知而成就。如所说:“诸比丘,我于前所未闻的法中,生起了眼:‘这苦圣谛应遍知’等”(相应部5.1081;大品15;无碍解道2.29)。这是复注中的方法——“了知者、见者”是原因的说明,结合为“以了知为因、以见为因,心从欲漏也解脱”等。虽然这里了知、见的作用与解脱的作用是同时的,然而诸法即使是同时的,其缘与缘所生的关系也可依俱生等之理而获得,因此有人说,这是显示了含有原因意味的差别。显示巴利原文
Kilesavasenāti āsavasaṅkhātakilesavasena. Tadeva āsavapariyāyena dassento puna āha, tasmā na ettha punaruttidosoti adhippāyo. Pariyāyadesanābhāvo nāma hi āveṇiko buddhadhammoti heṭṭhā vuttovāyamattho. Nanu ca āsavānaṃ dukkhasaccapariyāyova atthi, na sesasaccapariyāyo, atha kasmā sarūpato dassitasaccāniyeva kilesavasena pariyāyato puna dassento evamāhāti vuttanti? Saccaṃ, taṃsambandhattā pana sesasaccānaṃ taṃsamudayādipariyāyopi labbhatīti katvā evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Dukkhasaccapariyāyabhūtaāsavasambandhāni hi āsavasamudayādīnīti, saccāni dassentotipi yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyā’’ti āraddhattā cettha āsavānameva gahaṇaṃ, na sesakilesānaṃ tathā anāraddhattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘kāmāsavāpi cittaṃ vimuccatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.248; ma. ni. 1.433; 3.19) āsavavimuttasīseneva sabbakilesavimutti vuttā. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’tiādinā missakamaggova idha kathito lokiyavipassanāya lokuttaramaggassa missakattāti vuttaṃ ‘‘saha vipassanāya koṭippattaṃ maggaṃ kathesī’’ti. ‘‘Jānato passato’’ti iminā tayopi pariññāsacchikiriyābhāvanābhisamayā vuttā catusaccapajānanāya eva catukiccasiddhito, pahānābhisamayo pana pārisesato ‘‘vimuccatī’’ti iminā vuttoti āha ‘‘maggakkhaṇaṃ dassetī’’ti. Cattāri hi kiccāni catusaccapajānanāya eva siddhāni. Yathāha ‘‘taṃ kho panidaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ pariññātanti me bhikkhave pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhuṃ udapādī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 15; paṭi. ma. 2.29). Ayaṃ aṭṭhakathāmuttako nayo – jānato passatoti ca hetuniddeso, ‘‘jānanahetu passanahetu kāmāsavāpi cittaṃ vimuccatī’’tiādinā yojanā. Kāmañcettha jānanapassanakiriyānaṃ, vimuccanakiriyāya ca samānakālatā, tathāpi dhammānaṃ samānakālikānampi paccayapaccayuppannatā sahajātādikoṭiyā labbhatīti, hetugabbhavisesanatādassanametantipi vadanti.
此处,以有漏的执取为例,如同对‘有贪’一样,对‘有见’也同样含摄,因此应知也包含了见漏。然而,现在有些地方出现‘心从见漏也解脱’的文句,应知那并非古来所有,而是后来因疏忽而写入的。因为在《怖畏经》注释等(中部注1.54)多处也是如此注释的。此处,虽然经文中谛的证悟是就不特定的人、不特定的时间而说,但在现观之时,依其当下性,而作了‘如是了知者、如是见者’的现在时说明。再者,那对于某人而言,从道刹那之后直至现在,固然属于过去时,但应知其最初成为过去时,是由果刹那而了知的,因此说‘以“已解脱者”这一句,显示了果刹那’。所谓‘观察智’,即指如此所说的果观察智。然而,以取彼果观察智,由于彼不离的缘故,理应含摄其余无余的观察智,或者取一部分,因为即使观察不圆满也可能存在。以‘生已尽’等句,乃至以‘不再有如此状态’等句为最终。彼,即观察智。地,即转起之处。难道‘已解脱者,已解脱’所说的果,不就是彼观察智的所缘之地吗?那么,为何以‘生已尽’等来显示彼之地呢?为了澄清这一问难,而说了‘因此’等。因为,以已断烦恼……”
},
{显示巴利原文
Bhavāsavaggahaṇena cettha bhavarāgassa viya bhavadiṭṭhiyāpi samavarodhoti diṭṭhāsavassāpi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo, adhunā pana ‘‘diṭṭhāsavāpi cittaṃ vimuccatī’’ti katthaci pāṭho dissati, so na porāṇo, pacchā pamādalikhitoti veditabbo. Bhayabheravasuttasaṃvaṇṇanādīsu (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.54) anekāsupi tatheva saṃvaṇṇitattā. Ettha ca kiñcāpi pāḷiyaṃ saccapaṭivedho aniyamitapuggalassa aniyamitakālavasena vutto, tathāpi abhisamayakāle tassa paccuppannataṃ upādāya ‘‘evaṃ jānato evaṃ passato’’ti vattamānakālaniddeso kato, so ca kāmaṃ kassaci maggakkhaṇato paraṃ yāvajjatanā atītakāliko eva, sabbapaṭhamaṃ panassa atītakālikattaṃ phalakkhaṇena veditabbanti āha ‘‘vimuttasminti iminā phalakkhaṇa’’nti. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇanti phalapaccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ tathā ceva vuttattā. Taggahaṇena pana tadavinābhāvato sesāni niravasesāni gahetabbāni, ekadesāni vā aparipuṇṇāyapi paccavekkhaṇāya sambhavato. ‘‘Khīṇā jātī’’tiādīhi padehi ‘‘nāparaṃ itthattāyā’’ti padapariyosānehi. Tassāti paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa. Bhūminti pavattiṭṭhānaṃ. Nanu ca ‘‘vimuttasmiṃ vimutta’’nti vuttaṃ phalameva tassa ārammaṇasaṅkhātā bhūmi, atha kathaṃ ‘‘khīṇā jātī’’tiādīhi tassa bhūmidassananti codanaṃ sodhetuṃ ‘‘tena hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇena vijjamānassāpi kammassa āyatiṃ appaṭisandhikabhāvato ‘‘khīṇā jātī’’ti pajānāti, yasmā ca maggapaccavekkhaṇādīhi ‘‘vusitaṃ brahmacariya’’ntiādīni pajānāti, tasmā ‘‘khīṇā jātī’’tiādīhi tassa bhūmidassananti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Tena ñāṇenā’’ti hi yathārutato, avinābhāvato ca gahitena pañcavidhena paccavekkhaṇañāṇenāti attho.
在“生已尽”这里,为了令善听者容易理解,他如同面对质问者一般,发起了问难:“然而,是哪一种……”等。在说明了发起问难的意图之后,为了给出答复,他说了“他的过去生,尚未……”等。因为,正是将下面要说的“他的过去生,尚未……因为存在”等义理放在心中,才发起了这个问难。其中,“他的过去生,尚未尽”:即那位比丘的过去生,尚未由道修习而尽。对此,说了理由:“因为先前已尽”,意即由于在道修习之前,就已依灭尽而尽了。未来生,也非由道修习而尽,应如此结合。对此,说了理由:“因为对未来没有努力”,这是仅取未来性的一般性,以方便显示问难的意图而说,并非指特定的未来,意思是对于未来,没有以道修习来断除的努力。因为努力只对存在的事物可能,对不存在的事物则不可能,这是所说之义。然而,这里所指的是特定的未来,对于断除它,努力也是可以获得的。因此,他说了“然而,对于道的……”等。所谓特定的未来,是指在未修习道时,应会生起的下一生。现在生,也非由道修习而尽,应如此结合。对此,说了理由:“因为存在”,意即由于包含在一有之中而存在。因为,在各处有中,最初结生的特相即是生。然而,以“然而……”等,应知是显示了:由道修习,以断除烦恼因的方式,只有未来生是尽的。在“一蕴、四蕴、五蕴有”中,取三有,是为了依前述之理,显示无余地尽了生;这里前两句有省略后词。在“一蕴、四蕴、五蕴的差别”中,也是同样的道理。“那,他……”等,是对于“他如何了知那?”这一问难的澄清之语。其中,“那”,即如前所说的生。“他”,即漏尽比丘。“观察后”,即在了知之前,显示了已断烦恼的观察。如此,应知由观察的次第,成就了那样的了知。正是为了阐明观察的次第,而说了“了知者,了知”这两个现在时的词,意思是:成为了知者之后,或以了知为因而了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Khīṇā jātī’’ti ettha sotujanānaṃ suviññāpanatthaṃ parammukhā viya codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti ‘‘katamā panā’’tiādinā. Yena panādhippāyena codanā katā, tadadhippāyaṃ pakāsetvā parihāraṃ vattukāmo ‘‘na tāvassā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Na tāva…pe… vijjamānattā’’ti vakkhamānameva hi atthaṃ manasi katvā ayaṃ codanā samuṭṭhāpitā, tattha na tāvassa atītājāti khīṇāti assa bhikkhuno atītā jāti, na tāva maggabhāvanāya khīṇā. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘pubbeva khīṇattā’’ti, maggabhāvanāya purimatarameva nirujjhanavasena khīṇattāti adhippāyo. Na anāgatā assa jāti khīṇā maggabhāvanāyāti yojanā. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘anāgate vāyāmābhāvato’’ti, idañca anāgatabhāvasāmaññameva gahetvā lesena codanādhippāyavibhāvanatthaṃ vadati, na anāgatavisesaṃ anāgate maggabhāvanāya khepanapayogābhāvatoti attho. Vijjamāneyeva hi payogo sambhavati, na avijjamāneti vuttaṃ hoti. Anāgataviseso panettha adhippeto, tassa ca khepane vāyāmopi labbhateva. Tenāha ‘‘yā pana maggassā’’tiādi. Anāgatavisesoti ca abhāvite magge uppajjanāraho anantarajātibhedo vuccati. Na paccuppannā assa jāti khīṇā maggabhāvanāyāti yojanā. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘vijjamānattā’’ti, ekabhavapariyāpannatāya vijjamānattāti attho. Tattha tattha bhave paṭhamābhinibbattilakkhaṇā hi jāti. ‘‘Yā panā’’tiādinā pana maggabhāvanāya kilesahetuvināsanamukhena anāgatajātiyā eva khīṇabhāvo pakāsitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ekacatupañcavokārabhavesūti bhavattayaggahaṇaṃ vuttanayena anavasesato jātiyā khīṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ, pubbapadadvayepettha uttarapadalopo. Ekacatupañcakkhandhappabhedāti etthāpi eseva nayo. ‘‘Taṃ so’’tiādi ‘‘kathañca naṃ pajānātī’’ti codanāya sodhanāvacanaṃ. Tattha tanti yathāvuttaṃ jātiṃ. Soti khīṇāsavo bhikkhu. Paccavekkhitvāti pajānanāya pubbabhāge pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇadassanaṃ. Evañca katvā paccavekkhaṇaparamparāya tathā pajānanā siddhāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paccavekkhaṇantaravibhāvanatthameva hi ‘‘jānanto pajānātī’’ti vattamānavacanadvayaṃ vuttaṃ, jānanto hutvā, jānanahetu vā pajānāti nāmāti attho.
所谓‘梵行住’,从殊胜的解说而言,即是道梵行的产生,故说‘已遍住’,意为从各方面无余而住、已完全奉行。为何他以过去时来了知此呢?以提问的方式而说‘因为与凡夫善士……’等。因为凡夫善士也具备前文所述的特征,在《施分别经》等中确实说为‘为证须陀洹果而修行者’。所谓‘住者’,是指正在住者,而非已住者。因此,由于是已住者。难道经文中不是以‘他如实了知“此是苦”’等只说了正见,而未提及正思惟等吗?那为何说‘于四谛中以四道依遍知、断、证、修而完成了十六种作用’?这是就八支道的共通性而说的。因为正思惟等也依四种作用的成就而转起。当正见于四谛中依遍知等作用的成就而转起时,正思惟等其余诸支在苦谛中唯随顺遍知现观而转起,在其余谛中它们依断现观等而转起,这是显而易见的。于苦灭道中,依次的遍知、证、修也仅是为了集谛的断除,将它们归入此目的,为了阐明‘所作已作’一词的意旨,而说‘因此’等。以‘苦根已断’此句,也以另一种方式阐明了同一道理。显示巴利原文
Brahmacariyavāso nāma ukkaṭṭhaniddesato maggabrahmacariyassa nibbattanamevāti āha ‘‘parivuttha’’nti, samantato niravasesena vasitaṃ pariciṇṇanti attho. Kasmā panidaṃ so atītakālavasena pajānātīti anuyogenāha ‘‘puthujjanakalyāṇakena hi saddhi’’ntiādi. Puthujjanakalyāṇakopi hi heṭṭhā vuttalakkhaṇo sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno nāma dakkhiṇavibhaṅgasuttādīsu (ma. ni. 3.379) tathā eva vuttattā. Vasanti nāmāti vasantā eva nāma honti, na vutthavāsā. Tasmāti vutthavāsattā. Nanu ca ‘‘so ‘idaṃ dukkha’’nti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’tiādinā pāḷiyaṃ sammādiṭṭhiyeva vuttā, na sammāsaṅkappādayo, atha kasmā ‘‘catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanāvasena soḷasavidhaṃ kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpita’’nti aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassa sādhāraṇato vuttanti? Sammāsaṅkappādīnampi catukiccasādhanavasena pavattito. Sammādiṭṭhiyā hi catūsu saccesu pariññādikiccasādhanavasena pavattamānāya sammāsaṅkappādīnampi sesānaṃ dukkhasacce pariññābhisamayānuguṇāva pavatti, itarasaccesu ca nesaṃ pahānābhisamayādivasena pavatti pākaṭā evāti. Dukkhanirodhamaggesu yathākkamaṃ pariññāsacchikiriyābhāvanāpi yāvadeva samudayapahānatthāti katvā tadattheyeva tāsaṃ pakkhipanena ‘‘kataṃ karaṇīya’’nti padassa adhippāyaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dukkhamūlaṃ samucchinna’’nti imināpi tadeva pakārantarena vibhāveti.
为何此处以过去时叙述“所作已作”?答言“是为凡夫善士等”等。“如是”即此类行相,“如是性”即此性,由“为此性故”一语显示;而“āya”声表与格义,意为“为此目的故”。这些行相即作为圣道作用的遍知等,于此正是所指,故说“如是十六种作用性故”。因为观察道时,这些作用由道之威力而显著现前,当道被观察时,其作用的观察亦易于成就。如是,从共通性说明了于四道中各依四种作用而成十六种作用性之后,在这些作用中,断除实为首要,因为其余的遍知等皆以彼为目的,为特加阐明此义,故说“或为烦恼灭尽性故”。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha ‘‘kataṃ karaṇīya’’nti atītaniddeso katoti āha ‘‘puthujjanakalyāṇakādayo’’tiādi. Ime pakārā itthaṃ, tabbhāvo itthattanti dasseti ‘‘itthabhāvāyā’’ti iminā, āya-saddo ca sampadānatthe, tadatthāyāti attho. Te pana pakārā ariyamaggabyāpārabhūtā pariññādayo idhādhippetāti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ soḷasakiccabhāvāyā’’ti. Te hi maggaṃ paccavekkhato maggānubhāvena pākaṭā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti magge paccavekkhite taṃkiccapaccavekkhaṇāyapi sukhena siddhito. Evaṃ sādhāraṇato catūsu maggesu paccekaṃ catukiccavasena soḷasakiccabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā tesupi kiccesu pahānameva padhānaṃ tadatthattā itaresaṃ pariññādīnanti tadeva visesato pakāsetuṃ ‘‘kilesakkhayabhāvāya vā’’ti āha.
再者,应当了知:前一种方式是根据观察的次第,显示了观察的方法;现在由于断除为首要,为单独显示已断烦恼的观察方法,故作此说。在第二种解释中,“如是”指此类行相,“如是性”即此行相之性;而此处的“āya”声为与格语之分位,作从格义,以“从此性”显示。然而若说“从此如是类别”,则类别与具足类别者,在意义上并无差别。因为如果真有差别,那此者的类别便不应说是此,故“如是”一词是表示具足类别者。虽然意义上无差别,但依支分与有支等假立而有差别,故可成立某种差别之义,因此“如是性”一词即用来表示类别。这是此复注及《中部复注》、《律复注》等中所传的方法。显示巴利原文
Apica purimanayena paccavekkhaṇaparamparāya paccavekkhaṇavidhiṃ dassetvā idāni padhānattā pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇavidhimeva dassetuṃ evaṃ vuttantipi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dutiyavikappe ayaṃ pakāro itthaṃ, tabbhāvo itthattaṃ, āyasaddo cettha sampadānavacanassa kāriyabhūto nissakkattheti dasseti ‘‘itthabhāvato’’ti iminā. ‘‘Imasmā evaṃ pakārā’’ti pana vadanto pakāro nāma pakāravantato atthato bhedo natthi. Yadi hi so bhedo assa, tasseva so pakāro na siyā, tasmā itthaṃ-saddo pakāravantavācako, atthato pana abhedepi sati avayavāvayavitādinā bhedaparikappanāvasena siyā kiñci bhedamatthaṃ, tasmā itthattasaddo pakāravācakoti dasseti. Ayamidha ṭīkāyaṃ, (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.248) majjhimāgamaṭīkāvinayaṭīkādīsu (sārattha. ṭī. 1.14) ca āgatanayo.
然而,通达文句者依据转起之相作如是说:“如是”意谓此类别属于彼者,即具有类别者。接尾词的派生用法诚然多种多样。“如是性”即彼之性,亦即类别。为显示该意义,故说“从此性、从此如是类别”。第一种解释中,此理亦相应适用。此处“现存蕴相续”是自性之说。“后”指未来。“然而这些五蕴已遍知而住立”,这是现在的文句,但在《中部复注》、《律复注》及此复注中引述的文句是“然而这些称为最后有的五蕴已遍知而住立”。其中,“称为最后有”是就同一相续而说为最后有。“已遍知”即由道断知。“住立”即无依止、无余而住立。由此显示,那些诸蕴因无遍知因,故为无依止。依止实以未遍知为因,此因既无,依止即无。如经所说:“诸比丘,若于团食有贪、有喜、有渴爱,则识住立、增长”等。以“如断根之树”阐明喻意:譬如断根之树,因无根故无依止、无余而住立;那些诸蕴亦复如是,因无遍知因。这便是此处譬喻的对应。最后心灭,即般涅槃心灭。无取,即无燃料。至于“无施设性”:当那些诸蕴存在时,依他们而得的假立施设得以成立;他们既无,彼施设亦无,即无现存的施设,故将达至无施设性。施设显示巴利原文
Saddavidū pana pavattinimittānusārena evamicchanti – ayaṃ pakāro assāti itthaṃ, pakāravanto. Vicitrā hi taddhitavutti. Tassa bhāvo itthattaṃ, pakāro, imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘itthabhāvato imasmā evaṃ pakārā’’ti āhāti. Paṭhamavikappepi yathārahaṃ esa nayo. Idāni vattamānakhandhasantānāti sarūpakathanaṃ. Aparanti anāgataṃ. ‘‘Ime pana pañcakkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhantī’’ti idāni pāṭho, ‘‘ime pana carimakattabhāvasaṅkhātā pañcakkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhantī’’ti pana majjhimāgamavinayaṭīkādīsu, (sārattha. ṭī. 1.14) idha ca ṭīkāyaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.248) ulliṅgitapāṭho. Tattha carimakattabhāvasaṅkhātāti ekasantatipariyāpannabhāvena pacchimakattabhāvakathitā. Pariññātāti maggena paricchijja ñātā. Tiṭṭhantīti appatiṭṭhā anokāsā tiṭṭhanti. Etena hi tesaṃ khandhānaṃ apariññāmūlābhāvena apatiṭṭhābhāvaṃ dasseti. Apariññāmūlikā hi patiṭṭhā, tadabhāvato pana appatiṭṭhābhāvo. Yathāha ‘‘kabaḷīkāre ce bhikkhave āhāre atthi rāgo, atthi nandī, atthi taṇhā, patiṭṭhitaṃ tattha viññāṇaṃ viruḷha’’ntiādi (saṃ. ni. 2.64; kathā. 296; mahāni. 7). Tadupamaṃ vibhāveti ‘‘chinnamūlakā rukkhā viyā’’ti iminā, yathā chinnamūlakā rukkhā mūlābhāvato appatiṭṭhā anokāsā tiṭṭhanti, evametepi apariññāmūlābhāvatoti. Ayamettha opammasaṃsandanā. Carimakacittanirodhenāti parinibbānacittanirodhena. Anupādānoti anindhano. Apaṇṇattikabhāvanti yesu khandhesu vijjamānesu tathā tathā parikappanāsiddhā paññatti, tadabhāvato tassāpi dharamānakapaññattiyā abhāvena apaññattikabhāvaṃ gamissanti. Paṇṇatti paññattīti hi atthato ekaṃ yathā ‘‘paññāsa paṇṇāsā’’ti. Paññāsa paṇṇādesoti hi akkharacintakā vadanti.
249 因大多收缩、成为收缩者,故称“saṅkhepa”,即指山顶。山顶从山脚渐次向上,多所收缩、收束。故说“于山顶”,意为于山峰。这是不同于复注的另一种解释:被收缩、以山性而被认知,故为“saṅkhepa”,即属于山的一处地方,意为在那属于山的地方。“无浊”即无混浊,而其无浊性因无泥而有,故说“无泥”。“sippi”者,虽无足而行,即是小型的“sippi”,将“kā”声转为“ya”声,亦称为“muttika”。“sambuka”者,流出、产生,亦俗称“水针、链”。于集合中大多用中性,故说“sippiyasambuka”。如是等。“sakkharā”即如拳量之石。“kathalā”即陶片。集合义的“ghaṭā”一词虽为阴性亦可见,故以“gumba”显示其词义,说为“ghaṭā”。显示巴利原文
249. Yebhuyyena saṃkhipati saṅkucito bhavatīti saṅkhepo, pabbatamatthakaṃ. Tañhi pabbatapādato anukkamena bahulaṃ saṃkhittaṃ saṅkucitaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘pabbatamatthake’’ti, pabbatasikhareti attho. Ayaṃ aṭṭhakathāmuttako nayo – saṅkhipīyati pabbatabhāvena gaṇīyatīti saṅkhepo, pabbatapariyāpanno padeso, tasmiṃ pabbatapariyāpanne padeseti atthoti. Anāviloti akālusiyo, sā cassa anāvilatā kaddamābhāvena hotīti āha ‘‘nikkaddamo’’ti. Sapati apadāpi samānā gacchatīti sippi, khuddakā sippi sippiyo kā-kārassa ya-kāraṃ katvā, yo ‘‘muttiko’’tipi vuccati. Savati pasavatīti sambuko, yaṃ ‘‘jalasutti, saṅkhalikā’’ti ca voharanti. Samāhāre yebhuyyato napuṃsakapayogoti vuttaṃ ‘‘sippiyasambuka’’nti. Evamīdisesu. Sakkharāti muṭṭhippamāṇā pāsāṇā. Kathalānīti kapālakhaṇḍāni. Samūhavācakassa ghaṭāsaddassa itthi liṅgassāpi dissanato ‘‘gumba’’nti padassatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘ghaṭā’’ti iminā.
虽然“‘贝壳、砗磲、砂石、鱼群,住立者与游动者’”,在此砂石唯是住立的,贝壳、砗磲与鱼群既是游动的也是住立的,即便如此,依伴随而行之理,则犹如一切皆在游动一般,为了显示如此宣说之义,故说“‘住立者与游动者’于此”等。其中,以“砂石唯是住立”等,依如其情形显示其义;以“然而犹如”等,则显示伴随而行之理。“然而”一词是表不悦,其义为“即便如此”。“间隔地”是指在众多母牛中,即使存在间隔站立的母牛。“母牛”即母牛们。“其余亦然”是指站立的与坐着的。依伴随而行之理,说为“游动的”。“唯是住立者等”中,此意趣为:贝壳、砗磲与鱼群的游动作用亦非绝对,而住立作用亦非一概,并非绝对唯是住立而从不游动,乃是取砂石(唯住立)而说贝壳、砗磲与鱼群亦为“住立者”,而非取他们之住立作用。取他们之游动作用,则应见此处省略了“亦”字而说为“游动的”。其余二者:以辞句将贝壳、砗磲与鱼群如是宣说。其余二者即贝壳、砗磲与鱼群。说为“游动的”中,取他们之住立作用,则省略“亦”字为“住立者亦”,注疏师于此显示了伴随而行之理,而法护长老则显示了随所得之理。因为说:“此伴随之行有何用?此处应见随所得之取。即依砂石之理为‘住立者’,依贝壳、砗磲与鱼群之理为‘住立者与游动者’,应作如是结合”(长部尼柯耶注疏1.249)。伴随而行之理,是对于不可得之义,仅依如伴随者之宣说而立;随所得之理,是对于所宣说之共通义,依其存在之可能而作分别,是故二理皆符顺。显示巴利原文
Kāmañca ‘‘sippiyasambukampi sakkharakathalampi macchagumbampi tiṭṭhantampi carantampī’’ti ettha sakkharakathalaṃ tiṭṭhatiyeva, sippiyasambukamacchagumbāni carantipi tiṭṭhantipi, tathāpi sahacaraṇanayena sabbāneva caranti viya evaṃ vuttanti atthaṃ dassento ‘‘tiṭṭhantampi carantampīti etthā’’tiādimāha. Tattha hi ‘‘sakkharakathalaṃ tiṭṭhatiyevā’’tiādinā yathāsambhavamatthaṃ dasseti, ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādinā pana sahacaraṇanayaṃ. Pana-saddo arucisaṃsūcane, tathāpīti attho. Antarantarāti bahūnaṃ gāvīnamantarantarā ṭhitāsu gāvīsu vijjamānāsupi. Gāvoti gāviyo. Itarāpīti ṭhitāpi nisinnāpi. Carantīti vuccanti sahacaraṇanayena. Tiṭṭhantamevātiādīsu ayamadhippāyo – sippiyasambukamacchagumbānaṃ caraṇakiriyāyapi yogato ṭhānakiriyāya anekantattā ekantato tiṭṭhantameva na kadācipi carantaṃ sakkharakathalaṃ upādāya sippiyasambukampi macchagumbampi tiṭṭhantanti vuttaṃ, na tu tesaṃ ṭhānakiriyamupādāya. Tesaṃ pana caraṇakiriyamupādāya ‘‘carantampī’’ti pi-saddalopo hettha daṭṭhabbo. Itarampi dvayanti sippiyasambukamacchagumbaṃ padavasena evaṃ vuttaṃ. Itarañca dvayanti sippiyasambukamacchagumbameva. Carantanti vuttanti etthāpi tesaṃ ṭhānakiriyamupādāya ‘‘tiṭṭhantampī’’ti pi-saddalopo, evamettha aṭṭhakathācariyehi sahacaraṇanayo dassito, ācariyadhammapālattherena pana yathālābhanayopi. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘kiṃ vā imāya sahacariyāya, yathālābhaggahaṇaṃ panettha daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sakkharakathalassa hi vasena tiṭṭhantanti, sippisambukassa macchagumbassa ca vasena tiṭṭhantampi carantampīti evaṃ yojanā kātabbā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.249). Alabbhamānassāpi atthassa sahayogīvasena desanāmattaṃ pati sahacaraṇanayo, sādhāraṇato desitassāpi atthassa sambhavavasena vivecanaṃ pati yathālābhanayoti ubhayathāpi yujjati.
于此亦应如此了知:在注疏中,以“砂石唯是住立,其余既有游动亦有住立”,显示了随所得之理,因为随其情形分别了义理;以“然而犹如”等,则显示了伴随而行之理,因为阐明了即使不可得之义,亦如伴随者般仅作宣说。因此,此二理皆无可责难,以义理符顺故;且亦应见注疏中亦可作如是显示。“于彼”等为譬喻的连结。岸边指水池之岸。所谓水池,在某些地方也指海,如“彼处水池甚深,海水是流水”等(《长部》注3.278)。在某些地方也指水库,如“彼处水池名为大地,云从彼降雨,雨从彼倾注”等(《长部》注3.281),此处亦唯指水库。因依水而隐秘眼等,故为水池,将o音转为a音。而明音者则说:“带水故为水池”,此依词源之理。显示巴利原文
Evampettha vadanti – aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sakkharakathalaṃ tiṭṭhatiyeva, itarāni carantipi tiṭṭhantipī’’ti iminā yathālābhanayo dassito yathāsambhavaṃ atthassa vivecitattā, ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādinā pana sahacaraṇanayo alabbhamānassāpi atthassa sahayogīvasena desanāmattassa vibhāvitattāti , tadetampi anupavajjameva atthassa yuttattā, aṭṭhakathāyañca tathā dassanassāpi sambhavatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Tatthā’’tiādi upamāsaṃsandanaṃ. Tīreti udakarahadassa tīre. Udakarahado ca nāma katthaci samuddopi vuccati ‘‘rahadopi tattha gambhīro, samuddo saritodako’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.278). Katthaci jalāsayopi ‘‘rahadopi tattha dharaṇī nāma, yato meghā pavassanti, vassā yato patāyantī’’tiādīsu, (dī. ni. 3.281) idhāpi jalāsayoyeva. So hi udakavasena raho cakkhurahādikaṃ dadātīti udakarahado o-kārassa a-kāraṃ katvā. Saddavidū pana ‘‘udakaṃ haratīti udakarahado niruttinayenā’’ti vadanti.
从“至此”等语开始,是对显示第四禅之后的观智乃至如上所述之义所作的摄略。其中,“至此”即指“复次,大王,比丘如这些持其心……乃至……引心向智见”等经文,以此语次表明其范围。观智:即名为智见的观智。又在随后以分别计数显示第四禅之后,于应解说的三种理趣中,也显示了第三理最为契合,应如此看待。意所成智虽然在《清净道论》中被说为神变等所摄,但因此处巴利文将其单独开示,故应各别理解;而此说示是为了各别证见沙门果,应如此看待。未来分智与业果智二者,由于在巴利文中属于未来,故说“由天眼而成”——因由天眼而成,执取天眼即已执取此二智,因为天眼智所含的未来分智与业果智,此二智皆为附属。天眼智:即以死生智之名所显示的天眼智。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettāvatā’’tiādinā catutthajjhānāntaraṃ dassitavipassanāñāṇato paṭṭhāya yathāvuttatthassa sampiṇḍanaṃ. Tattha ettāvatāti ‘‘puna caparaṃ mahārāja bhikkhu evaṃ samāhite citte…pe… ñāṇadassanāya cittaṃ abhinīharatī’’tiādinā ettakena, etaparimāṇavantena vā vacanakkamena. Vipassanāñāṇanti ñāṇadassananāmena dassitaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ, tassa ca visuṃ gaṇanadassanena heṭṭhā catutthajjhānānantaraṃ vattabbatākāraṇesu tīsu nayesu tatiyanayasseva yuttatarabhāvopi dīpitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Manomayañāṇassa iddhividhasamavarodhitabhāve visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.379 ādayo) vuttepi idha pāḷiyaṃ visuṃ desitattā visuṃ eva gahaṇaṃ, tathā desanā ca pāṭiyekkasandiṭṭhikasāmaññaphalatthāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Anāgataṃsañāṇayathākammūpagañāṇadvayassa pāḷiyaṃ anāgatattā ‘‘dibbacakkhuvasena nipphanna’’nti vuttaṃ, tabbasena nipphannattā taggahaṇeneva gahitaṃ taṃ ñāṇadvayanti vuttaṃ hoti. Dibbacakkhussa hi anāgataṃsañāṇaṃ, yathākammūpagañāṇañcāti dvepi ñāṇāni paribhaṇḍāni hontīti. Dibbacakkhuñāṇanti cutūpapātañāṇanāmena dassitaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ.
然而,由于全部十智的所缘分别未在《清净道论》中提及,为显示其中未来诸智的所缘分别,故说“于彼”等语。“于彼”:指于十智。“于此”:指于此所缘分别中,或于此十智中。依地之差别而有小与无量,依时之差别而有过去、未来、现在,依相续之差别而有内与外,因此观智有七种所缘。因为观智的所缘分别唯依小、无量等三转,而非依道所缘的三转。唯所化之色处:即唯以自己所化之色为所缘,或者也可理解为唯存在于自己所化意所成身中的色处。因为此智在化作意所成身时,唯缘色处而生起,故作是说,并非因为那里没有香处等。由于没有任何色聚能脱离香处等,所以所化之色是圆满的。因此说“小、现在、外所缘”,依次依地、时、相续的差别而成三种所缘,这便是其义。漏尽智虽同以涅槃为独一无二所缘,但为了依小等三转显示其为三所缘,故说“无量、外、不可说所缘”。因为依小等三转而成为无量所缘,依内等转而成为外所缘,依过去等转而成为不可说所缘。显示巴利原文
Sabbesaṃ pana dasannaṃ ñāṇānaṃ ārammaṇavibhāgassa visuddhimagge anāgatattā tatthānāgatañāṇānaṃ ārammaṇavibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tesa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tesanti dasannaṃ ñāṇānaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ ārammaṇavibhāge, tesu vā dasasu ñāṇesu. Bhūmibhedato parittamahaggataṃ, kālabhedato atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ, santānabhedato ajjhattabahiddhā cāti vipassanāñāṇaṃ sattavidhārammaṇaṃ. Parittārammaṇāditikattayeneva hi tassa ārammaṇavibhāgo, na maggārammaṇatikena. Nimmitarūpāyatanamattamevāti attanā nimmitaṃ rūpārammaṇameva, attanā vā nimmite manomaye kāye vijjamānaṃ rūpāyatanamevātipi yujjati. Idañhi tassa ñāṇassa abhinimmiyamāne manomaye kāye rūpāyatanamevārabbha pavattanato vuttaṃ, na pana tattha gandhāyatanādīnamabhāvato . Na hi rūpakalāpo gandhāyatanādivirahito atthīti sabbathā parinipphannameva nimmitarūpaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘parittapaccuppannabahiddhārammaṇa’’nti, yathākkamaṃ bhūmikālasantānabhedato tibbidhārammaṇanti attho. Nibbānavasena ekadhammārammaṇampi samānaṃ āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ parittārammaṇāditikavasena tividhārammaṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘appamāṇabahiddhānavattabbārammaṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Tañhi parittatikavasena appamāṇārammaṇaṃ, ajjhattikavasena bahiddhārammaṇaṃ, atītatikavasena navattabbārammaṇañca hoti.
“更上”与“更殊胜”是同义词,故以“最胜”一词说明。如同宝殿以宝顶为顶,阿罗汉果即是顶,为无上之部分;因世尊的教法以阿罗汉果为究竟,故说“以阿罗汉顶”。以“于解脱”一词令教法圆满结束——即如同宝殿以宝顶为顶,以阿罗汉顶圆满结束这部摧破外道邪见、粉碎种种诡诈虚言等邪命、庄严三学、阐明极精严之行、以禅定与神通等上人法为庄严、以十四种大沙门果为装饰、不共于他教的《沙门果》教法;意思是阿罗汉果已被教导。显示巴利原文
Uttaritarasaddo, paṇītatarasaddo ca pariyāyoti dasseti ‘‘seṭṭhatara’’nti iminā. Ratanakūṭaṃ viya kūṭāgārassa arahattaṃ kūṭaṃ uttamaṅgabhūtaṃ bhagavato desanāya arahattapariyosānattāti āha ‘‘arahattanikūṭenā’’ti. Desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesīti titthakaramataharavibhāviniṃ nānāvidhakuhanalapanādimicchājīvaviddhaṃsiniṃ tividhasīlālaṅkataparamasallekhapaṭipattiparidīpiniṃ jhānābhiññādiuttarimanussadhammavibhūsiniṃ cuddasavidhamahāsāmaññphalapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ sāmaññaphaladesanaṃ ratanāgāraṃ viya ratanakūṭena arahattakūṭena niṭṭhāpesi ‘‘vimuttasmi’’nti iminā, arahattaphalassa desitattāti attho.
阿阇世王优婆塞性表白之论释显示巴利原文
Ajātasattuupāsakattapaṭivedanākathāvaṇṇanā
250 至此,已对世尊所开示的《沙门果经》作了义理注释。现在,为了也对结集者们所结集的“如是说已”等经文作义理注释,首先为显示关联而说“国王”等语。其中,“于彼彼”指于各各沙门果,或于经文句处。“作”即行为,“善哉”的行为如此,例如“善哉,世尊!善哉,善逝!”等表达方式。“初中后”指教法的初分、中分、后分。恭敬、尊重地听闻后,“思惟已”在此是表示先时动作之语。我长久以来向众多沙门、婆罗门询问这些问题,确实长久以来如此询问,却如捣谷壳般未得任何精髓——这是为了显示关联。同样,那位……(中略)……解答的世尊,其功德成就,啊!真是如此。我不知十力者的功德威力,长久以来确实被欺诳了。所谓“被欺诳”,即是被无明所欺诳、所覆障,被愚痴所遮蔽,这是所要表达的意思。因此说“不知十力者的功德威力”。因为总说“沙门”时,便会确立于殊胜之中。思惟之后而表露,这是为了显示关联。即使有能力跳跃,也可能因激动之喜而不跳跃,故说“被五种喜所触之身”。“被触之身”意为被接触之身,并非被遍满之身,因为并非一切喜都能遍满。那是指自己净信的表露,以及优婆塞性的表白。由显示巴利原文
250. Ettāvatā bhagavatā desitassa sāmaññaphalasuttassa atthavaṇṇanaṃ katvā idāni dhammasaṅgāhakehi saṅgītassa ‘‘evaṃ vutte’’tiādipāṭhassapi atthavaṇṇanaṃ karonto paṭhamaṃ sambandhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘rājā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sāmaññaphale, suttapadese vā. Karaṇaṃ kāro, sādhu iti kāro tathā, ‘‘sādhu bhagavā, sādhu sugatā’’tiādinā taṃ pavattento. Ādimajjhapariyosānanti desanāya ādiñca majjhañca pariyosānañca. Sakkaccaṃ sādaraṃ gāravaṃ sutvā, ‘‘cintetvā’’ti ettha idaṃ pubbakālakiriyāvacanaṃ. Ime pañhe puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇe pucchanto ahaṃ ciraṃ vata amhi, evaṃ pucchantopi ahaṃ thuse koṭṭento viya kañci sāraṃ nālatthanti yojanā. Tathā yo…pe… vissajjesi, tassa bhagavato guṇasampadā aho vata. Dasabalassa guṇānubhāvaṃ ajānanto ahaṃ vañcito suciraṃ vata amhīti. Vañcitoti ca aññāṇena vañcito āvaṭṭito, mohena paṭicchādito amhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘dasabalassa guṇānubhāvaṃ ajānanto’’ti. Sāmaññajotanā hi visese avatiṭṭhati. Cintetvā āvikarontoti sambandho. Ullaṅghanasamatthāyapi ubbegapītiyā anullaṅghanampi siyāti āha ‘‘pañcavidhāya pītiyā phuṭasarīro’’ti. Phuṭasarīroti ca phusitasarīroti attho, na byāpitasarīroti sabbāya pītiyā abyāpitattā. Tanti attano pasādassa āvikaraṇaṃ, upāsakattapavedanañca. Āraddhaṃ dhammasaṅgāhakehi.
“已过”即已超越、已离去,离去之状态即是灭尽,故说“于灭尽中见”。正如经文所说:“初夜已过”。“更已过”即极其可爱、令心悦意,如此即是美好、善妙,故说“于美好中”。显示巴利原文
Abhikkantāti atikkantā vigatā, vigatabhāvo ca khayo evāti āha ‘‘khaye dissatī’’ti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo’’ti. Abhikkantataroti ativiya kantataro manoramo, tādiso ca sundaro bhaddako nāmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘sundare’’ti.
“谁为我……”等偈颂出自《天宫事》。其中,“谁”指天、龙、夜叉、乾闼婆等之中的哪一位。“我”即我的。“足”指双足,此为词性的转变。“以神通”即以这些天神通。“以名声”即以这些随从与眷属。“辉耀”即照耀、闪耀。“以极可爱”即极其可爱、令人喜爱,亦即极其美丽之意。“以色”即以肤色、身体色泽的光辉。“照耀一切方”即照耀所有十方。如同月亮、如同太阳,作一片光明、一片光亮,谁在礼敬?这是为了显示关联。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ko me’’tiādi gāthā vimānavatthumhi (vi. va. 857). Tattha koti devanāgayakkhagandhabbādīsu katamo. Meti mama. Pādānīti pāde, liṅgavipariyāyoyaṃ. Iddhiyāti īdisāya deviddhiyā. Yasasāti īdisena parivārena, parijanena ca. Jalanti jalanto vijjotamāno. Abhikkantenāti ativiya kantena kamanīyena, abhirūpenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vaṇṇenāti chavivaṇṇena sarīravaṇṇanibhāya. Sabbā obhāsayaṃ disāti sabbā dasapi disā obhāsayanto. Cando viya, sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekālokaṃ karonto ko vandatīti sambandho.
“极其美丽”即殊胜超群之色,具足庄严妙色。“随喜”即随喜、极度欢喜的状态。为何使用“随喜”一词?因此才说“因此”等。纵然“随喜”是合理的,为何此处说了两次?为了以解答质疑的方式界定重复的范畴,而说“在恐惧时、在愤怒时”等,指出以此语法特征为因,即依这些范畴而说。在显示了“善哉!善哉!尊者!”是以重复方式表达的意义后,为了界定其范畴而这样说,这也是一种关联,有些论师如是说。其中,“贼!贼!”“蛇!蛇!”等,是在恐惧时的重复;“射!射!”“打!打!”等,是在愤怒时;“善哉!善哉!”等,是在赞叹时;“去!去!”“割!割!”等,是在急促时;“来!来!”等,是在好奇时;“正觉者!正觉者!”如此思惟等,是在惊叹时;“请前进,尊者!请前进,尊者!”等,是在欢笑时;“独子在哪里?独子在哪里?”等,是在悲伤时;“啊!快乐!啊!快乐!”等,是在净信时。“且”字是未说之集合义,由此应知包含了谴责、不敬等。如“恶人!恶人!”等,是在谴责时;“漂亮家伙!漂亮家伙!”等,是在不敬时。如此,智者应在这九种及其他范畴中运用重复语,即应当连。显示巴利原文
Abhirūpeti atirekarūpe uḷāravaṇṇena sampannarūpe. Abbhānumodaneti abhianumodane abhippamoditabhāve. Kimatthiyaṃ ‘‘abbhānumodane’’ti vacananti āha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Yuttaṃ tāva hotu abbhānumodane, kasmā panāyaṃ dvikkhattuṃ vuttoti codanāya sodhanāmukhena āmeḍitavisayaṃ niddhāreti ‘‘bhaye kodhe’’tiādinā, iminā saddalakkhaṇena hetubhūtena evaṃ vutto, iminā ca iminā ca visayenāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Sādhu sādhu bhante’’ti āmeḍitavasena atthaṃ dassetvā tassa visayaṃ niddhārento evamāhātipi sambandhaṃ vadanti. Tattha ‘‘coro coro, sappo sappo’’tiādīsu bhaye āmeḍitaṃ, ‘‘vijjha vijjha, pahara paharā’’tiādīsu kodhe, ‘‘sādhu sādhū’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.127; 3.35; 5.1085) pasaṃsāyaṃ, ‘‘gaccha gaccha, lunāhi lunāhī’’tiādīsu turite, ‘‘āgaccha āgacchā’’tiādīsu kotūhale, ‘‘buddho buddhoti cintento’’tiādīsu (bu. vaṃ. 2.44) acchare, ‘‘abhikkamathāyasmanto abhikkamathāyasmanto’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.20; a. ni. 9.11) hāse, ‘‘kahaṃ ekaputtaka, kahaṃ ekaputtakā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.63) soke, ‘‘aho sukhaṃ, aho sukha’’ntiādīsu (udā. 20; dī. ni. 3.305) pasāde. Casaddo avuttasamuccayattho, tena garahā asammānādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Pāpo pāpo’’tiādīsu hi garahāyaṃ, ‘‘abhirūpaka abhirūpakā’’tiādīsu asammāne. Evametesu navasu, aññesu ca visayesu āmeḍitavacanaṃ budho kareyya, yojeyyāti attho. Āmeḍanaṃ punappunamuccāraṇaṃ, āmeḍīyati vā punappunamuccārīyatīti āmeḍitaṃ, ekassevatthassa dvattikkhattuṃ vacanaṃ. Meḍisaddo hi ummādane, āpubbo tu dvattikkhattumuccāraṇe vattati yathā ‘‘etadeva yadā vākya-māmeḍayati vāsavo’’ti.
如此,在显示了以重复方式说两次的情况之后,现在为了显示“这并非仅仅以重复方式说两次,而是基于各别义理的双重性”,而说“atha vā”等。在显示了以重复方式表达的意义之后,为了也显示以遍满方式表达的意义,有人说“他这样说”,但那并不合理,因为所遍满的对象并未被说两次。所谓遍满,是指出于遍满的愿望,以遍满者的属性、动作或事物,将所遍满的对象说两次或三次,例如“每个村庄都令人愉悦”。其中,“abhikkanta”意为应前往的、极美妙的,而那种状态即是“极其可意”,故说“atiiṭṭha”等,这三个词是同义词。在此处,即两个“abhikkanta”词中。考虑到“abhikkanta”一词,故以中性说出;然而,世尊的那段话即是说法,因此说“yadidaṃ bhagavato dhammadesanā”,意思是:我所听闻的世尊的这段说法,这称为世尊说法的这段话,是极美妙的。如此,即使是在回指中,由于义理无别,也是合理的,如同在“yattha ca dinnaṃ mahapphalamāhū...显示巴利原文
Evaṃ āmeḍitavasena dvikkhattuṃ vuttabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni nayidaṃ āmeḍitavaseneva dvikkhattuṃ vuttaṃ, atha kho paccekamatthadvayavasenapīti dassento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Āmeḍitavasena atthaṃ dassetvā vicchāvasenāpi dassento evamāhātipi vadanti, tadayuttameva byāpetabbassa dvikkhattumavuttattā. Byāpetabbassa hi byāpakena guṇakiriyādabbena byāpanicchāya dvattikkhattuṃ vacanaṃ vicchā yathā ‘‘gāmo gāmo ramaṇīyo’’ti. Tattha abhikkantanti abhikkamanīyaṃ, tabbhāvo ca atiiṭṭhatāyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘atiiṭṭha’’ntiādi, padattayañcetaṃ pariyāyavacanaṃ. Etthāti dvīsu abhikkantasaddesu. ‘‘Abhikkanta’’nti vacanaṃ apekkhitvā napuṃsakaliṅgena vuttaṃ, taṃ pana bhagavato vacanaṃ dhammadesanāyevāti katvā ‘‘yadidaṃ bhagavato dhammadesanā’’ti āha, yāyaṃ bhagavato dhammadesanā mayā sutā, tadidaṃ bhagavato dhammadesanāsaṅkhātaṃ vacanaṃ abhikkantanti attho. Evaṃ paṭiniddesopi hi atthato abhedattā yutto eva ‘‘yattha ca dinnaṃ mahapphalamāhū’’tiādīsu (vi. va. 888) viya. ‘‘Abhikkanta’’nti vuttassa vā atthamattadassanaṃ etaṃ, tasmā atthavasena liṅgavibhattivipariṇāmo veditabbo, kāriyavipariṇāmavasena cettha vibhattivipariṇāmatā. Vacananti hettha seso, abhikkantaṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ, yāyaṃ bhagavato dhammadesanā mayā sutā, sā abhikkantaṃ abhikkantāti attho. Dutiyapadepi ‘‘abhikkantanti pasādanaṃ apekkhitvā napuṃsakaliṅgena vutta’’ntiādinā yathārahamesa nayo netabbo.
以“世尊的话”等,显示二重义理的本质。其中,“由去除过患故”,是指由摧毁贪等烦恼的过患。“由获得功德故”,是指通过成就戒等功德而令获得。对于说法所令获得的那些功德,在已说“由获得功德故”的功德中,应当显示那些为主的功德,因此,为了先显示那些为主的功德,而说“由生信故,由生慧故”。因为世间功德以信为主,出世间功德以慧为主,而且,这种为主的说明,也可与说法所应令获得的戒、定等二分法相配合。又显示其他二重义理,如“具义故”等。由具足戒等义利,故为具义。由具足自性词句,故为具文。由使用易解之词,故为文句显了。由微细深妙而义难通达,故为义理甚深。由使用润泽、柔和、甜美的词句,故为悦耳。由义理广大、清净、可爱,故为沁心。由摧破慢与过慢,故为不自赞。由粉碎顽固与争斗,故为不毁他。由以利益之心而转起,平息他人贪欲之热恼等,故为悲心清凉。由破除烦恼黑暗,故为智慧明净。“avadāta”与“odāta”义理相同。由如迦陵频伽鸟声般美妙,故为入耳悦意。由前后无矛盾、极清净,故为堪任推敲。即由入耳悦意,故为听闻时……显示巴利原文
‘‘Bhagavato vacana’’ntiādinā atthadvayasarūpaṃ dasseti. Tattha dosanāsanatoti rāgādikilesadosaviddhaṃsanato. Guṇādhigamanatoti sīlādiguṇānaṃ sampādanavasena adhigamāpanato. Ye guṇe desanā adhigameti, tesu ‘‘guṇādhigamanato’’ti vuttesuyeva guṇesu padhānabhūtā guṇā dassetabbāti te padhānabhūte guṇe tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘saddhājananato paññājananato’’ti vuttaṃ. Saddhāpadhānā hi lokiyā guṇā, paññāpadhānā lokuttarāti, padhānaniddeso cesa desanāya adhigametabbehi sīlasamādhidukādīhipi yojanāsambhavato. Aññampi atthadvayaṃ dasseti ‘‘sātthato’’tiādinā. Sīlādiatthasampattiyā sātthato. Sabhāvaniruttisampattiyā sabyañjanato. Suviññeyyasaddapayogatāya uttānapadato. Saṇhasukhumabhāvena dubbiññeyyatthatāya gambhīratthato. Siniddhamudumadhurasaddapayogatāya kaṇṇasukhato. Vipulavisuddhapemanīyatthatāya hadayaṅgamato. Mānātimānavidhamanena anattukkaṃsanato. Thambhasārambhanimmaddanena aparavambhanato. Hitādhippāyappavattiyā paresaṃ rāgapariḷāhādivūpasamanena karuṇāsītalato. Kilesandhakāravidhamanena paññāvadātato. Avadātaṃ, odātanti ca atthato ekaṃ. Karavīkarutamañjutāya āpātharamaṇīyato. Pubbāparāviruddhasuvisuddhatāya vimaddakkhamato. Āpātharamaṇīyatāya eva suyyamānasukhato. Vimaddakkhamatāya, hitajjhāsayappavattitāya ca vīmaṃsiyamānahitatoti evamettha attho veditabbo. Ādisaddena pana saṃsāracakkanivattanato, saddhammacakkappavattanato, micchāvādaviddhaṃsanato, sammāvādapatiṭṭhāpanato, akusalamūlasamuddharaṇato, kusalamūlasaṃropanato, apāyadvāravidhānato, saggamaggadvāravivaraṇato, pariyuṭṭhānavūpasamanato, anusayasamugghāṭanatoti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
并非仅用两个词,更以四个譬喻来说明——‘pi’字有总括之意。‘有眼者见色’这句,只是显示‘持油灯’这第四譬喻的形式,而非显示其他譬喻,因此说‘以四个譬喻’。‘倒置’是指被某人倒置。‘面朝下而生’是说本性即面朝下而生。‘揭开’即打开。‘执其手’是为了表示教导与指示,意思是:并非仅说‘向东走’或‘向北走’这样的话,而是牵起他的手,毫无疑惑地指示:‘这是路,应这样走。’黑分月的十四日,即黑分月十四日。由无间断的密丛树木所形成的一片稠密树林,即是密林。‘云层’即云的覆盖,意为被云遮蔽。‘将倒覆的翻正’,是指将某个原本无依托的容器,使它有所依托,从而翻正过来,让口朝上。由于本性面朝下,故背离正法;由于被倒置,故堕入非法——依此二义,‘倒覆’一词应随宜配合此二者,而非依次配对。因为这位国王本性即背离正法,又因恶友提婆达多教唆而犯下弑父等罪,从而堕入非法。令其出离者,是世尊——应如此连接。显示巴利原文
Na kevalaṃ padadvayeneva, tato parampi catūhi upamāhīti pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho. ‘‘Cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’’ti idaṃ ‘‘telapajjotaṃ dhāreyyā’’ti catutthaupamāya ākāramattadassanaṃ, na pana upamantaradassananti āha ‘‘catūhi upamāhī’’ti. Adhomukhaṭṭhapitanti kenaci adhomukhaṃ ṭhapitaṃ. Heṭṭhāmukhajātanti sabhāveneva heṭṭhāmukhaṃ jātaṃ. Ugghāṭeyyāti vivaṭaṃ kareyya. ‘‘Hatthe gahetvā’’ti samācikkhaṇadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘puratthābhimukho, uttarābhimukho vā gacchā’’tiādinā vacanamattaṃ avatvā ‘‘esa maggo, evaṃ gacchā’’ti hatthe gahetvā nissandehaṃ dasseyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kāḷapakkhe cātuddasī kāḷapakkhacātuddasī. Nirantararukkhagahanena ekagghano vanasaṇḍo ghanavanasaṇḍo. Meghassa paṭalaṃ meghapaṭalaṃ, meghacchannatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Nikkujjitaṃ ukkujjeyyāti kassacipi ādheyyassa anādhārabhūtaṃ kiñci bhājanaṃ ādhārabhāvāpādanavasena ukkujjeyya upari mukhaṃ ṭhapeyya. Heṭṭhāmukhajātatāya vimukhaṃ, adhomukhaṭṭhapitatāya asaddhamme patitanti evaṃ padadvayaṃ nikkujjitapadassa yathādassitena atthadvayena yathārahaṃ yojetabbaṃ, na yathāsaṅkhyaṃ. Attano sabhāveneva hi esa rājā saddhammavimukho, pāpamittena pana devadattena pitughātādīsu uyyojitattā asaddhamme patitoti. Vuṭṭhāpentena bhagavatāti sambandho.
‘迦叶世尊’等语,是显示当时国王虽未明说,但可由事势推论而知。虽然欲贪等作为障碍也具有遮蔽性,但邪见尤其具有遮蔽性,因为众生以邪执而受遮蔽,故说‘被邪见丛林所遮蔽’。因此世尊说:‘比丘们,我说邪见是最严重的过恶’,即‘被名为邪见的丛林所遮蔽’之意。当说‘开显被邪见丛林所遮蔽的教法’时,应知一切诸佛的意趣同一、教法同一,因此迦叶世尊的教法也与这一教法合为同一。在《增支部注释》等中也是如此解说,如是,‘开显被邪见丛林所遮蔽的教法’一语便得以成立。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kassapassa bhagavato’’tiādinā tadā raññā avuttassāpi atthāpattimattadassanaṃ. Kāmañca kāmacchandādayopi paṭicchādakā nīvaraṇabhāvato, micchādiṭṭhi pana savisesaṃ paṭicchādikā satte micchābhinivesavasenāti āha ‘‘micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchanna’’nti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘micchādiṭṭhiparamāhaṃ bhikkhave vajjaṃ vadāmī’’ti, [a. ni. 1.310 (atthato samānaṃ)] micchādiṭṭhisaṅkhātagumbapaṭicchannanti attho. ‘‘Micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchannaṃ sāsanaṃ vivarantenā’’ti vadanto sabbabuddhānaṃ ekāva anusandhi, ekaṃva sāsananti katvā kassapassa bhagavato sāsanampi iminā saddhiṃ ekasāsanaṃ karotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aṅguttaraṭṭhakathādīsupi hi tathā ceva vuttaṃ, evañca katvā micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchannassa sāsanassa vivaraṇavacanaṃ upapannaṃ hotīti.
由一切不善法所构成的趣向恶趣之道,即是邪道,因为是卑劣之道。正见等八正道的正对立方——邪见等八邪行,是邪道,因为它是偏离解脱道的、虚妄之道。正是针对这两者的对立,才说‘开显天界与解脱之道’。一切善法是天界之道,正见等八正行是解脱之道。以酥油等为依处的灯,不如以油为依处的灯明亮,因此取‘油灯’之说。‘应持’即应保持、应专注、应安立。佛等宝的色相,即佛等三宝的功德所显之色相。如是,它摧毁了遮蔽佛等宝色相的无明黑暗,这便是名为教法的灯明。将这两者依同一所依而展开后,以‘持彼者、安立者’的意义,称为‘持摧毁遮蔽彼之无明黑暗的教法之灯者’。以这些方式,即如前所述的‘覆’、‘开’、‘显道’、‘持油灯’四种譬喻所示的方式,或如前所述,对种种诡诈、饶舌等邪命,种种慢等分别说明的方式,因此说‘以种种方式阐扬了法’。显示巴利原文
Sabbo akusaladhammasaṅkhāto apāyagāmimaggo kummaggo kucchito maggoti katvā. Sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ ujupaṭipakkhatāya micchādiṭṭhiādayo aṭṭha micchattadhammā micchāmaggo mokkhamaggato micchā vitatho maggoti katvā. Teneva hi tadubhayassa paṭipakkhataṃ sandhāya ‘‘saggamokkhamaggaṃ āvikarontenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbo hi kusaladhammo saggamaggo. Sammādiṭṭhiādayo aṭṭha sammattadhammā mokkhamaggo. Sappiādisannissayo padīpo na tathā ujjalo, yathā telasannissayoti telapajjotaggahaṇaṃ. Dhāreyyāti dhareyya, samāhareyya samādaheyyāti attho. Buddhādiratanarūpānīti buddhādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ vaṇṇāyatanāni. Tesaṃ buddhādiratanarūpānaṃ paṭicchādakassa mohandhakārassa viddhaṃsakaṃ tathā. Desanāsaṅkhātaṃ pajjotaṃ tathā. Tadubhayaṃ tulyādhikaraṇavasena viyūhitvā tassa dhārako samādahakoti atthena ‘‘tappaṭicchādakamohandhakāraviddhaṃsakadesanāpajjotadhārakenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Etehi pariyāyehīti yathāvuttehi nikkujjitukkujjanapaṭicchannavivaraṇamaggācikkhaṇatelapajjotadhāraṇa saṅkhāta catubbidhopamopamitabbappakārehi, yathāvuttehi vā nānāvidhakuhanalapanādimicchājīvavidhamanādivibhāvanapariyāyehi. Tenāha ‘‘anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito’’ti.
“如是”等语,显示了与“我此”等经文的关联。以净信心而作净信之相。为表明“净信心由听闻此教法而生”这一意义,故说“以此教法”等,即以此教法为因。净信之相,是净信的善士所应作的恭敬。“皈依”即所依处,因此说“最上依处”。而最上依处的特相,是由遮止非义和成办义利来说明的,故说“是罪恶的救护者,是利益的施设者”。其中,“罪恶”是处格作属格用,意思是恶;也有人说是从苦中救护。“救护”即作皈依;“利益”是业格作属格用;“施设”即安排。说“以此意趣”时,是为了表明“此处‘iti’字是省略指示,且它是表示相状的”。皈依即前往,是以利益的意趣而亲近,或了知。如此,《律藏注释》等中说“皈依即我前往”,结合‘iti’字而解释意义。此处,‘gam’字根不像‘nī’字根等那样带双宾语,因此,如同说“赶羊到村子”,不能说“我以世尊为皈依”,而应说“我以皈依而前往”,故应知此处‘iti’字被省略指示。这样,《小部注释》中所引的诘难——“若有人皈依佛,他是前往佛,还是前往皈依?”——便无立足之地,因为文法家们并不把‘gam’显示巴利原文
‘‘Eva’’ntiādinā ‘‘esāha’’ntiādipāṭhassa sambandhaṃ dasseti. Pasannacittatāyapasannākāraṃ karoti. Pasannacittatā ca imaṃ desanaṃ sutvā evāti atthaṃ ñāpetuṃ ‘‘imāya desanāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Imāya desanāya hetubhūtāya. Pasannākāranti pasannehi sādhujanehi kattabbasakkāraṃ. Saraṇanti paṭisaraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘parāyaṇa’’nti. Parāyaṇatā pana anatthanisedhanena, atthasampādanena cāti vuttaṃ ‘‘aghassa tātā,hitassa ca vidhātā’’ti. Aghassāti nissakke sāmivacanaṃ, pāpatoti attho. Dukkhatotipi vadanti keci. Tāyati avassayaṃ karotīti tātā. Hitassāti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Vidahati saṃvidhānaṃ karotīti vidhātā. ‘‘Iti iminā adhippāyenā’’ti vadanto ‘‘itisaddo cettha luttaniddiṭṭho, so ca ākārattho’’ti dasseti. Saraṇanti gamanaṃ. Hitādhippāyena bhajanaṃ, jānanaṃ vā, evañca katvā vinayaṭṭhakathādīsu ‘‘saraṇanti gacchāmī’’ti saheva itisaddena attho vuttoti. Ettha hi nāyaṃ gami-saddo nī-saddādayo viya dvikammiko, tasmā yathā ‘‘ajaṃ gāmaṃ netī’’ti vuccati, evaṃ ‘‘bhagavantaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti vattuṃ na sakkā, ‘‘saraṇanti gacchāmī’’ti pana vattabbaṃ, tasmā ettha itisaddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti veditabbaṃ, evañca katvā ‘‘yo buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchati, so buddhaṃ vā gaccheyya saraṇaṃ vā’’ti (khu. pā. aṭṭha. 1.gamatīyadīpanā) khuddakanikāyaṭṭhakathāya uddhaṭā codanā anavakāsā. Na hi gami-saddaṃ duhādinyādigaṇikaṃ karonti akkharacintakāti. Hotu tāva gami-saddassa ekakammabhāvo, tathāpi ‘‘gacchateva pubbaṃ disaṃ, gacchati pacchimaṃ disa’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.159; 3.87) viya ‘‘bhagavantaṃ, saraṇa’’nti padadvayassa samānādhikaraṇatā yuttāti? Na, tassa padadvayassa samānādhikaraṇabhāvānupapattito. Tassa hi samānādhikaraṇabhāve adhippete paṭihatacittopi bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamanto buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gato nāma siyā. Yañhi taṃ ‘‘buddho’’ti visesitaṃ saraṇaṃ, tamevesa gatoti, na cettha anupapattikena atthena attho, tasmā ‘‘bhagavanta’’nti gamanīyatthassa dīpanaṃ, ‘‘saraṇa’’nti pana gamanākārassāti vuttanayena itilopavaseneva attho gahetabboti. Dhammañca saṅghañcāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Honti cettha –
应知因‘gam’字根是单宾语,故有‘iti’的省略;若作同位,则有过失,且意义亦不相同。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Gamissa ekakammattā, itilopaṃ vijāniyā; Paṭighātappasaṅgattā, na ca tulyatthatā siyā.
所谓“缩约”,即是汇集简约之意。犹如山体下部逐渐汇聚为一,其部分虽多却简约而实缩,故名“于山下成缩小”。“山之顶”即山峰。此为注释家所立新义:以山体比喻和合汇聚,如山形围绕而成之地块,即称为“山体绕合之地”,意指山体外围环绕之处。所谓不扰乱者,即无秽污,因其无扰动之故,称为“非扰乱”,意即无波动、无障碍。工匠等业者共同趋向建筑场地,即是工匠。制作“小工艺品”者,称为小匠;能造作各类音响之工艺者,称为“制造匠”。“松开捕获”者,如“蟾蜍”之类譬喻,亦名“水蛇”。此乃音响与形状结合的工艺品。余者类推。所谓“盐”,意指可执持的石块。所谓“瓜”,即瓜类片状。“聚集符号制造之器皿”,谓罐器的音声,因含女性阴性之音便称为“罐”。“坞堡”,此词意在体现罐音,“坞”为罐音之象征。显示巴利原文
Tasmā gamanīyatthassa, pubbapadaṃva jotakaṃ;
谓“蟾蜍也好、盐瓜也罢、鱼坞堡也罢,皆为静止与行走之物”。此处指盐瓜为静止之物,而蟾蜍与鱼坞堡则行走与静止兼具。如此比喻,意在显示“行走与静止”的含义由是而显。其次则说盐瓜主要是静止,而蟾蜍、鱼坞堡虽可行走,亦可静止。诸物同行一路者,如同行于相同行境之中,彼此相似而行。所说“行走与静止”之义,在于彼物行走与静止的区分。盐瓜、蟾蜍与鱼坞堡在动作上各有正异。因此,盐瓜、蟾蜍、鱼坞堡之类,在动作上分为静止与行走,而非单纯固定。动作是复合性的事物,这便是注释家所示的“同行法”,乃阿阇黎法巴拉长老所发的见解。此处以“同行法”为例说明:所谓“依同行法应对此事,方能了知。盐瓜常处静止,蟾蜍与鱼坞堡则处于静止及行走所切合之处,此理应当合乎道理”。即言彼诸物依同行法,最终可分别阐明其静止与行动,此乃理之常情。故又说“应如此解说”。此外,另以“同一行为之状”为二者区别之要义。盐瓜概念暗示有所不宜,而鱼坞堡、蟾蜍则无此嫌。所谓“于一时,地下有众多牛之中,有行走之牛”,此中“牛”言众多牛,远处近处、坐者立者皆属其中。谓之“牛”即牛辈,“其余”即近处或远处。而谓“同…”
},
{显示巴利原文
Gamanākārassa paraṃ, ityuttaṃ saraṇattaye’’ti.
然而,当以这样的意图说‘我皈依世尊’时,他便以此意图确定:皈依即是亲近,或是了知,这称为皈依。其中,对于‘我皈依’等词,前词的后义解说,或者为了显示‘我皈依’一词的不共义,而单独解说‘我亲近’等三词。因为亲近即是以皈依的意图前往,侍奉即是近处行境的状态,承事即是以履行义务而侍奉——如此在一切方面都显示了不共义。这样显示了‘我皈依’一词的‘去’义之后,为了也显示‘觉悟’义,而说‘或者这样’等。其中,‘这样’是指以‘世尊是我的皈依’等的意图。为什么‘我皈依’一词能获得‘我觉悟’这一意义呢?以‘因为对于某些……’等来澄清这个问难,并以此显示:不依词源学方法,从自性而言,‘gam’字根就有觉悟义。所谓‘诸字根’,即名为根本音的那些,如i, yā, kamu, gamu等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Iti iminā adhippāyena bhagavantaṃ gacchāmī’’ti pana vadanto aneneva adhippāyena bhajanaṃ, jānanaṃ vā saraṇagamanaṃ nāmāti niyameti. Tattha ‘‘gacchāmī’’tiādīsu purimassa purimassa pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ atthavacanaṃ, ‘‘gacchāmī’’ti etassa vā anaññasādhāraṇatādassanavasena pāṭiyekkameva atthavacanaṃ ‘‘bhajāmī’’tiādipadattayaṃ. Bhajanañhi saraṇādhippāyena upasaṅkamanaṃ, sevanaṃ santikāvacarabhāvo, payirupāsanaṃ vattapaṭivattakaraṇena upaṭṭhānanti evaṃ sabbathāpi anaññasādhāraṇataṃyeva dasseti. Evaṃ ‘‘gacchāmī’’ti padassa gatiatthaṃ dassetvā buddhiatthampi dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ vā’’tiādimāha, tattha evanti ‘‘bhagavā me saraṇa’’ntiādinā adhippāyena. Kasmā pana ‘‘gacchāmī’’ti padassa ‘‘bujjhāmī’’ti ayamattho labbhatīti codanaṃ sodheti ‘‘yesañhī’’tiādinā, anena ca niruttinayamantarena sabhāvatova gamudhātussa buddhiatthoti dīpeti. Dhātūnanti mūlasaddasaṅkhātānaṃ i, yā, kamu, gamuiccādīnaṃ.
“已证得道者,已现证灭者”此二句,唯显示果位者,而非道位者;为显示道位者,故说“以及依教奉行者”。难道善凡夫不也被称为“依教奉行”吗?虽亦可用此称,但就非权说而言,唯道位者方应如此称说,另一位则不然,因为未入正定。正如唯有他们才被说为“不堕恶趣者”,因为由入正定故,有解脱恶趣的可能。如此,诸多律藏复注与经藏复注的作者也这样说。应知:这是依入正定而就非权说的不堕恶趣者而言;而依未成就彼,则权说的不堕恶趣者——善凡夫,亦由“依教奉行者”一句所显示。正如在《施分别经》等中,他以“为现证须陀洹果而修行者”的身份被讲说;而《伞盖天宫》中的伞盖童子便是此处的例证。“已证得道者,已现证灭者,以及依教奉行者,不堕于恶趣而护持”——这是带余文的句释。因为以过去时,前二句唯取果位者;以现在时,后一句则连同善凡夫唯取道位者。而“不堕”一词,是显示护持的方式——即唯令不堕而护持;或显示护持的体性。因为护持即是令不堕,而令不堕即是依摧破能生恶趣等的烦恼,而从轮回中出离。“于恶趣”是以苦多之处为要点而说,但应知显示巴利原文
‘‘Adhigatamagge, sacchikatanirodhe’’ti padadvayenāpi phalaṭṭhā eva dassitā, na maggaṭṭhāti te dassento ‘‘yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne cā’’ti āha. Nanu ca kalyāṇaputhujjanopi ‘‘yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjatī’’ti vuccatīti? Kiñcāpi vuccati, nippariyāyena pana maggaṭṭhā eva tathā vattabbā, na itaro niyāmokkamanābhāvato. Tathā hi te eva ‘‘apāyesu apatamāne dhāretī’’ti vuttā. Sammattaniyāmokkamanena hi apāyavinimuttisambhavoti. Evaṃ anekehipi vinaya- (sārattha. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā) suttantaṭīkākārehī (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.250) vuttaṃ, tadetaṃ sammattaniyāmokkamanavasena nippariyāyato apāyavinimuttake sandhāya vuttaṃ, tadanupapattivasena pana pariyāyato apāyavinimuttakaṃ kalyāṇaputhujjanampi ‘‘yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne’’ti padena dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hesa dakkhiṇavibhaṅgasuttādīsu (ma. ni. 3.379) sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannabhāvena vuttoti, chattavimāne (vi. va. 886 ādayo) chattamāṇavako cettha nidassanaṃ. Adhigatamagge, sacchikatanirodhe ca yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne ca puggale apāyesu apatamāne katvā dhāretīti sapāṭhasesayojanā. Atītakālikena hi purimapadadvayena phalaṭṭhānameva gahaṇaṃ, vattamānakālikena ca pacchimena padena saha kalyāṇaputhujjanena maggaṭṭhānameva. ‘‘Apatamāne’’ti pana padena dhāraṇākāradassanaṃ apatanakaraṇavaseneva dhāretīti, dhāraṇasarūpadassanaṃ vā. Dhāraṇaṃ nāma apatanakaraṇamevāti, apatanakaraṇañca apāyādinibbattakakilesaviddhaṃsanavasena vaṭṭato niyyānameva. ‘‘Apāyesū’’ti hi dukkhabahulaṭṭhānatāya padhānavasena vuttaṃ, vaṭṭadukkhesu pana sabbesupi apatamāne katvā dhāretīti attho veditabbo. Tathā hi abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sotāpattimaggo cettha apāyabhavato vuṭṭhāti, sakadāgāmimaggo sugatikāmabhavekadesato, anāgāmimaggo kāmabhavato, arahattamaggo rūpārūpabhavato, sabbabhavehipi vuṭṭhāti evāti vadantī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 350) evañca katvā ariyamaggo niyyānikatāya, nibbānañca tassa tadatthasiddhihetutāyāti ubhayameva nippariyāyena dhammo nāmāti sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘so atthato ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nibbānañhi ārammaṇaṃ labhitvā ariyamaggassa tadatthasiddhi, svāyamattho ca pāḷiyā eva siddhoti āha ‘‘vuttañceta’’ntiādi. Yāvatāti yattakā. Tesanti tattakānaṃ dhammānaṃ. ‘‘Aggo akkhāyatī’’ti vattabbe o-kārassa a-kāraṃ, ma-kārāgamañca katvā ‘‘aggamakkhāyatī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Akkhāyatī’’ti cettha itisaddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā, tena ‘‘yāvatā bhikkhave dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’tiādi (itivu. 90; a. ni. 4.34) suttapadaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, ‘‘vitthāro’’ti iminā vā tadavasesasaṅgaho.
然而,由于圣果——如“以彼信未寂灭”等语所说——对于道所断除的烦恼,具有寂止断除的作用,因而具有顺出离性及出离的究竟性;而教法则因是证得出离法之因,故具有顺出离性。依此理趣,如所说的方法,教法亦得“法”之名。因此,世尊总摄此二者而说“非仅……”等语。为了显示此义亦载于圣典,故说“曾如是说”等。其中,关于“恰陀青年天宫”:据说,在舍多毗耶城,有一位名叫恰陀的婆罗门青年。他在郁伽吒城波伽罗娑帝婆罗门处学得技艺后,心想“我将奉上谢师礼”,便向郁伽吒城方向走去。那时,世尊在路上见到他遭遇盗贼之难,以及他将在三十三天投生,便以结集偈颂的方式,为他开示了皈依的方法。他后来往生三十三天,所得天宫广三十由旬,此即“恰陀青年天宫”。即使生于天界,他仍沿用为人时的名称,如“曼都迦天子”“鸠吠罗天王”等。而在此处,因以恰陀青年天宫之事为因缘,故省略后分,将“日轮不如此照耀于空,月轮与弗沙星亦不如此闪耀……”等开示称为“恰陀青年天宫”。此偈即包含于其中,故应知此意为“恰陀青年天宫事之开示”。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana ariyaphalānaṃ ‘‘tāya saddhāya avūpasantāyā’’tiādi vacanato maggena samucchinnānaṃ kilesānaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānakiccatāya niyyānānuguṇatā, niyyānapariyosānatā ca, pariyattiyā pana niyyānadhammasamadhigamahetutāya niyyānānuguṇatāti iminā pariyāyena vuttanayena dhammabhāvo labbhati, tasmā tadubhayampi saṅgaṇhanto ‘‘na kevalañcā’’tiādimāha. Svāyamattho ca pāṭhāruḷho evāti dasseti ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādinā. Tattha chattamāṇavakavimāneti chatto kira nāma setabyāyaṃ brāhmaṇamāṇavako, so ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ pokkharasātibrāhmaṇassa santike sippaṃ uggahetvā ‘‘garudakkhiṇaṃ dassāmī’’ti ukkaṭṭhābhimukho gacchati, athassa bhagavā antarāmagge corantarāyaṃ, tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbattamānañca disvā gāthābandhavasena saraṇagamanavidhiṃ desesi, tassa tāvatiṃsabhavanupagassa tiṃsayojanikaṃ vimānaṃ chattamāṇavakavimānaṃ. Devalokepi hi tassa manussakāle samaññā yathā ‘‘maṇḍūko devaputto, (vi. va. 858 ādayo) kuvero devarājā’’ti, idha pana chattamāṇavakavimānaṃ vatthu kāraṇaṃ etassāti katvā uttarapadalopena ‘‘na tathā tapati nabhe sūriyo, cando ca na bhāsati na phusso, yathā’’tiādikā (vi. va. 889) desanā ‘‘chattamāṇavakavimāna’’nti vuccati, tatrāyaṃ gāthā pariyāpannā, tasmā chattamāṇavakavimānavatthudesanāyanti attho veditabbo.
‘欲贪、有贪’等种种分类,于无始轮回中显现的一切贪,皆依此而离染、断除,故称‘离贪’,即道。因称为‘动转’的渴爱,以及具有内在烧灼特征的忧愁,在此中完全灭尽无余,故无有动转、无有忧愁,此即果。而在其注释书中说:‘由于寂止了渴爱残余的、为忧愁之因的烦恼,故称无愁。’‘法、无为’:因非由诸缘和合造作而成,故为‘无为’;因持守自性,故为‘胜义法’,即涅槃。在其注释书中又说:‘法,即自性法。此乃依自性而可执取之法,即道、果、涅槃,非如教法依施设法而执取。’如此,则‘法’一词应适用于三处。又以‘无违逆’一词,于彼处唯取涅槃,因‘于此中无任何违逆’故;‘无违逆’即显示无有矛盾,意为无有相违、可意、殊胜。因以熟练之相转起,或因显了殊胜功德,故称‘熟练’。如云:‘梵天!于人间,我未曾以害想说不熟练之法,唯说殊胜之法。’显示巴利原文
Kāmarāgo bhavarāgoti evamādibhedo anādikālavibhāvito sabbopi rāgo virajjati pahīyati etenāti rāgavirāgo, maggo. Ejāsaṅkhātāya taṇhāya, antonijjhānalakkhaṇassa ca sokassa taduppattiyaṃ sabbaso parikkhīṇattā natthi ejā, soko ca etasminti anejaṃ, asokañca, phalaṃ. Tadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vi. va. aṭṭha. 887) pana ‘‘taṇhāvasiṭṭhānaṃ sokanimittānaṃ kilesānaṃ paṭippassambhanato asoka’’nti vuttaṃ. Dhammamasaṅkhatanti sampajja sambhūya paccayehi appaṭisaṅkhatattā asaṅkhataṃ attano sabhāvadhāraṇato paramatthadhammabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ. Tadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘dhammanti sabhāvadhammaṃ. Sabhāvato gahetabbadhammo hesa, yadidaṃ maggaphalanibbānāni, na pariyattidhammo viya paññattidhammavasenā’’ti (vi. va. aṭṭha. 887) vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati dhammasaddo tīsupi ṭhānesu yojetabbo. Appaṭikūlasaddena ca tattha nibbānameva gahitaṃ ‘‘natthi ettha kiñcipi paṭikūla’’nti katvā, appaṭikūlanti ca avirodhadīpanato kiñci aviruddhaṃ, iṭṭhaṃ paṇītanti vā attho. Paguṇarūpena pavattitattā, pakaṭṭhaguṇavibhāvanato vā paguṇaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘vihiṃsasaññī paguṇaṃ na bhāsiṃ, dhammaṃ paṇītaṃ manujesu brahme’’ti (ma. ni. 1.283; 2.339; mahāva. 9).
“法蕴已说”:如此连接。如是,此处以四句唯取教法。然而,在其注释书中说:“于听闻时、审察时、行道时,一切时皆可意故,为甜美;依止一切知智之辩才成就而转起故,为善转起、微细;以蕴等、善等、总说等门,善分别所应分别之义故,为善分别。以此三句唯说教法。”为了显示无论于听闻时还是审思时,无论对说者还是听者,皆现前故,双方皆可现证,于此特用“此”这一近前现量之词。再者,“法”之一词,是对如前所述四种法之通称。因为教法即便仅作为皈依与戒的安立处,亦能令如实行道者不堕恶趣,故能持;此义正以恰陀青年天宫为证,应当如是见。先令上述之法依共通性现前,再以“此”字显示。又,此偈为以三个“bha”音庄严的“Dodhaka”调,故第三句“甜美”一词中虽多一“ma”音,然如“圣行”等词,因与多音节词相连,故无过失,应如是见。显示巴利原文
Dhammakkhandhā kathitāti yojanā. Evaṃ idha catūhipi padehi pariyattidhammoyeva gahito, tadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘savanavelāyaṃ, upaparikkhaṇavelāyaṃ, paṭipajjanavelāyanti sabbadāpi iṭṭhamevāti madhuraṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇasannissayāya paṭibhānasampadāya pavattitattā suppavattibhāvato, nipuṇabhāvato ca paguṇaṃ, vibhajitabbassa atthassa khandhādivasena, kusalādivasena, uddesādivasena ca suṭṭhu vibhajanato suvibhattanti tīhipi padehi pariyattidhammameva vadatī’’ti (vi. va. aṭṭha. 887) vuttaṃ. Āpāthakāle viya majjanakālepi, kathentassa viya suṇantassāpi sammukhībhāvato ubhatopaccakkhatādassanatthaṃ idheva ‘‘ima’’nti āsannapaccakkhavacanamāha. Puna ‘‘dhamma’’nti idaṃ yathāvuttassa catubbidhassāpi dhammassa sādhāraṇavacanaṃ. Pariyattidhammopi hi saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhānamattāyapi yāthāvapaṭipattiyā apāyapatanato dhāreti, imassa ca atthassa idameva chattamāṇavakavimānaṃ sādhakanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sādhāraṇabhāvena yathāvuttaṃ dhammaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā dassento puna ‘‘ima’’nti āha. Yasmā cesā bha-kārattayena ca paṭimaṇḍitā dodhakagāthā, tasmā tatiyapāde madhurasadde ma-kāro adhikopi ariyacariyādipadehi viya anekakkharapadena yuttattā anupavajjoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“以见与戒之集合”:即如所说,“凡此见为圣、能出离、能令奉行者正尽诸苦,以如是见,具足见之同分而住”,以及“凡他们戒无缺、无穿、无斑、无杂、自在、为智者所赞、无执取、能引生定,以如是戒,具足戒之同分而住”。以这些见与戒的集合义,即是见与戒的同分。“集合”即聚合、和合。因为圣者无论身处何地,虽相隔遥远,亦以其功德总集而实为和合。以“曾如是说”等,引据经典证成。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhisīlasaṅghātenāti ‘‘yāyaṃ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324, 356; a. ni. 6.11; pari. 274) evaṃ vuttāya diṭṭhiyā ceva ‘‘yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni bhujissāni viññupasatthāni aparāmaṭṭhāni samādhisaṃvattanikāni, tathārūpehi sīlehi sīlasāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324, 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54; a. ni. 6.92; pari. 274) evaṃ vuttānaṃ sīlānañca saṃhatabhāvena, diṭṭhisīlasāmaññenāti attho. Saṃhatoti saṅghaṭito, sametoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ariyapuggalā hi yattha katthaci dūre ṭhitāpi attano guṇasāmaggiyā saṃhatā eva. ‘‘Vuttañheta’’ntiādinā āhaccapāṭhena samattheti.
“Yattha”意为在哪个僧团中。“Dinna”指已施舍的食物等布施物,由于偈颂的结缚,此处省略了鼻音。这是一首Dodhaka偈颂。“Mahapphalamāhū”意为“有大果报”,诸佛等说。“Catūsu”中的“ca”字虽多余,但依前述方式亦无可指责。在那些因完全远离烦恼不净而极为清净的“清净者”中,即在“向须陀洹、为证须陀洹果而修行者”等(《相应部》5.488)所说的四对八辈人中。“Dhammadasā”指因现见四谛法与涅槃法,或因现见圣法而具法眼者。那些人不以道位与果位成对,而是按人分别计数,成为八辈。此僧团,你应为了皈依、作为庇护所、作为依止处、为了从恶趣苦与轮回苦中救护而“upehi”——即亲近、依止、敬奉、侍奉,或应如此了知、觉悟,这是结合起来的含义。或者,其关联为:在哪一个清净的四对八辈人中,布施被说为有大果报,那些具法眼者即为八辈,你应皈依此僧团。应知,即使这样解释,由于含义上并无不同,也是恰当的。此处为偈颂流畅,在“purisa”词中用了长音“ī”,在“puggala”词中用了短音而作解释。显示巴利原文
Yatthāti yasmiṃ saṅghe. Dinnanti pariccattaṃ annādideyyadhammaṃ, gāthābandhattā cettha anunāsikalopo. Dodhakagāthā hesā. Mahapphalamāhūti ‘‘mahapphala’’nti buddhādayo āhu. Catūsūti cettha ca-kāro adhikopi vuttanayena anupavajjo. Accantameva kilesāsucito visuddhattā sucīsu. ‘‘Sotāpanno sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 5.488) vuttesu catūsu purisayugesu. Catusaccadhammassa, nibbānadhammassa ca paccakkhato dassanena, ariyadhammassa paccakkhadassāvitāya vā dhammadasā. Te puggalā maggaṭṭhaphalaṭṭhe yugale akatvā visuṃ visuṃ puggalagaṇanena aṭṭha ca honti. Imaṃ saṅghaṃ saraṇatthaṃ saraṇāya parāyaṇāya apāyadukkhavaṭṭadukkhaparitāṇāya upehi upagaccha bhaja seva, evaṃ vā jānāhi bujjhassūti saha yojanāya attho. Yattha yesu sucīsu catūsu purisayugesu dinnaṃ mahapphalamāhu, dhammadasā te puggalā aṭṭha ca, imaṃ saṅghaṃ saraṇatthamupehīti vā sambandho. Evampi hi paṭiniddeso yutto eva atthato abhinnattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Gāthāsukhatthañcettha purisapade īkāraṃ, puggalāpade ca rassaṃ katvā niddeso.
“Ettāvatā”指随“esāha”等所说的次第。“Tīṇi vatthūni saraṇaṃ gamanāni”意为以三处为皈依而行,或三次的“皈依”之行称为皈依行。“Paṭivedesī”指将自己心中所起的(皈依)以言语宣示出来。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatāti ‘‘esāha’’ntiādivacanakkamena. Tīṇi vatthūni ‘‘saraṇa’’nti gamanāni, tikkhattuṃ vā ‘‘saraṇa’’nti gamanānīti saraṇagamanāni. Paṭivedesīti attano hadayagataṃ vācāya pavedesi.
皈依说注释显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanakathāvaṇṇanā
正如皈依所缘、分类、果报、杂染的分别一样,显示作者也有助于善巧。因此,为将作者一并显示,便说“现在,为令于他们皈依中得善巧故……应知”。所谓“皈依者”,正是为了显示作者;若无作者,皈依本身便不能成立。“皈依”则显示皈依本身,“皈依处”等则依次显示所缘等。然而,此处为何未提及“清净”?难道清净的分别无助于善巧吗?的确如此,但清净已通过杂染的提及,在义理上被显示出来,故不再另说。因为令那些杂染之因——无明等——完全未生的不生起,已生的予以断除,即是清净。“Atthato”(就含义而言)指从皈依一词的含义来解说,也有“saraṇatthato”的异读,意义相同。为显示此词依“伤害”义的“sara”词根而成立,从词根义说“它伤害,故为皈依”,然后以“皈依者”等解答“伤害谁、如何伤害、伤害什么”的质难。即:伤害谁?皈依者。如何伤害?即通过那皈依行。伤害什么?怖畏等,依次解答。其中,“皈依者”指已行皈依之人;“皈依行”指以皈依为行持的善法;“怖畏”指轮回怖畏;“恐惧”指心的惊惧,因为心的苦受已包含在其中。显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanassa visayappabhedaphalasaṃkilesabhedānaṃ viya, kattu ca vibhāvanā tattha kosallāya hoti yevāti saha kattunā taṃ vidhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idāni tesu saraṇagamanesu kosallatthaṃ…pe… veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchatī’’ti iminā hi kattāraṃ vibhāveti tena vinā saraṇagamanasseva asambhavato, ‘‘saraṇagamana’’nti iminā ca saraṇagamanameva, ‘‘saraṇa’’ntiādīhi pana yathākkamaṃ visayādayo. Kasmā panettha vodānaṃ na gahitaṃ, nanu vodānavibhāvanāpi tattha kosallāya hotīti? Saccametaṃ, taṃ pana saṃkilesaggahaṇeneva atthato vibhāvitaṃ hotīti na gahitaṃ. Yāni hi nesaṃ saṃkilesakāraṇāni aññāṇādīni, tesaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ anuppannānaṃ anuppādanena, uppannānañca pahānena vodānaṃ hotīti. Atthatoti saraṇasaddatthato, ‘‘saraṇatthato’’tipi pāṭho, ayamevattho. Hiṃsatthassa sarasaddassa vasenetaṃ siddhanti dassento dhātvatthavasena ‘‘hiṃsatīti saraṇa’’nti vatvā taṃ pana hiṃsanaṃ kesaṃ, kathaṃ, kassa vāti codanaṃ sodheti ‘‘saraṇagatāna’’ntiādinā. Kesanti hi saraṇagatānaṃ. Kathanti teneva saraṇagamanena. Kassāti bhayādīnanti yathākkamaṃ sodhanā. Tattha saraṇagatānanti ‘‘saraṇa’’nti gatānaṃ. Saraṇagamanenāti ‘‘saraṇa’’nti gamanena kusaladhammena. Bhayanti vaṭṭabhayaṃ. Santāsanti cittutrāsaṃ teneva cetasikadukkhassa saṅgahitattā. Dukkhanti kāyikadukkhaggahaṇaṃ. Duggatiparikilesanti duggatipariyāpannaṃ sabbampi dukkhaṃ ‘‘duggatiyaṃ parikilissanaṃ saṃvibādhanaṃ, samupatāpanaṃ vā’’ti katvā, tayidaṃ sabbaṃ parato phalakathāyaṃ āvi bhavissati. Hiṃsanañcettha vināsanameva, na pana sattahiṃsanamivāti dasseti ‘‘hanati vināsetī’’ti iminā. Etanti saraṇapadaṃ. Adhivacananti nāmaṃ, pasiddhavacanaṃ vā, yathābhuccaṃ vā guṇaṃ adhikicca pavattavacanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ratanattayassevā’’ti.
如此从伤害义方面总说皈依词的含义后,现在更为依此义别作显示,而说“或者”等语。因为分别显示三宝各自作为伤害(怖畏)之因,即是区别于前说的殊胜之处。其中,“以利益中的运作”是指通过“诸比丘,应具足戒而住”等语,劝导有情致力于利义;“以从不利中的制止”是指通过显示“杀生有恶的果报、有恶的来世”等过患,制止有情行于不利。所谓怖畏的伤害,即是通过令以利中的不运作、不利中的运作为因的灾祸不生,从而破坏(怖畏)。“法”,若指以道为名的法,则通过度脱有之荒漠;若指以果与涅槃为名的法,则通过给予安稳,来伤害有情的怖畏,应如此结合。“Kārā”指以布施与供养所呈上的恭敬物。即使没有前缀的词,也如同有前缀的词一样能表达特殊意义,如说“即使是微小的恭敬行,其福亦有广大果报”等。由于是无上应供,故通过令获广大果报来伤害有情的怖畏,应如此结合。“以此理趣”指依上所说,分别开示三宝各自为伤害者之因的道理。然而,因为此“皈依”一词如同“庇护所”一词,是纯粹的名称词,它在内摄词根义后,也表达世间共许的意义,所以应当了知前面所说“皈依即依止处”的含义。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ hiṃsanatthavasena avisesato saraṇasaddatthaṃ dassetvā idāni tadatthavaseneva visesato dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ratanattayassa paccekaṃ hiṃsanakāraṇadassanameva hi purimanayato imassa visesoti. Tattha hite pavattanenāti ‘‘sampannasīlā bhikkhave viharathā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.64, 69) atthe sattānaṃ niyojanena. Ahitā ca nivattanenāti ‘‘pāṇātipātassa kho pāpako vipāko, pāpakaṃ abhisamparāya’’ntiādinā ādīnavadassanādimukhena anatthato ca sattānaṃ nivattanena. Bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti hitāhitesu appavattipavattihetukaṃ byasanaṃ appavattikaraṇena vināseti. Bhavakantārā uttāraṇena maggasaṅkhāto dhammo, phalanibbānasaṅkhāto pana assāsadānena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti yojanā. Kārānanti dānavasena, pūjāvasena ca upanītānaṃ sakkārānaṃ. Anupasaggopi hi saddo saupasaggo viya atthavisesavācako ‘‘appakampi kataṃ kāraṃ, puññaṃ hoti mahapphala’’ntiādīsu viya. Anuttaradakkhiṇeyyabhāvato vipulaphalapaṭilābhakaraṇena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃ satīti yojetabbaṃ. Imināpi pariyāyenāti ratanattayassa paccekaṃ hiṃsakabhāvakāraṇadassanavasena vibhajitvā vuttena imināpi kāraṇena. Yasmā panidaṃ saraṇapadaṃ nāthapadaṃ viya suddhanāmapadattā dhātvatthaṃ antonītaṃ katvā saṅketatthampi vadati, tasmā heṭṭhā saraṇaṃ parāyaṇanti attho vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在说明了皈依的意义之后,现在为显示皈依的实行而说“以其净信”等。其中,以“世尊是正自觉者、法是善说、僧是正行”等方式,对此三宝生起的净信即为“彼净信”(tappasāda),这三宝是他所敬重的对象,故为“彼敬重”(taggaru),其体性即是“彼敬重性”(taggarutā);合“彼净信”与“彼敬重性”即是“以彼净信与敬重”(tappasādataggarutā,具格)。由于断除了烦恼,舍断了疑惑、愚痴以及无信等恶法之性,这三宝便是他的归趣、最上归趣、救护与庇护,即为“彼归趣”(tapparāyaṇa),其体性即是“彼归趣性”(tapparāyaṇatā),这种状态便是“彼归趣性之状态”(tapparāyaṇatākāra),由此转起即是“转起彼归趣性之状态”(tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto)。而此处举出净信,是为了显示世间皈依;因为那是以信为主导,并非以智为主导;举出敬重性,则是为了显示出世间皈依。因为诸圣者由于了知三宝的功德,如对石伞般将其视为敬重,因此“彼净信”是依彼分断而断烦恼,“彼敬重性”则是依断显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saraṇatthaṃ dassetvā idāni saraṇagamanatthaṃ dassento ‘‘tappasādā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho’’ti evamādinā tasmiṃ ratanattaye pasādo tappasādo, tadeva ratanattayaṃ garu etassāti taggaru, tassa bhāvo taggarutā, tappasādo ca taggarutā ca tappasādataggarutā, tāhi. Vihatakileso vidhutavicikicchāsammohāsaddhiyādipāpadhammattā, tadeva ratanattayaṃ parāyaṇaṃ parāgati tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ etassāti tapparāyaṇo, tassa bhāvo tapparāyaṇatā, sāyeva ākāro tapparāyaṇatākāro, tena pavatto tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto. Ettha ca pasādaggahaṇena lokiyaṃ saraṇagamanamāha. Tañhi saddhāpadhānaṃ, na ñāṇapadhānaṃ, garutāgahaṇena pana lokuttaraṃ. Ariyā hi ratanattayaṃ guṇābhiññatāya pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garuṃ katvā passanti, tasmā tappasādena tadaṅgappahānavasena vihatakileso, taggarutāya ca agāravakaraṇahetūnaṃ samucchedavasenāti yojetabbaṃ. Tapparāyaṇatā panettha taggatikatāti tāya catubbidhampi vakkhamānaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Avisesena vā pasādagarutā jotitāti pasādaggahaṇena anaveccappasādassa lokiyassa, aveccappasādassa ca lokuttarassa gahaṇaṃ, tathā garutāgahaṇena lokiyassa garukaraṇassa, lokuttarassa cāti ubhayenapi padena ubhayampi lokiyalokuttarasaraṇagamanaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Uppajjati cittametenāti uppādo, sampayuttadhammasamūho, cittañca taṃ uppādo cāti cittuppādo. Samāhāradvandepi hi katthaci pulliṅgamicchanti saddavidū, tadākārappavattaṃ saddhāpaññādisampayuttadhammasahitaṃ cittaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ nāma ‘‘saraṇanti gacchati etenāti katvā’’ti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Taṃsamaṅgī’’tiādi kattuvibhāvanā. Tena yathāvuttacittuppādena samaṅgīti taṃsamaṅgī. Tenāha ‘‘vuttappakārenacittuppādenā’’ti . Upetīti bhajati sevati payirupāsati, jānāti vā, bujjhatīti attho.
谁证得出世间皈依?他说“见谛者”,义即八种圣者。何时成就?他说“于道刹那”。“成就”一词系指心。因为在道刹那成就时,由证悟四谛,便也成就了住果位的皈依,这是因为出世间皈依没有差别,且同属一个心流。如何成就?他说“由断除皈依之杂染”等,由断除杂染、由所缘、由作用,在整个三宝上皆得成就,这样说来。“由断除皈依的杂染”,此处指断遍知;“由所缘”指证遍知。应如此理解:“以涅槃为所缘故,由所缘成就”,而“tvā”(已作)一词表因之义,例如“成为能者而生起”。此外,由“以涅槃为所缘”决定了“由所缘”所表义的自相。“由作用”则指其餘的修遍知与知遍知。或者,“以涅槃为所缘”显示了随顺道刹那的同一所缘性,而“由作用”则显示了除断除之外的其余三种作用,应如此看待。由说“于道刹那,以涅槃为所缘”,在意义上即可了知:所谓证悟四谛的道智便是出世间皈依。因为在证悟四谛时,由断遍知断除了皈依的杂染;涅槃法由证遍知而成就;道法由修遍知,于正被证悟时成就皈依的意义;而佛德属于声闻行境,由知遍知,于正被证悟时成就皈依的意义;圣僧德也同样如此。显示巴利原文
Lokuttaraṃ saraṇagamanaṃ kesanti āha ‘‘diṭṭhasaccāna’’nti, aṭṭhannaṃ ariyapuggalānanti attho. Kadā taṃ ijjhatīti āha ‘‘maggakkhaṇe’’ti, ‘‘ijjhatī’’ti padena cetassa sambandho. Maggakkhaṇe ijjhamāneneva hi catusaccādhigamena phalaṭṭhānampi saraṇagamakatā sijjhati lokuttarasaraṇagamanassa bhedābhāvato, tesañca ekasantānattā. Kathaṃ taṃ ijjhatīti āha ‘‘saraṇagamanupakkilesasamucchedenā’’tiādi, upapakkilesasamucchedato, ārammaṇato, kiccato ca sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Saraṇagamanupakkilesasamucchedenāti cettha pahānābhisamayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, ārammaṇatoti sacchikiriyābhisamayaṃ. Nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā ārammaṇato ijjhatīti hi yojetabbaṃ, tvā-saddo ca hetutthavācako yathā ‘‘sakko hutvā nibbattī’’ti (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.2.29). Apica ‘‘ārammaṇato’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ sarūpato niyameti ‘‘nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā’’ti iminā. ‘‘Kiccato’’ti tadavasesaṃ bhāvanābhisamayaṃ pariññābhisamayañca sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ārammaṇato nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā’’ti etena vā maggakkhaṇānurūpaṃ ekārammaṇataṃ dassetvā ‘‘kiccato’’ti iminā pahānato avasesaṃ kiccattayaṃ dassitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Maggakkhaṇe, nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā’’ti ca vuttattā atthato maggañāṇasaṅkhāto catusaccādhigamo eva lokuttarasaraṇagamananti viññāyati. Tattha hi catusaccādhigamane saraṇagamanupakkilesassa pahānābhisamayavasena samucchindanaṃ bhavati, nibbānadhammo pana sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena, maggadhammo ca bhāvanābhisamayavasena paṭivijjhiyamānoyeva saraṇagamanatthaṃ sādheti, buddhaguṇā pana sāvakagocarabhūtā pariññābhisamayavasena paṭivijjhiyamānā saraṇagamanatthaṃ sādhenti, tathā ariyasaṅghaguṇā. Tenāha ‘‘sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhatī’’ti.
此处,果的教理也应如所说之理,以随顺道而摄取;对于不可遍知的佛与僧之德,则依彼德之共通性而摄取,应如此看待。因为这样,“成就整体之性”这句话才得以成立。而且,成就时便是同时成就,并不像世间那样依次由无痴通达而通达,应如此把握。因为如同灯火,在道的一刹那便成就了四种作用。然而,有人说:“皈依并不以涅槃为所缘而转起,只是由于道已证得,因此那仅是一种已证得的状态,就像某些三明者的世间明等。”若依他们所说,皈依便只是世间皈依,而非出世间皈依,这不合理,因为两者皆是被期望的。由彼分断而暂伏皈依的杂染。由所缘即以佛等德为所缘,于此亦依所说之理了知意义——由暂伏皈依的杂染与由所缘,在整个三宝上皆得成就,这样说。显示巴利原文
Phalapariyattīnampettha vuttanayena maggānuguṇappavattiyā gahaṇaṃ, apariññeyyabhūtānañca buddhasaṅghaguṇānaṃ tagguṇasāmaññatāyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evañhi sakalabhāvavisiṭṭhavacanaṃ upapannaṃ hotīti. Ijjhantañca saheva ijjhati, na lokiyaṃ viya paṭipāṭiyā asammohapaṭivedhena paṭividdhattāti gahetabbaṃ. Padīpassa viya hi ekakkhaṇeyeva maggassa catukiccasādhananti. Ye pana vadanti ‘‘saraṇagamanaṃ nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā na pavattati, maggassa adhigatattā pana adhigatameva taṃ hoti ekaccānaṃ tevijjādīnaṃ lokiyavijjādayo viyā’’ti, tesaṃ pana vacane lokiyameva saraṇagamanaṃ siyā, na lokuttaraṃ, tañca ayuttameva duvidhassāpi tassa icchitabbattā. Tadaṅgappahānena saraṇagamanupakkilesavikkhambhanaṃ. Ārammaṇato buddhādiguṇārammaṇaṃ hutvāti etthāpi vuttanayena attho, saraṇagamanupakkilesavikkhambhanato, ārammaṇato ca sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“世俗的皈依”即是此义。由“世尊是正自觉者”等语而得信。信为根本,即如前所说以信为先导。正是由俱生之力而作先导,方有说为根本之理;若离于信,则于佛等不可能有正见。所谓正见,乃依世间通力,以正智观见佛陀之善觉性、法之善法性、僧伽之善修行性。由“获得信”一句,显明纵然离于正见,信亦为世俗皈依;由“信为根本的正见”一句,则显明依信为近缘而有如前所述之慧。因为世俗皈依有二种:与智相应及与智不相应。其中,前句摄取了如被母亲等鼓动的孩童那样与智不相应的皈依;后句则摄取了与智相应的皈依。为显此二者正是福行事的差别相,故说“于十福行事中,称为见正直业”。盖正见之所以有见正直业之义,乃取“由缘令自身之见正直”之义;而信亦具此义,乃取“依此令见正直”之义。此处,取信与正见,亦摄取了以他们为主的心之生起;而以如前所述的“见正直业”一词为具格,便成就了前文“以彼为归趣之相而生起的心”之说。然而,信与正见被分别摄取,当知是因为与之相应的心生起,以他们为主。显示巴利原文
Tanti lokiyasaraṇagamanaṃ. ‘‘Sammāsambuddho bhagavā’’tiādinā saddhāpaṭilābho. Saddhāmūlikāti yathāvuttasaddhāpubbaṅgamā. Sahajātavasena pubbaṅgamatāyeva hi tammūlikatā saddhāvirahitassa buddhādīsu sammādassanassa asambhavato. Sammādiṭṭhi nāma buddhasubuddhataṃ, dhammasudhammataṃ saṅghasuppaṭipannatañca lokiyāvabodhavasena sammā ñāyena dassanato. ‘‘Saddhāpaṭilābho’’ti iminā sammādiṭṭhivirahitāpi saddhā lokiyasaraṇagamananti dasseti, ‘‘saddhāmūlikā ca sammādiṭṭhī’’ti pana etena saddhūpanissayā yathāvuttā paññāti. Lokiyampi hi saraṇagamanaṃ duvidhaṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ, ñāṇavippayuttañca. Tattha paṭhamena padena mātādīhi ussāhitadārakādīnaṃ viya ñāṇavippayuttaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ gahitaṃ, dutiyena pana ñāṇasampayuttaṃ. Tadubhayameva puññakiriyavatthu visesabhāvena dassetuṃ ‘‘dasasu puññakiriyavatthūsu diṭṭhijukammanti vuccatī’’ti āha. Diṭṭhi eva attano paccayehi ujuṃ karīyatīti hi atthena sammādiṭṭhiyā diṭṭhijukammabhāvo, diṭṭhi ujuṃ karīyati etenāti atthena pana saddhāyapi. Saddhāsammādiṭṭhiggahaṇena cettha tappadhānassāpi cittuppādassa gahaṇaṃ, diṭṭhijukammapadena ca yathāvuttena karaṇasādhanena, evañca katvā ‘‘tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto cittuppādo’’ti heṭṭhā vuttavacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti, saddhāsammādiṭṭhīnaṃ pana visuṃ gahaṇaṃ taṃsampayuttacittuppādassa tappadhānatāyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“此”即指世俗的皈依,因出世间的皈依无有如此坏失。出世间皈依仅在道刹那依所述之理成就,并不存在那样的受持,故不可能有此坏失。“自我奉献”,即依此而奉献、投入、舍弃自我,亦即如前所说的、名为皈依的见正直业。“以彼为归趣者”,指以三宝为归宿、为依怙的人或心生起,其性即为“以彼为归趣性”,这也就是见正直业。“以皈依之意趣而为弟子状态”,即依此而进入名为弟子状态、内住状态的作持、止持等行。“以皈依之意趣而礼敬”,即依此而作礼敬;此处之礼敬,即是问讯、起迎、合掌及如法行,且于一切处,约义而言当知即是前述的见正直业。显示巴利原文
Tayidanti lokiyaṃ saraṇagamanameva paccāmasati lokuttarassa tathā bhedābhāvato. Tassa hi maggakkhaṇeyeva vuttanayena ijjhanato tathāvidhassa samādānassa avijjamānattā esa bhedo na sambhavatīti. Attā sanniyyātīyati appīyati pariccajīyati etenāti attasanniyyātanaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ saraṇagamanasaṅkhātaṃ diṭṭhijukammaṃ. Taṃ ratanattayaṃ parāyaṇaṃ paṭisaraṇametassāti tapparāyaṇo, puggalo, cittuppādo vā, tassa bhāvo tapparāyaṇatā, tadeva diṭṭhijukammaṃ. ‘‘Saraṇa’’nti adhippāyena sissabhāvaṃ antevāsikabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ vattapaṭivattādikaraṇaṃ upagacchati etenāti sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ. Saraṇagamanādhippāyeneva paṇipatati etenāti paṇipāto, paṇipatanañcettha abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammameva, sabbattha ca atthato yathāvuttadiṭṭhijukammameva veditabbaṃ.
为渡脱轮回之苦而舍弃自己的身体,称为“自我舍弃”。于“以彼为归趣性”等中,理亦同此。以利益教说的方式,法亦被视为具有师长的地位,如云“结果的芒果树与不结果的树,这两者皆是我的老师”等,故说“法的内住弟子”。“问讯”等词,是显示礼敬之义。“唯对佛等”这一限定,当知亦如狮子游戏之势,适用于自我奉献等处,由此遮止了其他对象。“因为这些”等语,是成立四种生起方式,或显示其理由。显示巴利原文
Saṃsāradukkhanittharaṇatthaṃ attano attabhāvassa pariccajanaṃ attapariccajanaṃ. Tapparāyaṇatādīsupi eseva nayo. Hitopadesakathāpariyāyena dhammassāpi ācariyabhāvo samudācarīyati ‘‘phalo ambo aphalo ca, te satthāro ubho mamā’’tiādīsu viyāti āha ‘‘dhammassa antevāsiko’’ti. ‘‘Abhivādanā’’tiādi paṇipātassa atthadassanaṃ. Buddhādīnaṃyevāti avadhāraṇassa attasanniyyātanādīsupi sīhagatikavasena adhikāro veditabbo. Evañhi tadaññanivattanaṃ kataṃ hotīti. ‘‘Imesañhī’’tiādi catudhā pavattanassa samatthanaṃ, kāraṇadassanaṃ vā.
如此以一种方式说明了自我奉献等之后,现在再以其他方式说明,因而开始说“再者”等。以此表明,自我奉献、以彼为归趣等四种,亦可通过其他同义语而成为自我奉献、以彼为归趣等,因为义理并无差别,正如“舍学、妄说未证得”等所示。“尽形寿”是中性分词,意为“尽此一生,我皆归投”。据说,大迦叶尊者自己现出家相,从大渡头婆罗门村出发,向前走了三由旬的路去迎接,在王舍城与那烂陀之间的多子树榕树下,见到世尊独自一人静坐。虽然那时他还不知道“这就是世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者”,却以“我若得见师,即得见世尊”等语而作了皈依。因此说“如大迦叶的皈依”。详细内容可参阅《迦叶相应》注。其中,“我若得见师,即得见世尊”的意思是:我若得见导师,即得见此世尊,因为于我而言,不可能有除此以外的导师。“我若得见善逝,即得见世尊”的意思是:我若得见因正行而善逝、名为善逝者,即得见此世尊,因为于我而言,不可能有除此以外的善逝。“我若得见正自觉者,即得见世尊”的意思是:我若得见因自己正确觉悟诸谛而名为正自觉者,即得见此世尊,因为于我而言,不可能有除此以外的正自觉者。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ attasanniyyātanādīni ekena pakārena dassetvā idāni aparehipi pakārehi dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ, etena attasanniyyātanatapparāyaṇatādīnaṃ catunnaṃ pariyāyantarehipi attasanniyyātanatapparāyaṇatādi katameva hoti atthassa abhinnattā yathā taṃ ‘‘sikkhāpaccakkhānaabhūtārocanānī’’ti dasseti. Jīvitapariyantikanti bhāvanapuṃsakavacanaṃ, yāvajīvaṃ gacchāmīti attho. Mahākassapo kira sayameva pabbajitavesaṃ gahetvā mahātitthabrāhmaṇagāmato nikkhamitvā gacchanto tigāvutamaggaṃ paccuggamanaṃ katvā antarā ca rājagahaṃ, antarā ca nāḷandaṃ bahuputtakanigrodharukkhamūle ekakameva nisinnaṃ bhagavantaṃ passitvā ‘‘ayaṃ bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti ajānantoyeva ‘‘satthārañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyya’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.154) saraṇagamanamakāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mahākassapassa saraṇagamanaṃ viyā’’ti. Vitthāro kassapasaṃyuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.154) gahetabbo. Tattha satthārañcavatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyyanti sace ahaṃ satthāraṃ passeyyaṃ, imaṃ bhagavantaṃyeva passeyyaṃ. Na hi me ito aññena satthārā bhavituṃ sakkā. Sugatañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyyanti sace ahaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā suṭṭhu gatattā sugataṃ nāma passeyyaṃ, imaṃ bhagavantaṃyeva passeyyaṃ. Na hi me ito aññena sugatena bhavituṃ sakkā. Sammāsambuddhañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyyanti sace ahaṃ sammā sāmañca saccāni buddhattā sammāsambuddhaṃ nāma passeyyaṃ, imaṃ bhagavantaṃyeva passeyyaṃ, na hi me ito aññena sammāsambuddhena bhavituṃ sakkāti ayamettha aṭṭhakathā. Sabbattha ca-saddo, vata-saddo ca padapūraṇamattaṃ, ce-saddena vā bhavitabbaṃ ‘‘sace’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.154) vuttattā. Vata-saddo ca passitukāmatāya ekaṃsatthaṃ dīpetītipi yujjati.
“我即彼”等,出自《经集》中的《阿罗婆迦经》。在那里,虽然他的皈依是依道而得的,但为了显示须陀洹的状态,以及为了显示与净信相应的状态,他如此分说语句,这是该处注释书所说的。“从村至村”意为从一天村至另一天村,或指天神的或小或大的村庄,也有此义。“从城至城”此处也是同样的道理。“以及法的善法性”意为:赞叹了佛陀的善觉性、法的善法性、僧伽的善修行性之后,以“与”字表示合集,并以余文显示其义,即“我礼敬正觉者,成为法音宣流者而行游”。显示巴利原文
‘‘So aha’’ntiādi suttanipāte āḷavakasutte. Tattha kiñcāpi maggeneva tassa saraṇagamanamāgataṃ, sotāpannabhāvadassanatthaṃ, pana pasādānurūpadassanatthañca evaṃ vācaṃ bhindatīti tadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.181) vuttaṃ. Gāmā gāmanti aññasmā devagāmā aññaṃ devagāmaṃ, devatānaṃ vā khuddakaṃ, mahantañca gāmantipi attho. Purā puranti etthāpi eseva nayo. Dhammassa ca sudhammatanti buddhassa subuddhataṃ, dhammassa sudhammataṃ, saṅghassa suppaṭipannatañca abhitthavitvāti saha samuccayena, pāṭhasesena ca attho, sambuddhaṃ namassamāno dhammaghosako hutvā vicarissāmīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“Āḷavaka等”:以“等”字也包含了Sātāgira、Hemavata等。难道这些Āḷavaka等不是已证得道果,以道而成就皈依吗?为何说他们是以彼为依处的皈依呢?因为即使是以道成就皈依的他们,也显示了以彼为依处的行相。因为“我将游化……乃至……正法”(《相应部》1.246;《经集》194)、“我们将游化,从村到村,从山到山……乃至……正法”(《经集》182),这些语句显示了以彼为依处的行相。因此,应知这是不观待皈依的差别,仅指出宣说的行相而如此说的。“那时”:即在被问“如何是婆罗门”等八种问题时,以“知宿住者”等回答的终结之时。此即《中部·梵寿经》(《中部》2.394)中的“遍触”即遍满接触。“遍抚”即遍擦拭。如此,敬礼也应被理解为:如此,以最极恭敬的方式,敬礼也应被理解。显示巴利原文
Āḷavakādīnanti ādi-saddena sātāgirahemavatādīnampi saṅgaho. Nanu ca ete āḷavakādayo adhigatamaggattā maggeneva āgatasaraṇagamanā, kasmā tesaṃ tapparāyaṇatāsaraṇagamanaṃ vuttanti? Maggenāgatasaraṇagamanehipi tehi tapparāyaṇatākārassa paveditattā. ‘‘So ahaṃ vicarissāmi…pe… sudhammataṃ, (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 194) te mayaṃ vicarissāma, gāmā gāmaṃ nagā nagaṃ…pe… sudhammata’’nti (su. ni. 182) ca hi etehi tapparāyaṇatākāro pavedito. Tasmā saraṇagamanavisesamanapekkhitvā pavedanākāramattaṃ upadisantena evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Athāti ‘‘kathaṃ kho brāhmaṇo hotī’’tiādinā puṭṭhassa aṭṭhavidhapañhassa ‘‘pubbenivāsaṃ yo vedī’’tiādinā byākaraṇapariyosānakāle. Idañhi majjhimapaṇṇāsake brahmāyusutte (ma. ni. 2.394) paricumbatīti pariphusati . Parisambāhatīti parimajjati. Evampi paṇipāto daṭṭhabboti evampi paramanipaccakārena paṇipāto daṭṭhabbo.
而此处的“那个”即指敬礼。在“以亲属……等之力”中,因复合词之后可听闻到“之力”一词,故应分别连接为:以亲属之力、以恐惧之力、以师长之力、以应供养者之力。其中,“以亲属之力”即因亲属的身份之力。这是以状态为体的表述,或因所指的唯是此状态本身,故而省略“状态”一词。其余诸力也是如此。这些与敬礼一词的关联在于:依这些力,敬礼有四种。因此说“以应供养者之力的敬礼”,意思是因应供养者这一身份为因的敬礼。“其余”即指以亲属身份等为因的敬礼。“唯以最胜之力”等是对此义的论证。现在,为了次第详尽地阐明“非以其余”等已说的三种义理,故说“因此”等。“或是释迦族”是从父系的角度显示亲属家族,“或是拘利族”是从母系显示。“敬礼”是对敬礼行为本身的表征语。“为国王所供养”即被国王们供养,或指国王们的供养,如“为村庄所供养”的用法。因为语法学家在使用供养一词时,于主语处习惯用属格。“对世尊”即对处于菩萨位或已经成正觉的世尊。“已学得”即已学习的技艺。显示巴利原文
So panesāti paṇipāto. Ñāti…pe… vasenāti ettha ñātivasena, bhayavasena, ācariyavasena, dakkhiṇeyyavasenāti paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ dvandaparato suyyamānattā. Tattha ñātivasenāti ñātibhāvavasena. Bhāvappadhānaniddeso hi ayaṃ, bhāvalopaniddeso vā tabbhāvasseva adhippetattā. Evaṃ sesesupi paṇipātapadena cetesaṃ sambandho tabbasena paṇipātassa catubbidhattā. Tenāha ‘‘dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātenā’’ti, dakkhiṇeyyatāhetukena paṇipātenevāti attho. Itarehīti ñātibhāvādihetukehi paṇipātehi. ‘‘Seṭṭhavasenevā’’tiādi tassevatthassa samatthanaṃ . Idāni ‘‘na itarehī’’tiādinā vuttameva atthattayaṃ yathākkamaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sākiyo vā’’ti pitupakkhato ñātikuladassanaṃ, ‘‘koliyo vā’’ti pana mātupakkhato. Vandatīti paṇipātassa upalakkhaṇavacanaṃ. Rājapūjitoti rājūhi, rājūnaṃ vā pūjito yathā ‘‘gāmapūjito’’ti. Pūjāvacanapayoge hi kattari sāmivacanamicchanti saddavidū. Bhagavatoti bodhisattabhūtassa, buddhabhūtassa vā bhagavato. Uggahitanti sikkhitasippaṃ.
“分为四份”等:在《教授尸迦罗越经》(《长部》3.265)中,“住家”即居住在家中。此处因与不变词连用,故以业格表示处所义。“应从事事业”即应从事农耕、商贾等事业。因为家族的境况并非恒常不变,有时会因国王等因缘而生起灾祸,所以说“在灾祸生起时,将有用”——即心中作意“在灾祸生起时,将有用”,而应将财富储藏起来。然而,在这四份中,纵使是“应以一份受用财富”所说的那份,也应当布施给比丘们和贫苦旅人等,也应给予佣人、理发师等酬劳。这是关于财富受用的教诫,意谓他已学习了这样的教诫。应知这只是就现世而言的;纵使是以期望来世或导向出离为主的教诫,他也确实在行对应供养者的敬礼。“然而,有人”等,是对“唯以最胜之力而执取”所说义理的详细说明。显示巴利原文
‘‘Catudhā’’tiādi siṅgālovādasutte (dī. ni. 3.265) gharamāvasanti ghare vasanto, kammappavacanīyayogato cettha bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Kammaṃ payojayeti kasivāṇijjādikammaṃ payojeyya. Kulānañhi na sabbakālaṃ ekasadisaṃ vattati, kadāci rājādivasena āpadāpi uppajjati, tasmā ‘‘āpadāsu uppannāsu bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ manasi katvā nidhāpeyyāti āha ‘‘āpadāsu bhavissatī’’ti. Imesu pana catūsu koṭṭhāsesu ‘‘ekena bhoge bhuñjeyyā’’ti vuttakoṭṭhāsatoyeva gahetvā bhikkhūnampi kapaṇaddhikādīnampi dānaṃ dātabbaṃ, pesakāranhāpitakādīnampi vetanaṃ dātabbanti ayaṃ bhogapariggahaṇānusāsanī, evarūpaṃ anusāsaniṃ uggahetvāti attho. Idañhi diṭṭhadhammikaṃyeva sandhāya vadati, samparāyikaṃ, pana niyyānikaṃ vā anusāsaniṃ paccāsisantopi dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātameva karoti nāmāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Yo panā’’tiādi ‘‘seṭṭhavaseneva…pe… gaṇhātī’’ti vuttassatthassa vitthāravacanaṃ.
而“如是”等,是对“唯以最胜之力而破”这一所说的简别显示。由于义理的需要而产生了性、数、格的转变,故也可连接为“已受皈依的优婆夷”等。如此类情形中。“即使出家者”中的“pi”字表示推度,故说“何况未出家者”。皈依不破,是因为未以最胜之力敬礼。“同样地”是引出下文的介词,连接“皈依不破”。“因被国家供养”即被国家或国民所供养。应知这是对因恐惧之力而应受敬礼这一事实本身的论证,并非显示不破的原因;其不破的原因在于未以最胜之力敬礼,因为已说“唯以最胜之力而破”。“以最胜之力”意指依世间最上应供养者的最胜身份之力。因此说“此人敬礼:‘此是世间最上应供养者。’”即使敬礼外道,皈依也不破,何况其他。皈依的类别即皈依的区分;此处因与区分相关,也能轻易显示不破,故作了不破的显示。显示巴利原文
‘‘Eva’’ntiādi pana ‘‘seṭṭhavasena ca bhijjatī’’ti vuttassa byatirekadassanaṃ. Atthavasā liṅgavibhattivipariṇāmoti katvā gahitasaraṇāya upāsikāya vātipi yojetabbaṃ. Evamīdisesu. Pabbajitampīti pi-saddo sambhāvanatthoti vuttaṃ ‘‘pageva apabbajita’’nti. Saraṇagamanaṃ na bhijjati seṭṭhavasena avanditattā. Tathāti anukaḍḍhanatthe nipāto ‘‘saraṇagamanaṃ na bhijjatī’’ti. Raṭṭhapūjitattāti raṭṭhe, raṭṭhavāsīnaṃ vā pūjitattā. Tayidaṃ bhayavasena vanditabbabhāvasseva samatthanaṃ, na tu abhedassa kāraṇadassanaṃ, tassa pana kāraṇaṃ seṭṭhavasena avanditattāti veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhi ‘‘seṭṭhavasena ca bhijjatī’’ti. Seṭṭhavasenāti loke aggadakkhiṇeyyatāya seṭṭhabhāvavasenāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ loke aggadakkhiṇeyyoti vandatī’’ti. Titthiyampi vandato na bhijjati, pageva itaraṃ. Saraṇagamanappabhedoti saraṇagamanavibhāgo, tabbibhāgasambandhato cettha sakkā abhedopi sukhena dassetunti abhedadassanaṃ kataṃ.
出世间皈依即是圣道,四种沙门果则是作为异熟果而说。一切苦的灭尽,即整个轮回之苦完全止息、不再生起的涅槃。在此,应知与业相似的果是异熟果,与之相反的果则是功德果。正如稻种等的果实,那些与种子相似的称为异熟,并获得异熟的名称,而根、芽、叶、干、茎则不如此;同样,善与不善的果,因是无色法、有所缘而相似,故称为异熟,并获得异熟的名称,而那些虽由业所生但与业不相似的其他法,则称为功德,仅获得功德的名称。以“此已说”等,引用《法句经》中阿耆达多婆罗门本事经文来显示。显示巴利原文
Ariyamaggo eva lokuttarasaraṇagamananti cattāri sāmaññaphalāni vipākaphalabhāvena vuttāni. Sabbadukkhakkhayoti sakalassa vaṭṭadukkhassa anuppādanirodho nibbānaṃ. Ettha ca kammasadisaṃ vipākaphalaṃ, tabbiparītaṃ ānisaṃsaphalanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathā hi sālibījādīnaṃ phalāni taṃsadisāni vipakkāni nāma honti, vipākaniruttiñca labhanti, na mūlaṅkurapattakkhandhanāḷāni, evaṃ kusalākusalānaṃ phalāni arūpadhammabhāvena, sārammaṇabhāvena ca sadisāni vipakkāni nāma honti, vipākaniruttiñca labhanti, na tadaññāni kammanibbattānipi kammaasadisāni, tāni pana ānisaṃsāni nāma honti, ānisaṃsaniruttimattañca labhantīti. ‘‘Vuttañheta’’ntiādinā dhammapade aggidattabrāhmaṇavatthupāḷimāharitvā dasseti.
“Yo ca”中的“ca”字在此表简别,意为“然而那个”。此处意趣如下:在表简别义时,若说“众人前往众多庇护所,诸如山岳与丛林”等(《法句经》188颂),那并非安稳的庇护所,不是最上的庇护所;而依此庇护所,并不能从一切苦中解脱。既然如此,那么究竟什么事物是安稳的庇护所,是最上的庇护所?依什么事物为庇护所,才能从一切苦中解脱呢?显示巴利原文
Yo cāti ettha ca-saddo byatireke, yo panāti attho. Tatrāyamadhippāyo – byatirekatthadīpane yadi ‘‘bahuṃ ve saraṇaṃ yanti, pabbatāni vanāni cā’’tiādinā (dha. pa. 188) vuttaṃ khemaṃ saraṇaṃ na hoti, na uttamaṃ saraṇaṃ, etañca saraṇamāgamma sabbadukkhā na pamuccati, evaṃ sati kiṃ nāma vatthu khemaṃ saraṇaṃ hoti, uttamaṃ saraṇaṃ, kiṃ nāma vatthuṃ saraṇamāgamma sabbadukkhā pamuccatīti ce?
然而,若有人皈依了佛、法、僧……(省略)
这皈依才是安稳的,这皈依是最上的;
依此皈依,便从一切苦中解脱。(法句经190-192)
显示巴利原文 Yo ca buddhañca dhammañca, saṅghañca saraṇaṃ gato…pe… Etaṃ kho saraṇaṃ khemaṃ, etaṃ saraṇamuttamaṃ; Etaṃ saraṇamāgamma, sabbadukkhā pamuccatīti. (dha. pa. 190-92);
在如是诸情形中。为阐明出世间皈依不动摇、不变异,世俗的皈依因礼敬外道等而动摇、变异,故说“以正慧观见四圣谛”。此处为使语声流畅,将“sammā”略作短音。“苦”等语是显示所说“四圣谛”的体性。“超越苦”即苦灭。“导向苦的止息”即导向苦灭。“此”即指如此以“以正慧观见四圣谛”(法句经190)所说、名为出世间皈依的圣谛之见。“kho”字是决定义,应通连于三个词。显示巴利原文
Evamīdisesu. Lokiyassa saraṇagamanassa aññatitthiyāvandanādinā kuppanato, calanato ca akuppaṃ acalaṃ lokuttarameva saraṇagamanaṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘cattāri ariyasaccāni, sammappaññāya passatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Vācāsiliṭṭhatthañcettha sammāsaddassa rassattaṃ. ‘‘Dukkha’’ntiādi ‘‘cattāri ariyasaccānī’’ti vuttassa sarūpadassanaṃ. Dukkhassa ca atikkamanti dukkhanirodhaṃ. Dukkhūpasamagāminanti dukkhanirodhagāmiṃ. ‘‘Eta’’nti ‘‘cattāri…pe… passatī’’ti (dha. pa. 190) evaṃ vuttaṃ lokuttarasaraṇagamanasaṅkhātaṃ ariyasaccadassanaṃ. Kho-saddo avadhāraṇattho padattayepi yojetabbo.
“不以常等执取”,即不以“常”等见执取的方式。语音学者认为,此处应当用“iti”来指示,却用了“to”音。以“曾如是说”等语,引用了《智分别》等(《中部》3.126;《增支部》1.268)中出现的经文作为证明。“无因”是对生起因的否定;“无机会”是对缘因的否定。两者都是对原因的否定。“以此”即以此原因。“见具足者”即道见具足者,也就是须陀洹。“任何行”,指于四地中的有为行中,哪怕只是一个行。“以常执取”即执取为“常”。“以乐执取”即依我见执取为“乐”,如说:“我是一向乐者、无病者,死后亦然。”(《长部》1.76)然而,圣弟子能以不与见相应的善心,将某些行执取为乐,犹如被醉象惊吓的婆罗门,为平息热恼而执取粪便地为乐。在“我”的部分,为包含遍业等施设,故不说“行”而说“法”。如《附随》中所说:显示巴利原文
Niccato anupagamanādivasenāti ‘‘nicca’’nti aggahaṇādivasena, itinā niddisitabbehi to-saddamicchanti saddavidū. ‘‘Vuttañheta’’ntiādinā ñāṇavibhaṅgādīsu (ma. ni. 3.126; a. ni. 1.268) āgataṃ pāḷiṃ sādhakabhāvena āharati. Aṭṭhānanti janakahetupaṭikkhepo. Anavakāsoti paccayahetupaṭikkhepo. Ubhayenāpi kāraṇameva paṭikkhipati. Yanti yena kāraṇena. Diṭṭhisampannoti maggadiṭṭhiyā sampanno sotāpanno. Kañci saṅkhāranti catubhūmakesu saṅkhatasaṅkhāresu ekampi saṅkhāraṃ. Niccato upagaccheyyāti ‘‘nicco’’ti gaṇheyya. Sukhato upagaccheyyāti ‘‘ekantasukhī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.76) evaṃ attadiṭṭhivasena ‘‘sukho’’ti gaṇheyya, diṭṭhivippayuttacittena pana ariyasāvako pariḷāhavūpasamatthaṃ mattahatthiparittāsito cokkhabrāhmaṇo viya ukkārabhūmiṃ kañci saṅkhāraṃ sukhato upagacchati. Attavāre kasiṇādipaṇṇattisaṅgahaṇatthaṃ ‘‘saṅkhāra’’nti avatvā ‘‘dhamma’’nti vuttaṃ. Yathāha parivāre –
“一切行无常,是苦、无我,且是有为;涅槃与施设,决定是无我。”(《附随》257)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Aniccā sabbe saṅkhārā, dukkhānattā ca saṅkhatā;
然而,在这三个部分中,应知圣弟子的分齐唯依四地,或唯依三地。因为凡夫所执取的“常、乐、我”任何事物,圣弟子都执取为“无常、苦、无我”,从而解开其执取。显示巴利原文
Nibbānañceva paññatti, anattā iti nicchayā’’ti. (pari. 257);
然而,在这三种场合,圣弟子的界限应知唯依四地而划分,或唯依三地而划分。凡夫将一切事物执取为“常、乐、我”,圣弟子则皆执取为“无常、苦、无我”,由此解开其执取。显示巴利原文
Imesu pana tīsupi vāresu ariyasāvakassa catubhūmakavaseneva paricchedo veditabbo, tebhūmakavaseneva vā. Yaṃ yañhi puthujjano ‘‘niccaṃ sukhaṃ attā’’ti gāhaṃ gaṇhāti, taṃ taṃ ariyasāvako ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā’’ti gaṇhanto gāhaṃ viniveṭheti.
所谓“母”,即生母;“父”,即生父;“阿拉汉”,则是指身为人类的漏尽者。然而,圣弟子还会夺取其他众生的生命吗?这也是绝无可能的。即使为了转轮王位或自身性命,他也不会夺取任何生命。即便如此,为了显示凡夫状态的极大过患与圣者状态的大威力,方作如是说,应如此理解。“心怀嗔怒”者,指以杀心染污其心者,或心已被染污者。“令出血”,指在活的身体上,哪怕只让小苍蝇吸食的血量,也会造成出血。“分裂僧团”,指以五种方式分裂共住、同一界内的僧团,即所谓:“优波离,僧团以五种方式分裂:以羯磨、以诵经、以宣称、以唱告、以取筹。”(律藏·附随458)“认其他导师”,指从此以后,认取外道师为“此是我师”,这是绝无可能的。“成就生存”,指成就善趣生存,此为异熟果。“成就财富”,指成就人间财富与天界财富,此为现法受用的果报。以“即如所说”等,引《天相应》等经文(相应部1.37)为证。显示巴利原文
‘‘Mātara’’ntiādīsu janikā mātā, janako pitā, manussabhūto khīṇāsavo arahāti adhippeto. Kiṃ pana ariyasāvako tehi aññampi pāṇaṃ jīvitā voropeyyāti? Etampi aṭṭhānameva. Cakkavattirajjasakajīvitahetupi hi so taṃ jīvitā na voropeyya, tathāpi puthujjanabhāvassa mahāsāvajjatādassanatthaṃ ariyabhāvassa ca balavatāpakāsanatthaṃ evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paduṭṭhacittoti vadhakacittena padūsanacitto, padūsitacitto vā. Lohitaṃ uppādeyyāti jīvamānakasarīre khuddakamakkhikāya pivanamattampi lohitaṃ uppādeyya. Saṅghaṃ bhindeyyāti samānasaṃvāsakaṃ samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhitaṃ saṅghaṃ pañcahi kāraṇehi bhindeyya, vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘pañcahupāli ākārehi saṅgho bhijjati kammena, uddesena, voharanto, anussāvanena, salākaggāhenā’’ti (pari. 458) aññaṃ satthāranti ito aññaṃ titthakaraṃ ‘‘ayaṃ me satthā’’ti evaṃ gaṇheyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti attho. Bhavasampadāti sugatibhavena sampadā, idaṃ vipākaphalaṃ. Bhogasampadāti manussabhogadevabhogehi sampadā, idaṃ pana ānisaṃsaphalaṃ. ‘‘Vuttañheta’’ntiādinā devatāsaṃyuttādipāḷiṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.37) sādhakabhāvena dasseti.
“Gatāse”中的“se”仅为小品词。“他们不往恶趣”是指那些已皈依佛者,以此因缘,不会堕入恶趣。“人”一词,因偈颂的结构而作离合释,意为“生于人众中”。“天众”,指天人群,或天城,即“诸天之身聚集于此”之义。显示巴利原文
Gatāseti ettha se-iti nipātamattaṃ. Na te gamissanti apāyabhūminti te buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā tannimittaṃ apāyaṃ na gamissanti. Mānusanti ca gāthābandhavasena visaññoganiddeso, manussesu jātanti attho. Devakāyanti devasaṅghaṃ, devapuraṃ vā ‘‘devānaṃ kāyo samūho etthā’’ti katvā.
以“还有另一种”等词,引《六处品·目犍连相应》(相应部 4.341)中所说的另一种果报,意即还有另一种果报是大目犍连长老所说。其他诸天,指未皈依的诸天。以十种理由,即依十种原因。“以天”等语,是显示其形态。超越,即征服、超越而住立。“此理亦然”即指示“天帝释,皈依法实为善哉”(相应部 4.341)这段经文。名为《鞞罗摩经》的经典,收于《增支部》九集。此经与布施说法相关,因为经中那位名叫鞞罗摩的菩萨婆罗门,具足了超越种姓、家族、容貌、财富、信、慧等界限的广大功德,曾为八万四千国王的老师(增支部 9.20)。其中,他以相当于一迦梨沙量四分之一的八万四千个金钵、银钵、铜钵,依次装满银、金、金币,并饰以一切庄严具;又布施了八万四千头象、八万四千匹马、八万四千辆车、八万四千头乳牛、八万四千名少女、八万四千张床座、八万四千俱胝套衣服,以及无量种类的嚼食、啖食等。如此连续进行了七年零七个月的大布施,称为鞞罗摩大布施。然而,布施给一位须陀洹的果报比这更大;布施给一百位须陀洹,不如布施给一位斯陀含;布施给一位阿那含,不如布施给一位阿罗汉。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aparampī’’tiādinā saḷāyatanavagge moggallānasaṃyutte (saṃ. ni. 4.341) āgataṃ aññampi phalamāha, aparampi phalaṃ mahāmoggallānattherena vuttanti attho. Aññe deveti asaraṇaṅgate deve. Dasahi ṭhānehīti dasahi kāraṇehi. ‘‘Dibbenā’’tiādi tassarūpadassanaṃ. Adhigaṇhantīti abhibhavanti atikkamitvā tiṭṭhanti. ‘‘Esa nayo’’ti iminā ‘‘sādhu kho devānaminda dhammasaraṇagamanaṃ hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341) suttapadaṃ atidisati. Velāmasuttaṃ nāma aṅguttaranikāye navanipāte jātigottarūpabhogasaddhāpaññādīhi mariyādavelātikkantehi uḷārehi guṇehi samannāgatattā velāmanāmakassa bodhisattabhūtassa caturāsītisahassarājūnaṃ ācariyabrāhmaṇassa dānakathāpaṭisaññuttaṃ suttaṃ (a. ni. 9.20) tattha hi karīsassa catutthabhāgappamāṇānaṃ caturāsītisahassasaṅkhyānaṃ suvaṇṇapātirūpiyapātikaṃsapātīnaṃ yathākkamaṃ rūpiyasuvaṇṇa hiraññapūrānaṃ, sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitānaṃ, caturāsītiyā hatthisahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā assasahassānaṃ, caturāsītiyā rathasahassānaṃ, caturāsītiyā dhenusahassānaṃ, caturāsītiyā kaññāsahassānaṃ, caturāsītiyā pallaṅkasahassānaṃ, caturāsītiyā vatthakoṭisahassānaṃ, aparimāṇassa ca khajjabhojjādibhedassa āhārassa pariccajanavasena sattamāsādhikāni sattasaṃvaccharāni nirantaraṃ pavattavelāmamahādānato ekassa sotāpannassa dinnadānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ, tato sataṃsotāpannānaṃ dinnadānato ekassa sakadāgāmino, tato ekassa anāgāmino, tato ekassa arahato, tato ekassa paccekabuddhassa, tato sammāsambuddhassa, tato buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa dinnadānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ, tato cātuddisaṃ saṅghaṃ uddissa vihārakaraṇaṃ, tato saraṇagamanaṃ mahapphalataranti ayamattho pakāsito. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“居士,如果鞞罗摩婆罗门曾行大布施,而有人供养一位见具足者,此果报比那更大;若供养一百位见具足者,若供养一位斯陀含,此果报比那更大……”(增支部 9.20)显示巴利原文
‘‘Yaṃ gahapati velāmo brāhmaṇo dānaṃ adāsi mahādānaṃ, yo cekaṃ diṭṭhisampannaṃ bhojeyya, idaṃ tato mahapphalataraṃ, yo ca sataṃ diṭṭhisampannānaṃ bhojeyya, yo cekaṃ sakadāgāmiṃ bhojeyya, idaṃ tato mahapphalatara’’ntiādi (a. ni. 9.20).
应知,以此从最上界限的角度,显示了唯独出世间皈依的果报。诚如《鞞罗摩经注》所说:“‘应皈依’中,意指由道所证得的不退转皈依。另有人则说:‘因将自己奉献而出与,故皈依的果报比彼更大。’”(增支部注 3.9.20)然而,在《究罗檀头经注》中将说:“又因皈依乃是舍弃生命以奉三宝的福业,能给予天界成就,故应知为果报更大、功德更大。”(长部注 1.350, 351)依此理趣,世间皈依的果报在此亦已显示,应如此领会。阿阇梨法护长老(长部复注 1.250)亦认可此义,因在此处及其他《中部复注》等中无差别地宣说故;阿阇梨舍利弗长老在《精义灯》(精义复注·毗兰若品释 15)及《增支部复注》中,以两者共通之说,亦当赞同此义。然而,另有人言:“《究罗檀头经注》(长部复注 1.249)亦唯说示出世间皈依的果报。”此说不合道理,因彼处并未如此宣说。以“因……给予”等,乃依两者共通之理,于彼处说示了两者的果报。在“《鞞罗摩经》等”中,以“等”字应知包含了《最胜信经》、《恰得童子天宫》等(天宫事 886 起)。显示巴利原文
Iminā ca ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato lokuttarasseva saraṇagamanassa phalaṃ dassitanti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi velāmasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘saraṇaṃ gaccheyyāti ettha maggenāgataṃ anivattanasaraṇaṃ adhippetaṃ, apare panāhu ‘attānaṃ niyyātetvā dinnattā saraṇagamanaṃ tato mahapphalatara’nti vutta’’nti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.9.20) kūṭadantasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vakkhati ‘‘yasmā ca saraṇagamanaṃ nāma tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ jīvitapariccāgamayaṃ puññakammaṃ saggasampattiṃ deti, tasmā mahapphalatarañca mahānisaṃsatarañcāti veditabba’’nti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.350, 351) iminā pana nayena lokiyassāpi saraṇagamanassa phalaṃ idha dassitamevāti gahetabbaṃ. Ācariyadhammapālattherenapi (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.250) hi ayamevattho icchitoti viññāyati idha ceva aññāsu ca majjhimāgamaṭīkādīsu avisesatoyeva vuttattā, ācariyasāriputtattherenāpi ayamattho abhimato siyā sāratthadīpaniyaṃ, (sārattha. ṭī. verañjakaaṇḍavaṇṇanā.15) aṅguttaraṭīkāyañca tadubhayasādhāraṇavacanato. Apare pana vadanti ‘‘kūṭadantasuttaṭṭhakathāyampi (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.249) lokuttarasseva saraṇagamanassa phalaṃ vutta’’nti, tadayuttameva tathā avuttattā. ‘‘Yasmā…pe… detī’’ti hi tadubhayasādhāraṇakāraṇavasena tadubhayassāpi phalaṃ tattha vuttanti. Velāmasuttādīnanti ettha ādisaddena (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) aggappasādasuttachattamāṇavakavimānādīnaṃ (vi. va. 886 ādayo) saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
所谓无明,即是对三宝的功德无所了知,因而于此陷于痴迷。所谓疑,即是“是佛呢,还是非佛呢”等(长部注 2.216)的疑惑。所谓邪智,即是将三宝的功德虚构成非功德而生起的颠倒执取。以“等”字兼摄不恭敬、不尊重的说法者。被染污,即是成为染污、有垢秽的。“无大光辉”等也是染污的同义词。其中,“无大光辉”即是无大光明,意为不清净、不洁白;“无大广照”即是无大威力,意为非殊胜、非崇高。有过失的,即依渴爱、邪见等而有过失。为依果报显示此义,说“非可爱果”,意为因有过失故,成为不可意的果报。世间的皈依,如同受持学处,没有固定的时间界限,只以尽形寿为限,因此随着诸蕴的坏灭而坏灭。而此坏灭因无渴爱、邪见等,故是无过失的,所以说“于命终时是无过失的”。此处的“彼”即指这无过失的皈依坏灭。虽然是无过失的,但亦不属于可爱果,更遑论非可爱果,因为它是无果报的。因为它并非不善,仅仅是坏灭而已,这是其意旨。“于他生”即是于其他生存中。显示巴利原文
Aññāṇaṃ nāma vatthuttayassa guṇānamajānanaṃ tattha sammoho. Saṃsayo nāma ‘‘buddho nu kho, na nu kho’’tiādinā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.216) vicikicchā. Micchāñāṇaṃ nāma vatthuttayassa guṇānaṃ aguṇabhāvaparikappanena viparītaggāho. Ādisaddena anādarāgāravādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Saṃkilissatīti saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ malīnaṃ bhavati. Na mahājutikantiādipi saṃkilesapariyāyo eva. Tattha na mahājutikanti na mahujjalaṃ, aparisuddhaṃ apariyodātanti attho. Na mahāvipphāranti na mahānubhāvaṃ, apaṇītaṃ anuḷāranti attho. Sāvajjoti taṇhādiṭṭhādivasena sadoso. Tadeva phalavasena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘aniṭṭhaphalo’’ti vuttaṃ, sāvajjattā akantiphalo hotīti attho. Lokiyasaraṇagamanaṃ sikkhāsamādānaṃ viya agahitakālaparicchedaṃ jīvitapariyantameva hoti, tasmā tassa khandhabhedena bhedo, so ca taṇhādiṭṭhādivirahitattā adosoti āha ‘‘anavajjo kālakiriyāya hotī’’ti. Soti anavajjo saraṇagamanabhedo. Satipi anavajjatte iṭṭhaphalopi na hoti, pageva aniṭṭhaphalo avipākattā. Na hi taṃ akusalaṃ hoti, atha kho bhedanamattanti adhippāyo. Bhavantarepīti aññasmimpi bhave.
因为“持”字具有双宾语的作用,“优婆塞”一词也是业,而且是就表相而说的业。为显示这一意义,所以说“应如此记持:此是优婆塞”。而“应记持”的意思是应了知。在此,了知即是知,因此用“应知”来显示此义。“为了善巧于优婆塞的类别”,即是为了善巧于安立优婆塞的分类。“谁是优婆塞”是询问本质,即问:名为优婆塞者,以什么为特征?“为何”是询问原因,意旨是:以什么发生之相为由,优婆塞一词于此人得以确立?因此说“为何称为优婆塞?”因为对于词语所指的对象,其发生之相正是该词义得以成立的原因。“他的戒是什么”是询问誓戒的受持,意为:此优婆塞的戒是怎样的?通过受持多少誓戒,此人可称为戒具足者?“他的活命是什么”是询问业的受持,问:他的正命是什么?通过受持何种业,他的活命得以成立?然而,此正命是由远离邪命而成就的,故而也分别说明邪命。“什么是坏失”是询问对此二者的违犯,意为:此优婆塞的戒与活命的坏失是什么?因为总说时,紧接的即是规则或遮止,所以取这紧接的。“什么是具足”是询问对此二者的正确行道,依前述之理,意为:此优婆塞的戒与活命的具足是显示巴利原文
Dharasaddassa dvikammikattā ‘‘upāsaka’’nti idampi kammameva, tañca kho ākāraṭṭhāneti atthamattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘upāsako ayanti evaṃdhāretū’’ti vuttaṃ. Dhāretūti ca upadhāretūti attho. Upadhāraṇañcettha jānanamevāti dasseti ‘‘jānātū’’ti iminā. Upāsakavidhikosallatthanti upāsakabhāvavidhānakosallatthaṃ. Ko upāsakoti sarūpapucchā, kiṃ lakkhaṇo upāsako nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmāti hetupucchā, kena pavattinimittena upāsakasaddo tasmiṃ puggale niruḷhoti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘kasmā upāsakoti vuccatī’’ti. Saddassa hi abhidheyye pavattinimittameva tadatthassa tabbhāvakāraṇaṃ. Kimassa sīlanti vatasamādānapucchā, kīdisaṃ assa upāsakassa sīlaṃ, kittakena vatasamādānenāyaṃ sīlasampanno nāma hotīti attho. Ko ājīvoti kammasamādānapucchā, ko assa sammāājīvo, kena kammasamādānena assa ājīvo sambhavatīti pucchati, so pana micchājīvassa parivajjanena hotīti micchājīvopi vibhajīyati. Kā vipattīti tadubhayesaṃ vippaṭipattipucchā, kā assa upāsakassa sīlassa, ājīvassa ca vipattīti attho. Sāmaññaniddiṭṭhe hi sati anantarasseva vidhi vā paṭisedho vāti anantarassa gahaṇaṃ. Kā sampattīti tadubhayesameva sammāpaṭipattipucchā, kā assa upāsakassa sīlassa, ājīvassa ca sampattīti vuttanayena attho. Sarūpavacanatthādisaṅkhātena pakārena kiratīti pakiṇṇaṃ, tadeva pakiṇṇakaṃ, anekākārena pavattaṃ atthavinicchayanti attho.
“任何人”指刹帝利、婆罗门等中的任何人,以此句显示,在此种姓等差别并非原因;而“已皈依”则显示,在此唯有皈依才是标准。又以“在家者”显示,优婆塞一词只适用于在家者,而非出家者。为了以《大品·相应部》中的《摩诃男经》(相应部 5.1033)证明此义,而说“曾如是说”等。其中,“从何”指从皈依佛等。世尊称呼自己小叔父善饭王之子、名为摩诃男的释迦王:“摩诃男!”“至此”意指:仅以这皈依佛等,就称为优婆塞,而非以种姓等为原因。虽然也有如多婆苏、跋利迦那样仅两句皈依语而成优婆塞的情况,但那时三所依处尚未存在,仅是偶尔有之,因此为了显示一切时通用的三语优婆塞身份,而说“已皈依”。因为他们后来也都成为三皈依者。在此,不应理解为:排斥其他,仅皈依一或二处者就称为优婆塞。应知,为了也阐明这一意义,才这样说。显示巴利原文
Yo kocīti khattiyabrāhmaṇādīsu yo koci, iminā padena akāraṇamettha jātiādivisesoti dasseti, ‘‘saraṇagato’’ti iminā pana saraṇagamanamevettha pamāṇanti. ‘‘Gahaṭṭho’’ti ca iminā āgārikesveva upāsakasaddo niruḷho, na pabbajjūpagatesūti. Tamatthaṃ mahāvaggasaṃyutte mahānāmasuttena (saṃ. ni. 5.1033) sādhento ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha yatoti buddhādisaraṇagamanato. Mahānāmāti attano cūḷapituno sukkodanassa puttaṃ mahānāmaṃ nāma sakyarājānaṃ bhagavā ālapati. Ettāvatāti ettakena buddhādisaraṇagamanena upāsako nāma hoti, na jātiādīhi kāraṇehīti adhippāyo. Kāmañca tapussabhallikānaṃ viya dvevācikaupāsakabhāvopi atthi, so pana tadā vatthuttayābhāvato kadāciyeva hotīti sabbadā pavattaṃ tevācikaupāsakabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saraṇagato’’ti vuttaṃ. Tepi hi pacchā tisaraṇagatā eva, na cettha sambhavati aññaṃ paṭikkhipitvā ekaṃ vā dve vā saraṇagato upāsako nāmāti imamatthampi ñāpetuṃ evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“由亲近侍奉”:即由于彼皈依,以及由于对此皈依恭敬、尊重、敬仰等而亲近侍奉,以此显示所作之义。因此说“因为他……”等。显示巴利原文
Upāsanatoti teneva saraṇagamanena, tattha ca sakkaccakāritāya gāravabahumānādiyogena payirupāsanato, iminā katvatthaṃ dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘so hī’’tiādi.
于“离”一词中,所谓“怨”是指杀生等恶戒,因将其消除、杀灭、破坏,故名为“离”,即五种远离,因此戒以远离为要。正如所引《摩诃男经》所说:“已离杀生……”等(相应部 5.1033),以“如……”等作为证明,并显示其本质:如同园丁仅以一种浇水的方式,既灌溉芒果树,又为沙门沐浴。如《芒果天宫》中所说(天宫事 1151 起)——显示巴利原文
Veramaṇiyoti ettha veraṃ vuccati pāṇātipātādidussīlyaṃ, tassa maṇanato hananato vināsanato veramaṇiyo nāma, pañca viratiyo viratipadhānattā tassa sīlassa. Tathā hi udāhaṭe mahānāmasutte vuttaṃ ‘‘pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hotī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.1033) ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādinā sādhakaṃ, sarūpañca dasseti yathā taṃ uyyānapālassa ekeneva udakapatiṭṭhānapayogena ambasecanaṃ, garusinānañca. Yathāha ambavimāne (vi. va. 1151 ādayo) –
“芒果被浇灌,沙门得沐浴,”
我亦广修无量福;
如是,他以喜悦遍满全身。
[“芒果得浇灌,沙门得沐浴;
广修众多福德,啊,生命真有果报!
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ambo ca sitto samaṇo ca nhāpito, Mayā ca puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappakaṃ; Iti so pītiyā kāyaṃ, sabbaṃ pharati attano’’ti. [‘‘Ambo ca siñcato āsi, samaṇo ca nahāpito; Bahuñca puññaṃ pasutaṃ, aho saphalaṃ jīvita’’nti. (idha ṭīkāyaṃ mūlapāṭho)]
所谓“如是”等,至此为止,即仅以远离五种怨为量。显示巴利原文
Evamīdisesu. Ettāvatāti ettakena pañcaveraviratimattena.
“邪贸易”即不正当的贸易,非正命之贸易,意为不适宜的贸易行为。“已断除”即通过不作而断除。“依法”即不偏离法,由此也遮止了以邪贸易谋生之外的其他非法谋生方式。“平等”即无偏邪,由此显示舍弃身邪行等恶行后,以身正行等善行而谋生。引述“此已说”等《增支部五集》中的经文,以作证成,并显示其自相。“贸易”指商人的买卖,即任何售卖行为,此处以阴性词表述。“武器贸易”即自己制作或令他人制作武器,或以所获武器进行售卖。“人口贸易”即贩卖人口。“肉贸易”即如同屠夫所为,饲养鹿、猪等,制成肉后售卖。“酒贸易”即调配任何酒类后将其售卖。“毒贸易”即调配或收集毒药后将其售卖。其中,武器贸易因为是伤害他人之因,故不可为;人口贸易因为是造成不自由之因;肉贸易因为是杀害之因;酒贸易因为是放逸之因;毒贸易因为是损害他人之因。显示巴利原文
Micchāvaṇijjāti ayuttavaṇijjā, na sammāvaṇijjā, asāruppavaṇijjakammānīti attho. Pahāyāti akaraṇeneva pajahitvā. Dhammenāti dhammato anapetena, tena micchāvaṇijjakammena ājīvanato aññampi adhammikaṃ ājīvanaṃ paṭikkhipati. Samenāti avisamena, tena kāyavisamādiduccaritaṃ vajjetvā kāyasamādinā sucaritena ājīvanaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Vuttañheta’’ntiādinā pañcaṅguttarapāḷimāharitvā sādhakaṃ, sarūpañca dasseti. Vāṇijānaṃ ayanti vaṇijjā, yassa kassaci vikkayo, itthiliṅgapadametaṃ. Satthavaṇijjāti āvudhabhaṇḍaṃ katvā vā kāretvā vā yathākataṃ paṭilabhitvā vā tassa vikkayo. Sattavaṇijjāti manussavikkayo. Maṃsavaṇijjāti sūnakārādayo viya migasūkarādike posetvā maṃsaṃ sampādetvā vikkayo. Majjavaṇijjāti yaṃ kiñci majjaṃ yojetvā tassa vikkayo. Visavaṇijjāti visaṃ yojetvā, saṅgahetvā vā tassa vikkayo. Tattha satthavaṇijjā paroparodhanimittatāya akaraṇīyāti vuttā, sattavaṇijjā abhujissabhāvakaraṇato, maṃsavaṇijjā vadhahetuto, majjavaṇijjā pamādaṭṭhānato, visavaṇijjā parūpaghātakāraṇato.
“即彼”是对前述具足远离五种怨相之戒、以及具足断除五种邪贸易等相之命的解说。“败坏”即破坏、毁坏。如此以戒与命的败坏显示优婆塞的败坏之后,再以不信等来显示,而说“又”等。“以此”即以此不信等邪行。“旃陀罗”即由下劣法所生起之义,是优婆塞旃陀罗。“垢”即以污秽之义,是优婆塞垢。“最卑劣”即以低劣之义,是优婆塞中最下劣者。“彼亦有”即彼不信等邪行,当知亦是彼优婆塞的败坏。为说明“什么是他们”,而说“他们”等。《优婆塞旃陀罗经》与《优婆塞宝经》载于《增支部·五集》中。其中,对佛等以及业、业果之信的颠倒,即邪解脱,是不信,具此者为不信者。依前述戒的败坏与命的败坏,为恶戒者。“依此所见所闻等,此名为吉祥”——如此依愚人所安立的、称为“喧闹”的所见所闻所觉吉祥,具此者即是喧闹吉祥者。“信受吉祥”即信受所见吉祥等种种吉祥,而不信受业,不信受业属自己。“从此之外”即从此一切知佛的教法之外,于外道法中。“而”字是无义之用,在一切处如“不信者”等中应作连接。“寻求应供者”即于恶行者中,以应受供养之想而寻求。“于彼处”即于外道法中;而“先作”……显示巴利原文
Tassevāti yathāvuttassa pañcaveramaṇilakkhaṇassa sīlassa ceva pañcamicchāvaṇijjādippahānalakkhaṇassa ājīvassa ca paṭiniddeso. Vipattīti bhedo, pakopo ca . Evaṃ sīlaājīvavipattivasena upāsakassa vipattiṃ dassetvā assaddhiyādivasenapi dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Yāyāti assaddhiyādivippaṭipattiyā. Caṇḍāloti nīcadhammajātikaṭṭhena upāsakacaṇḍālo. Malanti malīnaṭṭhena upāsakamalaṃ. Patikiṭṭhoti lāmakaṭṭhena upāsakanihīno. Sāpissāti sāpi assaddhiyādivippaṭipatti assa upāsakassa vipattīti veditabbā. Kā panāyanti vuttaṃ ‘‘te cā’’tiādi. Upāsakacaṇḍālasuttaṃ, (a. ni. 5.175) upāsakaratanasuttañca pañcaṅguttare. Tattha buddhādīsu, kammakammaphalesu ca saddhāvipariyāyo micchāvimokkho assaddhiyaṃ, tena samannāgato assaddho. Yathāvuttasīlavipattiājīvavipattivasena dussīlo. ‘‘Iminā diṭṭhādinā idaṃ nāma maṅgalaṃ hotī’’ti evaṃ bālajanaparikappitena kotūhalasaṅkhātena diṭṭhasutamutamaṅgalena samannāgato kotūhalamaṅgaliko. Maṅgalaṃ paccetīti diṭṭhamaṅgalādibhedaṃ maṅgalameva pattiyāyati no kammanti kammassakataṃ no pattiyāyati. Ito ca bahiddhāti ito sabbaññubuddhasāsanato bahiddhā bāhirakasamaye. Ca-saddo aṭṭhānapayutto, sabbattha ‘‘assaddho’’tiādīsu yojetabbo. Dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesatīti duppaṭipannaṃ dakkhiṇārahasaññī gavesati. Tatthāti bahiddhā bāhirakasamaye. Pubbakāraṃ karotīti paṭhamataraṃ dānamānanādikaṃ kusalakiriyaṃ karoti, bāhirakasamaye paṭhamataraṃ kusalakiriyaṃ katvā pacchā sāsane karotīti vuttaṃ hotīti . Tatthāti vā tesaṃ bāhirakānaṃ titthiyānantipi vadanti. Ettha ca dakkhiṇeyyapariyesanapubbakāre ekaṃ katvā pañca dhammā veditabbā.
“彼”即优婆塞。“戒具足”即以具足前述远离五种怨相之戒。“命具足”即以具足断除五种邪贸易等相之命。如此以戒具足与命具足显示优婆塞的成就后,再以信等显示而说“彼所有”等。应连接为:彼所有五种法,也是彼的成就。“以法”即以功德。以令四众欢喜之义,优婆塞即是宝,所以是优婆塞宝。以功德的光辉、称誉、名声、妙香等,优婆塞即是莲华,所以是优婆塞莲华。同样,也是优婆塞分陀利。其余应依败坏中所说的相反意义而了知。显示巴利原文
Assāti upāsakassa. Sīlasampadāti yathāvuttena pañcaveramaṇilakkhaṇena sīlena sampadā. Ājīvasampadāti pañcamicchāvaṇijjādippahānalakkhaṇena ājīvena sampadā. Evaṃ sīlasampadāājīvasampadāvasena upāsakassa sampattiṃ dassetvā saddhādivasenapi dassento ‘‘ye cassā’’tiādimāha. Ye ca pañca dhammā, tepi assa sampattīti yojanā. Dhammehīti guṇehi. Catunnaṃ parisānaṃ ratijananaṭṭhena upāsakova ratanaṃ upāsakaratanaṃ. Guṇasobhākittisaddasugandhatādīhi upāsakova padumaṃ upāsakapadumaṃ. Tathā upāsakapuṇḍarīkaṃ. Sesaṃ vipattiyaṃ vuttavipariyāyena veditabbaṃ.
“尼犍子”即尼犍子沙门尼。“以首”即就第一义而言。“蔗首”即甘蔗之顶、甘蔗之端。同样,“竹首”也是如此。“以端”即就边际之端而言,为边际义。“酸分”即酸的部分。同样,“苦分”也是如此。“以精舍首”即就精舍的房间部分而言,意思是“住于此室者得此名之果报”等,依各各居住处的部分而说。“以周廊首”同理。此处,“首”字的业格语尾变为e,或为格的倒置,且“已作”一词为残余,故说“以首为始”。“tā”词表状态义,故以“今日性”表示。今日性,即于听闻法时,正在存续而可达到的状态。其时,以彼依止而存续为相,从当日所系的黎明升起开始,直至下一次黎明升起,在此之间,“今日”一词转起,故应知其义为:以彼时存续的状态,称为今日性,以此为始。或者,“今日”即是“今日”之义,“tā”词依自义而转,如同“天”一词,这是诸师之见。如此显示与第一字母所见文句相符的意义后,今为显示与第三字母所见文句相符的意义,而说“或读为‘从今日起’”等。因仅是增音,故d字母为连声字。“今日”实为不变词。故说“其义为从今日始”。显示巴利原文
Nigaṇṭhīnanti nigaṇṭhasamaṇīnaṃ. Ādimhīti paṭhamatthe. Ucchagganti ucchuaggaṃ ucchukoṭi. Tathā veḷagganti etthāpi. Koṭiyanti pariyantakoṭiyaṃ, pariyantattheti attho. Ambilagganti ambilakoṭṭhāsaṃ. Tathā tittakagganti etthāpi. Vihāraggenāti ovarakakoṭṭhāsena ‘‘imasmiṃ gabbhe vasantānaṃ idaṃ nāma phalaṃ pāpuṇātī’’tiādinā taṃtaṃvasanaṭṭhānakoṭṭhāsenāti attho . Pariveṇaggenāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Aggeti ettha upayogavacanassa ekārādeso, vacanavipallāso vā, katvā-saddo ca sesoti vuttaṃ ‘‘ādiṃ katvā’’ti. Bhāvatthe tā-saddoti dasseti ‘‘ajjabhāva’’nti iminā, ajjabhāvo ca nāma tasmiṃ dhammassavanasamaye dharamānakatāpāpuṇakabhāvo. Tadā hi taṃ nissayavasena dharamānataṃ nimittaṃ katvā taṃdivasanissitaaruṇuggamanato paṭṭhāya yāva puna aruṇuggamanā etthantare ajjasaddo pavattati, tasmā tasmiṃ samaye dharamānakatāsaṅkhātaṃ ajjabhāvaṃ ādiṃ katvāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Ajjatanti vā ajjaicceva attho tā-saddassa sakatthavuttito yathā ‘‘devatā’’ti, ayaṃ ācariyānaṃ mati. Evaṃ paṭhamakkharena dissamānapāṭhānurūpaṃ atthaṃ dassetvā idāni tatiyakkharena dissamānapāṭhānurūpaṃ atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ajjadaggeti vā pāṭho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āgamamattattā dakāro padasandhikaro. Ajjāti hi nepātikamidaṃ padaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ajja agganti attho’’ti.
“生命(pāṇo)”一词在胜义上唯指命根;“乃至生命(pāṇupeta)”则是为了说明其以作用之义构成复合词,故说“只要我的生命持续,乃至皈依(upeta)”。“Upeti(皈依)即upagacchati(走近)”,因此为upeto(已皈依),以生命作为作用而成为皈依者,即“pāṇupeta(乃至生命皈依)”,这正是诸阿阇梨所认可的含义。由此也阐明了“‘pāṇupeta’一词显示该皈依直至生命边际”的意义。因为“pāṇupeta”一词表明了“只要我生命存续,我便皈依”,而且这一皈依并非仅是口头之言,也非仅凭刹那心念,而是以舍弃生命之力,终生行持皈依,由此便标示了“乃至生命边际(āpāṇakoṭikata)”。“以三……乃至……已至”这一句,正是“已皈依”的释义。“不依其他导师”这一句,则是通过内含的判定与对余处的排除,来显示所应断除的意义。有人说“kappiyakāraka(净人)”一词也可以作为“upāsaka(优婆塞)”一词的含义,因此说“优婆塞即净人”,应知这是意指自身奉献而作皈依之说。如此,由“pāṇupeta”一词……显示巴利原文
‘‘Pāṇo’’ti idaṃ paramatthato jīvitindriye eva, ‘‘pāṇupeta’’nti ca karaṇattheneva samāsoti ñāpetuṃ ‘‘yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattati, tāvaupeta’’nti āha. Upeti upagacchatīti hi upeto, pāṇehi karaṇabhūtehi upeto pāṇupetoti attho ācariyehi abhimato. Iminā ca ‘‘pāṇupetanti idaṃ padaṃ tassa saraṇagamanassa āpāṇakoṭikatādassana’’nti imamatthaṃ vibhāveti. ‘‘Pāṇupeta’’nti hi iminā yāva me pāṇā dharanti, tāva saraṇaṃ upeto, upento ca na vācāmattena, na ca ekavāraṃ cittuppādamattena, atha kho pāṇānaṃ pariccajanavasena yāvajīvaṃ upetoti āpāṇakoṭikatā dassitā. ‘‘Tīhi…pe… gata’’nti idaṃ ‘‘saraṇaṃ gata’’nti etassa atthavacanaṃ. ‘‘Anaññasatthuka’’nti idaṃ pana antogadhāvadhāraṇena, aññatthāpohanena ca nivattetabbatthadassanaṃ. Ekacco kappiyakārakasaddassa attho upāsakasaddassa vacanīyopi bhavatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘upāsakaṃ kappiyakāraka’’nti, attasanniyyātanasaraṇagamanaṃ vā sandhāya evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ ‘‘pāṇupeta’’nti iminā nītatthato dassitaṃ tassa saraṇagamanassa āpāṇakoṭikataṃ dassetvā evaṃ vadanto panesa rājā ‘‘jīvitena saha vatthuttayaṃ paṭipūjento saraṇagamanaṃ rakkhāmī’’ti adhippāyaṃ vibhāvetīti neyyatthato vibhāvitaṃ tassa rañño adhippāyaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘ahañhī’’tiādimāha. Tattha hi-saddo samatthane, kāraṇatthe vā, tena imāya yuttiyā, iminā vā kāraṇena upāsakaṃ maṃ bhagavā dhāretūti ayamattho pakāsito.
超越善的界限,压制而行,是为过犯(accayo);即属于身等恶行的过失,称为嗔恚(dosa),因此说“过失(aparādho)”。或者,由“超越、征服(acceti)而生起”故为过犯,也就是以身等违犯而生起的不善法,称为嗔恚,这即是“由此犯罪”之义,故称过失。这过失确实征服犯罪之人而生起。因此说“超越、征服而生起”。“法”指十王法,其详释应依《大鹅本生》等来阐明。“行”即践行、造作。“如法地”即符合法、无有偏离,也就是无偏离的善法,因此说“不以杀父等非法”。“愿纳受”的字面义是“愿容许、愿接受”,为显示其用意,故说“愿忍许”。再者,此处不作,便是自制,因此以“若再有此类”等来说明。“过失之”等属于同义互训。显示巴利原文
Accayanaṃ sādhumariyādaṃ atikkamma madditvā pavattanaṃ accayo, kāyikādiajjhācārasaṅkhāto dosoti āha ‘‘aparādho’’ti, acceti abhibhavitvā pavattati etenāti vā accayo, kāyikādivītikkamassa pavattanako akusaladhammasaṅkhāto doso eva, so ca aparajjhati etenāti aparādhoti vuccati. So hi aparajjhantaṃ purisaṃ abhibhavitvā pavattati. Tenāha ‘‘atikkamma abhibhavitvā pavatto’’ti. Dhammanti dasarājadhammaṃ. Vitthāro panetassa mahāhaṃsajātakādīhi vibhāvetabbo. Caratīti ācarati karoti. Dhammenevāti dhammato anapeteneva, anapetakusaladhammenevāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘na pitughātanādinā adhammenā’’ti. ‘‘Paṭiggaṇhātū’’ti etassa adhivāsanaṃ sampaṭicchatūti saddato attho, adhippāyato pana atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘khamatū’’ti vuttaṃ. Puna akaraṇamettha saṃvaroti dasseti ‘‘puna evarūpassā’’tiādinā. ‘‘Aparādhassā’’tiādi aññamaññaṃ vevacanaṃ.
251 “如法而住,亦复如是”,以此也说明了yatha(如)一词的随顺义,意思是随顺善所行的善法。用“你作”显示pati(对)一词并非无用。亦说为“你补救”。如法的补救,即是对已造过失的忍许,因此说“说为忍许”。“我纳受”的字面义为“我容许、我接受”,以“我忍许”来表示此义。这是增长,此中的ha字因词语优美而插入,hi字则仅为助词。“此”即如法的补救与未来入于自制。因此说“谁有过失……乃至……入于”。包含天界世间,如来是应皈依、应趣向者,故为应供圣者,所以说“佛陀世尊”。以教法调伏众生,故为调伏,也就是教法。以此增长天界与解脱的成就,故为增长。那么,什么是增长?就是“此”所揭示的增长;为消除“什么”的疑问,而说“谁有过失”等以明关联,意思是这种入于自制就是“此”所揭示的增长。“如法补救”这句话,为了表明它是未来入于自制的先导,故说“如法补救后,未来入于自制”。这是诸阿阇梨的惯例,以某种方式表达特定意义,而此词也可能有相反指向,因为在应相反之处也可见“如法补救”。然而另有人说:“‘如法补救’这句仅仅显示先导作用,并非应相反之处。而‘未来入于自制’这句……”显示巴利原文
251.‘‘Yathādhammo ṭhito, tathevā’’ti imināpi yathā-saddassa anurūpatthamāha, sādhusamāciṇṇakusaladhammānurūpanti attho. Paṭisaddassa anatthakataṃ dasseti ‘‘karosī’’ti iminā. Paṭikammaṃ karosītipi vadanti. Yathādhammaṃ paṭikaraṇaṃ nāma katāparādhassa khamāpanamevāti āha ‘‘khamāpesīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. ‘‘Paṭiggaṇhāmā’’ti etassa adhivāsanaṃ sampaṭicchāmāti atthaṃ dasseti ‘‘khamāmā’’ti iminā. Vuddhi hesāti ettha ha-kāro padasiliṭṭhatāya āgamo, hi-saddo vā nipātamattaṃ. Esāti yathādhammaṃ paṭikiriyā, āyatiṃ saṃvarāpajjanā ca. Tenāha ‘‘yo accayaṃ…pe… āpajjatī’’ti. Sadevakena lokena ‘‘saraṇa’’nti araṇīyato upagantabbato tathāgato ariyo nāmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘buddhassa bhagavato’’ti. Vineti satte etenāti vinayo, sāsanaṃ. Vaddhati saggamokkhasampatti etāyāti vuddhi. Katamā pana sā, yā ‘‘esā’’ti niddiṭṭhā vuddhīti codanamapanetuṃ ‘‘yo accaya’’ntiādi vuttanti sambandhaṃ dasseti ‘‘katamā’’tiādinā, yā ayaṃ saṃvarāpajjanā, sā ‘‘esā’’ti niddiṭṭhā vuddhi nāmāti attho. ‘‘Yathādhammaṃ paṭikarotī’’ti idaṃ āyatiṃ saṃvarāpajjanāya pubbakiriyādassananti viññāpanatthaṃ ‘‘yathādhammaṃ paṭikaritvā āyatiṃ saṃvarāpajjanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Esā hi ācariyānaṃ pakati, yadidaṃ yena kenaci pakārena adhippāyantaraviññāpanaṃ, etapadena pana tassāpi paṭiniddeso sambhavati ‘‘yathādhammaṃ paṭikarotī’’ tipi paṭiniddisitabbassa dassanato. Keci pana ‘‘yathādhammaṃ paṭikarotī’ti idaṃ pubbakiriyāmattasseva dassanaṃ, na paṭiniddisitabbassa. ‘Āyatiñca saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’ti idaṃ pana paṭiniddisitabbassevāti viññāpanatthaṃ evaṃ vutta’’nti vadanti, tadayuttameva khamāpanassāpi vuddhihetubhāvena ariyūpavāde vuttattā. Itarathā hi khamāpanābhāvepi āyatiṃ saṃvarāpajjanāya eva ariyūpavādāpagamanaṃ vuttaṃ siyā, na ca pana vuttaṃ, tasmā vuttanayeneva attho veditabboti.
然而,为何以“以何”等显示法说?在巴利圣典中,难道不是以“谁有过失”等作了人说吗?为了澄清此诘难,故开始宣说“然则此说”。“依人而立”即作依人之法说。依人之说也有依人之法说与依人之人说两种。此处之意趣为:虽已由“此是增长”等生起依法之说,然又依于人,由“谁有过失”等生起依人之说,这是由于说法方式的变化及所化众生的意乐所致。依此二种理由,因依法、依人等差别,故有四种说。显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana ‘‘yāya’’ntiādinā dhammaniddeso dassito, nanu pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘yo accaya’’ntiādinā puggalaniddeso katoti codanaṃ sodhetuṃ ‘‘desanaṃ panā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ karontoti puggalādhiṭṭhānadhammadesanaṃ karonto. Puggalādhiṭṭhānāpi hi puggalādhiṭṭhānadhammadesanā, puggalādhiṭṭhānapuggaladesanāti duvidhā hoti. Ayametthādhippāyo – kiñcāpi ‘‘vuddhi hesā’’tiādinā dhammādhiṭṭhānadesanā āraddhā, tathāpi puna puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ karontena ‘‘yo accaya’’ntiādinā puggalādhiṭṭhānadesanā āraddhā desanāvilāsavasena, veneyyajjhāsayavasena cāti. Tadubhayavaseneva hi dhammādhiṭṭhānādibhedena catubbidhā desanā.
252 “Vacasāyatte”意为“受制于言语”。他们说“因言语的束缚”,这似乎与“so hi”等文句相违。然而,若将“vacasāyatthe”理解为“言语的终了”,此义则较为合理,因为表示终了之义的“sāsa”一词,可依“dāya”等词例,衍生出“sāya”一词。如此,能成立之说亦得妥当。因在作了言语的终了后,再说“为了前往”,故此义于该语境中得以成立。关于“handa”一词,他们认可有催促之义及言语之极义。于“handa dāni bhikkhave āmantayāmi”等句中,为催促义;于“handa dāni apāyāmi”等句中,则为言语之极义。而所谓言语之极,即是言语的释放,此即言语的终了,应作如是观。因难行之事而有众多事务,故说“balavakiccā”(重大事务)。“必定应作之事为kicca,其余为karaṇīya;或先应作之事为kicca,后应作之事为karaṇīya;或小事为kicca,大事为karaṇīya”,此于《优陀那注》等中亦有说。因“yaṃ-taṃ”等词恒有关联,且因了知前往之时,于其他行为不……显示巴利原文
252.Vacasāyatteti vacasā āyatte. Vācāpaṭibandhatteti vadanti, taṃ ‘‘so hī’’tiādinā viruddhaṃ viya dissati. Vacasāyattheti pana vācāpariyosānattheti attho yutto osānakaraṇatthassa sāsaddassa vasena sāyasaddanipphattito yathā ‘‘dāyo’’ti. Evañhi samatthanavacanampi upapannaṃ hoti. Gamanāya kataṃ vācāpariyosānaṃ katvā vuttattā tasmiṃyeva atthe vattatīti. Handasaddañhi codanatthe, vacasaggatthe ca icchanti. ‘‘Handa dāni bhikkhave āmantayāmī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.218; saṃ. ni. 1.186) hi codanatthe, ‘‘handa dāni apāyāmī’’tiādīsu (jā. 2.22.843) vacasaggatthe, vacasaggo ca nāma vācāvissajjanaṃ, tañca vācāpariyosānamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dukkarakiccavasena bahukiccatāti āha ‘‘balavakiccā’’ti. ‘‘Avassaṃ kattabbaṃ kiccaṃ, itaraṃ karaṇīyaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ vā kattabbaṃ kiccaṃ, pacchā kattabbaṃ karaṇīyaṃ. Khuddakaṃ vā kiccaṃ, mahantaṃ karaṇīya’’ntipi udānaṭṭhakathādīsu (udā. aṭṭha. 15) vuttaṃ. Yaṃ-taṃ-saddānaṃ niccasambandhattā, gamanakālajānanato, aññakiriyāya ca anupayuttattā ‘‘tassa kālaṃ tvameva jānāsī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘tayā ñātaṃ gamanakālaṃ tvameva ñatvā gacchāhī’’ti. Atha vā yathā kattabbakiccaniyojane ‘‘imaṃ jāna, imaṃ dehi, imaṃ āharā’’ti (pāci. 88, 93) vuttaṃ, tathā idhāpi tayā ñātaṃ kālaṃ tvameva jānāsi, gamanavasena karohīti gamane niyojetīti dassetuṃ ‘‘tvameva jānāsī’’ti pāṭhaseso vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā’’tiādi yathāsamāciṇṇaṃ pakaraṇādhigatamattaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha padakkhiṇanti pakārato kataṃ dakkhiṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tikkhattu’’nti. Dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalanti dvīsu hatthesu jātānaṃ dasannaṃ nakhānaṃ samodhānena ekībhāvena samujjalantaṃ, tena dvinnaṃ karatalānaṃ samaṭṭhapanaṃ dasseti. Añjalinti hatthapuṭaṃ. Añjati byattiṃ pakāseti etāyāti añjali. Añju-saddañhi byattiyaṃ, alipaccayañca icchanti saddavidū. Abhimukhovāti sammukho eva, na bhagavato piṭṭhiṃ dassetvāti attho. Pañcappatiṭṭhitavandanānayo vutto eva.
253 “Khato”指:于即此现有之身中,能感果者,因掘坏自己先前所造善根之故,为所掘坏;“upahato”指:因破坏他们善根之故,为所破坏。此二词亦显示其业之过失,因为二词为同义语。为显示因名为善根之依止的破坏,而有掘坏、破坏之状态,故说“bhinnapatiṭṭho jāto”(成为依止破坏者)。依止与根,义为一。依止者,即依此而住立于正性决定,亦即其善法亲依之成就。彼因行之过失而遭破坏、毁失,故为依止破坏者。展开其义而说“tathā”等。其连结为:如其名为善根之自依止已生起,同样地,由此王自己,自己已被掘、被掘坏。此中,“khato”一词,依业而成立,然于圣典中,应视为依作者而成立。因二词为同义,故此处未重复宣说“upahato”。显示巴利原文
253. Imasmiṃyeva attabhāve vipaccanakānaṃ attano pubbe katakusalamūlānaṃ khaṇanena khato, tesameva upahananena upahato, padadvayenapi tassa kammāparādhameva dasseti pariyāyavacanattā padadvayassa. Kusalamūlasaṅkhātapatiṭṭhābhedanena khatūpahatabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bhinnapatiṭṭho jāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Patiṭṭhā, mūlanti ca atthato ekaṃ. Patiṭṭhahati sammattaniyāmokkamanaṃ etāyāti hi patiṭṭhā, tassa kusalūpanissayasampadā, sā kiriyāparādhena bhinnā vināsitā etenāti bhinnapatiṭṭho. Tadeva vitthārento ‘‘tathā’’tiādimāha. Yathā kusalamūlasaṅkhātā attano patiṭṭhānajātā, tathā anena raññā attanāva attā khato khanitoti yojanā. Khatoti hi idaṃ idha kammavasena siddhaṃ, pāḷiyaṃ pana kattuvasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Padadvayassa pariyāyattā ‘‘upahato’’ti idha na vuttaṃ.
根据“贪是尘,并非指微尘”等语,因此说贪嗔痴在此即名为尘,故说“离贪尘等”。以“离故”一词显示“离”字为离去之义。“于法中的眼”指:于四圣谛法中生起、因能照见这些法而称为眼。或者,“于法中”指下分三道法,“眼”指称为预流道的那一眼,这是就整体中的一分而作依主释复合词,并非持业释复合词。因此,在教典及梵典中,一切处皆不被允许。“法所成”指由止观法所生,由此说“由法所生之眼为法眼”之义。又,“法所成”即戒等种种法蕴,因“所成”一词表自身义,由此说“法即是眼,即法眼”之义。“于余处”指于其他经句中,以此显示随文有三种意义。然而,此处此词乃预流道的异名,在未证得彼道时,其余实无可说,此为意旨所在。显示巴利原文
‘‘Rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccatī’’tiādi (mahāni. 209; cūḷani. 74) vacanato rāgadosamohāva idha rajo nāmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘rāgarajādivirahita’’nti. Vītasaddassa vigatapariyāyataṃ dasseti ‘‘vigatattā’’ti iminā. Dhammesu cakkhunti catusaccadhammesu pavattaṃ tesaṃ dassanaṭṭhena cakkhuṃ. Dhammesūti vā heṭṭhimesu tīsu maggadhammesu. Cakkhunti sotāpattimaggasaṅkhātaṃ ekaṃ cakkhuṃ, samudāyekadesavasena ādhāratthasamāsoyaṃ, na tu niddhāraṇatthasamāso. So hi sāsanaganthesu, sakkataganthesu ca sabbattha paṭisiddhoti. Dhammamayanti samathavipassanādhammena nibbattaṃ, iminā ‘‘dhammena nibbattaṃ cakkhu dhammacakkhū’’ti atthamāha. Apica dhammamayanti sīlāditividhadhammakkhandhoyeva maya-saddassa sakatthe pavattanato, anena ‘‘dhammoyeva cakkhu dhammacakkhū’’ti atthamāha. Aññesu ṭhānesūti aññesu suttapadesesu, etena yathāpāṭhaṃ tividhatthataṃ dasseti. Idha pana sotāpattimaggassevetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tasmimpi anadhigate aññesaṃ vattabbatāyeva abhāvatoti adhippāyo.
现在为显示“诸比丘,这位国王已被毁坏”等文句易于理解的意旨,而说“这意思是说”等。其中,“如果他不曾存在”意为:如果他不曾那样存在,即若是如此。这在过去,是时已过去之语,非指未来,应当这样看待。同样的道理也适用于“他可能已证得预流道”这一句。难道道之证得的说法,因为是当来而有,便是未来时吗?诚然,如果没有限定,然而在此因“就在此座上坐着”已有限定,应当知道这只是过去时。因为这是世尊在国王离座、离去不久时所说的。“因与恶友交往”指:因与提婆达多以及名为提婆达多眷属的恶友相交往。“他”指预流道。“即使如此”等,是显示文句中未载明的言外之意。因此,“所以”与“由于已皈依,他将解脱”相连。“也因我教法之伟大”的文句合理,然而在某处不见“也”字,那里应视为被省略。不只因为皈依而得解脱,而且也由于他所净信的对象、作净信的方式,以及三种教法的最胜性,所以有……显示巴利原文
Idāni ‘‘khatāyaṃ bhikkhave rājā’’tiādipāṭhassa suviññeyyamadhippāyaṃ dassento ‘‘idaṃ vuttaṃ hotī’’tiādimāha. Tattha nābhavissāti sace na abhavissatha, evaṃ satīti attho. Atīte hi idaṃ kālātipattivacanaṃ, na anāgateti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Esa nayo sotāpattimaggaṃ patto abhavissāti etthāpi. Nanu ca maggapāpuṇanavacanaṃ bhavissamānattā anāgatakālikanti? Saccaṃ aniyamite, idha pana ‘‘idhevāsane nisinno’’ti niyamitattā atītakālikamevāti veditabbaṃ. Idañhi bhagavā rañño āsanā vuṭṭhāya acirapakkantasseva avocāti. Pāpamittasaṃsaggenāti devadattena, devadattaparisāsaṅkhātena ca pāpamittena saṃsaggato. Assāti sotāpattimaggassa. ‘‘Evaṃ santepī’’tiādinā pāṭhānāruḷhaṃ vacanāvasesaṃ dasseti. Tasmāti saraṇaṃ gatattā muccissatīti sambandho. ‘‘Mama ca sāsanamahantatāyā’’ti pāṭho yutto, katthaci pana ca-saddo na dissati, tattha so luttaniddiṭṭhoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na kevalaṃ saraṇaṃ gatattāyeva muccissati, atha kho yattha esa pasanno, pasannākārañca karoti, tassa ca tividhassapi sāsanassa uttamatāyāti hi saha samuccayena attho adhippetoti.
“犹如名为”等,是以从难行业报的果报中容易解脱来显示譬喻。“某人”指某个人。“对某人”指对某个人,“杀戮”在此句中,因动作关系而表示动作的对象,用了属格。“以花束量的杖”即称为花束量的财罚。“得解脱”指从杀戮的刑罚中解脱;或者,“以杖”是表示来源的具格,就如“我们被那位大沙门很好地解脱了”等(长部2.232;小品437)的用法,意思是:从花束量的财罚、从杀戮的惩罚中解脱。铜釜地狱,也就是铜釜地狱。在那里,由于业力,为那些感受该业报的众生生成了大铜釜,因此称为“铜釜”。从上面向下坠落,或从下面向上行进,二者皆经历六万年。并且有说:显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathā nāmā’’tiādi dukkarakammavipākato sukarena muccanena upamādassanaṃ. Kocīti koci puriso. Kassacīti kassaci purisassa, ‘‘vadha’’nti ettha bhāvayoge kammatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Pupphamuṭṭhimattena daṇḍenāti pupphamuṭṭhimattasaṅkhātena dhanadaṇḍena. Mucceyyāti vadhakammadaṇḍato mucceyya, daṇḍenāti vā nissakkatthe karaṇavacanaṃ ‘‘sumuttā mayaṃ tena mahāsamaṇenā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.232; cūḷava. 437) viya, pupphamuṭṭhimattena dhanadaṇḍato, vadhadaṇḍato ca mucceyyāti attho. Lohakumbhiyanti lohakumbhinarake. Tattha hi tadanubhavanakānaṃ sattānaṃ kammabalena lohamayā mahatī kumbhī nibbattā, tasmā taṃ ‘‘lohakumbhī’’ti vuccati. Uparimatalato adho patanto, heṭṭhimatalato uddhaṃ gacchanto, ubhayathā pana saṭṭhivassasahassāni honti. Vuttañca –
六万年,完全圆满;
在地狱中受苦者,何时才有尽头?”(《饿鬼事》802;《本生》1.4.54);
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Saṭṭhivassasahassāni, paripuṇṇāni sabbaso; Niraye paccamānānaṃ, kadā anto bhavissatī’’ti. (pe. va. 802; jā. 1.4.54);
“到达下层面后,又到达上层面后,便得解脱”——这样说是为了阐明此义:如同其他长者子等人,不断向下坠落、向上行进,在那里遭受百千年的苦,而这位国王并非如此。由于前述的因缘,这位国王仅一次下坠、一次上行,只受苦六万年便得解脱。为了避免“此义从何而来”的追问,他说道:“据说这也是世尊所说的。”此处的“据说”一词表示传闻之义,由此表明世尊所说之事经由师承相传而可闻,此义亦由师承相传而来。接着,为排除“或许在圣典中已结集”的责难,又以“但在圣典中未收录”来说明:由于这是杂类教说,所以未纳入圣典,因此未以文本形式结集,这是他的用意。因为杂类教说不入圣典,注释书中已有说明。显示巴利原文
‘‘Heṭṭhimatalaṃ patvā, uparimatalaṃ pāpuṇitvā muccissatī’’ti vadanto imamatthaṃ dīpeti – yathā aññe seṭṭhiputtādayo aparāparaṃ adho patantā, uddhaṃ gacchantā ca anekāni vassasatasahassāni tattha paccanti, na tathā ayaṃ, ayaṃ pana rājā yathāvuttakāraṇena ekavārameva adho patanto, uddhañca gacchanto saṭṭhivassasahassāniyeva paccitvā muccissatīti. Ayaṃ pana attho kuto laddhoti anuyogaṃ pariharanto ‘‘idampi kira bhagavatā vuttamevā’’ti āha. Kirasaddo cettha anussavanattho, tena bhagavatā vuttabhāvassa ācariyaparamparato suyyamānataṃ, imassa ca atthassa ācariyaparamparābhatabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Atha pāḷiyaṃ saṅgītaṃ siyāti codanamapaneti ‘‘pāḷiyaṃ pana na āruḷha’’nti iminā, pakiṇṇakadesanābhāvena pāḷiyamanāruḷhattā pāṭhabhāvena na saṅgītanti adhippāyo. Pakiṇṇakadesanā hi pāḷiyamanāruḷhāti aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ.
若有人生疑:“假如他在紧接着的来世身中堕于地狱受苦,那么听闻此教法,国王得到了什么利益?”为消除这种疑虑,便提出诘问并加以回避,而说了“然而这是”等语。“因为这位”等,则具体明确地显示了获得安眠等现世与来世的种种大利益。其中,“这位……得睡眠”显示了获得安眠,以及以安眠为代表的身心苦痛止息之状态;“对三宝……作了”显示了对三宝的大恭敬行;“凡夫……没有”显示了殊胜凡夫信之获得,这些是现世利益;而“在未来……将般涅槃”则显示了最胜的来世利益,然而无余的来世利益在未来的各生中乃为无量,应当了知。显示巴利原文
Yadi anantare attabhāve narake paccati, evaṃ sati imaṃ desanaṃ sutvā ko rañño ānisaṃso laddhoti kassaci āsaṅkā siyāti tadāsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ codanaṃ uddharitvā pariharituṃ ‘‘idaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ayañhī’’tiādinā niddālābhādikaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaṃ anekavidhaṃ mahānisaṃsaṃ sarūpato niyametvā dasseti. Ettha hi ‘‘ayaṃ…pe… niddaṃ labhatī’’ti iminā niddālābhaṃ dasseti, tadā kāyikacetasikadukkhāpagatabhāvañca niddālābhasīsena, ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ…pe… akāsī’’ti iminā tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ mahāsakkārakiriyaṃ, ‘‘pothujjanikāya…pe… nāhosī’’ti iminā sātisayaṃ pothujjanikasaddhāpaṭilābhaṃ dassetīti evamādi diṭṭhadhammiko, ‘‘anāgate…pe… parinibbāyissatī’’ti iminā pana ukkaṃsato samparāyiko dassito, anavasesato pana aparāparesu bhavesu aparimāṇoyeva samparāyiko veditabbo.
其中,“甘甜”指具有甘甜之味。“有营养”指具有甘甜味中之精华,富有营养。存于凡夫之中的,即称为凡夫的。特别地战胜了五魔,故为“胜者”,在此,无他人教导是其殊胜之处。各自独自觉悟,故为“独觉佛”,此即无师而自己觉悟正觉之义。正如注释书中所说:“独觉佛们自行觉悟,不令他人觉悟,唯通达义味,不通达法味。因为他们不能将出世间法安立为教说而教导,犹如哑巴所见的梦,亦如林中行者所尝的城中菜肴之味,他们的法现观即是如此。他们成就一切神通、等至与无碍解的种类。”(《经集》注释1.《犀角经》注释;《譬喻》注释1.90, 91)显示巴利原文
Tattha madhurāyāti madhurarasabhūtāya. Ojavantiyāti madhurarasassāpi sārabhūtāya ojāya ojavatiyā. Puthujjane bhavā pothujjanikā. Pañca māre visesato jitavāti vijitāvī, parūpadesavirahatā cettha visesabhāvo. Paccekaṃ abhisambuddhoti paccekabuddho, anācariyako hutvā sāmaññeva sambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti attho. Tathā hi ‘‘paccekabuddhā sayameva bujjhanti, na pare bodhenti, attharasameva paṭivijjhanti, na dhammarasaṃ. Na hi te lokuttaradhammaṃ paññattiṃ āropetvā desetuṃ sakkonti, mūgena diṭṭhasupino viya, vanacarakena nagare sāyitabyañjanaraso viya ca nesaṃ dhammābhisamayo hoti, sabbaṃ iddhisamāpattipaṭisambhidāpabhedaṃ pāpuṇantī’’ti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.khaggavisāṇasuttavaṇṇanā; apa. aṭṭha. 1.90, 91) aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ.
于此有人问:若国王无有业障,在那座位上便应生起法眼,那么为何未来成为独觉佛后方般涅槃?若未来成为独觉佛后方般涅槃,那么为何在那座位上便生起法眼?这些声闻菩提与独觉菩提的资粮,难道不是各各不同的资粮吗?因为两种菩提互不共通的缘故。此二者确实互不共通,依次是五支与两支的成就、胜愿的殊胜、波罗蜜积累的时长以及觉悟的方式等所致的。这并无矛盾,因为自此以后他仍要积累独觉菩提的资粮。即使是有能力以声闻菩提证悟的众生,若缺少那样的因缘和合,于后时也会以独觉菩提证悟,因为有那样的胜愿存在。另一些长老则说:“这位国王正是对独觉菩提立下了胜愿。虽然立下了胜愿,由于未臻决定,其智慧尚未成熟,在导师面前时也能证得声闻菩提,所以世尊说‘如果这位国王,比丘们’等。唯有大菩萨才有无间业的解脱,其他菩萨则无。恰如决定独觉菩提的提婆达多,虽也长期对世间怙主怀有嗔恨而造作了更重的无间业,却未因此生起证悟。这位国王由于业障,现在未得见法现观,但由于独觉菩提的决定,于未来将成为名为胜者的独觉佛而般涅槃。”应知如此看待,在此应审察决断后采纳更合理者。显示巴利原文
Etthāha – yadi rañño kammantarāyābhāve tasmiṃyeva āsane dhammacakkhu uppajjissatha, atha kathaṃ anāgate paccekabuddho hutvā parinibbāyissati. Yadi ca anāgate paccekabuddho hutvā parinibbāyissati, atha kathaṃ tasmiṃyeva āsane dhammacakkhu uppajjissatha, nanu ime sāvakabodhipaccekabodhiupanissayā bhinnanissayā dvinnaṃ bodhīnaṃ asādhāraṇabhāvato. Asādhāraṇā hi etā dve yathākkamaṃ pañcaṅgadvayaṅgasampattiyā, abhinīhārasamiddhivasena, pāramīsambharaṇakālavasena, abhisambujjhanavasena cāti? Nāyaṃ virodho ito paratoyevassa paccekabodhisambhārānaṃ sambharaṇīyattā. Sāvakabodhiyā bujjhanakasattāpi hi asati tassā samavāye kālantare paccekabodhiyā bujjhissanti tathābhinīhārassa sambhavatoti. Apare pana bhaṇanti – ‘‘paccekabodhiyāyevāyaṃ rājā katābhinīhāro. Katābhinīhārāpi hi tattha niyatimappattā tassa ñāṇassa paripākaṃ anupagatattā satthu sammukhībhāve sāvakabodhiṃ pāpuṇissantīti bhagavā ‘sacāyaṃ bhikkhave rājā’tiādimavoca, mahābodhisattānameva ca ānantariyaparimutti hoti, na itaresaṃ bodhisattānaṃ. Tathā hi paccekabodhiyaṃ niyato samāno devadatto cirakālasambhūtena lokanāthe āghātena garutarāni ānantariyakammāni pasavi, tasmā kammantarāyena ayaṃ idāni asamavetadassanābhisamayo rājā paccekabodhiniyāmena anāgate vijitāvī nāma paccekabuddho hutvā parinibbāyissatī’’ti daṭṭhabbaṃ, yuttataramettha vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ.
为以结语方式显示对所述经文的注释,他说了“说了此”等语。其义已如前释。还应了知,这是以“说了此”等作结语,用以含摄圣典中未收录的意义。显示巴利原文
Yathāvuttaṃ pāḷimeva saṃvaṇṇanāya nigamavasena dassento ‘‘idamavocā’’tiādimāha. Tassattho hi heṭṭhā vuttoti. Apica pāḷiyamanāruḷhampi atthaṃ saṅgahetuṃ ‘‘idamavocā’’tiādinā nigamanaṃ karotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
如此,在《吉祥悦美》长部注释——阐明极为微细、甚深、难通达之义,能生极清净、广大智慧与辩才;由具足正直、柔和、调顺、信、念、定、慧、忍、精进等法,通晓三藏及注释,于自他宗无滞无碍、智行无畏,深入种种自他宗稠林的大阿阇梨、大语法家、名为佛音长老的大法王所敬重者所造之《善悦》(即阐明隐义者)——中,此是《沙门果经》的隐义阐明。显示巴利原文
Iti sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya paramasukhumagambhīraduranubodhatthaparidīpanāya suvimalavipulapaññāveyyattiyajananāya ajjavamaddavasoraccasaddhāsatidhitibuddhikhantivīriyādidhammasamaṅginā sāṭṭhakathe piṭakattaye asaṅgāsaṃhiravisāradañāṇacārinā anekappabhedasakasamayasamayantaragahanajjhogāhinā mahāgaṇinā mahāveyyākaraṇena ñāṇābhivaṃsadhammasenāpatināmatherena mahādhammarājādhirājagarunā katāya sādhuvilāsiniyā nāma līnatthappakāsaniyā sāmaññaphalasuttavaṇṇanāya līnatthappakāsanā.